^^tkinson,  Mentzer  Ej  GrovSP 

Publisher5  and  School  Furnishers 

E^i^tern  Office  350^352  n^atosh  ^IvenUe  Charier  F.  Atkinson 

go^Boyistonst  Chlcago  Ed^S?ra?JjJ? 


A  BHIEF  OM  . 

Haleye  First  Latin  Book 

The  "biography  of  a  book"  is  the 
biography  of  an  IDEA,   This  is  doubly 
true  of  any  book  that  pretends  to  be 
a  contribution  to  a  subject  or  to  be 
in  any  sense  creative.   The  success- 
ful school  books  of  the  past  have  been, 
almost  without  exception,  books  that 
embodied  an  IDEA,  and  that  had  a  long 
existence  previous  to  being  presented 
to  the  public. 

The  opening  of  the  biography  of 
Dr.  Hale's  "A  First  Latin  Book"  dates 
back  to  thB  time  when  he  was  Professor 
of  Latin  in  Harvard  University.   The 
second  chapter  of  the  biography  was 
written  when  he  was  Head  of  the  De- 
partment of  Latin  at  Cornell  Univer- 
sity; the  third  chapter,  while  Head  of 
the  Latin  Department  of  the  University 
of  Chicago;  the  fourth  and  last  chapter, 
while  he  was  teaching  a  class  of  first 
year  boys  and  girls  at  the  University 
High  School  and  taking  his  own  son 
through  his  preparatory  Latin  course. 


G  I      If  Your  Order 

is  direct  to  all 

to      "  dis- 


'/JAAAAAM^ 


GIFT  or 


d  \/ 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


^    http://www.archive.org/details/firstlatinbookOOhalerich 


FIRST  LATIN  BOOK 


BY 


WILLIAM  GARDNER  HALE 

PROFESSOR  AND  HEAD  OF  THE  DEPARTMENT  OF  LATIN  IN  THE 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO  AND  PROFESSOR  OF 

THE  TEACHING  OF  LATIN  IN  THE 

SCHOOL  OF  EDUCATION 


'^,"  ^"\  i^,   I  ''   *      *  ''•>"    '  '*   •   '' 


ATKINSON,  MENTZER  &  GROVER 

CHICAGO  Publishers  BOSTON 


Prodi,  parve  liber.     Precor  ut  te  discipulusque 

Atque  magister  ament^  quantum  ego  amavi  et  amo. 


GIFT 


c 


•      •••-••     • 

•••••••     • 

•  •     •  •/  •  •     • 


"•  •       • 


Copyright,  1907 

BY  WM.  GARDNER  HALE 

Entered  at  Stationers^  Hall^  London 


PEEFACE 


This  book  is  the  product  of  class-room  experience  and  prac- 
tice, at  my  own  hands  and  those  of  many  other  teachers  who 
have  used  it  in  mimeographed  form,  and,  in  the  present  year,  in 
advance  sheets.    This  is  the  fifth  revision  of  the  original  draft. 

The  method  employed  in  the  past  in  teaching  beginners  in 
Latin  has  been  either  to  make  them  attack  a  piece  of  continuous 
narrative,  written  for  mature  Koman  readers,  and  necessarily 
without  grammatical  arrangement,  or  to  furnish  them  with  exer- 
cises made  up  in  the  main  of  short  bits,  without  connection. 
But  let  us  suppose,  now,  that  we  could  command  the  services  of 
some  ancient  Roman  teacher.  What  should  we  tell  him  that  we 
wanted  for  a  First  Latin  Book,  or, —  and  this  is  the  same  thing, — 
what  would  he,  if  a  good  and  practical  teacher,  think  of  on  his 
own  account  ?  A  beginning  with  easy  words,  standing  for  fami- 
liar ideas  connected  with  home  life.  The  opening  sentences 
should  be  simple  and  interesting, —  about  the  dinner,  good  or 
bad,  the  servants,  the  boy  and  girl  friends,  and  the  like.  A  fruit- 
ful topic,  next,  would  be  the  school,  with  its  work  and  play. 
In  time  the  sentence's  would  group  themselves  into  paragraphs, 
and  paragraphs  into  stories,  making  up  the  Reading  Matter  of 
a  lesson,  and  setting  the  Roman  before  the  student  as  a  living 
being  belonging  to  a  living  people. 

Then  the  story  would  become  a  "  serial "  from  lesson  to  lesson, 
still  remaining  natural  and  interesting,  and  thus  easy  to  read 
and  to  remember.  For  its  subject,  a  hint  might  be  taken  from 
Horace's  mimic  battle  (Letters,  I,  XVIII,  58-64),  in  which  boys 
delighted  to  fight  Actium  over  again,  "till  victory  crowned  the 
one  side  or  the  other."  If  the  teacher  should  decide  to  have  the 
boys  in  his  classes  read  and  write  accounts  of  a  mimic  war,  he 
would  naturally  use  many  of  the  words  and  phrases  in  a  great 
general's  story  of  his  conquest  of  Gaul.  He  could  depend  upon 
the  war-interest  to  help  him  in  the  teaching  of  a  syntax  and 
vocabulary  fitted  to  the  later  needs  of  his  students;  and,  every- 


iv  •  Preface 

where,  the  presence  of  a  context^  a  situatioUy  would  make  both 
the  force  of  the  construction  and  the  meaning  of  the  words  easier. 

This  book  is  an  attempt  to  supply  just  such  a  lack. 

Some  may  object  to  modern  Latin.  But  all  beginner's  books 
(except  those  which  start  with  Caesar,  who  certainly  did  not 
have  beginners  in  mind)  are  made  up  of  modern  Latin.  Even 
the  occasional  Caesar  sentences  are  rewritten.  Which  is  better 
from  a  modern,  a  continuous  story,  or  incoherent  bits? 

I  have  tried  to  lead  my  readers  by  a  carefully  graded  road  to 
the  lower  levels  of  Caesar.  I  have  sought  to  interest  theni  by 
plain  ideas  plainly  stated  in  easy  Latin,  and  woven  at  the  earliest 
possible  moment  into  a  connected  narrative.  There  is  not  a 
word  about  Caesar, — the  whole  war  is  a  boy s'  affair.  Then,  when 
forms  and  constructions  have  been  learned,  Caesar  appears,  not 
as  a  writer  of  a  school-book,  but  as  a  vigorous  and  effective  per- 
son, dramatically  rescuing  the  remains  of  his  army  and  saving 
the  situation.  With  few  and  slight  changes  the  story  is  in  his 
own  words.  The  reading  of  this  episode  is  likely  to  leave  the 
student  with  a  taste  for  more. 

The  attention  of  teachers  is  called  to  the  following: 

Vocabulary,  In  spite  of  its  starting  in  simple  affairs  of  homo 
life,  913^  per  cent,  of  the  moderate  but  sufficient  vocabulary  of  961 
words  are  from  the  Gallic  War,  and  cover  the  most  important  words. 
So  large  a  proportion  has  never  before  been  reached.  In  this  reckon- 
ing, groups  like  bonus,  melior,  optimus,  count  as  one.  Verbs  like 
amo,  certOy  cldmo,  currd,fldd,  lego,  muto,  ruvnpOySuddeo,  are  counted 
as  non-Caesarian,  though  appearing  in  compounds  in  Caesar,  and 
thereby  demanding  all  the  more  that  they  be  inserted.  .  Of  the  total 
number  of  non-Caesarian  words,  namely  82,  69  appear  in  the  vocabu- 
laries of  our  texts  of  Cicero  or  Virgil,  or  both,  leaving  only  13  words 
in  this  book ^  that  are  not  in  High  School  Latin.  It  would  hardly 
be  possible  to  go  farther  than  this,  and  still  preserve  a  normal  and 
natural  vocabulary. 

Repetition.  In  the  first  forty-eight  Lessons  (after  the  first  three, 
in  which  repetition  of  words  without  identity  of  sentences  is  at 
points  difficult),  every  new  word  is  used  in  two  successive  Lessons  at 

^They  are  aniica,  dthleta^  Capreae,  coqua,  exemplar,  hen,  irtipigre  (but 
piger  and  impiger  occur),  lulla,  lapillus,  Pojnpei,  and  schola. 


Preface  v 

least,  besides  reappearing  later.  This  feature,  which  is  new,  would 
appear  to  be  an  indispensable  one. 

Organization  of  Vocabulary.  Words  closely  connected  are  put, 
as  far  as  possible,  in  the  same  Lesson,  or  in  Lessons  not  far  apart. 
Thus  in  §345  are  given  iungo  and  cdiungo;  optimus  and  optime; 
prior ^  prius  and  priusquam;  suddeo  and  sudvis.  In  Lesson  XLIX, 
opto  is  given,  to  make  it  easy  for  the  student  to  understand  and 
remember  the  term  Optative  Subjunctive  in  Lesson  L. 

English  Vocabulary.  The  English  vocabulary  is  of  substan- 
tially the  same  length  as  the  Latin  —  likewise  a  novel  feature.  The 
student  knows  his  Latin  words  better,  if  he  has  used  them  from 
both  directions.  Principal  Parts  are  given  for  all  verbs,  just  as 
genitives  are  given  for  nouns.  The  purpose  is  to  afford  the  student 
every  opportunity  to  make  his  knowledge  certain  by  the  repeating 
of  impressions.  The  same  holds-  for  the  mention  of  the  more 
troublesome  constructions. 

Forms.  The  forms  are  all  given  in  the  body  of  the  book  (except 
the  unimportant  list  of  numerals),  and  never  in  a  mass,  unless  the 
parts  of  the  mass  are  alike.  There  is  much  repetition,  to  show 
likeness  or  contrast  (as  of  the  active,  when  the  passive  is  given). 
This  takes  space,  but  lessens  labor.  Every  set  of  forms  is  put  to 
immediate  use  in  a  context  which  enforces  its  meaning. 

The  Reading  ^Matter  is  largely  in  dialogue,  both  for  greater 
naturalness,  and  to  fix  the  persons  of  the  verb. 

Syntax.  The  system  is  of  extreme  simplicity.  Its  categories  are 
merely  answers  to  the  questions:  What  are  the  ideas  which  the 
Romans  expressed  by  the  cases  ?  What  are  the  ideas  which  the 
Romans  expressed  by  the  moods  ?  In  a  given  case,  the  student  has 
only  to  know  what  the  Latin  means  to  name  the  construction. 

A  Summary  of  Syntax  is  given  immediately  after  the  Supple- 
mentary Reading.  It  may  bo  useful  by  way  of  review  with  this 
reading. 

Excepting  for  the  place-usage  with  names  of  towns  (§409)  the 
words  employed  in  the  sentences  given  to  illustrate  new  construc- 
tions have  already  been  made  familiar.  A  needless  difficulty  has 
thereby  been  removed. 

In  many  instances,  these  illustrative  sentences  are  taken  from 
what  the  student  has  already  read  or  written.  He  has,  in  fact, 
often  come  to  feel  the  construction  before  he  is  asked  to  formulate 
it.  In  this  and  similar  respects,  the  whole  series  of  exercises  and 
explanations  will  bo  found  to  be  carefully  woven  together. 


vi  Preface 

Index.  The  Index,  being  intended  for  the  convenience  of  the 
teacher,  is  full,  with  constant  cross  repetitions. 

The  book  has  been  made  in  the  class-room.  At  every  stage 
it  has  received  and  profited,  by  the  criticism  of  other  teachers 
who  were  using  it.  I  wish  to  thank  Mr.  W.  E.  MoflPatt,  formerly 
of  the  Bradley  Institute,  Peoria,  Mr.  C.  H.  Van  Tuyl,  Mr.  H.  F. 
Scott,  Miss  Frances  S.  Pellett,  Mr.  S.  C.  Johnston,  Mr.  O.  M. 
Washburn,  and  Mr.  W.  L.  Carr,  of  the  University  High  School, 
all  of  whom  have  helped  by  their  confidence,  and  all  but  two  by 
many  criticisms.  Nor  should  I  forget  other  teachers,  mostly 
strangers  to  me,  who  in  the  present  year  have  similarly  aided 
me,  in  spite  of  the  difficulties  of  using  advance  sheets,  in  suc- 
cessive pamphlets,  and  without  a  general  Vocabulary, — namely 
in  the  Shortridge  High  School,  Manual  Training  School,  and 
eleven  Grammar  Schools  in  Indianapolis;  the  High  Schools  of 
Goshen  and  Princeton,  Ind.,  Holyoke,  Mass.,  Ishpeming,  Mich., 
and  Houston,  Tex.;  the  Biggs ville  Township  High  School,  Biggs- 
ville,  111.,  and  the  Princeton  Township  High  School,  Princeton, 
111.;  the  Public  School,  Pleasant  Hill,  Ala.;  the  Academy  of 
Miami  University,  Oxford,  O.,  and  the  Preparatory  Schools  of  the 
University  of  Idaho,  Moscow,  Ida.,  and  Eockford  College,  Rock- 
ford,  111.;  the  Lagrange  Female  College,  Lagrange,  Ga.;  the 
Kenwood  Institute,  Chicago,  the  Blees  Military  Academy,  Macon, 
Mo.,  and  the  Bartholomew-Clifton  School,  Cincinnati,  O.  I  am 
also  indebted,  for  the  sympathetic  granting  of  every  facility, 
to  President  Harper,  of  the  University  of  Chicago,  Professor 
W.B.  Owen,  Dean  of  the  University  High  School,  and  Professor 
N.  Butler,  Dean  of  the  School  of  Education.  To  Mr.  Edward 
Manley,  of  the  Englewood  High  School,  Chicago,  I  owe  much 
wise  and  helpful  counsel.  And  finally,  I  am  deeply  indebted 
to  Mr.  Carr,  now  of  the  Shortridge  High  School,  Indianapolis, 
to  Mr.  C.  H.  Beeson,  formerly  of  the  Peoria  High  School,  and 
to  Mrs.  C.  H.  Beeson,  formerly  of  the  University  of  Indiana,  for 
invaluable  criticism  and  assistance  in  the  preparation  of  the 
present  edition  of  the  book. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 


INTRODUCTION  (To  the  Student) 

PART  I:  PRONUNCIATION 

PART  II:  LEARNING  TO  READ 

LESSON  *  PAGE 

I.    Principles:  —  Forces  of  Endings 4 

II.    Principles  and  Names: — Noun,  Adjective,  Conjunction. 
— Agreement. — Nominative  and  Accusative. — Normal 

Order  and  Emphatic  Order 6 

Til.    Verb. —  Subject  and  Predicate. — Attributive  and  Predi- 
cate Adjective. — Use  of  est 9 

IV.    Nouns,  Proper,  Common,  Collective.  —  Personal  Pro- 
nouns.—  Possessive  Adjectives.  —  Adverb 11 

V.    Appositive  Noun. — Vocative.- — Interjection. — Emphatic 

Order  (continued) 14 

VI.    Genitive  and  Dative,  First  Declension. —  Genitive  of 
PossessioBa — Dative  of  Figurative  Direction  ("to" 

or  "for"  Dative) 17 

VII.    Mood,    Tense,    Person. — Transitive    and    Intransitive 

Verbs.-r Direct  and  Indirect  Object 20 

VIII.    Ablative  Case. — Prepositions  Defined 23 

IX.    Accusative  and  Ablative  with  Prepositions. — First  De- 
clension Singular,  Table     . 25 

X.    First  Declension,  in  full. — Present  Infinitive  and  Third 

Person  Plural,  First  Conjugation. —  Sunt 28 

XI.    The  Four  Conjugations  Distinguished. — Personal  End- 
ings.— Present  Indicative  Active  of  amO  and  sum  .    .      31 
XII.    Second  Conjugation,  Present  Indicative  Active. — Dative 

with  Certain  Verbs 33 

XIII.  Genders  in  the  First  and  Second  Declensions. — 0-Stem 

Nouns  and  Adjectives  in  full 35 

XIV.  Shortened  ro-Stems. —  Irregular  Forms 37 

vii 


Vlll 


Table  of  Contents 


LESSON  PAGE 

XV.    First  and  Second  Declension  Adjectives  in  full. — 

Rule  inferred  for  Agreement  of  Adjectives    ...      40 
XVI.    First  and  Second  Conjugations,  Present  Indicative 

Passive. —  Agent  of  Passive  Voice 43 

XVII.    Pronominal  Adjectives,  Declined.     The  Complain- 
ing Schoolboy.    Favoritism  in  the  School?  ...      45 
XVIII.    First  and   Second   Conjugations,  Present   Impera- 
tive and  Infinitive,  Active  and  Passive.  —  Ipse. 

The  Father  and  the  Lazy  Schoolboy 48 

XIX.     Imperfect  Indicative  Active. —  Ille  and  iste. —  Pro- 
nouns and  Adjectives  as  Substantives. — Clause 
and  Phrase.     Illness  and  Drooping  Spirits.    .    .      51 
XX.    Imperfect  Indicative  Passive. —  Is.    The  Reforming 

Student 55 

XXI.    Future    Indicative    Active. —  Idem.     Father    and 

Son .      57 

XXII.    Future   Indicative  Passive. — Hie.     The   Pleasures 

of  Work.    The  Best  School 60 

XXIII.  Third  Conjugation,  Present  Indicative  and  Impera- 

tive, Active  and  Passive. — "Yes"  and  "No"  Ques- 
tions, and  Answers.     The  Teasing  Boys    ....      62 

XXIV.  Fourth  Conjugation. —  Third  Conjugation  Verbs  in 

-io. — All  Conjugations,    Present    Indicative    and 
Infinitive,  Both  Voices.    A  Quarrel  Begins  ...      65 
XXV.     Quis  and  qui. — Agreement  of  Kelative.    The  Quarrel 

Goes  On 68 

XXVI.     Quicumque.  —  Quidam.  —  Present    Imperative,    All 
Conjugations.     The    Teacher    and    the    Teasing 

Boys 71 

XXVII.  Third  and  Fourth  Conjugations,  Imperfect  Indica- 
tive, Active  and  Passive. —  Quisquam. —  Quisque. 
—  Genitive  of  the  Whole.  The  Crybaby  .  ...  74 
XXVIII.  Third  and  Fourth  Conjugations,  Future  Indicative, 
Active  and  Passive. —  Aliquis.^  Objective  Geni- 
tive.   Mark  Warns  the  Teasers 78 

XXIX.     Personal  and  Reflexive  Pronouns   and   Possessive 

Adjectives.     The  Small  Boy  and  Mark  ....      81 
XXX.    Perfect  Indicative  Active,  All  Conjugations.— Per- 
sonal Endings.— Two  Forces  of  the  Perfect.     The 
Teacher,  to  the  Allied  and  the  Beaten  Boys    .     .      84 


Table  of  Contents 


IX 


LESSOX  PAGE 

XXXI.     Stem-Formation   in  Perfect  Indicative  Active. — 
Perfect  Passive  Participle. —  Principal  Parts  of 
Verbs  thus  fa,r  Used.     Picnic  in  the  Woods.    .      86 
XXXII.     Future    Active     Participle.      The    Tent    in    the 

Woods 90 

XXXIII.  Past  Perfect  Indicative  Active,  All  Conjugations. 

An  Adventure  of  the  Smcdl  Boys    .......      92 

XXXIV.  Future  Perfect  Indicative  Active,  All  Conjuga- 

tions.   Does  it  Pay  to  Work  at  School  9    .    .     .      94 
XXXV.     Present  Perfect,  Past  Perfect,  and  Future  Perfect 
Indicative  Passive,  All  Conjugations.     Does  it 

Pay  to  Have  Worked  at  School  9  ■ 96 

XXXVI.     Third  Declension,  Consonant-Stem  Nouns.— Da- 
tive of  Reference  or  Concern.    The  Boys  Project 

a  Mock  War 99 

XXXVII.    Consonant-Stem  Nouns  (finished).     War  Talk    .    102 
XXXVIII.    Neuter  i-Stems.— Masculine  and  Feminine  i-Stems. 
—  Mixed  Stems. —  Ablative  of  Means  or  Instru- 
ment.   Sword,  Shield,  and  Helmet 105 

XXXIX.    Exceptional  i-Stems. —  Future  Passive  Participle, 

'  and  Dative  of  Agent.     The  Braggart  Soldier    .    108 
XL.     Consonant-Stem    Adjectives. —  Dative  of  Posses- 
sion.    Who  will  he  Chosert  Generals  9     ....     Ill 
XLI.     I-Stem  Adjectives. —  Dative  of  the   Person  Jud- 
ging.    The  Too-Athletic  Girl 114 

XLII.     Present  Active  Participle. — Ablative  with  pro  and 

prae.— Gerundive    Defined.     Electioneering    .117 
XLIII.    Ablative  Absolute.—  Perfects  with  Present  Mean- 
ing.— Middle  or  Reflexive  Verbs.  —  Deponents. 
Mark  Invites  a  Friend  to  See  the  Battle    .     .     .    120 
XLIV.     Summary  of  Points  of  Difficulty  in  the  Third  De- 
clension.—Genders.    Mark's  Friend  Ansvwrs   .     124 
XLV.     Irregular  Words  of   the  Third  Declension:    vis, 
plGs ,  complores,  duo,  ambo. — Two  Accusatives. — 
Ablative  of  the  Measure  of  Difference.  — Ablative 
with  Otor,  fruor,  fungor,   potior,   and  vescor. 
Proposed  Ground  of  the  Campaign  Explored    .    127 
XLVI.     Subjunctive  Mood,  Present  in  full. —  Subjunctive 
of  an  Act  Willed,  and  of  an  Act  Anticipated. 
Different  Boys  Want  Different  Things  ....     131 


Table  of  Contents 


LESSON 

XLVII. 


XLVIII. 

XLIX. 

L. 


LI. 
LII. 

LIII. 


LIV. 


LV. 


LVI. 


LVII. 


LVIII. 


PAGE 

Various  Uses  of  the  Subjunctive  of  Will  and  the 
Subjunctive  of  Anticipation:  Expression  of  Pur- 
pose; of  Fear;  of  Deliberation.  —  Expression  of 
Anticipation  after  Words  Meaning  Before  or  Until 
Committee  on  Rules  Proposed 134 

How  Shall  the  Committee  on  Rules  he  Made  Up  9    .    138 

The  Anxious  Father 140 

The  Subjunctive  expressing,  an  Act  as  Wished, 
Proper,  Likely,  Possible,  or  Certain  in  an  Imagined 
Case. —  Fourth  Declension.  The  Too- Ambitious 
Servius  and  the  Hoax 142 

Electioneering 146 

Imperfect  Subjunctive,  in  full.  — Meaning  of  the 
Tense.    Mark  and  Lucius  Elected  Generals      .    .    148 

Genitive  of  Material  or  Composition. — Descriptive 
Genitive  and  Ablative.  Talk  of  Mark  and  Lucius 
with  Their  Backers 152 

Fifth  Declension. —  Indefinite  quis. — Ablative  of  the 
Time  At  or  Within  Which. — Impersonal  Use  of 
Verbs.    Drilling  for  the  Battle 156 

Declension  of  domus.  —  Ordinary  Expression  of 
Place  From,  To,  or  In  Which;  Construction  with 
Names  of  Towns  and  Small  Islands,  and  with 
domus  and  rOs. — Locative  Ablative  of  Certain 
Words  with  or  without  a  Preposition. —  Ablative 
of  the  Point  of  View  from  Which.  Where  Does 
Mark's  Expected  Friend  Live  f 160 

Perfect  Subjunctive,  All  Conjugations  and  sum. — 
Semi-Deponent  Verbs. —  The  Consecutive  Sub- 
junctive of  Fact.— Is,  ille,  etc.,  with  Desci:iptive 
Meaning.    Mark's  Correspondent  Arrives    .    .    .    164 

Determinative  Clauses. — Dative  of  Tendency,  Pur- 
pose, or  Result. —  Dative  of  the  Concrete  Object 
for  Which. —  Dative  and  Ablative  with  fido  and 
cOnfidO. —  Accusative  of  Extent,  Duration,  or  De- 
gree.   Mark  Justifies  His  Plan 168 

Past  Perfect  Subjunctive.  —  Ablative  of  Cause  or 
Reason. — Ablative  of  Respect,— Substantive  quod- 
Clause  of  Fact,  and  quod-Clause  of  Respect.  Au- 
thority of  the  Two  Generals 172 


Table  of  Contents 


liESSON  PAGE 

LiX.  Imperative,  All  Forms. —  Supine. —  Ablative  of  Ac- 
cordance.—  Ablative,  etc.,  with  a  Comparative. 
Bad  Weather,  Indoor  Talk.  Rules  of  Battle  .  176 
LX.  Infinitive,  All  Forms. — Infinitive  Tenses.  —  Infini- 
tive in  Indirect  Discourse.  Plans  of  the  Judges  .  180 
LXI.  Inflection  of  the  Regular  Verb  finished:  The 
Gerund.  —  Uses  of  Gerundive  and  Gerund.  —  The 
Natural  Harmony  of  Tenses  ("Sequence  of 
Tenses").  —  Causal  or  Adversative  quI-Clause. 
Talk  of  Mothers^  Timid  and  Otherwise    .    .    .    .    184 

LXII.  Irregular  Verbs  begun:  possum. — Descriptive  cum- 
Clause  of  Situation,  and  Causal  or  Adversative 
cum -Clause.      Mark    and    his    Officers    at    his 

Father's  House 188 

LXIII.  Volo,  nolo,  malo. — Neutral  Conditions  and  Conclu- 
sions; Future  Conditions  and  Conclusions,  More 
Vivid  or  Less  Vivid.    The  Distrustful  Schoolmate    192 

LXIV.  FiO,  eO.  —  Historical  Present. — Aoristic  Narrative 
Clause  with  ubi,  ut,  postquam,  or  simul  atque. — 
Ablative    of    Accompaniment.      Fair    Weather. 

Opening  of  the  Battle 196 

LXV.  Regular  Comparison  of  Adjectives.  —  Ablative  of 
Manner. — Historical  Infinitive.— Clauses  of  Cause 
or  Reason  with  quod,  quia,  quoniam' or  quando. — 
Ablative  with  Verbs  of  Separation.  End  of  the 
Battle,  and  Decision  of  the  Judges 200 

LXVl.  FerO. — Conditions  and  Conclusions  Contrary  to 
Fact. — Table  of  Conditions  and  Conclusions  (sum- 
mary).— Dative  after  Verbs  compounded  with  Cer- 
tain   Prepositions.      Fresh   Challenge   Accepted. 

Opening  of  the  Second  Battle 204 

LXVII.  Irregular  or  Defective  Comparison  of  Adjectives. — 
Subjunctive  of  Indirect  Discourse  (finished). — 
Table  of  the  Constructions  in  Indirect  Discourse. 

End  of  the  Second  Battle^ .208 

LXVIII.  Formation  and  Comparison  of  Adverbs.  —  Special 
Uses  of  the  Comparative  and  Superlative  Degrees. 
— Infinitive  with  Subject  Accusative. —  Subjunc- 
tive by  Attraction.  An  Incident  from  Real  War- 
fare . 212 


xii  Table  of  Contents 

PART  III:    SUPPLEMENTARY  READING 

The  Gallic  Uprising  of  54  b.  c. 
(From  Caesar's  Story  of  the  Gallic  War,  Book  v.) 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

I.    Disposition  of  the  Roman  Army  for  the  Winter  .    .    .    216 
II.    Revolt  of  Ambiorix  and  Catuvolcus. — Attack  upon  the 

Winter  Camp  of  Cotia  and  Sabinus  . 218 

III.  The  Parley. — Argument  of  the  Barbarians 220 

IV.  Council  of  the  Roman  Officers. — The  Wrong  View  Pre- 

vails   222 

V.    Ambuscade  and  Battle 224 

VI.    Cotta  is  Wounded  at  the  End  of  the  Day.  — Sabinus 

Asks  for  Mercy  . 226 

VII.    Ambiorix  Offers  a  Conference  and  Promises  Safety. — 

The  Trick. — Destruction  of  the  Army 228 

VIII.    Sioift  Attack  upon  the  Camp  of  Cicero.— The  Parley. — 

Cicero  not  Deceived. —  Long  Siege 230 

IX.    A  Letter  Is  Carried  through  at  Last  to  Caesar    .    .    .  232 

X.     Caesar  Enters  the  Enemy^s  Country 234 

XI.     The  Gauls  Fly  to  Meet  Caesar.— His  Strategy  ....  236 

XII.     Victory  and  Rescue. —  Muster  of  the  Survivors     .-   .    .  238 


SOUTHERN    WALL    OF    PERMAXKXT 
ROMAN  CAMP 

At  Saalburg,  near  Homburg.    Partly  re- 
stored.   From  Jacobi 


INTRODUCTION 

(To  the  Student) 

Latin  is  the  language  spoken  by  the  ancient  Romans. 

It  was  at  first  the  language  only  of  Rome  and  its  im- 
mediate neighborhood.  But  as  the  power  of  the  city 
extended  itself,  it  became  first  the  language  of  the  whole 
of  Italy,  and  then  the  dominant  language  of  the  entire 
civilized  world.  And  this  it  remained,  for  more  than  a 
thousand  years. 

But  no  language  stands  still  Changes  are  constantly 
going  on,  in  the  words  employed,  in  their  forms,  in  the 
pronunciation  of  them,  in  their  meanings,  and  in  the 
ways  of  putting  them  together  to  express  ideas.  Try,  for 
example,  our  own  poet  Chaucer.  You  can  make  out  a 
good  many  single  words,  but  you  cannot  understand  at 
all  at  ifirst.  And  if  you  went  back  still  further,  say  to 
the  writings  of  King  Alfred,  you  probably  could  not 
make  out  more  than  one  word  in  ten.  In  the  Lord's 
Prayer  of  Alfred's  time,  out  of  the  49  different  words 
used,  you  would  recognize  only  and,  we,  us,  to,  on,  and 
of,  while  you  would  not  understand  the  ways  in  which 
some  of  these  are  used,^and  would  not  even  know  that 
it  was  the  Lord's  Prayer  which  you  had  before  you. 
English  is  thus,  you  see,  a  living,  growing,  and  changing 
thing. 

Now  of  course  Latin  was  also  a  living  and  growing  and 
changing  thing.  And  it  changed  somewhat  differently 
in  different  parts  of  the  world, — say  in  Italy,  in  France, 
and  in  Spain.     The  form  which  it  took  in  Italy  we  call 


XIV  hi*^odudion 

Italian,  in  France,  French,  and  in  Spain,  Spanish.  Now 
we  speak  of  the  English  of  King  Alfred's  time  as  Early 
English.  You  see  that,  in  the  same  way,  it  would  be 
correct  to  speak  of  Latin  as  Early  Italian,  and  Early 
French,  and  Early  Spanish.  Or  you  might  say  that  the 
Italian,  the  Frenchman,  and  the  Spaniard  speak  Modern 
Latin. 

But  it  isn't  these  people  only  that  speak  Modern  Latin. 
.  We  do  it  ourselves.  Our  language  is  only  in  part  de- 
scended from  Early  English,  or,  as  we  might  call  it  for 
greater  clearness,  Anglo-Saxon  English.  Two-thirds  of 
the  words  which  we  have  at  our  command  (that  is,  the 
words  found  in  a  dictionary)  are  Latin;  while,  in  our 
ordinary  daily  speech,  half-  the  words  we  use  outside  of 
what  we  may  call  the  "small  change"  of  language, — such 
words  as  and,  we,  us,  to,  on,  of,  spoken  of  above, — are 
Latin.  The  little  boy  who  says  in  the  street,  "please 
give  me  a  cent.  Mister,"  is  speaking  just  one-half  Anglo- 
Saxon  English  and  one-half  Latin  English  ("give,"  "me," 
and  "a"  have  come  down  from  Anglo-Saxon,  and  "please," 
"cent,"  and  "Mister"  from  Latin).  Moreover,  the  words 
that  have  come  down  from  Anglo-Saxon  are  mostly  very 
simple  words.  The  words  in  which  we  express  our  finer 
distinctions  in  our  thinking  are  mainly  Latin.  Latin  is 
thus  a  good  language  to  know.  It  is  just  as  much  our 
mother  tongue  as  Anglo-Saxon  is.  Indeed,  we  should 
speak  more  properly  if  we  called  Latin  the  mother  tongue, 
and  Anglo-Saxon  the  father  tongue.  Our  language  of 
today  is  the  child  of  both.  It  gets  a  good  deal  of  its 
strength,  though  not  all,  from  the  father,  and  a  good  deal 
of  its  refinement,  though  not  all,  from  the  mother.^ 


Introduction  xv 

To  know  Latin,  then,  is  to  understand  English  better, 
and  to  use  it  more  intelligently  and  effectively.  You  will 
come  to  feel,  as  you  go  on,  how  much  it  is  your  own 
language  that  you  are  really  studying. 

Moreover,  our  civilization  comes  mainly  from  Rome. 
It  was  Rome,  and  not  England  or  Germany  or  Norway 
and  Sweden,  that  first  conquered  the  world;  and  Julius 
Caesar,  who  subdued  France  and  Belgium  (you  will 
sometime  read  his  own  story  of  his  wars),  enormously 
influenced  your  life  and  mine.  Rome  spread  its  modes 
of  living,  its  laws,  its  forms  of  literature,  and  its  ways  of 
thinking  over  the  whole  world.  We  are  really,  in  all 
these  things,  Romans,  or,  more  exactly  (since  Rome  got 
its  own  arts  and  letters  in  part  from  Greece),  we  are 
Greeks  and  Romans.  The  story  of  our  various  forms  of 
literature, — history,  the  oration,  the  essay,  lyrical  poetry, 
epic  poetry,  tragedy,  comedy,  everything,  in  short,  except 
satire, — begins  with  Greece;  and  satire  began  in  Rome. 
Science  and  philosophy,  too, — the  first  methodical  think- 
ing, in  the  part  of  the  world  to  which  we  belong,  about 
the  processes  of  nature,  and  the  meaning  of  life,  arose  in 
Greece.  Our  arts,  likewise,  except  for  those  that  have 
sprung  up  quite  recently  in  connection  with  the  wonderful 
progress  of  natural  science,  came  from  Rome.  Your  great 
grandfathers  and  grandmothers  had  no  ways  of  building, 
heating,  and  lighting  their  houses,  or  of  traveling  or 
communicating  with  one  another,  that  they  had  not 
inherited  from  Roman  times;  and  in  general  they  lived 
much  less  comfortably  than  the  Ancient  Romans. 

So,  then,  you  want  to  know  these  people.  Strains  of 
their  blood  probably  actually  run  in  the  veins  of  a  great 


xvi  Introduction 

many  of  us.  But,  at  any  rate,  they  are  our  intellectual 
ancestors.  The  first  thing  to  do  is  to  learn  their  language. 
Then,  if  you  are  so  fortunate  as  to  have  the  opportunity, 
you  want  to  come  to  know  their  best  books,  and  something 
of  their  arts, — especially  their  sculpture,  and  their  archi- 
tecture. You  will  not  be  any  the  less  free  and  independent 
if  you  do  so;  for  it  is  not  really  the  ignorant  man  who 
thinks  most  effectively  for  himself,  and  the  real  freeman 
is  the  man  to  whom  most  doors  are  open. 

And  one  thing  more.  Don't  think  of  these  people  as 
"ancient."  The  great  days  of  Rome  are  indeed  eighteen 
and  nineteen  hundred  years  back.  That  might  seem  a 
long  time;  it  is  really  extremely  little  in  the  history  of 
man,  and  little,  even,  in  the  life  of  civilized  man,  as  we 
know  him,  say,  in  Egypt.  But  the  Romans  are  not  intel- 
lectually so  far  back  as  the  dates  would  make  us  believe. 
There  was  a  long  stretch  of  time  in  which  the  civilized 
world  was  in  the  main  moving  backward,  until  it  began 
to  return  to  where  it  had  been,  largely  through  the  redis- 
covery of  Latin  and  Greek  literature,  from  which  our 
modern  literature  and  our  modern  science  start.  If  you 
drop  out  these  lost  centuries,  Rome  isn't  twice  as  far  back 
as  our  own  Shakespeare.  The  Romans  were  very  like 
ourselves.  If  a  man  of  the  eleventh  century,  say,  were  to 
come  back  and  lecture  to  us,  you  would  find  that  he  was 
living  in  an  entirely  difiPerent  world  from  ours.  If  Horace 
or  Pliny  or  Tacitus  were  to  do  the  same  thing,  you  would 
find  him  as  modern  as  any  of  us,  and  that  he  looked  at 
life  in  very  much  the  same  way.  Think  of  these  men*, 
then,  as  Romans  of  only  the  other  day,  and  of  their  litera- 
ture and  art  as  a  part  of  our  direct  inheritance.  And  get 
all  you  can  for  yourself  out  of  the  family  treasure. 


PART  I:  PRONUNCIATION 

(For  Reference)  * 


THE  ALPHABET 

I.  The  Latin  Alphabet   is   the  same  as  the  English, 
except  that  Latin  has  no  w  and  no  j. 

CLASSIFICATION 

II.  The  Vowels  are  a,  e,  i\  o,  u,  y.     The  remaining 
letters  are  Consonants. 

PRONUNCIATION 

III.  The  Vowels  are  pronounced  as  follows: 

a  as  in  the  first  syllable  of  a/ia.        a  as  in /a/^er. 
e  as  in  let.  e  about  as  in  they. 

i  as  in  pin.  i  as  in  machine.  . 

o  about  as  in  obey.  0  about  as  in  no. 

u  as  in  pull.  tl  as  in  rude. 

y  and  y  (rare,  not  occurring  in  this  book) 
like  French  short  and  long  u. 

IV.  The    Diphthongs    (two-vowel    sounds)    are    pro- 
nounced as  follows: 

ae  like  ai  in  aisle.  eu    as    4{h)-oo,    smoothly    pro- 
Siu  like  ou  in  out.  nounced  in  the  same  breath- 

oe  like  oi  in  coin.  impulse. 

ei  like  ei  in  deign.  ui  as  o6-i,  smoothly  pronounced 
^  in  the  same  breath-impulse. 

1 


2.'    .  Cf^nsonanfs, — Syllables. —  Quantity  of  Vowels 

V.  Most   Consonants  are  pronounced  as  in   English, 

but  the  following  points  are  to  be  noted : 

c  always  has  the  k  sound  as  in  cat,  never  the  s  sound  as  in  center. 

g  always  as  in  get,  never  as  in  gem. 

t  as  in  tin,  never  as  in  nation. 

s  as  in  hisSy  never  voiced  {z)  as  in  his. 

b  before  s  and  t  like  p.    Thus  urbs  as  urps. 

X  (value  of  two  consonants)  like  ks  as  in  .extra. 

n  before  c,  g,  qu  has  the  sound  of  ng  in  singing.    Before  s  it  lost 

its  consonantal  value,  the  preceding  vowel  being  lengthened 

and  nasalized.    So  trans  =  tras  with  nasal  a. 
r  rolled  as  in  French. 

i  consonantal  (beginning  a  syllable)  as  y  in  yet. 
V  as  t(?  in  wet. 
u  has  the  same  sound  in  qu,  ngu,  and  in  suavis,  suadeO,  suescO, 

and  their  compounds.    Compare  quarter,  anguish,  persuade. 
ch,  ph,  th  like  k,p,  t,  but  with  added  rough  breath,  as  in  uphill. 
Double  letters  represent  real  double  consonants,  pronounced  with 

separate  and  distinct  articulation  and  in  different  syllables,  as 

in  book-case,  hop-pole,  well-laid.    So  sic-cus,  op-pO-nO,  il-le. 

DIVISION  OF  SYLLABLES 

VI.  A  Latin  word  contains  as  many  syllables  as  it  has 
vowels  or  diphthongs.     The  division  is  as  follows: 

1.  A  single  consonant  between  two  vowels  goes  with  the  second 
vowel.  Thus  do-mi-na.  It  does  not  add  appreciably  to  the  time 
taken  in  pronouncing  the  vowel  of  its  syllable. 

2.  A  consonant  followed  by  1  or  r  goes  with  the  1  or  r.  Similarly 
q,  g,  and  s  go  with  u  in  the  combinations  given  under  u  in  V. 
Thus  du-plex,  a-gri,  pa-tris,  a-li-qua,  per-sua-de-0. 

3.  In  all  other  cases  a  consonant  followed  by  another  goes  in  the 
same  syllable  with  the  preceding  vowel.  Thus  an-nus,  dic-tus,  mag- 
nus,cas-tra,  sanc-tus. 

a.  A  consonant  thus  blocked  by  another  may  be  called  obstructed. 

QUANTITY  OF  VOWELS 

VII.  Vowels  are  long  or  short  according  to  the  length 
of  time  taken  in  pronouncing  them.  Long  vowels  are 
shown  thus:   a,  e,  i,  6,  u.     Unmarked  vowels  are  short. 


Quantity  of  Vowels  and  Syllables. — Accent         3 

a.  The  difference  between  a  long  vowel  and' a  short  one  is  a  real 
difference  in  sound.  Thus  the  difference  between  Latin  i  and  i  is 
as  great  as  between  jit  and  feet  in  English. 

h.  A  Latin  long  vowel  (similarly  a  diphthong)  takes  about  twice 
as  much  time  in  pronouncing  as  a  short  vowel. 

General  Facts  of  Quantity 

VIII.  1.  A  vowel  is  long  before  ns,  nf,  nx,  or  net,  as  in  insequor, 
Inferior,  iQnxI,  idnctus. 

2.  A  vowel  is  short  before  another  vowel,  or  h,  as  in  eo,  veho. 

3.  A  vowel  is  short  before  final  m  or  t,  before  nt  and  nd  any- 
where, and,  except  in  words  of  one  syllable,  before  final  r  or  1. 
Thus  in  amem,  amet,  amantis,  amandus,  amer,  animal. 

QUANTITY  OP  SYLLABLES 

IX.  Syllables  are  long  or  short  according  to  the 
length  of  time  taken  in  pronouncing  them. 

1.  A  syllable  is  long  if  it  contains  a  long  vowel  or  a  diphthong 
(fii?o-vowel  group);  for  example  the  first  syllable  in  ma-ter,  au-di-0. 

2.  A  syllable  is  also  long,  even  when  the  vowel  is  short,  if  this  is 
followed  by  two  consonants  (except  as  in  VI,  2).  Thus  in  dic-tus  the 
i  is  short.  But  the  clear  pronunciation  of  the  c  before  the  t(as  clear 
as  of  the  corresponding  sounds  in  "Dick  took  cold")  takes  as  much 
time  as  the  pronunciation  of  the  vowel. 

3.  A  syllable  is  short  if  it  ends  in  a  short  vowel,  as  in  i-ta. 

X.  In  Roman  speech,  combinations  between  words 
were  pronounced  in  the  same  way  as  within  words. 

a.  Thus  at  amicus  was  pronounced  a-ta-mi-cus  (so  that  at  was 
here  short;  compare  our  unconscious  pronunciation  of  at  all  as  a-tall), 
and  at  quaerO  was  pronounced  at-quaerO  (so  that  at  was  here  long, 
just  as  in  the  single  word  at-que). 

ACCENT 

XI.  1.  In  words  of  two  syllables  the  accent  is  upon  the 
penult  (syllable  before  the  last).     Thus:   magis,  tego. 

2.  In  words  of  more  than  two  syllables  the  accent  is 
upon  the  penult  if  this  is  long,  otherwise  on  the  ante- 
penult (syllable  before  the  penult).  Thus  a-mi'-cus, 
ma-gis-ter,  but  va-li-dus. 


Principles 

PART  II:  LEARNING  TO  READ 


LESSON  I 

PRINCIPLES 

1.  Specimen  Sentence: 

Serva  cenam  parat,  the  servant  prepares  the  dinner. 

You  will  see  that  in  this  sentence  three  different  things 
are  presented  to  the  mind,  something  acting  (serva,  the 
servant),  something  acted  upon  (cenam,  the  dinner),  and 
hii  act  ((pdiXdity  prepares) . 

2.  Specimen  Sentence: 

Domina  servam  laudat,  the  mistress  praises  the  servant. 
Here  again  three  things   are   presented   to  the  mind, 
something  acting  (domina,  the  mistress),  something  acted 
upon  (servam,  the  servant),  and  an  act  (laudat,  praises). 

3.  If  you  compare  the  two  sentences,  you  see  that  words 
end  differently,  according  as  they  represent  that  which 
acts,  or  that  which  is  acted  upon.  Thus  in  the  first  sen- 
tence the  servant  acts,  and  the  ending  is  -a  (serva) ;  while 
in  the  second  the  servant  is  acted  upon,  and  the  ending  is 
-am  (servam). 

4.  In  both  sentences,  there  is  a  word  that  expresses  an 
act  (parat,  laudat),  and  it  ends  in  the  same  way,  namely 
in  -at. 

5.  Notice  that  the  Latin  order  differs  from  the  English, 
putting  the  word  for  an  act  last. 

6.  Latin  has  no  article  (''the"  or  "a").  Thus  cena  may 
correspond,  according  to  the  rest  of  the  sentence,  to 
"dinner,"  "a  dinner,"  or  ^'the  dinner." 


Exercises  5 

7.  Direction.  In  learning  the  Latin  words  in  the  Vocab- 
ularies, be  sure  that  you  pronounce  them  rightly  in  your 
mind,  making  the  long  sounds  long,  and  the  short  short, 
and  making  the  consonants  full  and  clear.  Then,  when 
you  have  occasion  to  W7^ite  the  Latin  words,  you  have 
merely  to  write  them  as  they  sound  in  your  memory. 

8.  VOCABULARY 

(Commit  these  words  to  memory,  so  that  you  can  at  once  give  the  English 
for  the  Latin,  and  the  Latin  for  the  English. ) 

amica,  friend  (used  only  of  a  culpat,  blames,  censures. 

woman  or  girl).  laudat,  praises, 

cena,  dinner.  parat,  prepares,  gets. 
domina,  mistress. 

serva,    servant  or  slave    (used  et,  and. 

only  of  a  woman  or  girl). 

9.  READING  MATTER 

(Before  translating  a  sentence,  make  out  its  meaning,  according  to  what 
you  have  learned  above  of  the  force  of  the  endings  in  -a,  -am,  and  -at.  Then 
translate  it  into  English. ) 

1.  Domina  cenam  laudat. 

2.  Serva  cenam  parat,  et  domina  servam  laudat. 

3.  Amica  cenam  laUdat. 

4.  Domina  cenam  laudat  et  servam. 

5.  Domina  servam  culpat,  serva  dominam.l 

10.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

(Write  these  sentences  in  Latin,  remembering  what  you  have  learned 
about  the  way  of  expressing  the  person  acting,  the  person  acted  upon,  and 
the  act,  and  also  the  order  in  which  these  are  put.  In  writing,  indicate  how 
you  pronounce  each  word.    Thus,  if  you  pronounce  cena,  don't  write  cena.) 

1.  The  servant  praises  the  mistress. 

2.  The  mistress  blames  the  servant. 

3.  The  friend  praises  the  dinner,  the  mistress  the  servant.^ 

4.  The  friend  praises  the  dinner  and  the  servant. 

1  Words  easily  understood  can  be  omitted.    What  is  omitted  here? 


Principles  and  Names 


LESSON  II 
PRINCIPLES  AND  NAMES 

11.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Domina  bona  cenam  laudat,  the  good  mistress  praises  the 
dinner. 

Domina  cenam  bonam  laudat,  the  mistress  praises  the  good 
dinner. 

12.  Here  we  have  words  ending  alike, — for  instance, 
domina  and  bona  in  the  first  example, — but  evidently  of 
different  natures.  Bona  expresses  a  quality  (tells  of  what 
kind).  Such  words  are  called  Adjectives,  Words  like 
domina,  cena,  etc.,  are  names  of  persons  or  things.  Such 
words  are  called  Nouns. 

13.  You  can  tell  which  of  two  Nouns  an  Adjective  goes 
with  by  the  ending  of  that  Adjective.  Thus  if  you  have 
domina  bona  servam,  it  is  of  course  the  domina  of  whom 
bona  is  said  ("good  mistress") ;  if  you  have  domina  bonam 
servam,  it  is  the  servam  of  whom  bonam  is  said  ("good 
servant").  This  going- together  of  one  word  with  another 
is  called  Agreement. 

14.  Words  expressing  acts  or  states,  for  example  laudat, 
are  called  Verhs^  Words  like  '  et,  which  join  others 
together,  are  called  Conjunctions. 

15.  Varying  forms  of  a  given  noun,  adjective,  etc.  (as 
serva  servam,  bona  bonam)  are  called  Cases.  The  form 
in  -a  used  above  is  called  Nominative^  the  one  in  -am 
Accusative. 


Exercise  1 

a.  Look  now  at  the  sentences  you  have  had,  and  see  what  is  the 
case  which  represents  a  person  or  thing  as  acting^  and  what  the  one 
which  represents  a  person  or  thing  acted  upon. 

h.  The  Nominative  in  Latin  corresponds  to  the  Nominative  in 
English  Grammar.  The  Accusative  corresponds  to  the  Objective 
case  in  English  Grammar. 

16.  A  word  that  qualifies  or  limits  another  on  which  it 
depends  is  said  to  modify  that  word,  and  is  called  a 
modifier. 

Thus  in  the  phrase^  "good  mistress"  the  word  ''good" 
modifies  the  word  "mistress;"  and  in  the  statement 
"praises  the  servant,"  the  word  ''servant"  modifies  the 
verb  "praises." 

17.  VOCABULARY 

noun:  verb: 

reglna,  giteen.  SimsXy  loves ^  likes. 

adjectives:  conjunction: 

hona.^  good.  et  .  .  .  et  .  .  .  i.  e.,^  et  doubled, 

mala,  had.  both  .  .  .  and  .  .  . 
dcira,  hard,  stern,  harsh. 

18.  READING  MATTER 

(In  sentences  1  to  3  the  order  is  the  normal'^  one.  In  4,  bona  is  made 
emphatic  by  its  position,  and  in  5  the  whole  phrase  bonam  servam  is  made 
emphatic  in  the  same  way.  See  if  you  can  express  this  emphasis  in  your 
translation  by  position  or  by  stress  of  voice.) 

1.  Kegina  dominam  bonam  laudat. 

2.  Domina  servam  malam  culpat. 

3.  Serva  bona  dominam  diiram  culpat. 

4.  Bona  serva  dominam  amat. 

5.  Bonam  servam  domina  et  laudat  et  amat. 

1 A  Phrase  is  a  group  of  connected  words  not  containing  a  subject  and 
predicate.    A  more  exact  definition  will  be  given  later  (148,  2). 

2  The  letters  i.  e.  stand  for  the  Latin  words  id  est,  meaning  that  is. 
3 1,  e.,  the  regular  one,  where  no  special  emphasis  is  to  be  given. 


8  Word  Order 

NORMAL  ORDER  AND  EMPHATIC  ORDER 

19.  From  the  above  sentences  you  may  make  out  the 
following  rules  ^  of  order,  to  guide  you  in  writing,  and 
help  you  in  reading : 

1.  The  normal  order  in  a  Latin  sentence  is: 

Subject,  with  its  modifiers        modifiers  of  verb,  with  verb 
Thus:    Serva  bona  dominam  doram        culpat 

2.  The  Adjective  normally  follows  its  noun. 

Thus:    Serva  bona,  a  good  servant  (no  special  emphasis). 

3.  A  word  or  phrase  may  be  put  out  of  its  normal  position  to 
give  it  emphasis. 

Thus:  Bona  serva,  a  GOOD  servant. 

Bonam  servam  domina  et  laudat  et  amat,  a  GOOD  servant 
the  mistress  both  praises  and  loves. 

a.  Remember,  then,  that  Latin  expresses  by  position  what  in  EngUsh  we 
generally  have  to  express  by  stress  of  voice. 

20.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

,1.  The  harsh  mistress  blames  the  servant. 

2.  The  queen  blames  the  harsh  mistress. 

3.  The  queen  blames  both  the  harsh  mistress  and  the  bad 
servant. 

4.  The  queen  both  praises  and  loves  a  good'^  mistress. 

5.  A  good^  mistress  both  praises  and  loves  a  good  servant. 

lA  "rule"  is  a  brief  statement  of  usage,  summing  up  what  you  have 
learned. 

2  Be  sure  to  express  the  emphasis  by  your  order. 


DISHES  AND  SPOONS  FROM  POMPEII  (SILVER) 


Principles  and  Names 


LESSON  III 

PRINCIPLES  AND  NAMES 

21.  Specimen  Sentences: 

1.  Domina  bona  est,  the  mistress  is  good. 

2.  Serva  bona  est,  the  servant  is  good. 

3.  Serva  coqua  est,  the  servant  is  a  cook. 

a.  The  verbs  which  we  have  had  before  have  expressed  action. 
We  have  now  a  verb,  est,  of  a  new  kind,  expressing  state. 

22.  Verbs  say  ("predicate")  something  about  a  person 
or  thing.  That  of  which  something  is  said  is  called  the 
Subject  (as  "Julia"  in  "Julia  cooks").  That  which  is 
said  ("predicated")  is  called  the  Predicate  (as  "cooks"). 

.23.  The  verbs  we  have  thus  far  had  are  called  Finite 
(the  meaning  of  this  word  will  be  explained  later) .  The 
subject  with  every  one  of  them  (that  which  acts  or  is) 
has  been  in  the  Nominative.  We  can,  then,  lay  down  the 
rule  that: 

24.  The  Subject  of  a  Finite  verb  is  put  in  the  Nomina- 
tive. 

25.  We  have  now  seen  two  ways  of  making  an  adjective 
go  with  a  noun: 

1.  In  the  first  way,  the  adjective  was  directly  attached  to  the 
noun,  as  in  domina  bona  cenam  laudat,  the  good  mistress  praises  the 
dinner.    So  attached,  the  adjective  is  called  Attributive. 

2.  In  the  second  way,  seen  in  the  specimen  sentences  of  this 
Lesson,  the  adjective  is  a  part  of  that  which  is  predicated,  as  in 
domina  bona  est,  the  mistress  is  good  (here  "good"  is  just  as  much 
asserted  of  the  mistress  as  "is").  Thus  used,  an  adjective  is  called 
a  Predicate  Adjective. 


10 


Exercises 


26.  A  noun  may,  in  the  same   way,  be  a  part  of  the 

predicate,  and  is  then  called  a  Predicate  Noun,  as  coqua, 

cook,  in  serva  coqua  est,  the  servant  is  a  cook. 

a.  Since  the  predicate  noun  or  adjective  is  said  of  the  subject, 
you  will  of  course  expect  it  to  agree  with  the  subject. 


27. 

adjective: 
benigna,  good-natured, 
kind. 


VOCABULARY 

verbs: 
est,  is. 
vocat,  calls. 


coqua,  cook. 
iQlia,  Julia. 


28.  READING  MATTER 

1.  Serva  cenam  parat.    Cena  bona  est. 

2.  lulia  coqua  bona  est  J  *  . 

3.  Bona  coqua  liilia  est.^ 

4.  Domina  dura  coquam  vocat. 

5.  Domina  dura  est,  serva  mala/ 

6.  Domina  benigna  est,  serva  bona. 

29.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  The  dinner  is  bad. 

2.  The  cook  is  bad. 

3.  The  stern  mistress  blames  the  cook. 

4.  Julia  is  a  bad  cook. 

5.  Julia  is  a  bad  cook  (or,  a  bad  cook  Julia  is). 

6.  The  kind  queen  calls  the  cook,  and  praises  the  good  dinner. 

1  What  is  the  difference  in  meaning  between  sentences  2  and  3? 


BRONZE  COOKING-UTENSILS 
FEOM  POMPEII 


Nouns  and  Pronouns  11 


LESSON  IV 

DEFINITIONS 

30.  A  noun  that  denotes  a  particular  person,  place,  or 
thing,  is  called  a  Proper  Noun,     Thus  lulia,  Julia, 

31.  A  noun  that  denotes  any  person  or  thing  of  a  class 

is  called  a  Common  Noun,     Thus  serva,  servaiit, 

a.  A  noun  that  denotes  a  number  of  persons  or  things  taken 
together  is  called  a  Collective  Noun.    Thus  turba,  crowd, 

32.  Instead  of  nouns,  we  often  use  other  words  to  denote 
persons  or  things.  Thus  instead  of  saying  ''I  saw  John 
this  morning.  John  was  looking  well,''  we  say  **I  saw 
John  this  morning.  He  was  looking  well."  Words  like  he^ 
they,  you,  J,  this,  who,  etc.,  because  they  stand  instead  of 
nouns,  are  called  Pronouns, 

33.  Some  of  these  pronouns  clearly  tell  us  to  which  of 
the  possible  kinds  of  persons  they  refer,  namely  the  per- 
son speaking  (/,  called  the  first  person),  the  person  spoken 
to  {you,  called  the  second  person),  or  the  person  spoken 
of  [he,  she,  it,  called  the  third  person).  They  are  therefore 
called  Personal  Pronouns, 

34.  Corresponding  words  like  my,  your,  his,  her,  which 
indicate  persons  as  possessing,  are  called  Possessive 
Adjectives,^ 

a.  Possessive  adjectives  have  the  same  position  as  other  adjec- 
tives.   That  is,  they  normally  follow  their  nouns.    Thus: 
serva  mea  bona  est,  my  servant  is  good,  but 
mea  serva  bona  est,  MY  servant  is  good. 

1  Often  called  Possessive  Pronouns.    But  they  are  not  really  pronouns. 


12  Adverbs 

35.  In  Latin,  personal  pronouns  and  possessive  adjec- 
tives are  freely  omitted,  when  the  meaning  is  clear  with- 
out them.  Thus  after  the  question,  serva  bona  est?  is  the 
servant  good  f  the  answer  she  is  good  would  be  expressed 
simply  by  bona  est. 

36.  A  word  that  modifies  the  meaning  of  a  verb  is 
called  an  Adverb;  but  adverbs  may  also  modify  adjectives 
or  other  adverbs.     Thus: 

He  does  it  willingly  (modifying  a  verb). 

He  does  it  very  willingly  (modifying  another  adverb). 

He  is  very  willing,  or.  He  is  not  willing  (modifying  an  adjective). 

37.  Notice  the  position  of  the  Latin  Adverb  in  the  fol- 
lowing sentences  (semper  means  always  and  saepe  often): 

Domina  servam  semper  culpat,  the  mistress  always  blames  the 

servant. 
Serva  dominam  saepe  culpat,  the  servant  often  blames  the  mistress. 

From  these  we  may  lay  down  the  rule  that: 

38.  Adverbs  7iormally  precede  the  words  which  they 
modify.  ^ 

a.  But  of  course  an  adverb,  like  any  other  word,  may  be  put  out 
of  its  normal  position  to  give  it  emphasis. 

39.  VOCABULARY 

PERSONAL   pronouns:  POSSESSIVE   ADJECTIVES! 

me,  Trie.    Accusative.  mea,  my,  mine. 

te,  thee,  you  (in  speaking  to*     tua,    thy,  thine,  your,  yours  (in 
a  single  person).  Accusative.  speaking  to  a  single  person). 

ADVERBS :  CONJUNCTION : 

nOn,  not.  sed,  but. 

saepe,  often.  noun: 

semper,  always.  turba,  crowd,  mob. 


Exercises  .  13 

40.  READING  MATTER 

1.  lulia  coqua  mea  est.    Bona'  coqua  lulia  est. 

2.  Coqua  mea  bona  6enam  parat;-  et  cenam  semper  parat 
bonam.^ 

3.  Mea  coqua  cenam  parat;  sed  malam  saepe  parat  cenam. 

4.  Coqua  tua  bona  est?    (Answer)  Mala  est. 

5.  Regina  me  amat,  non  te. 

6.  Regina  benigna  est.     Amat  et  te  et  me. 

7.  Regina  te  vocat. 

8.  Regina  turbam^  non  amat. 

41.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  My  cook  is  good,  yours  bad. 

2.  Is  Julia  your  cook?  (Answer)  Julia  is  my  cook.  (Question) 
Is  she  a  good  cook?  (Answer)  She  loves  a  good  dinner,  but  she 
is  a  bad  cook. 

3.  The  queen  is  a  good  friend. 

4.  A  good  friend  the  queen  is ! 

5.  The  queen  loves  ^/oz^,  not  me.     She  always  praises  you. 

6.  The  queen  oftem  praises  you. 

7.  A  mob  calls  you. 

1  What  is  the  effect  of  the  order?  2 Translate  by  is  getting. 

3 Does  this  probably  mean  f/ie  mob,  or  a  mob? 


BRONZE  PITCHERS  AND  DRINKING-HORN  FROM  POMPEII 


W:  Appositives 


LESSON  V 
PRINCIPLES  AND  NAMES 

42.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Coqua  cenam  parat,  the  cook  gets  dinner,  or  the  cook  is  getting 

dinner^  or  the  cook  does  get  dinner. 
Coqua  cenam  parat?  is  the  cook  getting  dinner?  or  does  the  cook 

get  dinner? 

a.  Notice  that  the  single  verb  parat  is  used  in  Latin  where  Eng- 
lish uses  three  distinct  forms,  gets,  is  getting,  does  get.  You  must, 
therefore,  translate  always  according  to  what  is  the  most  probable 
force  in  the  given  place.  And  in  translating  English  into  Latin, 
you  must  always  use  the  one  Latin  form. 

43.  Specimen  Sentences: 

lalia  coqua  cenam  parat,  Julia,  the  cook,  is  getting  dinner. 
Domina   laliam  coquam   laudat,    the  mistress  praises   Julia,  the 
cook. 

a.  In  these  sentences,  you  see  that  the  word  coqua  is  put  along- 
side of  iQlia,  and  coquam  alongside  of  iQliam,  to  tell  us  something 
more  particularly  about  Inlia  or  iQliam.  Such  a  putting -along  side 
is  called  Apposition,  and  the  word  so  attached  to  another  is  called 
an  Appositive. 

b.  An  appositive  must,  of  course,  show  by  its  form  with  what 
word  it  goes.    Hence: 

44.  An  Appositive  Noun  agrees  in  case  with  the 
Noun  or  Pronoun  to  which  it  belongs. 


Vocative  16 

45.  There  is,  in  the  forms  which  we  are  now  studying, 
another  case,  precisely  like  the  Nominative,  named  the 
Vocative  (from  vocat,  calls),  because  used  in  speaking  to 
(addressing)  a  person.     Thus: 

Cena,  coqua,  parata  est?  Cook,  is  dinner  ready  9 
a.  A  Vocative  normally  stands  after  one  or  more  words. 

46.  Certain  words  loosely  thrown  into  the  sentence 
(^'interjected")  are  called  Interjections,  Thus  5,  Eng- 
lish O  or  Oh. 

47.  VOCABULARY 

nouns:  adjectives: 

culina,  kitchen.  magna,  great,  large,  big. 

culpa  (noun  corresponding  to  the  ^divv a.,  small,  little. 

verb  c\i\paX),  fault,  blame.  parata  (connected  with  the  verb 

filia,  daughter.  parat),  prepared,  ready, 

villa,  villa.  pulchra,  beautiful. 

splendida,  splendid. 

verb:  adverb: 

%iisptctBX,expects,awaits,  waits  cDr,  why, 
for.' 

48.  READING  MATTER 

1.  Domina  cenam  exspectat.     Coquam  vocat. 

2.  (The  mistress  says  to  the  cook)  Cena^  ciir  n5n  parata  est? 
(The  cook  answers)  Est,  domina,  parata. 

3.  (The  mistress  says)  Cena  tua,  coqua,  saepe  mala  est. 
(Answer)  Culpa,  domina,  non  raea  est.  (Mistress)  Cur  non  tua 
est?    (Answer)  Culina  parva  et  mala  est. 

4.  (The  cook  says)  Domina  cur  me  semper  culpat? 

5.  (A  dialogue  of  mothers)  Filia  tua  pulchra  est.  (Answer) 
Filia  mea  pulchra  sed  diira  est.     Tua  et  pulchra  est  et  benigna. 

6.  Villa  tua,  amica  mea,  magna  et  splendida  est. 

7.  Turba  magna  est! 

1 "  Waits  for"  is  really  a  single  idea,  just  as  "  awaits  "is. 
2  The  thing  of  most  consequence  is  put  first  to  arrest  the  attention,  as  if 
we  should  say  "the  dinner  now :  why  isn't  it  ready? " 


16  Word  Order  [Continued) 

EMPHATIC  ORDER,  CONTINUED 

49.  Evidently  the  order  in  Latin  is  very  nearly  free. 
Let  us  see,  then,  how,  in  a  sentence  of  several  words,  this 
freedom  may  be  employed  to  give  emphasis. 

1.  In  the  second  sentence  in  48  above,  the  dinner  v^sls  the  impor- 
tant thing.  Notice  how  this  was  expressed  by  putting  cena  at  the 
head  of  the  sentence. 

2.  In  the  second  sentence  of  40  (turn  back),  the  goodness  of  the 
dinner  was  the  important  thing.  Notice  how  this  was  expressed  by 
putting  bonam  at  the  end  of  the  sentence. 

From  these  instances  we  may  see  that: 

50.  The  most  emphatic  places  in  a  Latin  sentence;  or 
group  of  words,  are  the  first  and  the  last. 

a.  This  is  just  what  we  should  expect  in  any  language  in  which 
the  order  was  free.  For,  evidently,  emphasis  may  be  obtained  either 
by  putting  an  important  thing  before  the  hearer  immediately,  or  by 
holding  it  back  for  a  time,  to  stimulate  his  curiosity,  or  to  surprise 
him  with  an  added  idea  (principle  of  Suspense). 

Apply  these  principles  in  your  own  writing. 

51.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  Mistress,  the  dinner  is  served.^ 

2.  Your  servant,  my  daughter,  is  a  good  cook.  (Answer)  The 
dinner  is  often  good,  (but^)  not  always. 

3.  Julia,  the  cook,  is  preparing  dinner.  But  my  mistress  does 
not  expect  a  good  (one  ^).  (Question)  Why  does  she  not  expect 
a  good  (one)  ?    (Answer)  The  kitchen  is  bad,  and  the  cook  is  bad. 

4.  Julia,  the  dinner  is  always  bad.    The  fault  is  yours. 

5.  Your  villa  is  splendid.  (Answer)  My  villa  is  splendid,  but 
it  is  not  beautiful.     Your  villa  is  small,  but  beautiful. 

6.  A  big  mob  calls  (for)  you. 

lUse  the  word  for  '* prepared,"  "ready." 

2  Omit  in  translating,  as  unnecessary.  In  general,  words  in  parentheses 
(  )  are  not  to  be  translated. 


Genitive  and  Dative  17 


LESSON  VI 
PRINCIPLES  AND  NAMES 

52.  Specimen  Sentence: 

Villa  reginae  splendida  est,  the  villa  of  the  queen  (or  the  queen's 
villa)  is  splendid, 
a.  The  case  of  reginae  is  called  the  Genitive,    It  corresponds  to 
our  English  Possessive  case,  or  the  equivalent  phrase  with  of.    As 
you  see  in  this  example, 

63.  The  Genitive  may  express  that  to  which  something 
belongs  (Genitive  of  Possession).     And 

a.  A  Genitive  normally  follows  its  noun. 

64.  There  is,  in  the  set  of  forms  with  which  we  have 
begun,  another  case,  called  the  Dative,  identical  in  form 
with  the  Genitive  (thus  reginae),  but  with  an  entirely 
different  meaning,  as  in: 

Filia  mea  reginae  cenam  dat,  my  daughter  is  giving  a  dinner  to 
the  queen  {or  for  the  queen).    Reginae  is  here  Dative. 

Regina  filiae  meae  benigna  est,  the  queen  is  kind  to  my  daughter. 
FTliae  is  here  Dative. 
As  you  see  in  these  examples, 

a.  The  Dative  normally  precedes  the  word  or  words  which  it 
modifies. 

66.  The  Dative  expresses  Figurative  Direction^  of  vari- 
ous kinds.  Hence  it  may  be  called  the  ^'/o,  toward,  or 
for  case." 

iThat  is,  not  literal  direction  in  space,  but  the  direction  in  which  an  act, 
a  quality,  etc.,  operates, — that  toward  which  it  goes  out. 

Notice  that,  in  English,  literal  direction  and  figurative  direction  are 
expressed  in  one  and  the  same  way.  Compare  ''go  to  the  city"  and  "be 
kind  to  me"  (the  same  word  "  to "  in  both).  We  shall  see  later  that  Latin 
has  a  different  way  for  expressing  literal  direction  (78,  bj. 


18  Exercise 

a.  Compare  the  following,  in  which  the  English  word  "to," 
"toward,"  or  "for,"  expresses  this  same  idea  of  figurative  direction: 

He  gives  a  letter  to  me  (direction  taken  by  an  Act). 

This  is  pleasant  to  (or  for)  me  (direction  taken  by  a  Quality. 
The  pleasantness  goes  out  toward  me). 

He  is  opposed  to  me  (direction  taken  by  an  Attitude). 

He  is  unfriendly  toward  me  (direction  taken  by  an  Attitude). 

He  is  near  to  me  (direction  taken  by  a  Relation). 

66.  VOCABULARY 

nouns:  adjectives: 

epistula,  epistle,  letter.  adversa,  adverse,  opposed. 

si\va.y  icood,  forest.  (Word  of  Attitude, taking  Dat.) 

pronouns:  grata,   gratifying,  pleasing, 

mihi,  {to  or  for)  me;  Dative.  agreeable.    (Word  of  Quality, 

tibi,  {to  or  for)  you;  Dative.  taking  Dat.) 

^^j^  inimica,  unfriendly,  hostile. 

cenat    (verb    corresDonding    to  (Word  of  Attitude,  taking  Dat.) 

the  noun  cena),  dines.  ''"a,  angry.  (Word  of  Attitude, 

dat,  gives.                '  taking  Dat.) 

adverb:  propinqua,  near.     (Word  of  Ke- 

tam,  so.  lation,  taking  Dat.) 

67.  READING  MATTER 

Caution. — When  you  meet  a  doubtful  form,  e.  g.,i  the  Genitive-or-Dative 
form  in  -ae,  or  the  Nominative-or- Vocative  form  in  -a,  you  must  carefully 
hold  your  judgment  in  suspense  until  all  the  evidence  has  come  in.  Do  not 
jump  at  the  first  possibility  that  comes  intx)  your  mind. 

1.  Villa  reginae  silvae  magnae  propinqua  est. 

2.  Villa  mea  parva  mihi  grata  est. 

3.  Serva  dominae  epistulam  dat. 

4.  Domina  coquae  cur  irata^  est  ?     (Answer)  Cena  mala  est. 

5.  Regina  cenat.    Te,  filia  mea,  exspectat. 

6.  Regina,  filia  mea,  te  non  amat.     Tibi  semper  adversa  est. 

7.  Regina  mihi  cur  tam  inimica  est? 

1  This  stands  for  exempli  gratia,  meaning /or  example. 

2  Angry  toward  the  cook.    But  we  say  in  English  angry  at. 


Exercise 


19 


58.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  Thfe  queen  loves  the  great  forest. 

2.  My  villa  is  near^  (to)?  the  splendid  villa  of  the  queen.    But 
the  queen  is  unfriendly  toward  me. 

3.  My  friend,  why  is  the  queen  always  so  opposed  to  you  ? 
Why  is  she  angry  at  (—  toward)  you? 

4.  My  daughter  gives  (to)  me  a  letter. 

5.  Your  letter  is  pleasing  to  me. 

6.  The  mistress  is  dining.     The  dinner  is  good. 

1 A  predicate  noun  or  adjective  regularly  stands  next  to  the  verb,  since 
the  two  together  make  one  idea. 

2  In  English,  we  omit  the  preposition  "  to  "  in  such  a  combination. 


IN  THE  RUINS  OF  HADRIAN'S  VILLA  NEAR 

TIVOLI  (TIBUR) 

Fifteen  miles  from  Rome 


20  Direct  Object 

LESSON  VII 
PRINCIPLES  AND  NAMES 

59.  The  verbs  which  we  have  been  using  have  all  rep- 
resented an  act  or  state  as  a  fact.  Such  verbs  are  said  to 
be  in  the  Indicative  Mood,  They  have  dealt  with  present 
time,  and  hence  are  said  to  be  in  the  Present  Tense. 
Thus  coqua  cenam  parat,  the  cook  prepares  (or  is  pre- 
paring) dinner  (a  fact,  in  the  Present). 

a:  Mood  is  the  expression  of  the  way  in  which  the  act  is  looked 
at,  e.  g.,  as  3.  fact  (Indicative). 

h.  Tense  is  the  expression  of  the  idea  of  time  through  the  form  of 
the  verb. 

c.  The  negative  (denying  word)  for  the  Indicative  is  nOn,  not,  as 
we  have  already  seen. 

60.  The  ending  -t,  which  we  have  had  in  all  our  verbs, 
indicates  the  action  of  a  person  or  thing  spoken  of^  called 
the  third  person.  In  the  same  way,  the  ending  -0  indi- 
cates the  person  speaking  ("I"),  called  the  first  person. 
Thus  cenam  paro,  I  am  preparing  dinner.  The  first  per- 
son of  est,  {he)  is,  is  sum,  (J)  am, 

a.  The  endings  alone  are  enough  tq^indicate  the  person,  without 
the  use  of  any  word  for  "I,"  "he,"  "it,"  etc.  Thus  regina  sum  must 
mean  "7  am  queen,'^  not  "3/ie  is  queen,''  nor  ^^you  are  queen.'' 

61.  A  Transitive  Verb  is  one  that  expresses  an  act  im- 
mediately affecting  some  person  or  thing.  .  The  person  or 
thing  immediately  affected  is  called  the  Direct  Object. 
Thus  servam  is  a  Direct  Object  in  Anna  servam  laudat, 
Anna  praises  the  servant.     We  have  repeatedly  seen  that: 

62.  The  Direct  Object  of  a  Transitive  Verb  is  put  in 
the  Accusative, 


Indirect  Object  21 

63.  An  Intransitive  Verb  is  one  that  expresses  an  act 
not  immediately  affecting  any  person  or  thing,  or  a  state. 
Thus   ceno,  I  dine,  sum,  I  am. 

a.  From  its  nature,  such  a  verb  cannot  have  a  Direct  Object. 

64.  We  have  also  seen  another  case  depending  upon  a 
verb,  as  in: 

Domina  mihi  servam  laudat,  the  mistress  praises  the  servant  to  vie. 

a.  Here  the  case  of  mihi  (the  ^o-case,  or  Dative)  expresses  the 
person  indirectly  affected  by  the  act.  This  is  called  the  Indirect 
Object. 

We  may  then  lay  down  the  rule  that: 

65.  The  Indirect  Object  of  a  Verb  is  put  in  the  Dative, 
From  the  abovejsxample  note  also  that: 

a.  The  Indirect  Object  normally  precedes  the  Direct  Object. 

66.  We  may  likewise  make  a  short  rule  combining 
the  other  uses  of  the  Direction-Case  seen  in  various  ex- 
amples in  the  last  Lesson.  These  uses  are  essentially  one 
and  the  same.      Compare  the  following: 

Villa  mihi  grata  est,  the  villa  is  agreeable  to  me. 

QUALITY  of  the  villa,  going  out  toward  me.  (mihi,  Dative) 
Regina  mihi  adversa  est,  the  queen  is  opposed  to  me. 

ATTITUDE  of  the  queen  toward  me.  (mihi,  Dative) 

Villa  silvae  propinqua  est,  the  villa  is  near  {to)  the  wood. 

RELATION  of  the  villa  to  the  wood.  (silvae.  Dative) 

We  see,  then,  that: 

67.  The  Dative  is  used  to  express  that  toward  which  a 
Quality,  Attitude,  or  Relation  is  directed. 

68.  READING  MATTER 

1.  Filiam  tuam,  regina  me*a,  laiido.    Bona  est  et  benigna. 

2.  Amo  reginae  filiam;  sad  reginae  non  grata  sum.  Mihi 
dura  est. 

3.  Regina  mihi  semper  benigna  est.    Tibi  cur  tam  inimica  est  ? 


22  Exercise 

4.  Domina  mea  reginae  cenam  magnam  dat. 

5.  (The  mistress  says)  Kegina,  coqua,  cenam  meam  non  lau- 
dat.    Culpa  tua  est.    Tibi  irata  sum. 

6.  Villa  amicae  meae  silvae  pulchrae  propinqua  est. 

7.  Epistula  tua  mihi  n5n  grata  est.    Tibi  irata  sum. 

69.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  Your  mistress  is  kind  to  you.    Mine  is  always  angry  at  me. 

2.  CJook,  I  do  not  praise  your  dinner.  It^is  (a)  big  (one);  good 
it  is  not.  Why  is  it  not  good?  (The  honest  cook's  answer) 
The  fault  is  mine,  mistress.    I  am  not  a  good  cook. 

3.  The  villa  of  the  queen's  daughter  is  near  (to)  mine.  It  is 
a  splendid  villa. 

4.  I  am  angry^  at  the  daughter  of  the  queen.  She  is  always 
opposed  to  me. 

5.  Your  letter,  my  friend,  is  not  agreeable  to  me. 

iWhen  you  are  puzzled  how  to  express  a  given  idea,  look  at  the  Latin 
Beading  Matter  and  see  how  it  was  expressed  there.  Thus  if  the  "at"  of 
"angry  at"  troubles  you,  look  in  the  Latin  sentences  of  section  57  for  an 
irata,  and  see  how  the  idea  was  there  expressed. 


YOUNG  ROMAN  LADY,  POR- 
TRAIT BUST 

From  Excavations  in  widen- 
ing the  Tiber,  1880 


Ablative  23 

LESSON  VIII 
PRINCIPLES  AND  NAMES 

70.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Coqua  a  culinaabest,  the  cook  is  absent  from  the  kitchen. 
Coqua  cum  domina  in  culina  est,  the  cook  is  with  the  mistress  in 
the  kitchen, 
a.  In  culina  and  domina,  we  have  a  new  case,  with  the  same 
letters  as  the  Nominative,  but  sounding  differently,  having  a  final 
long  a.    This  case  is  called  the  Ablative. 

71.  The  Latin  Ablative  is  a  mixed  case,  being  made  up 
of  the  remains  of  three  cases,  which  originally  were 
entirely  distinct,  in  form  as  well  as  in  meaning :  the  true 
Ablative,  or /rom -case, ^  expressing  separation;  the  Socia- 
tive,  or  with-case,  expressing  association ;  and  the  Locative, 
or  m-case,  expressing  location.  It  inherited  the  forces  of 
all  these  cases,  and  thus  expresses  the  /rom-idea,  the 
with-idea,  and  the  in-idea. 

72.  According  to  its  forces,  it  is  convenient  to  speak  of 
the  case  as: 

1.  The  Separative  Ablative,"^  auBwering  the  question  "whence?" 
"from  what  place?" 

2.  The  Sociative  Ablative,  answering  the  question  "with  whom?" 
or  "with  what?" 

3.  The  Locative  Ablative,  answering  the  question  "  where?  "^ 

73.  Words  like  from,  with,  in,  which  define  the  rela- 
tion of  a  noun  or  pronoun  to  another  word,  are  called 
Prepositions. 


iThe  case  is  named  from  this  use.  The  word  "ablative"  means  "the 
case  of  taking-away." 

2  Or  Ablative  of  Separation. 

3  The  word  Locative  is  the  best  word  to  use,  but  not  a  perfect  one.  It 
should  be  understood  as  covering  exact  location  only — English  in,  on,  or 
under— hut  no  other  ideas  of  place. 


24  Exercises 

74.  VOCABULARY 

(New  verbs  will  henceforth  be  given  in  the  first  person.) 

prepositions:  adverbs: 

aorab,^/rom,ait?o2//rom.  Takes  hlc^  in  this  place,  here. 

Abl.  hodie  (on  this  day=:),  today. 

cum,  with.    Takes  Abl.  ibi,  there. 

in,  in,  on.    Takes  Abl.  ubi,  where. 

verbs:  quoque,  also,  too.    (Postpositive, 

absum  (ab+sum),  am  away,  am  ^-  ^-  "  P^^^^^  ^^^^^•"    ^^^^^^ 

absent,  am  distant.  .    ^^^^  ^^^^^  ^^^  ^^^^  modified.) 

ambulo,  ivalk. 

75.  READING  MATTER 

1.  luliahicest?     (Ans.)  In  culina  est. 

2.  (Said  by  a  servant  to  a  caller)  Domina  a  villa  abest. 
(Ques.)'^  Ubi  est?  (Ans.)^  In  silva  est.  (Ques.)  Ubi  silva  est? 
(Ans.)  Silva  villae  propinqua  est. 

3.  Regina  hodie  cum  filia  mea  cenat.  (Ans.)  Amat  regina 
filiam  tuam;  meae  inimlca  est. 

4t.  Ubi  domina  tua  est?  (Ans.)  In  silva  cum  amica  ambulat. 
Silvam  amat.  (First  speaker)  Mea  quoque  domina  silvam  amat, 
et  ibi  saepe  ambulat. 

76.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  Where  is  your  mistress?  Is  she  here?  (Ans.)  She  is  in 
the  kitchen  with  the  cook. 

2.  Why  is  your  daughter  absent  from  the  villa?     (Ans.)  She 
J    is  dining  today  with  the  daughter  of  the  queen. 

3.  My  friend's  villa  is  near  a  great  forest,  where  I  often  walk. 
I  love  the  forest. 

4.  My  daughter  also  loves  the  forest,  and  often  walks  there. 

1  Ab  before  vowels  and  h,  a  before  consonants.  But  before  most  con- 
sonants ab  may  also  be  used. 

2  We  will  now  use  the  abbreviations  Ques.  and  Ans.  for  Question  and 
Answer. 


Cases  with  Prepositions  25 

LESSON  IX 
CASES  WITH  PREPOSITIONS 

77.  VOCABULARY 

prepositions:  verb: 

ad,  at,  (near)  by;  with  verbs  of      habito,  inhabit,  dwell,  live. 

motion,  to,  toward.  Takes  Ace. 
ante,  before,  in-front-of.    Takes 

Ace.  adverb: 

post,  behind^ after.     Takes  Ace.      nunc,  now. 
trans,    across,    beyond.     Takes 

Ace. 
per,  through.    Takes  Ace.  '        noun: 

in  (same  word  as  before),  into,      casa,  cottage,  cabin. 

when  used  with  Accusative. 

CASE  USES  AND  SPECIMEN  SENTENCES 

78.  Only  Prepositions  having  a  from,  with,  or  in  force 
take  the  Ablative.  You  will  find  that  Prepositions  ex- 
pressing other  space-relations^  take. the  Accusative.    Thus : 

silva  post  vTllam  est,  the  wood  is  behind  the  villa. 
villa  ante  silvam  est,  the  villa  is  before  (in-front-of)  the  wood, 
villa  ad  silvam  est,  the  villa  is  by  the  wood. 
ad  silvam  ambulat,  she  walks  to  the  wood. 
^n  silvam  ambulat,  she  walks  into  the  wood. 
^But  in  silva  ambulat,  she  walks  in  the  wood. 
Notice  that,  in  accordance  with  the  principle  above,  and  the  one 
given  in  72,  3: 

a.  The  Accusative  is  used  with  in  to  express  the  Place  To  Which 
something  moves,  the  Ablative  to  express  the  Place  In  Which 
something  is  or  is  done. 

b.  Literal  Direction  in  Space  is  thus  expressed  by  the  Accusative 
with  a  Preposition  (e.  g.,  ad  or  in).  The  Dative  expresses  Figurative 
Direction  only. 

c.  Only  the  Accusative  and  Ablative  are  used  with  Prepositions. 

1  In  the  real  force  of  the  Latin  prepositions.  But  our  expression,  with 
our  preposition,  may  sometimes  be  quite  different. 


26 


Declining 


THE  DECLINING  OF  NOUNS  AND  ADJECTIVES 
79.  We  have  seen  all  the  six  Latin  cases,  with  their  fun- 
damental forces,  and  all  the  forms  of  the  Singular  number 
(that  is,  the  number  which  indicates  one  person  or  thing) 
in  the  first  set  of  case-forms,  called  the  First  Declension, 
We  shall  now  learn  to  give  in  order  the  six  cases  for 
serva,  servant,  then  for  bona,  good,  and  then  for  serva 
bona,  good  servant,  together  (thus  Nom.  serva  bona.  Gen. 
servae  bonae,  etc.).     This  is  called  Declining. 


80. 


First  Declension:   Singular  Number 


Noun 


Adjective 
IN  Agreement 

bona 

e       bonae 


servae       bonae 


servam      bonam 


(serva 
serva 


bona 
bona 


English 
Translation 

the  good  servant 
of  the  good  ser- 
vant, or  the  good 
servant's 
to  or  for  the  good 
servant 
the  good  servant 


(O)  good  servant 
from,  with,  or 
in  the  good  ser- 
vant 


Fundamental 
Case-Meanings 


Case 
Nom.  Subject. 
Gen.    That  to  which  some- 
thing belongs. 

Dat.    Figurative  Direction. 


Ace. 


Vcc. 
Abl. 


Space-Ideas  (except 

from,    with  and  in 

ideas),  and  Direct 

Object. 

Address. 

From,  with,  and  in 

Ideas. 


81.  We  have  now  had  all  the  Latin  Parts  of  Speech, 
which  are  as  in  English,  minus  the  Article,^ — namely: 
Noun,  Adjective,  Pronoun,  Verb,  Adverb,  Preposition, 
Conjunction,  Interjection. 

a.  Henceforth  words  will  be  arranged  in  the  vocabularies  in 
alphabetical  order,  unless  there  is  a  special  reason  for  bringing  par- 
ticular words  together. 


Exercises  27 

82.  READING  MATTER 

1.  Filia  tua  hodie  hie  est?  (Ans.)  A  villa  abest.  In  silva 
cum  amiea  ambulat.  (First  speaker)  Mea  quoque  filia  ibi  nunc 
ambulat. 

2.  Ubi  iQlia  coqua  est  ?  In  culina  non  est.  (Ans.)  Ad  casam 
amicae  ambulat.  (Ques.)  Ubicasaest?  Est  ad  silvam?  (Ans.) 
Trans  silvam  amica  habitat.    Nunc  per  silvam  coqua  ambulat. 

3.  Villa  mea  ante  silvam  magnam  est.  (Ques.)  Filia  tua 
saepe  in  silva  ambulat  ?  (Ans.)  Saepe  a  villa  ad  silvam  ambu- 
lat; sed  in  silvam  non  ambulat.    Filia  parva  est,  silva  magna. 

4.  Ubi  amica  tua  habitat  ?    Post  silvam  habitat. 

83.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  Why  is  the  cook  absent  from  the  kitchen?  (Ques.)  She 
isn't  there?    (Another  servant  says)  Here  she  is, 

2.  A  friend  of  the  cook  lives  in  a  little  cottage  behind  the 
wood. 

3.  Where  is  your  daughter  now?  (Ans.)  She  is  dining  with 
the  queen  today.  (First  speaker)  My  daughter,  too,  is  dining 
with  the  queen. 

4-.  Where  does  your  friend  live?  Does  she  live  in-front-of 
the  wood?  (Ans.)  She  lives  beyond  the  wood.  (Ques.)  Does 
she  often  walk  into  the  wood?  (Ans.)  She  often  walks  through^ 
the  wood  to  my  villa. 

1  Always  keep  the  preposition  before  its  noun  or  pronoun.  When,  then, 
you  want  to  emphasize  a  preposition,  put  the  whole  group  into  an  emphatic 
place. 


SILVER  PITCHERS  FOUND  IN  BOSCOREALE 


28 


First  Declension  in  Full 


LESSON  X 

FIRST  DECLENSION  (FINISHED) 

84.  We  may  now  finish  the  First  Declension  by  adding 
the  Plural  (that  is,  the  number  which  indicates  more  than 
one  person  or  thing).     The  case-meanings  are  the  same. 

85.  Words  of  the  First  Declension  are  called  a-Stems, 
because  their  stems  originally  ended  in  -a-  throughout.^ 

a.  The  stem  of  a  word  is  the  part  which  remains  constant,  and  to 
which  the  endings  are  added  as  the  word  changes  in  inflection. 

b.  When  the  stem  ends  in  a  vowel,  a  change  in  the  stem  or  the 
ending,  or  in  both,  may  take  place,  so  that  sometimes  neither  appears 
as  it  originally  was.  But  in  such  cases  it  is  still  convenient  to  use 
the  word  "ending"  for  the  apparent  ending. 


86. 

FIRST   DECLENSION:    SL-Stems 

Noun                   Adjective 

Stem  serva- 

bona- 

SINGULAR 

Endings 

Nominative 

serva 

bona 

-a 

Genitive 

servae 

bonae 

-ae 

Dative 

servae 

bonae 

-ae 

Accusative 

servam 

bonam 

-am 

Vocative 

serva 

bona 

-a 

Ablative 

serva 

PLURAL 

bona 

-a 

Nominative 

servae 

bonae 

-ae 

Genitive 

servarum 

bonarum 

-arum 

Dative 

servls 

bonis 

-Is 

Accusative 

servas 

bonas 

-as 

Vocative 

servae 

bonae 

-ae 

Ablative 

eervis 

bonis 

-Is 

-iJn  the  First  Declension,  you  can  see  something  of  the  a-sound  in 
almost  every  form.  But  the  original  long  sound  has  been  shortened  in. 
several  places. 


Infinitive  29 

a.  Learn  to  decline  serva  and  bona  separately  and  together. 

b.  You  will  find  that,  in  the  Plurals  of  all  Declensions,  Nomina- 
tive and  Vocative  are  alike,  and  Dative  and  Ablative  are  alike, 

c.  Notice,  that  in  the  First  Declension,  the  Genitive  and  Dative 
Singular  are  like  the  Nominative  and  Vocative  Plural.  You  must  be 
on  your  guard  when  you  meet  one  of  these  doubtful  forms. 

87.  The  Infinitive  is  a  kind  of  verb-noun.  It  expresses 
the  mere  idea  of  action  or  being.  Thus  amare,  io  love, 
Presen,t  Infinitive  of  amo,  I  love, 

a.  An  Infinitive  that  completely  fills  out  tho  meaning  of  another 
verb,  as  in  ambulare  amo,  I  love  to  ivalk,  is  often  called  a  Comple- 
mentary Infinitive  ("complementary"  is  from  a  Latin  word  meaning 
*^fillout"). 

b.  In  general,  the  Infinitive  in  Latin  is  used  in  much  the  same 
way  as  in  English,  e.  g.,  as  Subject,  Object,  or  Complement.  Differ- 
ences will  be  pointed  out  later. 

88.  The  third  person  plural  of  the  Present  Indicative 
is  shown  by  the  ending  -nt.  Thus  amant,  {they)  love, 
sunt,  (they)  are. 


89.  VOCABULARY 

beata,  happy,  blessed,  fortunate,  rdstica,  rustic,  country. 

cGra,  care,  anxiety.  sine,  Prep.,  without.    Takes  Sepa- 

femina,  woman.  rative  Ablative. 

multa,  much.    In  Plural,  many,  tranquilla,  tranquil. 

pectlnia,  money.  vita,  life. 


90.  READING  MATTER 

1.  Epistulas  ab  amicis  nunc  exspecto. 

2.  Amo  arnicas  meas:  me  amant  amicae  meae. 

3.  Amicae  meae  filias  amo.     Et  pulchrae  et  bonae  sunt. 

4.  Amo  per  silvas  cum  amicis  meis  ambulare.     (Ans.)^  Amicae 
quoque  meae  amant  in  silvis  ambulare. 


30  Exercises 

5.  Sunt^  pulchrae  villae  et  ad  silvam  et  trans  silvam. 

6.  Vitam  tranquillam,  amicae  meae,  sine  multa  pecunia  et 
multis  euris  amo.     Beata  est  vita  riistiea. 

7.  Multis  feminis  vita  splendida  grata  est:  mihi  grata  est 
vita  tranquilla.     Ciira  mult  arum  servarum  mihi  non  grata  est. 

91.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  The  mistresses  of  good  servants  are  happy! 

2.  Much  money  gives  many  anxieties.  (Ans.)  But  money  is 
agreeable. 

3.  There  are  many  cottages  by  the  forest.  (Ans.)  There  are 
many  beyond  the  forest  too. 

4.  Many  women  love  a  tranquil  country  life  without  care. 

5.  A.  tranquil  country  life  is  agreeable  to  me,  and  to  my 
friends  also. 

6.  My  friends  live  by  a  forest. 

7.  My  daughters  love  to  walk  with  friends  through  forests. 

8.  I  often  walk  to  the  forest,  not  often  i7ito  the  forest. 

9.  Dinner  is  ready,  my  daughters.     Where  are  my  friends? 

^ There  are.  The  English  "there"  is  merely  "expletive"  (i.e.,  a 
"filling-out"  word).  Sunt  is  not  emphatic,  but,  like  "there,"  is  put  first 
in  order  that  the  more  important  words  may  be  held  up  (Suspense). 


FARMER  AND  WOOD 
Ruins  of  ancient  Aqueduct  in  distance 


Four  Types  of  Conjugation 


31 


LESSON  XI 

THE  FOUR  CONJUGATIONS 

92.  There  are  four  regular  types  of  Verb  Inflection, 
known  as  the  Four  Conjugations.  They  are  distinguished 
by  the  vowel  which  ends  the  stem  in  the  Present  ("char- 
acteristic vowel").  This  is  most  conveniently  seen  in  the 
Present  Infinitive.     Thus : 


Conjugation 

Present 
Indicative 

Present 
Infinitive 

Present  Stem 
Ends  In 

I 

amO 

ama-re,  to  love 

-a-  (ama-) 

II 

moneO 

mone-re,  to  ivarn 

-e-  (mone-) 

III 
IV 

tegO 
audio 

tege-re,  to  cover 
audi-re,  to  hear 

-e-  (tege-) 
-1-  (audi-) 

93.  A  few  verbs,  called  Irregular,  are  inflected  in  a 
different  way.     Thus  sum,  am,  Infinitive,  esse,  to  be, 

94.  We  have  already  had  half  of  the  group  of  First 
Conjugation  forms  with  which  we  began  (namely  amo, 
amat,  ^mant).  The  whole  group  will  now  be  given, 
together  with  the  forms  for  sum. 


96. 

PRESENT  INDICATIVE 

First  Conjugation 

Irregular 

Stem  ama-                             Personal  Endings 

1st  Pers.  Sing 

.  amO,  I  love                     -0  or  -m 

sum,  I  am 

2d      *'        " 

amas,  you  love               -s 

es,  you  are 

or  thou  lovest 

or  thou  art 

3d      *' 

amat,  he  {she,  it)  loves   -I 

est,  he  {she,  it)  is 

1st  Pers.  PI. 

araamus,  we  love            -mus 

sumus,  we  are 

2d      "       " 

amatis,  you  Jove            -tis 

estis,  you  are 

3d      "       - 

amant,  they  love            -nt 

sunt,  they  are 

a.  Amo  originally  was  ama-0  (the  -a-  being  shortened  before  a 
vowel);    But  the  a  and  0  ran  together  and  the  a  disappeared. 


32  Exercises 

b.  The  forms  of  these  verbs  show  the  Number  and  Person  of  the 
Subject.  When,  then,  the  Subject  is  expressed,  the  verb  will  agree 
with  it  in  Number  and  Person. 

96.  VOCABULARY 

instSL^Just.  0,  O,  or  0/i  (often  used  in  address, 

iuvO,  help.  though  never  necessary). 

\aet3Ly  joyous  J  glad,  happy.  quia,  Conj.,  because. 

97.  READING  MATTER 

1.  Dominam  tuam  amas?  (Ans.)  Dominam  meam  amo.  Ser- 
vis  semper  benigna  est. 

2.  Dominam,  o  servae,  cur  semper  laudatis?  (Ans.)  Dominam 
laudamus,  quia  semper  iusta  et  benigna  est. 

3.  Multae  feminae  pecuniam  cum  curls  amant,  non  multae 
vitam  riisticam  tranquillam  et  beatam. 

4.  Cur,  filiae  meae,  tam  laetae  estis?  (Ans.)  Laetae  sumus 
quia  amicas  exspectamus. 

5.  (The  mother  calls)  Ubi  es,  filia  mea?  (The  daughter)  Hie 
sum.  (The  mother)  Ubi  "hie"  est  ?  (The  daughter)  In  culina 
sum.  (The  mother)  Ciir  in  culina  es?  (The  daughter)  Coquam 
iuvo,     Cenam  paramus. 

6.  Filiarum  tuarum  amicae  te  quoque  amant.     Beata  es. 

98.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  Do  you  (said  to  one  person)  often  walk  in  the  forest  ?  (Ans.) 
I  love  to  walk  in  the  forest,  because  I  am  always  happy  there. 

2.  Where  are  you,  my  friends  (use  o  for  practice)?  (Ans.) 
We  are  waiting-for  you  and  your  daughter  in-front-of  (=  before) 
the  villa.     Is  she  ready? 

3.  I  give  a-great-deal-of  (=much)  money  to  my  servants. 

4.  The  queen  loves  a  just  mistress. 
.5.  I  love  to  dine  with  friends. 

6.  The  dinners  of  my  friends  are  often  splendid,  but  not 
always  good. 

7.  I  love  to  help  the  cook  in  the  kitchen. 


Second  Conjugation  33 


LESSON  XII 

FIRST    CONJUGATION    (Repeated)    AND    SECOND    CON; 
JUGATION 

99.  PRESENT  INDICATIVE 

First  Conjugation  Second  Conjugation 

Stem  ama-  Stem  mone-    Personal  Endings 

1st  Sing.  amO,  I  love  moneO,  I  warn  -0  (or  -m^) 

2d      "      amas,  you  love  mOnes,  you  warn  -s 

3d      *'      amat,  he  {she,  it)  loves    monet,  he  (she,  it)  warns  -t 

1st  PL    amamus,  we  love  monemus,  ive  warn  -mus 

2d     "      amatis,  you  love  monetis,  you  warn  -tis 

3d      "       amant,  they  love  monent,  ihey  warn  -nt 

a.'  Given  the  differing  stems  (-a-  and  -e-),  the  First  and  Second 
Conjugations  are  formed  in  precisely  the  same  way  in  the  Present 
Indicative,  except  that  the  First  Conjugation  has  lost  the  final  -a- 
of  the  Stem  in  the  first  person  singular  (originally  ama-0,  like  moneO). 

h.  You  will  now  need  to  learn  the  following  Rules,  which  will  ex- 
plain various  changes  to  be  seen  here  or  later: 

100*.  1.  A    vowel   is  regularly   short   before    another 

vowel  or  h. 

a.  Thus  ama-0  (becoming  amO),  not  ama-0,  and  mone-5,  not 
mone-0. 

2.  Every  originally  long  vowel  was  regularly  shortened 
before  final  m  pr  t,  before  nt  and  nd  anywhere,  and,  ex- 
cept in  monosyllables,^  before  final  r  or  1. 

a.  Thus  ama-t  and  ama-nt  became  ama-t  and  ama-nt,  and 
mone-t  and  mone-nt  became  mone-t  and  mone-nt. 

1  We  have  seen  the  ending  -m  in  the  verb  sum,  am. 
2 1,  e.,  words  of  one  syllable. 


34  Dative  with  Certain  Verbs 

101.  Certain  Latin  verbs  express  Quality,  Attitude,  or 

Relation,  just  as  adjectives  do,  and  hence  are  followed^  by 

a  Dative  of  Figurative  Direction  (general  rule  in  67). 

a.  Thus,  just  as  one  says  vita  rtistica  mihi  grata  est,  country  life 
is  agreeable  to  me,  so  one  says  vita  rnstica  mihi  placet,  country  life 
is  pleasing  to  me  (or  country  life  pleases  me). 

102.  VOCABULARY 

causa,  'cause,  reason.  moneo,    admonish,    warn,   chide, 
fere.   Adv.,    generally;    (then)  instruct. 

.    about,  almost.  plsLceOy  am  pleasing,  please. 
habeO,  have;  hold;  regard.  (Word  of  Quality,  taking  Dat.) 

103.  READING  MATTER 

1.  Nunc,  coqua,  parata  sum  te  iuvare. 

2.  Filias  tuas  saepe  mones?  (Ans.)  Filias  meas  n5n  saepe 
moneo,  quia  mihi  fere  semper  placent. 

3.  Domina  mea  me  saepe  sine  causa  monet.    lusta  non  est. 

4.  Pecuniam,  amicae  meae,  non  mult  am  habetis.  Cur  tam 
laetae  estis?  (Ans.)  Pecuniam  n5n  habemus  multam;  sed  mul- 
tas  non  habemus  curas. 

5.  Vita  rustica  tibi  grata  est?  (Ans.)  Vitarustica  mihi  placet. 
Tranquillam  am5  vitam. 

104.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  I  am  happy.   My  country  villa  pleases  (=  is  pleasing  to)  me. 
'2.  Your  life  pleases  you,  mine  (pleases)  me. 

3.  We  love  to  help  the  cook,  because  she  is  always  kind. 
•     4.  Do  we  please  you?    (The  mother  answers)  You  do  please 
me  almost  always.    I  have  good  daughters. 

5.  I  do  not  please  my  mistress.    She  is  generally  harsh  to  me. 

6.  My  friends  often  chide,  me  without  reason.  They  are  not 
just. 

1  "Followed  by"  does  not  refer  to  the  order  of  the  sentence,  but  only  to 
the  effect  of  one  word  upon  another. 


Second  Declension 


35 


LESSON  XIII 


GRAMMATICAL    GENDERi 

105.  Nouns  of  the  First  Declension  are  feminine,  except 
a  few  which  denote  males.     These  are  masculine. 

106.  In  the  Second  Declension,  to  which  we  now  pass, 
nouns  in  -um  are  neuter.     Most  others  are  masculine. 

a.  In  this  Declension,  the  stern  originally  ended  in  -o-. 

b.  The  Declension  of  Adjectives  closely  follows  that  of  Nouns. 

107.  SECOND  DECLENSION:  o-Stems,  in -us  and -um 


servus, 

bonus, 

donum, 

bonum 

slave,  M.2 

good. 

gift,  N.2 

good. 

Stem 

servo- 

bono- 

dono- 

SINGULAR 

bono- 

Endings 
M.andF.2    N. 

Nom. 

servus 

bonus 

donum 

bonum 

-us 

-um 

Gen. 

servl 

boni 

doni 

boni 

-I 

Dat. 

servo 

bono 

donO 

bono 

-0 

Ace. 

servum 

bonum 

donum 

bonum 

-um 

Voc. 

serve 

bone 

donum 

bonum 

-e 

-um 

Abl 

servo 

bono 

donO 

PLURAL 

bono* 

-0 

Nom. 

servl 

boni 

dona 

bona 

-I 

-a 

Gen. 

servOrum 

bonOrum 

donOrum 

bonOrum 

-Orum 

Dat. 

servls 

bonis 

donis 

bonis 

-Is 

Ace. 

servos 

bonOs 

dona 

bona 

-OS 

-a 

Voc. 

servl 

boni 

dona 

bona 

-I 

-a 

Abl. 

servis 

bonis 

donls 

bonis 

-is 

a.  It  is  only  in  the  Mase.  and  Fem-  Sing,  of  Second  Declension 
words  in  -us  that  the  Voc.  regularly  differs  from  the  Nom. 

b.  Learn  to  decline  servus  and  bonus  separately  and  together, 
and  dOnum  and  bonum  separately  and  together. 

1  Gender  is  in  Latin  quite  as  much  a  matter  of  termination  and  of  rela- 
tionship to  other  words  as  of  sex. 

2M.  means  masculine,  F.  feminine,  and  N.  neuter. 


36  Exei'cises 

108.  VOCABULARY 

agricola  (Masculine), /armer.  labOrO,  labor,  work. 

amicus,  (man  or  hoy)  friend.  male,  Adv.  (cf.  malus),  badly. 

bene,  Adv.  (cf.^  bonus),  well.  Marcus,  Mark,  a  name. 

dominus,  master.  numquam.  Adv.,  never. 

dOnum,  gift,  present.  satis,  Adv.  and  Noun,  sufficiently, 

Gallus,  a  Gaul.    Also  a  man's  enough. 

name,  Gallus.  servus,  (man)  servant  or  (man) 

hortus,  garden.  slave. 

109.  READING  MATTER 

1.  Mihi  placet  in  horto  cum  agricola  laborare. 

2.  Casa  Galli  servi  parva  sed  satis  magna  est.  (Ans.)  Casae 
serv5rum  parvae  fere  sunt. 

3.  Tibi,  Galle,  dominus  tuus  saepe  iratus  est.  (Ans.)  Bonus 
sum  servus,  et  bene  fere  laboro.  Domino  cur  numquam  placeo? 
Me  semper  sine  causa  monet. 

4.  Bonos,  Marce,  habes  servds.  Beatus  es.  Mei  servi  male 
laborant. 

5.  Donum  tuum,  amice,  mihi  placet.    Bonus  es. 

6.  Servis  meis  dona  parva  saepe  do.  Satis  boni  servi  sunt. 
(Ans.)  Bonum  habent  dominum. 

110.  '  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  Where  is  Gallus?  (Ans.)  He  is  with  the  farmer  in  the 
garden. 

2.  Gallus,  your  master's  garden  is  small.  (Ans.)  It  is  large 
enough. 

3.  Mark,  why  do  you  chide  your  slaves  without  reason?  (Ans.) 
I  chide  my  slaves  because  they  often  work  badly. 

4.  Why  do  you  never  give  little  presents  to  your  slaves  ? 

5.  The  slaves  of  kind  masters  are  generally  good. 

6.  I  love  my  master,  because  he  is  always  kind. 

7.  I  love  to  work  well,  because  I  love  to  please  my  master. 

8.  Why  do  you  chide  your  friend? 

1  For  the  Latin  confer,  meaning  compare. 


Shortened  ro-Stems 


37 


LESSON  XIV 

SECOND  DECLENSION  (Cont'd):  SHORTENED  ro-STEMS 

111.  The  Second  Declension  includes  a  number  of 
Nouns  and  Adjectives,  called  ro-  and  ra-Stems,  in  which 
the  Nominative  ending  has  been  shortened.^     Thus: 

Nouns  Adjectives 

puer,  hoy,  M.  ager^  fields  M.  vir,  man,  M.  miser,  miserable  piger ,  lazy 


Stems 

puero- 

agro- 

viro- 

SINGULAR 

misero- 

pigro- 

Nom. 

puer 

ager 

vir 

miser 

piger 

Gen, 

pueri 

agri 

virl 

miseri 

pigri 

Dat 

puero 

agro 

virO    . 

miserO 

pigro 

Ace, 

puerum 

agrum 

virum 

miserum 

pigrum 

Voc. 

puer 

ager 

vir 

miser 

piger 

Abl. 

puerO 

agrO 

virO 

PLURAL 

miserO 

pigrO 

Nom. 

pueri 

agrr 

virr 

miseri 

pigrI 

Gen. 

puerOrum 

agrOrum 

virOrum 

miserOrum 

pigrOrum 

Dat. 

puerls 

agrls 

virls 

miserls 

pigris 

Ace. 

pueros 

agros 

virOs 

miserOs 

pigros 

Voc, 

pueri 

agrr 

viri 

miseri 

pigri 

Abl. 

pueris 

agris 

viris 

miserls 

pigris 

a.  Decline  these  new  words  separately.  Then  decline  puer  piger 
together,  and  vir  miser  together.  Then  decline  amicus  miser 
together  (Gen.  amici  miseri,  Dat.  amicO  miserO,  etc.) 

b.  Notice  that  the  endings  of  these  new  words  differ  from  those 
of  servus  and  bonus  only  in  the  Nominative  and  Vocative  Singular. 
You  have  thus  but  one  new  form  to  learn. 


1  Originally  the  forms  were  the  same  in  servus,  puer,  ager,  etc.,  namely 
Nom.  servo-s  (becoming  servus  later),  puero-s,  agro-s,  etc.  But  the  ro- 
stems  lost  the  -os  in  the  Nominative.  Thus  original  pueros  became  puer. 
If  in  such  stems  the  r  immediately  followed  a  consonant,  an  e-sound  crept 
in.    Thus  original  agros  became  agr,  then  ager. 


38  .      Irregular  Forms 

IRREGULAR  FORMS  OP  DECLENSIONS  I  AND  II 

112.  1.  Nouns  in  -ius  and  -ium  have  the  Genitive 
Singular  in  -i  (iiot  -ii).  Thus  Cornelius,  Cornelius, 
Gen.  Cornell;  ingenium,  intellect,  Gen.  ingeni, 

2.  Nouns  in  -ius  form  the  Vocative  in  -i.  Thus  Corne- 
lius, Cornelius,  Voc.  Cornell;  filius,  son,  Yoc,  fill. 

a.  These  contracted  Genitives  and  Vocatives  in  -i  have  the  accent 
on  the  penult,  even  if  it  is  short.    Thus  ingeni. 

b.  Mens,  mine,  has  the  irregular  Voc.  Sing.  Masculine  ml. 

113.  Filia,  daughter,  has  the  form  filiabus  in  the 
Dative  and  Ablative  Plural,  to  avoid  confusion  with  filiis, 
sons,  from  filius. 

114.  VOCABULARY 

(From  here  on,  the  Genitive  of  every  noun  will  be  given,  together  with 
the  Gender,  indicated  by  M.,  F.,  or  N.,  and  the  Declension ;  also,  for  adjec- 
tives, the  three  Nominatives,  Masculine,  Feminine,  and  Neuter.) 

ager,  SLgrif  M..  2,  land,  field.  miser,  misera,  miserum,  miser- 
Cornelius,  -1,  M.  2,  Cornelius,  a  able,  unhappy. 

name.  piger,  pigra,  pigrum,  lazy, 

discipulus,  -1,  M.  2,  pupil,  school-  impiger,impigra,impigrum(from 

boy.  in,  meaning  not,  +piger,  lazy), 

fama,  -ae,  F.   1,  fame,  report,  energetic,  industrious. 

reputation.  puella,  -ae,  F.  1,  girl. 
filius,  fill,  M.  2,  son.  puer,  -I,  M.  2,  boy. 
ingenium,  ingeni,  N.  2,  intellect,  pulcher,pulchra,pulchrum,  beau- 
ability,  tiful. 
magister,    -tri,     M.    2,    master  validus,  -aj  -um,  strong. 
{=  teacher).  vir,  virl,  M.  2,  man. 

116.  READING  MATTER 

1.  Filiis  meis  gratum^  est  in  horto  et  agris  cum  agricolis 
laborare,  filiabus  meis  placet  coquam  in  culina  iuvare. 

2.  Dominus  servis  impigris  dona  multa  dat. 

1  Translate:  It  is  agreeable,  etc.  This  "it"  is  merely  an  "expletive."— 
Notice  that  an  adjective  (as  gratum)  agreeing  with  an  infinitive  (as  laborare) 
is  neuter. 


Exercises 


39 


3.  Te,  Galle,  dominus  numquam  laudat.     Male  laboras. 

4.  Te,  puer  piger,  magister  saepe  monet.    Non  bene  laboras. 

5.  Cornell,  fill  mi,  satis  impiger  non  es.    Non  amo  puerum 
pigrum. 

6.  Fama  ingeni  Corneli   non    magna  est.     Bonus    non   est 
discipulus. 

7.  Magister  puerorum  pigr5rum  et  puellarum  pigrarum  miser 
est. 

8.  Vir  validus  et   impiger  es.     Amiei  tui  te  et  laudant  et 
amant. 

9.  lulia  non  pulchra  est,  sed  bene  laborat.    Bona  est  coqua. 
10.  Filii  tui,  amice  mi,  pulchri  sunt,  f^iae  tuae  pulchrae. 

116.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  My  son  has  good  ability.    Why  does  he  work  badly?    Does 
he  like  a  bad  reputation  ? 

2.  Cornelius,  my  son,  you  are  strong,  and  have  good  enough 
ability;  but  you  are  lazy.    You  are  a  bad  pupil. 

3.  It  pleases   my   daughters   to   work.     They  are  energetic 
girls. 

4.  You  work  well,  girls.     You  please  me. 

5.  The  lazy  boy  is  generally  unhappy. 

6.  The  energetic  man  is  almost  always  happy. 

7.  Why  do  you  chide  me,  master?     (Ans.)  Because  you  work 
badly  in  the  fields. 


ROMAN   SCHOOL,  FROM  POM- 
PEIAN  WALL  PAINTING 
Ancient  Aids  to  Learning 


40      Adjectives  of  First  and  Second  Declensions 


LESSON  XV 

ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  FIRST  AND  SECOND 
DECLENSIONS  (Summary) 

117.  Adjectives  of  the  First  and  Second  Declensions 
are  declined  like  noiins  of  similar  form, 
bonus,  good  (Masculine  like  servus) 


SINGULAR 

M. 

F. 

N.      . 

Nom. 

bonus 

bona 

bonum 

Gen. 

boni 

bonae 

boni 

Dat. 

bono 

bonae 

bono 

Ace. 

bonum 

bonam 

bonum 

Voc. 

bone 

bona 

bonum 

Abl. 

bono 

bona 

bono 

PLURAL 

. 

Nom. 

boni 

bonae 

bona 

Gen. 

bonOruir 

I 

bonarum 

bonOrum 

Dat. 

bonis 

bonis 

bonis 

Ace. 

bonOs 

bonas 

bona 

Voc. 

boni 

bonae 

bona 

Abl. 

bonis 

bonis 

bonis 

miser,  miserable  (Masc.  like  puer) 

piger, 

lazy  (Masc.  like  ager) 

SINGULAR 

SINGULAR 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

Norn 

.  miser 

misera 

miserum 

piger 

pigra 

pigrum 

Gen. 

miseri 

miserae 

miseri 

pigri 

pigrae 

pigrl 

Dat 

misero 

miserae 

miserO 

pigro 

pigrae 

pigro 

Ace. 

miserum 

miseram 

miserum 

pigrum 

pigram 

I       pigrum 

Voc. 

miser 

misera 

miserum 

piger 

pigra 

pigrum 

Abl 

miserO 

misera 

PLURAL 

miserO 

pigrO 

pigra 

PLURAI 

pigrO 

Nom 

.miser! 

miserae 

misera 

pigrI 

pigrae 

pigra 

Gen. 

miserOrum  miserarum  miserOrum  pigrOrum  pigrSrum  pigrOrum 

Dat 

miserls 

miseris 

miseris 

pigrls 

pigrls 

pigrls 

Ace. 

miserOs 

miseras 

misera 

pigros 

pigras 

pigra 

Voc. 

miseri 

miserae 

misera 

pigrI 

pigrae 

pigra 

Abl 

miseris 

miseris 

miseris 

pigrls 

pigrls 

pigrls 

Agreement  of  Adjectives  41 

a.  You  have  had  all  these  forms  before,  with  those  of  the  cor- 
responding nouns.  But  you  must  now  learn  to  recite  the  three 
genders  side  by  side  for  each  case  (thus  bonus,  bona,  bonum,  etc.), 
in  order  that  you  may  quickly  recognize  a  given  case  and  gender, 
and  quickly  form  one  in  writing  Latin. 

b.  The  Stems  of  bonus  are  o-  and  a-Stems,  those  of  miser  and 
piger  ro-  and  ra-Stems.  , 

AGREEMENT  OP  ADJECTIVES 

118.  We  have  constantly  seen  the  Adjective  taking 
different  forms,  according  to  the  gender,  the  number,  and 
the  case  of  the  word  to  which  it  belongs.  Thus  we  find 
serva  bona,  servarum  bonarum,  servus  bonus,  servum 
bonum,  servorum  bonorum,  etc.,  etc.  We  can  then  state 
the  usage  in  the  following  rule: 

119.  Adjectives  agree  with  their  Nouns  in  Gender, 
Number,  and  Case. 

a.  This  of  course  does  not  mean  that  a  Noun  and  its  Adjective 
must  necessarily  have  the  same  endings.  Thus,  if  we  wish  to  say 
"the  good  farmer,"  the  masculine  form  must  be  used  for  ''good," 
since  agricola  is  masculine.     The  declension  will  then  be: 

Nom.  agricola  bonus 
Gen.    agricolae  boni 
Dat.    agricolae  bono 
Ace.    agricolam  bonum 
Voc.    agricola  bone 
Abl.    agricola  bono 

and  similarly  in  the  plural. 

120.  READING  MATTER 

1.  Marcus  agricola  vir  validus  et  impiger  est. 
^   2.  Agri  agricolae  boni  semper  pulchri  sunt. 

3.  Marcus,  Marci  agricolae  filius,  bonus  est  discipulus. 

4.  Fama  Marci,  Marci  fili,  bona  est.    Impiger  est  discipulus. 

5.  Ingenium  tuum,  Corneli,  n5n  malum  est,  fama  tua  mala. 


42  Exercises 

6.  Discipulus  piger  magistro  non  placet.  Impigrum  amat 
magister  puerum. 

7.  Hortu3  filiarum  mearum  pulcher  n5n  est.  Pigrae  sunt 
puellae. 

8.  Filiae  meae  pigrae  et  miserae  sunt,  tuae  impigrae  et  laetae. 
Beatus  es. 

121.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  It  often  pleases  little  boys  to  work  in  gardens. 

2.  My  little  sons  love  to  help  the  farmers  in  the  fields. 

3.  The  good  farmer  is  kind  to  the  little  boys  and  girls. 

4.  Mark  is  both  an  energetic  farmer  and  a  good  man. 

5.  Mark,  your  son's  ^  ability  is  great.     You  are  fortunate. 

6.  (To  another  father)  Your  son  Cornelius  has  sufficiently 
good  ability  and  is  strong.  7.  But  he  is  lazy.  Lazy  boys  give 
a  teacher  many  cares. 

1 ''  The  ability  of  your  son." 


YOUNG  ROMAN,  POETRAIX  BUST 


Voice:   the  Passive 


43 


LESSON  XVI 


VOICE 

122.  The  Active  Voice  represents  the  Subject  of  the 
Verb  as  acting,  the  Passive  represents  it  as  acted  upon. 
Thus  moneo,  I  warn    (Active),   moneor,  I  am  warned 

(Passive). 

FIRST  AND  SECOND  CONJUGATIONS  (Continued) 

123.  Present  Indicative,  Active^  and  Passive 

First  Conjugation,  Stem  ama-. 


Active 

Passive 

1st  Sing. 

amo,  I  love 

amor,  I  am  loved 

2d      " 

amas,  you  love 

amaris  or  -re,  you  are  loved 

3d      " 

amat,  he  [she^  it)  loves 

amatur,  he  (she,  it)  is  loved 

1st  PI. 

amamus,  we  love 

amamur,  we  are  loved 

2d    " 

amatis,  you  love 

amamini,  you  are  loved 

3d    " 

amant,  they  love 

amantur,  they  are  loved 

Second  Conjugation,  Stem  mone-. 


Active 
1st  Sing.  moneO,  I  warn 
2d       "      mones,  you  warn 
3d       "     xaonGt,he{she,it\warns 
1st  PI.      monemus,  we  warn 
2d    "        monetis,  you  warn 
3d    "        monent,  they  warn 


Passive 
moneor,  /  am  warned 
moneris  or  -re,  you  are  warned 
monetur,  he  {she,  it)  is  warned 
monemur,  we  are  warned 
monemini,  you  are  warned 
monentur,  they  are  ivarned 


124.  The  Personal  Endings  are  thus  seen  to  be  as  follows: 
Active  Passive 


1st  Sing. 

-0  (or  -m) 

-r 

2d       " 

-s 

-ris  or  -re 

3d       " 

-t 

-tur 

1st  PI. 

-mus 

-mur 

2d     '' 

-tis 

-mini 

3d     " 

-nt 

-ntur 

'  Repeated  for  review  and  comparison. 


44  Agent  of  the  Passive  Voice 

125.  Notice  and  remember  the  following,  which  are 
true  of  all  the  passive  forms  of  the  Finite  Verb^  made 
from  the  stem  seen  in  the  Present  Indicative: 

1.  The  Second  Person  Plural  always  ends  in  -mini. 

2.  All  other  forms  contain  an  r  somewhere  in  the  termination. 

THE  AGENT  OP  THE  PASSIVE  VOICE 

126.  The  Agent  of  the  Passive  Voice  (the  person  hy 
whom  the  act  is  performed)  is  expressed  by  the  Ablative 
with  a  or  ab.^     Thus: 

Servus  a  dominO  culpatur,  the  servant  is  blamed  by  the  master. 

127.  READING  MATTER 

1.  Domina  me  amat  (Active).    A  domina  amor  (Passive). 

2.  Magister  puerum  pigrum  monet.  Puer  piger  a  magistro 
monetur. 

3.  A  magistro  saepe  moneris.     Piger  es  discipulus. 

4.  Bene,  filii  mei,  non  laboratis.    A  magistro  saepe  monemini. 

5.  AgrT  Marei,  agricolae  validi,  pulchri  sunt,  et  a  multis^ 
laudantur. 

6.  Impigri  sumus  servi,  sed  a  domino  numquam  laudamur. 

7.  Impigrae  estis  puellae,  et  a  magistro  laudamini  saepe. 

128.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  The  queen  blames  the  harsh  master  (Active).  The  harsh 
master  is  blamed  by  the  queen  (Passive). 

2.  Gallus,  you  are  often  admonished  by  the  mistress. 

3.  I  am  often  praised  by  my  kind  mistress. 

4.  My  daughters,  you  are  not  admonished  by  a  kind  teacher 
without  reason.  5.  You  are  lazy  girls.  6.  I  am  not  happy.  I 
do  not  love  lazy^  (people). 

iThe  Finite  Verb,  as  will  be  seen  later  (338),  is  made  up  of  the  Indica- 
tive, the  Subjunctive,  and  the  Imperative. 

^  The  meaning  was  originally /rom,  the  conception  being  that  of  the  per- 
son/rom  whom  the  action  started.  Compare  "an  arrow  shot  from  a  well- 
experienced  archer."    Shakespeare,  Per.  i.  1.  164. 

3  Adjective  used  as  a  Noun  (Masculine,  because  general). 


Pronominal  Adjectives 


45 


LESSON  XVII 
PRONOMINAL  ADJECTIVES 

129.  Nine  Adjectives,  called  Pronominal,  are  declined 
like  Adjectives  of  the  First  and  Second  Declensions,  except 
in  the  Genitive  and  Dative  Singular^  which  have  the  pecu- 
liar PronominaV  Endings  -lus  and  -i  in  all  genders.  But 
alius  has  Neuter  aliud,  and  its  Genitive  is  generally  re- 
placed by  alterius,  from  alter.     The  nine  words  are: 

nnus,  one,  only  alius,  other,  another  (of  several) 

nllus,  any  alter,  the  other,  another  (of  two) 

nnllus,  none,  no  uter,  which  9  (of  two) 

solus,  sole,  alone  neuter,  neither  (of  two) 

totus,  total,  whole 

a.  Except  anus  and  sOlus,  these  lack  the  Vocative. 

130.  The  Declension  in  the  singular  is  thus  as  follows: 


f 


totus,  ivhole 

alter,  the  other 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

Nom. 

totus 

tota 

totum 

alter 

altera 

alterum 

Gen. 

totlus 

totius 

totlus 

alterius 

alterius 

alterius 

Dat. 

toti 

totI 

toti 

alterl 

alterl 

alterl 

Ace. 

to  turn 

totam 

totum 

alterum 

alteram 

alterum 

Voc. 
Ahl. 

totO 

tota 

totO 

alterO 

altera 

altero 

alius,  another 

uter, 

which  9  (of  two) 

Nom. 

alius 

alia 

aliud 

uter 

utra 

utrum 

Gen. 

(alterius 

alterius 

alterius) 

utrius 

utrius 

utrius 

Dat. 

alir 

alir 

alii 

utrl 

utrl 

utrl 

Ace. 

alium 

aliam 

aliud 

utrum 

utram 

utrum 

Voc 

Ahl. 

alio 

alia 

alio 

utrO 

utra 

utrO 

1  These  endings  will  be  seen  later  in  many  pronouns,  as  ille,  that  (145). 


46  Uses  of  Alius 

a.  The  Plural  is  like  that  of  any  other  Adjectives  of  the  First  and 
Second  Declension.  Thus  Nominative  alii,  aliae,  alia,  Genitive  ali- 
Orum,  aliarum,  aliOrum,  Dative  alils,  aliis,  aliis,  etc. 

b.  Note  that  in  these  words  the  Nominative  Plural  Masculine  is 
identical  with  the  Dative  Singular  (thus  alii  is  in  either  case).  Be 
on  your  guard,  then,  when  you  meet  such  a  form. 

131.  When  alius  is  repeated  (alius  ...  alius  .  .  .  ), 
the  meaning  is  one  .  .  .  another  ...  (in  the  Plural, 
some  ...  others  .  .  .  ).  When  alter  is  repeated  (alter 
.  .  .  alter  .  .  .  ) ,  the  meaning  is  one  .  .  .  the  other  .  .  . 
(in  the  Plural,  one  party  .  .  .  the  other  party  .   .   .  ). 

132.  You  will  notice,  in  the  Reading  Matter  below,  that  the  pro- 
nominal adjectives  precede  their  nouns.  And  you  will  find,  as  you 
go  on,  that  this  is  only  one  illustration  of  a  general  usage,  which 
may  be  briefly  stated  as  follows: 

133.  Words  of  Exactness,  Quantity,  or  Number^  normally  pre- 
cede their  nouns. 

134.  VOCABULARY 

(Add  the  Pronominal  Adjectives  learned  in  129) 
an,  Conj.,  or  (in  second  part  of  a      quam,  Adv., /iot(?, as, //laTi.  Thus: 

question).  quam  multi,  how  many;  tam 

faveo,    be  favorable  to ,  favor,  quam,  so  {much)  as,  as  {much) 

(Word    of     Attitude,    taking  as;  magis  quam,  more  than, 

Dat.)  minus  quam,  less  than. 

magis.  Adv.,  more?  -que,  Conj.,  a?2d(enclitic2).   Rep- 

minus,  Adv.,  less.  resents  closer  connection  than 

nOnnumquam ,  Adv.  (nOn  +  num-  et. 

quam,  not  never)  sometimes.         schola,  -ae,  F.  1,  school. 

135.  READING  MATTER 

1.  tJnus  discipulus  a  magistr5  saepe'  laudatur.  Cur  n5n 
alii  tam  laudantur  quam  Marcus?  Ciir  non  tota  schola  n5nnum- 
quam  laudatiu:?  (Ans.)  Quia  niillus  alius  discipulus  semper 
bene  laborat.    Non  favet  magister  discipulo  ulli. 

lE.g. :   "this"  man,  the  *'other"  man  (exactness);   "much"  money, 
the  "whole"  school  (quantity) ;  "one"  boy,  "ten"  pupils  (number). 
2 Enclitic  means  "leaning  back  upon"  something  else. 


Exercises  47 

2.  (The  master)  Cornelio  non  minus  faved  quam  Marco.  Sed 
alter  piger  est,  alter  impiger. 

»    3.  (A  visitor  remarks)  Quam  male  laborat  Cornelius !    ( Ans.) 
Piger  est  discipulus,  et  saepe  culpatur  moneturque  a  magistro. 

4.  (A  pupil  to  the  teacher)  Utri  magis  faves,  Marco  an  Cor- 
nelio? (Ans.)  Neutri  magis  quam  alter!  fave5.  T5tius  scholae, 
n5n  unius  solius  discipuli,  magister  sum.  Sed  alios  discipulos 
laudo,  ali5s  ^  moneo,  quia  alii  bene  laborant  semper,  alii  ^  nonnum- 
quam  pigri  sunt. 

136.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  Some  pupils  the  master  often  praises;  others  he  censures 
and^  warns.     One  he  always  praises. 

2.  (A  pupil  says)  Teacher,  I  often  work  well.  3.  Why  do 
you  not  sometimes  praise  me  as  (much)  as  Mark?^ 

4.  Other  pupils  are  lazy  sometimes,  and  are  sometimes  ad- 
monished. 5.  Mark  alone  always  works  well,  and  is  never 
admonished. 

6.  (Cornelius)  Which  does  the  teacher  favor,  you  or  me?  7. 
(Mark)  He  favors  neither.  He  favors  no^  pupil  more  than 
any  others.  8.  He  is  ready  to  help  the  whole  school.  9.  He 
is  kind  to  the  whole  school;  he  is  the  friend  of  the  whole  school. 

10.  (The  master)  I  am  ready  to  help  Cornelius  not  less  than 
Mark.  11.  But.  one  (of  the  two)  always  works  well,  the  other 
sometimes. 

1  Where,  as  in  this  sentence,  there  is  an  obvious  pair  of  contrasting  ideas, 
Latin  generally  does  not  use  a  conjunction,  while  English  generally  does 
(and,  but,  while,  etc.).  Thus  alios  laudo,  alios  moneo,  I  praise  some,  (while) 
I  warn  others.  • 

2 Show  the  close  connection  of  the  ideas  "censures"  and  "warns"  by 
your  choice  between  et  and  -que. 

3 Look  out  for  your  case  I  The  meaning  is  "  praise  me  as-much  as  (you 
praise)  Mark." 

*  Emphatic.    Make  your  Latin  word  so  by  your  order. 


48  Imperative 

LESSON  XVIII 

FIRST  AND  SECOND  CONJUGATIONS  (Continued) 
PRESENT  IMPERATIVE,  ACTIVE  AND  PASSIVE 

137.  The  Imperative  Mood  expresses  Command,  Advice, 
Request,  Entreaty,  etc.,  as  in  English.  In  the  Present 
of  the  First  and  Second  Conjugations  the  Second  Persons 
Singular  and  Plural  are  formed  as  follows : 

PRESENT  ACTIVE  PRESENT  PASSIVE 

I 

Conj.  2d  Sing,  ama,  love  (thou)  amare,  be  (thou)  loved 

2d  PL       amate,  love  (ye)  amaminl,  be  (ye)  loved 
II 

Conj\  2d  Sing,  mone,  advise  (thou)  monere,  be  (thou)  advised 

2d  PI.       monete,  advise  (ye)  monemini,  be  (ye)  advised 

Irreg.  2d  Sing,  es,  be  (thou)        (be  can  have  no  passive) 
2d  PL      este,  be  (ye) 

a.  Note  that  the  2d  Sing.  Imperative  Active  is  the  same  as  the 
bare  stem  (ama-,  mone-;  cf.  92). 

b.  Note  that  the  2d  Sing.  Imperative  Passive  is  the  same  as  the 
Infinitive  Active  (amare),*  and  the  2d  PI.  the  same  as  the  2d  PI. 
Indicative  Passive  (amaminl). 

THE  PRESENT  INFINITIVES,  ACTIVE  (Repeated)  AND 
PASSIVE 

138.  The  Infinitives  Active  and  Passive  of  the  First  and 
Second  Conjugations  are  formed  like  the  following: 

ACTIVE  PASSIVE 

ConJ.    I        amare,  to  love  amarl,  to  be  loved 

"      II        monere,  to  warn       monerl,  to  be  warned 

iThus  amare  can  mean  either  to  love  or  be  (thou)  loved;  etc.,  etc.  It  is 
only  the  surroundings  (called  the  context)  that  can  tell  you  which  is  the 
meaning  in  a  given  case. 


Declension  of  Ipse 


49 


a.  Note  that,  to  form  the  Present  Infinitive,  you  add  -re  to  the 
stem  for  the  Active,  and  -ri  for  the  Passive  (ama-re,  ama-ri;  mone-re, 
mone-ri).     And 

b.  To  make  the  Passive  Infinitive  from  the  Active,  you  change 
-re  to  -rl  (thus  culpa-re,  to  blame,  culpa-rl,  to  be  blamed), 

THE  INTENSIVE  PRONOUN  ipse,  self,  very. 
139.  The  Intensive  Pronoun  ipse,  self,  is  declined  pre- 
cisely  like   the   Pronominal    Adjectives,   except  for   the 
single  form  ipse.    Thus: 

ipse,  self 


M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

Nom. 

ipse^ 

ipsa 

ipsum 

ipsi 

ipsae 

ipsa 

Gen. 

ipsius 

ipsius 

ipsius 

ipsorum 

ipsarum 

ipsorum 

Dat. 

ipsi 

ipsi 

ipsi 

ipsis 

ipsis 

ipsis 

Ace. 

ipsum 

ipsam 

ipsum 

ipsos 

ipsas 

ipsa 

Voc. 
Abl. 

ipso 

ipsa 

ipso 

ipsis 

ipsis 

ipsis 

PERSONAL  PRONOUNS  AS  SUBJECTS 
140.  Since  the  form  of  the  verb  shows  its  person  and 
number,  the    Personal    Pronouns  are  generally    not  ex- 
pressed as  subjects.     But  they  are  necessarily  expressed 
where  emphasis  or  contrast  is  intended.     Thus : 
Ego  culpor,  to  laudaris,  I  am  blamed,  YOU  are  praised. 


141. 


VOCABULARY 


ego,  I.    Nominative. 

etiam,  Adv.,  even,  also. 

impigre,  Adv.  (cf.  impiger),  ener- 
getically, vigorously. 

ipse,  -a,  -um,  self.  In  English 
we  say  (my)self,  (him)self,  etc. 

ita,  Adv.,  in  such  a  way,  thus,  so. 

itaque,  Adv.  (ita  +  que),  and  so, 
therefore,  accordingly, 

Indus,  -I,  M.  2,  play,  sport,  game. 


solum,  Adv.  (cf.  solus),  only. 
NOn  solum  .  .  .  sed  etiam  .  .  . 
not  only  .  .  ,^but  also  .  .  . 

studeo  (cf.  studium  below),  be 
zealous  for,  be  eager  for,  be 
devoted  to;  study.  (Verb  of 
Attitude,  taking  Dat.) 

studium,  studi,  N.  2,  zeal,  inter- 
est; study. 

tG,  thou,  you  (Sing.)  Nominative. 


1  In  many  forms  of  various  pronouns,  it  is  difficult  to  distinguish  the 
ending.    Accordingly  the  termiuations  will  nowhere  be  given  in  special  type. 


50  Exercises 

142.  READING  MATTER 

1.  Tu  studia  an  ludds  magis  amas?    Ego  ludos  magis  amo. 

2.  Impiger  es,^  fill  mi,  et  cum  studi5  labora.   Ego  ipse  labor5. 

3.  Impigri  este,  filii  mei.    Bene  studete,  et  a  me  laudamini.^ 

4.  (The  father)  Cur,  fill  mi,  a  magistro  semper  laudatur 
Marcus,  tu  culparis  monerisque?  Moneri  magis  amas  quam 
laudari?  (Ans.)  Ego  laudari  tam  amo  quam  Marcus  amat;  sed 
magister  Marc5  fa  vet,  mihi  non  fa  vet. 

5.  (The  father  answers)  Ita  non  est.  Magister  discipul5 
favet  nulli.^  Te  non  minus  paratus  est  iuvare  quam  Marcum. 
Sed  tu  ludis  s5lis  studes,  Marcus  non  solum  ludos  sed  etiam 
studia  amat.  Itaque  tu  a  niillo^  laudaris,  Marcus  laudatur  et  a 
magistro  et  ab  ipsis  discipulis.  Tu  quoque  nunc  impigre  stude, 
et  a  magistro  laudare,  non  monere. 

143.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  Do  you  like*  better*  to  be  praised  or  to  be  blamed? 

2.  I  like  better  to  be  praised,  and-so  I  work. 

3.  The  master  favors  others. 

4.  (Ans.)  It  isn't  so.    The  fault  is  yours,  my  friend. 

5.  Work  as  energetically  as  Mark  (works). 

6.  Love  not  only  your  sports  but  also  your  studies. 

7.  Be  an  energetic  pupil;  study  with  interest,  and  be  praised 
by  the  master  and  your  friends. 

8.  Be  energetic  pupils.  Study  well,  and  be  praised,  not 
warned. 

9.  (Dialogue  of  pupils)  Cornelius  has  good  ability. 

10.  (Ans.)  He  has  good  ability,  (but)  no  interest. 

11.  He  is-devoted-to  sports  alone. 

12.  I  myself  love  and^  praise  sports  not  less  than  studies,  but 
I  praise  no  lazy  boys. 

1  How  do  you  know  whether  this  is  Indicative  or  Imperative? 

2  What  effect  has  the  suspense? 

3  "  By  no  (man)"="  by  nobody. '^^    Nullus  is  here  used  like  a  Noun. 
"*  Use  amo  and  magis. 

5  Use  the  conjunction  of  close  connection. 


Imperfect  Indicative  Active 


51 


LESSON  XIX 
FIRST  AND  SECOND  CONJUGATIONS  (Continued) 
144.      THE  IMPERFECT  INDICATIVE  ACTIVE 


First  Conjugation 

Second  Conjugation 

Irregular 

I  ivas  loving, 

/  was  warning, 

I  was, 

you  were 

loving,  etc. 

you  were  warning, 

etc. 

you  were,  etc. 

1st  Sing. 

amabam 

monebam 

eram 

2d      " 

amabas 

monebas 

eras 

3d       " 

amabat 

monebat 

erat 

1st   PL 

amabamus 

monebamus 

eramus 

2d       " 

amabatis 

monebatis 

eratis 

3d       " 

amabant 

monebant 

erant 

a.  The  Tense-Sign  of  the  Imperfect  Indicative  is  -ba-,  which  is 
added  to  the  stem  seen  in  the  Present.  Thus  ama-ba-m,  mone-ba-m, 
shortened  to  ama-ba-m,  mone-ba-m;  cf.  100,  2. 

h.  The  Imperfect  represents  an  action  as  going  on  at  some  point 
or  period  in  past  time  (English  "Past  Progressive  Tense").  It  thus 
expresses  o.  past  state  of  affairs,  a  past  situation,  as  in  cenabam,  I 
was  dining. 


146.    DECLENSION    OP    THE  DETERMINATIVE i 
NOUN  ille,  that,^  he^ 


PRO- 


SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

Nom 

.      ille 

ilia 

illud 

illi 

illae 

ilia 

Gen. 

illius 

illius 

illius 

illorum 

illarum 

illorum 

Dat. 

illi 

illi 

illi 

illls 

illls 

illls 

Ace. 

ilium 

illam 

illud 

illos 

illas 

ilia 

Voc. 
Abl. 

illo 

ilia 

illo 

illis 

illls 

illls 

a. 

Iste,  this 

(of  yours),  that  (of  yours) 

,  he,  is  declined  like  ille. 

1 A  Determinative  Pronoun  (also  called  Demonstrative)  shows  just  who 
or  just  what  is  meant,  as  in  "  That  is  the  man ;  he  did  it,  not  I." 

2  "  That "  (Plural  "  those  "),  the  English  ''  Demonstrative  "  Pronoun, 
y  He  "  (Plural ''  they  "),  the  English  "  Personal "  pronoun. 


52  Substantives,  Clauses,  Phrases 

SUBSTANTIVES  DEFINED.— PRONOUNS  AND  ADJECTIVES 
AS  SUBSTANTIVES 

146.  Words  which  express  persons  or  things  are  con- 
veniently called  Substantives.  A  noun  is  thus  a  Substan- 
tive. So  is  a  personal  pronoun  like  tu.  Thus,  if  I  say, 
tu,  Cornell,  you,  Cornelius,  both  words  are  Substantive. 

a.  The  Determinative  Pronouns  may  be  used  in  all  cases  as 
Personal. Pronouns  of  the  Third  Person.  Thus,  ille,  he,  ilia,  she, 
illud,  it;  illius  dOnum  (the  gift  of  him),  his  gift;  illi,  to  him,  etc. 

h.  We  have  several  times  seen  that  Adjectives  may  be  used  as 
Substantives,  i.  e.,  as  if  they  were  in  themselves  expressions  of  per- 
sons or  things.     Thus  Sl  multls  laudantur,  they  are  praised  by  many. 

DETERMINATIVE  PRONOUNS  AS  ADJECTIVES 

147.  The  Determinative  Pronouns  are  also  used  as 
Determinative  Adjectives,  agreeing  with  a  Noun.  Thus 
ille  puer,  that  boy,  ilia  puella,  that  girl,  illud  donum,  that 

gift- 

a.  The  Determinative  Adjectives  normally  precede  their  nouns, 
under  the  principle  of  133. 

"CLAUSE"  AND  "PHRASE"  DEFINED 

148.  1.  A  Clause  is  a  member  of  a  sentence  containing 
a  Finite  Verb  of  its  own,  or  an  Infinitive  of  corresponding 
value.  Thus,  in  "it  pleases  me  that  you  do  this,"  the 
words  ''that  you  do  this"  are  a  Clause.  Similarly,  in 
"it  is  sweet  to  die  for  fatherland,"  the  words  "to  die  for 
fatherland"  are  a  Clause. 

a.  An  enclitic  conjunction  introducing  a  clause  or  phrase  is 
naturally  attached  to  the  first  word.    Thus: 

Cornelium  iuva,  illique  fave,  help  Cornelius  and  favor  hir,i. 

2.  A  Phrase  is  a  group  of  associated  words  not  con- 
taining a  Finite  Verb,  or  Infinitive  of  corresponding 
value. 

a.  Thus,  in  cum  studio  labOra,  work  with  zeal,  cum  studio  is  a 
Phrase. 


Exercises  53 

149'.  VOCABULARY 

aeger,  aegra,  aegrum,  ill.  nOnndilus,  -a,  -um  (nOn+nnllus, 

aegre,  Adv.,  in  an  ill  manner,  =not    none),  some.      In    PJ., 

i'ZZ,  with  difficulty.  some,  several,  not  a  few. 

bellum,  -1,  N.  2,  war.  novus,  -a,  -um,  new. 

enim,  Conj., /or.    Like  nam,. but  nnper.  Adv.,  recently, 

postpositive  in  its  clause.^  Otium,   oti,   N.  2,  ease,   repose; 

nam,  Conj., /or.    Cf.  enim.  leisure;  peace. 

Germanus,  -i,  M.  2,  a  German.  periculum,  -I,  N.  %  peril,  danger, 

illef -Si y -udy  that ;  he,  she,  it.  probo,  approve, 

iste,  -a,  -ud,  this  {of  yours)  or  timeOy  fear,  be  afraid. 

that  (of  yours);  he,  she,  it.  tum,  Adv.,  at  that  time,  then. 

READING  MATTER 

( In  the  following  sentences,  a  past  state  of  affairs  and  a  present  state  of 
affairs  are  contrasted,  by  the  use  of  the  Imperfect  and  Present  tenses. ) 

150.   1.  Marcus  nuperbene  laborabat.    Fama  illius  discipuli 

magna  erat.    Ilium  et  magister  et  tota  schola  laudabant.    Nunc 

ita  non  est.    Nonnulli  ilium  etiam  culpant. 

2.  (The  teacher)  Nuper,  Marce,  bene  laborabas,  studiumque 
tuum  tota  schola  laudabat.  Nunc  impigre  non  laboras.  (Ans.) 
Ita  est.  Validus  tum  eram.  Nunc  aeger  sum;  itaque  aegre 
laboro.     Tu  ipse  mihi  fave,  meque  iuva. 

3.  Nuper,  amici  mei,  otium  laudabatis,  otio  studebatis.  Nunc 
bellum  s5lum  laudatis.  (Ans.)  Tum  nullum  timebamus  peri- 
culum. Nunc  Germanos  timemus.  (First  speaker)  Istud  otium 
tum  non  probabam.  Nunc  isti  studid  novo  non  faveo;  nam  ego 
(or  ego  enim)  periculum  a  ^  Germanis  timeo  niillum. 

161.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

I.  Recently,  my  friends,  you  were  favoring  peace.  Why  are 
you  now  favoring  war?  2.  (Ans.)  At-that-time  we  feared^  no 
danger.  Now  we  are  expecting  war  from  the  Germans  them- 
selves. 

II.  e.,  placed  after  the  first  word  of  its  clause,  as  in  ille  enim, /or  he; 
sometimes  after  a  prepositional  phrase,  as  in  ab  illo  enim,  for  by  Mm. 

2 From.        3  "Feared"  here= ''  were  fearing," —  a  past  situation. 


54 


Exercise . 


3.  That  war  was  just:  this  new  war  (of  yours)  is  not  just.  4.  t 
approved^  that:  I  do  not  approve  this. 

5.  Some  (people)  never  favor  war. 

6.  My  son,  I  do  not  favor  this  friend  (of  yours).  7.  His^  rep- 
utation is  not  good.    8.  He  is  strong,  but  works  badly. 

9.  Warn  and  help  this  friend  (of  yours),  for  he  is  not 
working  well  now.  10.  (Ans.)  He  is  ill,'  and  is  working  with 
difficulty. 

^  =  was  approving ;  past  situsition. 

2  See  section  146,  a  for  the  way  to  express  "his." 


VILLA  D'ESTE,  AT  TIVOLI  (TiBUR).    BUILT  IN  1549 


Imperfect  Indicative  Passive 


55 


LESSON  XX 
FIRST  AND  SECOND  CONJUGATIONS  (Continued) 


152.   THE  IMPERFECT  INDICATIVE  ACTIVE  (Repeated) 
AND  PASSIVE 


First  Conjugation 


ACTIVE 

I  tvas  loving, 

etc. 
1st  Sing,  amabam 


2d 
3d 


am  abas 
amabat 


1st    PL   amabamus 


2d 
3d 


am  abatis 
amabant 


PASSIVE 

I  was  being 
loved,  etc. 
amabar 
amabaris  or -re 
amabatur 
amabamur 
amabamini 
amabantur 


Second  Conjugation 

ACTIVE  passive 

I  was  warning,    I  was  being 
warned,  etc. 


etc. 
monebam 
monebas 
monebat 


monebar 

monebarisor-re 

monebatur 


monebamus  monebamur 
monebatis  monebamini 
monebant       monebantur 


a.  The  stem  of  the  passive  is  the  same  as  in  the  active  (amaba-, 
moneba-).    The  personal  endings  are  the  regular  ones  seen  in  124. 

163.    DECLENSION    OP    THE    DETERMINATIVE    PRO- 
NOUN is,  this,^  that}  ilie,^  he,^  she,  it 


Singular 

Plural 

M.        F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

Nom. 

is        ea 

id 

ei  or  ii  (i) 

eae 

ea 

Gen. 

eius*  eius 

eius 

eorum 

earum 

eorum 

Dut 

ei        ei 

ei 

eis  or  iis  (is) 

eis  or  iis  (is) 

eis  or  iis  (is) 

Ace. 

eum    earn 

id 

eo3 

eas 

ea 

Voc. 

Abl. 

CO       ea 

CO 

eis  or  iis  (is) 

eiri  or  iis  (is) 

eis  or  iis  (is) 

a. 

In 

the  PL,  the 

preferred  forms  are  spelled  with  two  i's,  but 

pronour 

!ced  with  one. 

i^This"  (Plural  "these")  and  '^that"   (Plural   ''those"),  the  English 
"Demonstrative"  Pronouns. 

2  "The,"  the  English  ''Definite  Article." 

3  "He"  (Plural  "they"),  the  English  "Personal"  Pronoun. 

4  Pronounce  as  if  written  with  two  i's,  ei-ius  (  =  eh^-yoos).     The  first  syl- 
lable is  thus  long.    So  regularly  with  e-i,  a-i. 


56  Exercises 

154.  VOCABULARY 

antea  (ante  +  ea),   Adv.,  before  dlligentia, -ae,  F.  1,  c?i7/grence. 

this;  before  that;  formerly.  is,  ea,  id,  this,  that,  the;  he,  she, 
condiscipulus,   -I,  M.  2  (con-=:  it. 

cum),      fellow  pupil,     school-  magnopere  (first  part  from  mag- 

viate.  nus,  second  from  a  word  mean- 

cnnctus,  -a,  -um,  all  (together),  ing  work).  Adv.,  greatly. 

whole.    In  PL,  all,  everybody.  si,  Conj.,  if. 

155.  READING  MATTER 

1.  (A  schoolmate  of  Cornelius,  to  his  father)  Cornelius  nuper 
male  lab5rabat,  eiusque  fama  mala  erat.  Is  a  magistrd  et  a 
condiscipulis  nonnullis  culpabatur.  Nunc  cuncti  ei  puero 
fa  vent,  cQncti  eum  probant:  nunc  enim  labdrat.  (The  father) 
Si  ita  est,  id '  mihi  magnopere  placet. 

2.  Antea,  mi  fili,  a  magistro  saepe  monebaris;  nunc  ab  eo 
laudaris.  (Ans.)  Ita  est.  Antea  otium  amabam,  et  saepe  cul- 
pabar.  Sed  ilia  fama  mala  mihi  non  placebat.  Itaque  nunc 
cum  studio  laboro.  (The  father)  Ista  nova  diligentia  mihi 
placet. 

3.  Filii  mei  antea  a  magistro  culpabantur.     Nunc  laudantur. 

4.  Antea,  filii  mei,  a  magistrd  saepe  culpabamini.  (Ans.)  Ita 
est.  Antea  culpabamur.  Sed  nunc  laudamur.  Laudari  magis 
amamus. 

156.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  Recently  Cornelius  was  being  blamed.  2.  Now,  all  his 
schoolmates  approve  him,  all  are  praising  his  new  diligence. 

3.  Formerly,  my  friends,  you  were  being  praised  by  every- 
body.^ 4.  Now  you  are  (being)  warned  by  many.  5.  This  does 
not  please  me  greatly.  6.  (Ans.)  Then  we  were  not  sick,  noiv 
we  are. 

7.  Recently  no  dangers  were  feared.  8.  Now  danger  is  feared 
from  the  Germans;  for  they  are  strong,  and  are-eager-for  war. 

9.  Recently,  my  friend,  you  were  (being)  censured.  10.  If 
some  (people)  are  now  praising  you,  I  am  glad. 

1  This  (thing),  this,  it.  2  Use  cuncti,  all,  in  the  proper  case. 


Future  Indicative  Active 


57 


LESSON  XXI 

FIRST  AND  SECOND  CONJUGATIONS  (Continued) 


167. 


THE  FUTURE  INDICATIVE  ACTIVE 


First  Conjugation        Second  Conjugation 
I  shall  love,  or  /  shall  warn,  or 

1  shall  he  loving,  etc.  I  shall  he  warning,  etc. 
1st  Sing,   amabo  monebO 

monebis 
monebit 
monebimus 
monebitis 
monebunt 

a.  The  Tense-Sign  of  the  Future  Indicative  in  the  First  and  Sec- 
ond Conjugations  is  -b-  plus  a  variable  vowel  (-bO-,  -bi-,  -bu-,  etc.). 
h.  The  Future  Indicative  represents  an  act  either  as  going  on  at 
some  point  or  period  in  future  time,  or  indefinitely  in  the  future. 

168.     DECLENSION  OF  THE  PRONOUN  Idem,  the  same 


2d      " 

amabis 

3d      " 

amabit 

1st  PL 

amabimus 

2d     " 

amabitis 

3d    " 

amabunt 

Endings 

Irregulae 

I  shall  he, 

etc. 

-bo 

erO 

-bis 

eris 

-bit 

erit 

-bimus 

erimus 

-bitis 

eritis 

-bunt 

erunt 

SINGULAR 

M. 

F. 

N. 

Norn, 

idem 

eadem 

idem 

Gen. 

eiusdem 

eiusdem 

eiusdem 

Dat 

eidem 

eidem 

eidem 

Ace. 

eundem 

eandem 

idem 

Voc. 
Ahl. 

• 
eodem 

eadem 

eodem 

PLURAL 

Nom. 

eidem  or 
Idem  (ildem) 

eaedem 

eadem 

Gen. 

eorundem 

earundem 

eorundem 

Dat. 

eisdem  or 

eisdem  or 

eisdem  or 

isdem  (iisdem) 

isdem  (iisdem) 

isdem  (iisdem) 

Ace. 

eosdem 

easdem 

eadem 

Voc. 
Ahl. 

eisdem  or 

eisdem  or 

eisdem  or 

Jsdem  (iisdem) 

isdam  (iisdem) 

isdem  (iisdem) 

58  Exactness  in  Expressing  Time 

a.  Idem  corresponds  to  is,  with  -dem  added  to  every  form. 
Before  the  d,  m  becomes  n.    (Thus  Ace.  eun-dem  for  eum-dem.) 

h.  Note  that  idem  (long  i)  is  Masculine,  and  idem  (short  i)  Neuter. 

c.  Remember  the  following  for  the  Plural  of  is  and  Idem:  In  the 
PI.  of  is,  the  preferred  forms  are  spelled  with  two  i's  but  pronounced 
with  one  i;  in  the  PI.  of  Idem,  the  preferred  forms  are  spelled,  as 
well  as  pronounced,  with  one  i. 

159.  For  ego,  the  Nom.  PL  is  nos  (also  Ace.) ;  for  tu, 
it  is  vos  (also  Ace.  and  Voe.).  Like  ego  and  tu,  these 
words  are  generally  not  expressed  as  Subjects,  since  the 
form  of  the  Verb  itself  shows  the  person  and  number. 
But  they  are  necessarily  expressed  where  emphasis  or 
contrast  is  intended.     Thus: 

Nos  culpamur,  vOs  laudamini,  WE  are  blamed,  YOU  are  praised. 

160.  In  if -clauses  referring  to  the  future,  we  commonly 
use  a  Present  Indicative  in  English.  Latin  is  generally 
more  exact.     Thus: 

Si  bene  laborabis,  beatus  eris,  if  you  (shall)  work  ivell,  you  will  be 
happy. 
This  will  be  found  to  be  true  in  many  constructions.     Remember, 
then,  that: 

161.  In  general,  Latin  expresses  relations  of  time  more  exactly 
than  English. 

162.  VOCABULARY 

certus,  -a,  -um,  certain,  sure,  as-  noster,  nostVa,  nostrum,  our. 

sured,  fixed;  trusty.  persevero, persevere, 

eerie.  Adv.,  certainly,  surely ;  at  umquam.  Adv.,  ever.    (Cf.  num- 

any  rate,  at  least.  quam,  never.) 

desidero,  desire.  verus,  -a,  -um,  true,  real. 

displiceo,    be   displeasing,    dis-  verO,  Adv.,  in  truth,  really,  in- 

please  (Verb  of  Quality,  taking  deed.  Often  merely  emphasizes. 

Dat.).  vaster,  vestra,  vestrum  (cf.  vOs 
Idem,  eadem,  idem,  the  same.  below),   yoiir   (when    two    or 

mox.  Adv.,  soon.  more  persons  are  addressed), 

nimis,  Adv.,  too  much,  too.  vOs,  you.     Nom.,  Ace,  and  Voc. 
nOs,  we,  us.    Nom.  and  Ace.  Pi.  PI.  of  tQ. 

of  ego. 


Exercises  59 

163.  READING  MATTER 

1.  Magister  tuus  et  ipsi  condiscipuli  nuper  te  culpabant. 
Nunc  bene  laboras.  Si  perseverabis,  idem  magister  et  idem  con- 
discipuli diligentiam  tuam  laudabunt.  Studia  tua  niiper  tibi 
displicebant.  Eadem  studia  mox  placebunt,  tibique  certam 
dabunt^  famam.  Tii  ipse  laetus  eris.  (Ans.)  Perseverabo  certe. 
Si  studia  umquam  amab5,  beatus  ero.     Sed  id  ver5  n5n  exspecto. 

2.  (Cornelius  serves  as  an  example.  A  father  says  to  his 
sons)  Cornelius  niiper  a  ciinctis  condiscipulis  culpabatur.  Eius- 
dem  pueri  fama  nunc  bona  est:  eidem  puero  ciincti  fa  vent,  eun- 
dem  ciincti  magnopere  laudant;  nam  is  bene  nunc  laborat.  V5s 
si  impigre  studebitis,  eadem  fama  mox  vestra  erit.  Magister 
vester  et  cuncti  veri  amici  vestri  vos  laudabunt.  Etiam  studia 
vestra  amabitis.  (One  of  them  answers)  Nos  studebimus,  tii  si 
id  desideras,  et  laeti  erimus;  sed  studia  nostra  certe  numquam 
nimis  amabimus. 

164.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  You  will  please  me,  my  son,  if  you  (shall)  work  well,  and 
you  yourself  will  soon  be  happy,  for  you  will  have  a  real  and 
assured  reputation.  2.  You  displease  me  now.  3.  (Ans.)  I  will 
work  well,  and  I  shall  really  be  happy,  if  I  (shall)  please  you. 
4.  But  I  shall  not  love  my  studies  too-much. 

5.  You  will  please  me,  my  sons,  if  you  (shall)  work  well,  and 
you  yourselves  will  be  happy.  6.  (Ans.)  We  will  work  well,  if 
you  desire  this  greatly,  and  we  shall  be  fortunate  if  ever  you 
(shall)  praise  us.    7.  We  will  persevere  at  any  rate. 

8.  Our  son  and  your  son  Mark  are  studying  in  the  same 
school.  9.  They  have  the  same  friends,  the  same  studies,  and 
the  same  sports. 

iDo  has  a  short  a  in  inflection,  except  in  words  of  one  syllable.  Thus 
dare,  dabam,  dabo,  etc.  (but  das).  All  other  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation 
have  the  long  a  everywhere  (except  as  by  100,  2). 


60 


Future  Indicative  Passive 


LESSON  XXII 

FIRST  AND  SECOND  CONJUGATIONS  (Continued) 

165.     FUTURE  INDICATIVE,  ACTIVE  (Repeated)  AND 

PASSIVE 


First  Conjt 

TGATION 

Second  Conjugation 

Active 

Passive 

Active 

Passive 

/  shall  lovBy    I  shall  be  loved, 

I  shall  warn, 

I  shall  be  warned, 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

etc. 

1st  Sing 

.  amS.bO 

amabor 

monebo 

monebor 

2d      " 

amabis 

amaberis  or 

-re 

monebis 

moneberis  or -re 

3d      *' 

amabit 

amabitur 

monebit 

monebitur 

1st  PI 

amabimus 

amabimur 

monebimus  monebimur 

2d    " 

amabitis 

amabimini 

monebitis 

monebimini 

3d    " 

amabunt 

amabuntu-r 

monebunt 

monebuntur 

a.  The  stem  of  the  passive  is  the  same  as  in  the  active.  The  per- 
sonal endings  are  the  regular  ones  already  seen  in  the  present  and 
imperfect. 


166.  DECLENSION  OP  THE  DETERMINATIVE  PRONOUN 
hie,  this,^  he^ 


M. 

F. 

N. 

Norn. 

hie 

haec 

hoc 

Gen. 

huius^ 

huius 

huius 

Dat. 

huic* 

huic 

huic 

Ace. 

hunc 

hanc 

hoc 

Voc. 
Abl. 

hoc 

hac 

hoc 

PLURAL 

M. 

F. 

N. 

hi 

hae 

haec 

horum 

harum 

horum 

his 

his 

his 

hos 

has 

haec 

his 


his 


his 


a.  Hie  is  made  up  of  a  true  pronoun,  to  which  in  certain  forms  a 
-e  is  added,  itself  meaning  something  like  "this"  or  "here." 

b.  Notice  hae-e  in  the  Nom.  Sing.  Fem.,  and  the  Nom.-Acc.  Neut. 
PI.  The  ae  in  these  forms  is  a  special  pronominal  ending,  which 
you  will  see  again  in  several  pronouns. 

i^This"  (Plural  "these"),  the  English  "Demonstrative"  pronoun. 
2 ''He"  (Plural  "they"),  the  English  "Personal"  Pronoun. 
3 Pronounce  hui-ius  (=  hooi-yoos),  ^Pronounce  hooie. 


Exercises  61 

167.  1.  Of  the  Determinative  Pronouns  hie,  iste,  and  ille  (now 
,  learned),  hie  means  this,  he  (near  the  speaker),  iste  this  (of  yours), 

that  (of  yours),  he  (near  you),  and  ille  that,  he  (over  there). 

2.  Is,  thisy  that,  he  is  less  sharply  specific,  and  is  therefore  pre- 
ferred when  there  can  be  no  mistake  about  the  reference. 

3.  Latin  has  thus  four  words,  hie,  iste,  ille,  and  is,  used  as  Per- 
sonal Pronouns  of  the  Third  Person.     Is  is  the  most  common. 

168.  READING  MATTER 

1.  Magister  tuus  te  nuper  culpabat.  Si  bene  laborabis,  ab 
hoc  e5dem  magistro  mox  laudaberis.  Studia  tibi  antea  nimis 
displicebant.  Si  bene  umquam  studebis,  haec  eadem  studia  a 
te^  vero  amabuntur.     Persevera,  et  tQ  ipse  laetus  eris. 

2.  Hie  puer  impigre  laborat.    Haec  puella  ciir  tain  pigra  est? 

3.  Cuncti  condiscipuli  nostri  nos  culpant.  Ab  his  numquam 
satis  probabimur,  etiam  si  impigre  studebimus.  (Ans.)  A  me^ 
certe  probabimini;  magnopere  enim  desidero  vos  laudare. 

4.  Ciir  tii  huic  scholae  faves?  (Ans.)  Quia  cuncti  eius-  disci- 
puli  veri  discipuli  sunt. 

169.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  (A  student,  sick  and  despondent)  I  shall  be  censured  if  I  do  ^ 
not  work  well,  even  if  I  am^  ill.  2.  (Ans.)  You  will  be  censured 
by  no  one.     All  will  favor  you. 

3.  My  sons,  you  will  be  censured  if  you  do^  not  work  well. 

4.  These  new  pupils  are  really  working  vigorously.  5.  (Ans.) 
They  will  be  praised  by  our  teacher.  6.  We  shall  be  censured 
by  him,  even  if  we  shall  really  work  well. 

7.  This  school  was  formerly  bad.  8.  Its  master  will  not  soon 
be  happy;  for  the  new  pupil^  alone  will  work  well. 

9.  This  school  is  good,  that  (one)  is  too  bad.  10.  Therefore 
I  favor  this  (one),  and  censure  that  (one). 

1  Me  and  te  are  Ablative  as  well  as  Accusative. 

2  For  eius,  following  huic,  see  167,  2. 
3Look  out  for  the  real  tense-meaning. 


62 


Third  Conjugation 


LESSON  XXIII 

THE  THIRD  CONJUGATION 

170.  The  Third  Conjugation,  like  the  others,  is  best 
recognized  in  the  Present  Infinitive.  The  forms  are 
repeated  below  from  92. 


Conjugation 
I 
II 
III 


Present 
Indicative 

amO 

moneO 

tegO 


Present 
Infinitive 


Present  Stem 
Ends  In 


amare,  to  love  -a-  (ama-) 

monere,  to  warn  -e-  (mone-) 

tegere,  to  cover  -e-  (tege-) 

a.  The  Present  Infinitive  Passive  of  the  Third   Conjugation  is 

formed  with  only  the  ending  -I.     Thus  tegere  (Active)  fo  cover^  tegi 

(Passive)  to  he  covered. 

171.  THIRD  CONJUGATION,  PRESENT  INDICATIVE, 

ACTIVE  AND  PASSIVE 

tegO,  cover;  Stem  tege- 


Active 

Passive 

1st  Sing. 

tegO 

tegor 

2d       " 

tegis 

tegeris  or  -re 

3d      " 

tegit 

tegitur 

1st  PI 

tegimus 

tegimur 

2d    " 

tegitis 

tegimini 

3d    " 

tegunt 

teguntur 

a.  Notice  that  these  endings  are  precisely  the  same  as  those 
which  you  have  just  learned  for  the  Future  of  sum  (erO,  eris,  erit, 
etc.). 

h.  Remember  that  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  Third  Conjuga- 
tion is  variable  (thus  tege-re,  but  tegi-t,  tegu-nt,  etc.). 

172.  THIRD  CONJUGATION,  PRESENT  IMPERATIVE, 
ACTIVE  AND  PASSIVE 

Present  Active  Present  Passive 

2d  Sing,    tege,  cover  {thou)        tegere,  be  {thou)  covered 
2d  PI.        tegite,  cover  {ye)         tegimini,  be  {ye)  covered 
a.  Tege,  like  ama  and  mone,  is  the  bare  stem. 


''Yes"^^  or  "No^^   Questions,  and  Answers         63 

"YES"  OR  "NO"  QUESTIONS,  AND  ANSWERS  TO  THEM 

173.  Questions  calling  for  the  answer  "Yes"  or  ''No" 
may  be  asked  in  the  four  following  ways: 

1.  With  no  sign  but  that  of  the  inflection  of  voice,  or,  in  print,  of 
the  "question  mark." 

2.  With  -ne  (attached  to  the  emphatic  word),  implying  nothing 
about  the  answer  {  =  a  question  mark  at  the  beginning). 

3.  With  nOnne,  implying  the  answer  "yes." 

4.  With  num,  implying  the  answer  "no." 
Thus: 

1.  Marcus  adest?    Is  Mark  presents 

2.  Marcusne  adest?    Is  Mark  presents 

3.  Nonne  Marcus  adest?    Isn't  Mark  present? 

4.  Num  Marcus  adest?    Mark  isn^t present,  is  he 9 

174.  1.  Answers  to  "Yes"  or  "No"  Questions  may  be  given,  as 
we  have  seen,  by  repeating  the  verb,  with  or  without  a  negative. 
Or, 

2.  "Yes"  may  be  expressed  by  ita,  etiam,  verO,  certe,  etc.  {so, even, 
in  truth,  certainly,  etc.),  and  "no"  by  nOn,  minime,  etc.  {no,  not  at 
all,  etc.). 

175.  VOCABULARY 

(Infinitives  will  hereafter  be  given  for  new  verbs.) 

cado,  cadere,/aZ/.  -ne,  enclitic  interrogative  Adv., 
de,  Prep.,  down  from,  from,  of  implying    nothing    about   the 

descent.  Takes  Separative  Abl.  answer, 

equus,  equl,  M.  2,  horse.  nOnne,  not  9  interrog.  Adv.,  im- 
ex  or   e,   Prep.,  out   of,  from.  plying  "yes."' 

Takes    Separative    Abl.     Ex  num,    interrog.    Adv.,    implying 

and   e   before   consonants,  ex  "no." 

before  vowels.  peto,  petere,  aim  at,  attack; 
iam.  Adv.,  by  this  time,  already,  seek,  ask, 

now.  properO,  -are,  hurry,  hasten. 

inimlcus,    -I,    M.   2    (in,   not,  +  rego,    regere    (make    straight), 

amicus,  not  friend, =)  enemy.  direct,  guide,  rule. 

minimus,   -a,   -um,   smallest,  or  saxum,  -I,  N.  2,  stone,  rock. 

very  small.  tego,  tegere,  cover;  shield,  hidei 
minime,    Adv.,   in  the  smallest         protect. 

degree;  not  at  all.  via,  -ae,  F.  1,  way,  street,  road. 

nobis,  Dat.-Abl.  PI.  of  nOs.  vObis,  Dat.-Abl.  PI.  of  vOs. 


64  Exercises 

176.  READING  MATTER 

1.  Parvine  pueri  a  puerTs  magnis  vestra^  in  scholapetuntur?^ 

2.  Inimici  me  petunt;  me  tege,  amice  mi. 

3.  N5nne  tQ  ab  amicis  tegeris?  (Ans^)  Vero.  Nulli  me 
petunt. 

4.  Nonne  vos,  pueri  parvi,  ab  amicis  magnis  vestris  tegimini? 
(Ans.)  Ita.     Semper  tegimur.     Amici  nobis  boni  sunt. 

5.  A  me  regere,^  fili  mi.     Ego  tibi  verus  ero  amicus. 

6.  A  me  regimini,^  filii  mei.     Ego  v5bis  certus  ero  amicus. 

7.  Hie  puer  minimus  est,  sed  equum  magnum  iam  regit. 
(Second  speaker)  Num  equus  magnus  a  puero  tam  parvo  regitur  ? 

8.  Saxa  viarum  diira  sunt.  N5nne  tu,  puer  parve,  saepe  de 
equo  in  ea^  cadis?  (Ans.)  Minime.  Ego numquam cado.  (First 
speaker)  Mei  filii  iam  magni  sunt,  sed  saepe  de  equis  cadunt. 

9.  Ex  schola  properate*.    Vos  in  via  exspectant  amici. 

177.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  I  don't  attack  you,  boys,  do  I?     Why  do  you  attack  me? 

2.  Why  are  you  attacked?     Don't  you  yourself  attack  others? 

3.  We  are  attacked  by  our  enemies.  4.  If  you  are  true  and 
sure  friends  of -ours  (say  "  to  us  "),  protect  us. 

5.  Does  it  please  you,  big  boys,  to  attack  little  (ones)  ?  6.  In 
our^  school  the  smallest  boys  are  never  attacked.  7.  Be  guided 
by  me.    Attack  no(body). 

8.  Are  you  sometimes  attacked  by  big  boys  in  school,  my  sons? 
9.  (Ans.)  Yes,  but  other  big  boys  protect  us.  We  don't  fear  at  all.^ 

10.  You  are  already  big,  but  you  fall  from  your  horses  upon 
the  stones  of  the  street.     Aren't  they  hard? 

11.  Why  are  you  hurrying  out  of  the  street?  12.  (Ans.)  We 
are-afraid-of  ^  those  horses. 

1  Vestra  goes  with  schola  (a  common  group-order, — Adj.,  Prep.,  Noun). 

2Peto  has  here  its  simple  meaning,  attack. 

3  What  is  this  doubtful  form?    Consider  context. 

*  "Upon  them."    Ea  is  Ace,  because  cadis  expresses  motion. 

cOf.  footnote  1.  6 "We  fear  not-at-all."  7"We  fear." 


The  Four  Conjugations  65 


LESSON  XXIV 

THE    THIRD    CONJUGATION   (Continued).— THE   FOURTH 
CONJUGATION 

178.  1.  The  Fourth  Conjugation  has  the  characteristic 
vowel  -i-.     Thus,  audio,  audire,  hear. 

2.  Besides  these  Fourth  Conjugation  verbs  in  -io,  there 
are  also  certain  Third  Conjugation  verbs  in  -16.  Thus 
capio,  caper e,  take. 

a.  These  were  originally  of  the  Fourth  Conjugation,  but  came  to 
belong  to  the  Third  through  a  shortening  of  the  characteristic 
vowel. 

h.  There  are  thus  two  Third  Conjugation  types,  namely  in  -0 
and  -io.  » 

179.  THE  FOUR  CONJUGATIONS  WITH  INFINITIVES, 

ACTIVE  AND  PASSIVE 


Crnij. 
I 

Present  Stem 
ends  in 

-a-     (ama-) 

Present 
Indicative 

amO 

Present 
Infin.  Active 

am-are 

Present 
Infin.  Passive 

am-arl 

•II 

-e- 

(mone-) 

moneO 

mon-ere 

mon-erl 

III 
IV 

-e- 
-I- 

(tege-) 

(cape-) 
(audi-) 

tegO 

capio 
audio 

teg-ere 

cap-ere 
aud-Ire 

teg-I 

cap-I 
aud-Irl 

a.  Remember  carefully  that  the  Present  Passive  Infinitive  of  the 
Third  Conjugation,  in  either  type,  ends  merely  in  -I  (thus  tegl,  capl); 
while  in  all  the  other  Conjugations  it  ends  in  -ri  added  to  the 
characteristic  vowel  (-arl,  -eri,  -Irl). 

h.  From  here  on,  the  Conjugation  of  each  new  verb  occurring  in 
the  Vocabularies  will  be  indicated  by  a  number,  which  is  to  be 
repeated  when  you  are  asked  to  give  the  verb. 


66 


Third  ayid  Fourth  Conjugations 


THIRD  CONJUGATION  (Both  Types),    AND    FOURTH   CON- 
JUGATION 


180. 


Present  Indicative,  Active  and  Passive 


Third  Conjugation 


Fourth  Conjugation 


Active 
capio,  take 
capis 
capit 
capimus 
capitis 
capiunt 

Passive 
capior 

caperis  or  -re 
capitur 
capimur 
capimini 
capiuntur 

a.  Note  that  all  verbs  showing  i  before  another  vowel  in  conjuga- 
tion (-io,  -iunt,  etc.)  must  belong  to  the  Third  or  Fourth  Conjugation. 

b.  Remember  that  i  is  short  in  the  Third  Conjugation,  and  long 
in  the  Fourth  (except,  of  course,  in  the  places  of  regular  shortening). 


1st  Sing. 

tego,  cover 

2d      " 

tegis 

3d      " 

tegit 

1st    PI. 

tegimus 

2d      " 

tegitis 

3d      " 

tegunt 

1st  Sing. 

tegor 

2d      " 

tegeris  or  -re 

3d      " 

tegitur 

1st   PI. 

tegimur 

2d      « 

tegimini 

3d      " 

teguntur 

audio,  hear 

audis 

audit 

audlmus 

audltis 

audiunt 

audior 

audiris  or  -re 

auditur 

audlmur 

audlmini 

audiuntur 


181. 


VOCABULARY 


atque  or  ac,^  Conj.,  and.  Of  close 

connection,  like  -que. 
neque  or  nec,^  Conj.,  nor.  Neque 

.  .  . ,  neque  .  .  .  ,  neither  .  .  . 

nor  .  .  . 
audio,  audire,  4,  hear. 
capio,  capere,  3,  take^  take  up. 
cupidus,  -a,  -um,  desirous. 
cupio,  cupere,   3,    desire,   wish, 

want. 
cum,  Conj.,  when. 
desisto,  -ere,  3,  desist,  stop. 


faciO,  facere,  S,  make,  do;  per- 
form; act. 

fugio,  fugere,  3,  flee,  run  away. 

iacio,  iacere,  3,  throw. 

mdrus,  -I,  M.  2,  wall. 

pugnO,  pugnare,  1,  fight. 

quid,  what?  Neut.  Nom.-Acc. 
Sing. 

scio,  scire,  4,  know. 

sonus,  -1,  M.  2,  sound. 

sto,  stare,  1,  stand. 

video,  videre,  2,  see. 


1  Neque  generally  before  vowels,  nee  generally  before  consonants ;  atque 
before  either,  ac  only  before  consonants. 


Exercises  67 

182.  READING  MATTER 

1.  (A  quarrel  begins)  Nonnulli  pueri  in^  condiseipul5s  de 
muro  saxa  iaciunt.  (One  says)  Nos  de  mur5  petimur.  (A 
passer-by)  Hi  pueri  neque  ipsi  saxa  capiunt  nee  fugiunt.  (To 
the  boys)  Cur  hie  statis  ?  Ex  via  properate.  Peticupitis?  (One 
of  the  boys)  Cupidi  non  sumus.  (The  passer-by)  Ex  periculo 
fugite.  (Another  of  the  boys  to  the  rest)  Minime.  Cur  n5n 
ipsi  saxa  capimus  atque  illos  pueros  petimus?  Ciir  non  pug- 
namus?    Num  nos  timemus? 

2.  Saxa  capiuntur  et  iaciuntur.  Haec  in  via  cadunt.  Sonus 
a  magistro  auditur.  (He  says  to  others)  Auditisne?  (They 
answer)  Audimus.  (He  goes  out  and  calls)  0  pueri,  quid 
facitis?  Ciir  saxa  iacitis  ?  Mene  auditis?  Desistite.  Hie ^  non 
est  ludus,  sed  belluin  verum.  Magn5  in  periculo  cunctiestis. 
Nonne  id  scitis?    Haec^  cum  facitis,  turn*  vero*  vobis  iratus  sum. 

3.  Vide  ilium  puerum  parvum !     De  equo  cadit ! 

183.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  That^  boy  never^  falls  from  his  horse. 

2.  Do  you  want  to  fight?    (Ans.)  I  am  not  desirous.     Stop. 

3.  What  are  you  doing,  boys?  (Ans.)  Wfe  are  standing  on 
the  wall.  4.  (The  teacher)  Yes,  I  see  that  myself.  5.  But  I 
hear  the  sound  of  stones.  Why  are  you  throwing  them  ?  6.  This^ 
(is  what)  I  want  to  know. 

7.  Do  your  pupils  often  throw  stones?  8.  (Ans.)  They  never 
throw  at  schoolmates.  9.  But  when  they  are  attacked  by  boys 
from  (=out  of)  other  schools,  they  sometimes  take-up  stones; 
for  they  love  neither  to  be  attacked  nor  to  run-away. 

10.  (A  boy  shouts)  Protect  us,  friends!  (To  his  mates)  We 
are  heard,  and  other  boys  are  hurrying  to  us  from  our  school. 

^  7wto,=  English  af.  ^  Then  indeed, =  f lien  .  .  .  really. 

2Masc.,  because  the  Predicate  is.  ^Make  emphatic  by  position. 

^ These  things  {things  like  these) .  ^Say  merely  "I  want  to  know 

Note  the  emphatic  position.  #/iis." 


68        The  Interrogative  and  Relative  Pronouns 


LESSON  XXV 

184.    DECLENSION  OF  THE  INTERROGATIVE  AND 
RELATIVE  PRONOUNS,  quis,  qui 


qui,  Relative  Pronoun,  who,  and 
Interrog.  Adjective,  what? 


quis,  Interrog.  Pronoun,   who? 
(as  Substantive). 


M. 
Nom.  qui 
Gen.      cuius^ 


Dat 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Ahl. 


CUl^ 

quern 


F. 
quae 
cuius 
cui 
quam 


SINGULAR 

N. 
quod 
cuius 
cui 
quod 


L.  a.uu  r . 

quis 

quid 

cuius^ 

CUIUS 

cui2 

cui 

quern 

quid 

quo 


qua 


quo 


quo 


quo 


PLURAL  (same  for  both  words) 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 


M. 
qui 

quorum 
quibus 
quos 


F. 
quae 
quarum 
quibus 
quas 


N. 
quae 
quorum 
quibus 
quae 


quibus 


quibus 


quibus 


a.  Notice  that  quis  and  qui  are  declined  alike  in  the  Plural,  and 
differ  in  the  Singular  only  in  the  pairs  quis,  quid,  and  qui,  quod.  But 
quis  does  not  distinguish  between  Masc.  and  Fem.  in  the  Sing. 

b.  Notice  also  the  ending  -ae  in  the  Nom.  Pern.  Sing,  and  the 
Nom.  and  Ace.  Neut.  PI.  of  qui,  just  as  in  hae-c  from  hie  (166). 

c.  Id  the  Ace.  Masc.  Sing,  quern,  notice  the  new  Ace.  ending  in 
-em. 

185.  The  translations  differ  with  the  genders.      Thus: 

Interrogative  Substantive:  quis?  who?  quid?   ivhatf 

Interrogative  Adjective:  qui?  what?  which? 

Relative:  qui,  who,  that  (Masc.  or  Pem.);  which,  that  (Neuter). 


1  Pronounce  cui-ius  ( =  cooi-yoos) .  2  Pronounce  cooi. 


Agreement  of  Relative  69 

186.  The  Interrogative  Pronoun  is  a  pronoun  that  asks 
a  question.    Thus  quern  vocas?  whom  are  you  calling? 

a.  Note  the  difference  in  form  between  the  Interrogative  as  Sub- 
stantive and  the  Interrogative  as  Adjective : 
Quis  hie  est?  who  is  this?    (Interrogative  Substantive). 
Qui  puer  hie  est?  what  hoy  is  this?    (Interrogative  Adjective). 
Quid  paras?  what  are  you  getting  up?  (Interrogative  Substantive). 
Quod  bellum  paras?   what  war  are  you  getting  up?    (Interrogative 
Adjective). 

187.  1.  The  Relative  Pronoun  is  a  connecting  pronoun 
referring  to  something  that  precedes  or  follows. 

2.  The  word  to  which  the  Relative  refers  is  called  the  ^ 
Antecedent,  because  it  generally  comes  before  the  Relative. 

3.  The  part  of  the  sentence  consisting  of  the  Relative, 
its  Verb,  and  all  that  goes  with  them,  is  called  the  Rela- 
tive Clause. 

188.  Examples  for  the  use  of  the  Relative  Pronoun: 

1.  Hie  puer,  quem  tn  eulpas,  aeger  est,  this  boy,  whom  you  are 

blaming,  is  sick, 
a.  Here  quem  must  of  course  be  Masculine  and  Singular,  because 
it  is  meant  to  go  with  (refer  to)  puer,  which  is  Masculine  and  Singu- 
lar; and  it  must  be  Accusative,  because  it  is  the  Object  of  eulpas. 

2.  Has  feminas  laudo,  quae  bene  labOrant,  I  praise  these  women, 

who  work  well. 

a.  Here  quae  must  of  course  be  Feminine  and  Plural,  because  it 
is  meant  to  refer  to  feminas,  which  is  Feminine  and  Plural;  and  it 
must  be  Nominative,  because  it  is  the  Subject  of  labOrant. 

Evidently  these  principles  must  always  hold.    Hence  the  rule: 

189.  Relative  Pronouns  agree  with  their  Antecedents 
in  Gender  and  Number,  but  their  Case  depends  upon 
their  relations  in  the  Clauses  to  lohich  they  belong, 

190.  READING  MATTER 

1.  (Same  subject  as  in  182,  2.  The  teacher  says)  Quem 
sonum  audio?     Qui  saxa  de  muro  iaciunt?     (Some  one  says) 


70  Exercises 

Ego  video.  Illi  qui  saxa  iaciunt  discipuli  ex  hac  schola  sunt. 
(The  teacher,  to  the  boys  above)  Quid  faeitis?  Quod  bellum 
paratis?  Vos  qui  saxa  iaeitis,  desistite.  Hi  pueri  qui  in  via 
stant  magno  in  perieulo  sunt.  N5nne  id  scitis?  Haec  cum 
faeitis,  turn  vero  mihi  magnopere  displicetis. 

2.  (A  neighbor  says)  Haec  schola,  quae  tibi  placet,  mihi  non 
placet.  Non  prob5  eam^  scholam  cuius  discipuli  in  condisci- 
pulos  saxa  iaciunt. 

3.  Quam  magnus  equus!^  (Ans.)  Sed  hie  idem  equus  a  puero 
parvo  amat  regi. 

191.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  In  what  school  are  you  studying?  (Ans.)  In  the  same 
school  in  which  Mark  is  studying.  2.  (First  speaker)  But  of 
what  school  (Genitive)  is  Mark?  (Second  speaker)  Don't  you 
know  that  ?  ^ 

3.  (One  father  to  another)  What  school  do  you  approve? 
(Ans.)  I  favor  a  school  in  which  the  pupils  desire  to  study. 

4.  I  love  the  same  studies  that*  you  love,  the  same  friends. 

5.  What  are  you  doing?  What  danger  are  you  fleeing?  6. 
(Ans.)  Some  boys  are  throwing  stones  from  the  wall.  Don't 
you  see? 

7.  When  stones  are  thrown  by  your  boys,  what  do  you  do? 
8.  (Ans.)  I  admonish  the  boys,  and^  they^  stop. 

1  That  school  whose,  a  school  whose.  ^Here  "that"  =  "which." 

2  How  big  a  horse  !  what  a  big  horse  !  ^  Use  id.  ^  Say  ' '  and  these. ' ' 


STAIRWAY  PATH,  VILLA  D'ESTE 


Quicumque  and  Quidam 


71 


LESSON   XXVI 


DECLENSION  OF  quicumque,  whoever,  and   quidam,  a  certain 

192.  The  Generalizing  or  Indefinite  Relative  Pronoun 

quicumque,  tohoever,  is  declined  like  qui  (184)  with  -cum- 

que^  added  to  each  form.     Thus: 

Nom.    quicumque  quaecumque  quodcumque 

Gen.      cuiuscuraque         cuiuscumque  cuiuscumque 

Dat.      cuicumque  cuicumque  cuicumque,  etc.,  etc. 

193.  The  Indefinite  Pronoun  quidam,  a  certain,  is 
declined  like  qui  with  -dam  added,  except  that  in  the 
Nominative  and  Accusative  Neuter  Singular  there  is  a 
second  form  quid-,  which  is  used  Substantively.^  The 
declension  is  as  follows: 

SINGULAR 

quidam  quaedam 

cuiusdam  cuiusdam 

cuidam  cuidam 

quendam  quandam 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voe. 

Abl 


quoddam  or  quiddam 

cuiusdam 

cuidam 

quoddam  or  quiddam 


quodam 


quadam 


quodam 


Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Ahl. 
a. 
fore  d 


quidam 
quorundam 
quibusdam 
quosdam 


quaedam 
quarundam 
quibusdam 
quasdam 


quaedam 
quorundam 
quibusdam 
quaedam 


quibusdam  quibusdam  quibusdam 

Notice  that  in  quidam  (just  as  in  Idem  in  158),  m  becomes  n  be- 
Thus  quendam  (for  quemdam),  quandam  (for  quamdam),  etc. 


1  The  -que  of  qui-cum-que  is  an  indefinite  particle,  meaning  any.  Qui- 
cum-que  thus  =  mho-any-when,  i.  e.,  who  at  any  time,  i.  e.,  whoever. 

2  Thus  quoddam  donum,  a  certain  gift,  but  quiddam,  a  certain  thing. 
This  distinction, — that  the  Substantive  form  is  quid  and  the  Adjective 
form  quod, — you  will  find  to  hold  for  all  compounds  in  this  book  having  qui 
or  quia  for  one  element. 


72 


Present  Imperative,  All  Conjugations 


194.   PRESENT  IMPERATIVE  OP  ALL  FOUR 
CONJUGATIONS 


CONJ.                       I 

Active 
II                         III 

IV 

2d  Sing,    ama 

mone            tege 

cape 

audi 

2d  PL         amate 

monete        tegite 
Passive 

capite 

audita 

2d  Sing,    amare 

monere        tegere 

capere 

uudire 

2d  PI         amamihl 

monemini    tegimini 

capimini 

audlmini 

a.  Note  that  the 

passive  forms  are  ambiguous  (read  137,  6  again). 

195. 

VOCABULARY 

accipio,  accipere,  3  (ad  +  capio, 
take  to  oneself),  take,  receive, 
accept, 

animus,  -I,  M.  2,  mind,  spirit; 
feeling. 

aut,  Conj.,  or.  Aut  .  .  .  aut  .  .  .  , 
either  .  .  .  or  .  . . 

auxilium,  -I,  N.  2,  aid,  help. 

cedo,  cedere,  3  (originally  move, 
then,  with  Dative,  movefor,=) 
yield;  give  way.  (Verb  of  At- 
titude, taking  Dative.) 

dIcO,  dicere,  3,  say,  speak. 

discedo,  -ere,  3  (dis-,  apart,+ 
cedO,  move  1),  more  off,  depart. 


imperatum,  -I,  N.  2,  command. 

incipio,  incipere,  3  (in+capiO, 
take  on),  be^in. 

iniQria,  -ae,  F.  1,  injury,  wrong. 

lapillus,  -1,  M.  2,  pebble. 

pello,  pellere,  3,  drive  {out  or  off). 

pugna,  -ae,  F.  1,  fight. 

quicumque  (192),  whoever. 

quidam  (193),  a  certain. 

reliquus, -a,, -um,  remaining, left; 
as  Subst.  in  PI.,  the  rest. 

vel  .  .  .  vel  .  .  .  ,  Conj.,  either  .  .  . 
or  .  .  .  (where  a  choice  is  of- 
fered). 

verto,  vertere,  3,  turn;  change. 


196.  READING  MATTER 

1.  (A  neighbor  to  the  teacher)  NdnnuUi  discipulorum  tuorum 
nonnumquam  saxa  in  condiscipulos  iaciunt.  Tu  hunc  ludum 
aut  n5n  vides  aut  probas.  Ego  n5n  probd.  (Ans.)  Lapillos, 
non  saxa,  iaciunt.     Sed  certe  neque  ego  probo. 

2.  (To  the  pupils,  later)  Me  audite.  Quiddam  a  quibusdam 
discipulis  peto.     Aliis  imperatum  quoddam  dare  desidero. 

1  The  original  meaning  move  is  lost  in  the  simplf3  verb  cedo,  but  appears 
in  all  the  compounds,  as  in  discedo  in  this  lesson.  Dis-  is  used  only  in  com- 
position, at  the  beginning  of  a  word  (hence  called  an  "inseparable  prefix"). 


Exercises  73 

3.  (A  boy)  Quid  a  n5bis  petis  ?^  Quodcumque  tu  cupis,  id  n5s 
facere  cupimus.  6.  (The  teacher)  Quidam  ex  v5bis  lapillos  in 
condiscipulos  nonnumquam  iaciunt.  Hi  illis^  ndncedunt.  It  a 
pugna  vera  ineipit.     Schola  nostra  magnam  accipit^  iniuriam. 

4.  Nunc  iis  qui  has  pugnas  incipiunt  haec  dico:  Quicumque 
haec  facit,  is  scholae  iniuriam  facit.  Itaque  vel  animos  vestr5s 
ad  alios  ludos  vertite,  vel  ex  hac  schola  pellimini;  vel  cedite  vel 
discedite.  A  reliquis  hoc  peto:  Per  vestrum  auxilium  famae 
bonae  scholae  nostrae  favete. 

197.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  (The  same  ideas,  in  English)  Certain  boys  of  this  school 
throw  pebbles  at  little  schoolmates.  They*  do  not  desire  to  do^ 
harm^  to  them.*  2.  But  in  whatever  school  pupils  do  these 
things,  that  school  soon  begins  to  be  blamed.  3.  Therefore  I 
say  to  these  boys:  Either^  desist  or^  depart.  This  is  my  com- 
mand. 

4.  (A  boy  says  to  the  teacher)  We  do  not  approve  (of) 
these  boys.  5.  (The  teacher)  Then  I  ask  help  of  (==from) 
you  and  the  rest;  for  these  fights  do  harm^  to  our  good  fame. 
6.  Say^  to  these  boys  that^  which^  you  say  to  me,  and  be  heard 
by  them. 

7.  (The  boy  to  the  teasers)  Either  yield,  or  leave^  the  school, 
or  be  driven  out.  8.  To  yield  is  good.  It  will  be  bad  either  to 
leave ^  the  school,  or  to  be  driven  out. 

1  For  the  meaning  of  peto,  look  back  at  Vocabulary,  175. 
^  These  to  those  =  the  latter  to  the  former,  .         ' 

3  Receives  injury  =  suffers  injury. 

4 Say ''those  .  .  .  to  these."  Latin  is  more  exact  than  English  in  tiie 
use  of  pronouns. 

^Use  iniuriam  and  facio  ("do  an  injury"). 

6  This  means,  let  them  take  their  choice.   Which  should  you  use,  aut  or  vel? 

7^ Die  not  dice.    See  footnote,  page  204. 

8 Id  quod.  9 ''Depart  from." 


74 


Imperfect  Indicative  Finished 


LESSON  XXVII 

IMPERFECT  INDICATIVE  (Finished) 

198.  IMPERFECT  INDICATIVE,  THIRD  AND  FOURTH 
CONJUGATIONS 


Con  J. 

II  (Repeated) 

1st  Sing. 

monebam 

2d     " 

monebas 

3d     " 

monebat 

1st  PL 

monebamus 

2d    " 

monebatis 

3d    " 

monebant 

1st  Sing. 

monebar 

2d     " 

monebaris 

or  -re 

3d     " 

monebatur 

1st  PL 

monebamur 

2d    " 

monebamini 

3d    " 

monebantur 

III 

Active 

tegebam  capiebam 

tegebas  capiebas 

tegebat  capiebat 

tegebamus  capiebamus 

tegebatis  capiebatis 

tegebant  capiebant 

Passive 
tegebar         capiebar 
tegebaris      capiebaris 

or  -re  or  -re 

tegebatur      capiebatur 
tegebamur    capiebamur 
tegebamini  capiebaminl 
tegebantur   capiebantur 


IV 

audiebam 

audiebas 

audiebat 

audiebamus 

audiebatis 

audiebant 

audiebar 
audiebaris 

or  -re 
audiebatur 
audiebamur 
audiebamini 
audiebantur 


a.  Notice  that  the  formation  in  the  2d,  3d,  and  4th  Conjugations 
is  the  same,  e}:cept  that  the  -io  Verbs  have  the  additional  -i-. 

b.  Remember  now  that  -ba-  marks  the  Imperfect  Indicative. 

THE  INDEFINITE  PRONOUN  quisquam,  any  at  all 
199.  Quisquam  is  declined  like  quis  (184),  with  -quam 
added. 


M. and  F. 

N. 

Nom. 

quisquam 

quicquam^ 

Gen. 

cuiusquam 

cuiusquam 

Dat. 

cuiquam 

cuiquam 

Ace. 

quern  quam 

quicquam^ 

VOG. 

Abl. 

quoquam 

quoquam 

iFor  quid-quam  (the  q  affecting  the  d).    Quidquam  also  occurs. 


Quisque;    Genitive  of  the   Whole 


75 


a.  Quisquam  has  no  Plural.  The  Adjective  use  is  supplied  by 
alius. 

h.  Quisquam  and  ollus  are  used  especially  with  negative  ideas, 
expressed  or  implied. 


200.  THE  DISTRIBUTIVE  PRONOUN  quisque,^  each,  every 


As  Adjective 


As  Substantive 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 


M. 
quisque 
cuiusque 
cuique 
quemque 


F. 
quaeque 
cuiusque 
cuique 
quamque 


N. 
quodque 
cuiusque 
cuique 
quodque 


M. and  F. 

quisque 

cuiusque 

cuique 

quemque 


N. 
quidque 
cuiusque 
cuique 
quidque 


quoque 


quaque 


quoque    quoque 


quoque 

a.  Notice  that  quisque  is  declined  exactly  like  quis  (184)  with 
-que  added,. except  that  the  form  quisque  itself  is  used  both  as  sub- 
stantive and  as  adjective  (whereas  for  quis  the  adjective  form  is 
qui). 

5.  The  Plural  is  not  common.  (The  forms,  where  used,  are  like 
those  of  quis  plus  -que.    See  184). 

c.  An  Indefinite  Pronoun  quispiam,  to  be  used  later  (564),  is 
declined  with  quis-  as  in  quisque. 


THE  GENITIVE  OF  THE  WHOLE  (or  THE  PARTITIVE 
GENITIVE) 

201.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Multi  condiscipulOrum  meOrum  impigri  sunt,  many  of  my  school- 
mates are  energetic. 
Nallus  amIcOrum  meOrum  piger  est,  not  one  of  my  friends  is  lazy. 

a.  Notice  that  the  Genitive  condiscipulOrum  (first  sentence)  here 
expresses  the  whole  body  of  schoolmates,  while  muItl  expresses  a 
part  of  them;  and  similarly  that  amicOrum  tneOrum  (second  sentence) 
expresses  the  whole  body  of  friends,  while  nCillus  expresses  a  part 
of  them. 

The  usage  is  thus  as  follows: 


iQuis-que  =  quis  plus  the  indefinite -que  already  seen  = 
each. 


any-who  =  every, 


76  .         Exercises 

202.  The  Whole  to  which  a  Part  Belongs  may  be  ex- 
pressed by  the  Genitive, 

a.  But  there  is  also  another  way  in  which  the  same  idea  may  be 
expressed,  as  follows: 

h.  After  most  words,  the  whole  to  which  a  part  belongs  may  also 
he  expressed  by  de  or  ex  with  the  Ablative.    So  regularly  with 
quidam,  and  with  Cardinal  Numbers  (one,  two,  three,  etc.).    Thus: 
Multi  ex  amlcis  mels,  many  of  my  friends  (many  om<  of  my  friends). 
Quidam  de  meis  amicis,  a  certain  one  of  my  friends   (a  certain 

one  from  ....). 
Unus  de  meis  amicis,  one  of  my  friends  {one  from  ....). 

203.  VOCABULARY 

adsum,    adesse   (ad  +  sum),     be  modo,  Ad\.,  Just,  only ;  just  now. 

by,  be  present,  be  at  hand.  noceo,  nocere,  2,  be  hurtful  to, 
contra,  against.    Prep,  of  Space-  hurt,  injure.   (Verb  of  Quality, 

Relation,  taking  Ace.  taking  Dat.) 

fleO,  flere,  2,  iveep,  cry.  quisquam  (199),  any  at  all. 

incommodum,  -I,  N.  2,   trouble,  quisque  (200),  each,  every  one. 

misfortune.  respondeO,  -ere,  2,  respond,  an- 
iterum,  Adv.,  again.  swer. 

lacessO,  lacessere,  3,  worry.  Sextus,  -i,  M.  2,  Sextus,  a  name. 

maneO,  manere,  2,  remain,  con-  vestrum,  of  you.     Gen.  PI.  of  tn. 

tinue.  Cf .  vOs. 

memoria,  -ae,  F.  1,  memory.  victoria,  -ae,  F.  1,  victory. 

204.  READING  MATTER 

1.  (The  teacher)  Quis  modo  flebat?  (Ans.)  Quidam  puer  par- 
vus. (Teacher)  Cur  id  faciebat?  (Ans.)  A  quibusdam  pueris 
magnis  lacessebatur. 

2.  (Teacher)  Magna  haec  victoria  erat!  Sed  quis  erat,  qui  la- 
cessebatur ?  (Ans.)  Sextus  erat.  (Teacher)  Qui  eum  lacessebant  ? 
(The  boys  are  silent.  The  teacher  says)  Niillam  habetis  me- 
moriam?^  Ciir  non  respondetis?  Certe  aut  scitis  aut  n5n  scitis. 
(Ans.)  Scimus. 

1  Notice  the  emphasis  given  to  memoriam  by  the  shght  suspense.  This 
is  an  extremely  common  order.    Use  it  yourself. 


Exercises  77 

3.  (The  teacher)  Vide5.  Seitis,  sed  dicere  non  capitis.  Bene.* 
Animum'-  vestrum  probo.  Num  vos  hos  pueros  probatis?  (One 
answers)  Minime.  Nos  iis  adversi  sumus.  Sed  cum  tu  modo 
Sextum  audiebas,  nos  non  aderamus.  Nee  quisquam^  aderat 
amJcorum  Sexti,  nee  quicquam  aliud  auxiH.*  Solus  erat  cum 
lis  pueris  qui  eum  lacessebant. 

4.  (The  teacher)  Auxilium  vestrum  contra  hos  quoque  pueros 
peto.  Nam  id  quod  uni  discipulo  nocet,  cuique  discipulo  nocet. 
Itaque  schola  iniuriam  iterum  accipit.  Vel  hoc  vel  illud  mihi 
displicet.    Manet  incommodum^  scholae. 

205.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  Sextus,  why  were  you  crying  just-now?  2.  (Sextus  is  silent) 
Why  don't  you  answer?  Is  your  memory  so  bad?  3.  (Sextus) 
I  was  (being)  worried  by  certain  big  boys,  and  I  wished  ®  to  be 
heard.    4.  (Teacher)  You  were  certainly  (being)  well  heard. 

5.  (To  the  whole  school)  Certain  of  you^  were  recently  throw- 
ing pebbles  at  fellow-pupils.  6.  Now  a  new  game  begins,  and 
our  trouble  remains.  7.  Some^  of  you  are  worrying  our  little 
boys.  8.  This  spirit  does  not  please  me,  nor  does  any^  (one)  of 
you*^  approve  it. 

9.  Therefore  I  again  say  to  each  of  you  who  is  doing  these 
things:  10.  You  are  injuring  the  school^  either  stop  or  leave ** 
it.  11.  To  the  rest  who  are-present  I  say:  Give  me  your  aid 
against  the*'^  boys  who  are  doing  these-things.  12.  The 
victory  will  be  yours. 

1  Very  well.  6  =  was  wishing.  State  of  Affairs. 

2  Spirit,  feeling.  7  Read  202,  b  again. 

3 Why  is  quisquam  chosen?  ^xjse  nonnulli  (Plural). 

*Nor  anything  else  of  help,  nor  9  What  pronoun  after  a  negative? 

any  other  help.    What  kind  of  Geni-  i^Use  vestrum,  Gen.  PI. 

tive  is  auxilT?  n  Say  "  depart  from  it." 

fi  Trouble  remains  for  the  school.  12  Means  '*  those  boj^s  who." 


78 


Future  Indicative 


LESSON  XXVIII 

THIRD  AND  FOURTH  CONJUGATIONS  (Continued) 
206.       FUTURE  INDICATIVE,  ACTIVE  AND  PASSIVE 


Third  Conjugation 

FouETH  Conjugation 

in  -e- 

Active 

in-i- 

1st  Sing. 
2d      " 
3d      " 

tegam 

teges 

teget 

capiam 

capies 

capiet 

audiam 

audies 

audiet 

1st  PI 
2d      " 
3d      *' 

tegemus 

tegetis 

tegent 

capiemus 

capietis 

capient 

Passive 

audiemus 

audietis 

audient 

1st  Sing. 

2d      " 
3d      " 

tegar 
tegeris  or 
tegetur 

-re 

capiar 

capieris  or  -re 
capietur 

audiar 

audieris  or -re 
audietur 

1st   PL 

2d      " 
3d     " 

tegemur 
tegemini 
tegentur 

capiemur 
capiemini 
capientur 

audiemur 
audieminl 
audientur 

a.  Remember  now  that,  in  the  formation  of  the  Future,  the  four 
Conjugations  divide  in  the  middle,  the  First  and  Second  forming  it 
in  -bo,  -bis,  -bit,  etc.,  the  Third  and  Fourth  in  -am,  -es,  -et,  etc. 
Thus: 

Present  Infinitive  Future 

I  amO  amare  amabO 

II  moneO  monere  monebo 


III 


IV 


tegO 

capio 

audio 


tegere 
capere 
audire 


tegam 

capiam 

audiam 


Objective  Genitive 


79 


207.      THE  INDEFINITE  PRONOUN  aliquis,  some,  any 


As  Adjective 


As  Substantive 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat 

Ace. 

Voe. 

Abl. 


M. 

aliqui 
alicuius 
alicui 
aliquem 


F. 
aliqua 
alicuius 
alicui 
aliquam 


SINGULAR 
N. 
aliquod 
alicuius 
alicui 
aliquod 


M.  and  F. 

aliquis 

alicuius 

alicui 

aliquem 


N. 
aliquid 
alicuius 
alicui 
aliquid 


aliquo         aliqua         aliquo 


aliquo         aliquo 


PLURAL  (same  for  Substantive  and  Adjective) 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voe. 

Abl. 


M. 

aliqui 
aliquorum 
aliquibus 
aliquos 


F. 

aliquae 
aliquarum 
aliquibus 
aliquas 


N. 
aliqua 
aliquorum 
aliquibus 
aliqua 


aliquibus 


aliquibus 


aliquibus 


a.  Note  that  aliquis  is  declined  like  quis  (184),  except  that  in  the 
Nom.  Fem.  Sing,  and  Nom.-Acc.  Neut.  PI.  it  has  the  regular  ending 
-a,  not  the  special  pronominal  ending  -ae. 

h.  An  indefinite  pronoun  quis,  to  be  used  later  (397)  is  declined 
like  the  quis  at  the  end  of  ali-quis. 


THE  OBJECTIVE  GENITIVE 

208.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Memoria  huius  victOriae  did  manebit,  the  memory  of  this  victory 

will  long  remain . 
Hi  pueri  pugnae  cupidi  sunt,  these  boys  are  desirous  of  a  fight. 

a.  In  both  sentences,  the  Genitives  really  express  an  Object.  The 
meaning  in  the  first  is  that  people  will  long  remember  the  victory, 
and  in  the  second,  that  these  boys  desire  a  fight.  Pugnae  cupidi 
sunt  really  means  the  same  thing  as  pugnam  cupiunt. 

Hence  we  may  lay  down  the  rule: 

209.  The  Genitive  may  he  used  Objectively  with  many 
Nouns  and  Adjectives,  or  Participles  used  as  Adjectives 
(Objective  Grenitive). 


80  Exercises 

210.  VOCABULARY 

aliter,    Adv.,  otherwise,  differ-  resisto,  -sistere,  3,  resist  (Word 

ently.    (Cf.  alius.)  of  Attitude,  taking  Dat.) 

aliquis    (207),    Indefinite    Pro-  sententia, -ae,  F.l,/ee/i'ng,  idea, 

noun,  some,  any  one,  any.  view,    (Cf.  sentio  below.) 

defendo,  -ere,  3,  defend.  sentio,  -Ire,  4,  perceive  (by  the 

did.  Adv., /or  a  long  time,  long.  senses);  feel,  think. 

211.  READING  MATTER 

1.  (A  friend  to  one  of  the  teasers)  Tu  modo  dicebas,  "mihi  pla- 
cet puerds  parvos  lacessere,  iisque  flere  non  nocet."  Ego  aliter 
sentio;  atque  tu  ipse,  si  in  ista  manebis  sententia,  aliter  sen  ties; 
aut  in  hac  schola  diu  non  manebis. 

2.  Pueri  parvi  tibi  cedunt,  quia  te  timent.  Sed  Marcus  atque 
quidam  amici  eius  te  non  timebunt.  Pugnae  cupidi  non  sunt; 
sed,  tu  si  perseverabis,  tibi  resistent.  Si  aliquem  tu  discipulum 
lacesses,  eum  Marcus  atque  reliqui  contra  te  defendent.  Nee 
victoria  tua  erit. 

3.  Hi  sine  iillo  periculo  pugnabunt.  Si  aliqua  pugna  a 
magistro  audietur,  Marcus  iterum  laudabitur,  tii  ex  schola  pel- 
leris.  Memoria  istius  incommodi  tibi  nocebit.  (Ans.)  Si  aliquem 
ego  lacessere  cupiam,  lacessam.    Nee  quemquam  vestrum  timeo. 

212.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  (Mark  to  the  above)  Why  do  you  worry  these  little  boys? 
It  is  a  misfortune  for  the  school.  2.  (Ans.)  Because  it  pleases  me 
to  do  so.  3.  (Mark)  You  will  soon  feel  differently.  4.  They  do 
not  resist  you,  because  they  fear  to  fight.  5.  I  am  not  desirous 
of  a  fight,  but  I  shall  not  yield  to  you.    6.  This  is  my  idea. 

7.  Listen  to  (hear)  me.  8.  If  any  pupil  shall  do  anything 
against  the  reputation  of  the  school,  I  shall  be  his  enemy  (an 
enemy  to  him).  9.  If  any  one  shall  do  any  wrong  to  any  pupil, 
I  shall  defend  that  pupil. 

10.  Nor  will  any-one  help  you.  11.  The  victory  will  be  mine, 
the  memory  of  the  wrong  will  long  be  yours.. 


Personal  Pronouns 


81 


LESSON  XXIX 

INFLECTION  OF  THE  PERSONAL  AND  REFLEXIVE 
PRONOUNS 

213.  1.  The   Personal  Pronouns  indicate  the  speaker, 

the  person  spoken  to,  or  the  person  (or  thing)  spoken  of. 

Thus,  tu  me  amas,  you  love  me,  tu  eum  amas,  you  love 

him. 

a.  We  have  already  had  all  of  the  forms  of  these  Pronouns,  except 
certain  Genitives  in  -i. 

2.  The  Keflexive  Pronouns  refer  back  to  the  subject 
of  the  verb.  Thus,  ego  me  amo,  I  love  myself,  tu  te  amas, 
you  love  yourself  is  se  amat,  he  loves  himself 

a.  The  forms  of  these  two  kinds  of  Pronouns  are  in  Latin  largely 
similar,  and  they  are  therefore  given  below  in  immediate  succession. 


214.    THE  PERSONAL  PRONOUNS  (J,  you,  he,  she,  or  it) 


First 


Second 


Third 


SINGULAR 

Nom. 

ego,  I 

tu,  thou                   is,  ille,  hie,  or  iste, 

Gen. 

mei 

tul                               Tie,  etc.  (declined  in 

Dat. 

mihi 

tibi                              153,   145,   and  a, 

Ace. 

me 

te                                    166) 

Voc. 
Ahl. 

tu 

te 

me 

PLURAL 

Nom. 

nos,  we 

VOS,  you 

Gen. 

nostrum  or  nostri 

vestrum  or  vestri 

Dat. 

nobis 

vobis 

Ace. 

nos 

vos 

Voc. 
Ahl. 

vos 
vobls 

nobis 

82  Reflexive  Pronouns 

a.  The  Genitive  forms  in  -um  are  Genitives  of  the  Whole,  while 
those  in  -I  are  Objective  Genitives.    Thus: 

multi  vestrum,  many  of  you. 
memoria  vestri,  the  memory  of  you. 

216.    THE  REFLEXIVE  PRONOUNS  {myself,  yourself, 
himself,  herself,  itself,  etc.) 

First  Second  Third 

SINGULAR 

Oen,  mel,  of  myself  tul,  of  yourself  sui,  of  himself,  her- 

Dat.  mihi  tibi  sibi        self,  or  itself 

Ace.  me  te  se,  sese 

Abl.  me  te  se,  sese 

PLURAL 

Gen.  nostri,  of  ourselves  yestri,  of  yourselves  suT,  of  themselves 

Dat.  nobis  vobis  sibi 

Ace.  nos  vos  se,  sese 

Ahl.  nobis  vobis  se,  sese 

THE  PERSONAL  AND  REFLEXIVE  POSSESSIVE 
ADJECTIVES 

216.  The  Possessive  Adjectives,  Personal  and  Reflexive, 
are: 

1.  Personal  Possessive  Adjectives: 

1st  Person,  meus,  my  (for  ego);  noster,  our  (for  nOs) 
2d  Person,  tuus,  thy,  your  (for  ttl);  vester,  your  (for  vOs) 
3d  Person,  supplied  by  the  Genitive  of  is,  ille,  hie,  or  iste 
Victoria  mea  magna  est,  my  victory  is  great, 
Victoria  tua  magna  est,  your  victory  is  great. 
Victoria  eius  magna  est,  his  victory  is  great. 

2.  Reflexive  Possessive  Adjectives: 

c^-i  ^  C  Same  as  the  Personal  Possessive  Adjectives 

2d  Person  ) 

3d  Person,  suus,  his,  theirs,  etc.  (same  for  Singular  and  Plural) 

Ego  meum  flHum  amO,  tn  tuum,  I  love  my  son,  you  {love)  yours. 

Nostrum  fllium  amamus,  we  love  our  son. 

Filium  suum  cCir  laudat?  why  does  he  praise  his  son  9 

Filium  suum  cQr  laudant?  why  do  they  praise  their  son  9 


Exercises  88 

217.  VOCABULARY 

dictum,  -1,  N.  2,  saying,  ivord.  servO,   -are,    1,    preserve,   save, 

gloria,  -ae,  F.  1,  glortj.  guard,  keep. 

maleficium,  -i,  N.  2  (cf .  male  and  sui,  of  himself,  herself,  itself,  or 

facio),  wrong -doing.  themselves. 

posteSi  {post+tSi)  Adv.,  after  that,  suus,   -a,   -um,    his   (own),    her 

afterward  (opposite  of  antea).  (own),  its  (own),  their  (own). 

prohibeO,  -ere,  2,  prohibit,  pre-  vincO,  -ere,  3  (cf.  victoria),  van- 
vent,  keep  (from).  quish,  conquer,  win. 

218.  READING  MATTER 

1.  (Mark  to  one  of  the  little  boys)  Cur  non  te  defendis?  Tu 
si  resistes,  ego  te  iuvab5. 

2.  (The  teacher,  to  Mark  and  his  backers)  Vos  vincetis. 
Memoria  vestri  dictorumque  vestrorum  hos  pueros  a  maleficio 
prohibebit.  Se  contra  vos  n5n  defendent,  sed  ex  perTculo  se 
servabunt;  nam  verae  pugnae  n5n  cupidi  sunt,  nee  cupiunt  a 
condiscipulls  suis  culpari.  Vobis  non  resistent.  Quam  d.iu  ^  hic 
manebitis,  nullum  puerum  lacessent.  Si  aliqui  pueri  parvi 
postea  lacessentuf,  alii  pueri  magni  idem  facient  quod  vos  nunc 
facitis.     Ita  vestra  victdria  iniiiriam  scholae  in  gloriam  vertet. 

3.  (Mark)  Sententia  tua  nobis  grata  est,  multi  enim  nostrum 
idem  sentiunt.^     Sed  alii  iinam  et  alteram^  pugnam  exspectant. 

219.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  (One  of  the  small  boys)  If  anybody  attacks  me  I  shall 
defend  myself.     2.  Mark  will  help  me  after-that. 

3.  (One  of  his  backers,  to  Mark)  I  expect  no  fig'ht..  4.  The 
memory  either  of  you  or  of  the  master's  words  will  keep  these 
boys  from  wrong-doing.  5.  They  will  feel  their  danger,  and 
will  wish  to  save  themselves.  6.  You  will  conquer.  7.  (Another 
says)  If  anyone  shall  do  otherwise  he  will  hurt  himself.*  8.  We 
shall  turn  the  injury  of  the  school  into  (its)  glory. 

1  (4s)  long  as.  s  One  and  another  =  one  or  two. 

2  Feel  the  same  thing  =  have  the  *  Use  se,  not  ipse.  Ipse  is  inten- 
same  feeling.                                               sive,  not  reflexive. 


84 


Perfect  Indicative  Active 


LESSON  XXX 

THE  PERFECT  INDICATIVE  ACTIVE,  ALL  CON- 
JUGATIONS 

220.  The  Perfect  stems  of  different  words  are  formed  in 
different  ways,  but  the  final  endings  are  always  the  same. 
Thus  amavi  (from  amo),  monui  (from  moneo),  cepi  (from 
capio),  fui  (from  sum). 


I  have  loved,    I  have  teamed, 

I  have  taken, 

/  have  been, 

Perfect 

or  /  loved         or  I  warned 

or  /  took 

or  /  was 

Endings 

1st  Sing, 

amavl 

monul 

cepi 

fui 

-1 

2d      " 

amavisti 

monuisti 

cepisti 

fuisti 

-isti 

3d      *' 

amavit 

monuit 

cepit 

fuit 

-it 

1st  PI. 

amavimus 

monuimus 

cepimus 

fuimus 

-imus 

2d    *' 

amavistis 

monuistis 

cepistis 

fuistis 

-istis 

Bd    '' 

amaverunt 

monuerunt 

.ceperunt 

fuerunt 

-erunt 

or  -ere 

or  -ere 

or  -ere 

or  -ere 

or -ere 

a.  Similarly  inflect  flevi  (from  fleO),  habui  (from  habeo),  prohibui 
(from  prohibeO),  placul  (from  placeO),  mansi  (from  maneO),  defend! 
(from  defendO),  verti  (from  vertO),  vici  (from  vincO),  iQvi  (from  iuvO), 
feci  (from  faciO). 

MEANINGS  OF  THE  PERFECT  INDICATIVE 

221.  The  Perfect  has  two  distinct  forces: 

1.  It  may  represent  the  act  as  in  a  finished  state  ("perfect")  at 
the  time  of  &peaking  ("present"),  as  in  English  *T  have  warned 
you."    So  used  it  is  called  the  Present  Perfect.^ 

2.  It  may  simply  throw  the  act  vaguely  back  into  the  past,  as  in 
"I  warned  you."    So  used  it  is  called  the  Aoristic  Perfect.^ 


1  It  is  also  called  the  "  Perfect  Definite,"  but  less  exactly. 

2  It  is  also  called  the  "  Perfect  Indefinite." 


Exercises  85 

222.  VOCABULARY 

adiuvO,  -are,  1  (ad,  Btrengthen-  socius,  -I,  M.  2,  associate,  ally. 

ing,  +  iuvO,  help),  assist,  aid.  tamen,  Conj.,  still,  nevertheless, 

cOnservO,  -are.  Perfect  cOnser-  yet. 

vavi,  1  (con-,  strengthening,^  temerarius,      -a,       -um,      rash, 
servO,  save),  save, preserve.  thoughtless. 

pristinus,     -a,     -um,     pristine,  temere.   Adv.,    rashly,  thought- 
former,  lessly. 

Add  also  the  Perfect  forms  learned  in  220  and  a. 

223.  READING  MATTER 

(The  Perfects  here  all  have  Present  Perfect  meaning.) 

1.  (His  chief  backer,  to  Mark)  Tu  vicisti;  neque  fuit  pugna 
ulla.  Famam  malam  scholae  in  gloriam  vertisti.  (Mark)  N5ii 
ego  vici,  sed  nos  vicimus.  Nee  soli  id  nos  fecimus.  Soci5s 
habuimus,  qu5rum  quisque  nos  adiuvare  paratus  erat. 

2.  (The  teacher  to  the  allied  boys)  Quod  v5s  fecistis,  id  non 
minus  mihi  quam  vobis  placuit.  Scholae  bonam  famam  contra 
pueros  temerarios  defendistis  ac  conservavistis.  Memoria  vic- 
toriae  vestrae  diu  manebit.  (Mark  answers)  Hi  discipuli  temere 
haec  fecerunt,  mali  tamen  non  sunt.  In  sententia  pristina  sua 
n5n  manserunt,  sed  sese  a  maleficio  prohibuerunt. 

224.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  (The  teacher  to  the  beaten  boys)  You  have  not  continued 
in  your  former  way -of- thinking.  2.  (One  answers)  Mark  and 
his  allies  have  conquered.  They  have  kept  us  from  wrong-doing. 
3.  Nor  does  this  please  any  one  more  than  us.  4.  We  have  been 
thoughtless,  but  we  ourselves  wish  to  aid  the  school,  and  pre- 
serve its  good  reputation. 

5.  (The  teacher  sums  up)  These  boys  have  acted ^  rashly.  6. 
Still  they  censure  themselves.  7.  They  will  both  remain  in  the 
school,  and  will  keep^  from  wrong-doing. 

1  Say  ""  have  done  these  things."  ^  gay  *'  keep  themselves." 


86       Perfect  Indicative  Active, — The  Participle 

LESSON  XXXI 

THE  PERFECT  INDICATIVE  ACTIVE.— THE 
PERFECT  PASSIVE  PARTICIPLE 

225.  The  Perfect  Indicative  Active  is  formed  in  six 
different  ways,  namely  in: 

1.  -VI,  as  in  ama-v-I,  from  amO. 

2.  -uT,  as  in  mon-u-I,  from  moneO. 

3.  -81,  as  in  man-s-i,  from  maneO. 

!4.  -1,  with  reduplication,  as  in  ded-i,  from  do. 
5.  -1,  with  lengthened  penult,  as  in  itlv-i,  from  iuvO. 
6.  -1,  without  change,  as  in  vert-i,  from  verto. 

a.  The  -T  is  the  Ending,  the  rest  is  the  Perfect  Stem. 

b.  The  -s-  of  -s-T  often  affects  a  preceding  consonant.  Thus 
cedo,  cessl  (for  ced-si);  tegO,  texl  (for  tec-si,  from  teg-sI). 

THE  PARTICIPLE 

226.  A  Participle  is  a  Verbal  Adjective.  Thus  loving 
(Present  Active),  loved  (Perfect  Passive). 

a.  As  an  Adjective,  a  Participle  belongs  to  a  Substantive  and 
agrees  with  it.  As  a  Verb,  it  expresses  Tense  and  Voice,  may 
govern  a  Case,  and  may  be  modified  by  an  Adverb. 

THE  PERFECT  PASSIVE  PARTICIPLE 

227.  1.  The  Perfect  Passive  Participle  expresses  an  act 
as  suffered  by  a  person  or  thing  (''passive"),  and  as  in  a 
finished  state  (''perfect").  Thus  monitus,  having  been 
warned,  or  (simply)  warned.     It  is  declined  like  bonus. 

2.  The  Perfect  Passive  Participle  bears  a  general  rela- 
tionship in  form  to  the  Perfect  Indicative  Active.  It 
normally  ends  in  -tus.  Thus  ama-tus,  having  beeii  loved, 
or  (simply)  loved. 

a.  The  -t-  of  the  ending  -tus  often  affects  a  preceding  conso- 
nant, and  sometimes  both  are  affected.  Thus  tegO,  tectus  (for  teg- 
tus);  cedo,  cessum  (for  ced-tum). 


Principal  Parts,  by  Types 


87 


b.  A  number  of  verbs  (as  we  shall  see  later,  400),  can  have  only  the 
Neuter  of  this  participle.  Hence  in  a  list  it  is  more  practical  to 
give  the  neuter  form  for  all  verbs. 

PRINCIPAL  PARTS  OF  VERBS 

228.  The  Parts  of  a  Verb  from  which  all  others  may 
be  formed  are  called  the  Principal  Parts.     These  are: 


Pres.  Indic. 

Pres.  Infin. 

Perf.  Indic. 

Perf.  Pass.  Partic. 
(Neuter ;  see  h  above) 

amO 

amare 

amavl 

amatum,  love. 

moneO 

monere 

monul 

monitum,  icarn. 

tegO 

tegere 

texT 

tectum,  cover. 

capio 

capere 

cepi 

captum,  take. 

audio 

audire 

audlvl 

audltum,  hear. 

229.  LIST  OF  REGULAR  VERBS  THUS  FAR  USED 
WITH  PRINCIPAL  PARTS  AS  ABOVE 

(For  Study  and  Reference) 


1.  Perfect  in  -vl: 

amo                amare 

amavi 

amatum, 

love. 

ambulo          ambulare 

ambulavi 

ambulatum, 

walk 

Similarly  ceno,  culpo,  desidero,  exspecto,  habito,  laboro,  laudo, 
paro,  persevere,  probo,  propero,  pugno,  servo  and  conserve,  voco. 


audio 

audire 

audivi 

audltum, 

hear. 

cupio 

cupere 

cuplvi 

cupitum, 

desire. 

fleo 

flere 

flevi 

fletum, 

iceep. 

lacesso 

lacessere 

lacessivi 

lacessitum, 

worry. 

peto 

petere 

petivi 

petitum. 

aim  at. 

scio 

scire 

scivl 

scitum, 

knoiv. 

2.  Perfect  in  -ui: 

moneo 

monere 

monui 

monitum, 

warn. 

habeo 

habere 

habui 

habitum, 

have. 

prohibeo 

prohibere 

prohibui 

prohibitum, 

prohibit. 

noceo 

nocere 

nocui 

nocitum. 

injure . 

placeo 

placere 

placui 

placitum. 

please. 

displiceo 

displicere 

displicui 

displicitum. 

displease. 

studeo 

studere 

studul 

(lacking) 

be  zealous  for, 

timeo 

timere 

timui 

u 

fear. 

Principal  Farts,  by  Types 


3.  Perfect  in  -si: 


cedo 

cedere 

cessi 

cessum, 

yield. 

discedo 

discedere 

discessi 

discessum, 

depart. 

dico 

dicere 

dixi 

dictum, 

say. 

maneo 

manere 

mansi 

mansum, 

remain. 

rego 

regere 

rexi 

rectum, 

rule. 

sentio 

sentire 

eensl 

sensum, 

feel. 

tego 

tegere 

texi 

tectum, 

cover. 

4.  Perfect  in  -i,  with 

reduplication : 

do 

dare 

dedi 

datum, 

give. 

pello 

pellere 

pepuli 

pulsum, 

drive. 

5.  Perfect  in  -T,  with 

lengthened 

vowel  in  penult: 

iuvo 

iuvare 

itivi 

iiitum, . 

help. 

adiuvo 

adiuvare 

adiuvi 

adiutum. 

aid. 

faveo 

favere 

favi 

fautum, 

favor. 

video 

videre 

vidl 

visum, 

see. 

vinco 

vincere 

vici- 

victum, 

conquer. 

capio 

capere 

cepi 

captum, 

take. 

accipio 

accipere 

accepi 

acceptum. 

accept. 

incipio 

incipere 

incepi 

inceptum, 

begin. 

facio 

facere 

feci 

factum, 

make. 

iacio 

iacere 

ieci 

iactum, 

throw. 

6.  Perfect  in  -1,  without  change  in  penult: 

defendo 

defendero 

defend! 

defensum, 

defend. 

respondeo 

respondere 

respond! 

responsum. 

answer 

verto 

vertere 

vert! 

v^rsum, 

turn. 

230. 

VOCABULARY 

(From  here  on,  the  Principal  Parts  of  new  verbs  will  be  given  in  full.) 
de    (same  word  as  before,  with      mane,  Adv.,  in  the  morning* 


Abl.  of  starting-point  of  the 
thought),  concerning,  about. 

inquit,  says  he,  or  said  he.  Used 
in  direct  quotation,  and  always 
follows  one  or  more  words. 

invito,  invltare,  invitavl,  invi- 
tatum,  1,  invite;  attract. 


nihil,  indeclinable,  Neut.  Noun, 

nothing. 
periculOsus,     -a,     -um,   full-of- 

danger^  dangerous. 
venio,  venire,  veni,  ventum,  4, 

come. 
verbum,  -i,  N.  2,  word. 


Exercises  89 

231.  READING  MATTER 

(The  Perfects  here  still  have  Present  Perfect  meaning.) 

1.  (The  teacher)  Marcus  eiusque  socii  me  adiuverunt.  li  qui 
Sextum  lacessiverunt,  non  temere  in  pristin5  maleficio  manserunt, 
sed  sese  conservaverunt.     In  schola  manebunt.     Ipse  Sextus, 

,  ab  his  diu  lacessitus,  tamen  iis  inimicus  non  est.    Haec  mihi 
magnopere  placuerunt. 

2.  (Sextus  has  stayed  away  from  Mark's  picnic  in  the  woods. 
Mark  says)  Sextus  non  venit.  Viditnef  eum  aliquis?  A  me 
hodie  mane  invitatus,  tamen  abest.  (One  of  the  boys)  Ego  eum 
vidi.  (Mark)  Ubi  erat?  Quid  faciebat?  (Ans.)  In  villa  sua 
manebat.  (Mark)  Quid  erat  causae?^  (Ans.)  Ab  aliquo  agri- 
cola  monitus,  venire  timebat.  (Mark)  Quid  de  nostra  cena 
dicebat  agricola?  (Ans.)  "Temerarius,"  inquit,  "es.  Silvaperi- 
culosa  est."  (Mark)  Nihil  hie  est  periculosi.^  Hie  agricola 
Sexto  verba  dedit.^ 

232.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  (A  friend  goes  to  get  Sextus)  Hasn't  Mark  invited  you  to 
our  dinner?  2.  (Sextus)  Yes.  He  has  invited  me.  3.  (First 
speaker)  Why,  having-been- invited  by  him,  have  you  neverthe- 
less not  come?  4.  (Ans.)  I  have  not  come,  having-been -warned 
about  the  forest  this  morning  by  a  certain  farmer.  5.  (First 
speaker)  What  was  the  farmer  saying  to  you?  6.  (Sextus) 
"These  boys  are  rash,"  said  he.  "The  forest  is  dangerous." 
7.  (First  speaker)  Are  these  his  words?  (Sextus)  These  are 
his  very*  words.  8.  (First  speaker)  Have  you  yourself  ever  seen 
anything^  (of)  dangerous  in  this  forest?  I  have  seen  nothing. 
9.  That  farmer  has  certainly  fooled^  you.^  10.  Come  now  to  our 
supper. 

1  What  (of)  reason  f    Genitive  of  ^xjse  ipse,  very. 

the  Whole.  •  ^Use  quisquam   (in  Neuter),  be- 

^ Nothing  (of)  dangerous.  cause  of  implied  negative. 
3  =  has  fooled  Sextus.  ^Cf .  footnote  3. 


90 


Future  Active  Participle 


LESSON  XXXII 

FORMATION  A]ND  USE  OF  THE  FUTURE  ACTIVE 
PARTICIPLE 

233.  1.  The  Future  Active  Participle  is  formed  with  the 
ending  -turns,  and  is  declined  like  bonus,  -a,  -um.  The 
stem  generally  follows  that  of  the  Perfect  Passive  Parti- 
ciple, with  the  same  changes,  if  there  are  any,  in  the  -t- 
(cf.  227,  a). 

a.  Practically,  then,  we  may  form  the  Future  Active  Participle  of 
raost  verbs  by  simply  changing  -us  of  the  Perfect  Passive  Participle 
to  -Grus.  Thus  amatus,  amattirus;  monitus,  monitarus;  audltus, 
audittlrus;  pulsus,  pulsQrus. 

2.  The  Future  Active  Participle  represents  an  act  as 
intended  or  impending, 

a.  Its  regular  use  is  in  the  Predicate  with  some  form  of  the  verb 
sum.     Thus  te  monittirus  sum,  I  am  going  to  warn  you. 

h.  This  combination  of  the  Future  Active  Participle  with  sum  is 
very  nearly  equivalent  to  a  Future  Indicative  (just  as  "I  am  going 
to  warn  you  "  is  very  near  to  "  I  shall  warn  you  ").  Hence  it  is  called 
the  Periphrastic  Future  {=  round-about  Future). 

234.  A  few  verbs  lack  the  Perfect  Passive  Participle, 
but  have  the  Future  Active,  which  will  be  given  in  their 
Principal  Parts.     Thus: 


sum 

esse 

ful 

futnrus, 

be. 

cado 

cadere 

cecidl 

casGrus, 

fall. 

fugiO 

fugere 

fogi 

fugitCirus, 

flee. 

desisto 

desistere 

destiti 

destitGrus, 

desist. 

resist© 

resistere 

restiti 

restitGrus, 

resist. 

sto 

stare 

stetl 

statGrus, 

stand. 

a.  Compounds  are  conjugated  like  the  simple  verbs  from  which 
they  are  formed.    Thus  absum,  abesse,  afui,  afutQrus. 


Exercises  91 

235.  VOCABULARY 

convenio, -venire, -v6ni,-ventum,  locus,  -i,  M.  2,  place.    PI.  loca, 

4  (con — [-venio),  come  together,  locorum,  N.  2. 

meet.  nQntiO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  an- 

doceO,  docere,  docui,  doctum,  2,  nounce,  tell. 

teach,  inform,  tell,  show.  prope,   Prep.,  near,  taking  Ace, 

eO,  Adv.,  thither,  to  that  place.  of  Space-Relation. 

expIOrO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  ex-  statuO,   statuere,  statui,   statn- 

plore,  reconnoiter ;  find  out.  turn,  3,  set  up;  decide  (set  up 

heri.  Adv.,  yesterday.  in  one's  mind). 

hora,  -ae,  F.  1,  hour.           •  tabernaculum,  -I,  N.  2,  tent. 

i^^n^MS, -B., -nva,  suitable,  fit.  valeO,    -ere,    -ui,    -itGrus,   2,  he 

lalius,  -1,  M.  2,  Julius,  a  name.  strong  ov  powerful,  he  well. 

236.  READING  MATTER 

(The  Perfects  here  are  partly  Present  Perfects,  partly  Aorists.) 
Aliquid  novi^  tibi  nuntiatiirus  sum.  Ego  et  iQlius^  in 
silva  prope  scholam  in  idoneo  Ioc5  tabernaculum  statuturi 
sumus.  Loca  propinqua  heri  exploravimus.  Nihil  vidimus 
periculosi.  Locus  ipse  ubi  tabernaculum  est  staturum  pulcher 
est.  Eo  saepe  vel  mane  vel  post  scholae  horas  convenient  amici 
a  nobis  invitati.  Te  invitare  statuimus.  Alios  nunc  de  hoc 
tabernaculo  doctiirus  sum.  Vale.^  (The  hearer  congratulates 
himself)  "Te,"  inquit,  "invitare  statuimus."  Haec  Sexti  ipsa 
verba  sunt.     Beatus  sum. 

237.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

L  Julius  has  just-now  announced  some  news^  to  me.  2.  He 
and  Sextus  are  going-to-set-up  a  tent  in  the  forest  near  the 
school.  3.  They  explored  the  neighborhood^  yesterday,  and 
saw  nothing  dangerous.  4.  The  tent  is  going-to-stand  in  a 
suitable  place.  5.  They  are  going-to-inform  their  friends  about 
it,  and  these  will  often  meet  there,^  either  after  school  hours  or 
in-the-morning.  6.  They  have  decided  to  invite  us  too.  Good- 
bye.   7.  (The  hearer)  Many  will  come  without^  invitation.^ 

'^Something  (of)  new  =  some  news.  "^Say  "places  near." 

2 Latin  order  is :  1st  Person,  2d,  3d.         ^Say  "come  together  thither." 

8Be  well,  =  farewell,  good-bye.  ^gay  "not  invited." 


92  Past  Perfect  Indicative  Active 


LESSON  XXXIII 

THE  PAST  PERFECT  INDICATIVE  ACTIVE,  ALL  CON- 
JUGATIONS 

238.  The  Past  Perfect  Indicative  Active  is  formed  by 
adding  -eram,  etc.  (seen  in  the  Imperfect  of  sum,  144)  to 
the  Perfect  Stem.     Thus: 

I  had  loved  I  had  warned  I  had  taken  I  had  been    Endings 

1st  Sing,  amaveram  monueram  ceperam  fueram       -eram 

2d      "        amaveras  monueras  ceperas  fueras         -eras 

3d     "       amaverat  monuerat  ceperat  fuerat        -erat 

1st  PI.      amaveram  us  monaeramus  ceperamus  fueramus  -eramus 

2d     ''       amaveratis  monueratis  ceperatis  fueratis      -eratis 

3d     "       amaverant  monuerant  ceperant  fuerant       -erant 

239.  The  Past  Perfect  represents  an  act  as  already  in  a 
finished  state  ("Perfect")  at  some  past  time  ("Past"). 
It  thus  also  implies  that  the  performance  of  the  act  had 
preceded  that  time.     Thus: 

Te  monueram)  /  had  warned  you  (act  previously  performed). 

240.  VOCABULARY 

at,  Conj.,  hut^  yet.    Of  contrast  forte,  Adv.,  hy  chance, perhaps. 

or  objection.  longe,  Adv.,  far  (cf.  longus). 

autem,  Conj., postpos.,  on  the  oth-  longus,  -a,  -um,  long. 

er hand,hut, however ;  now.  Of  paulisper,  Adv.,  a  little  {while), 

contrast,but not  so  strong  as  at.         for  a  little  (while). 

coIO,   colere,   colui,    cultum,    3,  prOcedO,-cedere,-cessi,-cessum, 

cultivate.  S^  proceed,  advance. 

defatigo,-are, -avi, -atum,  1  (de,  propter,  along,  beside;    on  ac- 

intensive,  +  fatigO,    fatigue),  count  of.    Prep.,  taking  Ace. 

fatigue,  tire  out  of  Space-Relation, 

denique.  Adv.,  finally,   at  last.  quattuor,  indeclinable,  Adj.,/owr. 


Exercises  93 

-  ♦        . 

241.  READING  MATTER 

(An  Adventure  of  the  Small  Boys) 

(Julius's  father  asks)  Non  vaJetis,  filii  mei?  Aut  forte  nimis 
impigre  hodie  in  sehola  studuistis  t  Quid  est  I  ^  Mihi  respondete. 
(Julius)  Heri  tabernaculum,  quod  tu  nobis  dederas,  in  idoneo 
loco  in  silva  prope  scholam  statuimus.  Eo  hodie  bene  mane^ 
ante  scholae  horam  venimus.  Quattuor  condiscipulT,  a  nobis 
invitati,  ad  eundem  locum  venerant.     Non  diu  mansuri  eramus. 

Mox  autem  iinus  ex  discipulls, "  Quid, "  inquit,  "  si  paulisper  in 
silva  ambulabimus,  eamque  explorabimus ? "  Alius  "id  laudo/'^ 
inquit.  Ciincti*  probavimus.  At  mox  longe  processeramus. 
Eum  locum  ubi  tum  eramus  numquam  antea  videramus.  Mag- 
hopere  timebamus.^  Denique  agricolam  vidimus,  qui  tum  forte 
agrum  propter  silvam  colebat.  Is  n5s  de  via  docuit.  At  haec 
.longa  fuit.  Propter  hoc  iam  defatigati  eramus,  cum  magister 
nos  in  scholam  vocavit. 

242.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  (Continuation)  Finally  the  teacher  said:  "Aren't  you 
well?  You  are  not  already  tired  out,  are  you?  2.  Where 
were  you,  Julius,  when  I  called  you?  "  (Julius)  I  was  in  the 
road.  3.  (Master)  Where  had  you  been  before-that?  (Ans.)  I 
had  walked  a-little-while  in  the  woods.  4.  (Master)  Had  you 
perhaps  gone  (=  proceeded)  far?    (Ans.)  I  had  gone  too  far. 

5.  A  farmer  who  was  cultivating  a  field  beside  the  wood  told 
me  about  the  way.  It  was  (a)  long  (one).  6.  (Master)  Had  you 
walked  with  others?  Why  don't  you  answer?  7.  (One  of  the 
four)  We  had  all  four  walked  in  the  woods.  8.  (Master)  I 
am  not  going- to-chide  you,  but  this  I  will  say:  9.  It  pleases 
me  when  you  walk  in  the  woods;  it  does  not  please  me,  however, 
when  you  walk  there  before  the  schooP  hour. 

1  What  is  the  matter f  'tNom. ;  hence  goes  with  Subject. 

2  Well  early  =  early  in  the  morning.     ^  We  were  much  frightened. 
^=thaVs  a  good  idea.  ^Say,  "  hour  of  school." 


94 


Future  Perfect  Indicative  Active 


LESSON  XXXIV 

THE  FUTURE  PERFECT  INDICATIVE  ACTIVE,  ALL 
CONJUGATIONS 

243.  The  Future  Perfect  Indicative  Active  is  formed  by 
adding  -ero,  etc.  (seen  in  the  Future  of  sum,  157)  to  the 
Perfect  Stem.  But  the  3d  Person  Plural  ends  in  -eriiit, 
not  -erunt. 


I  shall             I  shall 

I  shall 

I  shall 

have  loved    have  warned 

have  taken 

have  been 

ENDINGS 

1st  Sing. 

amaverO           monuerO 

ceperO 

fuerO 

-ero 

2d     " 

amaveris          monueris 

ceperis 

fueris 

-eris 

3d     " 

amaverit          monuerit 

ceperit 

fuerit 

-erit 

1st  PL 

amaverimus    monuerimus     ceperimus 

fuerimus 

-erimus 

2d    « 

amaveritis       monueritis 

ceperitis 

fueritis 

-eritis 

3d    " 

amaverint        monuerint 

ceperint 

fuerint 

-erint 

a.  The  Future  Perfect  represents  an  act  as  in  a  finished  state 
("Perfect")  at  a  future  time  ("Future").  It  thus  also  implies  that 
the  performance  of  the  act  will  have  preceded  that  time. 


244. 


VOCABULARY 


aliquot,  indecl.  Adj.,  some,  sev- 
eral. 

annus,  -T,  M.  2,  year. 

cOnficiO,  cOnficere,  cOnfecT,  cOn- 
fectum,  3  (con-+faciO,  do 
thoroughly),  j^ms/i.,  complete. 

cOnstituO,  -stituere,  -stitui,  -sti- 
ttitum,3  (stronger  than  statuO), 
establish,  place ;  determine. 

disco,    discere,    didici,    ,  3, 

learn. 

efficio,  efficere,  effeci,  effectum, 
3  (ex+facio),  make  out,  ac- 
complish, bring  about. 

excedo,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -cessum, 
3  (ex+cedo),  come  out  (of), 
leave,  withdraw. 


gerO,  gerere,  gessi,  gestum,  3, 
carry,  bear;  carry  on,  wage, 
m^anage  (e.  g.,  a  business,  a 
war,  etc.);  do. 

negotium,  -I,  N.  2,  business,  oc- 
cupation. 

nisi,  Conj.  (ni,  a  negative  particle, 
-|-si,  if=if  not),  unless;  with- 
out a  wQYh^except. 

nOndum,  Adv.  (nOn,  not,  +  dum, 
the  while  =  not  the  while),  not 
yet. 

Servius,  -i,  M.  2,  Servius,  a 
name. 

spatium,  -i,  N.  2,  space,  distance ; 
period  (of  time). 

subito,  Adv.,  suddenly. 


Exercises  95 

246.  READING  MATTER 

1.  (Mark  remonstrates  with  a  schoolmate)  Quid  tu,  Servi, 
constituisti  facere?  Cum  hos  quattuor  annos  c5nfeceris,  quid 
denique  eifeceris?.  Multi  nostrum  aliquid  certe  didicerimus;  tu 
autem  non  longe  processeris.  Nihil  bene  colueris,  nisi  ludos. 
(Ans.)  Ad^  negotium  satis  forte  didicero.  (Mark)  Minime.  Per 
longum  annorum  spatium  piger  fueris.  At  impiger  vir,  non 
piger,  bene  neg5tium  gerit.  Tu,  cum  paulisper  laboravisti, 
subito  defatigatus  es. 

2.  (The  teacher  to  a  father)  Filii  tui  in  studiis  non  longe 
processerint,  cum  ex  schola  excedent.  Per  quattuor  annos  pigri 
fu^rint.  Propter  hoc  ad  negdtium  parati  nondum  erunt.  (The 
father,  to  these  sons)  Cum  post  hos  quattuor  annos  negotium 
gerere  incipietis,  lab5rare  non  didiceritis. 

246.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  You  have  finished  several  years  in  school;  but  you  have 
not  learned  anything,  except  sports.  2.  (Ans.)  On  this  account,^ 
I  am  going- to-cultivate  studies  vigorously  for-a-little-while.  3.  I 
shall  at-any-rate  have  accomplished  something  when  I  leave  ^ 
the  school. 

4.  Servius  has  suddenly  determined  to  work  vigorously.  5. 
He  will  not  proceed  far,  however.  6.  When  he  leaves^  the 
school,  he  will  be  prepared  for  nothing,  because  he  will  not  have 
learned  to  work. 

7.  Unless  you  work*  through  this  year,  you  will  not  be  pre- 
pared for  business.  8.  (Ans.)  I  shall  begin  to  work  when  I 
begin  to  carry  ^  on  business.  9.  (First  speaker)  You  will  not-yet 
have  learned  to  work. 

10.  Many  of  these  boys  will  have  been  lazy  through^  a  period 
of  four  years.     11.  They  will  not  then  suddenly  begin  to  work. 

1  Ad  gains  figurative  meaning :  In  the  direction  of = for. 

2  Say  "  on  account  of  this."  ^  More  exactly,  "  shall  have  worked." 

3  Express  the  time  more  exactly.        ^  Use  per  as  above. 


96    Tenses  of  Completed  Action,  Indicative  Passive 


LESSON  XXXV 

THE    PASSIVE  TENSES  OF  COMPLETED  ACTION  IN 
THE  INDICATIVE,  ALL  CONJUGATIONS 

247.  The  Perfect  tenses  of  the  Indicative  Passive  are 
compound  forms,  made  from  the  Perfect  Passive  Participle, 
combined  with  the  verb  sum  in  the  Present,  Imperfect,  or 
Future.     Thus,  from  moneo: 

Present  Perfect  monitus  sum,  I  have  been  warned. 

Past  Perfect        monitus  eram,  I  had  been  ivarned. 

Future  Perfect  monitus  ero,  I  shall  have  been  warned, 

a.  These  meanings  arose  naturally  out  of  the  combinations.  Thus, 
monitus  sum  meant  ovigiwbWy,  I  am  a  warned  (man).  But  this,  of 
course,  implied  the  idea  I  have  been  warned. 

b.  The  three  tenses  express  situation,  present,  past,  or  future, 
resulting  from  the  completion  of  an  action.    Compare  the  examples. 

c.  The  Participle  of  compound  forms  must  agree  with  the  Subject, 
like  any  other  Participle.    Thus: 

ptier  monitus  est,  the  boy  has  been  warned. 
feminae  monitae  sunt,  the  women  have  been  warned. 
dona  data  sunt,  the  gifts  have  been  given. 
The  forms  may  then  be  exhibited  as  follows: 


248.  THE  PERFECT  TENSES  OF  THE  INDICATIVE 
PASSIVE 


Present  Perfect 

Past] 

Perfect 

Future  Perfect 

I  have 

I  had 

I  shall  have 

been  warned 

been  warned 

been  warned 

1st  Sing. 

monitus 

sum 

monitus 

eram 

monitus  erO 

2d      " 

(( 

es 

a 

eras 

a 

eris 

3d      " 

(( 

est 

u 

erat 

u 

erit 

1st  PI. 

moniti 

sumus 

moniti 

er3.mus 

moniti 

erimus 

2d    " 

11 

estis 

(( 

eratis 

(( 

eritis 

3d    " 

u 

sunt 

u 

erant 

(( 

erunt 

Three  Divisions  of  Time. —  The  Point  of  View    97 

249.  You  may  now  easily  form  the  Indicative  tenses  of 
completed  action,  Active  and  Passive,  of  any  verb  of 
which  you  know  the  Principal  Parts.  Thus,  if  you  know 
the  four  parts  doceo,  docere,  docui,  doctum,  feac/i,  you  get: 

Present  Perfect  Past  Perfect  Future  Perfect 

Active  docu-i  docu-eram  docu-erO 

Passive  doctus  sum  doctus  eram  doctus  ero 

a.  Form  now  the  three  tenses  of  completed  action,  Active  and 
Passive,  for  amO,  tegO,  capio,  and  audio  (first  saying  'the  Principal 
Parts  to  yourself  in  each  instance). 

260.  The  Present  Perfect  Passive  may  of  course  be 
used  with  Aoristic  force,  just  as  the  Present  Perfect  Active 
is.     Thus,  according  to  the  context, 

r  I  have  been  warned  (Pres.  Perfect),  or 
Monitus  sum  means  either  j 

( I  was  warned  (Aoristic  Perfect). 

261.  There  are  only  three  possible  divisions  of  time, 

namely  the  past,  the  present,  and  the  future. 

a.  A  given  act  will  appear  differently  according  to  the  time  with 
reference  to  which  the  speaker  looks  at  it  (that  is,  the  point  of  view). 
Thus  I  may  say,  I  AM  now  BUILDING  a  house,  the  point  of  view 
being  the  present  time;  but  if  by  and  by  I  think  of  the  same  act' 
and  the  same  time,  I  should  say,  I  WAS  then  BUILDING  a  house, 
the  point  of  view  being  now  a  past  time. — ^Again,  I  should  say, 
I  HAVE  now  BUILT  a  house,  but,  later,  thinking  of  the  same 
time,  I  HAD  then  BUILT  a  house. 

262.  VOCABULARY 

bracchium,  -I,    N.    2,    the    arm  firmo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  make 

(strictly  the  fore-arm  only).  firm,  strengthen. 

consilium,  -I,  N.2,  counsel, plan;  mGtO,-are,  -avi, -atum,  1,  change, 

judgment,  wisdom;  council.  alter. 

doleO,  dolere,  doluT,  dolitdrus,  2,  proelium,  -i,  N.  2,  battle. 

suffer,  ache,  grieve.  sQmO,  sGmere,  sQmpsi,  sQmptum, 

exerceO,  exercere, exercul,  exer-  3,  take  up,  take,  assume. 

citum,  2,  exercise,  drill,  triumphus,  -I,  M.  2,  triumph. 


98  Exercises 

253.  READING  MATTER 

1.  {Point  of  View  Past)  Filii  mei  spatium  quattuor  ann5rum 
in  studiis  iam  confecerant,  cum  ex  schola  excesserunt.  Sed  ab 
iis  ludi,  non  studia,  semper  culta  erant.  Propter  hoc  per  aliquot 
annos  negotium  male  gesserunt;  nam  laborare  nondum  didice- 
rant. 

2.  {Point  of  View  Present)  Multum^  a  meis  filiis  in  his  annis 
effect um  est.     Et  bracchia  et  animi  e5rum  exerciti  sunt. 

3.  {Point  of  View  Future)  Cum  hi  pueri  quattuor  ann5s  ad 
ludos  sumpserint,  quid  ab  iis  denique  effectum  erit?  Bracchia 
eorum  firmata  erunt,  animi  autem  non  erunt  firmati.  Nisi  forte 
consilia  sua  mox  mutaverint  atque  subito  constituerint  laborare, 
ad  negotium  iddnei  n5n  erunt.  Tum  vero  dolebunt.  Tum 
verum  incipiet  proelium.  Niillos  tum  habebunt  triumphos  nisi 
exjanimi  diligentia. 

254.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

{Point  of  View  Past)  1.  Servius  had  at-that-time  spent  ^ 
four  years  in  (his)  studies.  2.  But  only  games  had  been  culti- 
vated by  him;  his  mind  had  not  yet  been  strengthened.  3.  On 
this  account  he  managed  business- affairs^  badly  for  several  years. 

{Point  of  View  Present)  4.  Several  years  have  now  been  used 
up  by  you  in  (your)  studies.  5.  Has  much  been  accomplished? 
(Ans.)  Nothing  has  been  accomplished.  6.  This  I  see  at  last, 
and  I  have  now  determined  to  work. 

{Point  of  View  Future)  7.  When  you  leave*  school,  nothing 
will  have  been  accomplished,  unless  perhaps  you  suddenly 
change*  your  plans.  8.  Your  arms  will  have  been  exercised, 
your  mind  will  not  have  been  strengthened  for^  the  real  battle. 
9.  Then,  indeed,  you  will  suffer.  Then  you  will  have  no 
triumphs. 

1  Adjective  used  as  noun,  =  much.  ^Express  time-idea  exactly. 

2" Spent "  =  " finished"  (conficio).  ^Use  ad,  as  in  the  Latin  above. 

3 Plural  of  negotium.  third  line  from  end.  . 


Third  Declension,   Consonant  Stems 


99 


LESSON  XXXVI 

THE  THIRD  DECLENSION;  NOUNS 

255.  In  the  Third  Declension,  the  Stem  ends  in  a  Con- 
sonant, or  in  -i.     Consonant  Stems  will  be  taken  np  first. 


256.  rex, 

,  king,  M. 

miles,  soldier,  M. 

caput,  head, 

N. 

Stems 

reg- 

milit- 

capit- 

Endings 

M.  and  F. 

N. 

Sing.  Nom. 

rex 

miles 

caput 

-sor  — 

— 

Gen, 

regis 

militis 

capitis 

-is 

-is 

Dat. 

regi 

militl 

eapiti 

-1 

-1 

Ace. 

regem 

militem 

caput 

-em 

— 

Voc. 

rex 

miles 

caput 

-s  or  — 

— 

Abl. 

rege 

milite 

capita 

-e 

-e 

PI    ,  Nom. 

reges 

milites 

capita 

-es 

-a 

Gen. 

regum 

militum 

capitum 

-um 

-um 

Dat 

regibus 

militibus 

capitibus 

-ibus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

reges 

milites 

capita 

-es 

-a 

Voc. 

reges 

milites 

capita 

-es 

-a 

Abl. 

regibus 

militibus 

capitibus 

-ibus 

-ibus 

257.  victor,  victor,  M. 
Stems  victOr- 


pater,  father,  M.  robur,  oak,  N. 
patr-  robor-  Endings 


Sing.  Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 
PI.      Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 


victor 

victoris 

victorl 

victorem 

victor 

victore 

victores 

victorum 

victoribus 

victores 

victores 

victoribus 


pater 

patris 

patri 

patrem 

pater 

patre 

patres 

patrum 

patribus 

patres 

patres 

patribus 


robur 

roboris 

robori 

robur 

robur 

robore 

robora 

roborum 

roboribus 

robora 

r5bora 

roboribus 


Same  as  above 


100  Dative  of  Reference  or  Concern 

268.  Remarks    on   the  Third   Declension  Nouns   with 
Consonant  Stems: 

1.  The  stem  is  found  by  dropping  -is  of  the  Genitive  Singular. 

2.  Masculine  and  Feminine  Nouns  are  declined  alike. 

3.  Neuters  have  no  case-ending  in  the  Nom.-Acc.-Voc.  Singular. 

4.  With  these  facts  in  mind,  you  can  decline  any  consonant-stem 
noun,  after  mastering  the  case-endings  given  above,  if  you  know  the 

•Nominative  and  Genitive  of  that  noun,  and  its  Gender, 

THE  DATIVE  OP  REFERENCE  OR  CONCERN 

259.  Specimen  Sentence: 

His  pueris  timeO,  I  am  afraid  for  these  hoys. 
a.  Here  the  Dative  expresses  the  persons  to  whom  the  act  refers, — 
the  persons  whom  it  concerns.    The  construction  may  be  used  after 
any  Verb.    Hence  we  may  state  the  rule,  that: 

260.  Any  Verb  may  he  followed  hy  a  Dative  of  the  Per- 
son to  whom  the  act  or  state  Refers.,  or  whom  it  Concerns. 

261.  VOCABULARY 

arma,  -Orum,  N.  2  (not  used  in  legO,legere,legi,  lectum,3,pzc/?, 

^ing.)^  arms,  weapons.  .    choose;  read. 

caput,  capitis,  N.  3,  head.  lex,  legis,  F.  3,  law,  rule. 

credo, credere,  credidijCreditum,  miles,  militis,  M.  3,  soldier. 

3,  believe.    (Verb  of  Attitude,  pater,  patris,  M.  3,/a<7ier. 

taking  Dat.)  rex,  regis,  M.  3,  king. 

dtlcO,  dGcere,  daxi,  ductum,  3,  rObur,  robor is,  N.  3, oafc;  figura- 

lead.  tive  meaning,  strength. 

eligO,  eligere,  elegi,  electum,  3  simulo,    -are,    -avi,    -atum,     1, 

(6  + lego),     pick     out,    elect,  simulate,  pretend. 

choose.  unde.  Adv., /rom  what,  whence; 

imperO,-are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  com-  out  of  what. 

mand,  order.      (Verb  of  Atti-  victor,  -Oris,  M.  3,  victor,  con- 

tude,  taking  Dat.)  queror. 

inter,   between,    among.    Prep.,  vulnerO,    -are,    -avi,    -atum,    1, 

taking  Ace.  of  Space-Relation.  wound. 

262.  READING  MATTER 

Bellum  simulatum  {pretended  war,  mock  war)  pueri  ex  schola 
nostra  inter  se  gesturi  sunt.    Reges  ex  discipulTs  eligentur.    Hi 


Exercises    \^  -101 

■'       "  *   »     ^  ■*  *  *  .J  *    ^ '    ) '  ■  • 

ex  reliquis  discipulis  milites  legent.  Certae  leges  ^  pugiae  c6i*,- 
stituentur.^  Victores  denique  regem  victum  in  triumph5  ducent. 
Kegis  victi  milites,  quaecumque  iis  victor  imperaverit,^  ea  facient. 
(Second  speaker)  Timeo  his  militibus  et  his  regibus,  nisi  c5n- 
silium  miitaverint;  nee  minus  victori  quam  victo  timeo  regi. 
Nam  si  arma  siimpta  erunt,  aliquot  pueri  vulnerabuntur. 
Bracchia  iis  firmabuntur,  sed  capita  post  proelium  dolebunt. 
(First  speaker)  Non  credo.*  Dolitura  non  sunt;  nam  arma  quae 
facient  pueri  periculosa  non  erunt.  (Second  speaker)  Unde^  ea 
factiiri  sunt?  (Ans.)  Ex  robore.  (Second  speaker)  Patresne 
horum  regum  horumque  militum  hoc  consilium  probabunt? 
(Ans.)  Certe.  (Second  speaker)  Tibi'non  credo.  Numquam 
probabunt. 

263.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  Have  you  heard  about  the  mock  war  which  we  are  going 
to  wage  among  ourselves?  (Ans.)  I  have  heard  nothing. 
2.  (First  speaker)  The  boys  are  going- to-choose  kings.  By  these 
(kings)  soldiers  will  be  chosen.  3.  (Second  speaker)  Who  will 
lead  the  soldiers  ?  4.  (First  speaker)  The  kings  themselves  will 
command  them;  and,  after  the  battle,  the  conqueror  will  lead  the 
conquered  (king)  in  triumph.  5.  (Second  speaker)  What^  shall 
you  make  weapons  out^  of  ?^  6.  (First  speaker)  We  shall  make 
weapons  of  oak.  7.  (Second  speaker)  Some  of  the  boys  will  be 
wounded.  8.  I  fear  for  your  heads  and  arms.  They  will  ache 
for  you  after  the  battle.  9.  (First  speaker)  I  don't  think  so.* 
We  shall  not  aim-at  heads.  10.  (Second  speaker)  Will  your 
father  approve-of  this  scheme?  11.  (First  speaker)  If  fixed 
rules  are  established,^  he  will  approve. 

^  Fixed  rules.  ^ I  donH believe  it= I don^t  think  so. 

2  Will  be  established.  6  Out  of  what?  from  what? 

^Whatever    (things)'  the  victor           ^xJseunde. 

shall  command  (to)  them.  7 Look  out  for  the  time-relation. 


102  TUird  D^plension^  "Oonsonant  Stems  [FiHishedy 


264. 


LESSON  XXXVII 
THE  THIRD  DECLENSION 

CONSONANT  STEMS  (Finished) 

sermd ytalk,M.  multitQdO,  nOmen,  name,  N. 

multitude^  F. 


Stems 

sermOn- 

multittldin- 

nOmin- 

Endings 

Sing,  Norn. 

sermo 

multittido 

nomen 

As 

Oen. 

sermonis 

multittidinis 

nominis 

already 

Dat. 

sermonl 

inultitudini 

nominl 

given 

Ace. 

sermonem 

multitudinem 

nomen 

(256) 

Voc. 

sermo 

multittido 

nomen 

Abl. 

sermone 

multitudine 

nomine 

PI.     Nom. 

sermon  es 

multittidines 

nomina 

Gen. 

sermonum 

multitudinum 

nominum 

Dat. 

sermoQibus 

multittidinibus 

nominibus 

Ace. 

sermones 

multittidines 

nomina 

Voc. 

sermones 

multitudines 

nomina 

Abl. 

sermonibus 

multitudinibus 

nominibus 

265.   pulvis,  dust,  M. 

mOs,  custom,  M. 

corpus,  body, 

,N. 

Stems 

pulver- 

mOr- 

corpor- 

Endings 

Sing.  Nom. 

pulvis 

mos 

corpus 

As 

Gen. 

pulveris 

moris 

corporis 

already 

Dat. 

pulverl 

morl 

corporl 

given 

Ace. 

pulverem 

morem 

corpus 

(256) 

Voc. 

pulvis 

mos 

corpus 

Abl. 

pulvere 

more 

corpora 

PI      Nom. 

pulveres 

mores 

corpora 

Gen. 

pulverum 

morum 

corporum 

Dat. 

pulveribus 

moribus 

corporibus 

Ace. 

pulveres 

mores 

corpora 

Voc. 

pulveres 

mores 

corpora 

Abl. 

pulveribus 

moribus 

corporibus 

a.  In  Latin,  s  between  two  vowels  regularly  became  r.  Hence 
the  change  from  the  original  s,  preserved  in  the  Nominative,  to 
-r-  in  the  other  cases.    Such  words  are  often  called  s-Stems. 


Notes  on  Consonant  Stems  103 

266.  NOTES  ON  CONSONANT  STEMS  (256,257,264,265) 

1.  In  the  Masc.-Fem.  Nom.  Sing.,  sometimes  the  s  is  lacking,^ 
sometimes  the  final  consonant  of  the  stem,  and  sometimes  both. 
Thus  victor  (not  victOr-s),  miles  (not  mllet-s),  sermO  (not  sermOn-s). 

2.  Before  final  r  or  1,  a  vowel  suffers  the  regular  shortening 
(100,2).    Thus  victor,  from  victor.  Gen.  victOr-is. 

3.  Otherwise  vowels  generally  remain  unchanged  in  length.  Thus, 
rex  with  long  e,  as  in  reg-is. 

267.  VOCABULARY 

apud^at, among ;  at-the-house-of.  multitndo,  -inis,  F.  3,  multitude, 

Prep.,  taking  Ace.  of  Space-  great  number. 

Relation.  nOmen,  nOminis,  N.  3,  name. 

compleO,  -plere,  -plevi,  -pletum,  pes,  pedis,^  M.  3,  foot. 

2  (con-,  intensive,-}-pleO,2  fill),  pulvis,  pulveris,  M.  3,  dust. 

fill  thoroughly,  fill  up,  fill*  quamquam,  Conj.,  although. 

corpus,  -oris,N.  3,  body.  SGrm0y-6niSf'M..S,talk,  eonversa- 
excito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1  (ex  tion. 

+citO,  rouse),  rouse  up,  raise.  sic.  Adv.,  in  this  way,  thus,  so. 

frater,  fratris,  M.  3,  brother.  soror,  sorOris,  F.  3,  sister. 

honor, -Oris,  M.  3, /lOTior.  virtus,  -tntis,  F.  3,  manliness, 
mater,  matris,  F.  3,  mother.  courage,  prowess  (the  quality 

mOs,  mOris,  M.  3,  custom,  habit.  belonging  to  a  vir). 

268.  READING  MATTER 

1.  Audivistine  sermonem  discipulorum  ?  Tot  us  de  armis  est. 
Multitud5  eorum  m5res  veri  belli  apud  se*  a  patribus  discunt,^ 
quorum  nonnulli  ipsi  milites  fuerunt.  Nomen  militis  apud  eos 
magn5  in  honore  nunc  est.  Virtu  tern  laudant.  Corpora  sua  exer- 
cent.  In  via  pulverem  vides,  quern  pedes  eorum  excitaverunt. 
(Ans.)  Tibi  credo.  Servius,  filius  meus,  iam  victor  est,  quam- 
quam is  rex^  neque  elect  us  est,  neque  umquam  eligetur.    Leges 

1  Hence  the  blank  added  to  the  -s  in  the  scheme  of  endings,  256. 

2  Pled,  fill,  appears  only  in  compounds. 

3  Note  difference  of  quantity  between  Nominative  and  Genitive.  {Excep- 
tion to  26^,^.) 

*  At-the-house-of  themselves=at  home. 

^Plural,  because  multitudo  is  plural  in  meaning  (Collective  Noun; 
cf.  31,  a). 

*Rex  is  in  the  Predicate  {chosen  king). 


104  Exercises 

ille  constituit.  Milites  sibi  ex  amicis  legit. ^  Fratres  parv5s 
suos,  cum  sor5re  parva,  in  triumpho  simulato  ducit.  Magnam 
inter  eos  habet  famam.  Etiam  matri  multa^  imperat.  Corpus 
suum  exercet.  Sonus  armorum  t5tam  villam  complet.  Caput 
mihi  vero  dolet.^  (First  speaker)  Unde  arma  fecerunt  pueri? 
(Ans.)  Ex  robore.  R5bur  non  durum  est.  Tamen  etiam  sic 
multi  vulnerabuntur. 

269.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  There  is  war  at  my  house*  between  my  father  and  my 
mother.  2.  (Second  speaker)  I  don't  believe  you.  They  never 
fight  each  other.^  3.  (Ans.)  It  is  true.  (Second  speaker)  Why 
are  they  fighting?  4.  (Ans.)  My  father  appro ves-of  our  mock 
war.  5.  My  little  brothers  and  sisters,  too,  love  the  very  name 
of  soldier.  6.  But  my  mother  grieves.  7.  Although  she  praises 
our  courage,  yet  on  account  of  our  talk  she  fears  for  our  bodies, 
and  she  fears  for  our  habits  also.  8.  My  father  says :  "  War  is 
always  thus  in  honor  among  boys.  9.  The  feet  of  our  school- 
boys will  raise  a  dust,  and  the  sound  of  arms  will  fill  the  streets 
for-a-little-while.  10.  But  bodies  will  be  exercised  and  strength- 
ened, and  no^  soldier  of  the  whole  multitude  will  be  wounded." 
11.  Nevertheless  my  mother  resists. 

1  What  tense?   Notice  the  short  e,  and  distinguish  from  legit. 

2  Commands  his  mother  many  things, = gives  many  orders  to  his  mother. 
Why  is  matri  Dative? 

^  The  head  really  aches  for  me,=my  head  really  aches. 
*  See  definition  of  apud  in  the  Vocabulary. 
^Say  ** among  themselves,"  as  in  262. 

6 "And  no"  is  in  Latin  "nor  any."  Do  you  want  quisquam  or  uUus? 
See  199,  a. 


Third  Declension^  l-Sterns  and  Mixed  Stems    105 


LESSON  XXXVIII 


270. 


THE  THIRD  DECLENSION  (Continued) 
NEUTER  i-STEMS 


insigne, 

animal, 

exemplar, 

Endim 

signal,  N. 

animal,  N. 

pattern,  N. 

Stems 

insigni- 

animd.li- 

exemplari- 

Sing.  Nom. 

insigne 

animal 

exemplar 

-e,   — 

Gen. 

Insignis 

animalis 

exemplaris 

-is 

Dat 

insignl 

animall 

exemplar! 

-! 

Ace. 

insigne 

animal 

.exemplar 

-e,    — 

Voc. 

insigne 

animal 

exemplar 

-e,    — 

AU. 

insignl 

animall 

exemplar! 

-! 

PL      Nom. 

insignia 

animalia 

exemplaria 

-ia 

Gen. 

insignium 

animalium 

exemplarium 

-ium 

Dat. 

insignibus 

animalibus 

exemplaribus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

insignia 

animalia 

exemplaria 

-ia 

Voc. 

insignia 

animalia 

exemplaria 

-ia 

AU. 

insignibus 

animalibus 

exemplaribus 

-ibus 

271.    MASCULINE  AND  FEM- 
ININE i-STEMS 
(Mostly  like  Consonant  Stems  in 
Sing.,  but  i-Stemsin  Plural.) 
finis,  end,  M.     caedes,  slaughter,  P. 
Stems  fini-  caedi- 


MIXED  STEMS 

(Consonant  Stems  in  Sing., 

biit  i-Stems  in  Plural.) 
nox,  night,  F.    gens,  race,  F. 

noct-  in  Sing,  gent-  in  Sing. 

nocti-  in  PL      genti-  in  PI. 


Sing.  Nom. 

finis 

caedes 

nox 

gens 

Gen. 

finis 

caedis 

noctis 

gentis 

Dat. 

fin! 

caed! 

noct! 

gent!    . 

Ace. 

finem 

caedem 

noctem 

gentem 

Voc. 

finis 

caedes 

nox 

gens 

AU. 

fine 

caede 

nocte 

gente 

PI.      Nom. 

fines 

caedes 

noctes 

gentes 

Gen. 

finium    ' 

caedium 

noctium 

gentium 

Dat. 

finibus 

caedibus 

noctibus 

gentibus 

Ace. 

finis  (-es) 

caedis  (-es) 

noctis  (-es) 

gentis  (-es) 

Voc. 

fines 

caedes 

noctes 

gentes 

AU. 

finibus 

caedibus 

noctibus 

gentibus 

106  Ablative  of  Means  or  Instrument 

272.  NOTES  ON  THE  i-STEMS  AND  MIXED  STEMS 

1.  Neuter  i-Stems  show  the  -i-  throughout  the  Plural,  and  in  the 
Ablative  Singular  (-1).^ 

2.  Most  Masculine  and  Feminine  i-Stems,  together  with  Mixed 
Stems,2  show  the  -i-  only  in  the  Plural,  namely  in  Genitive  -ium  and 
Accusative  -Is  (with  alternative  -es). 

THE  ABLATIVE  OP  MEANS  OR  INSTRUMENT 

273.  In  Latin,  as  in  English,  the  with-iAQOi  is  used  to 

express  not  only  Accompaniment,  as  in   "I  walk  with  a 

friend,"  but  Means  or  Instrument,  as  in  "I  walk  with  a 

crutch"  (=:"by  means  of  a  crutch"). 

a.  This  construction  has  never  taken  on  a  preposition  in  Latin, 
the  idea  being  expressed  by  the  case  alone.    We  may  then  say  that: 

274.  Means  or  Instrument  may  he  expressed  by  the 
Ablative. 

Te  cOnsiliO  adiuvabo,  /  will  help  you  with  (or  by)  advice. 
Armis  ex  rObore  pugnamus,  we  fight  with  weapons  of  oak. 

275.  VOCABULARY 

(The  Genitive  Plural  will  be  added  to  mark  i-Stems  or  Mixed  Stems.) 

animal, -alis, -ium,  N.  3,  antmaZ.  imago,  imaginis,   F.    3,  image, 
barbarus, -a, -um,  barbarian.  likeness,  representation. 

caedes, -is, -ium,  F.  3,  sZawg/ifer.  insigne,  -is,  -ium,  N.  3,  decora- 
exemplar,    -aris,    -arium,  N.  3,  tion,  badge,  device;  signal, 

pattern.  nox,  noctis,  noctium,  F.  3,  night. 

ferus,  -a,  -um,  fierce^  wild.  Humerus,  -I,  M.  2,  number. 

finis,  -is,  -ium,  M.  3,  limit,  end,  pingo,  pingere,  pinxi,  plctum,  3, 

boundary;  in  PL,  boundaries;         paint. 

hence  territory.  ROmanus,  -a,  -um,  Roman. 

galea,  -ae,  F.  1,  helmet.  sctltum,  -I,  N.  2,  shield.  A  curved 
gens,  gentis,  gentium,  F.  3,  race.  rectangle  of  wood  and  leather, 

gladius,  -1,  M.  2,  stvord.  specto,  -are,  -avl,  -atum,  1,  look 
hostis,  -is,  -ium,  M.  3,  enemy.  at,  witness,  icatch. 

iThe  -i-  originally  showed  everywhere.    Thus  Nom.  insigni,    animali. 

2  Many  of  the  Mixed  Stems  were  originally  i-Stems,  but  came  to  be 
declined  like  Consonant  Stems  in  the  Singular.  Of  some,  the  opposite  is 
true.    The  two  types,  originally  opposed,  thus  became  alike. 


Exercises  107 

276.  READING  MATTER 

1.  (Serma  inter  condiscipulos).  Mos  est  mllitum  in  proelio 
insignia  in  galeis  gerere.  Mater  sororesque  meae  mihi  nunc 
msigne  faciunt.  Exemplar  ex  insigni  sumpserunt  quod  pater 
meus  habet;  nam  ille  antea  miles  fuit.  Corpus  meum  scut5 
magnd  tegam,  in  quo  imaginem  animalis  alicuius  feri  pingam. 
Fratres  quoque  mei  parvi  galeas  et  Insignia  sibi  faciunt;  quam- 
quam  hr  spectabunt  solum  virtutem  nostram,  ipsT  non  pugna- 
bunt.  (Ans.)  Multitude  puerorum  qui  nos  spectabunt  vias 
complebit,  multumque^  pedibus  suis  excitabunt  pulveris. 

Sed  quibus  tu  armis  pugnaturus  es  ?  (First  speaker)  .  Nonne 
arma  Romana  scuta  gladiique  sunt  ?  Ego  certe  ndmen  Romani, 
non  barbari,  militis  mihi  sumam.  Id  solum  in  hon5re  apud  nos 
est.  (Ans.)  Ego  tam  Romanus  sum  quam  tu.  Sed  quid  si 
cuncti  erimus  ex  Romana  gente?  Contra  quos  tum  hostis  pug- 
nabimus?    Non  magnus  certe  erit  hostium  numerus. 

2.  Quam  diii  hi  pueri  pugnabunt?  (Ans.)  Nox  finem  caedi 
faciet. 

277.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  (Ques.)  Of  what  fierce  animal  shall  you  paint  an  image  on 
your  shield?  2.  (Ans.)  I  shall  paint  no^  image  of  an  animal  on 
my  shield;  for  I  shall  not  be  of  any^  barbarian  race.  3.  Only 
barbarians  fight  thus  with  painted  shields.  4.  (Ques.)  Shall 
you  wear*  a  decoration  on  your  helmet?  (Ans.)  Certainly; 
although  I  haven't  yet  a  pattern.  I  have  made  me  a  sword 
already.  5.  I  shall  protect  my  body  with  this,  not  with  my 
shield.  6.  (Second  speaker)  I  shall  watch  your  prowess  when 
the  fight  begins. 

7.  When  night  comes,  we  Romans  shall  puf^  an  end  to  the 
slaughter  of  the  enemy.  8.  Fortunate  will  be  those-remaining. 
The  number  of  these  will  not  be  large. 

^Much — of  what?    Wait  and  see.  3";N^ot  of  any"="of  no" 

2 Say  "an  image  of  no  animal."  ^Say  "bear."  ^Say  "make." 


108  Exceptional  1-Stems 

LESSON  XXXIX 
EXCEPTIONAL  I-STEMS  * 

278.  A  few  i-Stems  preserve  the  i-Declension  in  the 
Singular,  showing  it  in  an  Accusative  -im  (sometimes 
alongside  of  -em),  or  an  Ablative  -i  (sometimes  alongside 
of  -e),  or  in  both  cases.     Thus: 

turris,  tower,  P.  ignis,  fire,  M. 

Stems  turri-  igni- 

Sing.  Nom.  turris  ignis 

Gen.  turris  ignis 

Dat  turrI  igni 

Ace.  turrim  (rarely  -em)      ignem 

Voc.  turris  ignis 

Abl.  turri  or  -e  igni  or  -e 

PI.      Norm.  turres  ignes 

Gen.  turrium  ignium 

Dat.  turribus  ignibus 

Ace.  -  turris  or  -es  ignis  or  -es 

Voc.  turres  ignes 

Abl.  turribus  ignibus 

a.  These  exceptional  words  must  be  picked  up  individually. 

On  general  principles,  if  in  doubt,  decline  any  given  Masc.  or 
Fern.  i'Stem  or  Mixed  Stem  as  a  Consonant  Stem  in  the  Singular 
and  an  i-Stem  in  the  Plural  (i.  e.,  with  Ace.  -em  and  Abl.  -e  in  the 
Sing.,  and  Gen.  -ium  and  Ace.  -Is  or  -es  in  the  PL). 

THE  FUTURE  PASSIVE  PARTICIPLE 

279.  The  Future.  Passive  Participle  is  formed  by  adding 
-ndus  (-a,  -um)  to  the  Present  Stem.     Thus: 

CONJ.    I  II  III  IV 

amandus  monendus  tegendus         capiendus       audiendus 

to  be  loved     to  be  warned    to  be  covered    to  be  taken     to  be  heard 

Example: 
Haec  pugna  nunc  pugnanda  est,  this  fight  is  nowto  be  fought. 


Dative  of  Agent  with  Future  Passive  Participle     109 

280.  The  Future  Passive  Participle  with  sum,  etc.,  early 

acquired  the  force  of  Obligation^  Propriety,  or  Necessity; 

and  this  is  the  force  regularly  found  in  this  combination. 

Thus: 

"  arms  are  to  he  made,  that  is    . 
arms  must  he  made,  or 
Arma  facienda  sunt,  -{  arms  have  to  he  made,  or 

j  there  is  an  ohligation  or  necessity  for 
[         making  arms. 

a.  This  combination  is  often  called  the  Periphrastic  Future 
Passive. 

5.  The  Future  Passive  Participle  with  sum  is  often  accompanied 
by  a  Dative,  which  originally  expressed  the  Person  Concerned  by 
the  Obligation,  Propriety,  or  Necessity,  but  has  come  to  be  in  effect 
an  expression  of  the  Agent,  as  in  : 

Arma  nobis  facienda  sunt,  for  us,  there  is  an  ohligation  to  make 
arms;  i.  e.,  arms  must  he  made  BY  us. 

We  may  now  sum  up  the  expression  of  the  Agent  as  follows: 

281.  The  Agent  of  the  Passive  Voice  is  expressed  by 
the  Ablative  with  a  or  ah.  But  the  Dative  is  used  to 
express  the  Agent  with  the  Future  Passive  Participle, 

282.  VOCABULARY 

{uga.y -a.e J  F.l,  flight.  Os,    Oris,    N.    3,    mouth;    face, 

Gallicus,-a, -um,  Gallic.  countenance. 

homo,  hominis,  M.  3,  man.   (The  pars,  partis,  partium,  F.  3,  part; 

ordinary  word  for  a  man  mere-  .  party,    side    (in     this     sense 

ly  as  a  human  being,  whereas  either    the  Sing,    or    the    PI. 

vir  implies  a  compliment.)  may  be  used), 

ignis, -is, -ium,M.  3,  Jire.    (Abl.  terreO,  terrere,  terrui,  territum. 

Sing.  -1  or  -e. )  2,  terrify,  frighten. 

incendO,  -cendere,  -cendi,  -cen-  terror,    terrOris,    M.    3,    terror, 

sumy3,setonflre.  fright. 

invenio,  -venire,  -veni,  -ventum,  turris,  -is,  -ium,  F.  3,  tower. 

4    (in  +  venio,     come     upon),  vulnus,  vulneris,  N.  3    (cf.  vul- 

find,  discover ;  invent.  nerc),  wound. 


110  Exercises 

283.  READING  MATTER 

(Girl  and  Braggart  Soldier) ' 

1.  Proelium  ex  villae  meae  turri  spectabo.  Sed  tu  Romanae 
an  Gallicae  eris  partis?  (The  boy)  Ego  Gallicae  gentis  er5. 
Nam  Galli  barbari  atque  ferl  sunt,  et  magnam  gladiis  suis  faci- 
unt  caedem  hominum.  (The  girl)  Turn  tibi  Gallicum  insigne 
in  galea  gerendum  est.  Ubi  exemplar  invenies?  (The  boy) 
Marei  pater  multa  insignia  in  bello  eepit.  Ex  his  exemplaria 
sumemus.  Ego  etiam  imaginem  animalis  alieuius  feri  in  scuto 
me5  pingam.  Haec  enim  hostis  terrore  eomplebit.  (The  girl) 
Sed  Gallorum  mos  est  etiam  ora  atque  corpora  sua  in  terrorem  ^ 
hostium  pingere.  Id  tii  facturus  es  ?  (The  boy)  Cred5.  (The 
girl)  Matrem  certe  et  fratres  parv5s  sqr5resque  terrebis,  sed 
militem  terrebis  nullum.  Nee  magnus  erit  numerus.  vulnerum 
tu5rum.  Finis  erit  virtutis  tuae,  cum  pugna  incipiet.  Tum  te 
territus  fuga  servabis,  neque  ante  noctem  fugere  desistes. 

2.  (A  father)  Veri  milites  saepe  igni  pugnant.  Haec  pugna 
vobis  sine  igni  pugnanda  est.     Silvae  non  sunt  incendendae. 

284.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  (One  mother  to  another)  Have  you  heard  the  talk  of  this 
fierce  boy?  2.  He  wishes  to  be  of  the  barbarian  side;  for  he  has 
a  real  Gallic  helmet.  3.  (Second  mother)  Where  did  he  find  it? 
(Ans.)  Some  man  gave  it  to  him.  4.  And  he  is  going  to  paint 
his  face  and  body  for^  the  terror  of  his  schoolmates.  5.  How 
beautiful  he  will  be!  We  shall  watch  him  from  the  tower  of  our 
villa.  6.  (First  speaker)  If  anybody  attacks  him,  he  will  run- 
away in-a-f right. ^    7.  He  will  receive  his  wounds  in  flight. 

8.  (A  father)  There  will  be  great  danger  from^  fire;  for  if  the 
woods  are-set -on-fire,  our  villas  will-be-set-on-fire  too.  (Another 
father)  Fires  are  not  to  be  made  by  these  boys. 


1  "For  the  terror  of  "  =  "to  frighten."  3  Say  "  terrified." 

2  Use  in  as  above.  *  Use  a  or  ab. 


Consonani-Stem  Adjectives 


111 


LESSON  XL 

ADJECTIVES  OF   THE  THIRD  DECLENSION 

285.  Like  Nouns,  Adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension 
are  divided  into  two  classes,  those  with  Consonant  Stems, 
and  those  with  i-Stems.  The  i-Stems  are  by  far  the 
more  numerous. 

CONSONANT-STEM  ADJECTIVES 

286.  Comparative^  Adjectives,  and  a  very  few  Adjec- 
tives of  One  Ending  in  the  Nominative  Singular  are  of 
the  Consonant-Stem  Declension.  These  are  declined 
precisely  like  Consonant-Stem  Nouns. 


Comparative  Adjective 

Adjective  of  One  Ending 

certior, 

surer 

vetus,  old 

Stem 

certiOr- 

veter- 

M. and  F. 

N. 

M. and  F. 

N. 

Sing.  Nom. 

certior 

certius 

vetus 

vetus 

Gen, 

certioris 

certioris 

veteris 

veteris 

Dat. 

certior! 

certior! 

veter! 

veter! 

Ace, 

certiorem 

certius 

veterem 

vetus 

Voc. 

certior 

certius 

vetus 

vetus 

Abl. 

certiore 

certiore 

vetere 

vetere 

PI      Nom 

certiores 

certiora 

veteres 

Vetera 

•  Gen. 

certiorum 

certiorum 

veterum 

veterum 

Dat. 

certioribus 

certioribus 

veteribus 

veteribus 

Ace. 

certiores 

certiora 

veteres 

Vetera 

Voc. 

certiores 

certiora 

•   veteres 

Vetera 

Abl. 

certioribus 

certioribus 

veteribus 

veteribus 

1  Adjectives  express  qualities  in  three  degrees,  called  Positive,  Compara- 
tive, and  Superlative;  thus  sweety  sweeter,  sweetest.  A  Positive  Adjective 
simply  expresses  the  presence  of  the  quality  in  a  person  or  thing ;  the  Com- 
parative expresses  its  presence  in  a  higher  degree  than  in  some  other  person 
or  thing,  and  the  Superlative  expresses  its  presence  in  the  highest  degree. 
The  same  holds  correspondingly  for  Adverbs. 


112  Dative  of  Possession 

287.  1.  All  Comparative  Adjectives  are  declined  like  certior. 
Decline  now  melior,  better,  maior,  greater,  minor,  less,  validior, 
stronger. 

2.  Vetus,  old,  is  the  only  Consonant-Stem  Adjective  of  one  end- 
ing to  be  used  in  this  book.^  Remember,  then,  that  except  Com- 
paratives, and  vetus,  all  Third-Declension  Adjectives  in  this  book 
are  i-Stems. 

THE  DATIVE  OP  POSSESSION 

288.  Specimen  Sentence: 

Mihi  multi  amici  sunt,  for  me  there  are  many  friends. 
a.  The  Dative  here  was  originally  the  Dative  of  the  Person  Con- 
cerned, and  has  been  translated  as  such  above.  But  to  say,  "  for  me 
there  are  many  friends,"  amounts  to  saying,  "I  have  many  friends," 
and  this  has  come  to  be  the  regular  meaning  of  such  a  combination. 
Hence: 

289.  PossessioJi  may  be  expressed  by  the  Dative  with 

the  verb  sum,  or  other  verbs  implying  existence. 

a.  Of  course,  the  same  idea  may  be  expressed  by  habeO,  as  we 
have  often  seen.    Thus  we  may  say: 

either  multi  amici  mihi  sunt  )  ^  ,  ^  .      , 

,^.         ....    -  [  I  have  many  friends. 
or     multOs  amicOs  habeO  ) 

290.  VOCABULARY 

SiihletaiySiejM.l,  athlete.  maior,  maius,   greater,   bigger. 

certior,     -ius,     surer,    trustier.  Compar.  of  magnus,  grrea^,  6^gr. 

Compar.ofcertusy  sure,  trusty.  minor,      minus,    smaller,     less. 

dux,  ducis,  M.  3  (cf.dacO),  leader,  Compar.  of  parvus,  small. 

guide.  melior,  melius,  better.    Compar. 

dedo,  dedere,  dedidi,  deditum,  3  of  bonus,  good. 

(de+do,  give  away),  give  up;  nemo,  Dat.  nemini.  Ace.  nemi- 

with    reflexive   pronoun,  give  nem  (Gen.  and  Abl.  supplied 

oneself  up  (to),  devote  oneself  by  nGllius  and  nQllo),  M.  3,  no 

(to);  surrender.  one,  nobody. 

exemplum,    -T,    N.    2,   example,  oculus,  -I,  M.  2,  eye. 

precedent.  vaXi^ior ^ -ins  ^  stronger.   Compar. 

labor,  labOris,  M.  3,  labor,  work.  of  validus,  strong. 

Lucius,  -1,  M.  2,  Lucius,  a  name.  vetus,  -us,  old;  old-fashioned. 

1  It  is  the  only  one  in  Caesar's  story  of  the  Gallic  War,  I-IV. 


Exe7xises  113 

291.  READING  MATTER 

1.  Marcus  certe  nobis  alter  ^  ex  regibus  eligendus  est.  Nemo 
enini  melior  est  discipulus,  nem5  athleta  melior.  Nem5  se 
maiore  cum  diligentia  liidis  dedidit,  nemd  labori.  Nemini 
validius  est  ingenium,  nemini  corpus  validius.  Niillius  exemplum 
umquam  melius  fuit.  Certiorem  ducem  n5n  inveniemus.  Quae- 
cumque  imperaverit,  ea  milites  eius  facient.  Eius  nomen  ipsum 
alteras  partis  terrebit. 

2.  (One  of  the  opposition)  Nullus  in  cuiusquam  n5mine 
terror  est.  Tii  Marco  propter  diligentiam  eius  faves.  Ego 
veteres  mores  eius  non  amo.  Lucio  faveo.  Is  nihil  nisi  ludos 
colit. 

3.  (An  anxious  father)  Haec  consilia  me  terrent.  Hi  feri 
milites  Gallic!  et  Roman!  vulnera  in  ora^  aut  oculos  dabunt  et 
accipient.  Etiam  ignes  facient,  quibus  silvae  incendentur. 
(Ans.)  TQ,  video,  filio  tuo  times.  Is  autem  in  proelio  se  fugae 
dabit.  Vel  minus  erit  periculum,  s!  pugnam  longe  ex  turr! 
spectabit. 

292.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  Lucius  ought  (say  "is")  to  be  chosen  by  us.  2.  He  loves 
games.  He  will  devote  himself  to  this  war.  3.  No- one  will 
lead  us  with  greater  interest.  4.  He  has  (use  sum  for  practice) 
less  diligence  than  Mark  (has),  but  no  one  has  a  bigger  or 
stronger  body.  5.  He  really  loves  wounds.  He  doesn't  fear  for 
his  face  or  eyes.  Mark  is  too  good.  7.  He  loves  work  and  old- 
fashioned  ways.  He  hurts  us  by  his  example.  8.  If  he  is 
elected  he  will  be  a  stern  leader. 

9.  (Ans.)  Wait  a  little  (while).  You  will  see.  10.  Mark  is 
even  now  the  better  athlete,  and,  on-account-of  his  ability,  he 
will  be  the  surer  leader.  11.  Yoii  are  filled  with  terror,  because 
you  do  not  wish  to  exercise  your  lazy  body. 

1  One  (of  the  two).    Notice  that  alter  is  here  in  the  Predicate. 

2  Ace,  because  the  wounds  go  into  the  face.     We  say  ^'in  the  face." 


114 


I-Stem  Adjectives 


LESSON  XLI 

I-STEM  ADJECTIVES 

293.  I-Stem  Adjectives  are  of  Three  Endijigs,  Two 
Endings,  or  One  Ending  in  the  Nominative  Singular. 
They  are  declined  as  follows: 


Of  Three  Endings 

Of  Two  Endings  . 

acer,  sharp 

for  t  is,  ?)rat;e 

Stem 

acri- 

forti- 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M. and  F. 

N. 

Sing.  Nam. 

acer 

acris 

acre 

fortis 

forte 

Gen. 

acris 

acris 

acris 

fortis 

fortis 

Dat. 

acrl 

acri 

acri 

forti 

forti 

Ace. 

acrem 

acrem 

acre 

fortem 

forte 

Voc. 

acer 

acris 

acre 

fortis 

forte 

Abl. 

acri 

acri 

acri 

forti 

forti 

PI.     Norn. 

acres 

acres 

acria 

fortes 

fortia 

Gen. 

acrium 

acrium 

acrium      fortium 

fortium 

Dat. 

acribus 

acribus 

acribus      fortibus 

fortibus 

Ace. 

acris  or  -es 

acris  or -es 

acria 

fortis  or -es 

fortia 

Voc. 

acres 

acres 

acria 

fortes 

fortia 

Abl 

acribus 

acribus 

acribus      fortibus 

fortibus 

Of  One  Ending:  duplex, 

double 

Stem    di 

iiplici- 

M. and  F. 

N. 

Sing.Nom, 

,  duplex 

duplex 

Gen. 

duplicis 

duplicis 

Dat. 

duplici 

duplii  I 

Ace. 

duplicem 

duplex 

Voc. 

duplex 

duplex 

Abl. 

duplici 

duplici 

PL     Nom. 

,  duplices 

duplicia 

Gen. 

duplicium 

duplicium 

Dat. 

duplicibus 

duplicibus 

Ace. 

duplicis  or-es 

duplicia 

Voc. 

duplices 

duplicia 

Abl. 

duplicibus 

duplicibus 

Dative  of  the  Person  Judging  115 

a.  I-Stem  Adjectives  always  have  -I  in  the  Ablative  Singular. 

6.  Notice  that  those  of  Three  Endings  and  those  of  Two  differ 
practically  only  in  the  Nominative-Vocative  Singular  Feminine. 
Thus  acer  puer,  a  spirited  boy,  acris  puella,  a  spirited  girl, 
but      fortis  puer,  a  brave  boy,  fortis  puella,  a  brave  girl. 

DATIVE  OP  THE  PERSON  JUDGING 

294.  Specimen  Sentence: 

Mihi  Marcus  athleta  melior  est,  to  me,  Mark  is  the  better  athlete. 

a.  The  Dative  here  practically  expresses  the  idea  of  the  person 
in  whose  eyes,  to  whose  judgment,  the  statement  made  is  true.  This 
became  a  regular  power  of  the  case,  and  we  may  accordingly  lay 
down  the  rule  that : 

295.  The  Dative  is  used  to  denote  the  Person  In  Whose 
Judgme7it,  or  For  Whom,  the  statement  holds  good. 

a.  So  often  with  videor  (Passive  of  video),  meaning  seem: 
Marcus  mihi  melior  esse  videtur  quam  Ltlcius,  Mark  seems  to  me 

to  be  better  than  Lucius. 

b.  Notice  that  the  Predicate  Adjective  melior  goes  back  finally 
(through  esse  and  videtur)  to  Marcus,  and  of  course  agrees  with  it. 

296.  VOCABULARY 

acer,  acris,  acre,  sharp,  fierce.  latus,  -eris,  N.  3,  side;  lung. 

alacer, -cris, -ere,  eager.  •  maximus,   -a,    -um,    Superl.   of 

aptus, -a, -um,  op^,  ^^^ed,^^.  magnus,      greatest,      largest, 

certamen,  -inis,  N.  3,  contest.  biggest;  (in  a  family)  oldest. 

certo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  con-  maxime.  Adv.,  in  the  largest  de- 
tend,  strive.  gree,  very  greatly,  exceedingly. 

civitas,  -atis,  -atium  (some-  omnis, -e,  all,  the  whole;  every, 
times  civitatum),  P.  3,  state.  any. 

cOnsuetQdo,  -inis,  P.  3,  custom.  omninO,  Adv.,  in  all,  at  all. 

duplex,  duplex.  Gen.  duplicis,  parum,  Adv.  (cf.  parvus),  little, 
twofold,    double;  ambiguous.  too  little. 

facilis,-e  (cf.  facio,  do;  do-able,  prOmptus,  -a,  -um,  ready  (in 
i.  e.),  easy.  sense  of  ready  to  do  a  thing). 

facile,  easily  (Adv.  for  facilis).  statim,    Adv.,    immediately,    at 

fortis,  forte,  strong,  brave.  once. 

intrO,  -are,  -avl,  -atum,  1,  enter,  videor  (Passive  of  video),  seem. 


116  ^         Exercises 

297.  READING  MATTER 

(The  Too- Athletic  Girl) 

1.  Soror  Luci  maxima  turbae  puellarum  minorum  imperat, 
nee  quisquam  certior  aut  melior  dux  est.  Nunc  maxime  cupit 
gladio  et  scuto  pugnare  inter  pueros.  Fort  is  f  rater  est,  soror 
non  minus  fortis.  Animus  eius  ad^  bellum  gerendum  alacer^ 
ac  promptus  est.  AcrTs  habet  oculos,  latera^  bona.  Multis 
athletis  corpora  non  maiora  aut  validiora   sunt.    Multos  ea 

*  nostrum,  si  pugnabit,  facile  vincet.  Sed  ex  consuetiidine  vetere 
huius  civitatis  pugnae  puellis  omnino  non  pugnandae  sunt. 
Puer  acer  mihi  placet,  puella  nimis  acris  parum  placet.  Malum 
exemplum  erit,  haec^  si  certamen  intra verit.     Quid  tu  sentis? 

2.  (Ans.)  Mea  sententia  duplex  est.  Non  probo;  sed,  si  ilia 
pugnatura  est,  ego  earundem  partium  esse  desidero.  Omnes 
enim  ei  hostes  sese  statim  dedent,  quia  nemo  cupiet  cum  puella 
certare.     Itaque  ilia  sine  omni  labore  vincet. 

3.  Proelia  mihi  puellis  apta  esse  non  videntur;  sed  facilis 
alteras  partis  manet  victoria,  haec^  si  puella  arma  sUmpserit. 

298.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  Your  words  are  ambiguous.  2.  Certainly  girls  seem  to 
you  to  be  little  fitted  for*  contests  to-be-carried -on  with  boys. 
3.  Why  don't  you  say  so  at -once?  4.  This  girl  is  exceedingly 
eager,  and-not  less  brave  and  ready.  5.  But  many  girls  have^ 
sharp  eyes,  strong  bodies,  good  lungs,  and  brave  minds.  6.  If 
all  the  oldest  sisters  of  our  friends  enter  the  contest,  the  boys 
will  not  contend.  7.  In  that  case,^  an  easy  victory  easily  awaits 
this  girl.    8.  But  where  will  the  sport  be  for  the  boys? 

9.  To  me,  this  game  seems  not  at-all  fit  for  girls.  10.  Accord- 
ing-to^  the  custom  of  this  state,  other  and  smaller  things  are 
to-be-done  by  them. 

1  Eager  for  war  to  be  waged^  i.e.,  ^  Use  ad  as  above. 
eager  for  waging  war.                                   ^  Use  sum  for  practice. 

2  Sides  here  clearly  =  lungs,  ^  Say  ' '  then. ' ' 

3Note  the  emphasis.  7 Say ''from"  as  above. 


Present  Active  Participle 


117 


LESSON   XLII 

THE  PRESENT  ACTIVE  PARTICIPLE 

299.  The  Present  Active  Participle  is  formed  in  the 
Nominative  by  adding  -tis  to  the  Present  Stem.     Thus : 

CONJ. 


300. 


I 

II 

III 

IV 

am&ns 

monens 

tegens      capiens 

audiens 

loving 

warning 

covering    taking 

hearing 

DECLENSION  OP  THE  PRESENT  ACTIVE  PAR- 
TICIPLE 
amans,  loving 


Stems 

amant- 

in 

Sing. 

monent- 

in 

Sing. 

amanti- 

in 

PI. 

monenti- 

in 

PI. 

M.  and  F. 

N. 

M. and  F. 

N. 

Sing.  Nam 

.  amans 

amans 

monens 

monens 

Gen. 

amantis 

amantis 

monentis 

monentis 

Dat. 

amanti 

amanti 

monenti 

monenti 

Ace. 

amantem 

amans 

monentem 

monens 

Voc. 

amans 

amans 

monens 

monens 

Abl.   amante(or-i)  amante(or-I 
PL     Nom.  amantes  amantia 

Gen.  amantium        amantium 

Dat.  amantibus       amantibus 

Ace.  amantis  or -es  amantia 

Voc.  amantes  amantia 

Abl.  amantibus       amantibus 
a.  Present  Participles  are  Mixed  Stems  (Abl.  Sing,  -e);  but  when 
used  as  Adjectives,  they  are  i-Stems  (Abl.  Smg.  -T). 


monen te  (or  -I)  monente  {or  -I) 

monentes  monentia 

monentium  monentium 

monentibus  monentibus 
monentis  or-es  monentia 

monentes  monentia 

monentibus  monentibus 


ABLATIVE  WITH  pro  AND  prae 
301.  Pro,  originally  forth  [from),  or  in  front  [from)., 
and  prae,  in  front  [from).,  take  an  Ablative  of  Separation. 
The  meaning  slightly  changes,  so  that  we  should  define 
pro  and  prae  as  meaning  simply  in  front  of  (much  like 
ante);  but  the  case-usaofe  remains  fixed. 


118  Gerundive 

THE  GERUNDIVE 

302.  Specimen  Example  (from  last  Reading  Matter)  : 
Alacer  ad  bellum  gerendum,  eager  for  ivar  to-be-waged. 

This  clearly  suggests,  eager  for  WAGING  war. 

a.  In  other  words,  what  was  originally  merely  a  Future  Passive 
Participle  comes  to  be  felt  as  the  leading  word  in  its  phrase,  and  to 
seem  very  like  a  verbal  noun  (cf.  WAGING  in  the  translation  above). 

When  the  form  has  reached  this  power,  it  is  called  the  Gerundive. 

We  may  then  state  the  usage  as  follows  : 

303.  The  Gerundive  is  the  Future  Passive  Participle 
after  it  has  gained  the  power  of  conveying  the  Leading 
Idea  in  its  phrase. 

a.  Notice  that  the  Gerundive,  although  conveying  the  leading 
idea  in  its  phrase,  is  still  grammatically  dependent.  Thus,  in  the 
example  above,  bellum,  not  gerendum,  depends  upon  ad,  and  geren- 
dum agrees  with  bellum. 

304.  VOCABULARY 

administro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  pra.e,  in  front  of.    Prep.,  taking 

administer,  manage.  Abl. 

ars,artis,  artium,  P.  3,  ar^  sA;i7Z.  praecedo,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -ces- 

castra,  -Orum,  N.  PI.  2,  camp.  sum,    3  (prae  -1-  cedo,  go  in 

(Used  only  in  PI.)  front),  precede. 

commode.    Adv.,    conveniently,  praesum,-esse,-fui,irreg.  (prae+ 

prQperly,  sum,  be  in  front),  he  in  com.- 

cotidie,  Adv.,  daily,  every  day.  mand  over,  be  present.   Parti- 

inermis,    -e    (in,    not   +  arma,  ciple  praesens,  being  present^ 

arms),  unarmed.  as  Adj., present. 

mllitaris,  -e,  military.   Ars  mill-  prO,  in  front  of.    Prep.,  taking 

taris,  art  of  roar,  tactics.  Abl. 

neglegO,  -legere,  -lexi,  -lectum,  Pnblius,  -i,  M.  2,  a  name. 

3,  neglect,  pass  by,  disregard.  teneO,  tenere,  tenui,  tentum,  2, 

nOscO,  nOscere,  nOvI,  nOtum,  3,  hold. 

get  acquainted  with,  come  to  pertineO, -tinere, -tinui, -tentum, 

know,  learn.  2  (per  +  teneO,  hold  through 

oppidum,  -I,  N.  2,  town.  to),  reach  (to);  pertain  (to). 


Exercises  119 

306.  READING    MATTER 

(Two  Ways  of  Electioneering) 

1.  Servius  hodie  omnTs  ad  certamen  vocavit !  Gladium  et 
scutum  praa  se  gerens,^  pro  oppido  processit  cum  acri  multi- 
tudine  amicorum,  alacrium  et  ad  omnia  facienda  promptorum. 
Ipse  praesens  ^  vidi.  Praecedebat  maxima  turba  puerorum  par- 
vorum  inermium,  Servium  propter  eius  studium  laudantium. 
Hie  lis  fortis  hom5  videbatur.  Mihi  non  fortis  sed  neglegens^ 
et  temerarius  est.     Latera  autem  eius  certe  bona  sunt. 

2.  Marcus  autem  et  Publius,  Marci  amicus,  n5n  statim 
certare  cupiunt,  sed  milites  cotidie  spectant,  qui,  castra  ante 
oppidum  tenentes,  gladiis  ex  robore  factis  pugnantes  se  exer- 
cent,  omniaque  quae  ad  bellum  commode  gerendum  pertinent 
discunt.  Servius  maxime  cupit  rex  eligi.  Parum  autem  aptus 
est  ad  nos  ducendos.     Facile  eligentur  Marcus  et  Lucius. 

3.  (Second  speaker)  Servius  ex  consuetudine  sua  certamen 
nunc  statim  intrare  cupit;  omnia  enim  ei  facilia  videntur. 
Marcus  autem  omnia  desiderat  noscere.  Itaque  hie  mox  paratus 
erit  ad  bella  administranda.  Ars  enim  militaris  duplex  est. 
Bonus  dux  et  gladi5  pugnat  et  consilio. 

306.  MATTER    FOR   TRANSLATION 

1.  Mark  and  Publius,  studying  the  art  of -war,  are  watching 
the  soldiers  every-day  when  they  exercise  in-front-of  the  camp. 
2.  I  myself  am  often  present^  and  see  them.  3.  They  are  ex- 
ceedingly eager  to  *  learn  everything  that  pertains  to  managing 
a  war  properly.  4.  Servius,  neglecting  everything,  according  to 
his  custom,  desires  to  enter  the  contest  at  once.  5.  Nothing 
holds  him.  6.  So  today  he  proceeded  in-front-of  the  town,  dis- 
playing his  sword  and  shield.  7.  The  greatest  mob  of  little 
boys,  fierce  but  unarmed,  preceded  (him).  8.  On  account  of 
his  zeal  and  strong  (say  "good")  lungs,  many  favor  him. 

1  Bearing  in  front  of  himself,  displaying.  ^  Neglecting,  =  careless. 

2  Being  present  saw,=  was  present  and  saw.        ■*  Use  alacer  ad,  as  above. 


120  Ablative  Absolute 


LESSON  XLIII 
THE  ABLATIVE  ABSOLUTE 

307.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Md.rcO  imperante,  omnia  bene  administrantur,  with  Mark  com- 
manding, everything  is  managed  well. 

M3,rcO  duce,  omnia  bene  administrantur,  with  Mark  as  leader  (or 
Mark  being  leader),  everything  is  managed  well. 

M3.rcO  praesente,  omnia  bene  administrantur,  with  Mark  present 
(or  Mark  being  present),  everything  is  managed  ivell. 

Hoc  facto,  puerl  discesserunt,  with  this  done  (or  this  having  been 
done),  the  boys  departed. 

a.  The  Ablative  is  here  used  like  the  "Nominative  Absolute"  in 
English,  in  a  loose  connection  with  the  rest  of  the  sentence;  and  it 
is  accordingly  called  the  Ablative  Absolute  (i.  e.,  free  Ablative).  As 
you  see,  it  expresses  the  existing  Situation,  the  State  of  Affairs. 

b.  The  second  word  in  each  case  forms  a  kind  of  Predicate  for 
the  first.  Thus  in  our  first  example,  Mark  com,mands;  in  the  sec- 
ond, he  is  leader;  in  the  third,  he  is  present;  in  the  fourth,  the 
thing  had  been  done. 

We  may  accordingly  describe  the  construction  as  follows: 

308.  An  Ablative  Noun  or  Pronoun,  with  a  Predicate 

word  in  the  same  case,  may  be  used  in  loose  connection 

with  the  rest  of  the  sentence} 

a.  The  Ablative  Absolute  may  be  translated  in  a  variety  of 
ways,— by  an  English  Nominative  Absolute,  by  a  ifJzY/t-phrase,  or  by 
a  Clause  introduced  by  when,  since,  although,  or  if.    Thus: 

iwith  this  done 
this  having  been  done 
when  this  had  been  done,  etc. 

1  In  origin,  the  construction  is  simply  a  Sociative  Ablative,  precisely  like 
the  English  construction  in  "with  this  done,"  'Svith  Mark  as  leader,"  etc. 
The  English  Nominative  Absolute  is  itself  probably  an  old  Sociative  con- 
struction from  which  the  case-ending  has  been  lost,  so  that  what  is  left 
seems  to  be  a  Nominative. 


Reflexive  and  Deponent  Verbs  121 

PERFECT  TENSES  WITH  THE  MEANING  OP  THE 
PRESENT,  ETC. 

309.  In  several  verbs  the  tenses  of  completed  action  have  come 
to  express  a  present,  past,  or  future  state.  Thus  nOvi,  originally 
I  have  become  acquainted  with  (from  nOscO,  I  become  acquainted 
with)  practically  means  /  know.  Similarly,  nOveram  means  /  knew, 
and  nOverO,  /  shall  know. 

310.  A  few  verbs  have  wholly  lost  the  forms  made  from  the 
Present  stem  and  are  confined  to  the  Perfect  system.  Thus  memini, 
I  remember  (originally  I  have  called  to  mind).  Such  verbs  are  called 
Defective,  because  they  lack  many  forms. 

MIDDLE,  OR  REFLEXIVE,  VERBS   ' 

311.  Middle,  or  Reflexive,  Verbs  are  those  which  express  an  act 
as  done  by  the  subject  to  or  for  himself.  The  terminations  are  the 
same  as  those  of  the  Passive.  Thus  to  express  the  idea  "I  exercise 
(myself),"  one  may  use  either  the  Active  exerceO  with  an  Object  m6 
(me  exerceO),  or  the  Reflexive  exerceor. 

DEPONENT  VERBS 

312.  A  number  of  verbs  which  originally  were  reflexive  have 
come  to  be  practically  Active  in  meaning.  Thus  reverter,  I  return^ 
from  re-,  back,  and  vertor,  I  turn  inyself;  vescor,  /  eat,  originally 
I  feed  myself y  from  vescO,  feed.  But  in  many  verbs  we  can  no 
longer  trace  the  rise  of  the  use  of  the  Passive  form. 

These  verbs  are  called  Deponents,  because  they  have  "laid  aside" 
their  Active  forms.     We  may  then  say  that: 

313.  Deponents  are  verbs  with  Passive  Form  but  Act- 
*  ive  Meaning. 

314.  The  Principal  Parts  are  of  course  those  of  the  Passive.  Thus: 
Conjugation      I  Vagor,  vagari,  vagatus  sum,  roam,  wander  about. 

II  Vereor,  vereri,  veritus  sum,  fear,  respect. 
Ill  Sequor,  sequi,  secQtus  sum,  follow. 
IV  Orior,  oriri,  ortus  sum,  rise,  arise. 

315.  Transitive  Deponents  have  the  four  Participles,  all  but  the 
Future  Passive  being  ordinarily  of  Active  meaning.     Thus: 

ver ens,  fearing  veritus,  having  feared 

veritvirus ,  about  to  fear  verendus,  to  be  feared 


122  Exercise 

316.  VOCABULARY 

(Add  the  Deponent  Verbs  in  314.) 

altus,  -a,  -um,  high,  lofty.  pons,  pontis,  -ium,  M.  3,  bridge. 

contineO,  -tinere,  -tinui,  -tentum,  regio,  -Onis,  F.  3,  region. 

2  (con — |-teneO,  hold  together),  reverter,  revert!  (Infin.),  reverti 

hold  in,  hem  in,  keep.  (Perf.),    reversum,    3,  return, 

decertO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1  (de+  Not  Deponent  in  Perf. 

certo,  strive  it  out),  settle  the  rQs,  rQris,  N.  3,  country. 

war,  fight  it  out.  undique.  Adv.,  on  all  sides. 
dum,  Conj.,  while.  urbs,  -is,  -ium,  F.  3,  city. 
flQmen,-inis,  N.  3,  Hver.  uterque,  utraque,  utrumque  (de- 
interim.  Adv.,  meanwhile.  clined  like  uter,  130,  +  -que), 
mOns,  mentis,  -ium,  M.  3,  rnoun-  each  (of  two),  either. 

tain.  vallis,  -is,  -ium,  F.  3,  valley. 

memim,-isse.  Defect., remember.  versor,  -ari,  -atus    sum,    1   (cf. 

natcira,  -ae,  F.  1,  nature.  .  verto),  keep   turning,   hover; 

ob,  against,  before;  on  account  be  busy,  be  engaged. 

of^    (like    propter).     Prep,  of      vescor,  vesci,  ,  3,  feed  one- 

Space-Eelation,     taking    Ace.  self  with,  live  on ;  eat.     Takes 

pOnO,  pOnere,  posui,  positum,  3,  Ablative  (originally  expressing 

place.  the  idea  of  Means). 

317.  READING  MATTER 

(Mark  Writes  to  a  Friend) 

Tu  de  pugna  quae  mox  pugnabitur  iam  audivisti.  Sed  civi- 
tatem  nostram  n5n  novisti.     Ego  tibi  dicam  naturam  loci. 

Oppidum  in  quo  habito  positum  est  in  valle,  quae  monti- 
bus  altis  undique  continetur.  Ho»  montis  bene  n5vi;  nam  in 
iis  fere  cotidie,  dum  exerceor,  vagor.  Tu  forte,  haec  cum  leges, 
mihi  vereberis;   sed  nihil  in  ea  regione  umquam  vidi  periculdsi. 

Ad  hos  montis  explorand5s  heri  iterum  process!,  aliquot  par- 
vis  amicis  praecedentibus  aut  sequentibus.  Fliimen  parvum 
seciitus  sum,  quod  ab  his  montibus  oritur.^     In^  eo  flumine  ali- 

1  Prepositions  originally  expressed  space-relations.  But  they  all  gained 
figurative  forces  in  addition,  as  we  have  now  seen  in  the  case  of  ab,  de,  ex, 
cum,  in;  ad,  contra,  ob,  post,  propter,  etc. 

2  0rior,  though  of  the  4:th  Oonj.,  has  several  3d  Oonj.  forms.       ^  On,  over. 


Exercise 


123 


quot  sunt  pontes.     Ex  utraque  parte^  loca  castris  idonea  inveni. 

Hoe  facto -^  reverti.  Dum  revertor,  .Servium  vidi,  qui  ex 
oppido  processerat,  turba  amicorum  sequente.  Omnis  eondisci- 
pulos  ad  certamen  vocabat.  Ego,  quia  inermis  eram,  me  eontinui, 
eumque  neglexi.  Itaque  is  sibi  melior  miles  visus  est.  Haec 
omnia,  cum  decertabimus,  mihi  ob  oculos  versabuntur.^  Bene 
meminero.  Interim  Servius  sibi  magnopere  placet,  atque  gloria 
vescitur.     Sed  ea  quae  ad  artem  militarem  pertinent  non  novit. 

Veni  ab  ista  tua  urbe  ad  nostram  pugnam  videndam.*  Tii 
rus  amas,  et  tibi  nunc  otium  est. 

1  From  each  side.     In  English,  ON  each  side. 

2 Ablative  Absolute  (''with  this  done,"  "this  being  done,"  "after  doing 
this"). 

3  Will  hover  before  the  eyes  for  me  {=  before  m,y  eyes), 

^  Notice  that  ad  with  the  Gerundive  can  express  the  idea  of  Purpose. 


SUBIACO  IN  THE  SABINE  MOUNTAINS,  EAST  OF  ROME 


124  Third  Declension^  Summary 


LESSON  XLIV 

SUMMARY  OF  POINTS  OF  DIFFICULTY  IN  THE  THIRD 
DECLENSION 

'    •  {For  Be  vie  IV  and  Reference) 

318.  We  have  now  finished  the  Third  Declension  (ex- 
cept for  a  few  irregular  words),  and  may  sum  up  its  points 
of  difficulty. 

319.  Nouns  of  the  Third  Declension  are  divided  into 
Consonant  Stems,  i-Stems,  and  Mixed  Stems,  with  charac- 
teristics as  follows: 

1.  Consonant  Stems  have  the  Ablative  Singular  in  -e,  the  Geni- 
tive Plural  in  -um,  and  the  Accusative  Plural  in  -es  for  the  Mascu- 
line-Feminine, and  -a  for  the  Neuter. 

2.  Most  Masculine  or  Feminine  i-Stems,  together  with  Mixed 
Stems,  are  declined  like  Consonant  Stems  in  the  Singular  and 
i-Stems  in  the  Plural  (that  is,  with  the  Genitive  in  -ium  and  the 
Accusative  in  -Is  or  -es). 

3.  But  a  few  Masculine  or  Feminine  i-Stems  preserve  the  charac- 
teristic marks  of  the  i-Declension  in  the  Singular  also,  showing  it 
in  an  Accusative  -im  (sometimes  alongside  of  -em)  or  an  Ablative  -r 
(sometimes  alongside  of  -e),  or  in  both  cases. 

4.  Neuter  i-Stems  have  -i  in  the  Ablative  Singular,  and  an  -i-  in 
every  Plural  termination. 

320.  Adjectives  and  Participles  of  the  Third  Declen- 
sion are  likewise  divided  into  Consonant  Stems,  i-Stems, 
and  Mixed  Stems,  with  characteristics  as  follows: 

1.  Only  Comparatives  and  a  few  Adjectives  of  one  ending  are 
Consonant  Stems. 

2.  All  other  Third-Declension  Adjectives  are  i-Stems,  and  these 
have  the  -i  in  the  Ablative  Singular  f-I),  as  well  as  in  the  regular 
places  in  the  Plural. 


1-Stems  and  Mixed-Stems. —  Genders  125 

3.  Present  Participles  are  Mixed  Stems  (Abl.  Sing,  -e);  but  when 
used  as  Adjectives,  they  are  i-Stems  (Abl.  Sing.  -i).    Thus: 

Marco  praesente,  with  Mark  present  (Mark  being-present), 
but  in  praesenti  negotio,  in  the  present  business. 

HELPS  IN  DISTINGUISHING  i-STEMS  OR  MIXED  STEMS 

321.  The  only  sure  general  sign  is  -ium  in  the  Genitive 
Plural.     But  a  few  other  signs  will  be  helpful,  namely: 

322.  I-Stems  are: 

1.  All  Neuters  in  -e,  -al,  or  -ar,  with  long  penult  in  the  Genitive. 
Thus  animal,  animalis. 

2.  Masculine  or  Feminine  Nouns  in  -is  or  -es,  with  the  same 
number  of  syllables  in  the  Genitive.^  Thus  finis,  Genitive  finis, 
caedes.  Genitive  caedis. 

323.  Mixed  Stems  are: 

1.  Nouns  in  -ns,  -rs,  -rx,  -Ix,  and  some  in  -x.  Thus  mOns,  pars, 
nox. 

2.  Most  monosyllables  in  -ps  or  -bs.    Thus  urbs. 

GENDERS  IN  THE  T^HIRD  DECLENSION 

324.  A  few  general  statements  may  be  made  about 
Third-Declension  Genders: 

1.  Neuter  are: 

a.  Nouns  in  -e,  -al,  -ar.     Thus  animal. 

b.  Most  nouns  in  -en.     Thus  nomen. 

c.  Most  s-Stems.    Thus  corpus,  corporis. 

2.  Masculine  are: 

a.  Most  Mute  Stems.^    Thus  pes,  pedis. 

b.  Most  Stems  in  1  and  r.  Thus  victor,  victOris.  (But  most 
with  short  o  in  the  Genitive  are  Neuter.    Thus  rObur,  rOboris.) 

c.  N-Stems  in  -0,  -Onis  {not  in  -iO,  -iOnis).     Thus  sermO,  sermOnis. 

iBut  miles,  Genitive  militis  {longer  here)  is  a  Consonant  Stem. 

2  The  Mutes  are  consonants  making  complete  stops:  c,  k,  q,  g,  t,  d,  p,  b. 


126  Exercise 

♦ 

3.  Feminine  are: 

a.  All  Nouns  in  -io,  -iOnis,  and  most  of  those  in  -0,  -inis.  Thus 
regiO,  regiOnis,  and  multittldo,  multitodinis . 

h.  Nouns  in  -tas,  -tatis,  or  -tGs,  -tGtis.  Thus  civitas,  civitatis, 
virtQs,  virtGtis. 

c.  Nouns  in  -es  with  the  same  number  of  syllables  in  the  Geni- 
tive, the  majority  of  those  in  -is,  and  most  of  the  Mixed  Stems. 
Thus  caedes,  turris,  nox.  (But  several  Mixed  Stems  in  -ns  are 
Masculine,  as  mOns,  pOns.) 

326.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

(The  Friend's  Answer  to  Mark's  Letter) 

I.  I  have  been  in  your  state.  2.  I  know  well  the  nature  of 
the  place  where  you  are  going  to  fight-it-out.  3.  I  know  the 
little  valley  in  which  your  town  is  placed.  4.  I  know  the  lofty 
mountains  by  which  that  valley  is  hemmed  in  on  every  side. 
5.  I  have  seen  the  little  bridges,  while  ^  following-up  the  river 
to  the  place  where  ^  it  rises.  6.  I  have  wandered  in  the  forest 
on^  either  side.  7.  I  ijemember  it*  all  well.  8.  It  is  a  beautiful 
region. 

9.  When  everything  is  ready,  with^  the  kings  elected  and  the 
rules  of  war  established,  I  shall  come  to^  see  the  battle.  10. 
Meanwhile  I  shall  myself  study  the  art  of  war. 

II.  You  will  be  chosen  one  of  the  kings.  12.  The^  boy  who 
lives  on  glory  will  never  be  chosen.  13.  Under ^  your  leader- 
ship, your  side  will  conquer.  On  account  of  your  judgment,  I 
do  not  fear. 

14.  Whfen^  this  is  done,  I  shall  return  at  once  to  the  city. 
15.  I  love  the  country,  but  I  am  busy  in  school  now. 

1  Say  "  while  I  follow-up."     The  Present  is  regular  in  this  use. 

2 The  Roman  would  say  unde,  ''^from  which,"  "whence." 

3  Look  again  at  p.  123,  footnote  1. 

^Be  more  definite  in  the  Latin  (say  these  things). 

fi  Use  the  Ablative  Absolute  construction. 

6  Read  302  again.    Say  "  to  the  battle  to-be-seen." 

7  How  do  you  translate  such  a  "  the  "  as  this? 
^Say  "(with)  you  leading."    What  construction? 

9 Say  "(With)  this  done,"  "this  having  been  done." 


Irregular  Nouns  and  Adjectives 


127 


326. 


LESSON  XLV 

IRREGULAR  NOUNS  AND  ADJECTIVES 
DECLENSION  OF  vis,  force,  P. 


Norti.  Sing,  vis 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl 


\'is  (rare) 
VI (rare) 
vim 
vis 
vi 


PI.  vires 

"  virium 

"  viribus 

"  viris  or  -es 

"  vires 

"  viribus 


327.  DECLENSION  OP  plQs,  more,  AND  complnres,  a  good  many 


M.  and  F. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 


N. 

plus 
pluris 

plus 

pltire 


M.  and  F. 


N. 


SINGULAR 


Nom.  plures             pltira 
Gen.  plurium          plurium 
Dat.   pluribus 
Ace.    pluris  or  -es  plura 
Voc. 


PLURAL 

Nom.  compltires 
Gen.  complurium 
pluribus    Dat.    compluribus 


compluria  or  -a 

complurium 

compluribus 


Ace.    compluris  or  -es    compluria  or  -a 

Voc.   

t       Abl.    pluribus         pluribus    Abl.    compluribus  compluribus 

^  a.  In  the  Singular,  plQs  is  used  only  as  a  neuter  Substantive, 

often  with  a  Genitive  of  the  Whole. 

I      328.    DECLENSION  OP  duo,  two  (SIMILARLY  ambo,  both) 


Nom. 

duo 

duae 

duo 

Gen. 

duorum 

duarum 

duorum 

Dat. 

duobus 

duabus 

duobus 

Ace. 

duos  or  duo 

duas 

duo 

Voc. 
Abl. 

duobus 

duabus 

duobus 

128       Two  Accusatives, — Measure  of  Difference 

TWO  ACCUSATIVES 

329.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Marcum  regem  faciemus,  we  shall  make  Mark  king. 
Marcum  regem  eligemus,  we  shall  elect  Mark  (as)  king. 
Marcus  omnls  discipulOs  alacrls  ad  bellum  faciet,  Mark  will  make 
all  the  schoolboys  eager  for  the  war. 

a.  In  the  above  examples,  there  are,  in  each  sentence,  two  Accu- 
satives, a  Direct  Object  (thus  Marcum),  and  another  word  (thus 
regem)  standing  in  a  Predicate  relation  to  the  verb. 

b.  In  the  first  two  examples,  the  Predicate  Accusative  is  a  Noun 
(regem);  in  the  last  one,  it  is  an  Adjective  (alacrls). 

c.  Several  other  verbs  have  similar  power.   We  may  then  say  that : 

330.  Verbs  of  Making,  Choosing,  Having,  Regarding, 
Calling,  or  Showing  may  take,  in  addition  to  a  Direct 
Objects,  a  Predicate  Accusative,  This  may  he  either  a 
Noun  or  an  Adjective. 

a.  In  the  Passive  construction,  the  Direct  Object  of  the  Active 
Voice  becomes  the  Subject,  and  the  Predicate  Accusative  becomes  a 
Predicative  Nominative.    Thus : 

Marcus  rex  eligetur,  Mark  ivill  be  chosen  king. 

TWO  NEW  CONSTRUCTIONS  ARISING  OUT  OP  THE 
ABLATIVE  OF  MEANS 

ABLATIVE  OF  THE  MEASURE  OF  DIFFERENCE 

331.  Specimen  Sentences: 

LQcius  capite  altior  est  quam  Cornelius,  Lucius  is  taller  by  a  head 

than  Cornelius. 
Ltlcius  multo  altior  est  quam  Cornelius,  Lucius  is  taller  by  much 
{  =  much  taller)  than  Cornelius, 
a.  In  these  sentences,  the  Ablative  is  a  rough  expression  of 
Means, —  that  is,  it  expresses  that  by  u'hich  the  things  compared 
differ  (just  as  English  "by"  does  in  "taller  by  a  head").    But  that 
by  which  the  things  compired  differ  is  the  measure  of  the  difference. 
We  may  accordingly  lay  down  the  rule  that: 

332.  The  Measure  of  Difference  is  expressed  by  the 
Ablative. 


Ablative  with  utor,  fruor,  fungor,  potior,  and  vescor     129 

ABLATIVE  WITH  Otor,  fruor,  fungor,  potior,  AND  vescor 

333.  Several  deponent  verbs  take  an  Ablative  which 
was  originally  one  of  Means. 

a.  Thus,  as  we  saw  in  312  and  316,  vescor  originally  meant  feed 
oneself  with,  the  thing  with  which  the  feeding  was  done  being 
expressed  by  the  Ablative  of  Means.  But  the  practical  meaning  of 
feed  oneself  with  is  eat.  Hence  in  time  the  Ablative  must  have 
seenied  to  express  simply  the  Direct  Object. 

The  same  is  true  oliruor, projit-oneself -by,  i.  e.,  enjoy;  potior, 
make  oneself  powerful  by,  i.  e.,  gain  possession  of,  get;  Gtor,  help 
oneself  with,  i.  e.,  use;  fungor,  busy  oneself  with,  i.  e.,  perform. 
Hence  we  may  lay  down  the  rule  that: 

334.  Utor,  fruor,  fungor,  potior,  and  vescor  take  their 
Object  in  the  Ablative. 

Scnto  et  gladio  Gtor,  I  use  a  shield  and  a  sword, 
Hostes  oppido  potiuntur,  the  enemy  get-possession-of  the  town, 
a.  Utor  may  take  a  Second  Ablative,  in  Predicate  relation. 
Marco  amicO  ntor,  I  use  Mark  (as)  a  friend. 

335.  VOCABULARY 

ambo    (Declension    328),    both.  officium,-iy'N.  2,  office,  duty. 

commode   (as    before),  conveni-  ops,  opis,  F.  3,  help;  in  PI.,  re- 

ently,  properly,  Compar.  com-  sources,  means. 

modius,Superl.commodissime.  pins    (327),  Gen.   plGris,    more. 

complQres  (327),  a  good  many.  Compar.  of  multum,  much. 

diligens,  -ens.  Gen.  -entis,  dili-  potens,-ens.  Gen.  potentis,  hav- 

gent,       Compar.     dlligentior,  ing  power,  influential.    Com- 

Superl.  diligentissimus.  par.  potentior,   Superl.  poten- 

dlligenter ,  Adv., diligently ,  Com-  tissimus. 

par.   dlligentius,  Superl.   dlli-  potestas,  -atis,  F.  3,  power,  con- 

gentissime.  trol,  opportunity. 

duo  (328),  ttvo.  potior,   potiri,    potitus  sum,    4, 

fruor,frui,fractus  sum,  3,  pro^^  gain  possession-of,  get.    (Cf. 

by,  enjoy.  potens.) 

fungor,    fungi,    functus   sum,  3,  regnum,-iy'N.  2,  kingship,  king- 
perform,  discharge.  dom. 

obsto,  obstare,  obstiti,  obstatG-  Citor,  Dtr,  nsus  sum,  3,  use. 

rus,l  (ob+sto,  stand  against),  vis,  vis,  F.  ^,  force,  violence;  PL 

oppose,  prevent.    Takes  Dat.  vlreSyVlviumj  strength. 


130  Exercises 

336.  READING  MATTER 

1.  Marcus  ex  consuetudine  sua  totam  regionem  dlligenter  ^  iam 
exploravit.  Vallem,  montis,  flumen,  pontis,  silvas  novit.  Haec 
omnia  omnes  nunc  explorabimus.  Marco  duce  commode  ^  utemur. 
Nemo  n5s  commodius^  aut  diligentius  ducet. 

2.  Qui  vestrumregn5potientur?  (Ans.)  Marcum  regem  faci- 
emus.  Nem5  ei  obstabit.  (First  speaker)  Nonne  duo  ex  v5bis 
apti  sunt  ad  vos  ducendos?  N5nne  Liicius  quoque  potens  est? 
(Ans.)  Ita;  ambo  potentes  sunt;  sed  Marcus non  solum potentior^ 
est  quam  Lucius,  sed  omnium  est  potentissimus.  Ille  plus  virium 
corporis  quam  Lucius  non  habet,  sed  in  omnibus  officiis  servan- 
dis  multo  diligentior  est.  Itaque  compliires  potestati  fa  vent 
Liici,  fere  omnes  Marci.  Huius  consilio  et  ope  saepe  iam  fructi 
sumus.  Hie  nunc,  omnibus  regni  officiis  diligentissime^  fungens, 
nos  diligentissimos^  faciet  milites. 

337.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  Do  you  know  this  region?  2.  (Ans.)  Yes.  I  have  explored 
it  with  Mark,  whom  I  used  as  a  guide.  3.  (First  speaker)  So 
you  have  profited-by  Mark's  diligence.  4.  (Ans.)  Yes,  he  knows 
everything;  no  one  discharges  his  duties  more  diligently  or 
more  properly.  5.  He  even  makes  all  his  friends  more  diligent. 
No  one  has  more  (of )  power  among  the  boys. 

6.  Who  are  the  two  most  influential  boys  of  the  school?  7. 
(Ans.)  Mark  and  Lucius  are  (by)  much  the  most  influential.  8. 
A-good-many  oppose  Mark,  but  more  favor  him.  9.  Lucius  will 
also  get  a  kingship.  10.  Both  are  strong  in  body.  But  Mark 
will  conquer  Lucius;  for  he  will  fight  not  only  with  strength  of 
body  but  with  judgment.     11.  He  will  use  all  his  resources. 

1  Notice  how  Adverbs  are  made, — from  Adjectives  of  the  First  and  Second 
Declension,  in  -e  (thus  certus,  certe;  aeger,  aegre),  from  Adjectiyes  of  the 
Third  Declension,  in  -ter  (diligens,  dlligenter). 

2  Notice  also  how  you  compare, —  Adjectives  in  -ior,  -issimus,  and  Adverbs 
in  -ius,  -issime. 

^Most  diligently  =  very  diligently.    The  Superlative  often  means  very. 


Suhjunctive  Mood 


131 


LESSON   XLVI  •    . 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD 

338.  Beside  the  Indicative  and  Imperative  Moods,  which 
we  have  been  using  above,  Latin  has  another  Mood,  called 
the  Subjunctive.  These  three  make  up  what  are  called 
the  Finite  Moods. 


339. 

THE  PKESENT  SUBJUNCTIVE 

CONJ. 

I 

II 

III 

IV 

ACTIVE 

^ 

1st  Sing 

.  amem 

moneam 

tegam 

capiam 

audiam 

2d    " 

ames 

moneas 

tegas 

capias 

audias 

3d    " 

amet 

moneat 

tegat 

capiat 

audiat 

1st  PL 

am^mus 

moneamus 

tegamus 

capiarnus 

audiamus 

2d    " 

ametis 

moneatis 

tegatis 

capiatis 

audiatis 

3d    " 

ament 

moneant 

tegant 

capiant 

audiant 

PASSIVE 

1st  Sing 

.  amer 

monear 

tegar 

capiar 

audiar 

2d    " 

ameris 

monearis 

tegaris 

capiaris 

audiaris 

or -re 

or -re 

or -re 

or  -re 

or -re 

3d    " 

ametur 

moneatur 

tegatur 

capiatur 

audiatur 

1st  PL 

amemur 

moneamur 

tegamur 

capiamur 

audiamur 

2d    " 

amemini 

moneamini 

tegamini 

capiamini 

audiaminl 

3d    " 

amentur 

moneantur 

tegantur . 

capiantur 

audiantur 

a.  In  the  formation  of  the  Present  Subjunctive,  the  four  Conju- 
gations divide  after  the  first,  the  mood-sign  being  -e-  in  the  First 
Conjugation,  and  -a-  in  the  other  three  (with  shortening  in  the  regu- 
lar places;  100,  2). 

b.  The  Passive  corresponds  to  the  Active,  just  as  in  the  Indica- 
tive. 

340.  The   Present  Subjunctive  of  the  Irregular  Verb 

sum  is: 

'  1st  Sing,  sim  1st  PL  simus 

2d      "  SIS  2d    "  sitis 

3d      "  sit  3d    »  sint 


132     Origin  and  Meanings  of  the  Latin  Subjunctive 

ORIGIN  AND  MEANINGS  OP  THE  LATIN  SUBJUNCTIVE 

341.  The  Latin  Subjunctive  is  a  mixed  mood,  just  as 
the  Latin  Ablative  is  a  mixed  case.  It  is  made  up  of  the 
remains  of  tioo  moods  which  originally  were  entirely  dis- 
tinct, in  form  as  well  as  in  meaning:  an  old  Subjunctive, 
and  an  old  Optative.  The  Latin  Mood  takes  its  name 
from  the  first. 

a.  Just  as  the  Ablative  Case  has  inherited  the  powers  of  the 
cases  that  compose  it,  though  bearing  the  name  of  only  one  of  them, 
BO  the  Subjunctive  Mood  has  inherited  the  powers  of  the  moods  that 
compose  it,  though  bearing  the  name  of  only  one  of  them. 

342.  The  Latin  Subjunctive  has  a  variety  of  forces. 
We  will  begin  with  those  that  were  inherited  from  the 
old  Subjunctive. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  USES  INHERITED  FROM  THE  OLD 
SUBJUNCTIVE 

343.  The  old  Subjunctive  probably  originally  expressed 
Will,  and  later  gained  the  power  of  expressing  Anticipa- 
tion.    Both  forces  will  be  seen  in  the  following: 

Priusquam  pugnemus,  art!  militaristudeamus,  before  we  fight  (Anti- 
cipation), let  us  study  the  art  of  war  (Will). 

a.  The  fighting  (pugnemus)  is  here  expressed  as  merely  antici- 
pated, expected,  looked  forward  to,  counted  upon;  while  the  study- 
ing (studeamus)  is  expressed  as  wanted,  willed,  urged,  intended. 

b.  In  place  of  saying  Subjunctive  of  Will  and  Subjunctive  of 
Anticipation,  it  is  convenient  to  use  the  shorter  phrases  Volitive 
Subjunctive  (compare  the  English  word  "volition"),  and  Anticipa- 
tory Subjunctive  (compare  English  "anticipate"  and  "anticipation"). 

c.  Notice  that  the  Volitive  Subjunctive  is  close  to  the  Impera- 
tive in  meaning,  the  Anticipatory  close  to  the  Future  Indicative. 

d.  The  Volitive  Subjunctive  is  generally  best  translated  by  the 
emphatic  auxiliary  will  of  the  first  person  and  shall  of  the  second 
and  third  (/  will,  you  shall,  he  shall),  or  by  let  {let  me,  let  him,  etc.), 
or  by  is  to,  are  to,  etc.  All  these  express  that  which  the  speaker 
WANTS,  and  means  to  have. — The  Anticipatory  Subjunctive  is 
best  tranlated  by  shall  in  all  persons. 


Exercise  133 

344.  The  negative  for  the  Volitive  Subjunctive  is  ne; 
for  the  Anticipatory,  non. 

345.  VOCABULARY 

cautus,  -a,  -um,  cautious.  potius,  Adv.,  preferably,  rather. 

cOnfirmO,   -are,    -avi,    -atum,   1,  prior,  prius,  Compar.  Adj.,  for- 

strengtJien,  establish.  mer,  first;  in  front. 

decern,  indeclinable  Adj.,  ten.  prius,  Compar.  Adv.  (cf.  prior), 
deliberO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  de-         before,  first,  sooner. 

liberate.  prius  quam,  or  priusquam,  Conj., 
iungO,  iungere,  iGnxI,  itinctum,  3,         sooner  than,  before. 

join.  suadeO,suadere,suasi,  suasum,2, 
adiungo,  -iungere,  -iQnxT,  -idnc-         advise,  urge.    Takes  Dat.,  be- 

tum,  3  (ad  +  iungo),  yom  (^o).  cause  originally  meant   make 

ne.  Adv.,  not.  agreeable  to.    (Cf.  suavis.) 

optimus,  -a,  -um,  best.    Superl.  suavis,     -e,     siceet,     agreeable. 

Adj.  for  bonus,  good.  Word  of  Quality,  taking  Dat. 

optime,   in  the  best  way,  best,  tres,  tria.  Gen.  triumfthree. 

Superl.  Adv.  for  bene y  well.  tertius,  -a,  -um,  third. 

346.  READING  MATTER 

(Different  boys  want  different  things  and  propose  them) 
Nunc  reges  duos  eligamus.  (Second  boy)  Quos  eligamus?^ 
(First  boy)  Marcus  certe  prior  eligetur.  Turn  Liicium  eligamus. 
(A  third)  Priusquam  reges  omnin5  eligamus,  leges  pugnae  con- 
stituamus.  Id  nunc  commodius  faciemus.  (A  fourth)  Minime. 
Id  nunc  ne  faciamus.  Eligamus  potius  reges  duos.  His  duo- 
bus  tertium  adiungamus  puerum,  tribusque  sic  electis  omnem 
demus  potestatem  legum  constituendarum.  Potentissimi  et 
optimT  elect!  erunt.  Illi  cauti  erunt,  atque  optime  omnia  admi- 
nistrabunt.  (A  fifth)  Ego  aliter  sentid.  Ambobus,  qui  regnis 
potiti  erunt,  potestas  suavis  erit.  Officio  suo  fruentur,  non  fun- 
gentur.  Vires  suas  iungent,  atque  omnibus  opibus  Utentur  ad 
illam  potestatem  confirmandam.  Etiam  plus  cupient  habere 
potestatis.  Hoc  ego  vobis  potius  suadeo:  Ex  tot  a  schola  pueros 
eligamus  decem,  qui^  leges  dent.  Nam  decem  diligentius  deli- 
berabunt  quam  aut  duo  aut  complures. 

1  Whom  shall  we  choose^       ^  .  .  .  .  who  shall  give  us  rules  (Purpose). 


134     Volitive  and  Anticipatory  Subjunctive  Uses 


LESSON  XLVII 

VARIOUS  USES  THAT  MAY  BE  MADE  OF  THE  SUB- 
JUNCTIVE OF  WILL  AND  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE 
OF  ANTICIPATION 

347.  The  feeling  of  Will  may  of  coarse  exist  in  different 
degrees  of  intensity,  varying  from  a  mere  proposal  or 
suggestion/  as  in  "how  let  us  choose  two  kings,"  with 
which  our  last  Reading  Matter  began,  to  a  strong  urgency, 
or  insistency,  ending  even  in  an  absolute  command  or 
prohibition  (i.  e.,  a  command  not  to  do  a  thing). 

348.  In  using  the  Volitive  Subjunctive  in  any  of  these 
ways  you  are  telling  somebody  what  you  want  [declaring 
your  will). 

349.  But  you  may  of  course,  on  the  other  hand,  ask 
yourself  what  you  want,  or  ask  somebody  else  what  he 
wants.  That  is,  you  may  deliberate  with  yourself,  or 
you  may  ask  another  for  instructions.  Such  questions 
may  best  be  called  Questions  of  the  Will,  or  Volitive 
Questions,^ 

a.  Thus  you  may  say  to  yourself,  quid  faciam?  what  shall  I  do  9 
or  you  may  ask  another  person,  quid  faciam?  what  shall  I  do 9 

b.  The  negative  for  all  questions  in  Latin,  volitive  as  well  as  any 
other,  is  nOn.  Thus  quid  faciam,  quid  nOn  faciam?  what  shall  I  do, 
what  shall  I  not  do  9 

350.  Thus  far,  we  have  been  speaking  of  independent 
sentences.  But  we  may  also,  of  course,  do  these  same 
things  in  dependent  clauses, — telling  what  we  or  some- 
body else  wants,  or  asking  what  we  or  somebody  else 
wants.  - 

1  Often  called  "  Exhortation." 

20ften  called  "Deliberative  Questions." 


Volitive  and  Anticipatory  Subjunctive  Uses     135 

351.  Thus,  as  we  have  already  seen  in.  the  last  Reading 

Matter,  we  can  put  the  act  wanted  into  a  dependent  clause 

introduced  by  a  relative,  and  can  thereby  express  our  Plan 

or  Purpose,  as  in  pueros  eligamus  decern,  qui  leges  dent 

let  us  select  ten  hoys,  who  shall  give  us  rules  (i.  e.,  for 

the  purpose  of  giving  us  rules).     And  we  shall  presently 

find  in  other  Reading  Matter  that  we  may  do  the  same 

thing   by  a  clause  introduced  by  ut,   in  which  way,  by 

which,  as  in  arti  militari  studeamus,  ut  commode  pugnemus, 

let  us  study  the  art  of  war,  by  which  (i.  e.,  by  which 

studying)  let  us  fight  properly  (in  English,  in  order  that 

we  may  fight  properly,  or  that  we  may  fight  properly).^ 

Or,  if  a  comparative  is  used,  we  may  express  our  purpose 

by  a  clause  introduced  by  quo  (Ablative,  expressing  both 

Means  and  the  Measure  of  Difference),  as  in  arti  militari 

studeamus,  quo  commodius  pugnemus,  let  us  study  the  art 

of  war,  by  which  means  {^and  by  which  amount)  let  us  fight 

more  properly  (in  English,  in  order  that  we  may  fight 

more  properly)}     Or,  if  we  don't  want  the  act  to  take 

place,  we  may  express  our  purpose  by  a  clause,  introduced 

by  ne,  not,  as  in  arti  militari  studeamus,  ne  male  pugnemus, 

let  us  study  the  art  of  war,  let  us  not  fight  badly  (in 

English,^  that  we  may  not  fight  badly,  or  lest  we  fight 

badly). 

a.  Notice  that  ut  a  ad  ne  make  a  pair  of  natural  opposites,  ut 
introducing  an  act  wanted,  and  ne  an  act  not  wanted. 

352.  Or,  again,  we  may  attach  the  act  wanted  or  not 
wanted  (1)  to  another  verb,  which  in  itself  expresses  or 
suggests  wanting,  as  in  suadeo  exspectetis   (or  ut  exspec- 

1  The  English  expression  has  arisen  from  a  different  mood-feeling  from 
that  of  the  Latin.  But  of  course,  in  our  final  translating,  it  is  the  English 
"way  that  we  must  use. 


136     Volitive  and  Anticipatory  Subjunctive  Uses 

tetis)/  I  advise  that  you  wait,  or  suadeo  ne  exspectetis,  I 
advise  that  you  do  not  wait  {=1  advise  you  not  to  wait)  ; 
or  (2)  to  a  verb  that  expresses  not  wanting  (a  verb  of 
hindrance,  prevention,  or  check).  In  the  latter  case  we 
must  of  course  use  a  negative.  The  negatives  found  are 
ne,  quominus,^  and  quin,^  that  not. 

ObstO  ne  pugnetis,  /  oppose  your  fighting  (originally,  /  oppose: 
you  shall  not  fight). 

ObstO  quOminus  pugnetis,  I  oppose  your  fighting  (originally,  lop- 
pose:  by  which  you  shall  fight  the  less). 

NOn  obstO  quin  pugnetis,  I  do  not  oppose  your  fighting.* 

a.  This  last  connective,  quIn,  is  used  only  after  a  negative,  ex- 
pressed or  implied  (here  nOn). 

363.  Or,  again,  we  may  attach  the  expression  of  what  we 
want  or  do  not  want  to  a  verb  or  phrase  of  fear  or  anxiety, 
as  in  timeo  ut^  cauti  sint,  I  am  afraid:  I  want  them  to  he 
cautious  (in  English,  I  am  afraid  that  they  MAY  NOT 
be  cautious),  or  timeo  ne  vulnerentur,  I  am  afraid:  I  do 
not  want  them  to  be  wounded  (in  English,  I  am  afraid 
they  MAY  be  wounded ) .  Such  clauses  are  conveniently 
called  Clauses  of  Fear  or  Anxiety. 

a.  These  last  clauses,  after  verbs  of  Wanting,  Hindering,  Fearing 
and  the  like,  352,  353,  since  they  stand  in  a  sort  of  case-relation  to 
the  main  verb,  are  called  Substantive  Clauses. 

1  There  is  no  connective  in  this  use  originally.  None  was  needed  for  the 
positive  idea.  The  unnecessary  ut  has  come  in,  as  the  natural  opposite  of 
ne  (351,  a),  from  the  purpose  clause.  In  this  use,  we  may  call  it  formal  ut. 
In  most  constructions  of  the  kind  shown,  formal  ut  may  be  used  or  not,  as 
the  speaker  pleases.     We  will  indicate  this  by  parentheses. 

2Quominus  =  quo  +  minus,  and  meant  originally  by  which  the  less. 

^Quin  originally  meant  by  which  ....  not.  It  is  made  up  of  a  relative 
adverb  qui,  by  which,  and  -ne,  not  (with  loss  of  the  final  e). 

^Non  here  modifies  the  whole  combination  of  the  main  verb. and  dependent 
clause.     The  meaning  is  I  do  NOT — oppose-by- which-you-shall-not-fight. 

^This  ut  is  likewise  purely /orma?,  having  come  in  as  the  opposite  of  ne. 


VolUive  and  Anticipatory  Subjunctive  Uses     137 

354.  The  dependent  clauses  which  we  have  been  look- 
ing at  tell  what  is  wanted  or  not  wanted.  But  we  may  of 
course  also  hang  a  question  of  what  is  wanted  or  not 
wanted  upon  some  verb  expressing  or  suggesting  the  idea 
of  a  question,  as  in  deliberamus  quos  eligamus,  we  are 
deliberating  whom  we  shall  choose   (or,  whom  to  choose), 

356.  You  will  soon  get  to  recognize  easily,  as  you  read, 
what  these  various  Subjunctive  sentences  or  clauses  do 
in  particular.  The  important  thing,  for  the  present,  is  to 
feel  the  volitive  force  common  to  them  all  (the  idea  of 
wariting  something,  expecting  something),  and  to  dis- 
tinguish it  from  the  anticipatory  force  (the  force  of  merely 
looking  forward  to  something) ,  which  you  will  find  in 
other  examples.  It  will  help  you,  too,  if  you  will  con- 
stantly keep  in  mind  that,  in  dependent  clauses,  the  posi- 
tive conjunction  ut  is  used  if  the  act  is  wanted  (or  quo, 
if  a  comparative  follows),  and  one  of  the  negative  con- 
junctions, ne,  quominus,  or  quin,  if  the  act  is  not  wanted. 

356.  The  Anticipatory  Subjunctive  has  not  so  large  a 
range  as  the  Volitive.  It  had  ceased  to  be  used  in  inde- 
pendent sentences  (and  also  in  most  dependent  clauses), 
before  the  Romans  began  to  write  books,  being  driven  out 
by  the  Future  Indicative.  It  remained,  however,  in 
steady  use  in  a  few  kinds  of  dependent  clauses,  especially 
those  introduced  by  conjunctions  meaning  ''before"  or 
"until,"  which  naturally  (if  the  act  has  not  yet  taken  place) 
suggest  the  idea  of  looking  forward  (Anticipation). 

357;^^  ^he  next  two  Lessons  are  for  practice  in  getting  the  feeling 
of  the  Volitive  Subjunctive  and  the  Anticipatory  Subjunctive  as  you 
read  your  Latin,  and  of  recognizing  the  corresponding  ideas  where 
they  occur  in  your  English  exercises. 


138  Exercise 


LESSON  XLVIII 

358.  VOCABULARY 

celeriter,  Adv.,  swiftly,  quickly.  pervenio,    -venire,    -veni,    -ven- 

dum (same  word  as  before ),t<;/ii7e;  turn,  4  (per   +  venio,    come 

until.  through),  arrive. 

fortasse,  Adv.,  perhaps.  pilum,  -I,  N.  2,  javelin.    A  heavy 

iter,   itineris,  N.   3,  way,  road;  missile,  about  six  feet  long. 

journey ;  march.  proficlscor,  proficlsci,  profectus 

mattlrus,  -a,  -um,  ripe.  sum,  3  (make  off),  set-  out,  de- 

mattlrO,    -are,    -avi,     -atum,    1,  part. 

make     ripe;      hasten,     make  qu(^  y  by  ichich,in  order  that.  Con]. 

haste.                                       '  used  with  Comparatives, 

melius.  Adv.,  better;  cf.  melior.  ut  or  utl,  Conj.,  in  which  way, 

mora,  -ae,  F.  1,  delay.  as;  whereby,   in    order   that; 

ne.  Adv.,  not;  as  Conj.,  that  not,  that;  so  that. 

lest.  saltern.  Adv.,  at  least. 

369.  READING  MATTER 

(Remember  that  every  Subjunctive  you  meet  for  the  present  will  express 
either  Will  or  Anticipation.) 

1.  (A  boy  says)  Pugnemus  priusquam  patres  nostri  hunc  ludum 
prohibeant.  Saltern  mox  pugnemus,  ut  bellum  celeriter  conficia- 
tur.  Quid  obstat?  Hac  mora  defatigatus  sum.  (Another  says) 
Minime.  Cum  pugnaverimus,  bellum,  ita  ut  tu  dieis,^  confec- 
tum  erit.  At  hie  ludus  optimus  inter  omnis  ludos  est.  Ego 
suade5  potius  exspeetemus^  dum^  consilia  nostra  matura  sint. 
Id  optimum  est.  Saltem  exspectemus  dum  amicus  Marci  per- 
veniat;  qui  ex  urbe  maturat  proficisci,  atque  etiam  nunc  fortasse 
in  itinere  est. 

Interim  Marco  et  Lucio  potestas  detur  legum  constituen- 
darum.      Haec  iis   sua  vis   erit,  atque  ambo   diligentissime  et 

mt  with  Indicative  means  as.  Ita  ut  dicis  means,  so  as  you  say = 
just  as  you  say. 

2  /  advise  rather  let  us  wait,  =  I  advise  that  we  wait. 

3  Wait  until  ....  What  follows  must  be  an  act  anticipated. 


Exercises  139 

optime  deliberabunt.  Vel  his  du5bus  tertius  adiungatur.  Hi 
dum  deliberabunt,  nos  cotidie  exerceamur,  quo^  commodius 
armis  iitamur,  utque  vires  nostrae  confirmentur.  Sic  multo 
melius  pugnabimus. 

2.  (A  boy,  to  his  father)  Nonniilli  pueri  pila  compliiria 
fecerunt.  (The  father)  Ego  suadeo,  pilis  ne^  xitamini.  Peri- 
culosa  sunt. 

360.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  (A  boy  reports  to  the  teacher)  Some  of  the  boys  are  tired- 
out  with  the  delay,  and  wish  to  finish  the  war  quickly.  2.  Isn't 
this  best?  What  prevents?  3.  (Ans.)  I  advise  that  they  at 
least  wait  until  Mark's  friend  shall  arrive.  4.  Perhaps  he  has 
already  set  out  from  the  city  and  is  on  the  way.  5.  Meanwhile 
let  them  drilP  every -day,  in -order- that  *  they  may  (say  "shall") 
fight  more  properly,  and  that*  they  may  (say  ''shall")  get^  into 
condition.^    6.  This  will  be  much  better. 

7.  (A  father  says)  I  give^  you  the  same  advice.  The  plans 
for  (say  "of")  the  fight  are  not  mature.  8.  Let  two  boys  be 
elected,  who  shall  ^  make-haste  to  establish  the  rules.  9.  Or  let 
these  two  join  a  third  boy  to  themselves,  to  assist  ^  them. 

10.  ShalP  the  boys ^  use  javelins?  11.  (Ans.)  I  advise  them 
not  to  use  javelins. ^^ 

^  In  order' that  ....  the  more  properly.    Why  is  quo  used? 

^  I  advise  donH  use  .  .  .  .  ,    /  advise  you  not  to  use  .... 

3  Use  the  reflexive  voice. 

^  Purpose.    Do  you  want  quo  or  ut  here?    What  decides  the  question? 

sSay  "establish  (cdnfirmo)  their  strength." 

6  Say  "I  advise  the  same  (thing)  to  you." 

7  You  see  that  this  also  expresses  purpose.  Notice  carefully  that  purpose 
closely  associated  with  a  person  will  be  expressed  by  a  qui-clause,  with  an 
act  by  a  qu5-  or  ut-clause  (as  in  the  English  sentence  5  above). 

8  This  expresses  the  purpose  of  appointing  the  third  boy.  Say  therefore 
*'who  shall  assist."  You  must  never  use  the  Jjaiin  Infinitive  to  express 
purpose. 

^Called  a  " Deliberative  Question."  It  is,  as  you  see,  merely  a  Question 
of  the  Will  (it  asks  what  the  person  spoken  to  wants  done) ;  and  this  name, 
or  the  name  Volitive  Question^  would  be  simpler  and  better. 

10 Say  "I  advise  them  they  shall  not  use  javelins." 


140  Exercise 


LESSON  XLIX 

361.  VOCABULARY 

caedO,caedere,cecidi,  caesum,3,  opto,  -are,  -avl,  -atum,  1,  wish, 

cutjkill.  (Cf.caedes, slaughter.)  hope. 

curro,  currere,  cucurri,  cursum,  Oro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  beg,  en- 

3,  run.  treat. 

dOnec,  Conj.,  until  (same  mean-  periculosior,  more  dangerous. 

ing  as  dum).  Compar.  of  pericuIOsus,  dan- 

frOns,  frontis,  -ium,  F.  3,  fore-  gerous. 

head ;  front.  prOnDntio,  -are,  -avl,  -atum,  1  (pro 
^vsiViSy^^^  heavy ;  serious.  -^nxmtid),  proclaim.    ' 

Insequor,  -sequT,  -secGtus  sum,  puto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  think. 

3  (in +  sequor,  follow  against),  quin,  Conj.,  by  which  not,  that 

follow  up,  pursue.  not, 

mitto,  mittere,  misi,  missum,  3,  quOminus,   Conj.,  by  which  the 

send.  less,  that  not. 

ntlntius,  -i,  M.  2,  messenger;  mes-  secundum,  along.    Prep.,  taking 

sage.    (Cf.  nOntiO.)    ,  Ace.  of  Space-Relation. 

362.  READING  MATTER 

(The  Anxious  Father) 

1.  Timed  ne  puerT,  temere  pugnantes,  vulnerentur.  Aliud 
quoque  timeo.  Nonne  aliqui,  secundum  flumen  current es  aut 
alios  insequentes,  iji  id  cadent?  Te  oro,  me  adiuva.  Pronunti- 
emus  ne  omnmd  pugnent  pueri.  (Ans.)  Minime.  Tu,  puto, 
filio  tuo  times.  Nihil  obstat  quin'  tu  eum  a  pugna  prohibeas. 
Meum  n5n  prohibebo. 

2.  Pueri  nunc  deliberant,  pilisne''^  iitantur.  Hoc  si  facient, 
timeo  ne  in  ora  vulnerentur.  Gladii  etiam  ex  r5bore  facti  facile 
f routes  aut  ocul5s  aut  ora  caedent.  (Another  father)  De  gladiis 
n5n  timeo;  nam  pueri  hi^  capita  non  petent.  Sed  certe  eis 
imperemus  pilis^  ne  utantur;  idqure  statim  pronuntiemus.     Pila 

1  Why  does  quin  have  to  be  used  here? 

2  Pilisne  =  pilis  plus  interrogative  -ne.    Translate  by  whether. 
8  What  is  the  force  of  the  position? 


Exercises  141 

gravia  sunt,  ac  multo  periculosi5ra  quam  gladii.  Optimum  est 
(ut)  ad  pueros  sine  mora  nuntium  mittamus,  qui  haec  niititiet. 
(First  speaker)  Timed  ut  hie  nuntius  iis  plaeeat. 

3.  Nondum,  cred5,  Marci  amicus  ille  ab  urbe  profectus  est. 
Nos  exspectemus  donee  (or  dum)  perveniat?  (Ans.)  Ab  urbe, 
credo,  iam  proficiscJ  maturayit,  moxque  ad  nos  perveniet.  (First 
speaker)  Id  opto. 

363.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  Sextus  will  be  a  bad  soldier.  He  cries  for  nothing.^  2. 
(Another)  His  father  fears  that  Sextus'  forehead  or  eyes  or 
mouth  may  be  cut.  3.  He  also  fears  that,  pursuing  others 
swiftly  and  rashly  along  the  river,  he  may  fall  into  it.  4.  He  • 
will  order  him^  not  to  fight.  5.  (First  speaker)  I  hope  so.  I  beg 
you,  advise  him  to  do^  this. 

6.  Many  fathers  oppose  our  using  javelins.  7.  I'm  afraid  that 
they  may  send  a  messenger  to  announce*  this.  8.  (Another  boy) 
I  myself  am  afraid  that  in  the  fight  we  may  not  be  cautious.  9. 
Javelins  are  heavy,  and  will  easily  hurt  faces.  10.  It  is  best  that 
we  shall  not  use  them.  11.  (Another)  /  think  so,  too.  Let  us 
proclaim  this  at  once.     12.  What^  prevents  us  from  doing  it? 

1  Say  "  without  any  cause." 

2  Say  "  that  he  fight  not." 

3  Of  course  you  must  use  a  Conjunction  and  Finite  Verb,  not  an  Infinitive. 

4  Evidently  Purpose.    Do  you  want  connective  qui,  ut,  or  quo,  and  why? 
5 Implies  "nothing  prevents."    What  Conjunction,  then? 


GLADIATORS'  HELMETS  FROM  POMPEII 


142  Uses  Inherited  from  the  Old  Optative 

LESSON  L 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  (Continued) 

USES  INHERITED  FROM  THE  OLD  OPTATIVE 

364.  We  have  learned  to  recognize  the  two  forces  inher- 
'  ited  by  the  Latin  Subjunctive  from  the  old  Subjunctive, 

and  are  ready  to  learn  those  that  were  inherited  from  the 
old  Optative.  . 

365.  The  Optative  probably  expressed  Wish  or  Desire 
originally,  and  gained  at  a  later  time  the  other  powers  which 
we  find  it  to  possess,  namely  those  of  Obligation  or  Propri- 
ety, Natural  Likelihood,  Possibility,  and  Mental  Certainty 
in  an  imagined  case. 

a.  Utinam,  would  that,  is  often  added  to  the  expression  of  a  Wish. 

366.  Examples  of  the  Leading  Forces  inherited  from 
the  Old  Optative: 

Utinam  filii  mei  bene  studeant,  would  that  my  sons  would  study 
well!    (Wish). 

A  legibus  nOn  discedamus,  we  should  not  depart  from  the  rules 
(ObUgation  or  Propriety). 

Cnr  nOn  facile  vincamus?  why  shouldn^t  we  win  easily  9  i.  e.,  we  are 
likely  to  win  easily  (Natural  Likelihood). 

Pueros  cotldie  se  exercentes  videas,  you  can  see  the  boys  drilling 
every  day  (Possibility). 

Marco  duce  certe  vincamus,  with  Mark  as  leader  we  should  cer- 
tainly win  (Mental  Ce»tainty). 
a.  These  forces  may  appear  in  dependent  clauses  as  well.    Thus: 

NQlla  causa  est  cOr  a  legibus  discedamus,  there  is  no  reason  why 
we  shoidd  depart  from  the  rules.  (Dependent  Clause  of  Obligation 
or  Propriety.  This  is  simply  a  longer  way  of  saying  we  should  not 
depart  from  the  rules.) 

Nulla  causa  est  car  nOn  facile  vincamus,  there  is  no  reason  why 
we  shouldn't  win  easily.  (Dependent  Clause  of  Natural  Likelihood. 
This  is  only  a  longer  way  of  saying  loe  are  likely  to  win  easily.) 


^Inherited  Forces  of  the  Latin  Subjunctive      143 

367.  We  may  now  put  together,  in  the  form  of  a  table, 
what  we  have  learned  about  the  leading  powers  which  the 
mixed  mood  called  the  Subjunctive  inherited  from  the  two 
originally  separate  moods  of  which  it  is  made  up.  And 
we  may  conveniently  add  a  working  name  for  each  power, 
as  follows: 

368.  The  Latin  Subjunctive  inherited  the  power  of 
expressing: 

I.  Will  {Volitive  Subjunctive) 
II.  Anticipation  {Anticipatory  Subjunctive) 

III.  V^i^h.  {Optative^  Subjunctive) 

IV.  Obligation  or  Propriety  {Subjunctive  of  Obligation  or 
Propriety) 

V.  Natural  Likelihood  {Subjunctive  of  Natural  Likelihood) 
VI.  Possibility  {Potential  Subjunctive) 
VII.  Mental  Certainty  {Subjunctive  of  Mental  Certainty) 

'ft.  In  the  independent  sentence,  the  mood-feeling  is  always  that 
of  the  speaker  himself.  In  the  dependent  clause,  it  may  be  either 
that  of  the  speaker  or  that  of  the  subject  (or  agent)  of  the  main  act. 
Thus  in  pugnemus,  let  us  fight,  it  is  J,  the  speaker,  that  want  the 
fighting  to  be  done;  but  in  dux  imperat  ut  pugnemus,  the  general 
orders  that  we  fight,  it  is  the  general  that  wants  it. 

b.  The  negative  for  Will  and  Wish  is  ne,  for  all  other  mood-forces 
nOn.     But  remember  that  for  all  questions  the  negative  is  nOn. 

c.  We  may  now  define  the  moods  as  expressions  of  Attitudes  of 
Mind,  i.e.,  of  ways  of  looking  at  an  act.  Thus  (Subjunctive)  the 
wanting  attitude,  the  expecting  attitude,  the  wishing  attitude,  etc. 
The  Indicative  looks  at  an  act  as  a  fact. 

1  From  opto,  meaning  I  wish.  It  is  from  this  particular  use  of  the  mood 
that  the  old  Optative  receives  its  name. 

2  From  Latin  potens,  having  power.  The  Potential  Subjunctive,  like 
the  corresponding  English  "can"  or  "may"  with  the  Infinitive,  expresses 
what  one  can  do,  or  may  do. 


144 


Fourth  Declension 


THE  FOURTH  DECLENSION 
369.  In  the  Fourth  Declension  the  Stem  ends  in  -u- 


casus, 

chance,  M. 

corntl,  horn, 

N. 

Stem 

casu- 

cornu- 

Endings 
M.  and  F. 

N. 

Sing. 

Nom. 

casus 

corntl 

-us 

-G 

Gen. 

casQs 

cornGs 

-Gs 

-GS 

Dat 

casul,  -G 

cornn 

-Ul,  -G 

-G 

Ace, 

casum 

cornQ 

-um 

-G 

Voc. 

casus 

cornG 

-us 

-G 

Abl 

cast! 

cornG 

-G 

-G 

PI 

Nom. 

casGs 

cornua 

-Gs 

-ua 

Gen. 

casuum 

cornuum 

-uum 

-uum 

Dat. 

casibus 

cornibus 

-ibus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

casGs 

cornua 

-GS 

-ua 

Voc. 

casQs 

cornua 

-Gs 

-ua 

Abl 

casibus 

cornibus 

-ibus 

-ibus 

370.  Nouns  of  the  Fourth  Declension  in  -us  are  mostly 
Masculine.      Those  in  -u  are  Neuter. 

a.  Masculines  and  Feminines  are  declined  alike  in  this  Declension. 


371.  VOCABULARY 

appello,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  ad-      exercitus,  -Gs,  M.  4,  army. 


dress ;  call,  name. 

armO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  arm. 

casus,  -Gs,  M.  4,  chance;  acci- 
dent; case. 

cOnatus,  -Gs,  M.  4,  attempt,  un- 
dertaking. 

cOnor,  -arl,  -atus  sum,  1,  attempt, 
undertake. 

cornG,  -Gs,  N.  4,  horn;  wing  (of 
an  army). 

cupide.  Adv.,  eagerly. 

decipio,  -cipere,  -cepi^  -ceptum, 
3  (de  +  capio,  catch  away), 
catch,  deceive. 


gravor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  1  (take 
heavily;  cf.  gravis),  he  an- 
noyed. 

laetor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  1  (cf. 
laetus),  be  delighted,  rejoice. 

praeter,  Prep.,  beside,  along, 
past;  besides.  Takes  Ace.  of 
Space -Relation. 

primus,  -a,  -um,  first.  Superl. 
of  prior,  former. 

primo.  Adv.,  at  first. 

qui?  Adv.,  how^ 

strepitus,  -Gs,  M.  4,  noise. 

utinam,  would  that. 


Exercises  145 

372.  READING  MATTER 

(Be  ready  to  state  the  mood-feeling  of  each  Indicative  or  Subjunctive  in 
this  dialogue.    You  will  find  every  kind  that  you  have  learned,  except  one.) 

Quis^  est  ille  cornuum  sonus?  (Another  boy,  impatient) 
Qui  ego  sciam?  Hie,  non  ibi,  sum.  (First  speaker)  Cur  sic 
graveris  ?  Quid  conaris  ?  Pugnam  cupide  petis  ?  (A  third  boy, 
entering)  Quid  vos  f acitis  ?  Non  obsto  quin  pugnetis,  sed  suade5 
exspectetis  d5nec  verum  bellum  incipiat.  (First  speaker)  Tiine 
eornua  audivisti?  (The  newcomer)  Audivi,  et  casu  his  oculis 
causam  strepitus  vidi.  Servius  amicos  suos  armatos  iterum 
praeter  oppidum  ducit.  Primus  inter  nos  esse  cupit.  Videas 
magnum  exercitum  puer5rum  p^jvorum,  qui  eum  sequuntur,^ 
(Ans.)  Utinam  hoc  conatii  desistat.  Ad  eum  niintiuni  mittamus, 
qui  eum  decipiat,  regem  appellans.  (The  newcomer)  Liidus 
optimus  hie  sit;  sed  timeo  ne  caedat  nuntium  Servius.  Nam 
primo,  omnia  temere  credens,  laetetur,  postea  autem  maxime 
gravetur.     (Ans.)  Niillum  sit  periculum.     Ego  nuntius  ero. 

373.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  O  great  king, — for  so  you  have  been  named  by  your  school- 
mates,— would-that  I  might  be  chosen  among  your  first  soldiers! 

2.  (Servius)  I  have  been  chosen  king?     I  am  greatly  delighted. 

3.  But  how  have  you  heard  this?  4.  (Ans.)  It  isn't  true!  You 
are  prepared  to  believe  anything^  good^  about  yourself..  5.  You 
would  never  be  chosen  king.  6.  Why  do  you  so  eagerly  attempt 
it?  7.  Now  are  you  still  going  to  lead  your  army  past  the  town, 
wearying  everybody  with  the  noise  of  horns,  or  shall  you  desist 
from  your  undertaking?  8.  (Servius)  I  am  awfully^  mad.* 
9.  (The  tease)  What  are  you  going  to  do  (about  it)?  Are  you 
going  to  kill  me?  10.  (Ans.)  You  deceived  me  at  first.  Now, 
however,  I  see.     11.  But  I  shall  do  nothing. 

12.  Sextus  happens  to  be*  sick  now,  and  is  not  going  to  fight. 
13.  (Ans.)  Why  shouldnH  he  be  sick?    He  nev^  exercises. 

1  Agrees  in  gender  with  its  noun.  s  =  " am  greatly  annoyed." 

2  Say  *  •  all  things  good."  ^  =  "  by  chance  is." 


146  Exercise 


LESSON   LI 

374.  VOCABULARY 

cOgitQ,-are,-avi,  -atum,  1,  think,  necesse,  N.,  indecl.,  necessity.  In 

plan.  predicate,  =  necessary. 

deinceps,  Adv.,  in  succession,  one  opus,  operis,  N.  3,  work,  task. 

after  the  other.  pauci,  -ae,  -a,  feid,  a  few  {only), 

for sitsin f  Ady.,  perhaps.    Always  persuadeO,-suadere,-suasI,-sua- 

with  the  Subjunctive  of  Possi-  sum,   2    (per  +  suadeO,    thor- 

bility.  oughly  advise),  persuade. 

genus,  generis,  N.  3,  race,  kin;  ratio, -Onis,F.3(thinking;  hence) 

kind,  class.  theory,  science;  manner. 

gratia,   -ae,    F.    1   (cf.    gratus\  singuli,  -ae,  -a,  single,  one  at  a 

popularity,  favor.  time ;  one  each. 

hortpr,  -arr,  -atns  sum,  1,  exhort,  vix.  Adv.,  scarcely,  hardly. 

urge.  voluntas,  -atis,  F.  3,  will. 

376.  READING  MATTER 

(Electioneering) 

1.  Nos  cdgitas  cornuum  strepitii  terrere?    Armaeius  generis^ 

non  periculosa  sunt.    Gladiis,  n5n  cornibus,  nos  pugnabimus. 

^         2.  (Two  plotters.    One  says)  Cur  non  uterque^  exercitus  com- 

'   plureseligatduces,  qui  singuli  deinceps  imperent?   (Ans.)  Bene. 

Forsitan  nos  ipsi  eligamur.    Pauci  tarn  idonei  sunt. 

3.  Apud  omnes  primo  Marcus  magna  in  gratia  erat.  Nunc 
compliires  ei  diligentissime  obstant,  quia  optant  ut  ipsi  eligantur. 

4.  (A  boy  comes  up  to  electioneer)  Opt5  ut  Marcus  eligatur.^ 
Ego  saltem  laeter.  Sed  aliquis  dicat :  "  Is  etiam  nunc  de  studiis, 
n5n  de  operibus  belli  faciendis  cogitat.  Cur  ei  faveamus? 
Alium  vel  complures  eligamus."  Id  si  aliquis  dicet,  vix  quicquam 
contra  eum  dicamus.  (Ans.)  Marcus  n5n  de  studiis  sed  de  bell5 
nunc  cogitat.     Belli  studet  ratidni.     Proelia  magnorum  ducum 

1  Arms  belonging  to  this  class.  Possessive  Genitive,  but  suggests  the  idea 
of  Description  (arms  of  this  kind,  SUCH  arms). 

^ Each  (of  the  two).  » Substantive  Clause  of  Wish. 


Exercises  147 

legit. ^  Nem5  praeter  me  id  vidit,  sed  omnes  facile  videant.  Praeter 
Marcum  et  Lueium,  niilli  sunt  a  quibus  exercitus  nostri  com- 
mode ducantur.-  Necesse  est  ut  ii  eligantur,^  quamquam  tua 
obstat  voluntas.     Te  hortor,  Marco  ne  obstes. 

376.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

I.  (Two  friends  of  Mark  discuss  the  situation.^  This*  is  a  great 
task.  What  is  Mark  planning?  2.  Why  should^  he  read  (up)  old 
battles?  Let  us  urge  him  to  desist.  3.  (Ans.)  He  is  studying 
the  theory  of  war  most-diligently,  in  order  that  he  may  conquer 
the  enemy  by  brains.^  4.  But  let  us  not  say  this  to  anybody.  5. 
W^e  are  all  friends  to-one-another  "^  now;  but  we  are  about-to 
fight.    6.  In  battles  it  is  necessary  to  deceive  an  enemy. 

7.  (Second  speaker)  What  do  you  think  about  the  plan  of 
choosing  several  leaders,  who  shall  command  one-at-a-time  in 
succession?  8.  (Ans.)  At  first  that  boy  persuaded  me,  but  now! 
do  not  approve.  9.  Several  leaders  could  ^hardly  lead  well.  10. 
And  few  of  us  are  fit. 

II.  I  hope  that  Lucius  may  not  choose  us  by  chance  among 
his  soldiers.  12.  I  should  hate^  to  be  of  his  army.  13.  (Ans.) 
That  is  not  his  will.  14.  We  are  not  of  that  kind.  15.  We  are 
not  in  great  favor  with  ^^  him. 

^  Is  reading  {up). 

^  By  whom  ....  can.    What  is  the  idea  of  the  Subjunctive? 

3  Substantive  Volitive  Clause.    Comes  from  a  use  with  two  separate  sen- 
tences :  "  let  these  be  chosen :  it  is  necessary." 
.  -^Must  of  course  agree  with  the  predicate. 

s"  Should"  here  expresses  Obligation  or  Propriety.  How  may  you 
express  this  idea  in  Latin? 

6 Say  "by  judgment." 

7  Say  "among  ourselves." 

8 How  may  you  express  the  "can"  or  "could"  idea  in  Latin?  And  what 
do  we  call  a  Subjunctive  with  this  idea? 

^  =  "be  annoyed."  loUseapud. 


148 


Imperfect  Subjunctive 


377. 


LESSON   LIT 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  (Continued) 

THE  IMPERFECT   SUBJUNCTIVE 


CONJUGAT 

ION          I 

II 

III 

IV 

ACTIVE 

1st  Sing. 

amarem 

monerem 

tegerem 

caperem 

audirem 

2d      ** 

amares 

moneres 

tegeres 

caperes 

audlres 

3d      " 

amaret 

moneret 

tegeret 

caperet 

audiret 

1st  PI 

amaremus 

moneremus 

tegeremus 

caperemus 

audiremus 

2d    " 

amaretis 

moneretis 

tegeretis 

caperetis 

audlretis 

3d    ** 

amarent 

monerent 

tegerent 

caperent 

audirent 

PASSIVE 

1st  Sing. 

amarer 

monerer 

tegerer 

caperer 

audlrer 

2d      '*      amareris     monereris      tegereris      capereris      audireris 
or  -re  or  -re  or  -re  or  -re  or  -re 


3d 


amaretur     moneretur     tegeretur     caperetur     audlretur 


1st  PL  amaremur  moneremur  tegeremur  caperemur  audlremur 
2d  "  amaremini  moneremini  tegeremini  caperemini  audlremini 
3d    "        amarentur  monerentur  tegerentur  caperentur  audirentui 

a.  Notice  that  you  can  form  the  First  Person  Singular  of  the  Imper- 
fect Subjunctive  Active  by  adding  -m  to  the  Present  Infinitive  Active. 

378.  The  Imperfect  Subjunctive  of  sum  is : 


1st  Sing. 

essem 

1st  PL 

essemus 

2d      " 

esses 

2d     " 

essetis 

3d      " 

esset 

3d     " 

essent 

TENSE-MEANING  OP  THE  IMPERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE 

379.  The  Imperfect  Subjunctive  is  a  tense  of  the  past, 
just  as  the  Present  Subjunctive  is  a  tense  of  the  present 
or  future.  In  what  follows,  compare  the  examples  corre- 
sponding in  number.  You  will  find  that  the  only  differ- 
ence lies  in  the  point  of  view. 


The  Point  of  View  in  Tenses 


149 


a.  The  same  Subjunctive  tenses  are  used  for  acts  seen  with  ref- 
erence to  a  future  point  of  view  as  for  acts  seen  with  reference  to 
the  present  point  of  view,  just  as  in  English.  (Thus  we  use  shall 
both  in  *'  we  are  waiting  until  James  shall  come,^'  and  in  *'  we  shall 
wait  until  James  shall  come").  Hence  in  our  examples  we  shall  not 
need  to  give  separate  illustrations  for  the  future  point  of  view. 


380.    Past  Point  of  View 

1.  Quid  facerem?  What  was  I 
to  do  9  (then). 

2.  Tris  elegimus  puerOs,  qui  le- 
ges cOnstituerent,  we  chose 
three  boys,  who  were  to  (or 
should)  establish  the  rules, 
(Past  Purpose.) 

3.  Timebam  ne  complQres  pueri 
vulnerarentur,  I  was  afraid 
that  a  number  of  boys  might 
be  wounded.    (Past  Fear.) 

4.  Vos  monui  ne  pills  ntereminl, 
I  advised  you  { that  you  should 
not  use,=)  not  to  use  Javelins. 
(Past  Will.) 

5.  Exspectabamus  dum  amicus 
pervenlret,  we  were  waiting 
until  our  friend  should  ar- 
rive.   (Past  Anticipation.) 

6.  Optabam  ut  Marcus  vinceret, 
I  hoped  that  Mark  might  con- 
quer.   (Past  Wish.) 

7.  Magnam  videres  caedem,  you 
might  (then)  see  a  great 
slaughter.    (Past  Possibility.) 


Present  Point  of  View 

1.  Quid  faciam?  What  am  I  to 
do  9  (now,  or  in  the  future). 

2.  TrIs  eligimus  puerOs,  qui  le- 
ges cOnstituant,  we  are  choos- 
ing three  boys,  who  are  to  (or 
shall)  establish  the  rules. 
(Present  Purpose.) 

3.  TimeO  ne  complQres  puerl 
vulnerentur,  I  am  afraid  that 
a  number  of  boys  may  be 
wounded.    (Present  Fear.) 

4.  Vos  moneO  ne  pills  ntaminl,  I 
advise  you  (that  you  shall  not 
use,^)not  to  use  javelins. 
(Present  Will.) 

5.  Exspectamus  dum  amicus  per- 
veniat,  we  are  waiting  until 
our  friend  shall  arrive.  (Pres- 
ent Anticipation.) 

6.  OptO  ut  Marcus  vincat,  I 
hope  that  Mark  may  conquer. 
(Present  Wish.) 

7.  Magnam  videas  caedem,  you 
may  (now)  see  a  great  slaugh- 
ter.   (Present  Possibility.) 


a.  The  English  auxiliaries   show  precisely  the  same  shift  to 
express  the  shift  of  the  point  of  view.    Thus  (from  the  above): 

Past  Point  of  View  Present  Point  of  View 

was  to  am  to 

should  shall 

might  may 


150  The  Past-Future  Subjunctive 

381.  We  have  learned  that  there  are  two  ways,  in  de- 
pendent clauses,  of  expressing  the  idea  of  futurity  from 
the  present  point  of  view,  namely  the  Future  Indicative 
and.  the  Anticipatory  Subjunctive  (according  to  the  con- 
struction needed).  On  the  other  hand,  there  is  only  one 
•possible  way  of  expressing  futurity  to  the  jpasi  in  a  corre- 
sponding clause,  namely  the  Anticipatory  Subjunctive. 
The  Indicative  has  no  single  form  that  can  convey  the  idea. 

382.  When,  then,  you  want  to  express  any  past-future 
idea  by  a  single  verb  in  a  dependent  clause,  you  must  use 
the  Anticipatory  Subjunctive,  even  if,  from  the  present 
point  of  view,  the  Future  Indicative  would  be  used.    Thus: 

Past  Point  of  View  Present  Point  of  View 

Annus  aderat    cum    ex    schol3.  Annus  adest  cum  ex  scholS.  ex- 

excederemus        (Anticipatory  cedemus  (Future   Indicative), 

Subjunctive),  the  year  was  at  the  year  is  at  hand  in  which 

hand  in  which  we  should  leave  we  shall  leave  the  school, 
the  school. 

a.  Remember  now  that,  in  your  reading,  an  Imperfect  Subjunctive 
of  Anticipation  from  a  past  point  of  view  (i.  e.,  a  Past-^utvre  Sub- 
junctive) may  correspond  to  either  a  Present  Subjunctive  or  a 
Future  Indicative,  from  the  present  point  of  view. 

383.  VOCABULARY 

aliquantus,  -a,  -um,  some.    Neut.  facilis,  -e  (as  before),  easy.  Com- 
as Substantive  =  someiohat.  par.    facilior,    Superl.    facilli- 

cOnsequor,  -sequi,  -sectltus  sum,  mus.^ 

3  (con  +  sequor),  follow  vig-  difficilis,  -e  (dis-^  +  facilis),  diffl- 

orously,  overtake;  gain.  cult.    Compar.^difficilior,   Su- 

facile.  Adv.  (as  before),    easily.  perl,  difficillimus. 

Compar.  facilius.     Superl.  fa-  quidemy  Adv.,  indeed,  at  any  i^ate. 

cillime.^  Ne  .  .  .  quidem,  not  even. 

1  Follows  facilis  in  its  Comparison.    See  next  note. 

2  A  special  way  of  comparing,  confined  to  a  few  Adjectives  in  -ills. 
spis-  means  asunder,  apart,  and  then  not  (dis-facilis,  not-easy). 


Exercises  151 

384.  READING  MATTER 

1.  (Mark,  to  a  supporter)  Si  electus  ero,  aliquanto  maiorem  nu- 
merum  puerorum  hostibus  dabo.  Victoria  facilis  erit.  (Ans.) 
Utinam  quidem  vincas;  et  vincas  forsitan.  Sed  magnopere 
timeo  ne  vincaris.  NQlla  saltern  causa  est  cur  conatuna  tuum 
difficili5rem  facias  quam  necesse  est.  Id  quod  nunc  conari 
cogitas  certe  difficillimum  ^  sit.  Cur  maiorem  partem  hostibus 
des  ?  (Mark)  Quo  maiorem  exercitus  meus  consequatur  gloriam.'^ 

2.  (Mark  reports  at  home)  Ego  et  Lucius  reges  elect!  sumus. 
Lucid  aliquanto  maidrem  numerum  militum  dedi.  (His  father) 
Cur  idfecisti?  Lucius  te  facillime  vincet.  Saltem  nulla  causa 
erat  cur  conatum  tuum  difficiliorem  quam  necesse  erat  faceres.^ 
(Mark)  Id  fe6i  quo  maiorem  exercitus  meus  consequeretur^ 
gloriam.  Vict5ria  facillima  erit.  Lucius  ne  cautus  quidem  est. 
Cautum  hostem  vix  ille  vincat.  Corporis  modo*  viribus  ille 
pugnabit. 

385.  .  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  (Lucius,  to  a  lieutenant)  Does  Mark  not  even  desire 
victory?  2.  Why  did  he  give  me  a  much  larger  number  of 
soldiers  than  was  necessary?  3.  (Ans.)  He  did  this  in  order 
that  he  might  gain  somewhat  greater  glory.  4.  He  did  not  fear, 
indeed,  that  you  would  conquer  him.  5.  But  there  is  no  reason 
why  you  should  not  conquer.  6.  Victory  will  be  easy  enough. 
7.  But  it  is  very  difficult  (say  "most  difficult")  to  wait. 

1  Very  difficult. 

2  What  two  words  are  emphasized  by  the  order,  and  how? 

3 Why  is  .the  tense  different  from  the  corresponding  one  above? 
4  Only,  emphasizing  the  preceding  word. 


152     Genitive  of  Material,— Descriptive  Genitive 


LESSON  LIII 
THE  GENITIVE  OF  MATERIAL  OR  COMPOSITION 

386.  Examples: 

Haec  multitndo  puerOrum,  this  multitude  of  hoys, 
Spatium  pedum  decern,  a  space  of  ten  feet. 

a.  The  Genitive  in  such  expressions  has  come  down  from  an  ori- 
ginal Genitive  of  the  Whole.  Thus,  in  our  first  example,  out  of  hoys 
in  general  (the  Whole),  this  multitude  contains  a  Part.  But  the 
feeling  naturally  comes  to  be  simply  that  of  the  Material  of  which  the 
multitude  is  composed.^    We  may  then  lay  down  the  rule  that: 

387.  Material  or  Composition  may  he  expressed  by  a 
Genitive  attached  to  a  Noun. 

THE  DESCRIPTIVE  GENITIVE 

388.  Examples: 

1..  Homo  eius  generis,  a  man  of  this  class. 

2.  Homo  magnae  virtQtis,  a  man  of  great  courage. 

3.  Spatium  decem  pedum,  a  space  of  ten  feet. 

4.  Mnrus  decem  pedum,  a  wall  of  ten  feet. 

a.  We  have  already  had  eius  generis  (in  375),  and  have  seen  that, 
while  it  originally  is  a  mere  Possessive  Genitive  (thus,  a  man  helong- 
ingAo  this  class),  it  practically  amounts  to  a  Description  {a  man  of 
•  this  class,  a  man  of  this  kind).  Through  this  and  similar  phrases  the 
Genitive  comes  to  be  thought  of  as  having  the  power  of  descrihing, 
and  it  is  then  used  in  combinations  in  which  it  could  not  have  been 
used  originally,  as  in  homo  magnae  virtntis  (example  2).  This  is 
nothing  but  descriptive. 

1  Cf.  such  expressions  as  "a  cup  of  water,"  of  which  the  original  concep- 
tion was,  *'a  cup  containing  (not  all  the  water  in  the  world,  but)  some 
wafsr.^^  The  word  "some"  here  marks  distinctly  the  conception  of  a 
part, — which,  in  general,  we  have  lost  out  of  our  English  speech. 


Descriptive  Ablative  153 

h.  We  have  also  had  spatium  pedum  decern  in  386,  under  the 
head  of  the  Genitive  of  Composition.  The  original  meaning  was  a 
space  made  up  of  feet,  ten  in  number.  But  this  likewise  suggests 
Description  according  to  size  or  measurement;  and  the  case  is  then 
used  descriptively  in  combinations  in  which  it  could  not  have  been 
used  originally,  as  in  mtlrus  decern  pedum  (example  4),  which  is 
nothing  hut  descriptive. 

c.  You  see,  then,  that  a  Genitive  Noun  with  a  modifier  may  be 
used  to  describe,  expressing  either  the  idea  of  the  Kind  (as  in 
examples  1  and  2)  or  the  idea  of  Measure  (as  in  3  and  4). 

But  there  is  another  case  which  is  used  in  a  similar  way,  and  we 
will  look  at  this  before  laying  down  our  formal  rule. 

THE  DESCRIPTIVE  ABLATIVE 

389.  Examples:  • 

1.  Homo  eOdem  genere,  a  man  from  the  same  class. 

2.  Homo  magnS.  virtnte,  a  man  with  great  courage. 

3.  Homo  magnis  oculls,  a  man  with  big  eyes. 

4.  Homo  bono  in  nOs  animo,  a  man  with  kindly  feeling  toward  us. 

5.  MagnO  honOre  apud  nOs  es,  you  are  in  great  honor  among  us. 

a.  Evidently  these  examples  also  describe,  through  the  from, 
with,  and  in  ideas.^  If  the  three  cases  making  up  the  Latin  Ablative 
had  remained  distinct,  we  should  have  had  an  Ablative  of  Descrip- 
tion, a  Sociative  of  Description,  and  a  Locative  of  Description. 

b.  In  these  examples,  we  find  again  the  idea  of  Kind,  as  in  the 
Genitive  (cf.  magnae  virtntis  and  magna  virtnte).  But  we  also  find 
the  ideas  of  Physical  Characteristics,  (in  3),  of  Mental  State  (in  4), 
and  of  Situation  (in  5).  The  last  two,  though  occurring  frequently, 
are  confined  to  a  few  phrases. 

We  may  now  make  our  general  statement  for  the  descriptive  use 
of  the  two  cases,  as  follows : 

390.  1.  Kind  or  Measure  may  he  expressed  by  the 
Genitive  of  a  Noun  accompanied  by  a  Modifier. 

2.  Kind  or  Physical  Characteristics  may  be  expressed 
by  the  Ablative  of  a  Noun  accompanied  by  a  Modifier; 
also,  in  a  few  phrases,  Mental  State  or  Situatioji. 

iThis  is  shown  by  the  occasional  actual  occurrence  of  ex,  cum,  and  in. 


154    Two  Principles  in  the  Growth  of  Language 

391.  In  tracing  the  history  of  these  constructions,  we 
have  seen  two  important  principles  in  the  growth  of 
language : 

1.  We  have  seen  a  case-use  gain  an  entirely  new  force,  through 
the  chafice  occurrence  of  that  force  in  a  particular  set  of  phrases. 
This  often  happens.  We  may  conveniently  make  ourselves  a  formula 
by  which  to  refer  hereafter  to  the  process, —  namely,  x,  x  +  y>  y 
(where  x  is  the  original  force,  x  +  y  the  original  one  plus  the  new 
one,  and  y  the  new  one,  now  used  freely  hy  and  for  itself  alone, 
in  phrases  where  it  could  not  have  started).^ 

2.  We  have  also  seen  (both  in  388  and  in  389)  that  two  or  three 
different  constructions  may  suggest  the  same  new  idea,  and  so  all 
contribute  to  the  same  new  construction,  which  is  thus  like  a  river 
made  up  of  two  or  three  distinct  streams.^  Constructions  thus 
arising  may  be  called  Constructions  of  Several  Origins,  or,  more 
briefly.  Composite  Constructions. 

392.  VOCABULARY 

adgredior,    adgredl,    adgressus  '  icidico,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1   (cf. 

.  sum,  3  (ad  +  gradior,  go  at),  index), yitdge. 

attack.  diindicO,  -are,-avl,  -atum,  1  (dis- 

contrOversia,  -ae,  F.  1,  contro-  +i^dicO,  judge  between),  de- 

versy.  cide  {between). 

dolus,  -1,  M.  2,  trick,  stratagem.  paulum,  -T,  N.  2,  a  Utile. 

index,  indicis,  M.  3,ytidgfe.  post  (same  word  as  before,  but 

indicium,    -I,    N.    2,   judgment,  used     as     Adv.),     afterward, 

opinion.  later. 

393.  READING  MATTER 

1.  (A  friend,  to  Mark)  Cdnsilium  cepistP  ut  dolo  et  ratione, 
non  vi,  vinceres.     Ita  saltern  iudico;  nam  huius  generis  semper 

1  This  rise  of  new  meanings  in  a  construction  is  precisely  like  the  familiar 
rise  of  new  meanings  in  words,  as  we  see  it  in  our  own  language.  Very  few 
are  confined  to  their  original  meaning.  Often,  too,  the  original  meaning 
entirely  disappears.  Thus  the  word  "villain"  meant  at  first  merely  a 
"peasant"  (person  attached  to  a  villa),  and  then,  through  the  prejudice  of 
the  upper  classes,  a  "peasant,  who  is  naturally  a  base  person,"  and  thep 
merely  a  "base  person." 

2  It  is  mainly  because  of  such  practical  coincidences  of  forces  that  the 
three  cases  that  make  up  the  Latin  Ablative  came  to  be  thought  of  as  one, 

^Have  taken  up  apian,  have  formed  a  plan. 


Exercises 


155 


fuistl.  ludicium  tuum  non  probo.  Tu  quidem  magnae  virtutis 
magnique  consili  es.  Sed  amlci  Luci,  quos  tu  non  eliges,  magnis 
sunt  corporum  viribus.  (Mark)  Omnia  tibi  paulo  post  dicam. 
Nunc  autem  pueris  suadeamus  ut  indices  eligant,  qui,  cum  in 
proelio  controversiae  orientur,  inter  pugnantis  diiudicent. 

2.  Marcus  discipulis  persuasit  ut  indices  eligerent,  qui,  cum 
controversiae  orirentur,  inter  pugnantis  diiudicarent. 

394.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  (Lucius,  to  a  friend)  What  is  Mark  planning  ?  2.  Will  he, 
in  the  battle,  yield  to  the  larger  number?  3.  He  does  not  seem 
to  me  to  be  of  that  kind.  4.  He  is  a  boy  of  great  courage,  and 
with  great  strength  of  body.  5.  (Ans.)  He  has  formed  a  plan, 
— so  I  judge  at  any  rate, — to  conquer  us  by  theory.  6.  We  shall 
see  a  little  later. 

7.  (Lucius)  Why  did  he  persuade  us  to  elect  judges  to  decide 
between  the  fighters?  8.  Did  he  fear  that,  when  the-battle- 
should-take-place,  controversies  would  arise?  9.  None  (=no 
controversies)  will  arise.  This  is  my  judgment.  10.  We  shall 
attack  him  without  stratagem,  and  easily  conquer  him  by  force. 


VIEW  FROM  PROBABLE  SITE  OF  HORACE'S  FARM 
Sabine  Mountains,  twelve  miles  above  Tivoli 


156 


Fifth  Declension 


LESSON  LIV 


THE  FIFTH  DECLENSION 


396.  In  the  Fifth  and  last  Declension,  the  Stem  ends 
in  -e-. 


dies, 

,  day,  M.  and  F. 

res,  thing,  F. 

Stem 

die- 

re- 

Endings 

Sing.  Nom. 

dies 

res 

-es 

Qen. 

diel 

rei 

-el  or  -ei 

Dat. 

die! 

rel 

-ei  or  -ei 

Ace. 

diem 

rem 

-em 

Voe. 

dies 

res 

-es 

AM. 

die 

re 

-6 

PI.      Nom. 

dies 

res 

-es 

Gen. 

dierum 

rerum 

-erum 

Dat. 

diebus 

rebus 

-ebus 

Ace. 

dies 

res 

-es 

Voe. 

dies 

r6s  * 

-es 

Abl 

diebus 

rebus 

-ebus 

a.  Notice  that  an  e-sound  appears  in  every  ending. 

b.  In  the  Genitive  and  Dative  Singular  we  find  long  e  (e)  after  a 
vowel,  but  short  e  after  a  consonant.    Thus  diei,  but  rei. 

396.  Nouns  of  the  Fifth  Declension  are  Feminine,  ex- 
cept dies  J  day,  and  meridies,  midday.  And  dies  is  usually 
Feminin^e  when  meaning  an  appointed  time,  or  time  in 
general. 

THE  INDEFINITE  PRONOUN  quis 

397.  Quis,    the   vaguest    of    the    Indefinite    Pronouns, 

means  any  one,  some  one,  and  is  used  chiefly  with  si,  nisi, 

ne,  and  with  Interrogative  or  Relative  words.     It  always 

stands  after  one  or  more  words  of  its  clause. 

a.  This  indefinite  quis  is  declined  like  the  second  part  of  ali-quis. 
See  207,  and  a.  Thus  ali-quis,  ali-qua,  ali-quod,  etc.,  any,  and  ne 
quis,  ne  qua,  ne  quod,  etc.,  lest  any  ... 


Ablative  of  the  Time  At  or  Within  Which     157 

ABLATIVE  OF  THE  TIME  AT  OR  WITHIN  WHICH 

398.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Gaius,  Marcl  amicus,  tertio  die  perveniet,   Gains,  Mark's  friend, 

ivill  arrive  (will  come  through)  on  the  thii^d  day. 
Tribus  diebus  perveniet,  he  will  arrive  in  (within)  three  days. 

a.  In  the  first  example  the  Ablative  tertio  die  evidently  expresses 
the  time  at  which  Gaius  will  arrive,  while  in  the  second  the  Abla- 
tive tribus  diebus  expresses  the  time  within  which  he  will  arrive. 

We  may  accordingly  lay  down  the  rule  that: 

399.  The  Time  At  or  Within  Which  anything  is  or  is 
done  may  be  expressed  by  the  Ablative, 

a.  But  once  in  a  while  prepositions  are  used.  These  are  in,  at  or 
in,  and  cum,  with.  We  may  compare  our  own  varying  usage.  Thus: 

"And  in  the  dawn  he  bade  them  all  farewell"  ("Time  when" 
expressed  through  the  Locative  idea). 

"And  with  the  dawn  he  bade  them  all  farewell"  ("Time  when" 
expressed  through  the  Sociative  idea). 
.  b.  This  occasional  use  of  the  Prepositions  in  and  cum  shows  us 
that  the  Latin  Ablative  of  Time  is  of  double  origin,  like  a  river  made 
by  two  streams  that  have  flowed  together, —  though  it  is  probable 
that  the  Locative  stream  was  larger  than  the  Sociative,  just  as,  in 
the  corresponding  English  expressions  of  time,  "in"  or  "  at "  is  com- 
moner than  "  with." 

THE  IMPERSONAL  USE  OF  VERBS 

400.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Din  pugnatum  est,  (it  was  fought  for  a  long  time,  — )  there  was  a 

long  battle. 
Mihi  nocetur,  (it  is  being  injured  to  me,  =)  I  am  being  injured; 

a.  These  verbs,  as  you  see,  have  no  subject,  and  represent  the 
mere  action  as  such.  They  are  accordingly  called  Impersonal.  It  is 
evident  that  any  verb  might  be  used  in  this  way.    Notice,  too,  that: 

6.  The  Dative  (mihi)  of  the  Active  is  retained. 

We  may  then  state  the  Roman  usage  as  follows :  - 


158 


Exercise 


401.  Any    Verb  may   he  used  in  the  Third  Singular 
Passive  without  a  Subject,  and  is  then  called  Impersonal. 

402.  Verbs  governing  a  Dative  in  the  Active  are  used 
ONL  Y  Impersonally  in  the  Passive.    The  Dative  remains . 


403. 


VOCABULARY 


acies,  -ei,  F.  5,  sharp  edge;  line 

of  battle. 
adsuefacio, -facer  e ,  -feci ,  -factum , 

3,  accustom. 
circum,     around,     around     in. 

Prep.,  taking  Ace,  or  Adv. 
circumveniO,  -venire, -veni,-ven- 

tum,   4  (circum +  venio,  come 

around),  surround. 
commtlnicO,  -are,-avi, -atum,  1, 

communicate. 
convert©,  -vertere,  -verti,    -ver- 

sum,    3    (con-  +  verto,    turn 

thoroughly),  turn  about. 
dies,  diei,  M.  and  F.  5,  day. 
divide,  dlvidere,  divisl,  divTsum, 

3,  divide. 
extends,  extendere,  extendi,  cx- 

tentum  and  extensum,  3  (ex  + 

tendo),  stretch  out,  extend. 
gradus,  -ns,  M.  4,  step. 


InstruO,  Instruere,   instrOxi,   in- 

strQctum,  3,  draw  up. 
OrdO,  Ordinis,  M.  3,  order,  rank. 
par,  par.  Gen.  paris,  equal,  even. 
peritus,  -a,  -um,  having  experi- 
ence of  ,  experienced  in.  Takes 

Objective  Genitive. 
prOgredior,    prOgredi,    prOgres- 

sus  sum,  3  (prO  +  gradior),  go 

forward,  advance. 
quis   (qui).    Indefinite    Pronoun, 
'   any.    (See  397,  a). 
recipio,  recipere,  recepi,  recep- 

tum,  3  (re  +  capio),  take  back. 

Me  recipio,  I  return,  I  retreat. 
res,  rei,  F.  5,  thing,  affair,  mat 

ter.    Res  militaris,  warfare. 
Septimus,  -a,  -um,  seventh. 
signum,  -i,  N.  2,   sign,    signal; 

standard.  ConvertOsigna,fwrn 

the  standards,  wheel  about. 


404. 


READING   MATTER 


(The  preparations)  Duo  exercitus  diem  constituerunt,  qua 
die^  in  acie  decertarent.  Hie  dies  dictus  est  ex  e5  die  septimus. 
Interim  Marcus  su5s  rel  militari  adsuefaciebat,^  ut,  cum  pugna- 


1  Latin  often  repeats  the  Antecedent  in  the  Relative  Clause. 

2  Was  aceusto7ning=was  trying  to  accustom.     In  this  way  the  Imperfect 
gets  the  power  of  expressing  Attempted  Action. 


Exercises  159 

retur,^  quaecumque  necesse  essent,  haec  statim  facerent.  CotT- 
die  aciem  instruebat,^  instructam*^  circum  silvas  ducebat.  Turn 
exercitum  in  duos  dividebat  exercitus  qui  inter  se*  pugnarent. 
Milites  alterius^  exercitus  docebat  pugnantis^  ordines  servare, 
paribus  gradibus^  progredT,  aut  fuga  simulata  se  recipere,  turn 
signis  conversls  cornibusque  extentis  alterum  exercitum  circum- 
venire,  atque  omnibus  ex  partibus  eum  adgredi.  (Ques.)  Nonne 
Lucium  aliquis  de  eius  consiliTs  docebit?  (Ans.)  Prohibitum  est 
ne  quis  consilia  ducis  sui  cum  alterd  duce  communicaret. 

2.  Timeo  ne,  cum  controversiae  orientur,  difficile  sit  inter 
pugnantis  diiudicare.  (Ans.)  Id  indices,  rei  militaris  periti, 
facile  facient.     (First  speaker)  Indices  non  omnia  vident. 

405.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  Mark's  army  was  now  studying  military  theory.  2.  Every- 
day he  would-divide^  his  (men)  into  two  parties.  3.  He  would- 
draw-up  each  party  in  line-of -battle.  4.  He  was-trying-to-teach^ 
the  soldiers  to  advance  side-by-side,^^  or  to  retreat,  keeping  their 
ranks.  5.  One  party  would-pretend  flight,  the  other  would-pur- 
sue;  then,  a  little  later,  the  former  would- wheel-about  and,  with 
its  wings  extended,  would-surround  the  other  and  attack  it. 

6.  By  (say  "on'')  the  seventh  day,  when  the-battle- will-be- 
fought,'^  Mark's  soldiers  will  have  been  accustomed  to  all  th6s^ 
matters,  and  will  do  at  once  whatever  shall  be  necessary. 

7.  Are  Lucius'  soldiers  experienced  in  these  matters? 
8.  (Ans.)  No  one  knows.  9.  It  has  been  forbidden  that  any- 
one shall  communicate  the  plans  of  his  army  to  (Latin  with) 
the  other  army. 

1  What  kind  of  Subjunctive  ?    Of  what  kind  is  the  next? 

2  Every  day  was  drawing  up= every  day  would  draw  up.  The  Imperfect, 
as  you  see,  comes  to  have  the  power  of  expressing  Habitual  Action. 

3  Drawn  up=  when  drawn  up^  after  drawing  it  up. 

4  =wit.h  each  other.  8  Read  footnote  2  again. 

^  Of  one  army  (of  the  two).  9  Read  footnote  2,  p.  158,  again. 

♦>  With  what  agreeing?  Be  careful.       lo  gay  "  with  equal  steps." 
7  With  equal  sfeps,=side  by  side.  ^^  Use  Impersonal  Verb. 


160  The  Ordinary  Expression  of  Place 

LESSON  LV 

DECLENSION  OF  domus,  F.,  house  or  home 

406.  Domus  is  declined  in  full  according  to  the  Fourth 
Declension,  but  lias  also  a  number  of  forms  of  the  Second 
Declension,     Grenerally  speaking,  these  Second  Declen- 
sion forms  are  more  common  than  the  others. 
Sing. 


Nom. 

.  domus 

PI  Nom. 

domtls 

Gen. 

domGs  or  domt 

Gen. 

domuum  or  domOrum 

Dat 

domul  or  domO 

Dat. 

domibus 

Ace. 

domum 

ACG. 

domtls  or  domOs 

Voc. 

domus 

Voc. 

domtls  . 

Abl. 

domU  or  domO 

Abl 

domibus 

THE  ORDINARY  EXPRESSION  OF  PLACE 

407.  As  we  have  repeatedly  seen  in  our  reading, 

The  idea  of  Place  is  regularly  expressed  as  follows: 

1.  Place  From  Which  by  the  Separative  Ablative  with  ah  j  de,  or  ex. 

2.  Place  To  Which  by  the  Accusative  with  ad  or  in. 

3.  Place  In  Which  by  the  Locative  Ablative  with  in. 

•    Thus:   . 

Ab  urbe  venit,  he  comes  from  the  city. 
Ad  urbem  venit,  he  comes  to  the  city. 
In  urbe  est,  he  is  in  the  city.  . 

408.  But  a  few  classes  of  words  were  in  such  common  use  in  the 
expression  of  these  ideas  that  the  preposition  never  came  into  regu- 
lar use  with  them  (just  as,  in  i^nglish,  we  say  "go  home,"  never  "go 
to  home").  These  are:  Names  of  Towns  and  Small  Islands,  the 
words  for  home  and  the  country  (domus  and  rtls),  arid  a  few  others. 
With  these  words  the  Place  From  Which  is  expressed  by  the  bare 
Ablative,  the  Place  To  Which  by  the  bare  Accusative,  and  the  Place 
In  Which  by  the  bare  Locative. — Now  in  general  the  Locative  case  is 
mixed  with  the  Ablative.  But  in  the  Singular  of  the  First  and  Sec- 
ond Declensions  the  Locative  has  a  separate  case-form,  whichhappens 
to  end  just  like  the  Genitive.    Hence  the  following  usage: 


Flace  From,  To,  or  In  Which  161 

PLAGE  CONSTRUCTIONS  WITH  NAMES  OF  TOWNS 
AND  SMALL  ISLANDS,  AND  WITH  domus  AND  rGs 

409.  Special  Constructions  of  the  Place  From  Which, 
To  Which,  or  In  Which. 

1.  To  express  the  Place  From  Which,  names  of  Towns 
and  Small  Islands  are  put  in  the  Ablative  without  a 

'  Preposition. 

Roma^  profectus  est,  he  has  set  out  from  Home. 
Caprels^  profectus  est,  he  has  set  out  from  Capri, 
a.  Similarly  domo,  from  home,  rore,  from  the  country. 
Domo  venit,  he  has  come  from  home. 
Rnre  venit,  he  has  come  from  the  country. 

2.  To  express  the  Place  To  Which,  names  of  Towns  and 
Small  Islands  are  put  in  the  Accusative  without  a  Pre- 
position. 

Romam  revertetur,  he  will  return  to  Rome. 
Capreas  revertetur,  he  will  return  to  Capri, 
a.  Similarly  domum,  home,  and  rOs,  to  the  country. 
Domum  revertetur,  he  will  return  home. 
ROs  revertetur,  he  will  return  to  the  country. 

3.  To  express  the  Place  In  Which,  names  of  Towns  and 
Small  Islands  are  put  in  the  Locative, — which  in  the 
Singular  Number  of  the  First  or  Second  Declension  is 
identical  with  the  Genitive,  and  elsewhere  with  the  Ablative. 

Amicus  mens  Romae  est,  my  friend  is  in  Rome. 
Amicu^  mens  Corflni^  est,  m.y  friend  is  in  Corfinium. 
Amicus  mens  Tibure*  est,  my  friend  is  in  Tivoli. 
Amicus  mens  Capreis  est,  my  friend  is  in  Capri, 
a.  Similarly  doml,  at  home,  and  rDrl  or  rQre,  in  the  country. 
Amicus  meus  doml  est,  my  friend  is  at  home. 
Amicus  meus  rOri  est,  my  friend  is  in  the  country. 

1  From  Nominative  Roma.  3  From  Nominative'  Corfinium. 

2  From  Nominative  Capreae  (PL).      *From  Nominative  Tibur. 


162     Ablative  of  Me  Point  of  View  from   Which 

LOCATIVE  ABLATIVE  WITH  OR  WITHOUT  A  PREPOSITION 

410.  With  a  number  of  words  in  very  common  use,  the 

Place  In  Which  (literal  or  figurative)  may  be  expressed 

by  the  Ablative  either  with  or  without  in. 

a.  So  for  example  with  locO,  parte,  regiOne,  cornQ  [wing),  and 
with  Adjectives  meaning  middle  or  all.     Thus: 

eO  loco  or  in  eO  locO,  in  that  place. 
.  ea  regiOne  or  in  ea  regiOne,  in  that  region. 
tola  Italia  or  tota  in  Italia,  in  all  Italy,  throughout  Italy. 

ABLATIVE  OP  THE  POINT  OP  VIEW  FROM  WHICH 

411.  The  Romans  often  used  the  Ablative  with  ab  or  ex 
to  express  the  Point  of  View  From  Which  something  is 
looked  at  (where  our  conception  is  that  of  the  Place  Where) . 

Hostes  nOn  a  fronte  adgrediemur,  we  shall  not  attack  the  enemy  on 

the  front  (in  Latin,  from  the  front). 
Prope  a  mea  domo  habitat,  he  lives  near  my  house  (near,  reckoned 

from  my  house). 

a.  Among  the  commonest  examples  are  a  fronte,  on  the  front ,  a 
tergO,  on  the  rear,  Si  latere,  on  the  side,  ab  or  ex  utraque  parte,  on 
either  side,  omnibus  ex  partibus,  on  all  sides,  etc. 

412.  VOCABULARY 

aestas,  -atis,  P.  3,  summer.  impetus,  -Gs,  M.   4   (cf.   in  and 

agmen,  agminis,  N.  3  (cf.  ago,  peto),  attack. 

drive,  lead),  army  (on  a  march).  Italia,  -ae,  P.  1,  Italy. 

ago,  agere,  egl,  actum,  3,  drive,  Pompei  (pronounce  Pompei'-yi), 

lead;    carry     on,    do;    pass,  -Orum,  M.  2,  Pompeu. 

spend  (of  time).  primum.  Adv.  (the  first  thing), 

Capreae, -arum,  P.  1,  Capri.  first,  in  the  first  place. 

Corflnium,  -I,  N.  2,  Corfinium.  ROma,  -ae,  P.  1,  Rome. 

deinde.   Adv.   afterward,  next;  simul,    simultaneously,   at    the 

in  the  second  place.  same  time,  together. 

domus,  -ns  and  -I,  F.   4   and  2,  tarde.  Adv.,  slowly,  late. 

house,  home.  tergum,   -T,   back,    rear    (of    an 

hiems,     hiemis,     P.    3,     storm;  army). 

winter.  Tibur,  Tiburis,  N.  3,  Tivoli. 


Exercises  163 

*  READING  MATTER 

» 

413.  1.  Qua  (in)^  regione  Italiae,  Marce,  iste  amicus  tuus 
habitat?  (Ans.)  Hieme  Romae  habitat,  aestate  aut  Tibure  aut 
Pompeis  aut  Capreis.  Etiam  run  prope  a  R5ma  vlllam  parvam 
habet,  et  ibi  saepe,  domo  Roma^  profectus,  reliquam  partem  diei 
agit.  (Ques.)  Nuncne  domi  est,  aut  iam  hie  Corfini?  {Ans.) 
Dom5,  credo,  profectus  est,  sed  Corfinium  nondum  pervenit. 
Tarde  certe  venit. 

2.  Quid  Marcus  his  diebus  faciebat?  (Ans.)  Suos  rei  militari 
adsuefaciebat;  nam  magna  ille  est  diligentia.  Nonnumquam 
agmen,  aut  paribus  gradibus,  aut  niillis  ordinibus,  circum  silvas 
agebat,  ut  corpora  suorum  lab5re  confirmarentur.  Nonnumquam 
exercitum  in  duas  dividebat  partes,  quarum  altera,  cornibus 
extentis,  alteram  circumveniebat,  in  eamque  simul  a  fronte,  ab 
latere,  a  tergo  impetum  faciebat. 

MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

414.  1.  What  was  Lucius  doing  in  these  days?  2.  (Ans.) 
Sometimes  he  would  lead  his  army  around-in  the  woods,  some- 
times he  would  draw  up  a  litie-of-battle.  3.  (Ques.)  Did  he 
teach  his  men  to  retreat,  then  to  wheel -about  and  make  an 
attack  simultaneously  on  the  front,  on  the  side,  and  on  the 
rear?  4.  (Ans.)  No,  Lucius  did  none^  of  these  things.  He  is 
not  (a  boy)  of  great  diligence  of  mind.  5.  He  did  not  fear  that 
he  would  be  beaten.     6.  And  so  he  will  effect  nothing. 

7.  In  what  part  of  Italy  do  you  live?  8.  (Ans.)  In  winter  I 
live  in  Pompeii  or  Rome,  the  summer  I  pass  in  Corfinium  among 
the  mountains.  9.  I  love  to  be  in  the  country,  and  so  I  am  * 
never  slow*  to  set-out*  from  home.  Neither  am  I  ever  slow  to 
return  home;  for  I  enjoy  life  at  home  also. 

1  Parentheses  mean  that  the  preposition  may  be  used  or  not,  at  will. 
^From  home  from  Rome  (English,  less  exactly, /rom  his  home  in  Borne), 
''^Vse  nihil  (nothing). 
^ Say  **  I  never  set  out  slowly." 


164 


Perfect  Subjunctive 


LESSON   LVI 

THE  PERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE 

415.  The  Perfect  Subjunctive  Active  is  formed  by  add- 
ing -erim,  etc.,  to  the  Perfect  Stem,  and  the  Passive  by  the 
Perfect  Passive  Participle  plus  sim,  etc.  When,  then, 
you  have  learned  it  for  one  verb,  you  can  form  it  for  any 
other  from  the  last  two  Principal  Parts. 


ACTIVE 

Conjugation          I 

II 

III 

1st 

Sing. 

amaverim 

monuerim 

texerim 

2d 

a 

amaveris 

monuerls 

texerls 

3d 

u 

amaverit 

monuerit 

texerit 

Similarly 
ceperim,etc. 

1st 

PL 

atnaverlmus 

monuerlmus 

texerimus 

audlverim,etc. 

2d 

u 

amaveritis 

monueritis 

texeritis 

3d 

it 

amaverint 

monuerint 

PASSIVE 

texerint 

1st 

Sing, 

amatus  sim 

monitus  sim 

tectus  sim 

Similarly 

2d 

a 

"       SIS    ■ 

SIS 

"      sis 

captussim,etc. 

3d 

i( 

"       sit 

sit 

"       sit 

audrtussim,etc. 

1st 

PL 

amatl  slmus 

monitl  simus 

tecti  Bimus 

2d 

u 

"      Sltis 

"     Sltis 

"    Sltis 

3d 

ii 

"      sint 

"      sint 

*'    sint 

a.  Notice  that,  in  the  Active,  every  ending  contains  an  i-sound. 

h.  Notice  also  that  (except  in  the  First  Person  Singular)  the  Per- 
fect Subjunctive  is  exactly  like  the  Future  Perfect  Indicative  in 
spelling ;  but  the  -i-  of  the  Subjunctive  is  long,  except  in  the  places 
of  regular  shortening  (100,  2). 

416.  The  Perfect  Subjunctive  of  sum  is; 

1st  Sing,    fuerim  Ist  PI.    fuerimus 


2d 
3d 


fueris 
fuerit 


2d 
3d 


fuerltis 
fuerint 


Semi- deponents. — Consecutive  Subjunctive  of  Fact    165 

SEMI-DEPONENT  VERBS  (i.  e.,  Verbs  JEfaZZ-Deponent) 

417.  Semi-Deponents  are  verbs  of  which  the  Perfect 
System  is  Passive  in  form  but  Active  in  meaning.     Thus: 

audeO  audere  ausus  sum,  dare 

gaudeO  gaudere  gavlsus  sum,  rejoice,  be  glad  of 

soleO  solere  solitus  sum,  he  accustomed 

fido  ftdere  iisvLs  svLm,  trust 

THE  CONSECUTIVE  SUBJUNCTIVE  OP  FACT 

(Existing  in  Dependent  Clauses  only) 

418.  Specimen  Sentences: 

1.  Marcus  talis  est  puer  qui  labOrare  amet,  Mark  is  such  a  boy  that 

loves  to  work  (in  English,  such  a  boy  that  he  loves,  or  simply 
a  boy  that  loves). 

2.  Ita  rQs  amO,  ut  maximam  partem  aestatis  ibi  semper  agam,  I  so 

love  the  country  that  I  always  spend  most  of  the  summer  there. 

3.  Numquam  in  nostra  schola  tam  male  est,  quin  aliquis  puerOs  par- 

vOs  defendat,  it  is  never  so  bad  in  our  school  that  some  one 
does  not  defend  the  little  boys  {qmn=that  ....  not). 

4.  Effecimus  ut  in  hac  schola  parvl  puerl  a  magnTs  nOn  lacessantur, 

we  have  brought-it-about  that  in  this  school  the  little  boys 
are  not  worried  by  the  big  ones. 

Study  of  the  Above  Sentences 

419.  In  all  four  examples,  notice  the  following  points 
of  likeness: 

1.  What  is  expressed  by  the  Subjunctive  is  a  fact.  If  the  clauses 
were  independent,  the  Indicative  would  be  used  in  all  (Marcus  .  .  . 
amat,  ego  .  .  .  ago,  etc.).  Hence  we  may  conveniently  say  that 
these  Subjunctives  are  not  true  Subjunctives,  but  belong  to  the 
province  of  Fact.  They  are  usually  best  translated  by  the  English 
Indicative. 

2.  The  dependent  clauses  express  something  that  follows  from 
the  nature  of  something  else,  given  in  the  main  sentence  {such  that 
he,  etc.,  loves  so  much  that  he,  etc.).  Such  clauses  are  accordingly 
called  Consecutive  (from  cOnsequor,  follow). 


166         Is,  lUe,  etc,  with  Descriptive  Meaning 

420.  The  differences  are  as  follows: 

1.  The  first  clause  describes  the  antecedent  (Mark  is  such  a  hoy 
that  .  .  .  )•    Hence  we  may  call  it  a  Descriptive  Clause. 

2.  The  second  and  third  clauses  express  result  (loves  so  much 
that  .  .  .  ,  never  is  so  bad  that  .  .  .  ).  Hence  we  should  call  them 
Clauses  of  Result. 

3.  The  last  clause  (ut  nOn  lacessantur)  expresses  the  Object  of 
effecimus,  just  as  an  Accusative  Noun  would  (it  is  the  thing  ivhich 
we  have  brought  about).  Hence  we  should  call  it  a  Substantive 
Clause  of  Fact. 

We  may  combine  these  statements  in  a  rule: 

421.  In  Dependent  Clauses  of  Consecutive  nature  or 
origin,  the  Subjunctive  is  used  to  express  Facts  [nega- 
tive non) ,  as  follows  : 

1.  In  Descriptive  Clauses  of  Fact,  with  a  Relative  Pronoun. 

2.  In  Result  Clauses  of  Pact,  with  ut,  ut  nOn,  or  quln. 

3.  In  Substantive  Clauses  of  Fact,  with  ut  or  ut  nOn,  after  verbs 
of  Bringing  About  or  Existence} 

Is,  ille,  ETC.,  WITH  DESCRIPTIVE  MEANING  (stalls) 

422.  Thus  far,  we,  have  seen  is,  ille,  hie,  and  iste  used 
only  as  Determinative  Pronouns,  telling  who  is  meant,  etc. 

But  they  are  also  freely  used  with  Descriptive   force, 

telling  what  kind  of  person  is  meant, — i.  e.,  with  the  same 

meaning  as  talis,  such.     Thus: 

Marcus  is  est  qui  labOrare  amet,  Mark  is  one  that  loves  to  work,  or 
Mark  is  a  boy  that  loves  to  work. 

a.  Note  that  English  "  a  .  .  .  who "  is  always  descriptive. 

b.  One  may  also  use  a  Descriptive  Qlause  without  any  introductory 
word  at  all,  after  expressions  of  existence  or  non-existence.    Thus: 

Sunt  qui  hoc  credant,  there  are  (people)  who  believe  this. 

c.  Summary.  The  Descriptive  Subjunctive  Clause  is  used  after 
descriptive  antecedents  not  complete  in  themselves,  and  after  gene- 
ral expressions  of  existence  or  non-existence  (since  these  demand  a 
descriptive  idea  to  fill  them  out). 

1  An  extension  from  the  idea  of  Effecting.  "  It  has  been  brought  about 
that"  suggests  "it  is  now  the  case  that." 


Exercise  167 

423.  VOCABULARY 

(For  audeO,  gaudeO,  soleo,  fido,  see  417) 

.  commGnis,  -e,  common.  modus,-!,  M.  2, measure;  method, 

cOnfidO,  -fidere,  -flsus  sum, 3  (con-  way,  inanner,  fashion ;  kind, 

+  fidO),  trust  (to),  confide  (in).  provides, -videre,-vidi, -visum,  2 
diversus,  -a,  -umy. different.  (prO  +  video),  foresee, provide. 

Gaius,  -I,  M.  2,  a  name.  *  quaerO,  quaerere,  quaeslvi,  quae- 

intervallum,  -I,  N.  2,  interval.  situm,  3,  inquire,  ask,  seek. 

loquor, loquf,  locQtus  sum,  3,  talk,      talis,  -e,  such, 
converse.  tma.  Adv.,  in  unison,  together. 

424.  READING  MATTER 

(Be  ready  to  explain  every  Subjunctive  in  this  Lesson.  If  anyv;^here 
you  don't  see  at  once,  run  down  the  list  in  the  table  in  368.  If  your 
example  does  not  belong  to  any  of  these,  it  must  be  some  kind  of  Consecu- 
tive Clause  of  Fact.  In  that  case,  see,  finally,  under  which  of  our  three 
kinds  in  421  it  comes.) 

1.  (Gaius,  amicus  Marci,  Corf inium  per venit,  domuque  Marci 
inventa  ex  servo  ita  quaerit)  Marcusne  domi  est?  Ego  Gaius 
sum.  (Servus  respondet)  Nunc  abest,  sed  domum  mox  revertetur. 
Dixit  ut  se  hie  exspect ares.    Non  longum  erit  intervallum. 

2.  (Marcus  revertitur.  Duo  amici  inter  se  loquuntur.  Mar- 
cus) Ubi  hunc  annum  egisti?  (Gaius)  Diversls  (in)  locis;  sed 
semper  fui  in  Italia.  Hiemem  egi  Komae.  Koma  nunc  venio; 
sed  hac  aestate  fui  etiam  Capreis,  Pompeis,  Tibure.  Nunc 
gaudeo  iina  tecum  ^  Corfini  esse,  et  de  communibus  studils 
nostris  loqui. 

3.  (Marcus  ea  quae  fecit  Gaio  dicit.  Is  ita  respondet)  Si 
quis  est  talis  qui  pericula  amet,  tii  certe  is  es.  Si  quis  est  qui 
semper  omnia  ausus  sit,  tii  is  es.  Sed  nemo  est  qui  se  num- 
quam  decipiat.  In  hac  re,  put5,  vinceris.  Ipse  effecisti  ut 
hostis  multitudine^  militum  multo  validior  sit.  ludicium  tuum 
non  laudo. 

iWith  Personal,  Rel.,  and  Interrog.  Pronouns,  cum,  with,  is  enclitic. 
2  "Much  stronger  by  means  of"  suggests  the  idea  "much  stronger  in," 
.ie.,  the  idea  of  the  Respect  in  Which  the  enemy' is  stronger  (x+y). 


168  Determinative  Clauses 


LESSON  LVII 
DETERMINATIVE  CLAUSES 

425.  Specimen  Sentence  (from  last  Reading  Matter) : 

Marcus  ea  quae  fecit  Gaio  dicit,  Mark  tells  Gains  the  things  which 
he  has  done. 

a.  In  this  sentence,  ea  is  evidently  Determinative.  It  means  "the 
things."  But  it  isn't,  by  itself,  determinative  enough.  We  should 
still  have  to  ask,  '''what  things  do  you'  mean?"  To  this,  the  answer 
is  given  by  the  fact  stated  in  the  Relative  Clause,  "  (the  things)  which 
he  has  doneJ*^  The  clause  here  pieces  out  an  incomplete  Determina- 
tive word.    We  should  accordingly  name  it  a  Determinative  Clause. 

Such  clauses  are  extremely  common.  You  have  repeatedly  read 
them,  and  have  written  Latin  examples  of  them  yourself. 

h.  The  idea  is  in  strong  contrast  with  that  of  the  Descriptive 
Clause.  The  Determinative  Clause,  with  its  Antecedent  word  (e.  g., 
is),  is  like  a  big  Determinative  Pronoun  {pointing  at  something). 
The  Descriptive  Clause,  with  its  Antecedent  word,  is  like  a  big  Adjec- 
tive {describing  something). 

c.  Of  course  anything  may  be  determined,  by  the  mention  of  some 
fact  that  fixes  it, — thus  a  person,  a  thing,  a  time,  as  in  the  following; 

(From  204)  Solus  erat  cum  ils  puerls  qui  eum  lacessebant,  he  was 
alone  with  the  boys  who  were  worrying  him.  Determinative 
quI-Clause  (fixing  the  boys  meant). 

(From  the  same  passage)  Turn  cum  tn  Sextum  audi€bas,  nOs  nOn 
aderamus,  at  the  time  when  you  heard  Sextus,  we  were  not  pres- 
ent.   Determinative  cum-Clause  (fixing  the  time  meant). 

We  may  then  lay  down  our  rule  as  follows: 

426.  An  Indicative  Clause,  with  an  appropriate  Rela- 
tive or  Conjunction,  may  he  used  to  determine  an  anteced- 
ent of  any  kind  (a  person,  a  thing,  a  time,*  etc.,  etc.). 


Dative  of  Tendency^  etc.; — of  the  Concrete  Object  169 

THE  DATIVE  OF  TENDENCY,  PURPOSE,  OR  RESULT i 

427.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Cui  hocbellum  bono  erit?  to  whom  will  this  war  he  {for)  a  good  thing 

(i.  e.,  whom  will  it  tend  to  benefit)? 
Hi  milites  nObIs  auxilio  venient,  these  soldiers  will  come  for  an  aid 

to  us  (i.  e.,  to-aid  us). 
Hoc  bellum  puerOrum  magnae  mihi  cOrae  est,  this  ivar  of  the  boys 

is  (for)  a  great  anxiety  to  me. 

a.  In  each  of  these  sentences,  besides  a  Dative  of  the  Person  Con- 
cerned (cui,  nobis,  mihi;  260),  there  is  another  Dative  (bono,  auxilio, 
cOrae)  with  the  idea  of  Direction  ("to"  or  "for").  It  expresses  that 
toward  which  something  tends  (Tendency;  thus  bono);  or  something 
which  it  is  meant  to  reach  (Purpose;  thus  auxilio);  or  something 
which  it  does  reach  (Result;  thus  cOrae). 

b.  The  nouns  so  used  are  all  Abstract,^  and  Singular. 
We  may  then  lay  down  the  rule  that: 

428.  The  Dative  of  many  Abstract  Nouns  may  be  used 
to  express  Tendency,  Purpose,  or  Result. 

DATIVE  OP  THE  CONCRETE  OBJECT  FOR  WHICH 

429.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Locum  castrls  cepistis?  have  you  taken  a  place  for  a  camp? 

Diem  proelio  cOnstituistis?  have  you  appointed  a  day  for  the'battle? 

a.  Here  the  Dative  is  again  one  of  Figurative  Direction,  express- 
ing that  for  which  something  is  intended.  But  the  nouns  used  are 
Concrete.^  The  verbs  with  which  they  are  employed  express  Choos- 
ing or  Appointing.    Hence  we  may  lay  down  the  rule  that: 

430.  A  Dative  of  the  Concrete  Object  For  Which  some- 
thing is  intended  may  be  used  with  phrases  containing 
verbs  of  Choosing  or  Appointing. 

1  Also  called  the  Predicate  Dative  (it  is  regularly  predicative). — The  name 
"Two  Datives"  is  also  given  to  the  combination  (see  a). 

^Denoting  things  that  cannot  be  perceived  by  the  senses,  as  "  care." 
^Denoting  things  that  can  be  perceived  by  the  senses,  as  "camp." 


170     Accusative  of  Extent,  Duration,  or  Degree 

DATIVE  AND  ABLATIVE  WITH  fido  AND  cOnfidO 

431.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Tibi  cOnf  ido,  I  trust  {to)  you. 

Multitndinl  suae  cOnfldunt,  ^/le?/  trust  {to)  their  numbers. 
Multitftdine  sua  cOnfldunt,  they  trust  in  their  numbers. 
As  you  see  from  these  sentences, 

432.  Fido  and  confido,  trust,  may  take  the  Ablative. 
But  they  may  also  take  the  Dative  (so  regularly  of  a 
person)} 

THE  ACCUSATIVE  OF  EXTENT,  DURATION,  OR  DEGREE 

433.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Mtlrus  multOs  pedes  longus  est,  the  wall  is  many  feet  long. 

DuS.s  horas  cotidie  ambulo,  I  walk  two  hours  every  day. 

Multum  cotidie  ambulo,  I  walk  much  {a  good  deal)  every  day. 
a.  As  you  see,  the  Accusatives  in  these  examples  all  indicate 
Extent,— of  space,  of  time,  or  of  the  amount  of  activity.     Hence, 
distinguishing  by  appropriate  names,  we  may  say  that: 

434.  Extent  of  Space,  Duration  of  Time,  and  Degree 
are  expressed  by  the  Accusative} 

436.  READING  MATTER 

(Continue  to  study  the  Subjunctives  with  especial  care.) 
(Marcus  respondet)  Mihi  non  multum  confidis.    Sed  n5n  effi- 
cis  ut  verear.^    Me  n5n  n5visti.    Sunt  qui  pericula  semper  time- 
ant.   Ego  eius  modi*  non  sum.   Sunt  qui  omnia  audeant.   Neque 
eius  sum  generis.     Is^  sum  qui,  consili5  fidens,  semper  solitus 

iThey  take  the  Dative  as  verbs  of  Attitude  (cf.  English  "trust  to"). 
The  Ablative  construction  is  Locative  (cf*.  English  "trust  in"). 

2  This  Accusative  is  like  the  one  with  per.  It  expressed  originally  the  idea 
of  continuous  contact. 

3"  You  do  not  make  that  I  fear."  In  Enghsh,  you  do  not  make  me  fear. 
What  kind  of  clause? 

-*  Of  this  fashion,  of  this  kind. 

'>Is  is  here  descriptive,  =  talis.    Translate  by  /  am  one  who. 


Exercises  171 

sim  omnis  casus  pr5videre.  Quod^  nunc  feci.  Nam  primum 
milites  optimi  generis  elegi,  et  qui  mihi  confiderent.  Deinde 
hos  rei  militari  adsuefeci,  it  a  ut  omnia  facere  didicerint.  Inter 
alia  didicerunt  fugam  prim5  simulare,  tum  signa  convertere, 
inque  hostes  omnibus  ex  partibus  simul  impetum  facere.  Co- 
gito  Lucium  hoc  modo^  decipere.  Nam  ii  quos  ille  elegit,^  mul- 
titudine  sua  confisi,  temere  nostros  consequentur,  neque  ullum 
timebunt  casum.  (Gains)  Nonne  Lucius  quoque  hoc  intervallo 
aliquot  dierum  iititur  ?  (Marcus)  Forsitan  is  agmen  suum  ali- 
quot horas  per  silvas  egerit,  et  milites  eius  inter  se  gladiis  et 
scutis  pugnaverint;  sed  certe  nihil  aliud  {—else)  egerunt. 

436.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  Let  us  talk  together  (=  between  ourselves).  You  have 
inquired  about  my  plans.  2.  In-the-first-place,  Lucius  is  not 
of-a-kind*  to  have  foreseen  that^  which  I  am  planning.  3.  There 
are  boys  who  work  with  brains.  4.  He  is  not  of  this  class.  5. 
He  is  one^  who  has  been  accustomed  to  conquer;  and  so  he  trusts 
himself.  6.  He  has  always  profited -by  the  carefulness^  of  his 
friends  in  all  things,  so  that  he  has  never  been  carefuP  himself. 

7.  In-the-second-place,  by  ^giving  him  a  much  larger  army,  I 
have  made  him  not  fear^  any  danger.  8.  He  trusts  much  in  his 
strength.  (Gains)  I  shall  rejoice  if  you  conquer  him  by  this 
method. 

lAnd  this.  Quod  feci  is  not  dependent,  but  goes  right  on.  (Call  it  a 
Forward-Moving  Relative  Clause  or  Sentence). 

"^By  this  method.  Means  suggesting  a  new  force,  that  of  Way  or  Manner 
(x  +  y ) .  We  shall  see  this  force  in  its  full  and  separate  power  later.  It  starts 
up  from  several  sources. 

3  Is  this  clause  Determinative  or  Descriptive  ? 

4 Say  "such  who  has  foreseen,"  using  talis  or  is  (it  makes  no  difference 
which). 

5 Use  is  (Neut.  PI.).    Is  it  Determinative  or  Descriptive  here  ? 

6  Use  is.     Is  it  Determinative  or  Descriptive  here  ? 

7 Use  diligentia  and  diligens  for  "carefulness"  and  "careful." 

8 Use  the  Ablative  Absolute  (a  much  larger  army  having  been  given  him). 

8 Say  "have  made  that  he  does  not  fear." 


172 


Past  Perfect  Subjunctive 


LESSON  LVIII 


THE  PAST  PERFECT  SUBJUNCTIVE 

437.  The  Past  Perfect  Subjunctive  is  formed  in  the 
Active  by  adding  -issem,  etc.,  to  the  Perfect  Stem,  and  in 
the  Passive  by  combining  the  Perfect  Passive  Participle 
with  essem,  etc.  When,  then,  you  have  learned  it  for  one 
verb,  you  can  form  it  for  any  other  from  the  last  two 
Principal  Parts. 


Conjugation  I        ' 

1st  Sing,    amavissem 
2d      "        amavisses 
3d      "        amavisset 


1st   PI 
2d      " 
3d      " 


amavissemus 

amavissetis 

amavissent 


ACTIVE 

II 
monuissem 
monuisses 
monuisset 

monuissemus 

monuissetis 

monuissent 


III  IV 

Similarly 

texissem,  etc. 
cepissem,  etc. 
audivissem,  etc. 


PASSIVE 

1st  Sing,  amatus  essem  monitus  essem 
2d      *'              "       esses  "         esses 

3d      "  "       esset  "         esset 

1st    PL  amati  essemus  monitl  essemus 
2d      "              "     essetis  *'      essetis 

3d      "  "     essent  "      essent 


Similarly 

tectus  essem,  etc. 
captus  essem,  etc. 
auditus  essem,  etc. 


438.  The  Past  Perfect    Subjunctive   of  the  Irregular 
Verb  sum  is: 


1st  Sing,  fuissem 
2d  "  fuisses 
8d      "       fuisset 


1st  PL  fuissemus 
2d     "     fuissetis 
3d     "    fuissent 


Ablative  of  Cause  or  Beason; — of  Respect     173 

THE  ABLATIVE  OP  CAUSE  OR  REASON 

439.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Vulnere  aeger  sum,  I  am  ill  from  (or  with)  a  wound. 
Gloria  tua  gaudeo,  I  rejoice  in  your  glory. 

a.  In  both  these  sentences  the  Ablative  expresses  Cause  or 
Reason  (English  from,  with,  in,  on  account  of,  because  of).  No 
preposition  appears. 

Our  rule  will  then  be: 

440.  Cause  or  Reason  may  be  expressed  by  the  Abla- 
tive.^ 

THE  ABLATIVE  OP  RESPECT 

441.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Lucius  multitadine  suOrum  valet,  Lucius  is  strong  in  the  number  of 

his  soldiers, 
Marcus  et  Lacius  virtdte  pares  sunt:  ingenio  nOn  sunt  pares,  Mark 

and  Lucius  are  equal  in  courage :  in  intellect  they  are  not  equal, 

a.  In  these  sentences  the  Ablative  answers  the  question,  In 
what  respect  f   Wherein  9 

We  may  then  lay  down  the  rule  that: 

442.  The  Respect  in  Which*  the  meaning  of  a  Verb  or 
Adjective  is  to  be  taken  may  be  expressed  by  the  Ablative.^ 

•1  The  construction  is  of  composite  origin,  the  idea  having  been  expressed 
originally  by  three  entirely  distinct  cases,  the  Ablative,  the  Sociative, 
and  the  Locative.  Our  EngHsh  ways  of  expressing  the  idea  correspond 
(thus  "desperate  from  his  trouble,"  "desperate  with  his  trouble,"  "desper- 
ate in  his  trouble") ;  only,  in  English  the  use  of  the  differing  Prepositions 
has  kept  the  three  constructions  from  coming  to  be  thought  of  as  one. 

2  The  construction  is  of  composite  origin,  having  come  from  three  dis- 
tinct sources,  the  true  Ablative  of  the  Point  of  View  from  Which  (thus 
" equal /rom  the  Point  of  View  of  courage"),  the  Sociative  (thus  "strong 
with  the  number  of  his  soldiers,"  "  by  means  of  the  number  of  his  soldiers  "), 
and  the  Locative  (thus  "equal  in  courage").  We  have  the  same  ways  of 
expressing  the  idea  in  English,  but  the  use  of  differing  Prepositions  keeps 
them  from  becoming  one  in  our  thought. 


174  Substantive  Quod-Clause  of  Fact 

THE  SUBSTANTIVE  quod-CLAUSE  OF  FACT 

443.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Id  mihi  placet,  quod  pueri  pills  nOn  ntuntur,  this  pleases  me,  (namely) 

that  the  boys  do  not  use  Javelins. 
Mihi  placet  quod  puerl  pills  nOn  Qtuntur,  it  pleases  me  that  the  hoys 

do  not  use  Javelins. 
Quod  puerl  pills  nOn  atuntur  laudo,  I  praise  (the  fact)  that  the  boys 

do  not  use  javelins. 

a.  In  the  first  sentence  the  quod-Clause  explains  id,  standing  in 
a  sort  of  Apposition  to  it.  In  the  second  and  third  sentences,  the 
use  is  the  same,  except  that  the  clause  stands  by  itself,  as  the  Sub- 
ject or  Object  of  the  verb. 

b.  In  all  three  examples  the  quod-Clause  is  like  a  Noun  or  Pro- 
noun,^—  i.  e.,  it  is  Substantive,    And,  in  all,  it  states  a  fact. 

We  may  then  lay  down  the  rule  that: 

444.  A  Substantive  qnod-Clause  of  Fact  [Indicativey 
may  be  used  in  explanation  of  some  antecedent  word;  or 
it  may  itself  form  the  Subject  or  Object  of  a  Verb. 

a.  Quod-Clause  of  Respect.    The  Substantive  quod-Clause  may 

be  used  in  loose  connection  with  the  main  sentence,  meaning  with 

respect  to  the  fact  that,  as  to  the  fact  that,  as  for  ....  Thus: 

Quod  tn  victOriam  exspectas,  videbimus  cum  pugnabimus,  as /o?'  the 

fact  that  you  expect  victory  {=as  for  your  expecting  victory)^ 

we  shall  see  when  ive  fight. 

445.  VOCABULARY 

aequus,   -a,  -um,    equal;   fair;  lib&nter,  Adv.,  willingly. 

favorable.  moveO,  movere,    mOvI,  motum, 
aeque,  Adv.,  equally.  2,  move. 

auctOritas,  -atis,  F.  3,  authority,  opus  (same  word  as  before),  with 
concedo,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -cessum,         est  and  Abl.  =  there  is  need  of. 

3  (con-  +  cedO,  yield  thorough-         Originally  this  Abl.  was  one  of 

ly)j  yield,  grant,  concede.  Means  (thus  there  is  work  to  be 

cOpia.y-aej¥.l,  abundance,  sup-         done  with  .  .  .  .) 

ply.    In  F\.,  resources;   (mili-  saepe  (as  before),  o/^en.   Compar. 

tary)  forces.  saepius,  Superl.  saepissime. 

disciplina,  -ae,  F.  1,  discipline,  tempus,  temporis,  N.  3,  time. 

imperium,  -i,    N.    2,    command,  Dniversus,  -a,  -um,  all  (without 

empire.  ^  exception). 


Exercises  175 

446.  READING  MATTER 

(Note  that  times,  as  well  as  persons,  are  here  described.) 

1.  Marcus  talis  erat  qui,  c5nsili6  fidens,  semper  solitus  esset 
omnis  casiis  providere.  Liicius  is  erat  qui,  viribus  suis  c5nfisus, 
nihil  umquam  timuisset.  In  eius  modi  certaminibus  saepe 
vicerat,  n5nnumquam  casii,  saepius  viribus  magnis  suis,  saepis- 
sime  autem  consiliis  et  opibus  Marei  in  omnibus  rebus  friictus.^ 
Sed  non  iina^  nunc  consilia  capiebant.  Hoc  autem  tempus  tale 
erat  quo  (or  cum)  consilio  ac  iudicio  magis  quam  viribus  opus 
esset.  Qua  re  ^  is  qui  omnia  pericula  providerat *  meliore  (in)  loc5 
erat  quam  is  qui  nihil  timuerat.* 

2.  Gratia  aeque  valebant  Marcus  et  Lucius,  auctdritate  pliis  ^ 
valebat^  Marcus.  Hie  et  durus  et  aequus  erat.  Qua  re  copiae  eius 
per  hos  dies  semper  in  opere  versatae  sunt;  neque  iillum  fuerat 
tempus  cum  is  meliore  (in)  loc5  apud  condiscipulos  fuisset. 
Placebat^  his  quod  tam  multa  discebant,  et  movebantur 
periculo  in  qu5  erant.  Itaque  iiniversi  ei  auctoritatem  atque 
imperium  libenter  concedebant,  disciplinamque  servabant. 

447.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  There  were  many  in  Mark's  forces  who  at  first  had  not 
trusted  his  judgment;  for  Mark  was  the  one*  who  had  brought 
it  about  that  they  were  less  strong  in  number  than  the  enemy. 
2.  But  all  were  moved  now  by  the  danger;  and  there  was  need 
of  discipline.  3.  So  they  yielded  everything  to  Mark's  authority 
and  command.  4.  Their  leader  was  both  stern  and  fair.  5.  It 
also  pleased  them  that  they  were  very-often  learning  new  things 
together.  6.  For  which  reason  all  were  engaged  equally  will- 
ingly in  doing  work;  nor  had  there  ever  been  a  time  when  Mark 
had  been  in  greater  popularity,  or  had  been  more  powerful.^ 

^Having  enjoyed,  i.  e.,  because  he  ^ig  this  idea  primarily  Determin- 

had  enjoyed.  ative,  or  primarily  Descriptive? 

^Together.  ^  More  powerful.    Plus  is  an  Ace. 

3Abl.  of  Cause,  because  of  which  of  Degree. 
thing,  wherefore,  for  which  reason.  ^ impersonal  (it pleased). 


176 


Imperative. — Supine 


448. 


LESSON  LIX 
THE  IMPERATIVE  (Finished) 


Active 

Passive 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

( 

Pres.  2d 

ama 

amate 

amare 

amamihl 

I. 

Fut.  2d 

amatO 

amatote 

amator 

( 

<  Fut  3d 

amato 

amanto 

amator 

amantor 

( 

'  Pres.  2d 

mone 

monete 

monere 

monemini 

11.      ! 

Fut.  2d 

moneto 

monetOte 

monetor 

( 

.  Fut.  3d 

monetO 

monento 

monetor 

monentor 

^  Pres.  2d 

tege 

tegite 

tegere 

tegimini 

Fut.  2d 

tegito 

tegitote 

tegitor 

HI. 

Fut.  3d 

tegito 

tegunto 

tegitor 

teguntor 

Pres.  2d 

cape 

capita 

capere 

capimini 

Fut  2d 

capito 

capito  te 

capitor 

I  Fut  3d 

capito 

capiunto 

capitor 

capiuntor 

'  Pres.  2d 

audi 

audite 

audire 

audlmini 

IV. 

Fat  2d 

audito 

audltote 

auditor 

.  Fut.  3d 

audrto 

audiunto 

auditor 

audiuntor 

Irreg. 

Pres.  2d 

es 

este 

Verb     - 

Fut  2d 

estO 

estote 

sum 

.  Fut  3d 

estO 

sunto 

449.  The  (so-called)  Present  Imperative  refers  to  the 
immediate  future,  the  Future  to  a  more  distinctly  future 
time,  or  to  future  time  in  general  (hence  especially  used 
in  laws,  treaties,  and  maxims).     The  negative  is  ne. 

THE  SUPINE 

450.  The  Supine  is  a  Verbal  Noun  of  the  Fourth 
Declension.  It  has  two  cases  only  in  ordinary  use,  an 
Accusative  in  -um  and  an  Ablative  in  -u.  The  Accusa- 
tive is  identical  in  form  with  the  Perfect  Passive  Parti- 
ciple Neuter  (though  of  a  diflPerent  Declension). 


Uses  of  Siipi)ies._ — Ablative  of  Accordance       177 


451. 

SUPINES 

Conjugation     I 

II                             III 

IV 

Acc.    amatum 

monitum        tectum     captum 

auditum 

Ahl.     amatQ 

monita          tectn        captci 

auditCi 

462.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Te  monitum  venio,  /  come  to  warn  you. 

Hoc  facile  facta  est,  (this  is  easy  in-the-doing,  =  )  this  is  easy  to  do. 
As  you  see  from  these  examples, 

453.  1.  The  Supine  in  -um  is  used  to  express  Purpose 
after  Verbs  of  Motion.^ 

2.  The  Supine  in  -u  is  used  to  express  Respect  with 
Adjectives. 

THE  ABLATIVE  OP  ACCORDANCE 

454.  Specimen  Sentences: 

More  suO,  in  accordance  with  his  custom. 
Ex  cOnsuetndine  sua,  in  accordance  tvith  his  custom. 
COnsuettldine  sua,  in  accordance  with  his  custom. 
Voluntate  eius,  (in  accoi  dance  with  his  will,  =  )  with  his  good-will, 
with  his  approval, 
a.  Each  of  these  examples  expresses  that  in  accordance  with 
which  something  is  done.     With  cOnsuetCidine,  one  may  use  the 
Preposition  or  omit  it.     With  the  others  it  is  not  commonly  used  in 
prose.    Hence  we  may  lay  down  the  rule  that: 

455.  That  in  Accordance  with  which  one  acts  or  judges 
may  be  expressed  by  the  Ablative  of  certain  words,  regu- 
larly without  a  Preposition.^ 

a.  So  especially  mQre  and  cOnsuetGdine,  iadicio,  exemplo,  volun- 
tate. 

5.  With  Tnost  words,  de  or  ex  must  be  used  to  express  the  idea. 

1  In  origin,  the  Accusative  Supine  in  -um  is  simply  an  old  Accusative  of 
the  end  of  motion.    Monitum  venio  is  like  domum  venio. 

2  The  frequent  use  of  ex  with  consuetudine,  and  the  regular  use  of  de  or 
ex  with  all  but  a  small  list  of  words,  show  the  construction  to  be  of  true 
Ablative  (i.  e..  Separative)  origin.  It  expressed  the  idea  of  that  from- which 
the  act  proceeded  (thus  more  suo,  ''  proceeding  from  his  custom  "). 


178  Constructions  with  Comparatives 

ABLATIVE,  ETC.,  WITH  A  COMPARATIVE 

456.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Tn  fortior  frat^e  es,  you  are  braver  than  your  brother. 
To  fortior  es  quam  frater,  you  are  braver  than  your  brother. 
Scntum  habes  meO  melius,  you  have  a  better  shield  than  mine. 
Sexti  scutum  longius  est  quam  Marci,  Sextus'  shield  is  longer  than 
Mark^s. 

a.  You  see  that  the  idea  than  after  a  comparative  may  be  ex- 
pressed either  by  the  Ablative,^  or  by  quam,  the  second  word  then 
being  in  the  same  case  as  the  first.  But  you  also  find  only  quam, 
if  the  first  word  is  in  any  case  but  Nominative  or  Accusative.^ 

The  examples  represent  regular  usage.    Our  rules  will  then  be: 

457.  A  Comparative  Adjective  is  often  followed  by 
the  Ablative  meaning  ^'than.^^  But  quam  may  generally 
be  used  instead,  and  MUST  be  used  if  the  first  of  the 
words  compared  is  in  any  case  but  Nominative  or  Accu- 
sative, 

458.  VOCABULARY 

apertus, -a, -um,  open.  quadringenti,  -ae,  -a,  four  hun- 

citrSiy  this  side.  Prep.,  taking  Ace.  dred. 

decimus,  -a,  -um,  tenth.  septem,  indecl.  Adj.,  seven. 

dexter,  -tra,  -trum,  right;  dex-  sinister,   -tra,   -trum,    left;    si- 

tra,  -ae,  as  Noun,  right  hand.  nistra,  -ae,  as  Noun,  left  hand. 

gdtlcO,  edGcere,  edtixr,  eductum,  tango,  tangere,  tetigl,  tactum, 

3  {e-\-dZicG),  lead  out.  3,  touch. 

morior,  mori,  mortuus   sum,  3,  tempestas,  -atis,  F.  3,  weather; 

die.     Par  tic.  mortuus,  ^=  dead.  bad  iveather,  storm. 

passus,  -ns,  4,  pace  (with  both  transgredior,    -gredl,    -gressus 

feet  ;  =  about  five  English  feet).  sum,  3  (trans  +  gradior,  step 

pro  (as  before),  in  front  of;  hence  across),  cross. 

as  a  representative  of,  in  be-  u\trSi,beyond,onthe  other  side  of. 

half  of,  for;     hence  further,  Prep.,  taking  Ace. 

in  place  of,  as.  tlsus,-ns,  M.  4,  use;  experience. 

1  The  idea  is  of  the  thing  reckoned  from  as  a  standard. 

2  Because  then  the  second  word  does  not  itself  depend  upon  the  Com- 
parative idea  (thus  the  shield  is  not  longer  than  Mark). 


Exercise  179 

459.  READING  MATTER 

(Watch  for  is  describing  persons  and  things,  including  times.) 

1.  Magnae  secutae  sunt  tempestates,  quae  et  pueros  et  multos 
ex  patribus  e5rum  domi  continerent.^ 

2.  Eo  tempore  cum  (or  quo)  bonam  exspectabant^  tempestatem, 
fere  sic  de  communi  studio  loquebantur:  (Talk  of  some  fathers) 
Hoc  tempus  id  est  cum  opus  sit^  bonis  et  acquis  iiidicibus. 
Magnane  sunt  auctoritate  et  gratia  ii  quos  pueri  elegerunt?^ 
(Ans.)  Ita;  ii  sunt  qui  magnum  rei  militaris  iisum  habuerintJ 
His  ambo  exercitus  aeque  c5nfidunt.  Nemini  quidem  pliis 
quam  his  confidunt;  nam  nem5  his  peritior  (comparative)  est. 
Has  leges  iam  pr5niintiaverunt: 

3.  (Leges  pugnae)  Intervallum  septem  dierum  esto.  His 
diebus  nemo  finis  alterius  exercitiis  transgreditor.  In  aperta 
valle  ab  utraque  parte  fluminis  ante  diem  pugnae  dictum  nemo 
versator.  Nemo  consilia  ducis  sui  cum  militibus  alterius  ducis 
communicate. 

4.  Locum  castris  Marcus  ad  dextram,  Lucius  ad  sinistram 
capito.  Haec  castra  aequ5  spatio  a  flumine  absunt5.  Hoc 
spatium  quadringentorum  passuum  esto. 

5.  Septimo  die  decertanto.  Eius  diei  decima  hora*  iinus  ex 
iiidicibus  signum  cornu  dato.  Tum  duces  suum  quisque  exer- 
citum  ediicunto  vel  citra  vel  ultra  fliimen  pugnatum. 

6.  Scutis  et  gladiis  modo  in  proelio  iituntor.  Pilis  ne  iituntor. 
Alia  omnia  R5man6  faciunto  more. 

7.  Qui  gladio  tactus  erit,^  pro  mortuo  habetor,  exque  exercitii 
suo  a  tergo  excedito. 

8.  (Comment  of  a  listener)  Haec  facilia  dictii  sunt,  factii 
erunt  difficillima.  Qiii  pugnatum  venerint,  ii  non  libenter 
discedent. 

1  Does  this  clause  determine  or  describe? 

^At  the  time  when.    A  Determinative  cum-Clause  (425,  c). 

3  The  present  time  is  one  when^  =  is  such  that.    What  kind  of  clause? 

4  The  Romans  reckoned  twelve  hours,  from  sunrise  to  sunset. 
^  Who  shall  be  touched,  he  .  .  ,  =he  who,  etc. 


180 


Infinitives  Finished 


LESSON  LX 

THE  INFINITIVES  (Finished) 

460.  1.  We  have*  seen  how  to  form  the  Present  Infini- 
tives (92,  179). 

2.  The  Perfect  Infinitives  correspond  in  form  to  the 
Perfect  Indicatives.  Thus  Active  Indicative  amavi, 
I  have  loved,  Infinitive  amav-isse,  to  have  loved;  Passive 
Indicative  amatus  sum,  I  have  been  loved,  Infinitive  ama- 
tus esse,^  to  have  been  loved. 

3.  The  Future  Infinitive  Active  is  formed  by  the 
Future  Active  Participle  with  esse.  Thus  amaturus  esse,' 
to  be  going  to  love.  The  Future  Passive  is  peculiarly 
formed,  namely  by  the  Supine  in  -um,  coupled  with  iri. 
Thus  amatum  iri,  to  be  going  to  be  loved. 


461.  The  Infinitives  for 

I 


our  specimen  verbs  are  thus : 
II 


Active 

Passive 

Active 

Passive 

amare 
amavisse 
amatnrus  esse 

amarl 

amatus  esse 
amatum  irl 

monere 
monuisse 
monitCirus  esse 

moneri 
monitus  esse 
monitum  iri 

Active 

Passive 

III 

Active 

Passive 

tegere 
texisse 
tectorus  esse 

tegl 

tectus  esse 
tectum  Irl 

capere 
cepisse 
captQrus  esse 

cap! 

captus  esse 
captum  irl 

IV 
Active 

audire 
audlvisse 
auditnrus  esse 

Passive 
audiri 

auditus  esse 
auditum  iri 

Irregular  Verb  sum 
esse 
fuisse 
futnrus  esse  or  fore 

1  Esse  is  very  frequently  omitted  in  the  Perfect  Passive  Infinitive,  and 
almost  always  so  in  the  Future  Active  Infinitive.  In  our  reading,  this  free- 
dom of  choice  will  be  shown  by  parentheses. 


Infinitive  Tenses. — Infinitive  in  Indirect  Discourse     181 

THE  MEANINGS  OP  THE  INFINITIVE  TENSES  i 

462.  The  tenses  of  the  Infinitive  express  an  act  as,  at 

the  time  of  the  verb  on  which  they  depend,  completed 

(Perfect  Infinitive),  in  progress  (Present  Infinitive),  or 

yet  to  come  (Future  Infinitive).     They  are  thus  purely 

relative  tenses,  like  those  of  the  Participle.     Thus: 

Dicitur  labOrd.visse,  he  is  said  to  have  worked  (Perfect  Infinitive). 
Dicitur  laborare,  he  is  said  to  be  working  (Present  Infinitive). 
Dicitur  labOratQrus  esse,  he  is  said  to  be  going  to  work  (Future 
Intinitive). 

USE  OF  THE  INFINITIVE  IN  INDIRECT  DISCOURSE 

463.  When,  instead  of  being  put  directly  (Direct  Dis- 
course), one's  words  or  thoughts  are  made  to  depend  upon 
a  verb  of  saying,  thinking,  or  the  like,  they  are  said  to  be 
in  Indirect  Discourse. 

a.  Thus  in  *'I  think  (or  know,  or  believe)  him  to  be  honest,"  the 
words  "  him  to  be  honest "  are  an  indirect  expression  of  the  thought, 
"he  is  honest."  In  "he  says  that  he  shall  be  present,"  the  words 
"that  he  shall  be  present"  are  an  indirect  expression  of  the  words, 
"  I  shall  be  present." 

b.  English  can  use  the  Infinitive  with  such  verbs  as  think, 
believe,  know,  etc.  (as  above).  Latin,  by  a  striking  usage,  can 
employ  it  also  with  such  verbs  as  say  (dicO),  where  we  have  to 
use  a  clause,  commonly  introduced  by  that, —  which  may,  however, 
be  omitted. 

1  The  Latin  Present  Infinitive  was  at  first  merely  a  verbal  noun,  in  two 
eases, — a  Dative  in  -i,  and  a  Locative  in  -e.  These  were  used  like  the  cases 
of  any  other  nouns  in  the  same  period.  Thus  "  I  drive  the  slave  to  work  " 
(Dative  of  Direction),  "I  see  the  slave  at  work, — in  the  act  of  working" 
(Locative) .  As  the  -uerft-f  eehng  grew,  the  case-endings  became  meaningless, 
and  were  then  used  to  express  voice;  and  forms  also  then  sprang  up  to 
express  the  other  two  tense-ideas  (Perfect  and  Future). 

The  English  "to-Infinitive"  has  had  in  part  exactly  the  same  history. 
It  was  originally  a  Dative  Noun,  helped  out  by  the  Preposition  "to."  The 
original  Dative  forces  still  remain  in  common  use,  as  in  "he  went  out  to 
play,''''  and  "  I  drove  him  to  work.''^  But  all  consciousness  of  the  case  has 
passed  away,  so  that  the  Infinitive  may  to  day  be  used  also  as  Subject  (thus  in 
"  to  play  is  easier  than  to  work  ")  or  Object  (thus  in  "I  love  to  play"). 


182  Infinitive  in  Indirect  Discourse 

c.  Thus  the  ideas  of  the  three  statements,  ego  audivT,  I  have 
heard,  ego  audio,  I  hear,  and  ego  audiam,  /  shall  hear,  may  be 
expressed  in  dependence  upon  a  verb  of  saying  in  any  tense,  becom- 
ing Infinitive,  as  in  the  following: 

464.  Specimen  Sentences: 

•  Dicit  se  audivisse,  he  says  (that)  he  has  heard  (he  says  audivi  ) 

Dicit  se  audire,  he  says  (that)  he  hears  (  "      "    audio    ), 

Dicit  se  auditnrum  (esse),  he  says  (that)  he  shall  hear  (  "      "    audiam) 
Dixit  se  audivisse,  he  said  (that)  he  had  heard        (he  said  audlvl 
Dixit  se  audire,  he  said  (that)  he  heard  ("     "     audio    ) 

Dixit  se  auditnrum  (esse),  he  said  (that)  he  should 

hear  (  u     «     audiam). 

a.  You  see  that  in  each  of  these  sentences  the  Infinitive  makes 
an  indirect  Statement,  and  that  its  Subject  is  in  the  Accusative. 
Our  rule  will  then  be: 

466.  The  Infinitive  is  used  to  express  an  indirect  State- 
ment after  verbs  of  Saying^  Thinking,  Perceiving,  Know- 
ing, and  the  like.  The  Subject  of  the  Infinitive  is  put  in 
the  Accusative,^ 

a.  The  Subject  is  sometimes  omitted,  when  perfectly  clear.  Thus: 
Dicit  pard,tum  esse,  he  says  that  he  is  ready. 
Dixit  audivisse,  he  said  that  he  had  heard. 

466.  For  verbs  having  no  participial  stem  (thus  studeo, 

studere,  studui, — )  the  Future  Infinitive  is  replaced  by 

fore  or  futurum  esse  with  ut  and  the   Subjunctive    (of 

expected  future  fact;   421,  3);    and  the  same  equivalent 

may  be  used  for  the  Future  Infinitive  of  any  verb.     Thus : 

Non  credo  fore  ut  ille  studeat,  I  don't  believe  that  it  will  be  (the 
case)  that  he  will  study,  =  I  don't  believe  that  he  will  study. 

1  This  use  of  the  Infinitive  has  grown  out  of  case-uses  (see  last  footnote), 
as  in  "I  drive  him  to  work"  (Dative  of  Direction),  and  "I  see  him  at 
work"  (Locative),  which  last  easily  suggests,  "I  see  that  he  is  working.^'' 
From  verbs  of  perceiving,  the  use  probably  first  extended  itself  to  verbs  of 
knowing  or  thinking,  and  then  to  verbs  of  saying.  The  Accusative,  originally 
the  object  of  the  main  verb,  came  to  be  felt  as  the  Subject  of  the  Infinitive, 


Exercises  183 

467.  VOCABULARY 

collis,  -is,  M.  3,  hill,  exterus,  -a,  -um,  outside,  Com- 

committo,  -mittere,  -misT,  -mis-  par.  exterior,    outer,    Superl. 

sum,  3  (con- +  mitto,  bring  to-  extremus   or  extimus,    ouier- 

getheT),Join;  commit.  most,  extreme  (or  the  edge  of). 

contendO,  -tendere,  -tendi,  -ten-  impedimentum,    -I,    N.    2,    hin- 

tum,  3  (con-  +  tendo,  stretch  drance. 

thoroughly),    strain;     strive,  medius,  -a,  -um,  middle  or  the- 

hasten.  viiddle-of. 

dedCicO,-dilcere,  -dtlxT,-ductum,3  sub,  under.  Prep,,  taking  Ace.  of 

(de  +  dQcO),  lead  off.  motion,  and  Abl.  of  rest. 

468.  READING  MATTER 

1.  (A  judge)  Multi  venient  pugnam  spectatum.  Hipugnanti- 
bus  impedimento  erunt.  Quo  modo  hoc  prohibeamus  ?  (Another) 
Id  facillimum  erit  factu.  Hos  universes  ante  pugnam  in  extre- 
mam  vallem  sub  colles  deducemus.  Pro  certo  habeo^  ambos 
exercitus,  signo  dato,  in  mediam  vallem  contenturos  (esse), 
ibique  proelium  commissum  iri.  (The  third)  Facile  erit  eos  qui 
aderunt  sub  colles  deducere;  sed  manebunt  sub  collibus? 

2.  (One  asks)  Quem  vos  putatis  victurum  (esse)  ?  Luci  exer- 
citus aliquanto  maior  est  quam  Marci.  (Another)  Marcus  multo 
diligent ior  Lucid  est.  Pro  certo  habeo  eum  suo  more  omnes 
dolos  cogitavisse,  atque  etiam  nunc  rei  militari  domi  studere. 

3.  IJnus  e  iudicibus  credebat  Marcum  victurum  (esse).  Pr5 
certo  habebat  omnes  dol5s  ab  e5  c5gitat6s  (esse). 

469.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  I  feel  sure  that  Mark  has  formed  plans,  is  drilling  his 
men,  and  will  conquer.  2.  But  I  believe  that  those  who  come 
to  witness  the  battle  will  be  a  great  hindrance  Ho  the  fighters. 

3.  (Ans.)  The  judges    say   that  they  shall  lead-off^  all  these 
(people)  under ^  the  diflPerent  hills  on*  the   edge-of-the  valley. 

4.  The  armies  will  hasten  toward  the  middle-of-the  valley,  and 
the  battle  will  be  joined  there. 

1  Hold  for  certain,=feel  sure.  sj^ea  of  rest,  or  of  motion? 

2  Be  careful  about  the  case,  ^See  the  Latin  idea,  in  468, 1. 


184  Gerund  and  Gerundive 

LESSON  LXI 

INFLECTION  OF  THE  REGULAR  VERB  (Finished) 

THE  GERUND 

470.  .1.  We  have  seen  that,  in  many  combinations,  the 
Future  Passive  Participle  has  gained  the  power  of  express- 
ing the  leading  idea  in  its  phrase,  as  in  cupidus  belli 
gerendi,  desirous  of  war  to  he  waged,  which  amounts  to 
saying  desirous  OF  WAGING-  war.  The  Gerundive  is 
thus  nearly  the  equivalent  of  a  Verbal  Noun.  It  is  in 
thought  the  leading  and  governing  word,  but  not  yef 
grammatically  so. 

2.  It  naturally  came  in  time  to  take  this  one  step  fur- 
•  ther,  and  became  a  complete  Verbal  Noun,  in  the  Neuter 
Gender   and   Singular   Number.     It    is    then   called   the 
Gerund,     Thus  in: 

Cupidus  bellum  gerendi,  desirous  of  waging  war. 
We  may  then  define  the  Gerund  as  follows: 

471.  The  Gerund  is  a  Complete  Verbal  Noun.  As 
Verbal,  it  has  the  power  of  governing  a  Substantive. 
As  a  Noun,  it  is  itself  governed  in  case. 

The  Gerund  exists  only  in  four  cases.    Thus,  for  amO, 
Gen.  amandi 
Dat.  amando 
Aqc.  amandum 
Abl.  amando 

472.  Since  the  Gerundive  and  Gerund  are  closely  cor- 
responding constructions,  we  may  conveniently  sum  up 
their  uses  together,>as  follows: 

473.  The  Gerundive  and  Gerund  exist  only  in  the  Geni- 
tive, Dative,  Accusative,  and  Ablative  cases.  The  case- 
uses  are  in  general  the  same  as  those  of  Nouns.     Thus: 


Gerund,  etc. — Natural  Harmony  of  Tenses     185 


474.  GERUNDIVE 

Gen.  cupidus  pugnae  videndae,  desir- 
ous of  seeing  the  fight. 

Dat.  diem  cOnstituerunt  open  faci- 
endo,  they  have  appointed  a 
day  for  doing  the  work. 

Ace.  alacer  ad  pugnam  videndam, 
eager  for  seeing  the  battle. 

Abl.    drligentia  in bellis  legendls, d^7^- 


GERUND 

cupidus  pugnam  videndl,  de- 
sirous of  seeing  the  fight. 

diem  cOnstituerunt  pugnan- 
do,  they  have  appointed 
a  day  for  fighting. 

alacer  ad  pugnandum,  eager 
for  fighting. 

drligentia  in  legend© ,  dili- 
gence in  reading. 


gence  in  reading-up  wars, 
a.  In  the  Dative,  or  after  a  Preposition,  the  Gerundive  is  necessary 
if  a  Substantive  is  used.    Otherwise  the  choice  is  free. 

THE  NATURAL  HARMONY  OF  TENSES  ("Sequence  of  Tenses") 

475.  1.  If  you  are  thinking  of  two  acts  as  connected  (main  and 
subordinate),  they  (1)  are  likely  to  be  in  the  same  division  of  time; 
and  (2)  the  subordinate  act  is  likely  to  be  seen  in  its  temporal  rela- 
tion to  the  main  act  (which  makes  the  point  of  vieio).  Thus  "  I 
watched"  (yesterday)  "a  man  who  was  stealing"  (then,  of  course). 

2.  In  the  Subjunctive,  as  you  already  know  and  feel,  the  tenses  of 
the  present  or  future  point  of  view  are  the  Present  and  Perfect,  of 
the  past  point  of  view  the  Imperfect  and  Past  Perfect. 

Hence,  in  combinations  of  verbs  and  dependent  clauses: 

476.  A  verb  of  the  present  or  future  is  generally  accom- 
panied by  the  Present  or  Perfect  Subjunctive,  a  verb  of 
the  past  by  an  Imperfect  or  Past  Perfect  Subjunctive. 

477.  Table  of  the  Natural  Harmony  of  Tenses  ("Sequence"). 


In  the  Past 

In  the  Present 

In  the  Future 

Past  Act  and 
Past  Point  of  View 

Present  Act  and 
Present  Point  of  View 

Future  Act  and 
Future  Point  of  View 

Thus 
Quaeslvl  quidagerem, 
I  asked  (then)  what 
I  was  (then)  to  do. 

Dux  erat  qui  nihil  prO- 
vidisset,  he  was  a 
leader     who      had 
foreseen  nothing. 

Thus 
QuaerO    quid     agam, 
I  ask  (now)  what  1 
am  (now)  to  do. 

Dux  est  qui  nihil  pro- 
vider it,  he  is  a  leader 
who     has   foreseen 
nothing. 

Thus 
Quaeram    quid    agam, 
I  shall  ask  (then )  what 
I  am  (then)  to  do. 

Dux  erit  qui  nihil  prO- 
vlderit,  he  will  he  a 
leader  who  will  have 
foreseen  nothing. 

186  Causal  or  Adversative  QnuClause 

NEW  FORCE  GAINED  BY  THE  CONSECUTIVE  quI-CLAUSE 
The  Causal  or  Adversative  qui^-Clause 

478.  Specimen  Sentences: 

1.  Magnae   secQtae   sunt  tempests.tes,  quae    puerOs   doml    conti- 

nerent,  great  storms  followed,  which  kept  the  boys  at  home. 
(From  the  Reading  Matter  in  459, 1.) 

2.  Magnae   hae    sunt    tempestd.tes,  quae    hOs    puerOs,    pugnandi 

cupidOs,  domi  continuerint,  great  storms  are  these  which  (and 
since  they)  have  kept  these  boys,  eager  for  fighting,  at  home. 

3.  Dolet  Lcicius,  qui  pugnare   magnopere   cupiat,  Lucius  grieves, 

who  ( =  since  he)  is  very  eager  to  fight. 

4.  Marcus,  qui  pugnare  magnopere  cupiat,  tamen  de  his  tempesta- 

tibus  nOn  dolet.     Mark,  who  (=  although  he)  is  very  eager  to 
fight,  nevertheless  doesn't  grieve  about  these  storms. 

a.  In  the  first  sentence  the  qui-Clause  is  a  consecutive  clause, 
such  as  we  have  already  had  a  number  of  times. 

b.  In  the  second  sentence  the  qUi-Clause  is  consecutive,  and  very 
like  the  one  in  the  first;  but  it  also,  in  consequence  of  the  nature  of 
the  combination,  suggests  an  additional  idea  of  Cause  or  Reason ; 
i.e.,  you  feel  that  it  not  only  expresses  the  result  of  the  greatness  of 
the  storms,  but  the  reason  why  the  speaker  says  "great." — In  this 
way  the  Subjunctive  qui-CIause  gets  a  new  power,  that  of  expressing 
Cause  or  Reason;  and  it  is  then  naturally  employed  to  express  Cause 
or  Reason  alone,  as  in  the  third  example.^ 

c.  The  Adversative  use  (i.  e.,  to  express  Opposition,  as  in  the  fourth 
example)  grows  out  of  the  Causal  use. 

We  may  then  lay  down  the  rule  that: 

479.  A  Relative  Clause  in  the  Subjunctive  may  he  used 
to  express  Cause  or  Opposition  (Causal  or  Adversative 
qui-Clause). 

iThis  is  to  be  understood  as  meaning  any  form  of  the  Relative, — any 
case,  gender,  or  number,  or  any  relative  Adverb  (as  ubi  or  unde). 

2  Another  instance  of  the  rise  of  a  new  force  in  a  construction,  illustrated 
by  our  formula  (force  originally  consecutive  [x],  then  consecutive  plus 
causal  [x+y],  then  causal  only  [y]  ). 


Exercises  187 

480.  VOCABULARY 

acer  (as  before),  fierce.    Compar.  quare  (cf.  44:6, 1,  and  footnote  3), 

acrior,  Superl.  acerrimus.^  Rel.  and    Interrog.  Adv.,  for 

acriter,   Adv.  for   acer,  keenly,  which  reason,  wherefore,  why. 

fiercely.      Compar.  acrius,  sperO,  -are, -avi,  -atum,  1,  hope. 

Superl.  acerrime.  tardus,  -a,  -um,  slow,  tardy;  dis- 

patior,  pati,  passus  sum,  3,  suf-  inclined. 

fer,  allow,  permit.  tantus, -a,  -um,  so  great,  so  much. 

481.  READING  MATTER 

1.  (A  timid  mother)  Tii  scis  me  ex  hoc  bello  aliquid  semper 
exspectavisse  incommodi.  Quare  his  tantis  tempestatibus  gau- 
deo.  Diem  pueri  constituerunt  decertando.  Sed  sper5  fore 
ut  ipsa  mora  universi  tardi5res  ad  pugnandum  sint.  (Another 
mother)  Tii  gaudes,  quae  timeas  ne  filio  tuo  noceatur.  Sed  n5n 
est  timendum.^  liidices  periti  sunt  tales  res  administrandi,  nee 
patientur  quemquam  cuiquam  nocere.  (First  speaker)  Quod  tii 
dicis^  iiidices  homines  peritos  esse,  id  me  non  tantum  movet. 
Hi  pueri  acriores*  sunt,  acri usque*  contendent. 

482.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  One  mother  says  that  she  is-glad-of  these  (so-)great 
storms.  2.  She  feels  sure  that  her  son  will  be  injured  in  the 
fighting.  3.  This  does  not  move  me  much.  4.  (Same  ideas,  in 
past.)  A  certain  mother  said  yesterday  that  she  was-glad-of 
these  storms;  that  she  felt  sure  that  her  son  would  be  injured. 
5.  I  think  that  she  will  not  allow  him  to  fight. 

6.  Why  don't  you  practice  ?  Are  you  slow  for  fighting  ? 
7.  (Ans.)  The  boys  formed  their  plans  at  a  time  when  I  was  ill 
{descriptive  idea);  for- which -reason  I  was  not  chosen.  8.  (First 
speaker)  I  am  desirous  of  witnessing^  the  battle,  but  I  hope^  the 
boys  will  not  fight  too  fiercely. 

1  As  you  see,  Adjectives  in  -er  have  a  peculiar  way  of  forming  the  Super- 
lative,— namely.  In  -errlmus,  as  if  by  adding  -rimus  to  the  -er.  Adverbs 
formed  from  them  follow  (Adj.  acerrimus,  Adv.  acerrime). 

2  Impersonal,  it  is  not  to  be  feared,  =  one  should  not  fear. 

3 See  444,  a.  ^Gerund,  for  practice. 

^The  Comparative  often  means  "too."        ^^ote  omission  of  "that." 


188  Conjugation  of  Possum 

LESSON   LXII 
IRREGULAR    VERBS 

483.  In  the  last  Lesson,  we  finished  the  inflection  of 
the  regular  verbs. 

484.  There  are  a  few  verbs  left,  which  present  a  little 
irregularity.  This  irregularity  is  confined,  so  far  as  the 
endings  are  concerned,  to  the  forms  made  from  the 
Present  Stem, 

a.  Hence  if  you  merely  know  the  Principal  Parts  of  a  given 
irregular  verb,  all  the  forms  from  the  Perfect  Stem  will  follow 
with  certainty. 

b.  Further,  in  the  forms  belonging  to  the  Present  Stem,  you  can 
always  make  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  Active,  as  in  Regular 
Verbs,  by  adding  -m  to  the  Present  Infinitive  Active. 

c.  In  most  cases,  the  irregularity  of  ending  is  confined  to  th6 
Present  Indicative  Active,  as  in  the  first  verb  to  be  given. 

485.  CONJUGATION   OP   possum,  am  able,  can 


INDICATIVE 

pusauxuy    ]j 

uasc,    putui,              —  ■ 
SUBJUNCTIVE 

Pres. 

possum  1 

possim 

potes 

possis 

potest 

possit 

possumus 

posslmus 

pbtestis 

possitis 

possunt 

possint 

Imperf. 

poteram,  -as, 

-at,  etc. 

possem,  -es,  -et,  etc. 

Fut. 

potero,  -is,  -it 

,  etc. 

iQld  Latin  has  an  Adjective  meaning  able,  in  two  forms,  potis  and  pote. 
These  forms  were  originally  of  different  genders,  but  came  to  be  used  for 
any  gender.  Among  other  uses,  they  were  compounded  with  sum.  The 
forms  above  arose  from  these  compounds.  Thus  potis-sum  (possum),  /  am- 
able;  pote-es  (potes),  you  are-able. 


New  Forces  gained  by  Consecutive  Oum-Clause    189 


INDICATIVE 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

Perf. 

potui,  -isti,  -it,  etc.i 

potuerim,  -is,  -it,  etc. 

Past  Perf. 

potueram,  -as,  -at,  etc. 

potuissem,  -es,  -et,  etc. 

Fut.  Perf. 

potuero,  -is,  -it,  etc. 

INFINITIVE 

PARTICIPLE 

Pres. 

posse 

potens  (which  has  be- 

Perf. 

potuisse 

come  an  Adjective) 

NEW    FORCES    GAINED    BY    THE    CONSECUTIVE 
cum-CLAUSE 

486.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Puerl  cOnsilia  eO  tempore  (or  turn)  ceperunt  cum  ego  aeger  essem. 
Postea,  cum  me  haberem  melius,  a  MarcO  accipl  cupiebam. 
Sed,  cum  me  in  armis  nOn  exercuissem,  is  me  nOn  accepit. 
The  boys  formed  their  plans  at  a  time  when  I  was  ill.  Later, 
when  I  was  feeling  better  (had  myself  better),  I  wished  to  be 
accepted  by  Mark.  But,  since  I  had  not  drilled,  he  did  not 
take  me. 

a.  In  the  first  sentence  (you  yourself  wrote  it  in  translating 
482,  7),  the  cum-Clause  is  a  simple  descriptive  clause,  like  those 
which  we  have  several  times  had.  It  describes  its  antecedent, 
namely,  eO  tempore.  The  boys  formed  their  plans  at  a  time  when  I 
was  ill, — at  a  time  of  illness  on  my  part.  This  was  the  Situation, 
the  State  of  Affairs,  the  Circumstances.  Hence  we  may  call  such 
a  clause  a  Descriptive  cum-Clause  of  Situation. 

b.  In  the  second  sentence,  the  cum-Clause,  which  is  in  itself  pre- 
cisely like  the  first  one,  similarly  gives  the  situation  for  the  main 
verb,  cupiebam. — But  it  was  because  of  this  situation  (namely,  my 
feeling  better)  that  I  wished  to  be  accepted.  Hence  an  additional 
idea  of  Cause  or  Reason  comes  into  the  construction  ("  when  "  and 
^''because;''  x+y). 

c.  The  natural  consequence  was  that  the  construction  was  next 
used  to  express  the  idea  of  Cause  or  Reason  alone  (y),  with  the  origi- 
nal idea  of  time  wholly  gone  out  of  it,  as  in  the  third  sentence  in  the 
passage  above  {'''since  I  had  not  practiced"). 

1  The  forms  of  the  Perfect  Stem,  together  with  the  Present  Participle 
potens,  are  from  an  old  Second  Conjugation  verb  poteo,  potere,  potui,  which 
has  otherwise  disappeared. 


190    Cnm-Olauses :  Descriptive,  Causal,  Adversative 

d.  But  the  main  act  may  be  performed,  not  because  of  the  char- 
acter of  the  situation,  but  m  spite  of  it,  as  in  the  following: 
Cum  me  omninO  nOn  exercuissem,  Ltlcius  me  accepit,  when  (or 
although)  I  had  not  practiced  at  all,  Lucius  accepted  me. 

Here  the  additional  idea  is  that  of  Opposition  ("when"  and 
^^ although").  The  clause  then  comes  also  to  be  used  with  this  new 
idea  alone  ("although"). 

We  may  sum  up  these  uses  in  the  following  rules: 

487.  A  Subjunctive  cnm-Clause  may  he  used  to  describe 
the  Situation  under  which  the  main  act  took  place  (Descrip- 
tive cum-Clause  of  Situation). 

488.  ^  Descriptive  cnm-Clause  of  Situation  may  be  used 
with  an  additional  idea  of  Cause  or  Opposition  ( Descriptive 
cum-Clause,  with  additional  Causal  or  Adversative  Idea). 

489.  A  Subjunctive  cum-Clause  may  be  used  to  express 
Cause  or  Opposition  alone  (Causal  or  Adversative  cum- 
Clause). 

490.  VOCABULARY 

centurio,  -Onis,  M.  3,  centurion  mllle,  indecl.  Adj.  or  Noun,  a 

(commander  of  a  company).  thousand.  F\,  as  Noun,  milia, 

cohors,   cohortis,  -ium,  F.  3,  co-  -ium,  N.  3.    Mllle  passuum  = 

hort  (tenth  part  of  a  legion).  5,000  feet,  or  a  Roman  mile. 

.cOnsistO,  -sistere,  -stiti,  ,  multus   (as  before),  much,  Com- 

3  (con-  +  sist6,  cf.  stO;  stand  par.  plus,  more,  Superl.  plQri- 

Urmlj),  take  position ;  halt.  mus,    most  (or  a  great  deal, 

cum  (same  word  as  before),  Conj.,  PL,  a  great  many), 

when,  as;  since;  although.  possum,  posse,  potui,  — ,  irr.,  be 

ducentr,  -ae,  -a,  two  hundred.  able,  can.      With  plOs,  etc.,  be 

Inferus,  below.  Compar.  inferior,  more  able,  can  do  more,  etc. 

lower,  Superl.  iflfimus  or  imus,  prOcurrO,    -currere,    -currl    and 

lowest.  -cucurri,-cursum,3(prO+currO), 

legatus,  -I,  M.  2,  ambassador;  run  forward,  charge, 

lieutenant  (high  officer).  superus,  -a,  -um,  above.  Compar. 

legio,  -Onis,  F.  3,  legion.  superior yhigher,SuperL supre- 

licet,  licere,  licuit   and   licitum  mus  or  summus,  highest. 

est,  2,  Impers.,  be  permitted.  tribdnus,  -i,  M.  2,  tribune. 


Exercises  191 

491.  READING  MATTER 

1.  (At  Mark's  house.  Mark,  to  his  father)  Omnia  in5re  et  exem- 
plo  Roman5  feci.  Exercitum  in  legidnes  et  cohortes  divisi. 
Hos  legatos,  tribunos,  centuriones  elegi.  Summi  sunt  consili. 
Plurimos  dolos  sciunt,  etplurimum^  auctoritate  valent. 

2.  (The  father)  LQcius  multitudine  plus  ^  potest.  Quid  vos 
in  pugnando  potest  is?    (One  answers)    Multum^  nos  possumus. 

3.  (Mark)  Primo  nihiP  poterant  mei,  atque  discipHna  eorum 
mala  erat;  imperium  autem  cum  mihi  concessissent,  mox  multa 
didicerunt.  Nunc  eos  exercui,  ita  ut  summi  ^  et  infimi^  aliquot 
horas  atque  multa  miliapassuum  ambulare  possint;  ut  ducentos 
vel  quadringentos  paissus  celeriter  currere  possint;  ut  servatis 
5rdinibus  vel  procurrere  vel  se recipere  possint;  ut,  Una  fugientes, 
vel  simul  vel  deinceps  consistere  possint. 

4.  (The  father)  Numquam  credidi  fore  ut  tui  tantum  possent. 
0  magna  vis  disciplinae,  quae  ex  pueris  milites  peritissim5s 
faciat!  5.  Nunc,  cum  haec  didiceritis,  mihi  liceat  omnia  bona 
vobis  op  tare.    Vincat  Marci  exercitusi 

492.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  (The  father)  But  when  Lucius  had  chosen  his  army,*  didn't 
he  also,  according  to  the  Roman  custom,  divide  it  into  legions 
and  cohorts,  and  choose  lieutenants,  tribunes  and  centurions? 
2.  Don't  his  soldiers  concede  command  to  him  ?  3.  Can't  they 
also  walk  many  miles,  and  run  two  hundred  or  four  hundred 
paces?  4.  Haven't  they  learned  a-great-many  stratagems? 
5.  Hasn't  Lucius  also  drilled  the  highest  and  the  lowest,  so  that 
they  can  run  forward  together,  and  then  halt  one-after-another 
or  retreat  keeping  their  ranks  ?  6.  Your  men  can  (do)  very-much. 
7.  Can  they  (do)  more  than  Lucius's  soldiers  (can)? 

8.  (Mark)  Since  Lucius  has  never  been  diligent,  it  is  per- 
mitted to  think  that  he  has  not  been  diligent  in  drilling  his  men. 

1  Ace.  of  Degree.    Adjectives  so  -^  Like  plurimum  above, 

used  (cf.  multo,  etc.)  are  much  like  ^—  the  greatest  and  the  least. 

Adverbs.   Translate  are  very  strong.  '^  Clause  of  Situation. 


192 


Conjugation  of  Volo,  Nolo,  Malo 


LESSON  LXIII 


493. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS  (Continued) 
CONJUGATION  OF  volo,  nolo,  malo 


volo,    velle,   volui. 

Principal  Parts  \  nolo,   nolle,  nOlui, 

malo,  malle,  malui. 


Indic. 

SUBJ. 

Pres. 

volo 

velim 

VIS 

veils 

vult 

velit 

volumus 

vellmus 

vultis 

velitis 

volunt 

velint 

Imperf. 

volebam 

vellem 

Fut 

volam 

Perf. 

volui 

voluerim 

Past  Perf. 

.  volueram 

voluissem 

Fut.  Perf. 

voluero 

Indic. 

Sub  J. 

Pres. 

malo 

malim 

mavis 

mails 

mavult 

malit 

malumus 

mallmus 

mavultis 

,  malitis 

malunt 

malint 

Imperf. 

raalebam 

mallem 

Fut. 

malam 

Perf. 

malui 

maluerim 

Past  Perf 

.  malueram 

maluissem 

Fut.  Perf. 

maluero 

INFINITIVE 

Pres.    velle 

nolle 

Perf,    voluisse 

noluisse 

PARTICIPLE 

Pres.    volens 

nolens 

,  If  ill,  want 

,  he  unwilling^ 

ni-\nnrt-pt-tnn  1 

Indic. 

Sub  J. 

nolo 

nolim 

non  vis 

nolis 

non  vult 

nolit 

nolumus 

nolimus 

non  vultis 

nolitis 

nolunt 

nolint 

nolebam 

nollem 

nolam 

nolui 

noluerim 

nolueram 

noluissem 

noluero 

IMPERATIVE 

Pres.    noli 

nolite 

Fut.     nolito 

nolitote 

malle 
maluisse 


1  Nolo  is  from  non  and  volo,  don^t  want,  mal5  from  magis  volo,  want  more. 


/ 


Neutral   Conditions  and  Conclusions  193 

CONDITIONS  AND  CONCLUSIONS 
494.  A  Conclusion  is  a  statement,  the  truth  or  realiza- 
tion of  which  depends  upon  the  truth  or  realization  of 
something  else  called  a  Condition  (^/-clause,  or  an  equiva- 
lent). Thus  "if  he  has  come"  (Condition),  "we  are 
safe"  (Conclusion).     The  negative  for  both  is  non. 

a.  Conditions  are  introduced  by  si,  ^/,  nisi,  unless^  Relatives,  or 
Conjunctions  (thus  qui  or  quicumque,  whoever,  cum,  whenever,  etc.). 

h.  Conditions  and  Conclusions  may  deal  with  a  sin^jle  case  (Indi- 
vidual), or  any  number  of  cases  of  a  kind  (General).    Thus: 
"  If  he  has  come,  he  brings  presents."    (Individual.) 
"If  ever  he  comes,  he  brings  presents."    (Generalizing.) 
"When  he  comes,  he  brings  presents."     (Generalizing  Conjunction.) 
"  Whoever  comes,  brings  presents."     (Generalizing  Relative.) 

NEUTRAL   CONDITIONS   AND   CONCLUSIONS,    PRESENT 

OR  PAST 

496.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Id  si  fecist!,  bene  fecisti,  if  you  have  done  this,  you  have  done  icell. 
Id  SI  facis,  bene  facis,  if  you  are  doing  this,  you  are  doing  well. 

a.  As  you  see,  these  conditions  imply  nothing  as  regards  the  truth 
or  falsity  of  the  condition  and  conclusion.  We  may  then  call  them 
neutral,  and  may  state  the  usage  as  follows: 

496.  Neutral  Conditions  and  Conclusions  in  the  Present 
or  Past  are  expressed  by  the  Indicative, 

FUTURE  CONDITIONS  AND  CONCLUSIONS 

497.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Id  si  facies,  bene  fades,  if  you  (shall)  do  this,  you  will  do  well. 
Id  si  facias,  bene  facias,  if  you  shoidd  do  this,  you  would  do  well. 

a.  Both  examples  reler  to  the  Future.  The  difference  is  merely 
one  of  greater  or  less  vividness.  The  Indicative  {if  ...  .  shall)  is 
more  vivid,  the  Subjunctive  {if  ...  .  should)  less  vivid. 

b.  The  Present  Subjunctive,  as  we  call  it,  clearly  here  refers  to 
the  Future.  Similarly  the  Perfect  Subjunctive  may  be  employed  as 
Q.  Future  Perfect,  as  in  id  modo  sifecerls,  bene  fecerls,  if  you  should 
have  done  merely  this,  you  would  have  done  ivelL 


194  Future  Conditions  and  Conclusions 

We  may  then  lay  down  our  rules  as  follows: 

498.  1.  More  Vivid  Future  Conditions  and  Conclusions 
are  expressed  by  Indicative  tenses  of  Future  time 
(the  Future  and  Future  Perfect). 

2.  Less  Vivid  Future  Conditions^  and  Conclusions'^ 
are  expressed  by  Subjunctive  tenses  of  Future  time  (the 
so-called  Present  and  Perfect). 

499.  VOCABULARY 

amplus,  -a,  -um,  ampler  large.      nolo,  nolle,  nOluI, ,  irr.,  not 

amplius,    Compar.    Neut.,    as  want,  be  unwilling. 

Substantive,  more;  as  Ace.  of  perterreO,  -terrere,  -terrul,  -ter- 

Degree,  more,  further.  ritum,    2  (per  +  terreO),   thor- 

dignus,    -a,   -um,    worthy,    and  oughly  frighten,  terrify. 

indignus,  -a,  -um,  unworthy.  quando,  Conj.,  since,  as. 

Take    Abl.    (Construction    of  quoniam,  Conj.,  since. 

doubtful  origin.)  rumpO,   rumpere,    rQpi,  ruptum, 

fides,  -el,  F.  5,  faith,    loyalty;  3,  break. 

promise,  word.  sive  or  seu,  Conj.,  or  if,  or;  sive 

honestus,  -a,  -um,  honorable.  ....  sive  ....  (seu  ....  seu 

imperator,  -Oris,  M.  3,  general.  ....)?  whether  .  ...  or  ...  . 

iubeO,  iubere,  iussi,  iussum,  2,  superO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1  (cf. 

bid,  order.    Takes  Infinitive.  superus,    above,    over),    over- 

malo,  malle,  malui,  ,  irr.,  coTne,  defeat,  conquer. 

tvant  more,  prefer.  veto,  vetare,  vetur,  vetitum,  1, 

malus  (as  before),  bad,  Compar.  forbid.    Takes  Infinitive. 

peior,  t^?or*se,  Superl.  pessimus,      volo,    velle,   volul,    ,    irr., 

worst.  want,  will. 

1  Formed  by  the  coming-together  of  four  kinds  of  independent  conditions. 
Thus: 

CONDITION  CONCLUSION 

VoUtlve :  let  him  come  (veniat) :  ^ 

Anticipatory :    /  expect  him  to  come  (veniat) :      (   /  should  (in  that  case)  be 
Optative :  /  hope  he  may  come  (veniat) :      f      glad  (gaudeam). 

Potential:         he  may  perhaps  com,e  {veniat) :  ) 

When  these  constructions  were  used  dependently  (with  si,  etc.),  the 
differences  of  feeling  of  course  disappeared,  leaving  only  the  idea  common 
to  all  the  forms,  namely  that  of  a  Condition. 

2  The  Subjunctive  Conclusion  is  simply  a  statement  of  Mental  Certainty. 


Exercises  195 

500.  READING  MATTER 

(A  soldier  to  Mark)  Tecum,  imperator,  licetne  mihi  loqui? 
(Ans.)  Te  dicere  iubeo.  (Soldier)  Hac  re  perterritus  sum,  quod  ' 
mala  tempest  ate  tam  multos  dies  proelium  exspectavimus.  For- 
sitan  aliquis  iam  Lucium  de  tuis  consiliis  certiorem^  fecerit.^ 
Etiam  nunc,  si  quis  eum  certi5rem  f  ecerit,  facile  victor  sit.  (Ans.) 
Quando  tu  dixisti,  respondebo;  sed  iratus  sum  quod  omnin5 
timuisti.  Pessimum  est  exemplum.  Num  tu  Liicium  certidrem 
facere  vis?  (Soldier)  Ego  certe  nol5;  numquam  volui  fidem 
rumpere;  sed  non  void  ut  alius  id  faciat.  (Ans.)  Quem  tu  putas 
velle?  Id  quod  tii  facere  non  vis,  omnes  nostri  facere  n5lint, 
quoniam  hones ta  volumus  omnes. 

Et  honesta  aeque  vult  Liicius.  Dignus  est  fide  nostra.  Sive 
nos  vincemus  sive  ille  vincet,  nihil  se  indignum  fecerit.^  Etiam 
si  quis  nostrum  cum  e5  de  c5nsiliis  nostris  loqui  velit,  non 
liceat;  vetet  ilium  Liicius  omnino  dicere.  Is  est  hostis  noster 
qui  superari  malit  quam  hoc  modo  vincere.  Summa  ille  est  fide. 
Quare  n5li^  amplius  de  hac  re  vel  mecum  vel  cum  aliis  loqui. 

601.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  (Another  repeats  the  scolding  outside.)  If  we  should  make 
you  general,  should  you  want  to  talk  with  any  one  who  should 
want*  to  inform  you  about  the  plans  of  the  enemy?  2.  (Ans.) 
I  should  not  want  (to).  3.  (The  other)  Why  should  you  think 
that  Lucius  wants  (to)?  4.  The  boys  of  our  school  are  all  honor- 
able. 5.  It  is  not  permitted  to  believe  anything  unworthy  of 
them. 

6.  You  said  that  you  were  terrified  lest  some  one  should  break 
faith.  7.  Whether  we  shall  fight  now  or  after  many  days,  no  one 
will  do  this,  since  all  would  prefer  to  be  defeated.  8.  But  as  you 
have  thought  the  worst,  we  order  you  to  say  nothing  further. 
9.  If  you  talk  about  this  again,  we  shall  forbid  you  to  fight 
along  (Una)  with  the  rest.     10.  You  will  not  be  worthy. 

1  Make  more  certain^  inform.  ^ Be  unwilling  (to),=do  not. 

2  What  difference  from  f  ecerit  above?     *  Really  a  condition, =i/  he. 


196 


Conjugation  of  Fio 


LESSON  LXIV 

IRREGULAR  VERBS   (Continued) 

CONJUGATION  OF  fio,  become 

502.  Fio,  become^  serves  as  the  Passive  of  facio,  make, 
in  the  Present  System.  The  Perfect  System  and  the 
Future  Passive  Participle  are  formed  regularly  from  facio . 


Principal  Parts: 

;  ■  fioi 

fieri            factus  sum 

INDICATIVE 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

Pres. 

fio 
fis 

fit 

flam                      flam  us 
flas                        fiatis 
fiat                        fiant 

fiunt 

Imperf,         fiebam 

fierem 

Fut. 

fiam 

Perf. 

factus  sum 

factus  sim 

Past  Perf.    fact  us  eram 

factus  essem 

Fut.  Perf.     factus  ero 

IMPERATIVE 

INFINITIVE 

PARTICIPLE 

Pres. 

fi        fite 

Pre!^. 

fieri 

Perf.     factus 

Perf. 

factus 

esse      Fut.      faciendus 

Fut. 

factum 

.  iri 

GERUND 

GERUNDIVE 

faciendi 

faciendi,  -ae,  -i 

faciendo 

. 

faciendo,  -ae,  -o 

faciendum 

faciendum,  -am,  -um 

faciendo 

faciendo,  -a,  -o 

SUPINE 

factum,  -vl 
a.  Compounds  of  faciO  with  Prepositions  usually  have  the  regular 
Passive.    Thus  the  Principal  Parts  of  cOnficiO  are: 

Active:    conficio,  conficere,  confeci,  confectum. 
Passive:     conficior,  confici,  confectus  sum. 

iThe  i  is  long  throughout,  except  in  fit  and  before  short  e  (thus  fieri, 
fierem). 


Conjugation  of  Eo  197 


603. 

CONJUGATION  OF 

'  eO,  go 

(Note  the  contracted  forms.) 

Principal  Parts: 

eO 

Ire 

ir  {or  ivi) 

itum 

INDICATIVE 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

Pres. 

eo 

Imus 

earn 

eamus 

IS 

itis 

eas 

eatis 

it 

eunt 

eat 

eant 

Imperf. 

.  ibam 

Irem 

Fut 

ibo 

Perf. 

il  {or  ivi) 

iimus 

ierim 

isti  {or  iisti) 

istis  {or 

iistis) 

lit  {or  It) 

ierunt  (< 

or  iere) 

Past  Perf. 

ieram 

issem 

Fut.  Perf. 

iero 

IMPERATIVE  INFINITIVE  PARTICIPLE 

Pres.    I       ite         Pres.    Ire  Pres.    lens,  lens,  Gen.  euntis 

Fut.     Ito    Itote     Pei^f.    isse  (or  iisse)    Fut.      ittirus 
ito    eunto 

Fut.      iturusesse      Fut.  Pass,  eundum  (est, 

Impersonal) 

GERUND 

eundl,  eundo,  eundum,  eundo 

PICTURESQUE    USES    OP   THE    TENSES:    HISTORICAL 
PRESENT,  etc. 

604.   By  the  use  of  tenses  properly  belonging  to  the  present  point 
of  view,  a  past  scene  may  be  vividly  brought  before  the  mind,  and  its . 
events  pictured  as  now  taking  place.    The  dependent  clauses  may 
be  made  picturesque,  by  the  same  means,  or  they  may  be  put  in  the 
sober  tenses  of  the  past.    Thus:   , 


Dux  militi  imperat  ut  eat, 


'  y  the  leader  orders  the  soldier  to  go. 


Dux  mrliti  imperat  ut  iret, 

a.  A  Present  Tense  so  used  is  called  an  Historical  Present.^ 

iQur  best  English  uses  the  picturesque  tenses  very  little.    And  we  regu- 
larly use  them  in  all  parts  of  the  sentence,  if  in  any. 


he  saw  the  enemy,  he  changed  his  plan. 


198  Narrative  Clause  with  Ubi,  etc, 

THE  AORISTIC  NARRATIVE  CLAUSE  WITH  ubi,  ut,  post- 
quam,  OR  simul  (atque) 

506.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Ubi  \ 

Ut  / 

p     ,  >  hostls  vidit,  consilium  mntavit. 

Simul  (atque)  / 

when 

when  or  as  | 

after 

as  soon  as 

a.  You  notice  that  the  four  conjunctions  of  time  here  employed 
introduce  a  clause  in  narration,  i.  e.,  they  tell  you  something  (vIdit), 
in  the  progress  of  a  story,  as  a  preparation  for  the  main  event  (mnta- 
vit).  And  you  notice  also  that  the  tense  used  is  an  aorist  (not "  when 
he  had  seen"  which  would  be  situation,  but  merely  "when  he  saiv"). 
This  is  the  regular  usage.    We  may  then  lay  down  the  rule  that: 

606.  An  Aoristic  Indicative  Clause  with  ubi,  ut,  post- 
quam,  or  simul  (atque),  may  he  used  in  narration  to 
introduce  the  main  event. 

The  tense  is  the  Perfect  or  the  Historical  Present, 

a.  The  Aoristic  Narrative  Clause  is  interchangeable  with  the 
Descriptive  cum-Clause  of  Situation  (487).    Thus  you  may  say; 

(either)  ubi  hostls  vidit,  \ 

when  he  saw  the  enemy,  I  consilium  motavit, 

(or)  cum  hostrs  vidisset,  I  he  changed  his  plan, 

when  he  had  seen  the  enemy,  ] 

THE  ABLATIVE  OP  ACCOMPANIMENT 

607.  As  we  have  repeatedly  seen, 
Accompaniment  is  expressed  by  cum  and  the  Ablative, 

Cum  amico  profectus  suip,  I  set  out  with  a  friend, 
a.  But  in  military  language  cum  may  he  omitted,  if  the  noun  has 
a  modifier,  and  this  is  not  a  numeral.    Thus: 

Omnibus  cOpils  profectus  sum,  I  set  out  with  all  my  forces. 
(but)  Cum  tlna  legione  profectus  sum,  I  set  out  with  one  legion. 


Exercise  .             199 

508.  VOCABULARY 

adpropinquo,  -are,  -avl,  -atum,  1,  paltls,  -Gdis,  F.  3,  swamp. 

approach.    Word  of  Relation.  posterus,  -a,-um  (cf.  post,  after), 

conlocO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1  (cf.  following.   Compar.  posterior, 

con-  and  locus),  place,  station.  later,    Superl.    postremus    or 

decedO,-cedere,-cessr,-cessum,3  postumus,  latest. 

{de-{-ced6),  go  away,  withdraw.  suspicor,    -arl,    -atus     sum,    1, 

eO,  rre,  ii  (or  IvI),  itum,  irr.,  go.  suspect. 

fro,  fieri,  factus  sum,  irr.,  become.  triplex,  -ex.  Gen.  -icis,  triple. 

Used  also  as  Passive  of  facio.  ubi     (as     before)     where;     also 

intra,  within.  Prep.,  taking  Ace.  when. 

meridies,  -el,  M.  5,  midday-  ut  (as  before),  as;  also  when. 


509.  READING  MATTER 

(Fair  weather.  The  battle)  Postero  die  post  meridiem  duo 
exercitus  ad  sua  quisque  castra  eunt.  Omnia  more  Roman5  fiunt. 
Lucius  aciem  triplicem  instruit.  Marcus,  quia  minorem  habebat 
numerum,  maiorem  partem  suorum  in  duplici  acie  c5nstituit; 
reliquos  intra  silvam  prope  paludem  quandam  conlocat.  Haec 
autem  paliis  a  silva  ad  flumen  pertinebat. 

Paulo  ante  decimam  horam,  indices  eos  qui  pugnam  spectatum 
venerant  certiores  fecerunt  tempus  pugnandi  adesse;  ipsi  sub 
colles  in  extremam  vallem  decederent;^  qui  ex  eo  loco  exces- 
sissent^  priusquam  decertatum  esset,^  eos  ex  valle  pulsum  iri. 

Ubi  signum  pugnae  datum  est,  Liici  exercitus  ad  fliimen 
contendit .  Marci  autem  milites,  ita  ut  iussi  erant,  minus  celeriter 
ponti  adpropinquaverunt.  Lucius  eum  prior  transgressus  in 
milites  Marci  omnibus  copiis  impetum  acerrime  fecit.  Hi,  se 
perterritos  esse  simulantes,  terga  verterunt  atque  secundum 
fliimen  cucurrerunt.    Insecuti  sunt  hostes. 

Etiam  tum,  si  Liicius  de  dolis  suspicatus  esset,^  facile  propter 
numerum  suorum  victor  esset.^    Sed  nihil  est  suspicatus. 

iCommand  of  judges  (Vol.  Subj.).    2PastFut.-Perf.  (English  '^should"). 
^A  Future  Condition  and  Conclusion  from  a  past  point  of  view:  Even 
thent  if  Lucius  should  suspect  stratagems,  he  would  easily  be  victor. 


200  Regular  Comparison  of  Adjectives 

LESSON  LXV 

COMPARISON 

510.  Introductory.  You  have  already  become  familiar  with  the 
common  types. of  regular  comparison,  both  for  Adjectives  and  for 
Adverbs,  and  with  the  comparison  of  nearly  all  the  more  important 
irregular  words  also;  but  the  whole  will  now  be  put  together  for 
review,  distributed  among  three  Lessons. 

REGULAR  COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES 

611.  1.  The  Comparative  is  regularly  formed  by  adding 
-ior,  the  Superlative  by  adding  -issimus,  to  the  stem  of  the 
Positive  minus  its  final  vowel,  if  it  has  one.     Thus: 

POSITIVE  COMPARATIVE  SUPERLATIVE 

certus  .       certior  certissimus 

drligens  drligentior  diligentissimus 

2.  Adjectives  in  -er  form  the  Superlative  in  -errimus, 
as  if  by  adding  -rimus  to  the  -er.     Thus: 

acer  acrior  acerrimus 

aeger  aegrior  aegerrimus 

3.  Certain  Adjectives  in  -ills  form  the  Superlative  in 
-illimus,  as  if  by  adding  -limus  to  the  stem  of  the  Positive 
minus  its  final  vowel.     Thus: 

facilis  facilior  facillimus 

difficilis  difficilior  difficillimus 

4.  But  many  Adjectives  form  the  Comparative  and 
Superlative  by  prefixing  magis,  more.,  and  maxime,  most.,  to 
the  Positive.  This  is  true  of  most  Adjectives  in  which 
the  vowel  of  the  stem  is  itself  preceded  by  another  vowel. 
Thus: 

idoneus  magis  idOneus  maxime  idoneus 


Ablative  of  Manner, — Historical  Infinitive      201 

THE  ABLATIVE  OF  WAY  OR  MANNER 

512.  Specimen  Sentences: 
CasQ  eum  vidi,  I  saw  him  by  chance. 

Hoc  modo  vincO,  I  conquer  by  this  method  {—in  this  way), 
Pedibus  Ibo,  I  shall  go  (with  the  feet  =)  on  foot. 
Cum  ccira  omnia  explOras,  you  explore  everything  with  care. 
Magna  cum  cQra  omnia  explOras,  you  explore  everything  ivith  great 
care. 

a.  You  see  that  Way  or  Manner  may  be  expressed  by  the  Ablative.^ 

b.  The  construction,  being  very  common,  in  the  main  resisted  the 
coming-in  of  prepositions.^ 

The  usage  may  then  be  stated  thus: 

513.  Way  or  Manner  may  he  expressed  by  the  Ablative, 
regularly  without  a  Preposition. 

But  Abstract  Nouns  hi  less  frequent  use  take  cum  if 
there  is  no  Modifier,  and  MA  Y  take  it  even  if  there  is  one, 

THE  HISTORICAL  INFINITIVE 

514.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Duo  exercitQs  prOcurrerunt,  proelium  commiserunt.  SubitO 
hostes  fugere,  the  two  armies  rushed  forward,  and  joined  battle. 
Suddenly  the  enemy  fled. 

a.  Such  constructions  occur  in  lively  passages. —  As  you  see,  the 
Infinitive  here  makes  a  statement,  just  as  an  Indicative  would  do.^ 
And  you  notice  that,  like  an  Indicative,  it  has  its  Subject  in  the 
Nominative.    We  may  then  lay  down  the  rule  that: 

515.  In  lively  narration,  the  Infinitive  may  be  used 
in  place  of  an  Indicative.  Its  Subject  is  then  in  the 
Nominative. 

iThe  construction  is  of  composite  origin,  formed  from  the  coming- 
together  of  Ablative,  Sociative,  and  Locative  uses.  Cf.  English  ''from  de- 
sign," ""with  design,"  "  in  haste  "  (all  expressing  Manner).  But  in  English 
the  Prepositions  keep  the  three  constructions  from  coming  to  seem  like  one. 

2  In  the  oldest  stage  of  language  there  were  no  prepositions. 

3 This  construction  probably  originated  in  a  Locative  use  of  the  Infinitive, 
when  the  two  forms  (-e  and  -i)  still  had  their  case-forces.  Thus,-  lo!  the 
enemy  in  flight  ! 


202    Clause  with  Quod,  etc, — Ablative  of  Separation 

CLAUSE  OF  CAUSE  OR  REASON  WITH  quod,  quia,  quoniam, 

OR  quando 

516.  Specimen  Sentences: 

GaudeO  quod  tCi  vales,  I  am  glad  that  (=  because)  you  are  well. 
Quia  valeO,  pugnabo,  because  I  am  well,  I  shall  fight. 
Quoniam  otium  habes,  veni,  since  you  have  leisure,  come. 
QuandO  puerl  pugnatnrf  sunt,  ego  certe  adero,  since  the  boys  are 
going  to  fight,  I  shall  certainly  be  present. 

a.  In  these  examples,  as  you  see,  the  Indicative  clause  states  a 
fact,  as  the  Cause  or  Reason  for  something  given  in  the  main 
sentence. 

We  may  then  lay  down  the  rule  that: 

617.  Cause  or  Reason  may  he  expressed  by  an  Indica- 
tive Clause  with  quod,  quia,  quoniam,  or  quando.^ 

ABLATIVE  WITH  VERBS  OF  SEPARATION 

518.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Castrls  suOs  edacit,  he  leads  his  men  out  of  the  camp. 
Ex  castrls  suOs  edncit,  he  leads  his  men  out  of  the  camp. 
Pugna  desistunt,  they  cease  from  fighting. 

a.  Verbs  of  separation  are  mostly  compounds  containing  one  of 
the  separative  prepositions,  ab,  de,  ex.  The  three  examples  illus- 
trate the  general  usage  of  nouns  depending  upon  them.  In  the  first 
two,  literal  separation  in  place  is  expressed,  and  either  with  or  with- 
out a  preposition.  In  the  last,  figurative  separation  is  expressed, 
and  no  preposition  is  used.    This  corresponds  to  the  regular  usage. 

We  may  then  lay  down  the  rule  that: 

519.  Verbs  of  Separation  take  the  Ablative,  with  or 
without  a  Preposition.  But  verbs  expressing  Figurative 
Separation  only  regularly  omit  the  Preposition. 

lYou  can  easily  see  how  the  force  of  Cause  or  Reason  came  into  the 
clause  with  quod.  "  I  am  glad  that "  naturally  suggests  "  I  am  glad  because." 
Quia  (which  is  an  old  Neuter  PI.  of  qui,  just  as  quod  is  a  Neuter  Sing.)  got 
its  causal  force  in  the  same  way.  Quoniam  and  quandd,  which  were  originally 
conjunctions  of  time  meaning  when,  have  gained  their  causal  force  in  the 
same  way  as  EngUsh  *'  since." 


Exercise  203 

520.  VOCABULARY 

circumdo,  -dare,   -dedr,  -datum,  insidiae,  -arum,  F.    1,  ambush, 

1  (circum  -|-  do),  throw  around,         ambuscade. 

surround,  interclQdO,  -cladere,  -closi,  -cln- 
clamO, -are, -a VI, -atum,  1,  s/iot*^.  sum,   3   (inter+claudo,   shut), 

clamor,  -Oris,  M.  3,  shout.  shut  in,  hem  in,  block. 

confertus,  -a,  -um,  crowded.  labor,  labl,  lapsus  sum,  3,  slip. 

cOnfestim,  Adv.,  immediately.  manus,  -ns,  F.  4,  hand;  band. 

cursus,  -ns,  M.  4,  running,  run.  subsidium,  -T,  N.  2,  reserve,  rein- 
demum,  Adv.,  at  last,  finally.  for  cement,  help. 

eicio,  eicere,  eieci,   eiectum,    3  transeO,     -Ire,  -il,     -itum,     irr. 

(e-j-iacio),    throw    out.       Me  (trans +  eO),   go  across,  cross 

eicio,  I  rush  out.  over,  go  over. 

521.  READING  MATTER 

(The  End  of  the  Battle) 

Ubi  autem  pri5res  milites  Luci  magno  cursu  euntes  paludi 
adpropinquaverunt,  ex  exercitu  Marcl  ii  qui  (in)  extrem5  dextro 
cornu  constiterant  restiterunt,  hostibusque  obstabant.  Idem  ab 
alils  deinceps  factum  est,  ita  ut  tota  mox  acies  contra  milites 
Luci  constitissent.  Hi  autem,  cum  maxime  temere  essent  con- 
seciiti,  nunc  inter  flumen  et  Marci  exercitum  intercliisi  erant; 
nam  a  sinistr5  latere  paliis  progredi  vetabat. 

Tum  ii  quos  Marcus  in  insidiis  conlocaverat  magno  (cum) 
clamore  se  ex  silvis  eiciunt,  suisque  subsidio  veniunt;  simulque 
tertia  acies,  cum  ad  sinistram  cdnfestim  transisset,  hostes  etiam 
ab  h5c  latere  circumvenit.  Sic  Marcus,  flumine  et  paliide  usus, 
minore  exercitu  exercitum  maiorem  undique  circumdederat. 
Tum  demum  verum  commissum  est  proelium.  LQcius  suis 
clamare^  ut  omnibus  viribus  pugnarent.  Hi  autem,  ut^  in  tali 
re  fit,^  ita  inter  se  conferti  erant  ut  manibus  armisque  non  pos- 
sent  commode  iiti;  et  quidam  etiam,  ex  inferiore  loco  in  fliimen 
lapsi,  magno  in  periculo  erant.  Itaque  iiidices  imperaverunt  ut 
omnes  pugna  desisterent;  Marcum^  enim  superavisse.^ 

1  Historical  Infinitive.  2  ^g  happens  in  such  a  case. 

8  The  Accusative- with-Infinitive  betrays  Indirect  Discourse. 


204 


Conjugation  of  Fero 


522. 


LESSON   LXVI 

IRREGULAR  VERB^  (Finished) 

CONJUGATION  OF  ferO,  bear 


Principal  Parts:     ferO 

ferre 

tuir 

latum 

Active 

Passive 

Indic. 

SUBJ. 

Indic. 

Sub  J. 

Pres. 

fero 

feram 

feror 

ferar 

fers 

feras 

ferris 

feraris  or  -e 

fert 

ferat 

fertur 

feratur 

ferimus 

feram  us 

ferimur 

feramur 

fertis 

feratis 

ferimini 

feramini 

ferunt 

ferant 

feruntur 

ferantur 

Imperf. 

ferebam 

ferrem 

ferebar 

ferrer 

Fut. 

feram 

ferar 

Perf. 

tuli 

tulerim 

latus  sum 

latus  sim 

Past  Perf.      tuleram 

tulissem 

latus  eram 

latus  essem 

Fut.  Perf.       tulero 

latus  ero 

IMPERATIVE 

Pres, 

feri 

ferte 

ferre 

ferimini 

Fut. 

ferto 

fertote 

fertor 

ferto 

ferunto 

fertor 

feruntor 

INFINITIVE 

Pres. 

ferre 

ferri 

Perf. 

tulisse 

latus  (esse) 

Fut. 

laturus  (esse) 

latum  iri 

PARTICIPLE 

Pres. 

ferens 

Perf 

latus 

Fut. 

laturus 

Fut. 

ferendus 

SUPINE 

GERUND 

GERUNDIVE 

latum,  -u 

ferendl,  etc. 

ferendl,  ferendae,  ferendi,  etc. 

1  Dico,  duco,  f acio,  and  fero  have  Imperatives  die,  due,  fac,  fer. 


Conditions  and  Conclusions  Cojitrary  to  Fad  205 

CONDITIONS   AND   CONCLUSIONS   CONTRARY  TO  FACT 
(New  Force  Gained  by  the  Subjunctive  Tenses  of  the  Past) 

623.  In  the  Eeading  Matter  of  609  we  had  the  sentence: 
Etiam  turn,  si  Lucius  de  dolls  suspicatus  esset,  facile  propter  nume- 

rum  suOrum  victor  esset,  even  then,  if  Lucius  should  suspect 
stratagems,  he  would  easily  be  victor  on  account  of  the 
number  of  his  men. 

a.  The  mind  of  the  teller  of  the  story  was  here  fixed  upon  a  point 
in  the  past,  at  which  the  outcome  of  the  battle  was  still  in  the  future. 
Si  suspicatus  esset  is  a  past  future-perfect  and  victor  esset  is  apast 
future  (i.  e.,  the  expression  of  a  mental  certainty  about  something 
which  at  this  past  time  was  sure  to  come). 

b.  But  as  we  look  back  from  the  present  point  of  view,  we  see  that 
both  condition  and  conclusion  express  something  which  we  know  to 
be  contrary  to  the  actual  fact.  Lucius  did  not  suspect,  and  is  not 
victor.  Practically,  then,  the  meaning  suggested  becomes  "  if  Lucius 
had  suspected,  he  would  now  be  the  victor."  In  this  way,  the 
Imperfect  and  Past  Perfect  Subjunctive  get  the  new  power  of 
expressing  conditions  and  conclusions  contrary  to  fact,  the  Imperfect 
dealing  with  Present  time,  and  the  Past  Perfect  with  finished  action 
at  any  time  in  the  past  up  to  the  present  moment. 

We  may  then  lay  down  the  rule  that: 

624.  Conditions  and  Conclusions  Contrary  to  Fact  are 
expressed  by  the  Imperfect  and  Past  Perfect  Subjunctive. 
The  Imperfect  refers  to  the  Present,  the  Past  Perfect  to 
the  Past. 

a.  We  may  now  present  all  Conditions  and  Conclusions  together: 
526.       Table  of  Conditions  and  Conclusions  (Summary) 


Future 


(  More  Vivid:   Indicative,  Future  or  Future  Perfect. 
I  Less  Vivid:   Subjunctive,  Present  or  Perfect. 


Neutral:  Indicative,  Present  or  Past  Tenses. 
Contrary  to  Fact:    Subjunctive,   Imperfect  or   Past 
Perfect. 


206  Dative  after  Compound  Verbs 

DATIVE  AFTER  VERBS    COMPOUNDED  WITH  CERTAIN 
PREPOSITIONS 

626.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Disciplina  animum  exercitul  adfert  (ad  +  fert),  discipline  brings 

spirit  to  an  army, 
Pontl  adpropinquant,  they  approach  {draw  near  to)  the  bridge. 
M&rcus  exercitul  praeest,  Mark  [is  in  front  for  the  army,  =)  is  in 

command  of  the  army. 

a.  The  Dative  in  the  first  example  is  the  Dative  of  Direction,  just 
as  it  would  be  after  ferO  without  ad.  In  the  second  it  is  the  Dative 
of  Relation  (after  adpropinquO,  draw  near  to,  just  as  after  propin- 
quus,  near  to).  In  the  third,  it  is  the  Dative  of  the  Persons  Con- 
cerned. Now  a  great  many  instances  of  the  kind  occurred  with 
verbs  thus  compounded  with  Prepositions.  The  result  was  that  it 
seemed  natural  to  use  the  Dative  with  verbs  compounded  with  any 
Preposition,  unless  the  idea  of  space-relation  was  too  prominent. 

We  may  then  lay  down  the  rule  that: 

627.  The  Dative  is  used  after  many  Verbs  compounded 
with  certain  Prepositions.  (These  are  ad,  ante,  circum, 
con-,  in,  inter,  ob,  post,  prae,  pro,  sub,  and  super)  „ 

528.  VOCABULARY 

adferO,  adferre,  attull,  allatum,  partior, -Irl, -itus' sum,  4,  sTiare. 

irr.  (ad  +  ferO),  bring  (to).  poUiceor,  -licerl,  -licitus  sum,  2, 
citerior,  -ius,  on  this  side,  hither         promise. 

(a    Compar.    form).       Superl.  propior,   -ius,    nearer   (a    Com- 

citimus,  hithermost.  par.  form).    Superl.  proximus, 

dimicO,  -are,  -avT,  -atum,  1,  fight.         nearest,  close  by. 

facultas,  -atis,  F.  3  (cf.  facilis),  quoad    (quo  +  ad,    up    to    what 

facility;  opportunity,  time),  Conj.,  until  (like  dum). 

ferO,  ferre,  tulT,  latum,  irr.,  bear,  super,  above.    Prep.,  taking  Ace. 

bring,  carry.  tradtlcO,  -dDcere,  -dGxi,  -ductum, 
fortnna,  -ae,  F.  1,  fortune.  3  (trans  +  dOcO),  lead  across. 

miror,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  1,  admire,  tumulus,  -i,  M.  2,  mound,  low  hill. 

noctCi,  Adv.,  at  night,  by  night.  ulterior,  -ius,  on  the  other  side, 
occupo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  take         farther     (a     Compar.     form). 

possession  of,  occupy,  Superl.  ultimus,  farthest. 


Exercise  207 

629.  READING   MATTER 

Omiies  nunc  Marci  mirabantur  ingenium.  Lucius  autem, 
qui  vellet  hanc  gloriam  partiri  saltern,  aegre  pugnam^  adver- 
sam^  ferebat.  Itaque  cum  domum  Marci  noctu  venisset,  5rat^ 
ut  iterum  liceat^  dimicare;  sese  enim  de- dolls  atque  insidiis 
nihil  providisse.  "Si,"  inquit,  "e5dem  nos  mod5  pugnavisse- 
mus,^  ego  nunc  victor  essem."^  "Ita  vero,"  inquit  Marcus; 
"sed,  nisi  ego  providissem  ^  divers5  nos  modo  pugnaturos,  tibi 
maiorem  exercitum  numquam  dedissem.^  Si  tu  autem  fortunam 
tuam  aegre  fers,  facultatem  quam  petis  dabo.^  Ut  tu  vis,  fiat. 
Concede  ut  iterum  decertetur."  Itaque  pronQntiatum  est  exer- 
citiis  poster5  die  iterum  dlmicatQros.  liidices  idem  qui*  an  tea* 
se  proelio  adfore  polliciti  sunti 

Hora  pugnae  constitiita  signo  dato,  Marcus  suos  trans  pon- 
tem  magno  cursu  tradiicit.  Liicius  autem,  qui  dolis  iterum 
superari  n5llet,^  omniaque  nunc  timeret,  tumulum  silvae  proxi- 
mum  occupat,  superque  eum  instriictis  suis,  exspectabat  quoad 
se  Marcus  adgrederetur.^  Id  fecit,  ne  quod  auxilium  huic  in 
pugna  adferretur.  Marcus  autem,  quia  putaverat  in.  ulteriore 
parte  vallis,  non  in  citeriore,  pugnatum  iri,  omnia  pr5viderat. 
Itaque  suis  copiis  progressus  est  quoad  sub  tumulum  venit,^  ubi 
eas  consistere  iubet. 

"^  Adverse  battle^  =  defeat, 

2  0rat  expresses  neither  exactly  Will  nor  exactly  Wish,  but  rather  Request 
or  Entreaty ;  and  the  Substantive  Clause  that  follows  of  course  expresses  the 
same  idea.  Some  grammarians  put  this  with  the  Volitive  Subjunctive,  others 
with  the  Optative.  But  the  languages  that  keep  the  two  moods  distinct  show 
that  both  were  used  to  express  the  idea ;  and  the  Latin  usage  has  thus  prob- 
ably come  down  from  both.  Compare  English  "  I  beg  that  he  shall  be  for- 
given" (Volitive  form)  and  "I  beg  that  he  may  be  forgiven"  (Optative 
form). — The  same  is  true  of  the  corresponding  idea  of  Consent,  seen  in 
fiat  and  in  concedo  ut  iterum  decertetur  (Substantive  Clause)  below. 

3  What  kind  of  Condition  and  Conclusion  ? 

^  The  same  (who  had  promised)  before,  =  the  same  as  before. 

fi  Causal  qui-Clause, — because  he  didn^t  wish  .... 

^Ijooked  forward  to  by  Lucius  (Anticipatory  Subjunctive).  }  Both  with 

7 Looked  back  upon  by  the  narrator  (Indicative  of  Fact).      )      quoad. 


208 


Irregular   Comparison  of  Adjectives 


LESSON    LXVII 

IRREGULAR    OR    DEFECTIVE    COMPARISON    OF 
ADJECTIVES 

530.  Several  Adjectives  show  two  or  three  different 
stems  in  the  three  Degrees,  or  different  forms  of  the 
same  stem.     Compare  English  good,  better,  best.     Thus: 


' bonus,  good 
malus,  bad 
magnus,  great 
multus,  much 
parvus,  small 


melior,  better 
peior,  worse 
maior,  greater 
plQs,  more 
minor,  smaller 


optimus,  best 
pessimus,  ivorst 
maximus,  greatest 
plQrimus,  Tnost 
minimus,  smallest 


531.  For  a  few  Adjectives,  the  Positive  is  lacking  or 
rare,  or  appears  only  in  Adverbs  or  Prepositions.     Thus:^ 


citra,  on  this  side 
ultra,  beyond 
in,  intra,  within 
prope,  near 
prae,  prO,  before 
exterus,  outside 
(and  ex) 

Inferus,  below 

superus,  above 

(and  super) 
^ost&Tws  y  folloiving 
(and  post) 


citerior,  hither 
ulterior,  farther 
interior,  inner 
propior,  nearer 
prior,  former 

exterior,  outer 
Inferior,  lower 
superior,  higher 
posterior,  later 


citimus y  hithermost 
ultimus,  farthest 
intimus,  innermost 
proximus,  nearest 
primus  y  first 

( extremus ) 

( extimus    ) 

( Infimus ) 


outermost 


lowest 


'hest 


supremus)  ,  .  , 
>  high( 
I  summus     ) 

{ postremus )  last 

I  postumus   )  late-born 


1  The  definitions  given  in  the  list  represent  the  simplest  meanings.  But 
most  of  the  words  have  figurative  meanings  also.  For  example,  you  will 
find  superior  in  the  Reading  Matter  of  the  present  Lesson  in  the  sense  of 
higher-in-point-of-thne,  i.e.,  former;  and  it  also  often  means  superior,  just 
as  the  opposite,  inferior,  lower,  often  means  inferior. 


Subjunctive  of  Indirect  Discourse  209 

THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  OP  INDIRECT  DISCOURSE  (Finished) 

532.  Specimen  Sentences  (from  the  Reading  Matter  of 

609): 

Paulo  ante  decimam  hOram  iudices  eOs  qui  pugnam  spectatum 
venerant  certiOres  fecerunt  tempus  pugnandr  adesse;  ipsi 
sub  colles  in  extremam  vallem  decederent;  qui  ex  eO  locO 
excessissent  priusquam  decertatum  esset,  eOs  ex  valle  pulsum 
Irl.  A  little  before  four  o'clock  the  judges  informed  those  who 
had  come  to  see  the  battle  that  the  time  for  the  fighting  was  at 
hand;  that  they  (the  spectators)  should  withdraw  und.er  the 
hills  at  the  edge  of  the  valley ;  that  those  ivho  should  leave  that 
place  before  the  battle  should  be  finished  icould  be  expelled  from 
the  valley. 

a.  All  of  the  sentence  after  the  words  certiOres  fecerunt  reports 
in  substance  what  the  judges  said,  but  it  is  not  in  their  exact  words. 
It  is  thus  in  Indirect  Discourse. 

b.  The  first  thing  said  is  that  the  time  was  at  hand  (in  the  origi- 
nal form,  tempus  adest,  "the  time  is  at  hand").  This,  as  the  Prin- 
cipal Statement,  is  expressed  by  the  Infinitive,  as  you  have  already 
learned  in  465. 

c.  The  next  thing  is  a  Command,  which  in  the  original  form  would 
be  expressed  by  an  Imperative,  sub  colles  discedite,  "withdraw 
under  the  hills."  But  the  Imperative  cannot  be  used  here,  because 
that  mood  is,  by  its  very  nature,  the  form  for  direct  command.  Some 
other  mood  must  therefore  be  employed,  and  this  must  have  in  effect 
the  same  power.  Obviously  the  Volitive  Subjunctive  has  it,  and  so 
completely  meets  the  needs.  The  same  holds  true  similarly  in  Prohi- 
bitions {negative  commands). 

d.  The  next  thing  originally  said  was:  "Those  who  shall  leave  that 
place,"  qui  ex  eO  locO  excederint  (Future  Perfect  Indicative),  "before 
the  battle  shall  be  over,  will  be  expelled  from  the  valley."  The  future 
idea  in  "who  shall  leave,"  being  thrown  back  into  the  past,  becomes 
apas^future  idea  (just  as  priusquam  decertatum  esset,  "before  the 
battle  should  be  finished,"  is);  and  you  already  know  (381)  that  the 
one  and  only  way  which  the  Romans  had  for  expressing  a  past-future 
idea  in  a  dependent  clause  by  a  single  verb  is  the  Anticipatory  Sub- 
junctive. In  this  indirect  telling  of  the  story,  then,  the  Future 
Perfect  Indicative  must  necessarily  become  a  Subjunctive. 


210    Summary  of  Constructions  of  Indirect  Discourse 


e.  In  other  words,  the  Future  or  Future  Perfect  Indicative  would 
necessarily  go  over  into  the  Subjunctive  if  the  time  of  the  main  verb 
was  past;  and  the  Imperative  would  necessarily  do  so,  no  matter  what 
the  time  was.  But  the  two  things  happened  so  often  that  it  seemed 
natural  to  put  ALL  clauses  in  Indirect  Discourse  (except  the  Prin- 
cipal Statement)  into  the  same  mood;  and  this  became  the  fixed  habit. 

We  may  then  sum  up  as  follows: 

THE  CONSTRUCTIONS  IN  INDIRECT  DISCOURSE  (Summary) 

533.  In  Indirect  Discourse  the  Principal  Statement  is 
put  in  the  Infinitive,  with  Subject  Accusative  {which  may 
he  omitted  if  perfectly  clear).  All  other  verbs  that  would 
be  in  the  Indicative  if  in  Direct  Discourse,  and  all  Com- 
mands or  Prohibitions,  are  put  in  the  Subjunctive.    Thus: 

Ntlntius  imperatOrl  dicit  quid  factum  sit;  si  prOgrediatur,  magnO  eum 
in  periculo  futDrum  esse,  quia  itinera  interclQsa  sint,  the  messen- 
*ger  tells  the  general  what  has  been  done ;  that,  if  he  shall  advance, 
he  will  be  in  great  danger,  because  the  roads  are  blocked. 

a.  Quid  factum  sit  stands  for  quid  factum  est?  a  Question  of  Fact: 
what  has  been  done  9 

b.  Si  prOgrediatur  stands  for  si  prOgredieris,  a  more  Vivid  Future 
Condition :  if  you  shall  advance.    (Note  the  change  of  Persons.) 

c.  Quia  itinera  intercIOsa  sint  stands  for  quia  itinera  interclGsa 
sunt,  a  Clause  of  Cause  or  Reason  with  quia:  because  the  roads  are 
blocked.    (Cf.  517.) 

534.  Table  of  the  Constructions  of  Indirect  Discourse  by  Kinds 


CONSTRUCTION 

EXPRESSED   BY 

Indirect  (Principal)  Statements 
of  Fact 

Infinitive  with  Subject  Accusa- 
tive 

Indirect  Questions  of  Fact 

Subjunctive 

Indirect  Commands  or  Prohi- 
bitions 

Subjunctive  (ut,  ne) 

Glauses  Subordinate  to  any  of 
these 

Subjunctive 

Exercise  211 

635.  VOCABULARY 

conclamO,   -are,   -avi,  -atum,  1  orbis,  -is,  -ium,  M.  3,  circle.     In 

(con- +  clamo),    shout    vigor-  orhem  cCtnsistO,  take  position 

ously,  shout  out.  in  a  circle. 

cOnsultO,  Adv., purposely,  inten-  partim,  Adv.,  partly. 

tionally.  praeficio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fectum,  3 

demitto,   -mittere,    -misT,    -mis-  (prae  +  facio,   make  to  be  in 

sum,3(de+mitt0),  .^end  dozfti,  front),  put  in  command  (of). 

let  down.    Me  demitto,  I  de-  quasi.  Adv.  (cf.  quam  and  si),  as 

scend,  come  down.  if,  almost. 

exiguus,  -a,  -um,  scanty,  slight.  refer 0,-fer re,  -tull,  -latum  (re-  + 

initium,  -I,  N.  2,  beginning.  ferO),  irr.,  bring  back.     Pedem 

InstO,  -stare,  -stiti,  -statQrus,  1  refero,  I  retreat,  retire. 

(in  +  sto,  stand   on   against),  traho,  trahere,  traxl,  tractum,3, 

press  on.  draiv,  drag ;  drag  out. 

interior y  inner.    See  531.  vOx,  vOcis,  P.  3,  tJOice. 

536.  READING  MATTER 

Turn  clamat  Marcus,  "Quid  vis?  Cur  rem  trahis?  Si  c5pias 
nostras  exiguas  times,  cur  non  in  intima  silva  mansisti?''  Ad 
quae  quaesivit  Lucius,  ubi  Marcus  reliquos  in  insidiis  conloca- 
visset,  qui  sibi  subsidium  ferrenti  Is  respondet  omnes  adesse 
omnesque  paratos  esse  dimicare.  Tum  magna  voce,  ut  hostes 
audire  possent,  suos  progredi  iussit;  sed  legatis  quos  comibus 
dextro  et  sinistr5  praefecerat  (ipse  mediae  aciei  praeerat)  iam 
ante  (m  advance)  docuerat  quid  in  tali  re  facerent. 

Conclamant  omnes.  Acerrime  initio  pugnatum  est.  Tum 
Marcus  cum  pueris  minoribus,  quos  consult©  media  acie  conloca- 
verat,  pedem  celeriter  referunt;  cornua  tardius  (Compar.)  cedunt. 
Hostes,  qui  se  iam  vicisse  crederent,  cupide  instare.  Ita  fit  ut 
omnes  mox  Liici  milites  de  tumulo  sese  demisissent,  atque  uter- 
que  exercitus  quasi  in  orbem  c5nstitisset.  Tum  tertia  Marci 
acies,  subito  partim  ad  dextram  partim  ad  sinistram  transgressa, 
hostis  adgressa  est  a  tergo.  Sic  minor  exercitus  exercitum  maio- 
rem  aequo  loco  undique  circumvenerat,  militesque  Liici,  ut 
superidre  pugna,  armis  commode  uti  non  poterant.  Tum  iiidices 
proniintiaverunt  Marcum  iterum  vicisse. 


212         Formation  and  Comparison  of  Adverbs 

LESSON  LXVIII 

FORMATION  OP  ADVERBS 

537.  1.  Adverbs  from  Adjectives  of  the  First  and  Sec- 
ond Declensions  commonly  end  in  e.  Thus  tardus,  Adv. 
tarde;  aeger,  Adv.  aegre. 

2.  Adverbs  from  Adjectives  of  the  Third  Declension 
commonly  end  in  -ter.  Thus  diligens  (Gen.  diligentis), 
Adv.  diligenter;  acer  (Gen.  acris),  Adv.  acriter. 

REGULAR  COMPARISON  OF  ADVERBS 
638.  In  Comparison  the  Adverb  follows  the  formation 
of  the  Adjective,  except  that  the  Comparative  ends  in  -ius 
(like  the  Neuter  Nominative- Accusative  of  the  Compara- 
tive Adjective),  and  the  Superlative  in  -e.     Thus: 

tarde,  sZoii^Z?/  t2iv6mSy  more  slowly      tardissime,  mos^ 

slowly 
diligenter,  diligently     dlligentius,  more  dili-    diligentissime,  most 

gently  diligently 

Sicnt^v  y  fiercely  SicnuSy  m.ore  fiercely      Sicerrime, most  fiercely 

facile,  easily  facilius,  more  easily       facillime,  7nost  easily 

a.  Magis  and  maxime  are  often  used,  as  with  Adjectives  (511,  4). 

IRREGULAR  OR  DEFECTIVE  COMPARISON  OF  ADVERBS 

539.  The  following  show  two  or  three  different  stems  in 

the  three  Degrees  (like  the  corresponding  Adjectives  given 

in  630),  or  are  otherwise  peculiar  or  defective: 

bene,  well  melius,  better  optime,  best 

male,  ill  peius,  worse  pessime,  worst 

magnopere,  )  greatly  .  .    _  . 

T,  f  ,  magis,  more  maxime,  most 

multum,         )  much 

multum,  mt^c/i  plQs,  more  plQrimum,  mos^ 

parum,  little  minus,  less  minime,  least 

prius,  before  primum,  first 

prope,7iear  propius,  neai^er  proxime, iiearest,7iext 

saepe,  often  saepius,  oftener  saepissime,  oftenest 


Infinitive  with  Subject  Accusative  213 

SPECIAL  USES    OF  THE   COMPARATIVE  AND  SUPERLA- 
TIVE DEGREES 

540.  The  Comparative  Degree  sometimes  has  the  force  of  rather 
....  or  too  .  .  .  .  ,  and  the  Superlative  of  very  ....  Thus: 

cupidus,  eager         cupidior,  too  eager  cupidissimus,  very 

eager 

cupidey  eagerly        cupidiusy  too  eagerly         cupidissimej^er?/ 

eagerly 

INFINITIVE  WITH  SUBJECT  ACCUSATIVE 
(More  General  Construction) 

541.  Specimen  Sentences: 

Optimum  est  nOs  Ire,  It  is  best  {for  us  to  go,  —  )  that  tee  go. 
Volo  te  Ire,  I  want  you  to  go. 
So  in  a  variety  of  uses.     Hence,  we  may  say  that: 

542.  The  Infinitive  ivith  Subject  Accusative  may  be  used 
in  dependence  upon  many  Verbs  and  Phrases.^ 

543.  You  will  note  that  this  construction  comes  into  a  sort  of 
rivalry  with  the  Subjunctive  construction.     Compare  the  following: 

Volo  te  Ire,  I  ivant  you  to  go. 

Volo  ut  tti  eas,  I  want  {that  you  go,  =  )  you  to  go. 
a.  Some  verbs  and  phrases  admit  either  construction  (as  volO) 
others  the  Subjunctive  only  (as  impenO),  others  the  Infinitive  only 
(as  iubeo  and  veto).     You  should  note  as  you  read,  and  remember. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  BY  ATTRACTION  IN  CLAUSES  DEPENDING 
UPON  A  SUBJUNCTIVE  OR  INFINITIVE] 

544.  Specimen  Sentences: 

MOs  est  ut  reges  qui  victi  sint  in  triumpho  dncantur,  it  is  the  custom 
that  kings  who  have  been  conquered  should  be  led  in  triumph. 

Mos  est  reges  qui  victI  sint  in  triumphO  dCicI,  it  is  the  custom  for 
kings  xoho  have  been  conquered  to  be  led  in  triumph. 

1  Another  instance  of  the  general  development  seen  in  the  footnotes  on 
pages  181, 182, — due  to  the  influence  of  the  Infinitive  with  Subject  Accusa- 
tive in  Indirect  Discourse,  and  of  such  natural  constructions  of  Accusative 
and  Infinitive  as  in  "compel  him  to  .  .  .  ,"  "urge  him  to  .  .  .  ,  "  where 
the  Infinitive  was  originally  a  Dative  of  Direction. 


214 


Subjunctive  by  Attraction 


a.  The  Subjunctive  Clauses  in  these  sentences  have  no  reason  in 
themselves  for  being  in  that  mood.  If  attached  to  Indicatives,  they 
would  also  be  Indicative  (thus  reges  qui  victi  sunt  in  triumpho 
dacuntur,  kings  who  are  conquered  are  led  in  triumph).  The 
reason  for  the  mood  here  must  therefore  be  that  the  clauses  are 
influenced  by  the  Subjunctive  and  Infinitive. 

We  may  then  lay  down  the  rule  that : 

545.  A  Dependent  Clause  attached  to  a  Subjunctive  or 
Infinitive  Clause,  and  expressing  an  essential  part  of  the 
thought  conveyed  by  it,  is  put  in  the  Subjunctive? 


546.  VOCABULARY 

accurrO,  -currere,  -curri  and  -cu- 
curri,  — ,  3  (ad+currO),  run  up. 

BaculuSy  -I,  M.  2,  a  Roman  name. 

cognOscO,  -gnOscere,  -gnOvi, 
-gnitum,3(con — (-nOscO,  earlier 
form  gnOscO),  learn  thorough- 
ly, find  out ;  recognize. 

commtltO,-are,-avi,-atum,l(con- 
+mtltO)  completely  change. 

conligo,  -ligere,  -legi,  -lectum,,3 
(con-+legO),  gather,  collect. 

deficio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fectum,  3 
(de+facio,  make  away),  fail. 

erumpO,  -rumpere,  -rOpi,  -rup- 
tum,  3  (e+rumpo),  hieak  out, 
sally  out. 

eruptio,  -Onis,  F.  3,  sally. 

excipio,  -cipere,  -cepi,  -ceptum, 
3  (ex+capio,  take  from  some 
one),  receive,  pick  up. 


experior,  experirl,  expertus 
sum,  4,  try. 

Galba,  -ae,  M.  l,a  Roman  name. 

inter ficio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fectum, 
3,  kill. 

intermitto,  -mittere,  -mlsi,  -mis- 
sum,  3  (inter-j-mitto,  send  be- 
tween), intermit,  stop. 

porta,  -ae,  F.  1,  gate. 

relinquo,-linquere,  -llqul,  -lictum, 
3  (cf.  reliquus),  leave. 

salGs,  -Gtis,  F.  3,  salvation, 
safety. 

sex,  indecl.  Adj.,  six. 

Sextius,  -1,  M.  2,  a  name. 

spes,  -ei,  F.  4,  hope. 

tantummodo,  Adv.  (tantum+mo- 
do.,  so  much  only),  merely. 

telum,  -1,  N.  2,  missile. 

Volusenus,  -i,  M.  2,  a  name. 


iThis  usage  came  about  especially  through  the  frequent  occurrence  (1) 
of  dependent  Subjunctive  clauses  which  really  owed  their  Mood  to  Indirect 
Discourse,  but  happened  to  be  dependent  upon  other  Subjunctive  Clauses ; 
(2)  of  past-future  Subjunctives  in  dependence  upon  other  Subjunctives ; 
and  (3)  of  Subjunctive  clauses  with  real  but  not  obvious  mood-force,  in 
dei)endence  upon  other  Subjunctives  (cf.  501, 1,  footnote  4).  The  use  with 
the  Infinitive  is  a  still  further  extension. 


Exercises  215 

547.  READING  MATTER     ' 

(An  Incident  from  Real  Warfare :  Victory  in  a  Desperate  Situation) 
Cum  iam  amplius  horis  sex  pugnaretur^  ac  non  solum  vires 
sed  etiam  tela  nostros  defieerent,  Publius  Sextius  Baculus,  cen- 
turio,  et  Gaius  Volusenus,  tribunus  militum,  vir  et  consilT  magni 
et  virtutis,  ad  Galbam  accurrunt  atque  unam  esse  ^  spem  salutis 
decent,  si  eruptione  facta  extremum^  auxilium^  experirentur.* 
Itaque  celeriter  milites  certiores  facit  paulisper  intermitterenf^ 
proelium  ac  tantummodo  tela  quae  missa  essent*"'  exciperent; 
post  dat5  signo  ex  castris  erumperent  atque  omnem  spem  salu- 
tis in  virtiite  ponerent. 

Quod  iussi  sunt  faciunt,  ac  subito  omnibus  portis  eruptione 
facta  neque  cognoscendi  quid  fieret^  neque  sui  conligendi  hosti- 
bus  facultatem  relinquunt.  Itaque  commutata  fortuna  eos  qui 
in  spem^  potiundorum  castrorum  venerant  undique  circumven- 
tos^  interficiunt.^ 

548.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  They  had  now  been  fighting  more  than  six  hours  and  not 
only  strength  but  missiles  were  failing.  2.  Then  a  centurion 
and  a  tribune  showed  Galba  that,  unless  they  should  try  a  des- 
perate remedy,  there  was  no  hope  of  safety;  (that)  if,  however, 
stopping*^  the  battle ^^  for  a  little,  and  merely  picking  up  the 
missiles  that  should  be  sent,  they  should  sally  out  by  all  the 
gates,  they  would  leave  the  enemy  no  opportunity  for  collecting 
themselves  or  for  knowing  what  was  going  on;^^  and  would 
surround  and  kill  those  who  had  come  to  hope  to  possess  the 
camp.    And-this  ^^  was  done. 

iMust  mean  HAD  now  BEEN.  7  indirect  Question  of  Fact.  Trans- 
Note  horis  sex.  late  what  was  going  on. 

2  Indirect  Principal  Statement.  8  jjad  come  INTO  the  hope  (notice 

3  =  a  desperate  remedy.  the  case),  =  had  come  to  hope. 

4  Indirect  Future  Condition.  ^ Kill  those  .  .  .  .  ,   surrounded. 
6  Indirect  Command.  In  English,  surround  and  kill. 

6 Past-Future  Subj.,  also  in  Indir.  lo  Use  the  Ablative  Absolute. 

Disc.,  and  also  suggesting  Attraction.  ii  =  ''was  being  done." 

Of.  footnote  on  opposite  page.  ^^  Uge  the  connecting  pronoun. 


216  Reading 

PART  III:  SUPPLEMENTARY  READING 


THE  GALLIC  UPRISING   OF   64   B.  C.^ 

CHAPTER  I 
549.    Disposition  of  the  Roman  Army  in  Belgium  for  the  Winter 

Eo  anno  propter  frumenti  inopiam  coactus  est  Caesar  legiones 
in  pluris  eivitatis  distribuere;  ex  quibus  unam  in^  Morinos 
ducendam^  C.  Fabio  legato  dedit,  alteram  in  Nervios  Q.  Cice- 
roni, tertiam  in  Esiivios  L.  Roscio.  Quartam  in*  Remis  cumT. 
Labieno  ad  fines  Trevirorum  hiemare  iiissit.  Tres  in  Bellovacis 
conlocavit;  his  M.  Crassum  et  L.  Miinatium  Plancum  et  C.  Tre- 
bonium  legatos  praefecit.  tJnam  legionem  et  cohortis  quinque 
in  Eburones,  qui  sub  imperio  Ambiorigis  et  Catuvolci  erant,  misit. 
His  militibus  Q.  Titiirium  Sabinum  et  L.  Aurunculeium  Cottam 
legatos  praeesse  iussit. 

1  You  have  finished  your  study  of  forms  and  constructions,  and  are  now 
to  see  how  effectively  you  can  use  your  knowledge,  to  understand  what  a 
Roman  writer  has  to  say.  The  Lessons  from  this  point  on  tell  the  story  of 
a  dramatic  chain  of  events  in  one  of  the  Gallic  campaigns  of  Julius  Caesar. 
Five  years  before,  Rome  had  possessed,  of  what  we  now  know  as  France,  a 
small  territory  in  the  southeast.  Caesar,  the  Roman  governor  of  this  prov- 
ince and  also  of  North  Italy  and  a  strip  of  country  further  east,  checked  an 
attempted  westward  migration  of  the  Swiss,  which  threatened  the  province. 
From  this  beginning,  he  became  involved  (not  unwillingly)  in  a  series  of 
wars ;  and,  when  our  story  opens,  he  had  i)raotically  conquered  France  and 
Belgium,  and  had  even  made  a  tentative  invasion  of  Britain.  In  all  this,  he 
was  spreading  the  civilization  which  we  have  inherited. 

In  the  autumn  of  54  before  Christ,  his  work  was  nearly  undone  by  a  sud- 
den uprising,  and  the  bad  error  of  judgment  of  two  of  his  lieutenants.  For- 
tunately, he  had  not  yet  gone  back  to  North  Italy  for  the  winter.  These 
Chapters  tell,  in  his  own  narrative  (condensed),  what  happened. 

^Into  (note  the  Accusative)  the  country  of. 

^  You  see  that  the  Future  Passive  Participle  can  serve  to  express  Purpofie. 

*In  (note  the  Ablative)  the  country  of. 


Writing 


217 


660. 


VOCABULARY 


cOgO,  cOgere,  cOegi,  coactum,  3 
(con- +  ago,  drive  together), 
gather;  compel. 

distribuO,  -tribuere,  -tribui,  -tri- 
bntum,  3,  distribute. 

frtimentum,  -T,  N.  2,  grain. 


hiemO,   -are,   -avi,  -atum,  1  (cf. 

hiemsj,  winter. 
inopia,  -ae,    F.   1,    want,    lack, 

scarcity,     (Opposite  of  cOpia.) 
quartus,  -a,  -um,  fourth. 
quinque,  indecl.  Adj.,  five. 


ROMAN    NAMES  ROMAN  NAMES  (CONT'd)  GALLIC   NATIONS 

Aurunculeius,  -i.  Roscius,  -I.  BellovacI,  -Orum. 

Sablnus,  -1. 
TitCirius,  -i. 
Titus,  -1. 
Trebonius,  -i. 


Caesar,  Caesaris. 
Cicero,  -Onis. 
Cotta,  -ae. 
Crassus,-!. 
Fabius,  -i. 
Labienus,  -T. 
MOnatius,  -1. 
Plancus,  -1. 
Abbreviations 
T.,  Titus. 


GALLIC    KINGS 

Ambiorix,  -Igis. 
Catuvolcus,  -1. 


EburOnes,  -urn. 
Esuvir,  -Orum. 
Morini,  -Orum. 
Nervii,     -Orum.       Also 

Sing.  Nervius,  a  Ner- 

vian. 
Remi,  -Orum. 
Treverl,  -Orum. 


C,  Gaius;  L.,  LQcius;   M.,  Marcus;  Q.,  QuFntus; 


651.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION! 

1.  There  was  a  scarcity  of  grain  this  year.  2.  If  ^  the  legions 
should  winter^  together,  the  supply  ^  from  the  neighboring*  coun- 
try would  fail.^  3.  Caesar  therefore  distributed  them  among 
several  states. 

4.  He  gave  one.  legion  and  five  cohorts  to  Sabinus  and  Cotta 
to  lead^  into  the  country  of  the  Eburones;  (and)  another  legion 
to  Labienus  to  lead  into  the  country  of  the  Remi.  5.  Another 
legion  he  placed  in  the  country  of  the  Esuvii;  (and)  this  he 
ordered  Cicero  to  command.  6.  Others  he  sent  to  different 
regions,  with  different  lieutenants. 

1  The  notes  will  now  l^ave  you  more  largely  to  your  own  power  of  think- 
ing out  Latin  ways  of  expression,  both  for  choice  of  words  and  for  con- 
structions. 

2  A  Future  Condition  and  Conclusion  from  a  jtast  point  of  view. 

3  Use  copia. 

4  Use  propinquus  and  loca. 

^Purpose.     Express  it  as  Caesar  did  in  the  Latin  oi)posite. 


218  Beading 


CHAPTER  II 

552.  Revolt  of  Ambiorix  and  Catuvolcus 

Atque  harum  omnium  legi5num  hiberna  milibus  passuum 
centum  continebantur.V  Caesar  interea,  quoad '^^  legiones  conlo- 
catas  munitaque  hiberna  cognovisset,  in  Gallia  morari  constituit. 

Ab  omnibus,  quibus  legiones  tradiderat,  certior  factus  est  in 
hiberna  perventum  locum  que  esse  mdnitum. 

Diebus  qumdecim  quibus^  in  hiberna  ventum  est,  initium 
repentini  tumult  us  ortum  est  ab  Ambiorige  et  Catuvolc5;  qui,* 
Indutiomari  Treveri  nuntiis  impulsi,  ad  castra  oppugnatum 
venerunt.*  Cum  celeriter  nostri  arma  cepissent  vallumque  ascen- 
dissent,  atque,  equitibus  emissis,  equestri  proelio  superiores^ 
fuissent,^  desperata  re^  hostes  suos  ab  oppugnatione  reduxerunt. 
Tum  suo  more  conclamaverunt,  uti^  aliqui^  ex  nostris  ad  conlo- 
quium  prodiret :  habere^  sese,  quae  de  re  communi  dicere  vellent.^*^ 

1  Tense  of  the  Situation,  the  State  of  Affairs. 

2  Summary  of  ideas  with  words  meaning  until  (dum,  donee,  and  quoad)  : 

!  Actual  Act  looked  back  upon,  Indicative. 

Act  looked  forward  to  (Anticipated),  Subjunctive. 

3  Withiyi  which.    In  English  we  say  after. 

4 Really  independent.    A  Forward-Moving  Relative  Clause. 

^Higher  in  what  sense?    If  you  cannot  see,  consult  p.  208,  footnote  1. 

6  Note  two  ways  of  introduction  used  together,  the  cum-Clause  and  the 
Ablative  Absolute. 

7  At  once,  you  see  that  a  Volitive  Substantive  Clause  is  coming. 
*^  Unusual  use  of  aliqui  as  Substantive,  in  place  of  aliquis. 

9  This  must  be  a  Principal  Statement  in  Indirect  Discourse.  Now  look 
back  at  uti  .  .  .  .  prodiret,  and  you  will  find  that  the  two  fill  out  the  meaning 
of  the  same  verb,  conclamaverunt.  The  whole  is  thus  clearly  in  Indirect  Dis- 
course. This  shows  us  once  more  that  there  is  no  real  difference  between  a 
Volitive  Clause  after  a  verb  of  saying,  and  a  Command  in  Indirect  Discourse. 
The  latter  is  only  one  particular  instance  of  the  former. 

10  Why  is  vellent  Subjunctive,  and  what  does  it  stand  for? 


Writing 


219 


553. 


VOCABULARY 


ascendo,  ascendere,  ascendi,  as- 

censum,  3,  ascend,  mount. 
centum,  indecl.  Adj.,  a  hundred. 
conloquium,  -i,  N.  2,  colloquy. 
desperO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1  (de  + 

sperO,  hope),  despair  (of). 
emitto,  emittere,  emisl,  emissum, 

3  (e  +  mitto),  send  out. 
eques,  equitis,  M.  3,  horseman, 

cavalryman.    In  PL,  cavalry. 
equestris,  -e,  cavalry  (as  Adj.). 
Gallia,  -ae,  F.  1,  Gaul. 
hiberna,  -Orum,  N.  2,  a  winter 

camp,  winter  quarters. 
impellO,-pellere,  -pull,-pulsum,  3 

(in  +  pello,  drive  on),  impel. 
IndQtiomarus,-!,  M.  2,  name  of  a 

Gallic  king. 
interea,  Adv.  (inter  4-ea),  mean- 
while. 


moror,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  1,  delay. 
mQniO,  -Ire,  -IvI,  -Itum,  4,  con- 
struct, fortify. 
oppugnatio,  -Onis,  F.  3,  siege. 
oppugnO,-are,  -avT,-atum,  1  (ob  + 

pugnO),  besiege,  attack  {aforti- . 

fied  place). 
prOdeO, -Ire, -ivi, -itum,  irr.(prOd-, 

oldest  form  of  prO,  +  eO),  come 

forth. 
quindecim,  indecl.  Adj.  (cf.  quln- 

que  and  decern),  fifteen. 
redncO,-dCicere,-dllxl,-ductum,  3 

(re -\-dZic6),  lead  back. 
repentlnus,  -a,  -um,  sudden. 
trado,  tradere,  tradidi,  traditum, 

3  (trans  +  dO)j  hand  over. 
tumultus,  -ns,  M.  4,  disturbance, 

uprising. 
vallum,  -1,  N.  2,  wall,  rampart. 


554. 


MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 


1.  Caesar  waited  until  he  was  informed^  that  the  legions  had 
come  into  winter-quarters.  2.  And,  even  then,  he  by  chance 
delayed,  which  fact^  was  the  salvation  of  the  Roman  power ^  in 
Gaul.  3.  For  when  Cotta  and  Sabinus  had  constructed  a  camp, 
Ambiorix  and  Catuvolcus  suddenly  attacked  it. 

4.  Our  men,  however,  defended  themselves  fiercely,  and  the 
cavalry,  being  sent  out  from  the  camp,  were*  superior  in  a  cavalry 
battle.  5.  The  barbarians  then  shouted-out  that^  some  one  of 
our  men  should^  be  sent  to  them  for  a  conference,  (saying)  that 
they  wished  to  talk  about  the  common  interest.'^ 


1  Is  this  an  actual  act  looked  back 
upon,  or  an  act  looked  forward  to? 

2  Use  res, — a  convenient  general 
word.  See  two  places  in  the  Latin 
opposite. 


3 Say  "for  salvation  to.  .  ."(428). 

4  Be  careful  of  the  tense.    This 
will  test  your  feeling. 

5  What  kind  of  a  clause,  in  Eng- 
lish as  in  Latin? 


220  Beading ' 


CHAPTER  III 

555.  The  Parley 

Mittitur  ad  e5s  conloquendi  causa  ^  C.  ArpTneius,  eques  Roma- 
nus,  et  Q.  lunius;  apud  qu5s  Ambiorix  ad  hunc  modum^  locutus 
est:  Sese  pro  Caesaris  in  se  beneficiis  plurimum  ei  c5nfiteri 
debere;  id  quod  fecerit^  de  oppugnati5ne  castr5rum,  n5n  aut 
iudicio  aut  voluntate  sua  fecisse,  sed  coactu  civitatis.  Esse  Gal- 
liae  commiine  consilium :  omnibus  hibernis  Caesaris  oppugnandTs 
hunc  esse  dictum  diem,  ne  qua  legio  legioni  subsidio  venire 
posset.    Non  facile  Gall5s  GallTs  negare  potuisse.* 

Quibus^  quoniam^  pro  pietate  satisfecerit,  habere  nunc  se  rati5- 
nem^  offici  pro  beneficio  Caesaris :  monere,  orare  Sabinum,  ut  suae 
ac  nnlitum  saluti  consulat.  Magnam  manum  Germanorum  Rhe- 
num  transisse:  hanc  adfore  biduo.  Ipsorum^  esse  consilium, 
velintne,^  prius  quam  fmitimi  sentiant,  milites  aut  ad  Ciceronem 
aut  ad  Labienum  deducere,  quorum  alter  milia  passuum  quinqua- 
ginta,  alter  paulo  amplius  ab  eis  absit.  lUud  se  polliceri,  tutum 
iter  per  fines  daturum.  Hac  oratidne^  habita  ^  discedit  Ambiorix. 

i(With  the  cause  of,=)  for  the  sake  of,  with  the  purpose  of.  Causa  or 
gratia  following  a  Gerund  or  Gerundive  is  a  common  way  of  expressing 
Purpose. 

^  After  this  fashion^  ox  as  follows.  . 

3  That  which  he  had  done.  Evidently  a  Determinative  Clause.  Why,  then, 
Subjunctive? 

^  Gauls  had  not  been  able  easily  to  deny  Gauls,  i.  e.,  it  wouldn'^t  have  been 
easy  for  him,  as  a  Gaul,  to  deny  Gauls. 

^Double  Connective  {whoiy,  since  .  .  .),  where  English  would  use  but  one 
(sinct .  .  .  them). — What  mood  have  you  learned  is  used  with  quod,  quia, 
quoniam,  and  quando  (517)?    Why  then  the  Subjunctive  here?  . 

^Had  reckoning  of,  tx)ok  account  of,  had  regard  for. 

7  Their  own  counsel,  i.  e.,  a  matter  for  themselves  to  decide. 

^  Velint-ne,  whether  they  wanted,  whether  they  chose. 

^Having  delivered  this  address.    What  construction?  , 


Writing 


221 


656. 


VOCABULARY 


Arpineius,  -i,  M.  2,  a  name, 
beneficium,-!,  N.  2  (cf.  bene  and 

facio),  well-doing,  kindness. 
biduum,  -1,  N.  2,  two  days. 
coSctus,  -Qs,  M.  4,  compulsion. 
cOnfiteor,  -fiterl,  -fessus  sum,  2, 

confess. 
conloquor,  -loqui,  -loctitus  sum,  3 

(con-  +  lbquor),  confer, 
cOnsuIO,  -sulere,  -sului,  -sultum, 

3,  consult  {for),  look  out  for. 
debeo,  debere,  debul,  debitum,  2 

(de  -f-  habeO,  have  from),  owe ; 

ought. 
finitimus,  -a,  -um,  neighboring. 

PI.  as  Subst.,  neighbors. 


lanius,  -1,  M.  2,  a  name. 

negO,  -are,  -avi,-atum,  1,  say  no, 
say  .  .  .  not,  deny,  refuse. 

Oratio,  -Onis,  F.  3,  speech,  argu- 
ment. 

pietas,  -atis,  F.  3,  loyalty,  patri- 
otism. 

pro  (same  word  as  before),  in  be- 
half of;  hence,  in  return  for. 
Prep.,  taking  Abl. 

qumquaginta,  indecl.  Adj.,  fifty. 

Rhenus,  -I,  M.  2,  the  Rhine, 

satisfacio,  -facere,  -feci,  -factum, 
3  (satis  +  facio),  do  enough 
(for),  satisfy. 

tQtus,  -a,  -um,  safe. 


557.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  The  argument  of  Ambiorix  was  after  this  fashion:  2.  I 
have  not  besieged  your  camp  of  my  own  will  or  judgment,  but 
under  the  compulsion  of  the  state.  3.  The  Gauls  have  formed  a 
common  plan  to  attack^  all  (of)  Caesar's  winter-camps  on  the 
same  day.    4.  I,  a  Gaul,  could  ^  not ^  say-no  to  the  Gauls. 

5.  (But^)  since  I  have  now  satisfied  them,  it  is  permitted  to 
me  to  have  regard  for  my  duty  in-return-for  Caesar's  kindness. 
6.  I  speak  for  the  saketof  warning  you.  7.  A  great  band  of  Ger- 
mans has  crossed  the  Rhine.  8.  Before  they  shalP  be  present,  I 
beg  you  to  lead  off  your  soldiers  to  (the  camp  of)  Cicero  or 
Labienus.  9.  I  will  give  you  a  safe  conduct^  through  our  territory. 


iQf  course  you  will  not  use  the 
Infinitive  in  Latin. 

2  = ''Was  not  able"  (non  potui). 

3  Omit,  and  use  double  connective. 


•^Use  causa. 

^Is  this  looked  back  upon  (Fact), 
or  forward  to  (Anticipation)? 
^Say  "a  safe  journey." 


222  Reading 


CHAPTER  IV 

558.  Difference  of  Opinion.  The  Wrong  Plan  Prevails 
Arpineius  et  lunius  quae  audierant^  ad  legates  deferunt. 
nil,  etsi  ab  hoste  ea  dicebantur,^  tamen  non  neglegenda^ 
exTstimabant.^  Itaque  ad  consilium  rem  deferunt,  magnaque* 
inter  e5s  exsistit  controversia.*  Cotta  compluresque  tribuni 
militum  nihil  temere  agendum^  neque  ex  hibernis  iniussu 
Caesaris  discedendum  existimabant.^  Contra  ea  Sabinus  sero 
facturos  clamitabat,  cum  maiores  manus  hostium  adiunctis 
Germanis  convenissent.^  Magno  esse  Germanis  dolori  superi- 
ores  nostras  victorias;  ardere  Galliam;  brevem  consulendi^  esse 
occasionem.    Caesarem  se  arbitrari  profectum  in  Italiam. 

Res  disputatione  ad  mediam  noctem  perducitur.  Tandem 
dat  ^  Cotta  permotus  manus :  superat  sententia  SabinT.  Pro- 
nuntiatur  prima  luce  ituros.  ConsQmitur  vigiliis  reliqua  pars 
noctis.  Prima  luce  ex  castrTs  proficiscuntur,  longissimo  agmine 
maximisque  impedimentls. 

1  What  kind  of  clause  is  this? 

2  The  tense  expresses  the  Situation^  the  State  of  Affairs. 
When  one  is  talking  about  the  past,  Situation  will  always  be 

I  expressed  by  the  Imperfect  or  Past  Perfect  (which  are  the  Help- 
ing Tenses) ;  while  the  Leading  Events  will  be  expressed  by 
Aorist  Perfects  or  Picturesque  Presents.    Remember  this  in 

,  your  own  writing. 

3  Esse  is  omitted,  as  very  frequently  in  Indirect  Discourse. 

'^  Adjective  not  only  before  the  Noun  (abnormal  place),  but  at  the  head 
of  the  clause;  while  the  Noun  itself  is  suspended^  to  heighten  curiosity. 
Write  like  this  yourself. 

6  This,  you  see,  had  not  yet  occurred.  The  act  was  still  to  be  done 
(future).  The  tense,  then,  is  ijot  a  real  Past  Perfect,  but  a  V^^i  Future 
Perfect  (future  to  clamitabat,  and  finished  before,  i.  e..  Perfect  to,  sero 
facturos).  You  will  find  the  English  tense  by  which  you  translate  to  corre- 
spond exactly. 

^Opportunity  OF,  where  we  say  FOR. 

7  Dat  ....  ma.nus  =  yields.    Note  the  emphasis  of  order.    Something 
finally  done  (dat)  by  Cotta, — namely,  ....  giving  up  (shown  by  manus). 


Tenses 

in 

Historical 

Writing 


Writing 


223 


659. 


VOCABULARY 


arbitror,  -arl,  -atus  sum,  1,  think, 
suppose. 

ardeO,  ardere,  arsT,  arsGrus,  2, 
burn,  be  in  a  blaze. 

brevis,  -e,  short,  small. 

clamito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1  (cf. 
clamO),  keep  crying  out. 

cOnsQmO,  -sGmere,  -snmpsi, 
-sQmptum,  3  (con-,  intensive, 
-|-  sOmO,  take  up),  consume, 
spend. 

defer 0,  -ferre,  -tuli,  -latum,  irr. 
(de  +  ferO),  carry  off;  report. 

disputatiO,  -Onis,  F.  3,  discussion. 

dolor,  -Oris,  M.  3,  pain. 

etsl  (et  +  si),  Conj.,  even  if;  al- 
though. 

exIstimO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1, 
estimate;  think. 


exsisto,  -sistere,  -stitl,  -stitGrus, 

3  (ex  +  sisto,  cause  to  stand 

out),  break  out,  arise. 
impedimentum,  -1,  N.  2  (as  before), 

hindrance,  in  PL,  baggage. 
iniussO,  Adv.,  without  orders. 
Inx,  iQcis,  F.  3,  light.    Prima  iGx, 

daylight. 
occasio,    -Onis,   F.    3,  occasion, 

opportunity. 
perdncO,  -dacere,  -dGxi,  -ductum, 

3  (per  +  dOcO,  lead  along), 

prolong. 
permoveO,  -movere,  -mOvi,  -mo- 

tum,  2  (per  +  moveO,  move), 

move  deeply. 
serO,  Adv.,  late,  too  late. 
tandem.  Adv.,  at  last. 
vigilia,  -ae,  F.  1,  watch,  vigil. 


560. 


MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 


1.  Some^  spoke  after  this  fashion:  2.  The  things  which  have 
been  reported^  to  the  council  are  said,  not  by  a  friend,  but  by  an 
enemy.  3.  Why  should  we  trust  an  enemy?  4.  Let  us  do 
nothing  rashly.  5.  We  ought  not  to  depart^  frona  our  winter 
quarters  without  orders  from  Caesar. 

6.  Against  this,  the  argument  of  others^  was  after  this  fashion: 
7.  We  shall  act*  too  late  when  the  Germans  shall  have  joined 
themselves  to  the  Gauls.  8.  Before  they  shall  be  present  in 
front  of  our  camp,  let  us  lead  off  our  men  to  the  nearest  winter 
quarters.  9.  Caesar  has  set  out  for  Italy.  10.  Let  us  set  out 
without  delay  for  (the  camp  of)  Cicero  "or  Labienus. 

1  Alii  ....  alii  .  .  .  .  ,  in  the  proper  cases. 

2  What  kind  of  clause? 

3 Use  Impersonal  verb,  as  opposite  (''  it  ought  not  to  be  departed  by  us  "). 
^Use  faci5. 


224  •  Reading 


CHAPTER   V 

561.  Ambuscade 

At  hostes  postea  quam  ex  vigiliis  de  profectione  eorum  sen- 
seriint,^  conlocatis  insidiis  in  silvis  Romanorum  adventum  exspec- 
tabant;  et  cum  se  maior  pars  agminis  in  magnam  convallem 
demisisset,^  ex  utraqiie  parte  eius  vallis  subito  se  ostenderunt 
atque  proelium  committere  coeperunt.  Turn  demum  Sabinus, 
qui  nihil  provTdisset,^  trepidare  et  concursare.  At  Cotta,  qui 
eogitasset*  haee  posse  in  itinere  accidere,  nulla  in  re  communT 
saluti  deerat. 

Hi  cum^  propter  longitudinem  agminis  non  facile  per  se^ 
omnia  obire  et  quid  quoque^  loco  faciendum  esset  providere  pos- 
sent,*^  iusserunt  pr5niintiari  ut  impedimenta  relinquerent  atque 
in  orbem  c5nsisterent.  Quod^  consilium,  etsi  in  eius  modi  casii 
reprehendendum  n5n  est,  tamen  incommode  cecidit;^*^  nam  et^^ 
nostris  militibus  spem  minuit  et  hostis  ad  pugnam  alacri5res 
effecit,  quod^  non  sine  summo  timore  et  desperatione  id  factum 
videbatur. 

lAoristic  Narrative  Clause  (506).    Postea  quam  =  postquam. 

2  Descriptive  cum-Clause  of  Situation  (487 ) .  Practically  interchangeable 
with  the  Aoristic  Narrative  Clause  with  ubi,  ut,  postquam,  etc.  (506,  a). 

3 The  mood  shows  that  the  idea  is  Causal  (Causal  qui-Clause;  479). 

■*  Contracted  form  (for  cogitavisset).  So  often  from  stems  in  -avi,  -evi,  -Ivi. 

^  Don't  think  of  a  tr-anslatioii  for  cum  as  you  read,  but  wait  to  see  how  the 
clause  turns  out.    Here  are  the  possibilities  for  it,  if  Subjunctive : 
Possibilities/  (Merely)  Descriptive;  when  (487). 

of  )  Descriptive,    with    additional  Causal  or   Adversative  force; 

Subjunctive  j  when  (and  sinee,  or  although;  488). 

cum-Clause   \  (Purely)  Causal  or  Adversative;  siyice^  or  although  (489). 

6  Through  themselves^  that  is,  in  person.    The  line  was  too  long. 

7  This  is  quoque,  not  quoque.     It  is  the  Ablative  of  quisque,  each. 
8 This  proves  to  be  a  Causal  cum-Clause  {since;  489). 

y  Always  be  on  your  guard  with  quod  (Relative  Pronoun  or  Conjunction) ! 
^^ Fell,  in  the  sense  of  happened.     (Compare  English  ''befell.".) 
11  After  nam,  et  cannot  mean  "and."    What  then? 


Writing  225 

562.  VOCABULARY 

accido,  accidere,  accidi, ,  3  longitndo,  -inis,  F.  3,  length. 

(ad+cado),  befall,  happen.  minuO,  minuere,  minul,  minGtum, 

adventus,  -Os,  M.  4,  arrival.  3  (cf.  minus),  lessen,  diminish. 

coepi,  coepisse,  coeptum  est,  de-  obeO,    obire,    obii,   obitum,    irr. 

fective,  began,  started.  (ob+eO,  go  to  meet),  attend  to. 

concursO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1  (cf .  ostendo,      ostendere,      ostendl, 

con-  and  currO),  run  to  and  fro.  ostentum,  3,  show. 

convallis,  -is,  F.  3,  valley,  defile,  profectio,  -Onis,  F.  3,  departure. 

desperatiO,-Onis,  F.  3,  de.spaiV.  reprehendo,     -hendere,     -hendr, 

desum,  deesse,  defui,  defutGrus,  -hensum,  S,  censure. 

irr.  (de+sum),  be  wanting, fail.  timer,  -Oris,  M.  3,  fear. 

incommode,    Adv.,   disadvanta-  trepido,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  be  in 

geously,  unfortunately.  aflutter,  lose  one's  head. 

563.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  The  Gauls,  placing^  an  ambuscade  in  the  woods,  waited 
until  the  army  came-down^  into  a  valley.  2.  Then  our  men  saw, 
too-late,  that  the  enemy  had  broken  faith.  3.  They  were  now 
in  the  greatest  danger.  4.  Their  line  of  march  was  very  long, 
and  a  great  multitude  was  attacking  it  on  either  side.  • 

5.  Cotta  and  Sabinus  were  not  able  to  attend  to  everything  in 
person.  6,  They  therefore  ordered  their  men  to  leave  the  bag- 
gage and  take-position  in  a  circle.  7.  This^  plan  is  often  to  be 
approved  in  such  a  case;  but  it  strengthened*  the  hope  of  the 
enemy,  who  believed^  the  Eomans  to  be  thoroughly  frightened. 

iThe  English  Present  Participle  is  often  inexact  in  tense.  The  real 
tense-fact  here  is  Perfect  (HAVING  placed.  They  didn't  wait  while  placing, 
but  after  they  had  placed,  when  they  had  placed).— But  Latin  has  no  Perfect 
Active  Participle. 

Now,  if  conloco,  place,  were  a  Deponent  verb,  you  could  use  the  Perfect* 
Passive  Participle,  which  has  active  meaning  (315).  But  it  is  not.  Hence 
you  must  express  the  idea  by  a  clause  with  a  conjunction  meaning  after  or 
when  (ubi,  etc.,  or  cum),  or  by  the  Ablative  Absolute,  with  Perfect  Passive 
Participle.    This  happens  often. 

2  Your  translation  will  show  whether  you  have  mastered  the  until-Clauses. 

3  How  can  you  tie  this  sentence  neatly  to  the  last  one? 

^  Say  "  strengthened  hope  for  the  enemy,"  using  conlirmo. 
^Use  the  mood  which  will  add  the  idea  of  since. 


226    .  Reading 


CHAPTER  VI 

564.  A  Desperate  Battle.    Gallic  Strategy 

Nostri  omnem  spem  salutis  in  virtute  ponebant;  et  quotiens^ 
quaeque  cohors  procurrerat,  ab  ea  parte  magnus  numerus  hos- 
tium  cadebat.  Qua  re  animadversa  Ambiorix  pronuntiari  iubet 
ut  procul  tela  coniciant  et,  quam  ^  in  partem  Rdmani  impetum 
f ecerint,^  cedant,  rursus  se  ^  ad  signa  recipientis  insequantur.  Quo 
praecepto  ab  iis  diligentissime  observato,  cum  quaepiam  cohors 
ex  orbe  excesserat  atque  impetum  fecerat,  hostes  vel5cissime 
refugiebant.  Rursus,  cum  in  eum  locum  unde  erant  pr5gressi 
reverti  coeperant,  et  ab  iis  qui  cesserant  et  ab  iis  qui  proximi 
steterant  circumveniebantur. 

Tamen  multis  vulneribus  acceptis  resistebant;  et  magna  parte 
diei  consiimpta,  cum  a  prima  liice  ad  hdram  octavam  pugnaretur,* 
nihil  quod  ipsis  esset  indignum  commit tebant.  Tum  Q.  Liicanius, 
fortissime  pugnans,  dum  circumvent5  filio  subvenit,  interficitur, 
L.  Cotta  legatus  omnes  5rdines  adhortans  in  adversum^  5s  funda 
vulneratur.  His  rebus  permotus^  Sabinus  interpretem  ad  Ambi- 
origem  mittit  rogatum,  ut  sibi  militibusque  parcat/ 

1  This  is  a  good  illustration  of  the  Generalizing  Clause,  which  is  very  like 
a  General  Condition  (494  a  and  h):  As  often  as  (=if  at  any  time)  any 
cohort  charged^  a  great  number  of  the  enemy  would  fall. 

Note,  now,  the  equivalency  of  several  introductory  words : 
Quotiens  quaeque    cohors  procurrerat,  as  often  as  any  cohort  charged. 

Cum  quaepiam  cohors  procurrerat,  when  any  cohort  charged. 

Quaecumque  cohors  procurrerat,  whatever  cohort  charged. 

Si  qua  cohors , procurrerat,  if  any  cohort  charged. 

All  these  are  general,  and  all  assume  something  as  a  fact;  whence  the 
Indicative  mood  (note  the  two  cum-Clauses  of  this  kind  below). 

^In  whatever  direction.    General,  in  future.  Indirect  Discourse. 

3  Be  careful !    Recipientis  is  active,  and  must  have  some  Object. 

*  Adversative  cum-Clause.    For  the  tense-force,  see  547,  footnote  1. 

^  In  the  opposed  face  =full  in  the  face. 

6  Obviously  Situation.    This  is  what  Participles  regularly  express. 

7  You  see  that  the  feeling  is  that  of  Request  or  Entreaty  (cf.  529,  footnote2). 


Writing  .  227 

565.  VOCABULARY 

adhortor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  1,  en-  parcO,  parcere,  pepercl  or  parsi, 

courage ;  exhort,  urge.  parsQrus,    3,    spare    (Verb  of 

animadvertO,    -vertere,     -vertl,  Attitude). 

-versum,  3  (animus+ad+ver-  praeceptum,  -I,  N.  2,  direction. 

to,  turn  the  mind  to),  notice.  procul,  Adv.,  at  a  distance,  from 
conicio,  -icere,  -iecl,  -iectum,  3         a  distance. 

{con- -\-i3iciQ),  hurl.  quispiam,    quaepiam,   quodpiam 
{ortiter,AdY.,  bravely.    Compar.  orquidpiam(quis-declinedasin 

fortius,  Superl.  fortissime.  quis-que,  200),Indef.  Adj.,an2/. 

funda, -ae,  F.  1,  sZiTigr.  quotiens.  Adv.  and    Con].,  hoio 
interpres,  -pretis,  M.  3,  media-  often,  as  often  as. 

tor,  interpreter.  refugio,  -fugere,  -fQgi,  -fugitGrus, 
Lncanius,  -I,  M.  2,  a  Roman  name.  3,  run  back,  retreat. 

neu  (also  neve),  Conj.,  and  not,  rogO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,   1,  ash, 

nor.    Corresponds   to    ne,    as  request. 

nee  to  nOn.  rflrsus,  Adv.,  back,  again. 

observO,  -are,    -avi,    -atum,    1,  subvenio, -venire, -veni,-ventum, 

observe.  4  (sub  +  venio),  come  to  aid. 

octavus,  -a,  -um,  eighth.  velOciter,  Adv.,  swiftly. 

566.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  The  enemy  hurled  their  javelins  from  a  distance  on  all  sides 
into  the  legion.  2..  If  any  cohort  charged,  they  would  give-way. 
3.  When  our  nien  retired  ^  again,  both  (those)  who  had  given-way 
and  those  who  had  stood  close-by  would  surround  them.  4.  Still 
they  fought  most  bravely  for  many  hours.  5.  Then,  when  Cotta 
had  been  wounded  full  in  the  face  by  a  sling,  and^  was  no-^ 
longer^  able  to  command  his  men,  Sabinus  sent  an  interpreter 
to  Ambiorix  to  beg  that  he  should  spare  those  to  whom  he  had 
promised^  safe  conduct. 

1 A  Generalizing  Clause.  Compare  the  if -clause  just  above. — You  remem- 
ber also  the  Determinative  cum-Clause  (Indicative,  426),  which  defines  an 
individual  time,  just  as  a  qui-Clause  does  a  man,  etc.  We  are  ready,  then, 
to  put  the  Indicative  cum-Clauses  into  a  Summary,  as  follows : 

Indicative  C  Determinative,  fixing  an  individual  time  (426). 
cum-Clause  (  Generalizing,  of  a  repeated  action  (footnote  opposite  and  494,  a) . 

2 Say  "nor  now "  (nee  iam).  3  You  see  that  this  is  Indirect. 


228  Beading 


CHAPTER  VII 

567.  The  Trick.     Destruction  of  the  Army 

Ambiorix  respondit:  Si  velit^  seciim  conloqui,  licere;  ei  nihiP 
nocitum  iri;  in  earn  rem  se  suam  fidem  interponere.  Ille  cum 
Cotta  saucio  communicat,  si  videatur,^  pugna  ut  excedat  et  cum 
Ambiorige  iina  conloquantur.  Cotta  se  ad  armatum  hostem 
itiirum  negat,  atque  in  eo  perseverat. 

Sabinus,  quos  *  tribiin5s  *  militum  circum  se  habebat  et  prim5- 
rum  ordinum  centuriones  se  sequi  iubet,  et,  cum^  propius  Ambio- 
rigem  accessisset,  iussus  arma  abicere^  imperatum  facit,  suisque 
ut^  idem  faciant  imperat.  Interim,  dum  de  condicionibus  inter 
se  agunt,^  paulatim  circumventus  interficitur. 

Tum  vero  suo  more  victoriam  conclamant,  impetiique  in  nos- 
tros  fact5^  ordines  perturbant.  Ibi  L.  Cotta  pugnans  interficitur 
cum  maxima  parte  militum.  Reliqui  se  in  castra  recipiunt  unde 
erant  egressi.  Aegre  ad  noctem  oppugnationem  sustinent ;  noctii 
ad  unum  omnes  desperata  salute  se  ipsi^  interficiunt.  Pauci 
ex  proeli5  elapsi  per  silvas  ad  T.  Labienum  legatum  in  hiberna 
perveniunt  atque  eum  de  rebus  gestis  certiorem  faciunt.^^ 

iWhat  kind  of  Condition  would  this  be  in  Direct  Discourse? 

2  Accusative  of  Extent.    Translate  no  harm  AT  ALL  would  he  done  him. 

^Ifit  should  seem  (best)  to  him.  What  does  the  clause  go  with?  Clauses 
in  Latin  are  more  likely  to  belong  to  something  that  is  coming  than  to  some- 
thing that  has  preceded.  Keep  this  constantly  in  mind  in  reading :  Most 
clauses  modify  FORWARD. 

4  What  tribunes  he  had,  =  the  tribunes  whom,  etc.  A  common  arrange- 
ment.   Call  it  the  RELATIVE  CLAUSE  LEADING. 

^This  is  the  bare  cum-Clause  of  Situation  (no  additional  idea). 

6 Note  iubed  with  Infinitive,  but  impero  with  Subjunctive  (543,  a). 

7  Ag5  here  means  deal  with,  discuss. 

8 Translate  by  the  (inexact)  English  Present  Participle. 

^They^do  it  to  themselves  (se),  and  they  themselves  do  it  (ipsi). —  Our 
English  expression  is  less  full. 

10  Clearly  Labienus  ought  now  at  once  to  send  word  to  Caesar  and  all  the 
other  camps.    See  whether  he  does  so. 


Writing  229 

668.  VOCABULARY 

abicio,  -icere,  -iecl,  -iectum,  3  interpOnO,  -pOnere,  -posul,  -posi- 
{a,h-\-ia,ci6),  throw  away ;throw  turn,  3  (inter  +  pOnO),  pw^  be- 
down,  throw.  tween;  with  fidem,  pledge. 

accedo,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -cessum,  paulatim,  Adv.  (cf.  p&ulum),  little 

3  (ad  +  cedo,  move  toward),  ap-  by  little,  gradually, 

proach.  perturbO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1  (cf. 

condicio,  -Onis,  F.  3,  terms,  con-  turba),  throw  into  confusion. 

dition{s).  propius,  Compar.  of  prope,  near. 

egredior,  egredi,  egressus  sum,  Adv.,  used  as  Prep. 

3  (e  +  gradior,  step  out),  march  saucius,  -a,  -um,  wounded, 

out,  go  out.  sustineo, -tinere, -tinui, -tentum, 

elabor,  elabi,  elapsus  sum,  3  (e  +  2  (subs,  a  form  of  sub,+  teneO, 

labor,  slip),  slip  out,  escape.  hold  up),  sustain. 

569.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  To  this  Ambiorix  said:  If  Sabiniis  wishes  to  talk  with  me, 
I  pledge  my  word  that  no  harm  will  be  done  him.  2.  Sabinus 
then  sent  an  interpreter  to^  ask  Cotta  to  go  with  him  for  the 
purpose^  of  conferring  with  Ambiorix.  3.  Cotta  answered:  I 
will  not  leave  the  battle  in  order  ^  to  go^  to  an  armed  enemy. 

4.  Sabinus,  upon  (cum;  487)  approaching  Ambiorix  and 
throw^ing  down  his  arms,  was  surrounded  and  killed.  5.  Then 
the  barbarians  attacked  our  men  fiercely.  6.  A-few-only  escaped 
from  the  battle.  7.  A  small  part  with  difficulty  returned  to  the 
camp,  and  here,  at  night,  all  killed  themselves  to  a  man. 

1  You  see  here  three  English  ways  of  expressing  Purpose,  and  there  are 
others,  as  with  volitive"  shall  "and ''for  .  ,  .  . -ing  "  (cf.  ad  with  Gerundive, 
etc.).— The  ways  in  Latin  may  be  summarized  as  follows : 

(Dative  of  an  Abstract  Noun. 
Qui,  quo,  ut,  or  ne,  with  the  Subjunctive  (volifive). 
The  Supine  in  -um  (only  after  verbs  of  motion). 
expressed  by    \  ^^  "^'^^  *^^  Gerundive  or  Gerund. 

I  Causa  or  gratia  with  Genitive  of  the  Gerundive  or  Gerund. 
I   The  F uture  Passive  Participle  in  agreement  with  the  Object 
\      of  a  verb. 
Remember  that:  Purpose  is  never  expressed  by  the  Infinitive  in  Latin 
prose. 


230  Bedding 


CHAPTER   VIII 
570.  An  Attempt  to  surprise  Cicero's  Camp  fails.     The  Siege 

Barbari  ad  Cicerdnis  hiberna  advolant  magnaque  manu  legi- 
onem  oppugnare  incipiunt.  Nostri  celeriter  ad  arma  concur- 
runt/  vallum  ascendunt.^     Aegre  is  dies  sustentatur. 

Hostes  poster5  die  multo  maioribus  coactTs  c5piis  castra 
oppugnant.  A  nostrls  eadem  rationed  qua  pridie  resistitur. 
Hoc  idem  reliquis  deinceps  fit  diebus.  Tunc  duces  Nerviorum 
cum  Cicerone  conloqui  sese  velle  dicebant.  Facta  potestate, 
eadem  quae  Ambiorix  cum  Sabino  egerat,^  commemorant :  licere 
illis  ex  hibernis  discedere  et  sine  metu  proficisci.  Cicero  ad 
haec  unum  modo  respondit:  non  esse  consuetudinem  populi 
Roman!  accipere  ab  hoste  armat5  condicidnem. 

Septim5  oppugnationis  die  barbari  fervef acta  iacula  in  casas, 
quae  more  Gallico  stramentis  erant  tectae,  iacere  coeperunt. 
Hae  celeriter  ignem  comprehenderunt. .  At  tanta  militum  virtus 
fuit  atque  ea*  praesentia  animi,  ut,  cum^  undique  flamma  tor- 
rerentur,  non  modo  de  vallo  decederet^  nem5,^  sed  paene  ne 
respiceret  quidem  quisquam,  ac  tum  acerrime  fortissimeque 
pugnarent. 

iNote  the  rapid  movement  of  the  narration,  without  connectives. 

^By  the  same  theory,  =  in  the  same  way.  An  Ablative  of  Means  which 
has  become  an  Ablative  of  Manner.  This  is  one  of  the  common  expressions 
of  Manner  into  which  a  Preposition  never  came ;  512,  6. 

3  Had  discussed  with  Sabinits,  =  had  urged  upon  him.  What  kind  of  clause  ? 

4  You  see  in  this  passage  an  easy  proof  of  what  you  learned  in  422; 
namely  that  the  Pronoun  is  can  be  used  just  like  an  Adjective  (  =  talis). 
Ea  here  is  actually  yoked  up  (by  et)  with  the  Adjective  tanta  (so  great .... 
and  such  .  .  .  .  ,  that). 

^The  Situation  in  which  (and  in  spite  of  which)  no  one  left  the  rampart. 
Descriptive  cum-Clause  of  Situation,  with  additional  adversative  idea ;  488. 
Note  that  English  "when  "  has  the  same  power  (example  in  572,  7). 

6  Which  is  changed  in  position  to  give  emphasis,  decederet,  or  nemo  ? 


Writing  231 

571.  VOCABULARY 

advolo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1   (ad  metus, -os,  M.  4, /ear. 

+  volO,  fly),  fly  [to),  rush  {to),  paene,  Adv.,  almost. 

commemorO,  -are,   -avi,   -atum,  populus, -I,  M.  2,  peqpZe. 

1  (make  to  remember),  state,  praesentia,  -ae,  F.  1,  presence, 

mention,  pridie,  Adv.,  the  day  before. 

comprehendo,  -prehendere,  -pre-  respiciO,  -spicere,  -spexi,  -spec- 

hendr,    -prehensum,    3,    seize,  tum,3(re  +  -spiciO;  cf.  spectO), 

catch.  look  hack,  look  around. 

concurrO,    -currere,    -currl    and  stramentum,  -i,  N.  2,  straw* 

-cucurri,    -cursum,    3  (con-+  sustentO, -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1  (cf. 

curro),  run  together,  rush.  sustineO)  sustain. 

fervefacio,  -facere,  -feci, -factum,  torreO,  torrere,  torrui,   tostum, 

3,  heat  red  hot.  2,  scorch,  hum, 

flamma,  -ae,  F.  1,  flame,  fire.  tunc,  then,  a  stronger  tum  (from 
iaculum,  -I,  N.  2,  javelin.  tum  -) — ce,  =  that  then). 

572.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION  1 

1.  The  barbarians  flew  to^  attack  Cicero's  winter-quarters 
before  he  should  hear  of  the  battle.  2.  Our  men  defended  them- 
selves with  difficulty.  3.  The  enemy  ^  attacked  on  the  following 
day  and  on  several  days  in  succession.  4.  Then,  an  opportunity 
for  conferring  with  Cicero  being  given  (them),  they  warned  and 
begged  him  to  lead*  his  troops  out  of  their  territory.  5.  To  which 
he  answered:  "It  is  not  the  custom  of  the  Roman  people  to 
receive  terms  from  an  armed  enemy.'' 

6.  On  the  seventh  day  of  the  siege^  the  presence  of  mind  of 
our  soldiers  saved  the  camp.  7.  For  eved  when^  their  cabins 
had  caught  fire,  no  one  left  the  ramparts. 

^Use  picturesque  tenses  freely  for  practice,  not  only  with  main  verbs, 
but  in  subordinate  clauses  (though  never  with  cum). 

2  Express  this  purpose  by  ad  with  Gerundive,  for  practice. 

3 Is  "the  enemy"  really  Singular  or  Plural  in  meaning? 

^  Request  or  Entreaty.  In  Latin,  a  Substantive  Clause  (cf .  529,  footnote  2) . 

^  Situation  in  spits  of  which. 


232  Reading 


CHAPTEK   IX 
673,  A  Letter  is  carried  through  to  Caesar 

Erat  ^  unus  intus  Nervius  nomine  Vertico,  qui  ad  Ciceronem 
perfugerat.  Hie  servo  persuadet  praemiTs,  ut  litteras  ad  Cae- 
sarem  deferat.  Has  ille  in  iacul5  inligatas  effert,  et  Gallus  inter 
Gallos  sine  ulla  suspicione  ad  Caesarem  pervenit. 

Caesar  acceptis  Mitteris  ^  ho ra  eireiter  undecima  die!  statim^ 
nQntium  ad  M.  Crassum  mittit,  cuius  hiberna  aberant^  ab  eo 
milia  passuum  viginti  quinque.  lubet  media  nocte  legi5nem 
proficlsel  celeriterque  ad  se  venire.  Exit  cum  nuntio*  Crassus. 
Alterum  ad  C.  Fabium  legatum  mittit.  Scribit''  Labieno,  si  rei^ 
piiblicae^  commodo^facere  possit,  cum  legione  ad  finis  Nervi- 
5rum  veniat.  Reliquam  partem  exercitiis,  quod  paulo  aberat^ 
longius,  non  putat  exspectandam.  Equites  eireiter  quadrin- 
gent5s  ex  proximis  hibernis  conligit. 

Hora  eireiter  tertia  de  Crassi  advent  u  certior  fact  us,  eo  die 
milia  passuum  viginti  progreditur.  Fabius,  non  multum  mo- 
ratus,  in  itinere  cum  legi5ne  occurrit. 

iWhat  is  the  meaning  of  the  Imperfect  f  Would  the  Perfect  be  right 
here? 

2 Translate  by  the  (inexact)  English  Present  Active  Participle,  receiving. 

3  Note  the  promptness  with  which  Caesar  acts,  and  to  which  he  had 
trained  his  lieutenants.    You  see  that  Crassus  does  more  than  is  asked  of  him. 

Caesar's  political  enemies  said  of  him  that  he  was  a  monster  for  vigi- 
lance and  quickness.  How  much  time  did  he  allow  for  the  covering  of  the 
twenty-five  miles  by  the  messenger  (who,  of  course,  went  on  horseback) 
and  the  start  of  Crassus  ?  How  many  hours  was  it  before  Crassus  was  near 
Caesar's  camp  ?  About  how  many  miles  must  Crassus'  legion  have  covered 
before  the  evening  of  the  first  day  ? 

^  With  the  messenger^  that  is,  without  delaying  at  all. 

^What  follows  may  be  a  Statement  (Infinitive),  or  an  Indirect  Question 
(Subjunctive),  or  a  Command  (Subjunctive).    What  does  it  turn  out  to  be? 

6  (With  advantage  on  the  part  of,  =)  with  advantage  to  the  common  good. 


Writing  233 

674.  VOCABULARY 

circiter,  Adv.,  and   Prep,    with  occurro,  -currere,  -curri  and  -cu- 

Acc,  about.  curri,  -cursum,  3  (ob  +  currO, 

commodum,  -I,  N.  2,  advantage.  run  against),  meet. 

efferO,  efferre,  extulT,  elatum,  irr.  perfugio,    -fugere,    -ftlgl,    -fugi- 

(ex  +  ferO),  carry  out  or  away,  tGrus,     3     (per  +  fugiO,     flee 

exeO,  -Ire,  -ii  and  -Tvi,  -itum,  irr.  through),  take  refuge,  desert. 

(ex  +  eO),  go  out,  march  out.  praemium,  -i,  N.  2,  reward. 

inligO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1  (in  +  pDblicus,  -a,  -um,  public. 

ligO,  bind),  bind  up.  scribo,   scribere,   scrips!,    scrip- 

intus.  Adv.,  within.  turn,  3,  write. 

littera,  -ae,  F.  1,   letter  (of  the  susplcio,  -Onis,  F.  3,  suspicion. 

alphabet).   PI.,  a  letter.  Gndecimus,  -a,  -um,  eleventh. 

longe  (as  before),  far.    Compar.  VerticO,  -Onis,  M.  3,  a  name. 

longius,  Superl.  longissime.  viginti,  indecl.  Adj.,  twenty. 

675.  ;VIATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  One  of  the  Nervians,  Vertico  by  name,  had  taken  refuge 
with  Cicero.  2.  This  (man)  persuaded  a  slave  to  carry  a  letter 
to  Caesar.  3.  Having  received  it,^  Caesar  immediately  wrote ^ 
to  Crassus  and  Fabius  to  come  quickly  to  him,  leaving  a  small 
band  only  to  defend  their  camps.  4.  He  also  sent  a  message  to 
Labienus  to  come  to  him,  if  ^  he  should  be  able^  to  leave  (=  "go 
out  from")  his  camp  without  serious  danger.  5.  The  rest  of 
the  army,  which  was  farther  away,  he  determined  not  to  wait  for. 

6.  Crassus  left  (his  camp)  (upon)  receiving  Caesar's  message, 
not  delaying  long.  7.  (When)  informed  that  he  was  approaching, 
Caesar  set  out  with  all  his  forces. 

1  You  have  now  recently  seen  five  ways  of  introducing  the  main  verb : 
Five  Ways  /  Ubi,  ut,  postquam,  or  simul  atque  with  Indicative. 

of  I  Cum  with  Subjunctive. 

Introducing  <  Dum,  ivhile,  with  Present  Indicative, 
the         /  Participle.  • 

Main  Verb:  \  Ablative  Absolute. 
The  first  way  is  Aoristic  (absolute  tense),  the  others  express  Situation. 
2 What  ideas  might  follow  "wrote,"  and  what  idea  does  follow  ? 
3  Is  this  Direct  Discourse,  or  Indirect  ?— Arrange  in  Latin  order. 


234  Beading 


576.  CHAPTER  X 

Caesar  enters  the  Enemy's   Country.     How  he  sends  a  Message 

to  Cicero 

Labienus,  cum  omnes  ad  eum  Trever5rum  copiae  venissent/ 
veritus  ne,  si  ex  hibernis  fugae  similem  profectionem  fecisset,^ 
hostium  impetum  sustinere  non  posset,^  litteras  Caesari  remittit 
quanto  cum  periculo  legionem  ex  hibernis  educturus  esset.^ 
Rem  gestam  in  Eburonibus  perscrlbit.* 

Caesar,  consilio  LabienI  probato,  etsi  opinione  ^  trium  legi5num 
delectus^  ad  duas  redder  at,  t  amen  unum  communi  saluti  auxilium 
in  celeritate^  ponebat.  Venit  magnls^  itineribus^  in  Nerviorum 
fines.  Ibi  ex  captlvis  cognoscit  quae  apud  Cicer5nem  gerantur,^ 
quantoque  in  periculo  res  sit.  Tum  cuidam  ex  equitibus  Gallls 
magnis  praemils  persuadet,  uti  ad  Ciceronem  epistulam  deferat. 
Si  adire  n5n  possit,^  monet  ut  tragulam  cum  epistula  intra 
miinltionem  abiciat.  Gallus  perlculum  veritus,  ut  erat  prae- 
ceptum,  tragulam  mittit.  Haec  casu  ad  turrim  adhaesit,  neque 
ab  nostrls  biduo  animad versa  tertio  die  a  quodam  mllite  conspi- 
citur,  dempta  ^^  ad  Ciceronem  def ertur.^^ 

1  What  is  the  main  force  of  this  clause,  and  what  the  additional  one? 

2  Future  in  meaning.  You  have  now  seen  examples  enough  to  allow  you 
to  say  this :  Every  tense  of  the  Subjunctive  has  two  forces,  one  that  of  the 
Indicative  of  the  same  name^  the  other  a  future  force. 

^Periphrastic  (233,  2,6), — was  going  to  lead,  i.  e.,  would  have  to  lead. 

^Caesar  could  get  a  message  through,  and  Labienus  could  get  one  back. 
Had  Labienus  then  done  his  duty? 

^Cast  down  frotn  his  expectation  (of  having),  i.  e.,  disappointed  in  his 
expectation  (of  having) .  Translate  delectus  reciderat  like  two  mam  verbs, 
connected  by  and. — What  is  the  force  of  the  case  of  opinione? 

6  Again  you  se#Caesar's  quickness  in  thought  and  action. 

"^With  great  days^  marches, = with  forced  marches  (Abl.  of  Manner ;  513). 

8 Evidently  an  Indirect  Question.    Of  what  kind? 

9 Is  this  Condition  direct,  or  indirect? 

10  In  English,  is  taken  down  and  carried  (cf.  footnote  5). 


Writing  235 

577.  VOCABULARY 

adeO,  adire,  adii  or  adivi,  aditum,  opinio,  -Onis,  F.  3,  opinion;  ex- 

irr.  (ad+eO,  go  to),  approach.  pectation. 

adhaereO,  -haerere,  -haesi,  -hae-  perscrlbo,     -scnbere,     -scrips!, 

snrusj  2,  adhere,  stick.  -scriptum,      3     (per  +  scribo), 

captivus,  -a,  -um,  captive.  ivrite  fully,  write  out. 

celeritas,  -atis,  P.  3,  siviftness,  praecipiO,-cipere, -cepl,-ceptum, 

speed.  3(prae+capio,takein  advance), 

ccTnspicio,  -spicere,  -spexi,  -spec-  direct,  order. 

tum,3  (con-  +  -spiciO,spy),  see.  quantus,  -a,  -um,   interrog.  and 

deicio,  -icere,  -iecT,  -iectum,    3  re\.,  how  great,  as  great  as. 

(de-|-iaciO,   throw  down),  cast  recido,  -cidere,  -cidi,  -cSstlrus,  3 

</ow;n(literally  or  figuratively).  (re+cado),  fall    back;  be  re- 

dem6,demere,dempsi,  demptum,  ducedto. 

3  (de,  down+emO,  take),  toA:e  remittO,-mittere,-misi, -missum, 

down.  3  (re+mittO),  send  back. 

mnnitio,  -Onis,  P.  3  (cf.  mQnio),'  similis, -e,  like,  similar. 

fortification.  tragula,  -ae,  P.  1,  (GbWic)  javelin. 

578.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  Labienus,  however,  sent  back  a  letter  to  Caesar  (to  the 
effect)  that^  all  the  forces  of  the  Treveri  had  collected'^  around 
his  camp,  and^  that  for  this  reason  he  could ^  not  ^  accomplish^  a 
departure  without  great  danger. 

2.  Caesar,  although  he  had  only  two  legions,  advanced  by 
forced  marches  into  the  territory  of  the  Nervii.  3.  There  he 
learned  from  captives  how  ^  great  a  force  had  besieged  the  camp. 
4.  He  then  persuaded  a  Gallic  horseman  to  carry  a  letter  to 
Cicero.  5.  If  he  could "^  not*  enter  the  fortification,  hp  instructed 
(the  man)  to  send  a  javelin  within  the  camp.  This  was  done. 
6.  The  javelin  was  noticed  on  the  third  day,  and  Cicero  thus 
learned  that^  Caesar  was  coming  to  aid  him. 

1  Is  this  a  Statement,  a  Question,  or  a  Command? 
2 Say  "had  been  collected." 

3"And  ....  not"="nor."     "Oould"="wa8  able  to."     For  "accom- 
plish," see  Caesar's  phrase  in  the  Latin  opposite. 
4=  "should  not  be  able." 


236  Reading 


CHAPTER  XI 

579.  The  Gauls  fly  to  meet  Caesar.    Approach  of  the 
two    Armies.    Caesar's  Strategy 

Galli  re  cognita  per  explora tores  obsidionem  relinquunt ;  ad 
Caesarem  omnibus  c5piis  contendunt;  haee  erant  armata  circiter 
milia  sexaginta. 

Postero  die  Caesar  luce  prima  movet  castra,  et  circiter  milia 
passuum  quattuor  progressus^  trans  vallem  et  rivum  multitudi- 
nem  hostium  conspicatur.  Erat  magni  periculi  res^  tantulTs 
copiis  iniquo  loco  dimicare.  Considit,  et  quam'^  aequissim5^ 
potest^  loco^  castra  commiinit.  Atque  haec,  etsi  erant  exigua 
per  se,*  vix  hominum  milium^  septem,  tamen  quam  maxime  con- 
trahit,  eo  consilio  ut  in  summam  contemptionem  hostibus®  veniat. 

Prima  luce  hostium  ^  equitatus  ad  castra  accedit  proeliumque 
cum  nostris  ^  equitibus  committit.  Caesar  consul  to  equites  cedere 
seque  in  castra  recipere  iubet,  simul  ex  omnibus  partibus  castra 
altiore^  vallo  muniri  portasque  caespitibus  obstrui,  atque  in  his 
administrandis^  rebus  quam  maxime  concursari  et  cum  simu- 
lati5ne  agi  tim5ris  iubet. 

iQne  of  the  ways  of  introducing  the  main  verb  given  in  the  table  on 
p.  233.    What  others  would  be  possible  with  this  same  verb  progredior? 

2  Erat  is  singular.  Res  is  therefore  Nominative  singular  (not  plural)  or 
Accusative  plural.    Which  is  it? 

3/n  an  AS-MOST-FAVORABLE-HE-CAN  place,  i.  e.,  in  as  favorable  a 
place  as  possible.  This  use  of  quam  and  the  Superlative  with  possum  is  very 
common.  Possum  is  often  dropped  from  the  phrase,  leaving  merely  quam 
with  the  Superlative,  with  the  same  idea.  You  will  see  it  twice  below  with 
an  Adverb  (quam  maxime). 

*  Though  it  was  small  in  itself,  i.  e.,  was  naturally  small. 

^What  kind  of  Genitive  is  this? 

6  To=in  the  eyes  of.    What  case,  and  how  do  you  name  the  use? 

7  What  is  the  force  of  the  position  of  hostium  and  nostris? 
*^From  a  word  which  you  have  had.    What  degree  of  comparison? 
^  Could  the  Gerund  have  been  written  here  by  Roman  usage? 


Writing  237 

680.  VOCABULARY 

caespes,  -itis,  M.  3,  sod,  turf.  equitatus,  -Qs,  M.  4,  cavalry. 

commtlnio,    -Ire,    -ivi,    -itum,    4  explOrator,  -Oris,  M.  3,  scout. 

(con-  +  mGniO),  fortify.  iniquus,  -a,  -um  (in  +  aequus,  not 
consldo,  -sidere,  -sedi,  -sessum,  3         even),  disadvantageous. 

(con-+sld0,   sit),   sit    doivn;  obsidio, -Onis,  F.  3,  siege. 

halt;  camp.  obstruO,  -struere,  -strtlxr,  -strtlc- 
cOnspicor,  -arl,  -atus  sum,  1  (cf.         turn,  3,  block  up,  obstruct. 

cOnspiciO),  get  sight  of.  rivus,  -T,  M.  2,  stream. 

contemptio,-Onis,  P.  3,  contempt,  sexaginta,  indecl.  Adj.  sixty. 

contraho,  -trahere,  -traxi,  -trac-  simulatio,  -Onis,  P.  ^,  pretense. 

turn,  3  (con-  +  trahO,  draw  to-  tantulus,  -a,  -um,   so   small,  so 

gether),  contract.  little. 

681.  MATTER  FOR  TRANSLATION 

1.  The  Gauls,  being  informed  through  scouts  that  Caesar  was 
approaching,  determined  to  meet  him  on  the  way.  2.  So  Cicero's 
legion  was  saved,  if  ^  Caesar  should  conquer.^ 

3.  Having^  learned^  this,  Caesar  advanced  more  slowly,  seek- 
ing as  favorable  a  place  as  possible  for  fighting.  4.  Getting^ 
sight "^  of  the  Gauls  after*  a*  while*  beyond  a  valley  and  stream, 
he  fortified  a  camp. 

5.  When,  at  daybreak,  the  Gauls  approached,  the  Eoman 
cavalry,  as  had  been  directed,  yielded,  and  retreated  within  the 
fortifications.  6.  At  the  same  time  Caesar  ordered  his  men  to 
fortify  the  camp  with  a  higher  wall,  and,  in  doing  the  work,  to 
run  to  and  fro  as  much  as  possible,  with  a  pretense  of  fear. 
7.  In  this  way  he  came  into  the  greatest  contempt  in-the-eyes-of  ^ 
the  enemy. 

1  Evidently  a  Future  Condition.    From  what  point  of  view? 

2  In  how  many  ways  can  you  express  this  Perfect  Active  Participle? 

3  Evidently  the  English  tense  is  not  exact. 
^Say  "after  something  (aliquantum)  of  time." 

^ Express  simply  by  the  case  of  the  word  for  "enemy."    What  usage? 


238  Beading 


CHAPTER  XII 

682.  The  Gauls  are  themselves  Surprised 

Quibusi  omnibus  rebus  hostes  invitati  c5pias  trans  rivum 
traducunt  aciemque  iniquo  loco  constituunt.  Nostris  vero^  etiam 
de  vallo  deductis  propius  accedunt  et  tela  intra  munitionem  ex 
omnibus  partibus  conieiunt,  praeconibusque  cireummissis  pro- 
nun  tiari^  iubent,  seu*  quis*  Gallus  seu  Romanus  velit  ante  h5ram 
tertiam  ad  se  transire,  sine  periculo  licere;^  post  id  tempus  non 
fore  potestatem.  Ac  sic  nostros  contempserunt  ut  vallum  manu 
scindere  inciperent.  Tum  Caesar  omnibus  portis  eruptione  facta 
equitatuque  emisso  celeriter  hostis  in^  fugam^  dat,®  sic  uti  omnino 
pugnandi  causa  resisteret^  nem5;  magnumque  ex  eis  numerum 
occTdit  atque  omnis  armis^  exuit.^ 

Longius  prosequi  veritus,  quod  silvae  paludesque  intercede- 
bant,  omnibus  suis  incolumibus  eodem  die  ad  Cicer5nem  perve- 
nit.  Producta  legi5ne  cognoscit  non^  d.ecimum^  quemque^  esse 
reliquum  militem  sine  vulnere.  Ex  his  omnibus  iiidicat  rebus, 
quanto  cum  periculo  et  quanta  virtiite  res  sint  administratae.^" 

1  Be  sure  you  translate  into  genuine  English. 

2  The  office  of  veto  is  often,  as  here,  merely  to  emphasize  the  preceding 
word.    Translate  by  stress  of  voice. 

3  At  this  point,  you  can't  tell  with  certainty  whether  a  Statement  or  a 
Command  is  coming.  And  you  don't  need  yet  to  know,  any  more  than  a 
Roman  did. 

4  As  you  read  along,  do  you  think  it  probable  (knowing  the  habit  of  Latin 
order)  that  the  Condition  beginning  with  seu  quis  belongs  with  what  has 
preceded,  or  with  what  is  coming? 

^Now  do  you  find  a  Statement,  or  a  Command? 

6  Throws  them  into  flight,  puts  them  to  flight. 

7 Resists  (re  +  sisto)  here  has  its  original  meaning,  make  a  stand, 

8  That  is,  makes  them  drop  their  arms  as  they  fly. 

^Not  each  tenth,  =  not  one  in  ten. 

10  What  kind  of  a  clause  is  this,  and  why  Subjunctive? 


Writing  239 

583.  .  VOCABULARY 

circummittO,-mittere,-mTsI,-mis-  occido,  -cidere,  -cisr,  -cisum,  3 

sum,  3  (circum+mitto),   send  (ob+caedo,  cut  against),  kill, 

around.  praecO,  -Onis,  M.,3,  herald. 

contemnO,    -temnere,     -tempsT,  prOdQcO, -dlicere,-dtlxi,-ductiim, 

-temptum,  3,  despise.  3  (pro+dilcO),  lead  forth ;  draiv 

exuO,  -uere,  -uT,  -Gtum,  3,  strip  up,  muster, 

(of),  deprive  {of).  prOsequor,  -sequi,  -sectitus  sum, 

incolumis,  -e,  unharmed,  safe.  3  (pro,  forth,  +sequor,  follow), 

intercede,  -cedere,  -cessT,  -ces-  follow  after,  pursue. 

sum,    3    (inter +  cedO),    come  scindo,  scindere,  scidl,  scissum, 

between,  intervene.  3,  tear,  tear  down. 

584.  TRANSLATE  INTO  LATIN 

1.  The  enemy,  deceived  by  these  things,  approached  nearer 
the  camp,  and  drew  up  a  line  of  battle  on  the  disadvantageous 
ground  which  intervened  between  it  and  the  stream.  2.  They 
then  sent  heralds  around  to  proclaim  that  they  would  spare 
those  who  should  come  over  to  them  before  the  third  hour. 
3.  They  even  began  to  tear  down  the  rampart  by  hand;  so  great 
was  their  contempt  of  our  men.  4.  Then  Caesar  sent  out  his 
forces  by  all  the  gates.  5.  The  Gauls,  thoroughly  terrified  by 
the  sudden  sally,  took^  to^  flight,'  and  many  of  them  were 
killed. 

6.  Upon^  arriving^  at  the  winter-camp,  Caesar  recognized 
with  what  wisdom  and  courage  Cicero  had  managed  everything, 
for  there  was  not  one  soldier  left  in  ten  without  a  wound. 

1  Say  gave  themselves  into  /light. 

2  Use  cum  with  the  Subjunctive.  This  is  the  lightest  touch  of  the  cum- 
Clause  of  Situation.  Always  write  the  Subjunctive  without  hesitation  if  the 
clause  tells  you  something  new  in  the  story;  for  then  its  office  cannot 
be  to  fix  the  time  (for  the  reader  didn't  even  know  the  fact  before),  but 
must  be  to  give  the  circumstances  under  which  the  main  act  took  place 
(Description). 

On  the  other  hand,  you  would  write  the  Indicative  {Determinative  cum- 
Clause;  426)  in  such  a  sentence  as ''I  have  slept  under  pine  trees  which 
were  tall,  straight,  beautiful  pine  trees  when  North  America  was  dis- 
covered" (Edward  Everett  Hale,  at  American  Forest  Congress,  1905). 


240  Summary  of  Constructions  Begun 

SUMMARY  OF  CONSTRUCTIONS 

(The  references  are  to  paragraphs.    N.  means  footnote.) 


USES  OF  THE  CASES 
AGREEMENT 

686.  As  far  as  their  forms  can  show,  words  agree  with  the 
words  they  belong  with.     Thus: 

1.  An  Appositive  or  Predicate  Noun  agrees  in  Case  with  the 
Substantive  to  which  it  belongs  (44,  26,  a). 

2.  Adjectives,  Adjective  Pronouns,  and  Participles  agree  with 
their  Nouns  in  Gender,  Number,  and  Case  (119,  147, 
226,  a). 

3.  Relative  Pronouns  agree  with  their  Antecedents  in  Gender 
and  Number;  but  their  Case  depends  upon  their  relations 
in  the  Clauses  to  which  they  belong  (189). 

4.  A  Verb  agrees  with  its  Subject  in  Number  and  Person 
(96,  h). 

NOMINATIVE 

586.  The  Subject  of  a  Finite  Verb  is  put  in  the  Nomina- 
tive (24). 

GENITIVE 

687.  The  Genitive  is  used  to  express: 

1.  Possession  (Possessive  Genitive;  53). 

2.  The  Whole  to  which  a  Part  Belongs  (Genitive  of  the  Whole; 
202). 

.3.   Material  or  Composition  (387). 

4.  Kind  or  Measure  (Descriptive  Genitive.  A  modifier  is  neces- 
sary; 390, 1). 

5.  The  Object,  with  many  Nouns  or  Adjectives,  and  Participles 
used  as  Adjectives  (Objective  Genitive;  209). 


Dative. — Accusative. — Vocative  241 

DATIVE 

688.  The  Dative  is  used  to  express: 

I.  The  Idea  of  Figurative  Direction,  and  others  derived  from 
it,  as  follows: 

1.  The  Indirect  Object  of  a  Verb  (65). 

2.  Tendency,  Purpose,  or  Result;  (Abstract  Nouns,  428). 

3.  The  Concrete  Object  For  Which  something  is  Intended 
.    (430). 

4.  That  Toward  Which  a  Quality,  Attitude,  or  Relation  is 
Directed,  after  Adjectives  and  V.erbs  expressing  any  of 
these  ideas  (67). 

5.  The  Person  to  Whom  an  Act  or  State  Refers,  or  whom  it 
Concerns  (Dative  of  Reference  or  Concern;   260). 

6.  The  Person  Judging  (295). 

7.  The  Agent  of  the  Future  Passive  Participle  (281). 

8.  Possession,  with  the  Verb  sum  (289). 

II.  The  Person  or  Thing  Affected,  in  a  construction  of  several 
origins,  as  follows: 

1.  After  many  Verbs  Compounded  with  certain  Prepositions 
(ad,  ante,  circum,  con-,  in,  inter,  ob,  post,  prae,  pro,  sub, 
and  super;  527). 

ACCUSATIVE 

689.  The  Accusative  is  used  to  express: 

I.  The  Idea  of  Space-Relation,  and  others  derived  from  it,  as 
follows: 

1.  Space-Relation  (not  separative  or  locative),  with  a  variety 
of  Prepositions  (78;  list  in  592,  II). 

2.  Extent  of  Space,  Duration  of  Time,  and  Degree  (434). 

II.  The  Idea  of  the  Verb-Object,  and  others  derived  from  it, 
as  follows: 

1.  The  Direct  Object  of  a  Transitive  Verb  (62). 

2.  A  Predicate,  as  well  as  Direct,  Object  with  Verbs  of  Making, 
Choosing,  Having,  Regarding,  Calling,  or  Showing  (330). 

3.  The  Subject  of  an  Infinitive  (465,  542). 

VOCATIVE 
590.  The  Vocative  is  used  in  Address  (45). 


242  Ablative 

ABLATIVE 
691.  The  Ablative  is  used  to  express: 
I.  Separative  (from-)  Ideas,  as  follows: 

1.  With  the  Prepositions  ab,  de,  ex,  sine;  also  with  pro,  prae 
(74,89,175,301). 

2.  The  Agent  of  the  Passive  Voice,  with  a  or  ab  (126). 

3.  The  Point  of  View  From  Which  (411). 

4.  Separation,  with  or  without  a  Preposition,  with  Verbs  (619). 

5.  Comparison  (the  "  than  "  idea),  where  quam  is  not  used  (45  7 ). 

6.  Accordance,  with  certain  very  common  words  (more,  etc.; 
455  and  a). 

II.  Sociative  (with-)  Ideas,  as  follows : 

1.  Accompaniment,  with  cum.  May  be  omitted  in  military  lan- 
guage, if  the  noun  has  a  modifier  and  this  is  not  a  numeral 
(507  and  a). 

2.  Loosely  connected  modifications  of  various  kinds  (Ablative 
Absolute;  308). 

3.  Means  or  Instrument  (274). 

4.  Measure  of  Dift'erence  (332). 

5.  The  Object  of  ntor,  fruor,  fungor,  potior,  vescor  (334). 

III.  Locative  (in-  or  at-)  Ideas,  as  follows: 

1.  Place  In  Which  something  Is  or  Is  Done,  with  in  and  sub 
(74,  78,  a,  467).  Maybe  omitted  with  certain  very  com- 
mon words,  like  locO,  regione,  etc.  (410  and  a). 

2.  That  in  Which  one  Trusts,  with  fido  (432).  But  the  Dative 
is  regular  with  nouns  denoting  Persons  (principle  of  67). 

IV.  Ideas  originally  expressed  in  two  or  more  of  the  three  ways 
given  above  (the  from-waj^  the  with-waj,  and  the  m-way). 

1.  Time  At  or  Within  Which  (399). 

2.  Respect  (442).  ^  . 

3.  Kind  or  Physical  Characteristics;  also,  in  a  few  phrases> 
Mental  State  or  Situation.    A  modifier  is  necessary  (390,  2). 

4.  Cause  or  Reason  (440). 

5.  Way  or  Manner,  regularly  without  a  Preposition.  But 
Abstract  Nouns  in  less  frequent  use  take  cum  if  there  is 
no  modifier,  and  may  take  it  even  if  there  is  one  (513). 


Prepositions, — Place  Constructions. — Imperative      243 

CASES  WITH  PREPOSITIONS 

692.  Prepositions  expressing  the  Separative,^  Sociative,  or  Loca- 
tive"^ Idea  (also  pro  and  prae)  take  the  Ablative.  Prepositions 
expressing  other  Space  Ideas  take  the  Accusative  (78). 
Thus  we  have  come  to  know: 

I.  With  the  Ablative:   ab,  de,  ex,  sine  (Separative);  pro,  prae 

(originally  Separative);  cum  (Sociative);  in  and  sub  (Locative). 

II.  With  the  Accusative:    ad,  ante,    apud,  circiter  and  circum, 

citra,  contra,  in,  inter,  intra,  ob,  per,  post,  praeter,  prope, 

propter,  secundum,  sub,  trans,  ultra. 

593.  ORDINARY  EXPRESSION  OF  PLACE  (407) 

1.  Place  From  Which  by  the  Separative  Ablative  with 
ab,  de,  or  ex. 

2.  Place  To  Which  by  the  Accusative  with  ad,  in,  or  sub. 

3.  Place  In  Which  by  the  Locative  Ablative  with  in  or  sub. 

594.  EXPRESSION  OF  PLACE  WITH  NAMES  OF 

TOWNS,  domus  AND  rfls  (409) 

1.  Place  From  Which  by  the  bare  Ablative  (similarly  domO 
and  rCire). 

2.  Place  To  Which  by  the  bare  Accusative  (similarly  domum 
and  rGs). 

3.  Place  In  Which  by  the  Genitive  of  the  First  or  Second 
Declension  Singular,  and  elsewhere  by  the  bare  Ablative 
(similarly  domi  and  ruri  or  mre). 


USES  OF  THE  VERB 

IMPERATIVE 

696.  The  Imperative  (negative  ne)  is  used  to  express  Com- 
mand, Advice,  Request,  Entreaty,  and  the  like  (137). 

1  From,  away  from,  out  of, —  literal  or  figurative. 

2  This  must  be  understood  as  meaning,  by  convenient  usage,  not  any 
kind  of  place-idea,  but  only  that  of  the  place  in  or  within  which, —  English 
in,  within,  on,  at,  under. 


244  Imperative. —  Subjunctive 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

596.  The  Subjunctive  is  used  as  follows  (negative  ne  for 
Will  or  Wish,  non  for  Other  Ideas) :  • 

I.  To  express  an  act  as  willed,  anticipated,  or  wished;  or  as 
proper,  likely,  possible,  or  certain  in  an  imagined  case  (368). 

A.  Note  especially  the  use  of  the  Subjunctive  of  Will 
(Volitive)  in: 

1.  Exhortations,Gommands,  and  Prohibitions  (347,  and  n.). 

2.  Deliberative  (better  called  Volitive)  Questions  (349, 
354). 

3.  Clauses  of  Purpose,  with  qui,  quO,  ut,  or  ne  (351). 

4.  Volitive  Substantive  Clauses: 

After  Verbs  of  Will  or  Endeavor,  with  ut  or  ne  (352). 
After  Verbs  of  Hindrance,  Prevention,  or  Check,  with 
ne,  quOminus,  or  quin  (352). 

5.  Clauses  of  Fear  or  Anxiety,  with  ne  corresponding  to 
English  "that"  and  ut  corresponding  to  English  "that 
not"  (353). 

B.  Note  also  the  use  of  the  Subjunctive  of  Anticipation  in: 

1.  Clauses  with  words  meaning  "before"  (antequam,  prius- 
quam;  356). 

2.  Clauses  with  words  meaning  "  until "  (dum,  dOnec,  quoad ; 
356,  552,  n.  2). 

3.  All  Past-Future  Clauses  expressed  by  a  single  verb-form 
(382,  558,  n.  5). 

II.  In  Fact-Clauses  of  Consecutive  nature  or  origin:  Thus  in: 

1.  Descriptive  Clauses  with  qui  or  cum  (421,  1;  487,  488). 

2.  Result  Clauses  with  ut,  ut  nOn,  or  quin  (421,  2). 

3.  Substantive  Clauses   with  ut   or    ut   nOn    after  Verbs  of 
Bringing  About  or  Existence  (421,  3). 

4.  Causal  oi-  Adversative  qui-Clauses  (479)  and  cum-Clauses 
(489). 

III.  In  Conditions  and  Conclusions.     See  600,  601. 

IV.  In  Indirect  Discourse.     See  602,  II,  a. 

V.  By  Attraction,  in  clauses  closely  attached  to  a  Subjunctive 
or  Infinitive  (545). 


Indicative  245 

INDICATIVE 

597.  The  Indicative  (negative  non)  is  used  to  express  an  act 
as  a  fact,  declaring,  inquiring,  or  assuming.    Thus  in: 

I.  Independent  Statements  and  Questions  of  Fact. 

II.  Determinative  Clauses,  with  appropriate  Relative  or  Con- 
junction.    Thus  especially  in  the: 

1.  Determinative  qui-Clause,  fixing  the  person  who,  or  thing 
which  (426). 

2.  Determinative  cum-Clause,  fixing  the  time  at  which  (426, 

584,  n.  2). 

III.  Clauses  of  Actual  Past  Acts  with  words  meaning  "before" 
or  "until"  (antequam  or  priusquam,  dum,  dOnec,  or  quoad). 

IV.  Aoristic  Narrative-Clauses,  with  ubi,  ut,  postquam,  or  simul 
atque  (Perfect  or  Historical  Present;  606). 

V.  Substantive   quod-Clauses,  and   quod-Clauses   of  Respect 
(444  and  a). 

VI.  Clauses  of  Cause  or  Reason  with  quod,  quia,  quoniam,  or 
quando  (517). 

SUMMARY  OP  CONDITIONS  AND  CONCLUSIONS 

598.  Neutral  Conditions  and  Conclusions  in  the  Present  or  Past 
are  expressed  by  the  Indicative  (496). 

a.  So  frequently  in  Generalizing  Clauses,  with  si,   nisi,  a 
Relative,  or  a  Conjunction  (494,  a  and  h;  666,  n.  1). 

^  599.  More  Vivid  Future  Conditions  and  Conclusions  are  ex- 
pressed by  Indicative  tenses  of  Future  time  (the  Futiu'e 
and  Futin:e  Perfect;  498,  1). 

)600.  Less  Vivid  Future  Conditions  and  Conclusions  are  ex- 
pressed by  Subjunctive  tenses  of  Future  time  (the  so- 
called  Present  and  Perfect;  498,  2). 

601.  Conditions  and  Conclusions  Contrary  to  Fact  are  expressed 
by  the  Imperfect  and  Past  Perfect  Subjunctive.  The  Im- 
perfect refers  to  the  Present,  the  Past  Perfect  to  the  Past 
(524). 


246     Infinitive, — Gerundive  and  Gerund. — Supine 

INFINITIVE 

602.  The  Ini&nitive  is  used: 

1.  As  in  English,  to  express  the  Subject,  Object,  or  Comple- 
mept  of  a  Verb  (87,  «,  h).  Also  in  freer  relations,  in  dependence 
upon  many  Verbs  and  Phrases  (often  in  rivalry  with  a  Subjunc- 
tive Substantive  Clause;  543  and  a).  Its  Subject  is  in  the 
Accusative  (542). 

II.  In  Principal  Statements  of  Fact  in  Indirect  Discourse. 
Its  Subject  is  then  in  the  Accusative  (465). 

a.  General  Rule  for  Indirect  Discourse:  In  Indirect  Discourse 
the  Principal  Statement  is  put  in  the  Infinitive,  with  Subject  Accu- 
sative (which  may  be  omitted  if  perfectly  clear).  All  other  verbs 
that  would  be  in  the  Indicative  if  in  Direct  Discourse,  and  all 
Commands  or  Prohibitions,, are  put  in  the  Subjunctive  (533). 

III.  In  lively  Narration,  in  place  of  an  Indicative.  Its  Subject 
is  then  in  the  Nominative  (515). 

GERUNDIVE   AND  GERUND 

603.  1.  The  Gerundive  is  almost  a  Verbal  Noun  in  force, 
but  is  itself  still  dependent  upon  a  Substantive,  with  which  it 
agrees  (303  a,  470,  1). 

2.  The  Gerund  is  a  complete  Verbal  Noun,  governed  like  a 
Noun,  but  capable,  like  a  Verb,  of  governing  a  Substantive,  and 
being  modified  by  an  Adverb  (471). 

604.  The  Gerundive  and  Gerund  exist  only  in  the  Genitive, 
Accusative,  and  Ablative  cases,  and  (with  the  differences  stated 
above)  are  precisely  parallel  in  their  uses.  These  are,  in  general, 
the  same  as  the  uses  of  Nouns  (473). 

SUPINE 

605.  1.  The  Supine  in  -um  is  used  to  express  Purpose  after 
Verbs  of  Motion  (453,  1). 

2.  The  Supine  in  -n  is  used  to  express  Respect  with  Adjec- 
tives (453,  2). 


Tenses  247 

USES  OF  THE   TENSES 
TENSES  OF  THE  INFINITIVE  AND  PARTICIPLE 

606.  The  tenses  of  the  Infinitive  and  Participle  express 
an  act  as,  at  the  time  of  the  verb  on  which  they  depend, 
completed  (Perfect),  in  progress  (Present),  or  yet  to 
come  (Future).  They  do  not,  of  themselves  alone, 
tell  in  what  division  of  time  the  act  lies.  They  are  thus 
purely  relative  (462). 

TENSES  OF  THE  INDICATIVE 

607.  The  tenses  of  the  Indicative  tell  in  what  division 
of  time  the  act  lies,  namely,  in  the  Past,  the  Present,  or 
the  Future.  Thus  I  ivas  building  (in  the  Past),  I  shall 
build  (in  the  Future). 

608.  They  are  of  two  quite  different  kinds: 

I.  One  kind  represents  an  act  as  at  a  certain  stage  of  advance- 
ment (completed,  in  progress,  or  yet  to  come)  at  a  time  which  is 
thought  of.  Thus  he  was  painting  a  picture.  Such  tenses, 
when  attached  to  any  other  verb,  are  naturally  understood  as 
relative  to  that  verb,  as  in  I  saw  the  picture  which  he  was  painting. 

II.  The  other  kind  represents  an  act,  not  as  in  a  certain  stage 
of  advancement  at  a  certain  time,  but  as  a  ivhole,  in  the  lump. 
Thus  he  painted  a  picture.     Such  tenses  are  absolute. 

TENSES  OF  THE  SUBJUNCTIVE 

609.  The  tenses  of  the  Subjunctive  have  the  same  forces 
as  the  tenses  of  the  Indicative  of  the  same  name;  and,  in 
addition,  each  has  a  future  force  (576,  2). 

Thus  in  video  quid  facias,  I  see  what  you  are  doing,  facias  is 
present;  but  in  te  OrO  ut  id  facias,  I  beg  you  to  do  this,  facias  is 
future. 

a.  In  conditions  and  conclusions  contrary  to  fact,  the  Imperfect 
tense  has  gained  a  new  power,  that  of  referring  to  the  Present  (624:). 
This  will  be  omitted  in  the  table  below. 


248     Table  of  lyidicative  and  Subjunctive  Tenses 

610.  The  following  table,  grouping  the  tenses  of  the 
Indicative  and  Subjunctive,  shows  the  division  of  time  to 
which  each  carries  the  mind,  the  Idnd  to  which  it  belongs, 
and  the  natural  combinatio7is. 


Flight  of  Time 

Past 

Present 

Future 

moods: 

INDIC.  &  SUBJ. 

INDIC.  &  SUBJ. 

INDIC.  &  SUBJ. 

Absolute  Tenses : 

Perfect 

Present 

Future 

Relative  Tenses: 

Imperf.,PastPerf. 

Pres.,  Pres.Perf. 

Put.,      Put.    Perf. 
(Subj.Pres.,Perf. 
used  over  again) 

THE  NATURAL  HARMONY  OF  TENSES 
("Sequence") 

611.  The  natural  combinations  in  what  we  have  to  say 
(in  Latin  as  in  English)  are  of  main  tenses  with  relative 
tenses- of  their  own  time, — i.  e.,  past  tenses  with  relative 
tenses  of  the  past,  present  with  relative  tenses  of  the  pre- 
sent, and  future  with  relative  tenses  of  the  future.  That 
is  to  say : 

612.  In  combinations  of  main  and  depiendent  verbs, 
whether  Subjunctive  or  Indicative,  a  verb  of  the  past  is 
generally  accompanied  by  the  Imperfect  or  Past  Perfect, 
a  verb  of  the  present  by  the  Present  or  Perfect,  and  a  verb 
of  the  future  by  the  Future  or  Future  Perfect  (replaced, 
in  the  Subjunctive,  by  the  Present  or  Perfect). 

a.  But  the  Narrative  Clause  with  ubi,  ut,  postquam,  and  simul 
atque  is  regularly  aoristic  (i.  e.  absolute,  imrelated).  Thus 
^^when  the  barbarians  came,^^  not  ''had  come.^^ 

b.  The  tenses  of  the  present  are  often  used  picturesquely  in 
place  of  the  soberer  tenses  of  the  past,  to  put  past  events  before 
us  as  now  taking  place.  The  subordinate  verbs  are  likewise 
generally  picturesque,  but  sometimes  sober. 


First  Declension  Nouns 


249 


SUMMARY  OF  FORMS 


DECLENSIONS,  COMPARISON,  NUMERALS 
AND  CONJUGATIONS 


NOUNS 
613.  The  Declensions  of  Nouns  are  divided  as  follows: 


First  Declension: 
Second  Declension: 
Third  Declension: 
Fourth  Declension: 
Fifth  Declension: 


a-Stems 

o-Stems 

Consonant  or  i-Stems 

u-Stems 

e-Stems 


FIRST  DECLENSION:    Si-Stems 


614. 


serva,  {woman)  slave,  F. 

Stem 

serva- 

Endings 
F.  (orM.) 

Sing.  Norn. 

serva 

-a 

Gen. 

servae 

-ae 

Dat. 

servae 

-ae 

Ace. 

servam 

-am 

Voc. 

serva 

-a 

Abl. 

serva 

-a 

PI.      Norn. 

servae 

-ae 

Gen. 

servarum 

-arum 

Dat. 

servis 

-Is 

Ace. 

servas 

-as 

Voc. 

servae 

-ae 

Abl. 

servis 

-Is 

250 


Second  Declension  Nouns 


SECOND  DECLENSION:  o-Stems 


615. 


o-STEMS,  in  -us  and  -urn 


Stem 


servuSy  slave,  M.     donum,  gift,  N. 
vo-  dOno- 


Endings 


M. and  F. 

N. 

ing.  Nom. 

servus 

donum 

-us 

-um 

Gen. 

servl 

donl 

-1 

Dat. 

servo 

donO 

-0 

Ace. 

servum 

donum 

-um 

Voc. 

serve 

donum 

-e 

-um 

Ahl. 

servo 

donO 

-0 

7.      Nom. 

servi 

dona 

-I 

-a 

Gen. 

servOrum 

donOrum 

-Orum 

Dat. 

servis 

donis 

-Is 

Ace. 

servOs 

dona 

-OS 

-a 

Voc. 

servi 

dona 

-r 

-a 

Abl. 

servis 

donIs 

-Is 

616. 


SHORTENED  ro-STEMS,  in  -er  and  -ir 


puer,  boy,  M.    ager,  field,  M.    vir,  man,  M. 


Stem 


puero- 


Sing.  Nom. 

puer 

Gen. 

puerl 

Dat. 

puerO 

Ace. 

puerum 

Voc. 

puer 

Abl. 

puerO 

PL      Nom. 

pueri 

Gen. 

puerOrum 

Dat. 

pueris 

Ace. 

puerOs 

Voc. 

pueri 

Abl. 

pueris 

agro- 

viro-     Endings 

ager 

vir        As  above, 

agri 

viri       exceijt  in 

agro 

virO     Nom.-voc. 

agrum 

virum      Sing. 

rfger 

vir 

agro 

virO 

agri 

viri 

agrOrum 

virOrum 

agrls 

virls 

agros 

virOs 

agri 

viri 

agrls 

viris 

Third  Declension  Nouns,  Consonant  Stems      251 


THIRD  DECLENSION 


617. 


CONSONANT  STEMS 


rex,  king,  M.    miles,  soldier,  M.    caput,  head,  N. 


Stem 


reg- 


milit- 


capit- 


Endings 


M. and  F. 

N. 

Sing.  Nom. 

rex 

miles 

caput 

-s  or  — 

— 

Gen. 

regis 

mllitis 

capitis 

-is 

-is 

Dat. 

regi 

militl 

capiti 

-I 

-r 

Ace. 

regem 

mllitem 

caput 

-em 

— 

Voc. 

rex 

miles 

caput 

-s  or  — 

— 

AN. 

rege 

milite 

eapite 

-e 

-e 

PI.      Nom. 

reges 

milites 

capita 

-es 

-a 

Gen. 

regum 

militum 

capitum 

-um 

-um 

Dat. 

regibus 

multibus 

capitibus 

-ibus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

reges 

milites 

capita 

-es 

-a 

Voc. 

reges 

milites 

capita 

-es 

-a 

Abl. 

regibus 

militibus 

capitibus 

-ibus 

-ibus 

618. 


CONSONANT  STEMS  (Continued) 


victor,  victor,  M.    pater,  father,  M.    robur,  oak,  N. 


Stem 


victOr- 


patr- 


robor- 


Sing 

.  Nom. 

victor 

pater 

robur 

Gen. 

victoris 

patris. 

roboris 

Dat. 

victor! 

patri 

robori 

Ace. 

victorem 

patrem 

robur 

Voc. 

victor 

pater 

robur 

Abl. 

victore 

patre 

robore 

PI. 

Nom. 

victores 

patres 

robora 

Gen. 

victorum 

patrum 

roborum 

Dat. 

victoribus 

patribus 

roboribus 

Ace. 

victores 

patres 

robora 

Voc. 

victores 

patres 

robora 

Abl. 

victoribus 

patribus 

.  roboribus 

Endings 
As  above 


252      Third  Declension  Nouns,  Consonant  Stems 

THIRD  DECLENSION 
619.  CONSONANT  STEMS  (Continued) 

sermO,  talk,  M.    muItitQdO,  multitude,  F.  nOmen,  name,  N. 


Stem 

sermOn- 

multitCidin- 

nOmin- 

Endings 

Sing. 

Nom. 

sermo 

multitudo 

nomen 

As 

Gen. 

sermonis 

multitudinis 

nominis 

given 

Dat. 

sermoni 

multitudinl 

nomini 

in 

Ace. 

sermon  em 

multitudinem 

nomen 

(617) 

Voc. 

sermo 

multitudo 

nomen 

Abl 

sermone 

multitudine 

nomine 

PL 

Nom. 

sermones 

multitudines 

nomina 

Gen. 

sermonum 

multitudinum 

nominum 

Dat. 

sermonibus 

multitudinibus 

nominibus 

Ace. 

sermones 

multitudines 

nomina 

Voc. 

sermones 

multitudines 

nomina 

Abl 

sermonibus 

multitudinibus 

nominibus 

620. 


CONSONANT  STEMS  (Finished) 


(The  Stems  of    these 

Nouns  formerly 

ended  in  s.    But 

s  between 

vowels  became  r). 

pulvis,  dust,  M. 

mOs,  custom. 

M.     corpus,  body. 

N. 

Stem              pulver- 

mOr- 

corpor- 

(Formerly  pulves- 

mOs- 

corpos-) 

Endings 

Sing.  Nom.  pulvis 

mos 

corpus 

As 

Gen.    pulveris 

moris 

corporis 

given 

Dat.    pulverl 

mori 

corporl 

in 

Ace.    pulverem 

morem 

corpus 

(617) 

Voc.    pulvis 

mos 

corpus 

Abl.    pulvere 

more 

corpora 

PI.      Nom.  pulveres 

mores 

corpora 

Gen.   pulverum 

morum 

corporum 

Dat.    pulveribus 

moribus 

corporibus 

Ace.    pulveres 

mores 

corpora 

Voc.    pulveres 

mores 

corpora 

Abl.    pulveribus 

moribus 

corporibus 

Third  Declension  Nouns,  l-Stems  and  Mixed  Stems     253 


THIRD 

DECLENSION:    i-Stems 

621. 

NEUTER  i-STEMS 

Tnsigne, 

animal, 

exemplar, 

Endin 

signal,  N. 

animal,  N. 

pattern,  N. 

Stem 

insigni- 

animali- 

exemplari- 

Sing. 

Nom. 

Insigne 

animal 

exemplar 

-e,    - 

Gen. 

Insignis 

animalis 

exemplaris 

-is 

Dat 

Insignl 

animalr 

exemplar! 

-! 

Ace. 

insigne 

animal 

exemplar 

-e,   - 

Voe. 

Insigne 

animal 

exemplar 

-e,    - 

Abl. 

insigni 

animal! 

exemplar! 

-1 

PL 

Nom. 

insignia 

animalia 

exemplaria 

-ia 

Gen. 

insignium 

animalium 

ex.emplarium 

-ium 

Dat. 

Insignibus 

animalibus 

exemplaribus 

-ibus 

Ace. 

insignia 

animalia 

exemplaria 

-ia 

Voc. 

Insignia 

animalia 

exemplaria 

-ia 

Abl 

Insignibus 

animalibus 

exemplaribus 

-ibus 

622.    MASC.  AND  FEM.  i-STEMS 


MIXED  STEMS 


(Mostly  like  Consonant  Stems  in 

(Consonant  Stems  in  Sing., 

Sing 

,  but  i-S terns 

in  Plural. ) 

but  i-Stems 

in  Plural.) 

finis,  end, 

M.    caedes, 

slaughter,  F. 

nox,  night,  F. 

gens,  race,  F 

Stem 

fini- 

caedi- 

noct-  in  Sing. 
nocti-  in  PI. 

gent-inSing 
genti-  in  PL 

Sing.  Nom. 

finis 

caedes 

nox 

gens 

Gen. 

finis 

caedis 

noctis 

gentis 

Dat. 

fin! 

caedl 

noct! 

gent! 

Ace. 

finem 

caedem 

noctem 

gentem 

Voc. 

finis 

caedes 

nox 

gens 

Abl. 

fine 

caede 

nocte 

gente 

PI      Nom. 

fines 

caedes 

noctes 

gentes 

Gen. 

finium 

caedium 

noctium 

gentium 

Dat. 

finibus 

caedibus 

noctibus 

gentibus 

Ace. 

fims  (-es) 

caedis  (-es) 

noctis  (-es) 

gentis  (-es) 

Voc. 

fines 

caedes 

noctes 

gentes 

Abl. 

finibus 

caedibus 

noctibus 

gentibus 

254   Third  Declension  Nouns,  Exceptional  IStems 


623. 


THIRD  DECLENSION  (Finished) 
EXCEPTIONAL  i-STEMS 


turris, 

tower,  F. 

ignis,  fire,  M. 

Stem 

turri- 

igni- 

Sing.  Nom. 

turris 

ignis 

Gen. 

turris 

ignis 

Bat 

turn 

igni 

Ace. 

turrim  (rarely- 

-em)      ignem 

Voc. 

turris 

ignis 

Ahl. 

turn  (-e) 

igni  (-e) 

PI.       Nom. 

turres 

ignes 

Gen. 

turrium 

ignium 

Dat. 

turribus 

ignibus 

Ace. 

turris  (-es) 

ignis  (-es) 

Voc. 

turres 

ignes 

Ahl. 

turribus 

ignibus 

a.  These  Exceptional  Stems  show  i  in  the  Singular,  as  well  as  in  the 
Plural. 


VESUVIUS  IN  THE  ERUPTION  OF  1906 
View  taken  from  the  Observatory 


Fourth  and  Fifth  Declensions 


255 


624. 


FOURTH    DECLENSION  :  u-Stems 


casus,  chance,  M.  cornQ,  horn,  N. 


btem 

casu- 

cornu- 

Sing.  Nam. 

casus 

cornCi 

Gen. 

casQs 

cornus 

Dat. 

casui,  -n 

cornQ 

Ace. 

casum 

cornQ 

Voc. 

casus 

cornCi 

Abl. 

casG 

cornQ 

PI.      Nom. 

casus 

cornua 

Gen. 

casuum 

cornuum 

Dat. 

casibus 

cornibus 

Ace. 

casus 

cornua 

Vac. 

castis 

cornua 

Abl. 

casibus 

cornibus 

Endings 


M.  and  F. 

N. 

-US 

rQ 

-OS 

-OS 

-ul,  -u 

-n 

-um 

-ii 

-us 

-n 

-G 

-0 

-Ds 

-ua 

-uum 

-uum 

-ibus 

-ibus 

-ns 

-ua 

-as 

-ua 

-ibus 

-ibus 

625. 


FIFTH    DECLENSION  :  e-Stems 


dies,  day,  M.  and  P. 


Stem 

die- 

Sing. 

Nom. 

dies 

Gen. 

diei 

Dat. 

diei 

Ace. 

diem 

Voc. 

dies 

Abl. 

die 

PL 

Nom. 

dies 

Gen. 

dierum 

Dat. 

diebus 

Ace. 

dies 

Voc. 

dies 

Abl. 

diebus 

res,  thing, 

F 

re- 

Endings 

res 

-es 

rei 

-ei  or  -ei 

rer 

-ei  or  -el 

rem 

-em 

les 

-es 

re 

-e 

res 

-es 

rerum 

-erum 

rebus 

-ebus 

res 

-es 

res 

-;es 

rebus 

-ebus 

The  Genitive  and  Dative  Singular  have  long  e  (e)  after  a  vowel, 
but  short  e  after  a  consonant.     Thus  diei,  but  rel. 


256 


Irregular  Nouns 


626.    IRREGULAR  NOUNS  OF  THE  SECOND,  THIRD, 
AND  FOURTH  DECLENSIONS 


Sing. 


PI 


domus,  house  or  home 

VIS,  force 

(Mixed  Second  and  Fourth) 

(Irregular  Third) 

Nom.  domus 

Sing. 

Nom. 

VIS 

Gen.    domOs  or  doml 

Gen. 

vis  (rare) 

Dat     domui  or  domO 

Dat. 

VI  (rare) 

Ace.     domum 

Ace. 

vim 

Voe,     domus 

Voe. 

vis 

AN.     domn  or  domO 

Abl. 

VI 

Nom.   domOs 

PL 

Nom. 

vires 

Gen.     domuum  or  domOrum 

Gen. 

virium 

Dat.     domibus 

Dat. 

viribus 

Ace.     domas  or  domOs 

Ace. 

viris  (-es) 

Voe.    domtis 

Voe. 

.vires 

Abl.     domibus 

Ahl. 

viribus 

HOUSE  OF  THE  VETTII,  POMPEII. 


GARDEN  COURT 


Adjectives,  First  and  Second  Declensions       257 


ADJECTIVES   OF   THE    FIRST   AND    SECOND    DECLEN- 


SIONS 

627. 

O-   AND   a-STEMS 

bonus,  good 

SINGULAR 

Stem 

bono- 

M. 

bona- 

F. 

bono- 

N. 

Sing. 

.  Nom. 

bonus 

bona 

bonum 

Gen. 

boni 

bonae 

boni 

Dat. 

bono 

bonae 

bono 

Ace, 

bonum 

bonam 

bonum 

Voc. 

bone 

bona 

bonum 

Abl 

bono 

bona 

PLURAL 

bono 

PL 

Nom. 

boni 

bonae 

bona 

Gen, 

bonOrum 

bonarum 

bonOrum 

Dat. 

bonis 

bonis 

bonis 

Ace. 

bonOs 

bonas 

bona 

Voc. 

boni 

bonae 

bona 

Abl. 

bonis 

bonis 

bonis 

628. 

1 

rO-   AND    ra-STEMS 

miser,  miserable 

piger,  lazy 

SINGULAR 

SINGULAR 

Stem 

misero-        misera- 

misero- 

pigro- 

pigra- 

pigro- 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

Nom. 

miser 

misera 

miserum 

piger 

pigra 

pigrum 

Gen, 

miserl 

miserae 

miserl 

pigri 

pigrae 

pigri 

Dat, 

miserO 

miserae 

miserO 

pigro 

pigrae 

pigro 

Ace, 

miserum      miseram 

miserum 

pigrum 

pigram 

pigrum 

Voc, 

miser 

misera 

miserum 

piger 

pigra 

pigrum 

Abl. 

miserC 

1         misera 

PLURAL 

miserO 

pigrO 

pigra 

PLURAL 

pigrO 

Nom. 

miserl 

miserae 

misera 

pigri 

pigrae 

pigra 

Gen, 

miserOrum  miserarum  miserOrum 

I  pigrOrum  pigrarum 

pigrOrum 

Dat. 

miseris        miseris 

miseris 

pigrls 

pigrls 

pigrls 

Ace. 

miserOs       miseras 

misera 

pigrOs 

pigras 

pigra 

Voc. 

miserl 

miserae 

misera 

pigrI 

pigrae 

pigra 

Abl. 

miseris        miseris 

miseris 

pigrls 

pigrls 

pigrls 

258     Adjectives,   Third  Declension,  Consonant  Sterns 

ADJECTIVES:    THIRD  DECLENSION 
CONSONANT-STEM  ADJECTIVES 


629. 

Comparative  Adj 

ective 

Adjective  of  One  Ending 

certior,  surer 

vetus,  old 

Stem 

certior- 

veter- 

M.  and  F. 

N. 

M.  and  F. 

N. 

Sing. 

Nom. 

.  certior 

certius 

vetus 

vetus 

Gen, 

certioris 

certioris 

veteris 

veteris 

Dat 

certior! 

certior! 

veteri 

veteri 

Ace. 

certiorem 

certius 

veterem 

vetus 

Voc. 

certior 

certius 

vetus 

vetus 

AU. 

certiore 

certiore 

vetere 

vetere 

PI 

Nom. 

certiores 

certiora 

veteres 

Vetera 

Gen. 

certiorum 

certiorum 

veterum 

veterum 

Dat. 

certioribus 

certioribus 

veteribus 

veteribus 

Ace. 

certiores 

certiora 

veteres 

Vetera 

Voc. 

certiores 

certiora 

veteres 

Vetera 

AU. 

certioribus 

certioribus 

veteribus 

veteribus 

a.  All  Comparative  Adjectives  are  declined  like  certior. 

h.  There  are  very  few  common  Oonsonant-Stem  Adjectives  of  one  ending. 


ARCHES  OF  CLAUDIAN  AQUEDUCT  NEAR  ROME 
Partly  choked  with  earth.    Water  channel  visible  in  middle 


Adjectives,   Third  Declension,  l-Stems 


259 


ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  THIRD  DECLENSION 


I-STEM  ADJECTIVES 

630. 

Of  Three  Endings 

Of  Two 

Endings 

acer,  sharp 

fortis, 

brave 

Stem 

acri- 

forti- 

M. 

F. 

N. 

M. and  F. 

N. 

Sing. 

Nom. 

acer 

acris 

acre 

fortis 

forte 

Gen. 

acris 

acris 

acris 

fortis 

fortis 

Dat 

acri 

acrl 

acri 

forti 

forti 

Ace. 

acrem 

acrem 

acre 

fortem 

forte 

Voc. 

acer 

acris 

acre 

fortis 

forte 

Ahl 

acrl 

acri 

acri 

forti 

forti 

PL 

Nom. 

acres 

acres 

acria 

fortes 

fortia 

Gen. 

acrium 

acrium 

acrium 

fortium 

fortium 

Dat. 

acribus 

acribus 

acribus 

fortibus 

fortibus 

Ace. 

acrls  (-es)    acrls  (-es) 

acria 

fortis  (-es)  fortia 

Voc. 

acres 

acres 

acria 

fortes 

fortia 

Ahl. 

acribus 

acribus 

acribus 

fortibus 

fortibus 

a.  I-Stem  Adjectives  have  the  -1  (I)  in  the  Abl.  Sing.,  as  well  as  in  the 
regular  places  in  the  Plural. 


631. 


Of  One  Ending:  duplex,  double 


Stem  duplici- 

M. and  F. 

N. 

Sing.  Nom. 

duplex 

duplex 

Gen. 

duplicis 

duplicis 

Dat. 

duplici 

duplici 

Ace. 

duplicem 

duplex 

Voc. 

duplex 

duplex 

Abl. 

duplici 

duplici 

PI.       Nom. 

duplices 

duplicia 

Gen. 

duplicium 

duplicium 

Dat. 

duplicibus 

duplicibus 

Ace. 

duplicis  (-es) 

duplicia 

Voc. 

duplices 

duplicia 

Abl. 

duplicibus 

duplicibus 

260     Present  Active  Participle. — Plus,  Complures 


THIRD  DECLENSION  (Finished) 


632. 

PRESENT  ACTIVE  PARTICIPLE 

amans, 

loving 

monens, 

ivarning 

Stems 

amant- 

in  Sing. 

monent- 

in  Sing. 

amanti- 

in  PI. 

monenti- 

:  in  PI. 

M. and  F. 

N. 

M. and  F. 

N. 

Sing.  No  m, 

.  amans 

amans 

monens 

monens 

Gen. 

amantis 

amantis 

monentis 

monentis 

Dat. 

amanti 

amanti 

monentr 

monenti 

Ace. 

amantem 

amans 

monentem 

monens 

Voc. 

amans 

amans 

monens 

monens 

Abl.  amante  or  -I    amante  or  -I    monente  or  -l  monente  or  -i 


PL 


Nom.  amantes  amantia 

Gen.  amantium         amantium 
Dat.  amantibus        amantibus 
Ace.  amantis  (-es)  amantia 
Voc.  amantes  amantia 

Abl.  amantibus        amantibus 


monentes  monentia 

monentium        monentium 
monentibus       monentibus 
monentis  (-es)  monentia 
monentes  monentia 

monentibus       monentibus 


a.  Present  Participles  are  Mixed  Stems  (Abl.  Sing,  -e);  but  when  used 
as  Adjectives,  they  are  i-Stems  (Abl.  Sing.  -i). 


633.    IRREGULAR  :  pins,  7nore,  and  complQres,  a  good  many 


M. and  F. 

N.  ^ 

M. and  F. 
SINGULAR 

N. 

Nom 

plus 

Gen. 

pluris 

Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 

pins 

plnre 

PLURAL 

Nom 

.  plures 

plura 

complures 

compluria  or  -a 

Gen. 

pliirium 

plurium 

complurium 

complurium 

Dat 

pluribus 

pluribus 

compluribus 

compluribus 

Ace. 

pluris  (-63) 

plura 

com  pluris  (-es) 

compluria  or  -a 

Voc. 

Abl. 

pluribus 

pluribus 

compluribus 

compluribus 

Comparison  of  Adjectives 


261 


634. 


COMPARISON 
REGULAR  COMPARISQ]^  OP  ADJECTIVES 


POSITIVE 

COMPARATIVE 

SUPERLATIVE 

certus 

certior 

certissimus 

diligens 

diligentior 

diligentissimus 

acer 

acrior 

acerrimus 

aeger 

aegrior 

aegerrimus 

facilis 

facilior 

facillimus 

difficilis 

difficilior 

diflBcillimus 

idoneus 

magis  idoneus 

maxime  idoneus 

636.  IRREGULAR  OR  DEFECTIVE  COMPARISON 
OP  ADJECTIVES 


bonus,  good 
malus,  bad 
magnus,  great 
multus,  much 
parvus,  small 


melior,  better 
peior,  worse 
maior,  greater 
plus,  more 
minor,  smaller 


optimus,  best 
pessimus,  worst 
maximus,  greatest 
plurimus,  most 
minimus,  smallest 


636.  For  a  few  Adjectives,  the  Positive  is  lacking  or  rare,  or 
appears  only  in  Adverbs  or  Prepositions.    Thus : 


citra,  on  this  side 
ultra,  beyond 
in,  intra,  within 
prope,  near 
prae,  pro,  before 
exterus,  outside 
(and  ex) 

inferus,  below 

superus,   above 
(and  super) 

posterus,   follow- 
ing (and  post) 


citerior,  hither 
ulterior,  farther 
interior,  inner 
propior,  nearer 
prior,  former 

exterior,  outer 
inferior,  lower 
.superior,  higher 
posterior,  later 


citimus,  hithermost 
ultimus,  farthest 
intimus,  innermost 
proximus,  nearest 
primus,  first 
extremus 
extimus    ' 
infimus  I 
imus 
supremus 
summus 
postremus  )  last 
postumus   )  late-born 


outermost 


lowest 


[  highest 


262 


Comparison  of  Adverbs. — Numerals 


637. 


REGULAR  COMPARISON  OP  ADVERBS 


tarde,  slowly 
diligenter,  dili- 
gently 
acriter,  fiercely 
facile,  easily 


tardius,  more  slowly 
diligentius,  more 

diligently 
acrius,  more  fiercely 
facilius,  more  easily 


tardissime,  most  slowly 
diligentissime,  most 

diligently 
acerrime,  most  fiercely 
facillime,  most  easily 


a.  Magis  and  maxime  are  often  used,  as  with  Adjectives. 


638.    IRREGULAR  OR  DEFECTIVE 

ADVERBS 
melius,  better 
peius,  worse 


bene,  ivell 
male,  ill 
magnopere,  ^  great- 

multum,       )much 
multum,  much 
parum,  little 


prope,  near 
saepe,  often 


magis,  more 

plus,  more 
minus,  less 
prius,  before 
propius,  nearer 
saepius,  oftener 


COMPARISON  OP 

optime,  best 
pessime,  worst 

maxime,  most 

plurimum,  most 
minime,  least 
primum,  first 
proxime,  nearest,  next 
saepissime,  oftenest 


NUMERALS 


639.  CARDINALS 

(Telling  liow  many) 

CARDINALS 

1  tinus,  one 

2  duo,  two 

3  tres,  three 

4  quattuor, /oitr,  etc. 

5  quinque 

6  sex 

7  septem 

8  octo 

9  noveA 

10  decern 

11  undecim 

12  duodecim 

13  tredecim 

14  quattuordecim 

15  quindecim 


ORDINALS 

(Telling  which  in  order) 

ORDINALS 

primus,  first 

secundus  (or  alter),  second 

tertius,  third 

quartus,  fourth,  etc. 

quIntuB 

eextus 

Septimus 

octavus 

nonus 

decimus 

undecimus 

duodecimus 

tertius  decimus 

quartus  decimus 

quintus  decimus 


Numerals. — Declension  of  Duo 


263 


CARDINALS 

ORDINALS 

16 

sedecim 

sextus  decimus 

17 

septendecim 

Septimus  decimus 

18 

duodevlginti 

duodevicensimus 

19 

undevlginti 

Undevicensimus 

20 

viginti 

vicensimus 

21 

vlginti  unus  or 

vicensimus  primus  or 

tinus  et  vlginti, 

etc.             tinus  et  vicensimus 

30 

triginta 

tricensimus 

40 

quadraginta 

quadragensimus 

50 

quinquaginta 

quinquagensimuB 

60 

sexaginta 

sexagensimus 

70 

eeptuaginta 

septuagensimus 

80 

octoginta 

octogensimus 

90 

nonaginta 

nonagensimus 

100 

centum 

centensimus 

101 

centum  (et)  unus, 

etc.          centensimus  primus 

120 

centum  (et)  vigint 

i,  etc.      centensimus  vicensimus 

121 

centum  viginti  unus,etc.      centensimus  vicensimus  primus 

200 

ducenti 

ducentensimus 

300 

trecenti 

trecentensimus 

400 

quadringenti 

quadringentensimus 

500 

.quingenti 

quingentensimus 

600 

sescenti 

sescentensimus 

.    700 

septingenti 

septingentensimus 

800 

octingenti 

octingentensimus 

900 

nongenti 

ndngentensimus 

1,000 

mille 

millensimus 

1,100 

mille  centum 

millensimus  centensimus 

2,000 

duo  milia,  etc. 

bis  (=  twice)  millensimus 

10,000 

decem  milia,  etc. 

deciens  millensimus 

100,000 

centum  milia,  etc. 

centiens  millensimus 

640.    DECLENSION  OF  duo,  two  (Similarly  ambo,  both) 

Nom.  duo 

duae                          duo 

Gen,    duorum 

duarum                    duorum 

Dat,    duobus 

duabus                     duobus 

Ace.    duos  or  duo 

duas                          duo 

jr^^ 

V  oc. 

Abl.    duobus 

duabus                    duobus 

264        Declension  of  the  Pronominal  Adjectives 

THE  PRONOMINAL  ADJECTIVES  AND  PRONOUNS 

641.  The  Pronominal  Adjectives  and  the  Pronouns  are  in  the 
main  of  the  First  and  Second  Declensions,  but  with  the  peculiar 
Pronominal  Endings,  -lus  and  -I  (sometimes  -ius,  pronounced  like 
English  -yoos,  and  -i)  in  the  Genitive  and  Dative  Singular.  The . 
individual  points  of  each  must  be  separately  acquired.  They  are 
arranged  below  in  the  order  of  variation  from  the  type  first  given. 


PRONOMINAL  ADJECTIVES 

642.  Nine  Adjectives  are  declined  like  Adjectives  of  the  First 
and  Second  Declensions,  except  in  the  Genitive  and  Dative 
Singular^  which  have  the  peculiar  Pronominal  Endings  -lus  and 
-1  in  all  genders.  But  alius  has  Neuter  aliud,  and  its  Genitive  is 
generally  replaced  by  alterius,  from  alter.    The  nine  words  are: 

ViViViSy  one,  only  alius,  o^/ier,  anof/ier  (of  several) 

nllus,  any  alter,  the  other  (of  two),  a  second 

ntlllus,  none,  no  uter,  which  9  (of  two) 

solus,  solCj  alone  neuter,  neither  (of  two) 

totus,  total,  whole 
a.  Except  unus  and  solus  these  lack  the  Vocative. 

643.  The  Declension  in  the  Singular  is  thus  as  follows: 

alter,  the  other 


Norn, 

Gen, 

Dat, 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 

Nom. 

Oen, 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Ahl. 


totus,  whole 
M.  F. 

totus         tota 
totlus        totius 
toti  toti 

totum        totam 


N. 
totum 
totius 
toti 
totum 


M. 
alter 
alterius 
alterl 
alterum 


F. 
altera 
alterius 
alterl 
alteram 


N. 
alterum 
alterius 
alterl 
alterum 


totO     tota     totO 

alius,  another 
alius  alia  aliud 

(alterius    alterius     alterius) 
alii  alii  alii 

alium         aliam         aliud 


alterO        altera        alterO 

uter,  which  9  (of  two) 
uter  utra  utrum 

utrlus        utrlus        utrlus 
utrl  utrl  utrl 

utrum       utram       utrum 


alio 


alia 


alio 


utrO 


utra 


utrO 


a.  The  Plural  is  regular  in  all  these  words. 


Declension  of  Ipse  and  Ille 


265 


644. 


Sing.  Noni. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 


PL 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 


ipse,  self 
M.  F..  ^ 

ipse  ipsa 

ipsius  ipsius 

ipsi  ipBi 

ipsum  ipsam 


ipsis 


ipsis 


N. 
ipsum 
ipsius 
ipsI 
ipsum 


ipso 

ipsa 

ipso 

M. 

F. 

N. 

ipsi 

ipsae 

ipsa 

ipsorum 

ipsarum 

ipsorum 

ipsis 

ipsis 

ipsis 

ipsos 

ipsas 

ipsa 

ipsis 


a.  Notice  that  ipse  is  declined  precisely  like  the  Pronominal  Adjectives, 
except  for  the  single  form  ipse  itself,     . 


645. 


ille,  that,  he.    Similarly  iste,  this  (that)  of  yours 


Sing.  Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
Abl. 


PI. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Abl. 


M. 

ille 
illius 
illi 
ilium 


F. 
ilia 
illius 
illi 
illam 


N. 
illud 
illius 
illi 
illud 


illo 

ilia 

illo 

M. 

F. 

N. 

illi 

illae 

ilia 

illorum 

illarum 

illorum 

iUis 

illis 

illis 

illos 

illas 

ilia 

illis 


illis 


illis 


a.  Ille  is  like  ipse,  except  for  the  d-Neuter  (Nom.-Acc.  Sing.). 


266  Declension  of  Is  and  Idem 

646.  is,  this,  that,  the,  he,  she,  it 


M. 

F. 

N. 

Sing.  Nom. 

is 

ea 

id 

Gen. 

ems 

ems 

ems 

Dat. 

el 

ei 

ei 

Ace. 

eum 

earn 

id 

Voc. 

AN. 

eo 

ea 

eo 

PL      Nom.  ei  or  ii  (I)        eae  ea 

Gen.  eorum  earum  eorum 

Dat.  CIS  or  iis  (Is)    eis  or  iis  (is)  eis  or  iis  (Is) 

Ace.  eoa  eas  ea 

Voc. 


Ahl.      eis  or  iis(is)    eis  or  iis  (is)    eis  or  iis  (Is) 


647. 

ider 

n,  the  same 

M. 

F. 

N. 

Sing.  Nom. 

idem 

eadem 

idem 

Gen. 

eiusdem 

eiusdem 

eiusdem 

Dat. 

eldem 

eidein 

eidem 

Ace. 

eundem 

eandem 

idem 

Voc. 
Ahl. 

eodem 

eadem 

eodem 

PI.      Nom. 

eidem  or 
idem  (iidem) 

eaedem 

eadem 

Gen. 

eorundem 

earundem 

eorundem 

Dat. 

elsdem  or 

elsdem  or 

elsdem  or 

'     isdem  (ilsdem) 

isdem  (iisdem) 

isdem  (iisdem 

Ace. 

eosdem 

easdem 

eadem 

Voc. 
Abl. 

elsdem  or 

elsdem  or 

elsdem  or' 

isdem  (iisdem)         isdem  (iisdem)         isdem  (iisdem) 

a.  Notice  that  idem  is  declined  very  nearly  like  is  above,  witJi  -dem 
added. 

b.  In  the  Plural  of  is,  the  preferred  forms  are  spelled  with  two  i's,  but 
pronounced  with  one.  In  the  Plural  of  idem,  the  preferred  forms  are  both 
spelled  and  pronounced  with  one  i. 


Declension  of  Hie 


267 


648. 


M. 


Sing.  Nom. 

hie 

Gen. 

huius 

Dat. 

huic 

Ace. 

hunc 

Voc. 
AU. 

hoc 

PI.      Nom. 

hi 

Gen. 

horum 

Dat. 

his 

Ace. 

hos 

Voc. 
AU. 

his 

hie,  this,  he 

F. 
haec 
huius 
huic 
hanc 


hac 

hae 
harum 
his 
has 

his 


N. 
hoc 
huius 
huic 
hoc 

hoc 

haec 
horum 
his 
haec 

his 


a.  Hie  (for  hi-ce),  together  with  qui,  quis,  quidam,  and  quisque  (next  two 
pages)  has  a  special  pronominal  ending  -ae,  in  the  Nom.  Sing,  Fein.,  and 
the  Nom. -Ace.  Neut.  PI. 


THE  ANIO  AS  IT  DIVIDES  ABOVE  TIVOLI 
Before  its  fall 


268 


Declension  of  Qui  and  Quis 


649.  qui,  Rel.  Pronoun,  who, 
and  Interrog.  Adjective,  what  9 

SINGULAR 

F.  N.     , 

quae  quod 

cuius  •     cuius 
cui  cui 


quis,  Interrog.  Pronoun,  who  f 
(as  Substantive) 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Ahl. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voe. 

Ahl. 


M. 
qui 
cuius 
cui 
quern 


quo 


M. 
qui 

quorum 
quibus 
quos 


quam 


qua 


quod 


quo 


M.  «&F. 

quis 

cuius 

cui 

quern 

quo 


N. 
quid 
cuius 
cui 
quid 

quo 


(Same  for  both  words)  plural 
F. 
quae 
quarum 
quibus 
quas 


N. 
quae 
quorum 
quibus 
quae 


quibus 


quibus 


quibus 


a.  Quicumque,  whoever,  is  declined  like  qui  with  -cumque  added. 


650: 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

Ahl. 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voe. 

Ahl. 


quidam,  a  certain 
Adjective  and  Substantive 

SINGULAR 


M. 

quidam 
cuiusdam 
cuidam 
quendam 


F. 
quaedam 
cuiusdam 
cuidam 
quandam 


N. 
quoddam  or  quiddam  (Substantive) 
cuiusdam 
cuidam 
quoddam  or  quiddam  (Substantive) 


quodam  quadam  quodam 

PLURAL  (same  for  Adjective  and  Substantive) 


M. 
quidam 
quorundam 
quibusdam 
quosdam 


F. 
quaedam 
quarundam 
quibusdam 
quasdam 


N. 

quaedam 
quorundam 
quibusdam 
quaedam 


quibusdam    quibusdam    quibusdam 
a.  Notice  that  quidam  is  declined  like  qui  above  with  -dam  addedt 
has  also  the  Neuter  Subsfxintive  form  from  quis. 


but 


Declension  of  Quisquam,  Quisque,  Aliquis        269 


COMPOUNDS   OP   quis 
(Compounds  of  quis  have  quod- Adjective  and  quid-  Substantive.) 


651. 


Nom, 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
AN. 


quisquam,  any  at  all  (Substantive) 
M.  &  F.  N. 

quisquam  » quicquam 

cuiusquam  cuiusquam 

cuiquam  cuiquam 

quemquam  quicquam 


652. 

Nom. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Ace. 
Voc. 
AN. 
a. 

653' 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

AN. 


quisque, 

M. 
quisque 
cuiusque 
cuique 
quemque 


quoquam 
each:    As  Adjective 


quoquam 


As  Substantive 


F. 
quaeque 
cuiusque 
cuique 
quamque 


N. 
quodque 
cuiusque 
cuique 
quodque 


M.  &  F. 
quisque 
cuiusque 
cuique 
quemque 


N. 
quidque 
cuiusque 
cuique 
quidque 


quoque 


quoque  quaque 

Similarly  quispiam,  any. 

aliquis  (aliquT),  some,  any 
As  Adjective 

SINGULAR 

M.  F.  N. 

aliqui  aliqua  aliquod 

alicuius  alicuius  alicuius 

alicui  alicui  alicui 

aliquem  aliquam  aliquod 


quoque 


quoque 


SIMILARLY  quis,  Indefinite 
As  Substantive 


M.  &F. 
aliquis 
alicuius 
alicui 
aliquem 


N. 
aliquid 
alicuius 
alicui 
aliquid 


aliquo 


aliqua 


aliquo 


aliquo 


aliquo 


PLURAL  (same  for  Adjective  and  Substantive) 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voc. 

AN. 


M. 
aliqui 
aliquorum 
aliquibus 
aliquos 


F. 
aliquae 
aliquarum 
aliquibus 
aliquas 


N. 
aliqua 
aliquorum 
aliquibus 
aliqua 


aliquibus 


aliquibus 


aliquibus 

a.  Note  that  aliquis  and  the  Indefinite  quis  are  declined  like  Int£rrogatine 
quis  (649),  but  tvifh  the  adjective  ending  -a  in  place  of  the  pronominal  ae. 


270    Declension  of  Ego,  Tu,  Sui. — Conjugation  of  Sum 


664.     PERSONAL  PRONOUNS 

(7,  you) 
First  Second 


Nam.  ego 

Gen.  mei 

Dat.  mihi 

Ace.  me 

Voe.  

Ahl.  me 


REFLEXIVE  PRONOUNS 

{myself,  yourself,  himself,  etc.) 

First  Second        Third 


SINGULAR 

SINGULAR 

tu 

tui 

mei 

tul 

BUI 

tibi 

mihi 

tibi 

sibi 

te 

me 

te 

Be,  Bese 

tu 

t6 

me 

te 

Be,  sese 

PLURAL 

PLURAL 

NoTYi.        nos  vos  • 

Gen.  nostrum, -tri  vestrum, -tri  nostri  vestri  sui 

Dat.  nobis  vobis  nobis  vobis  sibi 

Ace.  nos  vos  nos  vos  se,  sese 

Voc.  vos  

Abl.  nobis  vobis  nobis  vobis  se,  sese 

a.  The  Pronouns  of  the  Third  Person  are  is,  ille,  hie,  iste. 


655.  CONJUGATION  OP  sum  (Irregular) 

(Given  first  because  entering  into  Conjugation  of  the  Regular  Verbs.) 
Principal  Parts:  sum,  esse,  fuT,  futOrus 


Indicative 


1st  Sing. 
2d  " 
3d  " 
Ist  PI. 
2d  " 
3d     " 


sum,  I  am 
es,  thou  art 
est,  he  (she,  it  )is 
sumus,  we  are 
estis,  you  are 
sunt,  they  are 


Present 


1st  Sing,    eram,  I  was 
2d      "         eras,  thou  wast 
3d      "         erat,  he  was 


Imperfect 


1st  PL 
2(}  " 
3d     " 


eramus,  we  were 
eratis,  you  were 
erant,  they  were 


Subjunctive 
sim 

SIS 

sit 

Bimus 
Bitis 
eint 

essem 

esses 

esset 

essemus 

essetis 

essent 


Sum  Finished 


.     271 


Future 

1st  Sing. 

erO,  I  shall  he 

2d      " 

eris,  thou  wilt  he 

3d      " 

erit,  he  will  he                            ^ 

1st  PI 

erimus,  we  shall  he 

2d    " 

eritis,  you  ipill  he 

3d    " 

erunt,  they  will  he 

Perfect 

1st  Sing. 

fur,  I  have  heen,  was 

fuerim 

2d      " 

fuistr,  thou  hast  heen,  wast 

fueris 

3d      " 

f  uit,  he  has  been,  was 

fuerit 

1st  PL 

fuimus,  we  have  heen,  were 

fuerlmus 

2d    " 

fuistis,  you  have  heen,  ivere 

fueritis 

3d    " 

fuerunt,  -ere,  they  have  heen,  were 
Past  Perfect 

fuerint 

isf  ^Singf. 

f  ueram,  I  had  heen 

fuissem 

2d      " 

fueras,  thou  hadst  heen 

fuisses 

5c?      " 

fuerat,  he  had  heen 

fuisset 

isiP/f. 

fueramus,  we  had  heen 

fuissemus 

2d    " 

fueratis,  you  had  heen 

fuissetis 

5d     " 

fuerant,  they  had  he^n 

Future  Perfect 

fuissent 

:?s^  Sing. 

fuerO,  I  shall  have  heen 

2d      " 

fueris,  thou  wilt  have  heen 

5c^       " 

fuerit,  he  will  have  heen 

1st  PI 

fu erimus,  we  shall  have  heen 

2d     " 

fueritis,  you  will  have  heen 

5d     " 

fuerint,  they  will  have  heen 
Imperative 

' 

Pres.  2d 

es,  he  thou 

este,  he  ye 

Fut.   2d 

esto,  thou  shalt  he 

estote,  you  shall  he 

3d 

esto,  he  shall  he 

Infinitive 
Pres.        esse,  to  he 
Perf.        fuisse,  to  have  heen 

eunto,  they  shall  he 

Fut.         futnrus  esse,  or  fore,  to  he  ahout  to  he 

Participle 
Fut.  futdrus,  ahout  to  he 


272 


First  Conjugation:  Amo 


656.  FIRST  CONJUGATION 

amO,  love  ♦  * 

Principal  Parts:       amO        amare        amavl       amatum 


ACTIVE 

PASSIVE 

Indicative 

Subjunctive           Indicative 

Subjunctive 

Present 

amO 

amem 

amor 

amer 

amas 

ames 

amaris,  -re 

ameris,  -re 

amat 

amet 

amatur 

ametur 

amamus 

aij^gmus 

amamur 

amemur 

amatis 

ametis 

amamini 

ameminl 

amant 

ament 

amantur 
Imperfect 

amentur 

amabam 

amarem 

amabar 

amare  r 

amabas 

amares 

amabaris,  -re 

amareris,  -re 

amabat 

amaret 

amabatur 

amaretur 

amabamus 

amaremus 

amabamur 

amaremur 

amabatis 

amaretis 

amabamini 

amaremini 

amabant 

amarent 

amabantur 
Future 

amarentur 

amabO 

amabor 

amabis 

amaberis,  -re 

- 

amabit 

amabitur 

atnabimus 

amabimur 

amabitis 

amabimini 

amabunt 

amabuntur 
Perfect 

amavl 

amaverim 

amatus  sum 

amatus  sim 

amavisti 

amaverls 

amatus  es 

amatus  sis 

amavit 

amaverit 

amatus  est 

amatus  sit 

amavimus 

amaverlmus 

amatr  sumus 

amati  simus 

amavistis 

amaveritis 

a  mat!  estis 

amati  sltis 

amaverunt, 

-ere    amaverint 

amati  sunt 

amati  sint 

Amo  Finished 


273 


ACTIVE 
Indicative  Subjunctive 

Past 
amaveram  amavissem 


PASSIVE 
Indicative  Subjunctive 


amaveras 
amaverat 


amavisses 
amavisset 


Perfect 

amatus  eram 
amatus  eras 
amatus  erat 


amatus  essem 
amatus  esses 
amatus  esset 


amaveramus         amavissemus 
amaveratis  amavissetis 

amaverant  amavissent 


amati  eramus       amatressemus 
amati  eratis  amatI  essetis 

amati  erant  amatr  essent 


Future  Perfect 

amaverO 

amatus  erO 

amaveris 

amatus  eris 

amaverit 

amatus  erit 

amaverimus 

amati 

:  erimus 

amaveritis 

amati  eritis 

amaverint 

amati  erunt 

Imperative 

singular 

PLURAL 

SINGULAR           PLURAL 

Pres.  ama 

amate 

amare              amamini 

Fut,  amato 

amatote 

amator            amantor 

amatO 

amantO 

amator 

Infinitive 

Pre 

s,  amare 

amarl 

Perf,  amavisse 

amatus  esse 

Fut 

.     amatCirus  esse 

amatum  Irl 

Participle 

Pres 

.   amatis 

Perf. 

amatus 

Fut. 

amattirus              Fut. 

amandus 

Gerund 

Gerundive 

Oen. 

amandl 

Gen. 

amandl,  -ae,  -I 

Dat. 

amando 

Dat. 

amando,  -ae,  -0 

Ace. 

amandum              Ace. 

amandum,  -am,  -um 

Abl, 

amando 

Abl. 
Supine 
amatum,  -a 

amando,  -a,  -0 

274 


Second  Conjugation:  Moneo 


657. 


SECOND  CONJUGATION 
moneO,  warn 


Principal 

Parts:        moneO        monere        monui        monitum 

ACTIVE 

.     .       PASSIVE 

Indicative 

Subjunctive         Indicative 

Subjunctive 

Present 

moneO 

moneam 

moneor 

monear 

mones 

moneas 

moneris,  -re 

monearis,  -re 

monet 

moneat 

monetur 

moneatur 

monemus 

moneamus 

monemur 

moneamur 

monetis 

moneatis 

monemini 

moneaminl 

monent 

moneant 

monentur 

\ 

Imperfect 

moneantur 

monebam 

monerem 

monebar 

monerer 

monebas 

moneres 

monebaris,  -re 

monereris,  -re 

monebat 

moneret 

monebatur 

moneretur 

monebamus 

moneremus 

monebamur 

moneremur 

monebatis 

moneretis 

monebamini 

moneremini 

monebant 

monerent 

monebantur 
Future 

monerentur 

mongbo 

. 

monebor 

monebis 

moneberis,  -re 

monebit 

monebitur 

monebimus 

monebimur 

monebitis 

monebimini 

monebunt 

monebuntur 
Perfect 

monul 

monuerim 

monitus  sum 

monitus  sim 

moDuisti 

monueris 

monitus  es 

monitus  sis 

monuit 

monuerit 

monitus  est 

monitus  sit 

monuimus  monuerlmus 

monuistis  monueritis 

monuerunt,  -ere  monuerint 


monitl  sumus 
moniti  estis 
monitl  sunt 


monitr  simus 
monitl  sitis 
monitl  sint 


Moneo  Finished 


275 


ACTIVE 

Indicative         Subjunctive 


PASSIVE 
Indicative  Subjunctive 


Past  Perfect 

monueram  monuissem  monitus  eram  monitus  essem 

monueras  monuisses  monitus  eras  monitus  esses 

monuerat  monuisset  monitus  erat  monitus  esset 


monueramus       monuissemus 


monitl  eramus      moniti  essemus 


monueratis 
monuerant 


monuerO 
monueris 
monuerit 

monuerimus 

monueritis 

monuerint 


SINGULAR 

Pres.    mone 
Fut,      monetO 
moneto 


monuissetis  moniti  eratis 

monuissent  moniti  erant 

Future  Perfect 

monitus  erO 
monitus  eris 
monitus  erit 

moniti  erimus 
moniti  eritis 
moniti  erunt 

Imperative 
plural  singular 

monete  monere 

monetote  monetor 

monento  monetor 


moniti  essetis 
moniti  essent 


PLURAL 

monemini 
monentor 


Infinitive 

Pres.    monere  monerl 

Perf.    monuisse  monitus  esse 

Fut.     monitnrus  esse  monitum  Irl 

Participle 

Pres.  monens                         Perf.  monitus 

Fat.    monitnrus                     Fut.  monendus 

Gerund  Gerundive 

Oen.    monendl                       Gen.  monendl,  -ae,  -i 

Dat.    monendo                      Dat.  monendo,  -ae,  -0 

Ace.     monendum                   Ace.  monendum,  -am,  -um 

Ahl.     monendo                      Abl.  monendo,  -a,  -0 

Supine 
monitum,  -U 


276 


Third  Conjugation:  Tego 


668.  THIRD  CONJUGATION 

tego,  cover 
Principal  Parts:        tegO        tegere        t6xT        tectum 

ACTIVE     .  ^  PASSIVE 

Indicative  Subjunctive  Indicative  Subjunctive 

Present 


tego 

tegam 

tegor 

tegar 

tegis 

tegas 

tegeris,  -re 

tegaris,  -re 

tegit 

tegat 

tegitur 

tegatur 

tegimus 

tegamus 

tegimur 

tegamur 

tegitis 

tegatis 

tegimini 

tegamini 

tegunt 

tegant 

teguntur 
Imperfect 

tegantur 

teggbam 

tegerem 

tegebar 

tegerer 

tegebas 

tegeres 

tegebaris,  -re 

tegereris,  -re 

tegebat 

tegeret 

tegebatur 

tegeretur 

tegebamus 

tegeremus 

tegebamur 

tegeremur 

tegebatis 

tegeretis 

tegebamini 

tegereminl 

tegebant 

tegerent 

tegebantur 
Future 

tegerentur 

tegam 

tegar 

tegfis  • 

tegeris,  -re 

teget 

teggtur 

teggmus 

tegemur 

tegetis 

tegemini 

tegent 

tegentur 
Perfect 

texl 

texerim 

tectus  sum 

tectus  sim 

texisti 

texeris 

tectus  es 

tectus  SIS 

texit 

texerit 

tectus  est 

tectus  sit 

teximus 

texerimus 

tecti  sumus 

tecti  simus 

texistis 

texerltis 

tecti  estis 

tectl  sltis 

texerunt,  -ere 

texerint 

tectl  sunt 

tecti  sint 

Tego  Finished 


277 


ACTIVE 

PASSIVE 

Indicative 

Subjunctive 

Indicative         Subjunctive 

Past 

Perfect 

texeram 

texissem 

tectus 

eram        tectus  essem 

texeras 

texisses 

tectus  eras          tectus  esses 

texerat 

texisset 

tectus  erat          tectus  esset 

texeramus 

texissemus 

tectl  eramus       tecti  essemus 

texeratis 

texissetis 

tecti  eratis          tecti  essetis 

texerant 

texissent 

tectl  erant           tecti  essent 

Futuvi 

e  Perfect 

texerO 

tectus  erO 

texeris 

tectus 

eris 

texerit 

tectus  erit 

texerimus 

tectl  erimus 

texeritis 

tectl  eritis 

texerint 

tectl  erunt 

Imperative 

SINGULAR             PLURAL 

SINGULAR               plural 

Pres.      tege 

tegite 

tegere                tegiminl 

Fut.        tegito 

tegitote 

tegitor 

tegito 

tegunto 

tegitor               teguntor 

Infinitive 

Pres.    tegere 

tegl 

Perf.    texisse 

tectnrus  esse 

Fut.      tectarus  esse 

tectum  irl 

Participle 

Pres. 

tegens 

Perf 

.    tectus 

Fut. 

tectorus 

Fut. 

tegendus 

Gerund 

Gerundive 

Gen. 

tegendl 

Gen. 

tegendl,  -ae,  -i 

Dat. 

tegendo 

Dat. 

tegendo, -ae,  -0 

Ace. 

tegendum 

Ace. 

tegendum,  -am,  -um 

Abl. 

tegendo 

Abl. 

tegendo, -a, -0 

Supine 

tectum,  -n 

278 
669. 


Third  Conjugation,  in  -io:  Capio 


THIRD   CONJUGATION,  IN  -iO 

capio,  talce 

Principal  Parts :        capiO        capere        cepi        captum 

ACTIVE  PASSIVE 

Indicative        Subjunctive  Indicative   •       Subjunctive 

Present 


capio 

capiam 

capior 

capiar 

capis 

capias 

caperis,  -re 

capiaris,  -re 

capit 

capiat 

capitur 

capiatur 

•capimus 

capiamus 

capimur 

capiamur 

capitis 

capiatis 

capimini 

capiamini 

capiunt 

capiant    ' 

capiuntur 
Imperfect 

capiantur 

capiebam 

caperem 

capiebar         * 

caperer 

capiebas 

caperes 

capiebaris,  -re 

capereris,  -re 

capiebat 

caperet 

capiebatur 

caperetur 

capiebamus 

caperemus 

capiebamur 

caperemur 

capiebatis 

caperetis 

capiebamini 

caperemini 

capiebant 

caperent 

capiebantur 
Future 

caperentur 

capiam 

capiar 

capies 

capieris,  -re 

capiet 

capietur 

capiemus 

capiemur 

capietis 

capiemini 

capient 

capientur 
Perfect 

cepi 

ceperim 

captus  sum 

captus  sim 

cepistr 

ceperTs 

captus  es 

captus  sis 

cepit 

ceperit 

captus  est 

captus  sit 

cepimus 

ceperlmus 

capti  sumus 

capti  simus 

cepistis 

ceperltis 

captT  estis 

capti  sitis 

ceperunt,  -ere 

ceperint 

capti  sunt 

capti  sint 

Capio  Finished 


279 


ACTIVE 

PASSIVE 

Indicative 

Subjunctive 

Indicative 

Subjunctive 

Past  Perfect 

ceperam 

cepissem 

captus  eram 

captus  essem 

ceperas 

cepisses 

captus  eras 

captus  esses 

ceperat 

cepisset 

captus  erat 

captus  esset 

ceperamus 

cepissemus 

capti  eramus 

capti  essemus 

ceperatis 

cepissetis 

capti  eratis 

captr  essetis 

ceperant 

cepissent 

captr  erant 

capti  essent 

Future  Perfect 

ceperO 

captus  erO 

ceperis 

captus  eris 

ceperit 

captus  erit 

ceperimus 

captr  erimus 

ceperitis 

capti  eritis 

ceperint 

capti  erunt 

Imperative 

SINGULAR 

PLURAL 

singular 

PLURAL 

Pres.  cape 

capite 

capere 

capimini 

Fut,    capito 

capitote 

capitor 

capito 

capiuntO 

'   capitor 

capiuntor 

Infinitive  ^ 

Pres, 

.  capere 

cap! 

Perf, 

.  cepisse 

captus  esse 

Fut. 

captGrus  esse 

captum  irl 

Participle 

Pres.  capiens 

Perf.  captus 

Fut.    captQrus 

Fat.    capiendus 

Gerund 

Gerundive 

Gen.    capiendi 

Gen.    capiend] 

[,-ae,-I 

Dat.     capiendo 

Dat.     capiendo,  -ae,  -0 

Ace.     capiendum 

Ace.     capiendum,  -am,  -um 

Abl.     capiendo 

Abl.     capiendo,  -a,  -0 

Supine 

captum 

,-tl 

280 


Fourth  Conjugation:   Audio 


660.  FOURTH  CONJUGATION 

audio,  hear 
Principal  Parts:        audio        audire        audlvl 


audrtum 


ACTIVE 

Indicative      Subjunctive 


PASSIVE 
Indicative  Subjunctive 


Present 

audio 

audiam 

audior 

audiar 

audls 

audias 

audiris,  -re 

audiaris,  -re 

audit 

audiat 

auditur 

audiatur 

audlmus 

audiamus 

audimur 

audiamur 

audltis 

audiatis 

audimini 

audiamin! 

audiunt 

audiant 

audiuntur 
imperfect 

audiantur 

audiebam 

audlrem 

audiebar 

audlrer 

audiebas 

audlres 

audiebaris,  -re 

audlreris,  -re 

audiebat 

audiret 

audiebatur 

audlretur 

audiebamus 

audiremus 

audiebamur 

audlremur 

audiebatis 

audiretis 

audiebamini 

audlremini 

audiebant 

audlrent 

audiebantur 
Future 

audlrentur 

audiam 

audiar 

audies 

audieris,  -re 

audiet 

audietur 

audifimus 

audiemur 

audi€tis 

audiemini 

audient 

audientur 
Perfect 

audlvl 

audiverim 

auditus  sum 

auditus  sim 

audlvisti 

audlverls 

aiiditus  es 

auditus  sis 

audlvit 

audlverit 

audrtus  est 

auditus  sit 

audlvimus 

audlverlmus          auditl  sumus 

audit!  simus 

audlvistis 

audiveritis 

audit!  estis 

audit!  sitis 

audiverunt,«^re 

audlverint 

audit!  sunt 

audit!  sint 

Audio  Finished 


281 


ACTIVE 


PASSIVE 


Indicative 

auicllveram 
audiveras 
audiverat 

audiveramus 

audiveratis 

audiverant 

audiverO 
audlveris 
audlverit 

audiverimus 

audiveritis 

audlverint 


SINGULAR 

Pres.    audi 
Fut.      audito 
audit  0 


Subjunctive         Indicative 

Past  Perfect 
audlvissem  audltus  eram 

audlvisses  audltus  eras 

audlvisset  audltus  erat 


audlvissemus 

audlvissetis 

audlvissent 


audltl  eramus 
audltl  eratis 
audltl  erant 


Subjunctive 

audltus  essem 
audltus  esses 
audltus  esset 

audltl  essemus 
audltl  essetis 
audltl  essent 


Future  Perfect 

audltus  ero 
audltus  eris 
audltus  erit 

audltl  erimus 
audltl  eritis 
audltl  erunt 

Imperative 
plural  singular 

audlte  audlre 

audltote  auditor 

audiunto  auditor 


PLURAL 

audlmini 
audiuntor 


Infinitive 
Pres.    audlre  audlrl 

Perf.    audlvisse  audltus  esse 

Fut.      audltnrus  esse  audltum  Irl 

Participle 

Pres.  audiens  Perf.  audltus 

Fut.    audltDrus  Fut.  audiendus 


Gerund 
Gen.    audiendl 
Dat.    audiendo 
Ace.    audiendum 
Ahl.     audiendo 


Gerundive 
Gen.    audiendl,  -ae,  -I 
Dat.    audiendo,  -ae,  -0 
Ace.     audiendum,  -am,  -um 
Ahl.     audiendo,  -a,  -0 


Supine 
audltum,  -G 


282 


Synopsis 


661.  SYNOPSIS  (BIRD'S-EYE-VIEW) 

for  three  Specimen  Verbs 


_  .     .     ,     amO 

'-Is 

amare         amavi 
tegere         texi 
audire         audivi 

amatum,  love 
tectum,  cover 
audrtum,  hear 

ACTIVE 

Indicative 

Pres. 
Imperf. 
Fut. 
Perf. 

Past  Perf. 
Fut.  Perf. 

amo 

amabam 

amabo 

amavl 

amaveram 

amavero 

tego 

tegebam 

tegam 

texi 

texeram 

texero 

Subjunctive 

audio 

audiebam 

audiam 

audivl 

audlveram 

audivero 

Pres. 
Imperf. 
Perf. 
Past  Perf. 

amem 
amarem 
amaverim 
amavissem 

tegam 
tegerem 
texerim 
texissem 

Imperative 

audiam 
audirem 
audiverim 
audivissem 

Pres. 
Fut. 

ama 
amato 

•  tege 
tegito 

Infinitive 

audi 
audito 

Pres. 
Perf. 
Fut. 

amare                      tegere 
amavisse                  texisse 
amaturus  esse         tecturus  esse 

audire 
audivisse 
auditiirus  esse 

Participle 

Pres. 
Fut. 

amans 
amaturus 

tegens 
tecturus 

Gerund 

audiens 
auditurus 

amandi,  etc 

tegendl,  etc. 
Supine 

audiendi,  etc. 

amatum,  -u 

tectum,  -u 

auditum,  -u 

Synopsis 


283 


SYNOPSIS 
for  three  Specimen  Verbs,  Finished 


Principal 
Parts 


[  amor  amari        amatus  sum,  be  loved 

tegor  tegi  tectus  sum,  he  covered 

I  audior        audlrl        auditus  sum,  be  heard 


Pres. 
Imperf. 
Fut. 
Perf. 

Past  Perf. 
Fut.  Perf. 


Pres. 

Imperf. 
Perf. 
Past.  Perf. 


Pres. 
Fut. 


Pres. 
Perf. 
Fut. 


Perf. 
Fut. 


amor 
amabar 
amabor 
amatus  sum 
amatus  eram 
amatus  ero 


amer 
amarer 
amatus  sim 
amatus  essem 


PASSIVE 

Indicative 

tegor 
tegebar 
tegar 

tectus  sum 
tectus  eram 
tectus  ero 

Subjunctive 

tegar 
tegerer 
tectus  sim 
tectus  6ssem 

Imperative 


amare 
amator 


amari 

amatus  esse 
amatum  iri 


amatus 
amandus 


tegere 
tegi  tor 

Infinitive 

tegi 

tectus  esse 
tectum  iri 

Participle 

tectus 
tegendus 

Gerundive 


audior 
audiebar 
audiar 
auditus  sum 
auditus  eram 
auditus  ero 


audiar 
audirer 
auditus  sim 
auditus  essem 


amandi,  -ae,  -i,      tegendi,  -ae,  -i, 
etc.  etc. 


audire 
auditor 


audiri 

auditus  esse 
auditum  iri 


auditus 
audiendus 


audiendi,  -ae,  -i, 
etc. 


284 


Conjugation  of  Deponents 


662.  CONJUGATION  OF  DEPONENTS 

Conj.    I    miror,  miran,  mlratus  sum,  wonder  at 
Principal )  II    vereor,  vererl,  veritus  sum,  respect 

Parts:    j  III    sequor,  sequi,  secDtus  sum, /oZZoi^? 

IV    partior,  partirl,  partitus  sum,  share 
Indicative 


Pres. 


-re 


Imperf, 

Fut 

Perf. 


I 
miror 
miraris, 
miratur 
miramur 
miramini 
mirantur 
mirabar 
mirabor 
miratus  sum 


-re 


-re 


III 
sequdr 
eequeris, 
sequitur 
sequimur 
sequimini 
eequuntur 
sequebar 
sequar 
secutus  sum 


II 
vereor 
vereris, 
veretur 
veremur 
veremini 
verentur 
verebar 
verebor 
veritus  sum 

Past  Perf.  miratus  eram  veritus  eram   secutus  eram  partitus  eram 
Fut.  Perf.  miratus  ero      veritus  ero      secutus  ero      partitus  ero 
Subjunctive 
verear  sequar 

vererer  sequerer 

veritus  sim      seciitus  sim 
L  veritus  essem  secutus  essen 

Imperative 
verere  sequere 

veretor  sequitor 

Infinitive 
vereri  sequi 

veritus  esse    secutus  esse 
veriturus         seciiturus 

esse  esse 

Participle 
verens  sequens 

veriturus         seciiturus 
veritus  seciitus 

verendus  sequendus 

Gerundive  and  Gerund 
verendi,  etc.  sequendi,  etc. 

Supine 
miratum,  -u  veritum,  -ii  seciitum,  -u 


Pres. 

mirer 

Imperf. 

mirarer 

Perf. 

miratus  sim 

Past  Perf. 

miratus  esser 

Pres. 

mirare 

Fut. 

mirator 

Pres. 

mirari 

Perf 

miratus  esse 

Fut. 

miratiirus 

esse 

Pres.  Act. 

miran  s 

Fut.  Act. 

miraturus 

Perf.  Pass,  miratus 
Fut.  Pass,  mirandus 


mirandi,  etc. 


IV 
partio?: 
partiris,  -re 
partitur 
partimur 
partimini 
partiuntur 
partiebar 
partiar 
partitus  sum 


partiar 
partirer 
partitus  sim 


partire 
partitor 

partiri 
partitus  esse 
partitiirus 

esse 

partiens 
partitiirus 
partitus 
partiendus 

partiendi,  etc. 

partitum,  -ii 


Periphrastic   Conjugation 


285 


PERIPHRASTIC  CONJUGATION 
(or  Roundabout  Future) 

663.  The  Periphrastic  Conjugation  is  made  up  of  the  Future 
Active  or  Future  Passive  Participle  with  the  verb  sum.     Thus: 

ACTIVE 
amatGrus  sum,  I  am  about  to  love 


Indicative 

Subjunctive 

Pres. 

amaturus  sum,  lam  about  to  love 

amaturus  sim 

Imperf. 

amattirus  eram,  I  was  about  to  love 

amaturus  essem 

Fut. 

amaturus  ero,  I  shall  be  about  to 
love 

Perf. 

amaturus  fui 

amaturus  fueriir 

Past  Perf. 

amaturus  fueram 

amaturus  f uissei 

Fut.  Perf, 

amaturus  fuero 

Infinitive 

Pres. 

amaturus  esse 

Perf. 

amaturus  fuisse 

. 

PASSIVE 
amandus  sum,  I  {am  to  be  loved)  have  to  be  loved 


Indicative 

Subjunctive 

Pres. 

amandus  sum,  I  have  to  be  loved 

amandus  sim 

Imperf. 

amandus  eram,  I  had  to  be  loved 

amandus  essem 

Fut. 

amandus  ero,   I  shall  have  to  be 
loved 

Perf. 

amandus  f  ui 

amandus  fueriir 

Past  Perf. 

amandus  fueram 

amandus  fuissei 

Fut.  Perf. 

amandus  fuero 

Infinitive 
Pres.       amandus  esse 
Perf.       amandus  fuisse 

a.  The  Periphrastic  Future  is,  by  its  nature,  confined  to  uses  in  which  it 
stufes,  or  assumes,  something  as  about  to  be  done  (as  in  "the  war  which  the 
boys  are  going  to  wage,"  bellum  quod  pueri  gesturi  sunt,  or  "if  the  boys  are 
going  to  wage  war,"  si  pueri  bellum  gesturi  sunt).  Thus  it  cannot  be  used 
to  express  ordinary  Purpose,  for  it  would  mean,  for  example,  not  "in  order 
that  the  boys  may  wage  war,"  but  "in  order  that  they  may  be  about  to  wage 
war." 


286' 


Conjugation  of  Possum 


664. 


Pres. 


CONJUGATION  OP  possum,  am  able,  can 
Principal  Parts:      possum      posse        potui  


Imperf. 
Fut 


Perf. 

Past  Perf.^ 
Fut.  Perf. 

Pres. 
Perf. 


Indicative 
possum 
potes 
potest 
possumus 
potestis 
possunt 

poteram,  -as,  -at,  etc. 
potero,  -is,  -it,  etc. 

Indicative 
potui,  -isti,  -it,  etc. 
potueram,  -as,  -at,  etc. 
potuero,  -is,  -it,  etc. 

Infinitive 
posse 
potuisse 


Subjunctive 
possim 
possis 
possit 
possimus 
possit  is 
possint 
possem,  -es,  -et,  etc. 

Subjunctive 
potuerim,  -Is,  -it,  etc. 
potuissem,  -es,  -et,  etc. 

Participle 
potens   (which    has    be- 
come an  Adjective) 


COINS  OF  THE  EMPEROR  HADRIAN 

And  Sabina,  his  wife 


Conjugation  of  Volo,  Nolo,  Malo 


287 


665. 


CONJUGATION  OF  volo,  nolo,  malo 


volo     velle     volui 

Principal  Parts  \  nolo     nolle    nOlui 

malo   malle  malul 


—  will;  want 

—  he  unwilling 

—  prefer 


Indic. 
Pres,  volo 

VIS 

vult 

volumus 
vultis 
volunt 
Imperf,       volebam 
Fut.  vol  am 

Perf.  volui 

Past  Perf.  volueram 
Fut.  Perf.   voluero 


SUBJ. 

velim 

velis 

velit 

velimus 

velitis 

veliiit 

vellem 


voluerim 
voluissem 


Indic. 


SUBJ. 


nolo 

nolim 

non  VIS 

nolis 

non  vult 

nolit 

nolumus 

nollmus 

non  vultis 

nolitis 

nolunt 

nolint 

nolebam 

nollem 

no]  am 

nolui 

noluerim 

nolueram 

noluissem 

noluero 

Pres. 


Imperf. 
Fut. 


Indic. 

malo 

mavis 

mavult 

malumus 

mavultis 

malunt 

malebam 

malam 


Perf.  malui 

Past  Perf.  malueram 
Fut.  Perf.    maluero 


SUBJ. 

malim 

mails 

malit 

malimus 

malitis 

malint 

mallem 


maluerim 
maluissem 


Imperative 


Pres.  noli 
Fut.    nolito 


nolite 
nolitote 


Pres.    velle 
Perf.    voluisse 


Pres.    volens 


Infinitive 

nolle 
noluisse 

Participle 
nolens 


malle 
maluisse 


288 
666. 


Conjugation  of  Fio 

CONJUGATION  OF  flO,  become 
(=  Passive  of  facio) 


(The  Perfect  System  and  the  Future  Passive  Participle  are  formed  regu- 
larly from  facio.) 


Pres. 


Imperf. 
Fut 


Principal  Parts: 


fiO 


fieri 


factus  sum 


Perf.  factus  sum 

Past  Perf.    factus  eram 
Fut.  Perf.     factus  ero 


Indicative 

flo  

fis  

fit  fiunt 

fiebam 

flam 


Subjunctive 
flam  fiamus 

fias  fiatis 

fiat  fiant 

fie  rem 

factus  sim 
factus  essem 


Imperative 
Pres.  fi        fite 


Infinitive 
Pres.   fieri 
Perf.   factus  esse 
Fut.     factum  iri 


Participle 
Perf.  factus 
Fut.     faciendus 


Gerund 
faciendi 
faciendo 
faciendum 
faciendo 


Gerundive 
faciendi,  -ae,  -i 
faciendo,  -ae,  -o 
faciendum,  -am,  -um 
faciendo,  -a,  -o 


Supine 
factum 
factu 

a.  Prepositional  compounds  of  facio  usually  have  the  regular  Passive. 
.Thus  the  Principal  Parts  of  conficio  are : 

Active:     conficio,  conficere,  confeci,  confectum. 
Passive:  conficior,  confici,  confectus  sum. 


iThe  i  is  long  except  in  fit  and  before  short  e  (thus  fieri,  fierem). 


Conjugation  of  Eo 


289 


667.  CONJUGATION  OF  eo,  go 

(Note  the  contracted  forms.) 
Principal  Parts:       eO        Ire        ii  (or  ivi) 


itum 


Indicative 

Subjunctive 

Pres. 

eo 

Imus 

earn 

earnus 

Is 

itis 

eas 

eatis 

it 

eunt 

eat 

eant 

Imperf. 

ibam 

irem 

Fut 

ibo 

Perf,  ii  {or  ivi)  iimus 

isti  (or  iisti)    letis  {or  iistis) 
lit  {or  it)  ierunt  {or  iere) 

Past  Perf,    ieram 
Fut,  Perf.     iero 


Imperative  Infinitive  Participle 

Pres.    ire  Pres.    iens,  lens,  Gen.  eun tie 

isse  (or  iisse)   Fut. 


Pres.    i 
Fut.      ito 
ito 


ite 

itote     Perf. 

eunto 

Fut. 


iturus 


iturus  esse 

Gerund 
eundi 
eundo 
eundum 
eundo 


Fut.  Pass,  eundum  (est, 
Impersonal) 


REMAINS  OF  ROMAN  ROAD  IN  NORTHERN  SYRIA 
From  Butler's  "Architecture  and  Other  Arts,"  by  permission 


290 


Conjugation  of  Fero 


668.  CONJUGATION  OF  ferO,  hear 

Principal  Parts:      ferO      ferre      tulr      latum 


Active 


Passive 


Indic. 

SUBJ. 

Indic. 

SuBJ. 

Pres. 

fero 

feram 

feror 

ferar 

fers 

feras 

ferris 

feraris  or  -c 

fert 

ferat 

fertur 

feratur 

ferimus 

feramus 

ferimur 

feramur 

fertis 

feratis 

ferimini 

feramini 

ferunt 

ferant 

feruntur 

ferantur 

Imperf, 

ferebam 

ferrem 

ferebar 

ferrer 

Fut 

feram 

ferar 

Perf, 

tuli 

tulerim 

latus  sum 

latus  sim 

Past  Perf. 

tuleram 

tulisseru 

latus  eram 

latus  essem 

Fut  Perf. 

tulero 

latus  ero 

Imperative 

Pres. 

far 

ferte 

ferre 

ferimini 

Fut 

ferto 

fertote 

fertor 

ferto 

ferunto 

fertor 

feruntor 

Infinitive 

Pres. 

ferre 

ferri 

Perf. 

tulisse 

latus  (esse) 

Fut 

laturus  (esse) 

latum  iri 

Participle 

Pres.   ferens 

Perf.   latus 

Fut     laturus 

Fut,     ferendus 

Gerund 

Gerundive 

ferendl 

ferendl,  -ae,  -i 

ferenda 

ferendo,  -ae,  -o 

ferendum 

ferendum,  -am, 

-um 

ferendo 

ferendo,  -a,  -o 

Supine 

latum, 

-u 

LATIN-ENGLISH  VOCABULARY 


The  references   are  to   sections. 
Summary  of  Forms. 

a  or  ab,  Prep,  with  Abl.,  from^ 
away  from;  by  (of  Agent  of 
Passive  Voice).  A  fronte,  etc., 
on  the  fronts  etc. 

abicio,  -icere,  -iecl,  -iectum,  3, 
throw  away,  throw  down, 
throw. 

absum,  abesse,  aful,  afutnrus  (also 
abfui,  abfutnrus),  irr.,  6eaii?a2/, 
he  absent,  be  distant  [655]. 

ac,  see  atque. 

accedo,  -cedere,  -cessT,  -cessum, 
3,  approach.    ^^-^^ 

accido,  accidere,  accidi, ,3, 

befall,  happen. 

accipiO,  -cipere,  -cepi,  -ceptum, 
3,  take,  receive,  accept. 

accurrO,  -currere,  -curri  and  -cu- 
curri, ,  3,  run  up. 

acer,  acris,  acre,  sharp,  fierce, 
293  [630].  Compar.  acrior, 
Superl.  acerrimus,  511, 2  [634]. 

acies,  -ei,  F.  5,  sharp  edge,  line 
of  battle. 

acriter,  Adv.,  keenly,  fiercely. 
Compar.  acrius,  Superl.  acer- 
rime,  538  [637]. 

ad, Prep,  with  Ace,  at,  {near)  by. 
With  idea  of  motion,  aim,  pur- 
pose, etc.,  to,  toward,  for. 
Ad  hunc  modum,  after  this 
fashion. 

adeO,  adire,  adii  (or  adivT),  adi- 
tum,  irr.,  approach,  503  [667]. 


Figures  in   brackets  refer  to   the 

adferO,  adferre,  attuli,  allatum, 

irr.,  bring  (to),  522  [668]. 
adgredior,  -gredi,  -gressus  sum, 

3,  step,  go,  go  against,  attack. 
adhaereO,  -haerere,  -haesi,  -hae- 

snrus,  2,  adhere,  stick. 
adhortor,  -arl,  -atus  sum,  1,  en- 
courage; exhort,  urge. 
adiungO,  -iungere,  -itlnxi,  -innc- 

tum,  S,join  (to). 
adiuvO,   -iuvare,    -iQvI,    -intum, 

1,  assist,  aid. 
administrO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1, 

administer,  manage,  do. 
adpropinquO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1, 

approach.    Word  of  Relation, 

taking  Dat. 
adsuefacio,-facere,-fecr, -factum, 

3,  accustom  {to). 
adsum,  adesse,  adfuT,  adfutnrus, 

irr.,  be  by,  be  present,  be  at 

hand,  be  here  [655]. 
adventus,  -Ds,  M.  4,  arrival. 
ad  versus,     -a,     -um,     adverse, 

opposed.     Word  of  Attitude, 

taking  Dat. 
advolo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  fly 

(to),  rush  (to). 
aeger,  aegra,  aegrum,  ill 
aegre.  Adv.,  in  an  ill  manner,  ill, 

with  difficulty  or  annoyance. 
aeque.  Adv.,  equally. 
aequus,  -a,    um,    equal;   fair; 

favorable. 


291 


292 


Latin-English   Vocabulary 


aestas,  -atis,  F.  3,  summer. 

ager,  agri,  M.  %  field,  111  [616], 

agmen,  agminis,  N.  3,  army  (on 
a  march);  line  of  march. 

ago,  agere,  egi,  actum,  3,  drive, 
lead;  carry  on,  deal  with,  dis- 
cuss ;  act,  do ;  pass,  spend. 

agricola,  -ae,  M.  1,  farmer. 

alacer,  -cris,  -ere,  eager. 

aliquantus,  -a,  -um,  some.  Neut. 
as  Substantive  =  somewhat. 

aliquis,  aliquid  (Adj.  forms  aliqul, 
aliqua,  aliquod).  Indefinite, 
some,  any  one,  any,  207  [653]. 

aliquot,  indecl.  Adj.,  some,  sev- 
eral. 

aliter.  Adv.,  otherwise,  differ- 
ently. 

alius,  -a,  -ud,  other,  another 
(of  several);  different,  else. 
Alius  . . .  alius,  one  . . .  another-; 
PI.  some  ...  others,  130  [643]. 

alter,  -tera,  -terum, -o^/ier,  an- 
other (of  two),  a  second.  Alter 
. . .  alter,  the  one,  the  other; 
PI.,  one  party  .  .  .  the  other 
party,  130  [643]. 

altior,  higher.  Compar.  of  altus, 
high. 

altus,  -a,  -um,  high,  lofty. 

amans,  loving,  Pres.  Act.  Par  tic. 
of  amO.  Declension,  300  [632]. 

Ambiorix,  -Tgis,  M.  3,  a  name. 

ambo,  -ae,  -0,  both,  328  [640]. 

ambulO,-are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  walk. 

amica,  -ae,  P.  1  (woman  or  girl), 
friend. 

amicus,  -I,  M.  2  (man  or  boy), 
friend. 

amO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  love, 
like  [656]. 


amplius,  more.  As  Aqc.  of  De- 
gree, more,  further;  equiva- 
lent   to    an    Adv.      Compar. 

Neut.  of  amplus,  ample. 
amplus,  -a,  -um,  ample,  large. 
an,  Conj.,  or  (in  second  part  of  a 

question), 
animadvert©,     -vertere,     -verti, 

-versum,  3,  notice. 
animal,  -alis,  -ium,  N.  3,  animal, 

270  [621]. 
animus,  -I,  M.  2,  mind,  spirit; 

feeling. 
annus,  -I,  M.  2,  year. 
ante,  Prep,  with  Ace,  before,  in- 

front-of.    Also  Adv.,  before,  in 

advance. 
antea.  Adv.,  before  this,  before 

that,  formerly. 
apertus,  -a,  -um,  open. 
appello,    -are,    -avi,     -atum,    1, 

address;  call,  name. 
aptus,  -a,  -um,  apt,  fitted,  fit. 
apud,  Prep,  with  Ace,  at,  among ; 

at-the-house  of. 
arbitror,  -arl,  -atus  sum,  1,  think, 

suppose. 
ardeO,  ardere,   arsi,   arsGrus,  2, 

burn,  be  in  a  blaze. 
arma,    -Orum,    N.    PI.   2,   arms, 

weapons. 
armO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  arm. 
Arplneius,  -I,  M.  2,  a  name, 
ars,     artis,     -ium,     P.    3,     art, 

skill. 
ascendo,  ascendere,  ascendl,  as- 

censum,  3,  ascend,  mount. 
at,  Conj.,  but,  yet.    Of  contrast 

or  objection.    Not  so  strong  as 

sed. 
athleta,  -ae,  M.  1,  athlete. 


Latin-Eng  lis  h   Vocabu  lary 


293 


atque  or  ac,  Conj.,  and.   Of  close 

connection,  like  -que. 
auctOritas,  -atis,  F.  3,  authority, 
audeo,  audere,  ausus  sum,  2,  dare, 
audio,  -Ire,  -ivl,  -Itum,  4:yhear  [660]. 
Aurunculeius,  -I,  M.  2,  a  name, 
aut,  Conj.,  or.     Aut .  .  .  aut .  .  . , 

either  ,  .  ,  or  .  ,  , 
autem,  Conj.,  postpositive,  on  the 

other  hand,  hut,  however;  now. 

Of  contrast,  but  not  so  strong 

as  at. 
auxilium,  -I,  N.  2,  aid,  help. 

Baculus,  -1,  M.  2,  a  name, 
barbarus,  -a,  -um,  barbarian, 
beatus,  -a,  -um,  happy,  blessed, 

fortunate, 
Bellovaci,  -Orum,  M.  PI.  2,  name 

of  a  Gallic  nation, 
bellum,  -1,  N.  2,  war, 
bene,  Adv.,  if?eZZ. 
beneficium,  -i,  N.  2,  well-doing, 

kindness, 
benignus,  -a,  -um,  good-natured, 

kind.    Word  of  Quality  and 

Attitude,  taking  Dat. 
biduum,  -1,  N.  2,  twQ-days. 
bonus,  -a,  -um,  good^  117  [627]. 
bracchium,  -T,  N.  2,  (fore-)  arm. 
brevis,  -e,  short,  small. 

C,  for  Gaius. 

cado,  cadere,  cecidi,  castirus,  3, 

fall;  befall,  happen. 
caedes,  -is,  -ium,  F.  3,  slaughter, 

271  [622]. 
caedo,  caedere,  cecldl,  caesum,  3, 

cut,  kill, 
Caesar,  Caesaris,  M.  3,  a  name. 
caespes,  -itis,  M.  3,  sod,  turf. 


capio,  capere,  cepi,  captum,  3, 
take,  take  up.  Consilium 
capio, /orm  apian  [659]. 

Capreae,  -arum,  F.  1,  Capri. 

captivus,  -a,  -um,  captive, 

caput,  capitis,  N.  3,  head,  256 
[617]. 

casa,  -ae,  F.  1,  cottage,  cabin. 

castra,  -Orum,  N.  PI.  2,  camp. 

casus, -iis,M.  4,  chance,  accident; 
case,  369  [624]. 

Catuvolcus,  -1,  M.  2,  a  name. 

causa,  -ae,  F.  1,  cause,  reason. 
Causa  with  Gen.  of  Gerundive 
or  Gerund,  for  the  purpose  of, 

cautus,  -a,  -um,  cautious. 

cedo,  cedere,  cessi,  cessum,  3, 
yield;  give  way.  Word  of  Atti- 
tude, taking  Dative. 

celeritas,  -atis,  F.  3,  swiftness, 


celeriter,  Adv.,  swiftly,  quickly. 

cena,  -ae,  F.  1,  dinner, 

ceno,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  dine. 

centum,  indecl.  Adj.,  a  hundred. 

centurio,  -Onis,  M.  3,  centurion 
(commander  of  a  company). 

certamen,  -inis,  N.  3,  contest, 

certe,  Adv.,  certainly,  surely;  at 
any  rate,  at  least. 

certior,  -ius,  surer,  trustier, 
Compar.  of  certus,  sure.  Cer- 
tiorem  (or  -es)  facio,  I  inform. 
Declension,  286  [629]. 

certo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  con- 
tend, strive. 

certus,  -a,  -um,  certain,  sure,  as- 
sured, fixed;  trusty, 

Cicero,  -Onis,  M.  3,  a  name. 

circiter,  Prep,  with  Ace,  and 
Adv.,  about. 


294 


Latin-English  Vocabulary 


circum,  Prep,  with  Ace,  around, 
around  in.    Also  Adv.,  around. 

circumdo,  -dare,  -dedi,  -datum,  1, 
throw  around,  surround. 

circummitto,  -mittere,  -misr,  -mis- 
sum,  3,  send  around. 

circumveniO,  -venire,  -veni,  -ven- 
tum,  4,  surround. 

citerior,  -ius,  on  this  side,  hither. 
Compar.;  cf.  citra,  on  this  side, 
631  [636]. 

citra.   Prep,   with  Ace,  on  this 


civitas,  -atis,  -ium  (sometimes 
-um),  F.  3,  state. 

clamito,  -are,  -avT,  -atum,  1,  keep 
crying  out. 

clamO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  shout. 

clamor,  -Oris,  M.  3,  shout. 

coactus,  -OS,  M.  4,  compulsion. 

coepi,  coepisse,  coeptum  est,  de- 
fective, began,  started. 

cOgitO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  think, 
plan. 

cognOscO,  -gnoscere,  -gnOvT, 
-gnitum,  3,  learn  thoroughly, 
find  out;  recognize. 

cOgO,  cOgere,  c5egi,  coactum,  3, 
gather;  compel. 

cohors ,  cohortis ,  -ium,  F.  3,  cohort 
(tenth  part  of  a  legion). 

coUis,  -is,  M.  3,  hill. 

colO,  colere,  colul,  cultum,  3, 
cultivate. 

commemorO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum, 
1,  state,  mention. 

committo,  -mittere,  -misl,  -mis- 
sum,  3,  join,  commit. 

commode,  Adv.,  conveniently, 
properly. 

commodum,  -I,  N.  2,  advantage. 


commOnicO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1, 

communicate. 
commCiniO,  -Ire,   -IvI,    -Itum,    4, 

fortify. 
communis,  -e,  common. 
commnto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,    1, 

completely  change. 
compleo,  -plere,  -plevi,  -pletum, 

2,  fill  thoroughly,  fill  up,  fill. 
complores,  -plaria  (or  -a),  -pla- 
num, a  good  many,  327  [633]. 

comprehendo,  -prehendere,  -pre- 
hendl,  -prehensum,  3,  seize, 
catch. 

conatus,  -ns,  M.  4,  attempt,  un- 
dertaking. 

concede, -cedere,-cessl, -cessum, 

3,  yield,  grant,  concede. 
conclamO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,   1, 

shout  vigorously,  shout  out. 

concurrO,  -currere,  -curri  and 
-cucurri,  -cursum,  3,  run  to- 
gether, rush. 

concurs 0,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1, 
run  to  and  fro. 

condicio,  -Onis,  F.  3,  terms,  con- 
dition{s). 

condiscipulus,  -I,  M.  2,  fellow- 
pupil,  schoolmate. 

cOnfertus,  -a,  -um,  crowded, 

cOnfestim,  Adv.,  immediately. 

cOnficiO,  cOnficere,  cOnfecI,  cOn- 
fectum,  3,  finish,  complete, 

cOnfldO,  -fidere,  -fisus  sum,  3, 
trust  (to),  confide  {in).  Word  of 
Attitude,  taking  Dat.  (also  the 
Locative  Abl.). 

cOnfirmO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1, 
strengthen,  establish. 

cOnfiteOr,  -fiterl,  -fessus  sum,  2, 
confess. 


Latin-English   Vocabulary 


295 


conicio,  -icere,  -ieci,  -iectum,  3, 

hurl. 
conligO,  -ligere,  -legl,  -Iectum,  3, 

gather^  collect. 
conloco,   -are,   -avT,    -atum,    1, 

place,  station. 
conloquium,  -i,  N.  2,  colloquy. 
conloquor,  -loqui,  -locntus  sum,  3, 

covfer. 
cOnor,  -an,  -atus  sum,  1,  attempt y 

undertake. 
cOnsequor,  -sequi,  -secntus  sum, 

3,  follow  vigorously,  overtake; 

gain. 
cOnservO,  -are,  -avi,   -atum,    1, 

save,  2^'i^6serve. 
consldo,  -sidere,  -sedi,  -sessum, 

3,  sit  down;  halt;  camp. 
consilium,  -i,  N.  2,  counsel, plan ; 

Judgment,  wisdom;  council. 
cOnsistO,  -sistere,  -stiti, 

3,  take  position ;  halt. 
conspicio,  -spicere,-spexi,  -spec- 

tum,  3,  see. 
cOnspicor,    -arl,    -atus    sum,    1, 

get  sight  of. 
cOnstituO,  -stituere,  -stitul,  -sti- 

tQtum,  3  (stronger  than  statuO), 

establish,  place ;  determine. 
cOnsuetCidO,  -inis,  F.  3,  custom. 
cOnsulO,  -sulere,  -sului,  -sultum, 

3,  consult  {for),  look  out  for. 
cOnsultO,  Ad\.,  purposely,  inten- 
tionally. 
constlmO,      -snmere,      -snmpsi, 

snmptum,  3,  consume,  spend. 
contemnO,    -temnere,     -tempsT, 

-temptum,  3,  despise. 
contemptio,-Onis,F.3,  contempt. 
contendo,  -tendere,  -tendi,  -ten- 

tum,  3,  strain ;  strive,  hasten. 


contineO,  -tinere,  -tinui,  -tentum, 

2,  hold  in,  ^em  in,  keep. 
contra,  Prep,  with  Ace,  against. 
contraho,  -trahere,  -traxi,  -trac- 

tum,  3,  contract. 

contrOversia,  -ae,  F.  1,  contro- 
versy. 

convallis,  -is,  F.  3,  valley,  defile. 

convenio,  -venire,  -veni,  -ventum, 
4,  come  together,  meet. 

convert©,  -vertere,  -verti,  -ver- 
sum,  3,  turn  about.  Converts 
signa,  I  wheel  about. 

cOpia,  -ae,  F.  1,  abundance,  sup- 
ply. In  PL, resources /(military) 
forces. 

coqua,  -ae,  F.  1,  cook. 

Corflnium,  -T,  N.  2,   Corflnium. 

Cornelius,  -T,  M.  2,  a  name. 

cornn,  -OS,  N.  4,  horn;  wing  (of 
an  army),  369  [624]. 

corpus, -oris,  N.3,6od2/,  265  [620]. 

cotidie,  Adv.,  daily,  every  day. 

Cotta,  -ae,  M.  1,  a  name. 

Crassus,  -i,  M.  2,  a  name. 

credo,  credere,  credidi,  creditum, 

3,  believe.    Word  of  Attitude, 
taking  Dat. 

culina,  -ae,  F.  1,  kitchen. 
culpa,  -ae,  F.  1,  fault,  blame. 
culpO,  -are,  -avI,  -atum,  1,  blame, 

censure. 
cum.  Prep,  with  Abl.,  with. 
cum,    Conj.,  when,  as;    since; 

although. 
ctlnctus,  -a,  -um,  all  (together), 

ivhole.    In  PL,  all,  everybody. 
cupide,  Adv.,  eagerly. 
cupidus,  -a,  -um,  desirous. 
cupio,  cupere,  cupivi  (and  cupil), 

cupitum,  3,  desire,  wish,  want. 


296 


Latin-Evglish  Vocabulary 


car,  Adv.,  why? 

cnra,  -ae,  F.  1,  care,  anxiety. 

currO,  currere,  cucurrl,  cursum, 

3,  run. 
cursus,  -OS,  M.  4,  running,  run. 

de.  Prep,  with  Abl.,  down  from, 
from  (of  descent);  concerning 
about. 

debeo,  debere,  d^bui,  debitum,2, 
owe;  ought. 

decedo,  -cedere, -cessl, -cessum, 
3,  go  away,  withdraw. 

decern,  indecl.  Adj.,  ten. 

decerto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  set- 
tle the  war,  fight  it  out, 

decimus,  -a,  -um,  tenth. 

decipio,  -cipere,  -cepi,  -ceptum, 
3,  catch,  deceive. 

dedo,  dedere,  dedidi,  deditum, 
3,  give  up.  Me  dedo,  I  give 
myself  up  (to),  devote  myself 
(to);  surrender. 

dedaco,  -dcicere,  -dnxi,  -ductum, 
3,  lead  off,  lead  away. 

defatigO,  -are,  -avI,  -atum,  1, 
fatigue,  tire  out. 

defendO,-fendere,-fendI,-fensum, 
3,  defend. 

defero,  -ferre,  -tull,  -latum,  irr., 
carry  off;  report,  622  [668]. 

deficio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fectum,  3, 
fail. 

deicio,  -icere,  -ieci,  -iectum,  3, 
cast  down. 

deinceps,  Adv.,  in  succession, 
one  after  the  other. 

deinde,  Adv.,  afterward,  next; 
in  the  second  place, 

dellbero,  -are,  -avI,  -atum,  1,  de- 
liberate. 


demitto ,  -mitter  e ,  -misl,  -missum, 
3,  send  down,  let  down.  Me 
demitto,  descend,  come  down. 

demo,  demere,  dempsi,  demptum, 
3,  take  down. 

demum.  Adv.,  at  last,  finally. 

denique.  Adv.,  at  last,  finally;  in 
short. 

desldero,  -are,  -avI,  -atum,  1, 
desire. 

desisto,  desistere,  destiti,  desti- 
torus,  3,  desist,  stop. 

desperatio,  -Onis,  F.  3,  despair. 

desperO,  -are,  -avI,  -atum,  1,  de- 
spair (of). 

desum,  deesse,  defuT,  defutarus, 
irr.,  be  wanting,  fail  [655]. 

dexter,  -tra,  -trum,  right.  Dex- 
tra,  -ae,  as  Noun,  F.  1,  right 
hand. 

dicO,  dicere,  dixi,  dictum,  3,  say, 
speak, 

dictum,  -1,  N.  2,  saying,  word. 

dies,  diei,  M.  and  F.  5,  day.  Dies 
dictuSf  ^  day  appointed,  395 
[625]. 

difficilis,  -e,  difficult.  Compar. 
difficilior,  Superl.  difficillimus, 
611,  3  [634]. 

dignus,  -a,  -um,  worthy.  Takes 
Abl. 

dlindico,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  de- 
cide (between). 

diligens,  -ens.  Gen.  -entis,  dili- 
gent, careful.  Compar.,  di!i- 
gentior,  Superl.,  dlligentissi- 
mus,  611,  1  [634). 

diligenter.  Adv.,  diligently^,  care- 
fully. Compar.,  diligentius, 
Super].,  dlligentissime,  6BS 
[6371. 


Latin-English  Vocabulary 


297 


diligentia,  -ae,  F.  1,  diligence, 
carefulness. 

dimicO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  \,  fight. 

disced©,  -cedere,  -cessl,  -cessum, 
3,  move  off,  depart. 

discipllna,  -ae,  F.  1,  discipline. 

discipulus,  -T,  M.  2,  pupil,  school- 
boy. 

disco,    discere,    didicT,    ,  3, 

learn. 

displiceo,  -plicere,  -plicul,  -plici- 
tum,  2,  be  displeasing,  dis- 
please. Verb  of  Quality,  taking 
Dat. 

disputatio,  -Onis,  F.  3.,  discus- 
sion. 

distribuO,  -tribuere,  -tribui,  -tri- 
bntum,  3,  distribute. 

dia,  Adv., /or  a  long  time,  long. 

diversus,  -a,  -um,  different. 

divido,  dividere,  divisi,  dlvisum, 
3,  divide. 

do,  dare,  dedi,  datum,  1,  give. 
(For  the  short  a,  see  163, 
ftn.  1). 

doceo,  docere,  docui,  doctum,  2, 
teach,  inform,  tell,  show. 

doleo,  dolere,  dolui,  dolitnrus,  2, 
suffer,  ache,  grieve. 

dolor,  -Oris,  M.  3,  pain. 

dolus,  -1,  M.  2,  trick,  stratagem. 

domina,  -ae,  F.  1,  mistress. 

dominus,  -i,  M.  2,  master. 

domus,  -Gs  and  -I,  F.  4  and  2, 
house,  home,  406  [626]. 

donee,  Conj.,  while;  until. 

donum,  -1,  N.  2,  gift,  present, 
107  [615]. 

ducenti,  -ae,  -a,  two  hundred. 

doco,  dncere,  dtlxi,  ductum,  3, 
lead. 


dum,  Conj.,  while;  until. 
duo,  -ae,  -o,  two,  328  [640]. 
duplex,    duplex.    Gen.  duplicis, 

twofold,  double;    ambiguous, 

293  [631]. 
dnrus,  -a,-um,  hard,  stern,  harsh. 
dux,  ducis,  M.  3,  leader^  guide. 

e  or  ex.  Prep,  with  Abl.,  out  of, 

from;  of  (m  the  sense  of  from). 

Ex  cOnsuetOdine  sua,  in  ac- 
cordance with  his  habit.    Ex 

utraque  parte,  etc.,  on  either 

side,  etc. 
EburOnes,  -um,  M.  PI.  2,  name  of 

a  Gallic  nation. 
edDcO,  edtlcere,  edtixi,  eductum, 

3,  lead  out. 
effero,  efferre,  extull,  elatum,  irr., 

carry  out  or  away,  522  [668]. 
efficio,  efficere,  effecl,  effectum, 

3,  make  out,  accomplish,  bring 

about. 
ego,  mel,  J,  214  [654]. 
egredior,  egredl,  egressus  sum, 

3,  march  out,  go  out. 
eicio,  eicere,  eiecl,  eiectum,  3, 

throw  out.    Me  eicio,  I  rush 

out. 
eiabor,  elabr,  elapsus  sum,  3,  slip 

out,  escape. 
eligo,  eligere,  elegl,  eiectum,  3, 

pick  out,  elect,  choose. 
emitto,    emittere,    emisl,    emis- 

sum,  3,  send  out. 
enim,  Conj., /or.    Like  nam,  but 

postpositive  in  its  clause, 
eo.  Ire,  ii  (or  IvI),  itum,  irr.,  go, 

503  [667]. 
eO,  Adv.,  thither,  to  that  place. 
epistula,  -ae,  F.  1,  epistle,  letter. 


298 


Latin-English  Vocabulary 


eques,  equitis,  M.  3,  horseman, 
cavalryman.  In  PL,  =  cavalry. 

equestris,  -e,  cavalry  (as  Adj.). 

equitatus,  -Gs,  M.  4,  cavalry. 

equus,  equT,  M.  2,  horse. 

erumpO,  -rumpere,  -rGpi,  -rup- 
tum,  3,  break  out,  sally  out. 

eruptio,  -Onis,  F.  3,  sally. 

Esuvii,  -Orum,  M.  PI.  2,  name  of 
a  Gallic  nation. 

et,  Conj.,  and.  Et  .  .  .  et  .  .  . 
both  .  .  .  and  .  .  . 

etiam,  Conj.  and  Adv.,  even, 
also. 

etsi,  Conj.,  even  if;  although. 

ex,  see  e. 

excedo,  -cedere,  -cessl,  -cessum, 
3,  come  out  (of),  leave,  with- 
draw. 

excipio,  -cipere,  -cepT,  -ceptum, 

3,  receive,  pick  up. 

excitO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  rouse, 

rouse  up,  raise. 
exemplar,    -aris,    -ium,     N.     3, 

pattern,  270  [621]. 
exemplum,  -i,  N.  2,  example,  pre- 
cedent. 
exeO,  -Ire,  -il  (or  -ivl),  -itum,  irr., 

go  out,  march  out,  603  [667]. 
exerceo,  exercere,  exercuT,  exer- 

citum,   2,    exercise,  practice, 

drill. 
exercitus,  -os,  M.  4,  army. 
exiguus,  -a,  -um,  scanty,  slight. 
existimo,    -are,  -avi,    -atum,   1, 

estimate;  think. 
experior,  experlrl,  expertus  sum, 

4,  try. 

explorator,  -Oris,  M.  3,  scout. 
explore,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  ex- 
plore, reconnoiter;  find  out. 


exsisto,  -sistere,  -stiti,  -stitarus, 

3,  break  out,  arise. 
exspecto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  ex- 
pect, await,  wait  for. 
extendo,  extendere,  extendi,  ex- 

tentum     and      extensum,     3, 

stretch  out,  extend. 
exterior,  -ius,  outer.   Compar.  of 

exterus,  outside,  531  [636]. 
exterus,  -a,  -um,  outside. 
extremus  or  extimus,  outermost, 

extreme,  the  edge  of.    Superl. 

of  exterus,  outside,  531  [636]. 
exuO,  -uere,  -ui,  -Qtum,  3,  strip 

(of),  deprive  (of). 

Fabius,  -1,  M.  2,  a  name. 

facile,  Adv.,  easily,  Compar.  fa- 

cjlius,   Superl.   facillime,    538 

[637]. 
facilis,  -e,  easy.  Compar.  facilior, 

Superl.  faciilimus,  511,  3  [634]. 
facio,  facer  e,  feci,  factum,  3,  make, 

do,  perform,  act.    Facta  potes- 

tate,  opportunity  being  given. 
facultas,    -atis,  F.    3,    facility; 

opportunity. 
fama,  -ae,  F.  1,  fame,  reputation. 
faveO,    favere,  favT,  fautum,    2, 

be  favorable  to,  favor.     Word 

of  Attitude,  taking  Dat. 
femina,  -ae,  F.  1,  woman. 
fere,     Adv.,    generally;     about, 

almost. 
fero,  ferre,  tulT,  latum,  irr.,  bear, 

bring,  carry ,^  522  [668]. 
ferus,  -a,  -um,  fierce,  wild. 
fervefacio,  -facere,  -feci,  -factum, 

3,  heat  red  hot. 
fides,  -ei,  F.  5,  faith,  loyalty; 

promise,  word. 


Latin-English  Vocabulary 


299 


frdo,  fidere,  fisus  sum,  3,  trust. 
filia,  -ae,  F.  1,  daughter. 
frlius,  fill,  M.  2,  son. 
finis,  -is,  -ium,  M.  3,  limit,  end, 

boundary;  Iq  PL,  boundaries, 

territory,  271  [622]. 
finitimus,  -a,  -um,   neighboring. 

PL  as  Subst.,  neighbors. 
flO,  fieri,  factus  sum, irr., become; 

be    done;    happen.    Used    as 

Passive  of  facio,  502  [666]. 
firmO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  make 

Urm,  strengthen. 
flamma,  -ae,  F.  1,  flame,  fire. 
fleO,  Here,  flevi,  fletum,  2,  weep, 

cry. 
flnmen,  -inis,  N.  3,  river. 
forsitan.  Adv.,  perhaps..    With 

Subjunctive  of  Possibility, 
fortasse,  Adv.,  joer/iaps. 
forte.  Adv.,  by  chance,  perhaps. 
fortis,    -e,    strong,    brave,    293 

[630]. 
fortiter.  Adv.,  bravely.    Corapar. 

fortius,  SuperL  fortissime. 
forttina,  -ae,  F.  \,  fortune. 
frater,  fratris,  M.  3,  brother. 
frOns,  frontis,  -ium,  F.  3,  fore- 
head, front. 
frDmentum,  -I,  N.  2,  grain. 
fruor,  frui,  frdctus  sum,  ^,  profit 

by,  enjoy.    Takes  AbL 
fuga,  -ae,  F.  1,  flight. 
fugio,  fugere,  fOgi,  fugitnrus,  3, 

flee,  run  away. 
funda,  -ae,  F.  1,  sling. 
fungor,    fungi,    fnnctus  sum,  3, 

perform,  discharge.  Takes  AbL 

^       Gaius,  -r,  M.  2,  a  name. 
I  *     Galba,  -ae,  M.  1,  a  name. 


galea,  -ae,  F.  1,  helmet, 

Gallia,  -ae,  F.  1,  Gaul. 

Gallicus,  -a,  -um,  Gallic. 

Gallus,  a  Gaul.  Also  a  man's 
name,  Gallus. 

gaudeo,  gaudere,  gavlsus  sum,  2, 
rejoice,  be  glad  of. 

gens,  gentis,  -ium,  F.  3,  race, 
271  [622]. 

genus,  generis,  N.  3,  race,  kin; 
kind,  class. 

Germanus,  -i,  M.  2,  a  German. 

gero,  gerere,  gessi,  gestum,  3, 
carry f  bear;  carry  on,  wage, 
m^anage;  do. 

gladius,  -1,  M.  2,  sword. 

gloria, -ae,  F.  1,  glory. 

gradus,  -ns,  M.  4,  step. 

gratia,  -ae,  F.  1,  popularity, 
favor. 

gratus,  -a,  -um,  gratifying,  pleas- 
ing, agreeable.  Word  of  Qual- 
ity, taking  Dat. 

gravis,  -e,  heavy,  serious,  grave. 

gravor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  1,  be  an- 
noyed. 

habeo,  habere,  habul,  habitum, 
2,  have;  hold;  regard.  OratiO- 
nem  habeO,  deliver  an  address. 
Pro  certo  habeO,/eeZ  sure. 

habito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  in- 
habit, dwell,  live. 

heri.  Adv.,  yesterday. 

hiberna,  -Orum,  N.  PL  2,  a  ivinter 
camp,  winter-quarters. 

hie,  haec,  hoc,  this;  he,  she,  it] 
the  latter,  166  [648]. 

hic.  Adv.,  in  this  place,  here. 

hiemO,  -are,-  avI,  -atum,  1,  spend 
the  winter,  winter. 


300 


Latin-English  Vocabulary 


hiems,hiemiSjF.S,storm;ivinter. 

hodie,  Adv.,  today. 

homo,  hominis,  3,  man.  (The 
ordinary  word  for  a  man  mere- 
ly as  a  human  being,  whereas 
vir  implies  a  compliment.) 

honestus,  -aLy-um, honorable. 

honor,  -Oris,  M.  3,  honor. 

hOra,  -ae,  F.  1,  hour. 

hortor,-ari,  -atus  sum,  1,  exhort, 
urge. 

hortus,  -1,  M.  2,  garden. 

hostis,  -is,  -ium,  M.  3,  enemy. 

iacio,    iacere,    iecl,    iactum,    3, 

throw. 
iaculum,  -i,  N.  2,  javelin. 
iam.  Adv.,  by  this  time,  already, 

now. 
ibi.  Adv.,  there. 
Idem,  eadem,  idem,    the   same, 

168  [647]. 
idOneus,  -a,  -um,    suitable,   jit. 

Compar.   magis  idOneus,    Su- 

perl.  maxime   idOneus,  511,  4 

[634]. 
ignis,  -is,  -ium,  M.  3,  jire  (Abl. 

Sing. -1  or -e),  278  [623]. 
ille,  -a,  -ud,   that;   he,  she,  it; 

the  former,  145  [645]. 
imago,    imaginis,    F.  3,  image, 

likeness,  representation. 
impedimentum,    -i,    N.    2,    hin- 
drance.   In  PI. ,  baggage. 
impello,  -pellere,  -pull,  -pulsum, 

3,  impel. 
imperator,  -Oris,  M.    3,  general 

(in  chief). 
imperatum,  -i,  N.  2,  command. 
imperium,    -I,    N.    2,  command, 

sway;  empire. 


imperO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  com- 
mand, order.  Word  of  Atti- 
tude, taking  Dat. 

impetus,  -ns,  M.  4,  attack. 

impiger,  -gra,  -grum,  energetic, 
industrious. 

impigre.  Adv.,  energetically, 
vigorously. 

imus,  see  Infimus. 

in.  Prep,  with  Abl.  of  rest,  in, 
on,  upon ;  with  Ace.  of  motion 
(literal  or  figurative),  into,  at, 
upon,  against,  for. 

incendo,  -cendere,  -cendi,  -cen- 
sum,  3,  set  on  jire. 

incipio,  -cipere,  -cepi,  -ceptum, 
3,  begin. 

incolumis,  -e,  unharmed,  safe. 

incommode.  Adv.,  disadvanta- 
geously,  unfortunately. 

incommodum,  -i,  N.  2.  trouble, 
misfortune. 

indignus,  -a,  -um,  unworthy. 
Takes  Abl. 

IndGtiomarus,  -i,  M.  2,  a  name. 

inermis,  -e,  unarmed. 

inferior,  -ius,  lower.  Compar.  of 
inferus,  beloiv,  531  [636]. 

inferus,  -a,  -um,  below. 

Infimus,  -a,  -um,  or  Imus,  -a,  -um, 
lowest.  Superl.  of  Inferior, 
lower,  531  [636]. 

ingenium,  ingeni,  N.  2,  intellect, 
ability. 

inimlcus,  -a,  -um,  unfriendly, 
hostile.  Word  of  Attitude, 
taking  Dat. 

inimlcus, -I,  M.  2,  enemy. 

inlquus,  -a,  -um,  disadvanta- 
geous. 

initium,  -I,  N.  2,  beginning. 


Latin-English   Vocabu lary 


301 


iniGria,  -ae,  F.  1,  injury,  wrong. 

iniussQ,  Adv.,  without  orders. 

inligo,  -are,  -avi,  -a turn,  1,  bind 
up. 

inopia,  -ae,  F.  1,  want,  lack,  scar- 
city. 

inquit,  says  he,  or  said  he.  Used 
in  direct  quotation,  and  always 
follows  one  or  more  words. 

insequor,  Tnsequi,  insectltus  sum, 
3,  follow  up,  pursue. 

insidiae,  -arum,  F.  PI.,  1,  ambush, 
ambuscade. 

insigne,  -is,  -ium,  N.  3,  deco- 
ration, badge,  device;  signal, 
270  [621]. 

insto,  -stare,  -stiti,  -stattlrus,  1, 
press  on. 

instruO,  instruere,  instrtlxT,  in- 
strGctum,  3,  draw  up. 

inter,  Prep,  with  Ace,  between, 
among.  Inter  se,  with  one 
another,  together. 

intercede,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -ces- 
sum,  3,  come  between,  inter- 
vene. 

interclodo,  -clndere,  clGsi,  -clo- 
sum,  3,  shut  in,  hem  in,  block. 

interea.  Adv.,  meanwhile. 

interficio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fectum,  3, 
MIL 

interim.  Adv.,  meanwhile. 

interior,  inner,  531  [636]. 

intermittO,  -mittere,  -misi,  -mis- 
sum,  3,  intermit,  stop. 

interpOnO,  -pOnere,  -posul,  -posi- 
tum,  3,  put  between.  With 
fidem,  pledge. 

interpres,  -pretis,  M.  3,  mediator, 
interpreter, 

intervallum,  -T,  N.  2,  interval. 


intimus, -a, -um,  mtiermos^.    Su- 
perlative of  interior,  inner,  531 

[636]. 
intra.  Prep,  with  Ace,  within. 
intrO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  enter. 
intus.  Adv.,  within. 
invenio,  -venire,  -veni,  -ventum, 

4,  find,  discover;  invent. 
invito,  -are, -avi,  -atum,  1,  invite; 

attract. 
ipse,  -a,  -um,  self,  139  [644]. 
Iratus,  -a,   -um,    angry.    Word 

of  Attitude,  taking  Dat. 
is,  ea,  id,  this,  that,  the;  he,  she, 

it,  153  [646]. 
iste,  -a,  -ud,  this  {of  yours)  or 

that  {of   yours);    he,   she,  it, 

145,  a  [645]. 
ita.  Adv.,  in  such  a  way,  thus,  so. 

Ita  ut  (so  as),  as. 
Italia,  -ae,  F.  1,  Italy. 
itaque.  Adv.,  and  so,   therefore, 

accordingly, 
iter,  itineris,  N.  3,  way,   road, 

journey ;  march.  Magnum  iter, 

forced  march, 
iterum.  Adv.,  again. 
iubeO,  iubere,  iussi,   iussum,  2, 

bid,  order.  Takes  Infin. 
index,  itidicis,  M.  3,  judge. 
indicium,    -I,    N.    2,  judgment, 

opinion. 
indicO,    -are,    -avi,     -atum,     1, 

judge. 
Inlia,  -ae,  F.  1,  Julia, 
Inlius,  -I,  M.  2,  Julius. 
iungo,  iungere,   iQnxI,  iOnctum, 

3,  join, 
Innius,  -1,  M.  2,  a  name, 
instus,  -a,  -umy  just, 
iuvO,  iuvare,  invl,  intum,  1,  help 


302 


Latin-English  Vocabulary 


L.,  for  Lncius. 

Labienus,  -I,  M.  2,  a  name. 

labor,  labOris,  M.  3,  labor ^  work, 

exertion. 
labor,  labi,  lapsus  sum,  3,  slip. 
labOrO,  -are,  -avT,  -a turn,  1,  labor, 

work. 
lacessO,  lacessere,  lacessivi,  la- 

cessitum,  3,  worry. 
laetor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  1,  be  de- 
lighted, rejoice. 
laetus,    -a,    -um,  joyous,    glad, 

happy. 
lapillus,  -1,  M.  2,  pebble. 
latus,  -eris,  N.  3,  side;  lung. 
laudo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  praise. 
legatus,  -1,  M.  2,   ambassador; 

lieutenant. 
legio,  -Onis,  F.3,  legion  (division 

of  an  army), 
lego,    legere,    legi,    lectum,    3, 

pick,  choose;  read. 
lex,  legis,  F.  3,  law,  rule. 
libenter,  Adv.,  willingly. 
licet,   licere,   licuit  and    licitum 

est,  2,  impers.,  be  permitted. 
littera,  -ae,  F.  1,  letter  (of  the 

alphabet).    PL,  a  letter. 
locus,  -1,  M.  2,  place.    PI.  loca, 

locorum,  N.  2. 
longe.  Adv.,  far.    Compar.  lon- 

gius,  Super],  longissime. 
longitndo,  -inis,  F.  3,  length. 
longus,  -a,  -um,  long. 
loquor,    loqul,    locntus    sum,    3, 

talk,  converse. 
LCicanius,  -1,  M.  2,  a  name. 
LQcius,  -1,  M.  2,  a  name. 
Indus,'-!,  M.  2,  play,  sport,  game. 
ICix ,  iGcis ,  F.  3,  light.    Prima  lOx , 

daybreak. 


M.,  for  Marcus. 

magis.  Adv.,  more.    Compar.  of 

magnopere  and  multum,  much, 

539  [638]. 
magister,    -tri,    M.    2,    master 

(=  teacher), 
magnopere.  Adv.,  greatly. 
magnus,  -a,  -um,   great,   large, 

big. 
maior,  maius,    greater,    bigger. 

Compar.    of    magnus,    great, 

630  [635]. 
male.  Adv.,  badly. 
maleficium,  -T,  N.  2,  ivrong -doing. 
malo,  malle,  malul,  ,  irr., 

leant  more,  2')rcfer,  493  [665]. 
malus,  -a,  -um,  bad. 
mane.  Adv.,  in  the  morning. 
maneO,  manere,  mansi,  mansum, 

2,  remain,  continue. 
manus,  -ns,  F.  4,  hand;  band. 
Marcus,  -1,  M.  2,  a  name. 
'  mater,  matris,  F.  3,  mother. 
mattlrO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  make 

ripe;  hasten,  make  haste. 
matnrus,  -a,  -um,  ripe. 
maxime.  Adv.,  in  the  largest  de- 
gree, very  greatly,  exceedingly, 

very.    Superl.    of    magnopere 

and    multum,   greatly,    m^uch, 

539  [638]. 
maximus,     -a,     -um,     greatest, 

largest, biggest; oldest.  Superl. 

of  magnus,  great,  530  [635]. 
mei.  Reflexive,  of  me,  215  [654]. 
medius,  -a,  -um,  middle,  or  the- 

middle-of. 
melior,  melius,  better.    Compar. 

of  bonus,  good,  530  [635]. 
melius.  Adv.,  better.    Compar.  of 

bene,  ivell,  539  [638]. 


Latin-English  Vocabulary 


303 


memini,  -isse,  defective,  remem- 

her. 
memoria,  -ae,  F.  1,  memory. 
meridies,  -er,  M.  5,  midday. 
metus,  -ns,  M.  4,  fear. 
meus,  -a,  -um,  my,  mine. 
'miles,    militis,    M.    3,    soldier, 

256  [617]. 
militaris,  -e,  military.    Ars  mili- 

taris,  art  of  ivar,  tactics. 
mrlle,   indecl.   Adj.,  or  Noun,  a 

thousand.    PI.  as  Noun,  milia, 

-ium,  N.  3.     Mille  passuum  = 

5,000  feet,  or  a  Roman  mile, 
minime,    Adv.,   in    the    smallest 

degree,  not  at  all ;  no.    Superl. 

of  parum,  Utile,  539  [638]. 
minimus,  -a,   -um,   smallest,   or 

very  small.    Superl.  of  parvus, 

small,  530  [635]. 
minor,     minus,      smaller,     less. 

Compar.    of     parvus,     small, 

530  [635]. 
minuO,  minuere,  minui,  minGtum, 

3,  lessen,  diminish. 
minus,  Adv.    less.    Compar.    of 

parum,  little,  539  [638]. 
miror,  -ari,  -atus  sum,'  1,  admire 

[662]. 
miser,  misera,  miserum,  miser- 
able, unhappy,  117  [628]. 
mitto,  mittere,  misi,  missum,  3, 

send;  throw  (a  weapon), 
modo,  Adv.,  just,  only ;  just  now. 
modus,-!,  M.2,  measure;  method, 

way,  manner,  fashion;  kind. 

Eius  modi  (huius  modi),  of  this 

kind,  of  such  a  kind,  such. 
monens,     warning,    Pres.    Act. 

Partic.  of  moneO.    Declension, 

300  [632]. 


moneO,  monere,  monui,  monitum, 
2,  admonish,  warn,  chide,  in- 
struct [657]. 

mOns,  montis,  -ium,  M.  3,  moun- 
tain. 

mora,  -ae,  F.  1,  delay. 

MorinT,  -Orum,  M.  PI.  2,  name  of 
a  Gallic  nation. 

morior,  mori,  mortuus  sum,  3, 
die.   Partic.  mortuus  =dead. 

moror,  -arl,  -atus  sum,  1,  delay. 

mOs,  moris,  M.  3,  custom,  way, 
habit,  manner,  265  [620]. 

moveo,  movere,  mOvi,  mOtum,  2, 
move. 

mox.  Adv.,  soon. 

multittido,  -inis,  F.  3,  multitude, 
great  number,  264  [619]. 

multus,  -a,  -um,  much.  In  PL 
many.  Multum,  Ace.  of  De- 
gree, much;  equivalent  to 
Adv. 

Manatius,  -1,  M.  2,  a  name. 

mCiniO,  -Ire,  -Ivi,  -itum,  4,  con- 
struct, fortify. 

mQnitiO,  -Onis,  F.3,  fortification. 

mQrus,  -I,  M.  2,  ivall. 

mCltb,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  change, 
alter. 

nam.  Con j., /or. 

natGra,  -ae,  F.  1,  nature. 

-ne,  interrogative  enclitic,  imply- 
ing nothing  about  the  answer. 

ne,  as  Adv.,  not;  as  Conj.,  that 
not,  lest.  Ne  .  .  .  quidem,  not 
even. 

nee,  see  neque. 

necesse,  indecl.  neut.  Noun, 
necessity,  in  predicate, = neces- 
sary/. 


304 


Latin-English  Vocabulary 


neglego,  -legere,  -lexi,  -lectum, 
3,  neglect,  pass  by,  disregard, 

negO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  say  no^ 
say  .  .  .  not,  deny,  refuse. 

negotium,  -I,  N.  2,  business,  oc- 
cupation. 

nemo,  Dat.  nemini,  Ace.  nemi- 
^.^x^  nem  (Gen.  and  Abl.  supplied 
nnlllus  and  nnllo),  M.  3,  no 
nobod:ffr^ — — ^^'^     "^— — ? 

neque  or  nee,  Conj.,  neither  or 
nor.  Neque  .  .  .  neque  .  .  .  , 
neither  .  .  .  nor  .  .  . 

Nervii,  -Orum,  name  of  a  Gallic 
nation.  Also  Sing.  Nervius,  a 
Nervian. 

neu  (also  neve),  Conj.,  and  not, 
nor.  Corresponds  to  ne,  as 
nee  to  nOn. 

neuter,  neutra,  neutrum,  neither 
(of  two),  129  [642]. 

nihil,  indecl.  Noun,  nothing. 

nimis.  Adv.,  too  much,  too. 

nisi,  Conj.,  unless.  Without  a 
verb  =  except. 

noeeo,  noeere,  noeui,  nocitum,  2, 
be  hurtful  to,  hurt,  injure. 
Verb  of  Quality,  taking  Dat. 

noeto.  Adv.,  at  night,  by  night. 

nolo,  nolle,  nolul, ,  irr.,  not 

want,  be  unwilling,  493  [665]. 

nomen,  nOminis,  N.  3,  name, 
264:  [619]. 

nOn,  Adv.,  not. 

nOndum,  Adv.,  not  yet. 

nOnne,  not?  interrog.  Adv.,  im- 
plying "yes." 

nOnnGllus,  -a,  -um,  some.  In  PL, 
some,  several,  not  a  few.  De- 
clined like  ntillus,  129  [642]. 

nOnnumquam,  Adv.,  sometimes. 


nOseO,  ijOscere,  nOvi,  nOtum,  3, 
get  acquainted  with,  come  to 
know,  learn. 

noster,  nostra,  nostrum,  owr. 

novus,  -a,  -um,  new. 

nox,  noctis,  -ium,  F.  3,  night, 
271  [622]. 

nQllus,-a,-um,  non£,  no,  129  [642]. 

num,  interrog.  Adv.,  implying 
"no." 

numerus,  -i,  M.  3,  number. 

numquam.  Adv.,  never. 

nune.  Adv.,  now. 

nnntio,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  an- 
nounce. 

nQntius,  -i,  M.  2,  messenger ;  mes- 


nnper.  Adv.,  recently, 

0, 0,  or  Oh  (often  used  in  address). 
ob.    Prep,   with    Ace,    against, 

before;  on  account  of . 
obeo,  oblre,  obil  (or  -ivi),  obitum, 

irr.,  attend  to,  503  [667]. 
observO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  ob- 
serve. 
obsidio,  -Onis,  P.  3,  siege. 
obsto,  obstare,  obstiti,  obstata- 

rus,  1,  oppose,  prevent. 
obstruO,  -struere,  -strtixl,  -strQe- 

tum,  3,  block  up,  obstruct. 
oeeasio,     Onis,   F.    3,    occasion, 

opportunity. 
oeeldo,  -eldere,  -elsT,  -elsum,  3, 

hill. 
oeeupo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  take 

possession  of,  occupy. 
oceurrO,  -eurrere,  -currl  and  -eu- 

eurrl,  -cursum,  3,  meet. 
oetavus,  -a,  -um,  eighth. 
oculus,  -1,  M.  2,  eye. 


Latin-English  Vocabulary 


305 


officium,  -T,  N.  2,  office,  duty. 

omnlnO,  Adv.,  in  all,  at  all. 

omnis, -e,  all,  the  whole;  every, 
any. 

opinio,  -Onis,  F.  3,  opinion,  ex- 
pectation. 

oppidum,  -I,  N.  2,  town. ' 

oppugnatiO,-Onis,  F.  3,  siege. 

oppugnO,  -are,  -avl,  -atum,  1, 
besiege. 

ops,  opis,  F.  3,  help.  In  PL,  re- 
sources, means. 

optime.  Adv.,  in  the  best  way, 
best.  Superl.  of  bene,  well, 
639  [638]. 

optimus,  -a,  -um,  best.  Superl. 
of  bonus,  good,  530  [G35]. 

opto,  -are,  -a VI,  -atum,  1,  wish, 
hope. 

opus,  operis,  N.  3,  work,  task. 
With  est  and  Ah\.= there  is 
need  of. 

OratiO,-Onis,  F.  3,  speech,  argu- 
ment. 

orbis,  -is,  -ium,  M.  3,  circle. 
In  orbem  consists,  take  posi- 
tion in  a  circle. 

OrdO,  Ordinis,  M.  3,  order,  rank. 

orior,  orlrl,  ortus  sum,  4  (in 
several  forms,  3),  rise,  arise. 

OrO,  -are,  -avl,  -atum,  1,  beg,  en- 
treat. 

OS,  Oris,  N.3,  mouth;  face,  coun- 
tenance. 

ostendO,  pstendere,  ostendi,  os- 
tentum,  3,  show. 

Otium,  Oti,  N.  2,  ease,  repose; 
leisure ;  peace, 

paene.  Adv.,  almost. 
pains,  -Gdis,  F.  3,  swamp. 


par,  par.  Gen.  paris,  equal,  even. 

paratus,  -a,  -um  (from  parO), pre- 
pared, =  ready. 

parcO,  parcere,  pepercl  or  pars!, 
parsnrus,  3,  spare.  Word  of 
Attitude,  taking  Dat. 

parO,  -are,  -avl,  -atum,  1,  prepare, 
get. 

pars,  partis,  -ium,  F.  3,  part; 
party,  side  (in  this  .sense 
either  Sing,  or  PI.). 

partim,  Adv.,par<Z2/- 

partior,  -irl,  -itus  sum,  4,  share 

[662]. 
parum.  Adv.,  little,  too  little. 
parvus,  -a,  -um,  small,  little. 
passus,  -OS,  M.  4, pace  (with  both 

feet;  =about  five  English  feet), 
pater,  patris,  M.  3,  father,  257 

[618]. 
patior,  patT,  passus  sum,  3,  suf- 
fer, allow,  permit. 
pauci,  -ae,  -a,  few,  a  few  {only). 
paulatim.    Adv.,  little   by  little, 

gradually. 
paulisper.  Adv.,  a  little  {while), 

for  a  little  {while). 
paulum,  -1,  N.  2,  a  little.     Paulo, 

{by)  a  little,  Abl.  of  Measure  of 

Difference. 
pecCinia,  -ae,  F.  1,  money. 
peior,  peius,  worse.  Compar.  of 

malus,  bad,  530  [635]. 
pello,    pellere,   pepulr,    pulsum, 

3,  drive  {out  or  off). 
per.   Prep,   with  Ace,  through, 

during. 
perdGco,  -dacere,  -dCixi,  -ductum, 

3,  prolong. 
perfugio,  -ere,  -fOgl,   -fugitQrus, 

3,  take  refuge,  desert. 


306 


Latin-English  Vocabulavjj 


perlculosus,    -a,     -um,   full    of 

danger,  dangerous. 
perlculum,  -I,  N.  2,  peril,  danger. 
peritus,  -a,  -um,  having  experi- 
ence   (of),    experienced     [in). 

Takes  Objective  Genitive. 
permoveO,  -movere,  -mOvT,  -mO- 

tum,  2,  move  deeply. 
perscribO,      -scrlbere,     -scrlpsi, 

-scriptum,  3,  write  fully,  write 

out. 
persevere ,  -are,  -avi,  -a turn,  1, 

persevere. 
persuadeO,-suadere,-suasT,  -sua- 

sum ,  2,  persuade.    Takes  Dat. ; 

see  suadeO. 
perterreo,  -terrere,  -terruT,  -ter- 

ritum,  2,  thoroughly  frighten, 

terrify. 
pertineO,  -tinere,  -tinui,  -tentum, 

2,  reach  {to)\  pertain  (to). 
perturbs,    -are,  -avi,    -a turn,  1, 

throw  into  confusion. 
pervenio,   -venire,   -venl,    -ven- 

tum,  4,  arrive. 
p6s,  pedis,  M.  3,  foot. 
pessimus,   -a,   -um,    Superl.    of 

malus,  bad,  630  [635]. 
peto,  petere,  petlvi,  petitum,  3, 

aim  at,  attack ;  seek,  ask. 
pietas,    -atis,     P.    3,     loyalty, 

patriotism. 
piger,  pigra,  pigrum,  lazy,  117 

[628]. 
pllum ,  -I,  N.  2,  Javelin.    A  heavy 

missile,  about  six  feet  long, 
pingo,  pingere,  pinxl,  plctum,  3, 

paint. 
placeo,  placere,  placul,  placitum, 

2,  be  pleasing,  please.     Word 

of  Quality,  taking  Dat. 


Plancus,  -I,  M.  2,  a  name. 

pltirimum,  most,  a  great  deal. 
Ace.  of  Degree,  equivalent  to 
an  Adv.  Superl.  of  multum, 
much,  539  [638]. 

pltirimus,  -a,  -um,  most,  a  great 
deal.  PI.  a  great  many.  Su- 
perl. of  multus,  much,  630 
[635]. 

pins,  Gen.  plnris,  more.  Declen- 
sion, 327  [633].  Compar.  of 
multus,  much,  630  [635]. 

pins,  more,  Ace.  of  Degree, 
equivalent  to  an  Adv.  Corn- 
par,  of  multum,  639  [638]. 

poUiceor,  -lic6ri,  -licitus  sum,  2, 
promise. 

Pompei,  -Orum,  M.  2,  Pompeii,  a 
town. 

pOnO,  pOnere,  posuT,  positum,  3, 
place. 

pons,  pontis,  -ium,  M.  3,  bridge. 

populus,-!,  M.  2,peopZe. 

porta,  -ae,  F.  1,  gate. 

possum,  posse,  potui,  ,  irr., 

be  able,  can.  With  plQs,  etc.,  be 
more  able,  can  do  more,  etc., 
486  [664]. 

post  j  Prep,  with  Ace,  behind.  As 
Adv.,  afterward,  after,  later. 

posted..  Adv.,  after  that,  after- 
ward (postea  quam,  =  post 
quam). 

posterior,  -ius,  later.  Compar.  of 
posterus,  following,  631  [636]. 

posterus,  -a,  -um,  following, 
next. 

postquam,  Conj.,  after. 

postremus,  -a,  -um,  or  postumus, 
-a,  -um,  latest.  Superl.  of 
posterus,  following,  631  [636]. 


Latin-English  Vocabulary 


307 


potens,  -ens,  Gen.  potentis,  hav- 
ing power,  influential. 

potestas,  -atis,  F.  3,  power,  con- 
trol, opportunity. 

potior,  potlrl,  potltus  sum,  4, 
gain  possession  of,  get,  pos- 
sess.   Takes  Abl. 

potius.  Adv.,  preferably,  rather. 

prae.  Prep,  with  Abl.,  in  front 

of. 

praecedo,  -cedere,  -cessT,  -ces- 
sum,  3,  precede. 

praeceptum,  -I,  N.  2,  direction. 

praecipio,  -cipere,  -cepi,  -ceptum, 
3,  order,  direct. 

praecO,  -Onis,  M.  3,  herald. 

praeficio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fectum, 
3,  put  in  command  {of}. 

praemium,  -i,  N.  2,  reward. 

praesentia,  -ae,  F.  1,  presence. 

praesum,  -esse,  -fui,  -futGrus,  irr., 
be  in  command  over;  com- 
mand; be  present  [655].  Parti- 
ciple praesens,  being  present; 
as  Adj.,  present. 

praeter,  Prep,  with  Ace,  beside, 
along,  past;  besides. 

pridie.  Adv.,  the  day  before. 

prlmO,  Adv.,  at  first. 

primum.  Adv.,  first,  in  the  first 
place.  Superl.  of  prius,  before, 
639  [638]. 

primus,  -a,  -um,  Superl.  of  prior, 
first,  531  [636]. 

prior,  prius,  former,  first;  in 
front,  leading.  Compar.;  cf. 
prae  and  pro,  531  [636]. 

pristinus,  -a,  -um,  pristine,  for- 
mer. 

prius,  Compar.  Adv.,  before,  first, 
sooner,  539  [638]. 


prius  quam  or  priusquam,  Conj., 
sooner  than,  before. 

pro,  Prep,  wdth  Abl.,  in  front  of; 
hence  as  a  representative  of, 
in  behalf  of,  for,  in  return  for; 
in  place  of,  as. 

probo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  ap- 
prove. 

prOcedo,  -cedere,  -cessT,  -cessum, 
3,  proceed,  advance. 

procul.  Adv.,  at  a  distance,  from 
a  distance. 

prOcurrO,  -currere,  -curri  and 
-cucurrT,  -cur sum,  3,  run  for- 
ward, charge. 

prOdeO,  -rre,  -ii  (or  -Ivi),  -itum, 
irr.,  come  forth,  503  [667]. 

prOdOco,  -dtlcere,  -dQxi,  -ductum, 
3,  lead  forth ;  draw  up,  mus- 
ter. 

proelium,  -i,  N.  2,  battle. 

profectio,  -Onis,  F.  3,  departure. 

proficlscor,  proficisci,  profectus 
sum,  3,  set  out,  depart. 

prOgredior,  prOgredi,  prOgressus 
sum,  3,  go  forward,  advance. 

prohibeO,  -hibere,  -hibuT,  -hibi- 
tum,  2,  prohibit,  prevent,  keep 
{from).    ' 

prOmptus,  -a,  -um,  ready  (in 
sense  of  ready  to  do  a  thing). 

prOntintiO,  -are,  -avI,  -atum,  1, 
proclaim. 

prope.  Prep,  with  Ace,  near. 

proper 0,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1, 
hurry,  hasten. 

propinquus,  -a,  -um,  near,  neigh- 
boring. Word  of  Relation, 
taking  Dat. 

propior,  -ius,  nearer.  Compar.; 
cf.  prope,  near,  531  [636]. 


308 


Latin-English  Vocabulary 


propius,     nearer,     Com  par.     of 

prope,  near,  539  [638].    Adv., 

used  also  as  Prep, 
propter,  Prep,  with  Ace,  along, 

beside;  on  account  of, 
prOsequoF,  -sequi,  -sectltus  sum, 

3,  follow  after,  pursue. 
prOvideO,  -videre,  -vldr,  -visum,  2, 

foresee,  provide, 
proxime,  Adv.,  nearest,  next.  Su- 

perl.  of  prope,  near,  539  [638]. 
proximus,  -a,  -um,  nearest,  close 

by.     Superl.  of   prope,    near, 

531  [636]. 
poblicus,  -a,  -unif  public, 
Pablius,  -I,  M.  2,  a  name, 
puella,  -ae,  F.  1,  girl. 
puer,  -1,  M.  2,  boy,  111  [616]. 
pugna,  -ae,  F.  1,  fight. 
pugno,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  fight. 
pulcher,-chra,  -thrum, beautiful. 
pulvis,  pulveris,  M.  3,  dust,  265 

[620]. 
putO,-are,  -avI,  -atum,  1,  think. 

Q.,  for  Quintus. 

quadringenti,  -ae,  -a,  four  hun- 
dred. 

quaero,  quaerere,  quaesivl,  quae- 
sltum,  3,  inquire,  seek,  ask. 

quam.  Adv.,  how,  as,  than.  Thus: 
quam  multi?  how  many?  quam 
din,  as  long  as;  tam  quam,  so 
{much)  as,  as  (much)  as ;  magis 
quam,  more  than;  minus 
quam,  Zess  than.  With  Superl., 
as  ...  as  possible. 

quamquam,  Conj.,  although. 

quando,  Conj.,  since,  as. 

quantus,  -a,  -um,  Interrog.  and 
Rel.,  how  great,  as  great  as. 


quarg,  Rel.  and  Interrog.  Adv., 
for  which  reason,  toherefore, 
why. 

quartus,  -a,  -um,  fourth. 

quasi,  Conj.  and  Adv.,  as  if,  al- 
most. 

quattuor,  indecl.  Ad].,  four. 

-que,  enclitic  Conj.,  and.  Repre- 
sents closer  connection  than  et. 

qui,  quae,  quod,  as  Interrog. 
Adj.,  what 9  which P  as  Rel. 
Pron.,  who,  which,  that,  184 
[649]. 

qui  ?  Adv.,  how  f 

quia,  Conj.,  because. 

quicumque,  quaecumque,  quod- 
cumque,  whoever,  whatever, 
192  [649,  a]. 

quidam,  quaedam,  quoddam  or 
quiddam,  a  certain,  193  [650]. 

quidem,  Adv.,  indeed,  at  any 
rate.  Ne  .  .  .  quidem,  not  even. 

quin,  Conj.,  by  which  not,  that 
not 

quindecim,  indecl.  Adj.,  fifteen. 

quinquaginta,  indecl.  Adj.,  fifty. 

quinque,  indecl.  Adj.,  five. 

Quintus,  -T,  M.  2,  a  name. 

quis,  quid  (Adj.  forms  qui,  quae, 
quod).  Interrogative,  who  9 
what?  which?  184  [649]. 

quis,  quid  (Adj.  forms  qui,  qua, 
quod),  Indefinite,  any  (one), 
some  (one),  207, 6  [653,  a].  Used 
chiefly  with  si,  nisi,  ng,  and 
interrogative  and  relative 
words. 

quispiam,  quaepiam,  quidpiam 
(quodpiam),  any,  200,  c  [652,  a]. 

quisquam,  quicquam  (quidquam), 
any  at  all,  199  [651]. 


Latin-English  Vocabulary 


309 


quisque,  quaeque,  quidque  (quod- 

que)    each,    every    one^    200 

[652]. 
quo,  by  which,  in   order  that. 

Conj.,  used  with  Comparatives, 
quoad,  Conj.,  iintil. 
quod,  Conj.,  that;  as  to  the  fact 

that,  as  regards ;  because. 
quOminus,  Conj.,  by  which    the 

less,  that  not. 
quoniam,  Conj.,  since. 
quoque,  Conj.,  also,  too.  Postpos. 
quotiens.  Adv.  and  Conj.,  how 

often,  as  often  as. 

ratio,  -onis,  F.  3  (thinking; 
hence),  theory,  science;  man- 
ner. RatiOnem  habeO,  I  have 
regard  for. 

recido,  -cidere,  -cidl,  -castirus,  3, 
fall  back;  be  reduced  to. 

recipio,  recipere,  recepl,  recep- 
tum,  3,  take  back.  Me  recipio, 
/  return,  I  retreat. 

redncO,  -dQcere,  -dGxi,  -ductum, 
3,  lead  back. 

refero,  -ferre,  -tuli,  -latum,  irr., 
bring  back.  Pedem  referO, 
retreat,  retire,  522  [668]. 

refugio,  -fugere,  -fngl,  -fugita- 
rus,  3,  run  back,  retreat. 

regina,  -ae,  P.  1,  queen. 

regio,  -Onis,  F.  3,  region. 

regnum,  -I,  N.  2,  kingship,  king- 
dom. 

rego,  regere,  rexi,  rectum,  3, 
direct,  guide,  rule. 

relinquO,  -linquere,  -liqui,  -lic- 
tum,  3,  leave. 

reliquus,  -a,  -um,  remaining, 
left.    As  Subst.  in  PL,  the  rest. 


RemI,  -Orum,  M.  PL  2,  name  of  a 
Gallic  nation. 

remitto,  -mittere,  -mrsr,  -mis- 
sum,  3,  send  back. 

repentlnus,  -a,  -um,  sudden. 

reprehendo,  -hendere,  -hendi, 
-hensum,  3,  censure. 

res,  rei,  F.  5,  thing,  matter.  Res 
mrlitaris,  warfare,  395   [625]. 

resisto,  resistere,  restiti,  resti- 
tdrus,  3,  make  a  stand;  resist, 
make  resistance.  Word  of  Atti- 
tude, taking  Dat. 

respicio,  -spicere,  -spexl,  -spec- 
tum,  3,  look  back,  look  around. 

respondeO,  -spondere,  -spondi, 
-sponsum,  2,  respond,  answer. 

revertor,  reverti  (Infin.),  reverti 
(Perf.),  reversum,  3,  return. 
Not  deponent  in  Perf. 

rex,  regis,  M.  3,  king,  256  [617]. 

Rhenus,  -I,  M.  2,  the  Rhine. 

rivus,  -1,  M.  2,  stream. 

robur,  roboris  ,N.  3,  oaAj ;  s^rengr^/i, 
257  [618]. 

rogo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  ask,  re- 
quest. 

Roma,  -ae,  F.  1,  Rome. 

ROmanus,  -a,  -um,  Roman. 

Roscius,  -1,  M.  2,  a  name. 

rumpo,  rumpere,  rtlpi,  ruptum,3, 
break. 

rnrsus.  Adv.,  back,  again, 

rGs,  rtlris,  N.  3,  country. 

rlisticus,-a,-um,  rustic,  country. 

Sabinus,  -I,  M.  2,  a  name, 
saepe.  Adv.,  often.   Compar.  sae- 

pius,  Superl.  saepissime,  539 

[638]. 
saitem.  Adv.,  at  least. 


310 


Latin-English  Vocabulary 


sains,  -Dtis,  F.  3,  salvation, 
safety. 

satis,  Adv.,  and  indecl.  Noun, 
sufficiently,  enough.  In  predi- 
cate, =  Adj.,  enough,  sufficient. 

satisfacio,  -facere,  -feci, -factum, 
3,  do  enough  (for),  satisfy. 

saucius,  -a,  -um,  wounded. 

saxum,  -T,  N.  2,  stone,  rock. 

schola,  -ae,  F.  1,  school. 

scindo,  scindere,  scidi,  scissum, 
3,  tear,  tear  down. 

scio,  scire,  scivT,  scitum,  4,  know. 

scrlbo,  scribere,  scrlpsl,  scrip- 
turn,  3,  ivrite. 

scQtum,  -I,  N.  2,  shield. 

se  and  sese.  Ace.  and'Abl.,  Sing, 
and  PI.,  of  sul. 

secundum,  Prep,  with  Ace,  along. 

sed,  Conj.,  but. 

semper,  Adv.,  always. 

sententia,  -ae,  F.  1,  feeling,  idea, 
view. 

s^ntiO,  sentire,  sensi,  sensum,  4, 
perceive  (by  the  senses);  feel, 
think.  Sentio  de,  become 
aware  of. 

septem,  indecl.  Adj.,  seven. 

Septimus,  -a,  -um,  seventh. 

sequor,  sequi,  secGtus  sum,  3, 
follow^  follow  up  [662]. 

sermo,  -Onis,  M.  3,  talk,  conver- 
sation, 264  [619]. 

serO,  Adv.,  late,  too  late. 

serva,  -ae,  F.  1  (woman  or  girl) 
servant  or  slave,  86  [614]. 

Servius,  -I,  M.  2,  Servius,  a  name. 

servO,  -are,  -avl,  -atum,  1,  pre- 
serve, save,  guard,  keep. 

servus,  -I,  M.  2,  (man  or  boy)  .96?'- 
vant  or  slave,  107  [615]. 


seu,  see  sive. 

sex,  indecl.  Adj.,  six. 

sexaginta,  indecl.  Adj.,  sixty. 

Sextius,  -I,  M.  2,  a  name. 

Sextus,  -I,  M.  2,  a  name. 

si,  Conj.,  if. 

sibi,  Dat.  Sing,  and  PL  of  sul. 

sic.  Adv.,  in  this  way,  thus,  so. 

signum,  -i,  N.   2,   sign,  signal; 

standard.      Converto    signa, 

turn     the    standards    about, 

wheel. 
silva,  -ae,  F.  1,  wood,  forest. 
similis,  -e,  like,  similar. 
simul.  Adv.,  simultaneously,  at 

the  same  time,  together.  Simul 

atque,  as  soon  as. 
simulatio,  -Onis,  F.  3,  pretense. 
simulO,    -are,     -avl,     -atum,     1, 

simulate,  pretend. 
sine.  Prep,  with  Abl.,  ivithout. 
singull,  -ae,  -a,  single,  one  at  a 

time;  one  each. 
sinister,  -tra,  -trum,  left.  Sinis- 
tra, -ae,   as  Noun,   F.  1,  left 

hand. 
sIve    or    seu,   Conj.,  or    if,   or; 

sIve   ...   sIve  .  .  .   (seu   .  .  . 

seu  .  .  .),  whether  .  .  .  or  .  .  . 
socius,  -I,  M.  2,  associate,  ally. 
soleO,    solere,    solitus    sum,    2, 

be  accustomed. 
solum.  Adv.,  only.     NOn   solum 

.  .  .  ,  sed  etiam  .  .  .  ,  not  only 

.  .  .  but  also  .  .  . 
solus,  -a,   -um,  sole,  alone,  129 

[042]. 
sonus,  -I,  M.  2,  sound. 
sorer,  sororis,  F.  3,  sister. 
spatium,  -I,  N. 2,  space,  distance; 

period  (of  time). 


Latin-English   Vocabnlary 


311 


specto,  -are,  -avl,  -atum,  1,  look 

aty  witness,  watch. 
sperO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  hope. 
spes,  -el,  F.  5,  hope.     In   spem 

venio,  I  come  to  hope. 
splendidus,  -a,  -um,  splendid. 
statim,  Adv.,    irriinediately ,    at 
'  once. 
statuO ,  statuere ,  statu!,  statQtum , 

3,  se^  up;  decide. 

sto,  stare,  stetr,  stattlrus,  1, 
stand. 

stramentum,  -I,  N.  2,  siraiv. 

strepitus,  -ns,  M.  4,  noise. 

studeO,  studere,   studul,  , 

2,  be  zealous  for,  be  eager  for, 
be  devoted  to;  study.  Word 
of  Attitude,  taking  Dat. 

studium,  studi,  N.  2,  zeal,  inter- 
est; study. 

suadeO,  suadere,  suasi,  suasum, 
2,  advise,  urge.  Takes  Dat., 
because  it  originally  meant 
make  agreeable  to.  Cf.  suavis, 
agreeable. 

suavis,  -e,  sweet,  agreeable. 
Word  of  Quality,  taking  Dat. 

sub.  Prep.,  under.  With  Ace.  of 
Motion,  and  Abl.  of  Rest. 

subito,  Adv.,  suddenly. 

subsidium,  -i,  N.  2,  reserve,  rein- 
forcement, help. 

subveniO,  -venire,  -veni,  -ventum, 

4,  co7ne  to  aid. 

sui.  Reflexive,  of  himself,  herself, 

itself,  themselves,  215  [654]. 
sum,  esse,  fui,  futnrus,   irr.,  be 

[655]. 
sunjmus,  -a,  -um,  highest.     Su- 

perl.  of  superior,  higher,  531 

[636]. 


snmO,  sCimere,  sGmpsi,  sDmptum, 
3,  take  up,  take,  assume. 

super.  Prep,  with  Ace,  above. 

superior,  -ius,  higher;  superior; 
formet.  Compar.  of  superus, 
above,  531  [636]. 

superO,  -are,  -avl,  -atum,  1,  over- 
come, defeat,  conquer. 

superus,  -a,  -um,  above. 

supremus,  -a,  -um,  highest. 
Super),  of  superior,  higher, 
531  [636]. 

susplcio,  -Onis,  P.  3,  suspicion. 

suspicor,  -arl,  -atus  sum,  1, 
suspect. 

sustentO,  -are,  -avl,  -atum,  1, 
sustain. 

sustineO,  -tinere,  -tinul,  -tentum, 

2,  sustain. 
suus,-a,-um,ReflexivePo.ssessive 

Adj.,  his  (own),  her  {own),  its 
{own),  their  {own). 

T.,  for  Titus. 

tabernaculum,  -I,  N.  2,  tent, 

talis,  -e,  such. 

tam.  Adv.,  so. 

tamen,    Conj.    and    Adv.,    still, 

nevertheless,  yet. 
tandem.  Adv.,  at  last. 
tango,  tangere,   tetigi,   tactum, 

3,  touch. 

tantulus,  -a,  -um,  so  small,  so 
little. 

tantummodo.  Adv.,  merely. 

tantus,-a,-um,  so  great,  so  much. 

tarde.  Adv., sloivly,  late.  Compar. 
tardius,  Superl.  tardissime, 
538  [637]. 

tardus, -a,  -um,  slow,  tardy;  dis- 
inclined. 


312 


Latin-English  Vocabulary 


tegO,   tegere,    texi,    tectum,  3, 

cover;    shield,    hide,   protect 

[658]. 
telum,  -1,  N.  2,  missile. 
temerarius,      -a,      -um,      rash, 

thoughtless. 
temere,  Adv.,   rashly,    thought- 
lessly. 
tempestas,  -atis,  F.  3,  weather; 

had  weather,  storm. 
tempus,  temporis,  N.  3,  time. 
teneO,  tenere,  tenul,  tentuin,   2, 

hold. 
tergum, -T,  N.  2,  hack;   rear  (of 

an  army). 
terreO,  terrere,  terruT,  territum, 

2,  terrify,  frighten. 
terror,    terroris,    M.    3,    terror, 

fright.                                ^ 
tertius,  -a,  -um,  third. 
Trbur,  Tiburis,  N.  3,  TivolL 
timeO,    timere,    timur,    ,    2, 

fear^  he  afraid. 
timor,  -Oris,  M.  3,  fear. 
Titnrius,  -I,  M.  2,  a  name. 
Titus,  -I,  M.  2,  a  name. 
torreO,  torrere,  torrui,  tostum, 

2,  scorch,  hum. 

totus,    -a,    -um,     total,    ichole, 

130  [643]. 
trado,  tradere,  tradidi,  traditum, 

3,  hand  over. 
tradncO,-dticere,  -dtixl,  -ductum, 

3,  lead  across. 
tragula,     -ae,     F.     1,     (Gallic) 

Javelin. 
traho,  trahere,  traxT,  tractum,  3, 

draw,  drag;   drag  out. 
tranquillus,  -a,  -um,  tranquil. 
trans,   Prep,  with  Ace,   across, 

heyond. 


transeO,  -Ire,  -il  (or  -Ivi),  -itum, 

irr.,  go  across,  cross  over,  go 

over,  503  [667]. 
transgredior,     -gredl,    -gressus 

sum,  3,  cross. 
TrebOnius,  -i,  M.  2,  a  name, 
trepido,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  he  in 

aflutter,  lose  one^s  head. 
tres,  tria.  Gen.  trium,  three. 
Treverl,  -Orum,  M.  Pi.  2,  name 

of  a  Gallic  nation.    Also  Sing., 

Trevir,  a  Treviran. 
tribnnus,  -r,  M.  2,  trihune. 
triplex,  -ex.  Gen.  -icis,  triple. 
triumphus,  -i,  M.  2,  triumph. 
ta,  tui,  thou,  you  (in  speaking  to 

a  single  person),  214  [654]. 
tuT,  Reflexive,  of  thy  self ,  of  your- 
self, 215  [654]. 
tum,  Adv.,  at  that  time,  then. 
tumultus,  -OS,  M.  4,  disturhance. 
tumulus,  -T,   M.  2,   mound,   low 

hill. 
tunc.  Adv.,  then,  a  stronger  tum. 
turba,  -ae,  F.  1,  crowd,  moh, 
turris,   -is,  -ium,    F.    3,    tower, 

278  [623]. 
tutus,  -a,  -um,  safe. 
tuus,  -a,  -um,  thy,  thine,  your, 

yours  (in  speaking  to  a  single 

person). 

ubi.  Adv.,  where;  when. 
nllus,  -a,  -um,  any,  129  [642]. 
ulterior,  -ius,  on  the  other  side, 

farther.     Compar.,  531  [636]. 
ultimus,-a,-um,/ar'^/iesf.  Superl. 

of  ulterior,  farther,  531  [636]. 
ultra.  Prep,  with  Ace,  heyond; 

on  the  other  side  of. 
umquam.  Adv.,  ever. 


Latin-English  Vocabulary 


313 


Gna,  Adv.,  in  unison,  together. 
unde,  Adv.,  from  what,  whence; 

out  of  what. 
tlndecimus,  -a,  -um,  eleventh. 
undique,  Adv.,  on  all  sides. 
dniversus,  -a,  -um,  all  (without 

exception). 
Gnus,  -a,  -um,    one,    only,   129 

[642]. 
urbs,  -is,  -ium,  F.  3,  city. 
tisus,  -ns,    M.  4,    use;    experi- 
ence. 
ut  or  utl,  Conj.,  in  which  way, 

as;  when;  whereby,  in  order 

that,  that;  so  that. 
uter,  utra,  utrum j  which  (of  two)? 

130  [643j. 
uterque,  utraque,  utrumque,  each 

(of  two).      Declined  like  uter, 

+  -que. 
utl,  see  ut. 
utinam,    would    that.     Particle 

often  used  in  wishes, 
titer,    Oti,    nsus    sum,    3,    use. 

Takes  Abl. 

vagor,  vagari,  vagatus   sum,  1, 

roam,  wander  about. 
valeo,  -ere,  -uT,   -itnrus,    2,   be 

strong  or  powerful,  be  tceil. 
validior,  -ius,  stronger.   Compar. 

of  validus,  strong. 
validus,  -a,  -um,  strong. 
vallis,  -is,  -ium,  F.  3,  valley. 
vallum,  -1,  N.  2,  wall,  rampart. 
vel .  .  .  vel  .  .  .  ,  Conj.,  either  .  .  . 

or  .  .   .   (where    a    choice    is 

offered), 
velociter.  Adv.,  swiftly. 
venio,  venire,  veni,  ventum,  4, 

come. 


verbum,  -i,  N.  2,  word. 

vereor,  vereri,  veritus-  sum,  2, 

fear,  respect  [662], 
vero.  Adv.,  in  truth,  really,  in- 
deed, in  fact.    Often  merely 

emphasizes;   to  be  translated 

by  emphasis  of  voice, 
versor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  1,  keep 

turning,  hover;    be  busy,   be 

engaged. 
VerticO,  -Onis,  M.  3,  a  name, 
verto,  vertere,  vertT,  versum,  3, 

turn,  change. 
verus,  -a,  -um,  true,  real. 
vescor,  vesci, ,  3,  feed  one- 
self with,  live  on ;  eat.    Takes 

Abl. 
vester,    vestra,    vestrum,    your 

(in  speaking  to  two  or  more 

persons), 
vestrum,  -tri,  of  you.   Gen.  PI. 

of  tQ. 
veto,  vetare,  vetui,  vetitum,  1, 

forbid.    Takes  Infinitive, 
vetus,  -us,  old;   old-fashioned, 

280  [629]. 
via,  -ae,  F.  1,  way,  street,  road. 
victor,     -Oris,      M..     3,     victor, 

257  [618]. 
victoria,  -ae,  F.  1,  victory. 
video,    videre,    vidl,    visum,    2, 

see. 
videor,  passive   of  video,  seem, 

seem  good. 
vigilia,  -ae,  F.  1,  watch,  vigil. 
viginti,  indecl.  Adj.,  twenty. 
villa,  -ae,  F.  1,  villa. 
vincO,   vincere,   vicl,  victum,  3, 

vanquish,  conquer,  win. 
vir,  virl,  JVE.  2,  man.  111  [616]. 

(Implies  compliment;  cf.homo.) 


314 


Latin-English   Vocabulary 


virtns,    -ntis,   F.  3,    manliness, 

courage^  prowess. 
vis,  VIS,  F.  3,  force,  violence; 

P].    vires,     virium,     strength^ 

826  [626]. 
vita,  -ae,  F.  1,  life. 
vix.  Adv.,  scarcely,  hardly. 
vocO,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1,  call. 


volo,  velle,  volul, ,  irr.,  want, 

will,  493  [665]. 
voluntas,  -atis,  F.  3,  icilL 
Volusenus,  -I,  M.  2,  ^  name. 
vOx,  vOcis,  F.  3,  voice. 
vulnerO,    -are,    -avL    -atum,     1, 

icound. 
vulnus,  vulneris,  N.  3,  wound. 


EARLY  WALL  ANJ)  CITY  GATE,  ALATRI 
In  the  mountains,  southeast  of  Rome 


ENGLISH-LATIN   VOCABULARY 


The  references  are  to  sections.    Figures  in  brackets  refer  to  the  Sum- 
mary of  Forms. 


a,  an,  not  translated. 

ability,  ingenium,  ingeni,  N.  2. 

(be)  able,  possum,  posse,  potui, 

irr.,  485  [664]. 
about,  de  with  Ahl. 
(be)  about  to,  expressed  by  Fut. 

Act.  Partic.  with  sum. 
(be)  absent,  absum,  abesse,  afui, 

afuturus  {also  abful,    abfutu- 

rus),  irr.  [655]. 
accept,    accipio,    -cipere,    -cepi, 

-ceptum,  3. 
accomplish,  efficio,  -ficere,  -feci, 

-factum,  3. 
according    to,  Abl.   (of  certain 

words,  455,  a),  or  de  or  ex, 

loith  Ahl. 
(on)   account  of,  ob   or  propter, 

with  Ace. ;    Abl.  of  Cause  or 

Reason. 
accustom,    adsuefacio,     -face  re, 

-feci,  -factum,  3. 
(be)  accustomed,    soleo,    solere, 

solitus  sum,  2. 
ache,  doleo,  dolere,  dolul,  dolitu- 

rus,  2. 
act,    ago,   agere,  egi,  actum,  3; 

facio,  facere,  feci,  factum,  3, 

with  Object. 
admonish,  moneo,  monere,  monui, 

monitum,  2  [657]. 
advance,    progredior,    progredl, 

progressus  sum,  3. 


(give)   advice,   suadeo,    suadere, 

suasi,  suasum,  2,  with  Dat. 
advise,   suadeo,   suadere,  suasI, 

suasum,  2,  with  Dat. 
(be)  afraid  of,  timeo,  timere,  ti- 

mui,    ,    2;   vereor,   vereri, 

veritus  sum,  2  [662]. 
after.  Prep.,  post  with  Ace. ;  after 

this  fashion,  ad  hunc  modum. 
after,  Conj\,  postquam  with  In- 
die, 506  [597,  IV]. 
after  a  while,  post  aliquantum 

temporis. 
after  that,  postea. 
again,  iterum;  rursus. 
against,  contra  with  Ace. 
agreeable,  gratus,  -a,  -um,  with 

Dat. 
aid,  auxilium,  auxili,  N.  2. 
aid,  adiuvo,  -iuvare,  -iuvl;  -iutum, 

1. 
(come  to)  aid,  subvenio,  -venire, 

-veni,  -ventum,  4,  With  Dat. 
aim  at,  peto,  petere,  petivi,  peti- 

tum,  3. 
all,  omnis,  -e;   cunctus,  -a,  -um; 

totus,  -a,  -um,  130  [643]. 
all  (without  exception),  univer- 

sus,  -a,  -um. 
at  all,  omnino. 

allow,  patior,  pati,  passus  sum,  3. 
ally,  socius,  -i,  M.  2. 
almost,  fere. 


315 


316 


English-Latin  Vocabulary 


alone,  solus,  -a,  -um,  129  [642]. 
along,  Prep.f  praeter  with  Ace. ; 

secundum  with  Ace. 
along  (with),  Adv.,  una. 
already,  iam. 
also,       quoque,       postpositive; 

etiam. 
although    (though),    quamquam, 

etsi,   ivith   Indie.;    cum   with 

SubJ. 
always,  semper, 
am,  sum,  esse,  fui,  futurus,  irr. 

[655J. 
am  to  be  ....  ,   expressed  by 

Fut.  Pass,  Partie,  with  sum. 
ambiguous,  duplex,  -ex,  -icis,  293 

[631]. 
Ambiorix,  Ambionx,  -igis,  M.  3. 
ambuscade,  Insidiae,  -arum,  F.  1. 
among,   inter   with  Ace;  apud 

with  Ace. 
and,   et;    both  ....  and,   et  .  .  .  . 

et;  -que,  enclitic ;  atque. 
and  so,  itaque. 
angry,  Iratus,  -a,  -um. 
animal,  animal,  -alls,  -ium,  N.  3, 

270  [621]. 
announce,     nuntio,     -are,     -avi, 

-atum,  1. 
(be)  annoyed,  graver,  -an,  -atus 

sum,  1. 
another,  alius,  -a,  -ud,  130  [643]; 

(of   two)  alter,    -a,  -um,   130 

[643]. 
answer,     respondeo,    -spondere, 

-spondi,  -sponsum,  2. 
anxiety,  cura,  -ae,  P.  1. 
any.  Adj.,   uUus,    -a,    -um,   129 

[642];  aliqul,  -qua,  -quod,  207 

[653];      quispiam,      quaepiam, 

quodpiam,  200,  c  [652,  a];  qui. 


qua,  quod,  Adj.  form  of  Indefi- 
nite quis,  used  with  si,  nisi, 
ne,  etc.,  207,  6  [653,  a]. 

any  one,  any  thing.  Substantive, 
quisquam,quicquam,  199  [651]; 
aliquis,  -quid,  207  [653];  quis- 
piam, quidpiam,  200,  c  [652,  a]; 
quis,  quid,  used  with  si,  nisi, 
ne,  etc.,  207,  6  [653,  a]. 

appoint,  constituo,  -stituere, 
-stitui,  -stitutum,  3. 

approach,  adpropinquo,  -are, 
-avi,  -atum,  1,  with  Dat.;  ac- 
cede, -cedere,  -cessi,  -cessum, 
3,  with  ad  or  propius;  adeo, 
adire,  adil  [or  adivi),  aditum, 
irr.,  503  [667]. 

approve ,  probo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 

are  to  be  ....  ,  see  am  to 
be  ...  . 

argument,  oratio,  -onis,  F.  3. 

arise,  orior,  orlrl,  ortus  sum,  4 
(in  several  forms,  3). 

arm,  bracchium,  -I,  N.  2. 

arm,  armo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 

arms,  arma,  -orum,  N.  2. 

army,  exercitus,  -us,  M.  4;  army 
(on  the  march)  agmen,  -inis, 
N.  3. 

around,  circum.  Prep,  with  Ace, 
and  Adv. 

around  in,  circum  with  Ace. 

arrive,  pervenio,  -venire,  -veni, 
-ventum,  4. 

art,  ars,  artis,  -ium,  F.  3. 

as.  Adv.,  quam;  as  much  .  .  as, 
tam  .  .  .  quam;  as  ...  as 
possible,  quam  with  Superl. 
and  possum,  or  Superl.  only; 
as  much  as  possible,  quam 
maxime;  as  long  as,  quam  diu. 


English-Latin  Vocabulary 


317 


as,  Conj.,  {=in  the  way  in  which, 
just  as)ut  with  Indie.  ;(= when) 
utwith  Indie.  ;{=since)qusind6 
with  Indie. ;  cum  with  SubJ. 

ask,  peto,  petere,  petlvi,  petltum, 
3;  quaero,  quaerere,  quaesivl, 
quaesitum,  3;  oro,  -are,  -avi, 
-atum,  1;  rogo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum, 
1. 

assist,  adiuvo,  -iuvare,  -iuvi,  -iu- 
tum,  1. 

assured,  certus,  -a,  -um. 

at,  of  Motion,  in  with  Aec. ;  of 
Rest,m  with  Ahl.  {but  the  Loea- 
tive  of  names  of  towns,  etc.), 
409,  3  [594,  3];  ad  zvith  Ace; 
{of  time)  Abl. 

at  all,  omnino. 

at  any  rate,  quidem,  certe. 

(be)  at  hand,  adsum,  adesse,  ad- 
f ui,  adfuturus,  irr.  [G55]. 

at  last,  denique. 

at  least,  saltern. 

at  night,  noctti. 

at  once,  statim. 

at  that  time,  turn;  tunc. 

at  the  house  of,  a  pud  tcith  Ace. 

athlete,  athleta,  -ae,  M.  1. 

attack,  impetus,  -us,  M.  4. 

attack,  peto,  petere,  petivi,  petl- 
tum, 3;  adgredior,  -gredi,  -gres- 
sus  sum,  3;  attack  (a  fortified 
place),  oppugno,  -are,  -avi, 
-atum,  1. 

attempt,  conor,  -ari,  atus  sum,  1. 

attend  to,  obeo,  obire,  obii  {or 
obivi),  obitum,  irr.,  603  [667]. 

authority,  auctoritas,  -atis,  F.  3. 

await,  exspecto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum, 
1;  maneo,  manere,  mansi,  man- 
sum,  2. 


be  away,  absum,  abesse,  afui, 
afuttirus  {also  abfui,  abfutu- 
rus),  i>r.  [655]. 

away  from,  a  with  Abl. ;  {from 
inside  of)  ex  with  AbL 

bad,  malus,  -a,  -um. 

badly,  male. 

baggage,    impedimenta,    -orum, 

N.  PI.  2. 
band,  manus,  -us,  F.  4. 
barbarian,  barbarus,  -a,  -um. 
(line  of)  battle,  acies,  aciei,  F.  5. 
battle,  proelium,  -I,  N.  2. 
be,  sum,  esse,  ful,  futurus,   irr. 

[655]. 
bear  {arms),  gero,  gerere,  gessi, 

gestum,  3. 
beat,vinco,vincere,vIcI,victum,3. 
beautiful,  pulcher,  -chra, -chrum. 
because,  quod,  quia,  with  Indie.; 

cum  tcith  SubJ. 
before,  ante,  Prep,  with  Aec,  and 

Adv. 
before,  Conj.,  priusquam  or  prius 

quam,  antequam,  with  Indie,  of 

actual  past  act  [597,  III],  and 

Sul'junctive  of  act  anticipated. 
before  that,  before   this,  antea. 
beg,  oro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
begin,  incipio,  -cipere,  -cepi,  -cep- 

tum,  3;   coepi,  coepisse,  coep- 

tum  est,  defective. 
be   here,   adsum,   adesse,   adful, 

adfuturus,  irr.  [655]. 
behind,  post,  Prep,  with  Ace.,  and 

Adv. 
believe,  credo,   credere,   credidi, 

creditum,  3,  with  Dat.  of  the 

person,  or  Aec.  of  the  thing,  or 

both. 


318 


English-Latin   Vocabulary 


be  permitted,  licet,  licere,  licuit 

and  licitum  est,  2,  impersonal, 
beside,  propter  with  Ace. 
besiege,     oppugno,    -are,     -avi, 

-atum,  1. 
best,  optimus,  -a,  -um,  Superl.  of 

bonus,  630  ,[635]. 
better,     AdJ.y     melior,     melius, 

Compar.  of  bonus,  530  [635] ; 

Adv.,  melius,  Compar.  of  bene, 

539  [638]. 
between,  inter  wiih  Ace. 
beyond,  trans  with  Ace. 
big,  magnus,  -a,  -um. 
bigger,  maior,  maius,  Compar.  of 

magnus,  530  [835]. 
blame,  culpo,  -are,  -avI,  -atum,  1. 
body,  corpus,  corporis,  N.  3,  265 

[620]. 
both,  Pron.,  ambo,  -ae,  -o,  328 

[640]. 
both  .  .  .  and,  Conjs.,  et  .  .  .  et. 
boundaries,   fines,  finium,  M.  3, 

PL  of  finis,  271  [622]. 
boy,  puer,pueri,]yi.  2,  111  [616]. 
brave,  fortis,  -e. 
brains  (=judgment),    consilium, 

-I,  N.  2. 
bravely,  fortiter. 
break,    rumpo,    rumpere,     rupi, 

ruptum,  3. 
bridge,  pons,  pontis,  -ium,  M.  3. 
bring  about,  efficio,  -ficere,  -feci, 

-fectum,3. 
bring  to,  adfero,  adferre,  attull, 

allatum,  irr.,  522  [668]. 
brother,  frater,  fratris,  M.  3. 
business,  negotium,  -i,  N.  2. 
(be)  busy  in,  versor,  -ari,  -at us 

sum,  1,  with  in, 
but,  sed;  at. 


by,  of  Agent,  a  or  ab  with  AbL, 

orDat.  with  Fut.Pass.  Partic. ; 

of  Means  or  Instrument,  Abl. ; 

(close)  by,  ad  with  Ace. 
by  chance,  easu;  forte, 
by  far,  multo,  Abl.  of  Measure 

of  Difference,  equivalent  to  an 

Adv. 

cabin,  casa,  -ae,  F.  1. 

Caesar,  Caesar,  Caesaris,  M.  3. 

call,  voco,  -are,  -avI,  -atum,-  1 ; 
appello,  -are,  -avI,  -atum,  1. 

camp,  castra,  -orum,  N.  PI.  2. 

can,  possum,  posse,  potui,  irr., 
485  [664];  also  rendered  in 
various  uses  by  the  Subjunc- 
tive of  Possibility. 

Capri,  Capreae,  -arum,  F.  1. 

captive,  captivus,  -I,  M.  2. 

care,  ctira,  -ae,  F.  1. 

careful,  dlligens,  -ens,  -entis. 

carefulness,  diligentia,  -ae,  F.  1. 

carry,  fero,  ferre,  tuli,  latum, 
irr.,  522  [668];  defero,  -ferre, 
-tuli,  -latum,  irr.,  522  [668]. 

carry  on,  gero,  gerere,  gessi,  ges- 
tum,  3. 

case,  casus,  -uSjlM.  4,  369  [624]. 

(in  that)  case,  tum. 

catch,  comprehendo,  -prehen- 
dere,  -prehendi,  -prehensum, 
3. 

Catuvolcus,  Catuvolcus,  -I,  M.  2. 

cause,  causa,  -ae,  F.  1. 

cautious,  cautus,  -a,  -um. 

cavalry,  equitatus,  -us,  M.  4; 
equites,  -um,  M.  3,  PI.  of  eques. 

cavalry,  as  Adj.,  equestris,  -tre. 

censure,  culpo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 

centurion,  centurio*  -onis,  M.  3. 


English-Latin   Vocabulary 


319 


certain,  quidam,  quaedam,  quod- 
dam  (quiddam),  193  [650J ;  cer- 

tus,  -a,  -um. 
certainly,  certe. 
chance,   casus,   -us,    M.   4,   369 

[624]. 
(by)  chance,  casu;  forte. 
change,  muto,  -are,  -avl,  -atum,  1; 

verto,  vertere,  verti,  versum,  3. 
charge,  procurro,  -currere,  -cur- 

ri  or  -cucurri,  -cursum,  3.  ' 
chide,    moneo,    monere,   monui, 

monitum,  2  [657]. 
choose,  lego,  legere,  legi,  lectum, 

3;    eligo,    eligere,  elegi,    elec- 

tum,  3. 
Cicero,  Cicero,  -onis,  M.  3. 
circle,  orbis,  -is,  -ium,  M.  3. 
city,  urbs,  urbis,  -ium,  F.  3. 
close    by,    proximus,    -a,    -um. 

Superl.  of  propter,  531   [636]. 
class,  genus,  generis,  N.  3. 
cohort,  cohors,  -rtis,  -ium,  F.  3. 
collect,  conligo,  -ligere,  -legi,  -lec- 
tum, 3. 
come,  venio,   venire,  veni,   ven- 

tum,  4. 
come  down,  me   demitto,   -mit- 

tere,  -misi,  -missum,  3. 
come  over,  transeo, -Ire, -ii  (or -ivi), 

-itum,  irr.,  603  [667]. 
come  to  aid,  subvenio,   -venire, 

-venT,  -ventum,  4,  with  Dat. 
come  to  hope,   in  spem  venio, 
.     venire,  veni,  ventum,  4. 
come  together,  convenio,  -venire, 

-veni,  -ventum,  4. 
command,   imperatum,   -i,   N.  2; 

imperium,  -i,  N.  2. 
command,    impero,     -are,     -avi, 

-atum,  1. 


(be  in)  command,  praesum,  -esse, 

-ful,  -futiirus,  irr.  [655],  with 

Dat. 
common,  communis,  -e. 
communicate,   communico,   -are, 

-avi,  -atum,  1. 
compulsion,  coactus,  -us,  M.  4. 
concede,  concedo,  -cedere,  -cessi, 

-cessum,  3,  with  Dat. 
(safe)  conduct,  tUtum  iter, 
confer,  conloquor,  -loqui,  -locii- 

tus  sum,  3. 
conference,  conloquium,  -i,  N.  2. 
conquer,    vinco,    -vincere,    -vici, 

-victum,  3;   supero,    -are,  -avi, 

-atum,  1. 
conqueror,  victor,    -oris,    M.    3, 

257  [618]. 
construct,  munio,  -ire,  -ivi,  -itum, 

4. 
contempt,  contemptio,  -onis,  F.  3. 
contend,  certo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
contest,  certamen,  -minis,  N.  3. 
continue,  maneo,  manere,  mansi, 

mansum,  2. 
controversy,     controversia,    -ae, 

F.  1. 
cook,  coqua,  -ae,  F.  1. 
Corfinium,  Corfinium,  -i,  N.  2. 
Cornelius,  Cornelius,  -i,  M.  2. 
Cotta,  Cotta,  -ae,  M.  1. 
cottage,  casa,  -ae,  F.  1. 
council,  consilium,  -i,  N.  2. 
country,  riis,   rUris,  N.  3;   loca, 

-orum,  N.  PI.  2;  country  of  ...  , 

may  be  translated  by  name  of 

tribe  alone. 
country,  as    Adj.,    rusticus,   -a, 

-um. 
courage,  virtus,  -utis,  F.  3. 
Crassus,  Crassus,  -i,  M.  2. 


320 


English-Latin  Vocabulary 


cross,  transeo,  -ire,  -ii  {or  -ivi), 
-itum,  irr.,  603  [667]. 

crowd,  turba,  -ae,  F.  1. 

cry,  fleo,  flere,  flevi,  fletum,  2. 

cultivate,  colo,  colere,  colui,  cul- 
tum,  3. 

custom,  consuetude,  -inis,  F.  3; 
mos,  moris,  M.  3. 

cut,  caedo,  caedere,  cecidi,  cae- 
sura, 3. 

danger,  periculum,  -i,  N.  2. 
dangerous,  perlculosus,  -a,  -um. 
dare,  audeo,  audere,  ausus  sum,  2. 
daughter,  filia.  -ae,  F.  1. 
day,  dies,  diei,  M.  and  F.,  5,  395 

[625]. 
(every)  day,  cotidie. 
(late  in  the)  day,  magna  parte 

die!  consumpta. 
daybreak,  prima  lux. 
deceive,  decipio,    -cipere,   -cepi, 

-ceptum,  3. 
decide,  statuo,  statuere,  statu!, 

statutum,  3;  constituo,  -stitu- 

ere,  -stitui,  -stitutum,  3. 
decide  (between),  diiudico,  -are, 

-avi,  -atum,  1. 
decoration,    Insigne,     -is,    -ium, 

N.  3,  270  [621]. 
defeat,  supero,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
defend,  defendo,  -fendere,  -fendl, 

-fensum,  3. 
delay,  mora,  -ae,  F.  1. 
delay,  moror,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  1. 
deliberate,    delibero,   -are,    -avi, 

-atum,  1. 
(be)  delighted,  laetor,  -arl,  -atus 

sum,  1. 
depart,  discedo,   -cedere,  -cessi, 

-cessum,  3;  (accomplish  a)  de- 


parture,   profectionem    facio, 

facere,  feci,  factum,  3. 
departure,  profectio,  -onis,  F.  3. 
desire,  desidero,  -are,  -avi,  -atum, 

1;  cupio,  cupere,  cupivl,  cupi- 

tum,  3. 
desirous,  cupidus,  -a,  -um,  with 

Objective  Gen. 
desist,  desisto,  -sistere,  -stiti,  -sti- 

turus,  3. 
desperate  {  =  extreme),  extremus, 

-a,  -um,    SuperL  of   exterior, 

531  [636]. 
determine,    constituo,   -stituere, 

-stitui,  -stitutum,  3. 
devote,  me  dedo,  dedere,  dedidi, 

deditum. 
(be)  devoted  to,  studeo,  studere, 

studui,  2,  ivitJi  Dat. 
different,  diversus,  -a,  -um. 
differently,  aliter. 
difficult,  difiicilis,  -e. 
(with)  difficulty,  aegre. 
diligence,  dlligentia,  -ae,  F.  1. 
diligent,  diligens,  -ens,  -entis. 
diligently,  dlligenter. 
dine,  ceno,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
dinner,  cena,  -ae,  F.  1. 
direct,   praecipio,  -cipere,   -cepI, 

-ceptum,  3,  mf/iDa^.o/Perso^. 
disadvantageous,      inlquus,     -a, 

-um. 
discharge,  fungor,  fungi,  functus 

sum,  3,  with  Abl. 
discipline,  discipllna,  -ae,  F.  1. 
display,  prae  me  gero,    gerere, 

gessi,  gestum,  3. 
displease,  displiceo,  -plicere,  -pli- 

cul,  -plicitum,  2,  with  Dat. 
disregard,  neglego,  -legere,  -lexi, 

-lectum,  3. 


English-Latin  Vocabulary 


321 


from  a  distance,  procul. 
distribute,    distribuo,   -tribuere, 

-tribui,  -tributum,  3. 
divide,  divido,    dividere,   divisi, 

divisum,  3. 
do,  facio,  facere,  feci,  factum,  3; 

ago,  age  re,  egi,  actum,  3. 
(be)  done,  flo,  fieri,  f actus  sum, 

irr.,  602  [666]. 
do  harm,  iniuriam  facio,  facere, 

feci,  factum,  3. 
draw      up,     instruo,      -struere, 

-strtixi,  -structum,  3;  prodtico, 

-diicere,  -dtixi,  -ductum,  3. 
drill,  exerceo,  exercere,  exercui, 

exercitum,  2. 
drive,  pello,  pellere,  pepuli,  pul- 

sum,  3. 
drive  out,  pello,  pellere,  pepuli, 

pulsum,  3. 
dust,  pulvis,  pulveris,  M.  3,  265 

[620]. 
duty,  officium,  -i,  N.  2. 

each,  quisque,  quaeque,  quidque 
(quodque),  200  [652];  each  of 
two,  uterque,  utraque,  utrum- 
que  {declined  like  uter,  130 
[643]  + -que). 

eager,  alacer,  -cris,  -ere. 

(be)  eager  for,  studeo,  studere, 
studui, ,  2,  with  Dat. 

eagerly,  cupide. 

easily,  facile. 

easy,  facilis,  -e. 

Ebur6nes,  Eburones,  -um,  M.  3. 

(the)  edge  of,  extremus,  -a, 
-um,  Superl.  of  exterior,  531 
[636]. 

effect,  efficio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fec- 
tum,  3. 


either  {of  two),  Pron.,  uterque, 

utraque,    utrumque    {declined 

like  uter,  130  [643]  +  -que), 
either  .  .  ,  or,   Conjs.,   aut  .  .  . 

aut;  {giving  choice)  \q\  .  .  .  vel. 
elect,    eligo,    -ligere,    -legi,  -lec- 

tum,  3. 
end,  finis,  -is,  -ium,  M.  3,   271 

[622]. 
enemy,  {of  the  state)  hostis,  -is, 

-ium,  M.  3;  {of  an  individual) 

inimicus,  -i,  M.  2. 
energetic,  impiger,  -gra,  -grum. 
energetically,  impigre. 
enjoy,  fruor,  frui,  fructus  sum,  3, 

with  Abl. 
engage  in  or  (be)  engaged   in, 

versor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  1. 
enough,  satis. 

enter,  Intro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
equal,  par,  par,  paris;    aequus, 

-a,  -um. 
equally,  aeque. 
escape,     elabor,    elabi,    elapsus 

sum,  3. 
establish,    confirmo,    -are,    -avi, 

-atum,  1;  constituo,  -stituere, 

-stitui,  -stitutum,  3. 
Esuvii,  Esuvii,  -orum,  M.  PI.  2. 
even,  etiam. 

(not)  even,  ne  .  .  .  .  quidem. 
ever,  umquam. 

every,  omnis,  -e;  quisque,  quae- 
que, quodque   (quidque),   200 

[652]. 
everybody,  ciincti,  -orum,  M.Pl.  2; 

omnes,  -ium,  M.  PL  3,  from 

omnis. 
every  day,  cotidie. 
every  one,  omnes,  -ium,  M.  PI.  3, 

from  omnis. 


322 


English-Latin  Vocabulary 


(on)  every  side,  undique. 
everything,  omnia,  -ium,  N.  PI.  3, 

from  omnis. 
example,  exemplum,  -i,  N.  2. 
exceedingly,  maxime,  Superl.  of 

magnopere  and  multum,   539 

[638]. 
except,  nisi, 
exercise,  exerceo,  exercere,  ex- 

ercui,  exercitum,  2. 
expect,     exspecto,     -are,      -avi, 

-atum,  1. 
experienced,    perltus,   -a,    -um, 

with  Objective  Gen. 
explore,     explore,      -are,      -avI, 

-atum,  1. 
extend,  extendo,  -tendere,  -tendl, 

-tentum  and  -tensum,  3. 
eye,  oculus,  -i,  M.  2. 
(in  the)   eyes  (of),   Dat.  of  the 

Person  Judging. 

Fabius,  Fabius, -I,  M.  2. 

face,  OS,  oris,  N.  3. 

(full  in  the)  face,  in  adversum  os. 

fact,  res,  rel,  F.  5,  395  [625]. 

fail,   deficio,    -ficere,   -feci,   -fec- 

tum,  3. 
fair,  aequus,  -a,  -um. 
faith,  fides,  fidel,  F.  5. 
fall,  cado,  cadere,  cecidi,  casu- 

rus,  3. 
fame,  fama,  -ae,  F.  1. 
(by)  far,  multo,  Ahl.  of  Measure 

of  Difference. 
far,  longe. 

farmer,  agricola,  -ae,  M.  1. 
fashion,  modus,  -i,  M.  2. 
father,  pater,  patris,  M.  3,  257 

[618]. 
fault,  culpa,  -ae,  F.  1. 


favor,   faveo,    favere,   favi,   fau- 

tum,  2,  ivith  Dat. 
favorable,  aequus,  -a,  -um. 
fear,  timor,  -oris,  M.  3;   metus, 

-us,  M.  4. 
fear,  timeo,  timere,  timul,  — ,  2; 

vereor,  vererl,  veritus  sum,  2. 
feel,  sentio,  sentire,  sensi,  sen- 
sum,  4. 
feel  sure,  pro  certo  habeo, habere, 

habui,  habitum,  2. 
feel    V7ell,    valeo,  valere,  valui, 

valiturus,  2. 
feeling,  sententia,  -ae,  F.  1. 
(a)  few  (only),  pauci,  -ae,  -a. 
field,  ager,  agrl,  M.  2,  111  [616]. 
fierce,  acer,acris,  acre,  293  [630]; 

ferus,  -a,  -um. 
fiercely,  acriter. 
fight,  pugna,  -ae,  F.  1. 
fight,  pugno,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1; 

dimico,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
fight  it  out,  decerto,  -are,  -avi, 

-atum,  1. 
fighter,    pugnans,    -ans,    -antis, 

Pres.  Act.  Partic.  of  pugno. 
fill,  compleo,  -plere,  -plevi,  -ple- 

tum,  2. 
finally,  denique. 
find,  invenio,  -venire,  -veni,  -ven- 

tum,  4. 
finish,  conficio,  -ficere,  -feci,  -fee 

tum,  3. 
fire,  ignis,  -is,  -ium,  M.  3,   278 

[623];  flamma,  -ae,  F.  1. 
(set  on)  fire,  incendo,   -cendere, 

-cendl,  -censum,  3. 
first,  primus,  -a,  -um,  Superl.  of 

prior,  531  [636]. 
(at)  first,  primo. 
(in  the)  first  place,  primum. 


English-Latin  Vocabulary 


323 


fit,  aplus,  -a,  -um. 

fitted,  aptus,  -a,  -um. 

five,  quinque,  indecl.  Adj. 

fixed,  certus,  -a,  -um. 

flee,  fugio,  fugere,  f ugi,  f ugitu- 
rus,  3. 

flight,  f uga,  -ae,  F.  1. 

(take  to)  flight,  me  in  fugam  do, 
dare,  dedi,  datum,  1. 

fly  (to),  advolo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 

follow,  sequor,  sequi,  secutus 
sum,  3. 

following  {=  next),  posterue,  -a, 
-um. 

follow  up,  sequor,  sequi,  secutus 
sum,  3,  insequor,  -sequi,  -secu- 
tus sum,  3. 

fool, verba  do,  dare,  dedi,  datum ,  1. 

foot,  pes,  pedis,  M.  3. 

for.  Prep.,  expressed  by  Dat. ;  by 
ad  or  in  with  Ace;  {=through 
a  period  of  time)  per  with  Ace, 
or  Ace.  of  Extent  of  Time. 

for,  ConJ.,  emm,postpos.;  nam. 

for  a  little  (while),  paulisper. 

for  nothing,  sine  til  la  causa. 

for  the  purpose  of,  causa  or 
gratia  with  Gen.  of  Gerundive 
or  Gerund;  ad  with  Gerun- 
dive or  Gerund;  qui,  quo,  ut, 
ivith  SubJ. 

for  the  sake  of,  causa  or  gratia 
with  Gen. 

for  this  reason,  ob  eam  causam. 

for  which  reason,  quare. 

forbid,  prohibeo,  -hibere,  -hibui, 
-hibituoi,  2;  veto,  vetare, 
vetui.  vetitum,  1,  with  Infin. 

force,  forces,  copiae,  -arum,  F.  1, 
PL  of  copia. 

forced  march,  magnum  iter. 


forehead,  frons,  frontis,-ium,  F.3. 
foresee,  provideo,  -videre,  -vidi, 

-visum,  2. 
forest,  silva,  -ae,  F.  1. 
form    (a  plan),    capio,    capere, 

cepi,  captum,  3  [659]. 
former,  pristinus,  -a,  -um;  prior, 

-us,  Compar.,  531  [636]. 
formerly,  antea. 

fortification,  munitio,  -on is,  F.  3. 
fortify,       communio,       -miinire, 

-miinivi,  -mtinitum,  4. 
fortunate,  beatus,  -a,  -um. 
four,  quattuor,  indecl.  Adj. 
four  hundred,  quadringenti,  -ae, 

-a. 
friend  {man  or  boy),  amicus,  -i,M. 

2;  {woman  or  girl),  amica,  -ae, 

F.l. 
(in  a)   fright,   territus,   -a,   -um, 

Perf.  Pass.  Partic.  of  terreo, 

terrere,  terrui,  territum,  2. 
(thoroughly)  frighten,  perterreo, 

-terrere,  -terrui,  -territum,  2. 
from,  {=  away  from.)  aor  ab,  with 

Abl.;  {—down  from)  de  with 

Abl.;  {=out  of)  e  or  ex,  with 

Abl. 
from  a  distance,  procul. 
front,  frons,  frontis,  -ium,  F.  3. 
(in)  front  of,  prae  with  Abl. ;  pro 

icith  Abl. ;  ante  with  Ace. 
full  in  the  face,  in  adversum  os. 
further,  amplius,    Neut.  Ace.  of 

Degree,  equivalent  to  an  Adv. 

gain,  consequor,  -sequi,  -secutus 

sum,  3. 
Gaius,  Gains,  -i,  M.  2. 
Galba,  Galba,  -ae,  M.  1. 
Gallic,  Gallicus,  -a, 


-um. 


324 


English-Latin  Vocabulary 


Gallus,  Gallus,  -i,  M.  2. 
game,  Itidus,  -I,  M.  2. 
garden,  hortus,  -I,  M.  2. 
gate,  porta,  -ae,  F.  1. 
Gaul,  Gallia,  -ae,  F.  1. 
(a)  Gaul,  Gallus,  -i,  M.  2. 
general,  dux,  duels,  M.  3;  general 

{in    chief )y    imperator,    -oris, 

M.  3. 
generally,  fere. 
German,  Germanus,  -i,  M.  2. 
get  (possession  of),  potior,  potiri, 

potitus  sum,  4,  with  Abl. 
get    into   condition,    vires    con- 

firmo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
get  sight  of,  conspicor,  -ari,  -atus 

sum,  1. 
girl,  puella,  -ae,  F.  1. 
give,  do,  dare,  dedi,  datum,  1. 
give    advice,    suadeo,    suadere, 

suasi,  suasum,  2,  with  Dat. 
give    way,  cedo,   cedere,    cessi, 

cessum,  3,  with  Dat. 
glad,  laetus,  -a,  -um. 
(be)   glad  of,    gaudeo,  gaudere, 

gavlsus  sum,  2. 
glory,  gloria,  -ae,  F.  1. 
go,  eo,  ire,  ii  {or  ivi),  itum,  irr., 

503  [667]. 
go  on  {=be  done),  fio,  tieri,  f actus 

sum,  irr.,  602  [666]. 
going  to,  expressed  by  Fut.  Act. 

Partic. 
good,  bonus,  -a,  -um,  117  [627]. 
good-bye,  vale. 
(a)  good  many,  complures,  com- 

pluriaor-a,  327  [633]. 
good- will,  voluntas,  -atis,  F^  3. 
grain,  frumentum,  -I,  N.  2. 
great,  magnus,  -a,  -um;    often 

tantus,  -a,  -um. 


(a)  great  many,  pluriml,  -ae,  -a, 

Superl  o/multus,  630  [635]. 
greater,  maior,  maius,  Compar. 

of  magnus,  630  [635]. 
greatest,     maximus,     -a,    -um, 

Superl.  o/ magnus,  630  [635 J. 
(how)  great,  quantus,  -a,  -um. 
(so)  great,  tantus,  -a,  -um. 
greatly,  magnopere. 
grieve,  doleo,  dolere,  dolul,  doli- 

turus,  2. 
ground,  locus,  -I,  M.  2,  PL  loca, 

-orum;  regio,  -onis,  F.  3. 
guide,  dux,  ducis,  M.  3. 
guide,  rego,  regere,  rexl,  rectum,  3. 

habit,  mos,  moris,  M.  3;  consue- 
tude, -inis,  F.  3. 

halt,  consisto,  -sistere,  -stiti, 
,3. 

hand,  manus,  -us,  F.  4. 

happy,  beatus,  -a,  -um;  laetus, 
-a,  -um. 

hard,  dtirus,  -a,  -um. 

hardly,  vix. 

harm,  noceo,  nocere,  nocui,  noci- 
tum,  2,  with  Dat.;  do  harm  {to 
u  person),  iniuriam  facio,  fa- 
carp,  feci,  factum,  3;  no  harm 
is  done  him,  ei  nihil  nocetur, 
noceri,  nocitum  est,  2. 

harsh,  durus,  -a,  -um. 

(make)  haste,  mature,  -are,  -avI, 
-atum,  1. 

hasten,  contendo,  -tendere,  -ten- 
di,  -tentum,  3. 

hate  .(to  do  a  thing),  gravor,  -ari, 
-atus  sum,  1,  ivith  Injin. 

have,  habeo,  habere,  habul,  habi- 
tum,  2;  Dat.  of  Possession  with 
sum. 


English-Latin  Vocabulary 


325 


have  regard  for,  rationem  habeo, 
habere,  habui,  habitum,  2,  with 
Gen. 

he,  is,  153  [646];  ille,  145  [645]; 
iste,145,  a  [645];  hie,  166  [648]. 

head,  caput,  capitis,  N.  3. 

hear,  audio,  audire,  audivi,  audi 
turn,  4. 

heavy,  gravis,  -e. 

helmet,  galea,   ae,  F.  1. 

help,  auxilium,  auxili,  N.  2. 

help,  iuvo,  iuvare,  itivi,  ititum,  1; 
adiuvo,  -iuvare,  -iuvi,  -iutum,  1. 

(come  to)  help,  subvenio,  -venire, 
-veni,  -ventum,  4,  with  Dat.; 
auxilio  venio,  venire,  veni,  ven- 
tum, 4,  with  Dat. 

hem  in,  contineo,  -tinere,  -tinui, 
-tentum,  2. 

her.  Gen.  Sing,  of  is,  153  [646], 
ille,  145  [645],  iste,  145,  a  [645], 
or  hie,  166  [648];  Reflexive, 
her  (ovvn),  suus,  -a,  -um. 

herald,  praeco,  -onis,  M.  3. 

here,  hic. 

(be)  here,  adsum,  adesse,  adfui, 
adfu turns,  irr.  [655]. 

high,  altus,  -a,  -um. 

highest,  supremus,  -a,  -um,  or 
summus,  -a,  -um,  Svperl.  of 
superior,  531  [636]. 

hill,  collis,  -is,  -ium,  M.  3. 

(of,  etc.)  himself.  Reflexive,  sul, 
etc.,  215  [654];  (he)  himself. 
Intensive,  ii)se,  -a,  -um,  139 
[644]. 

hindrance,  impedimentum, -I,  N.  2. 

his,  Gen.  Sing,  of  is,  153  [646], 
ille,  145  [645],  iste,  145,  a  [645], 
or  hic,  166  [648];  his  (own), 
suus,  -a,  -um. 


hold,   teneo,   tenere,  tenul,  ten- 
tum, 2. 
home,  domus,  -us  and  -i,  4  and  2, 

406  [626]. 
(at)  home,  domi,  409,  3,  a. 
honor,  honor,  -oris,  M.  3. 
honorable,  honestus,  -a,  -um. 
hope,  spes,  spei,  F.  5;  (come  to) 

hope,   in  spem  venio,  venire, 

veni,  ventum,  4. 
hope,  spero,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1; 

opto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
horn,  cornti,  -us,  N.  4,  369  [624]. 
horse,  equus,  -i,  M.  2. 
horseman,  eques,  -itis,  M.  3. 
hour,  hora,  -ae,  F.  1. 
(at  the)  house  (of),    apud   with 

Ace. 
how,  quam;  {  =  in  what  way,  by 

what  means)  qui. 
how  great,  quantus,  -a,  -um. 
however,  autem,  postpositive. 
hurl,  conicio,  -ice re,   -ieci,  -iec- 

tum,  3. 
hurry,  propero,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
hurt,  noceo,  nocere,  nocui,  noci- 

tum,  2,  with  Dat. 

I,  ego,  mei,  214  [654]. 

if,  si. 

if  not  (—unless),  nisi. 

ill,  aeger,  -gra,  -grum. 

image,  imago,  -inis,  F.  3. 

immediately,  confestim;  statim. 

in,    of  Place,  in  with  Abl.  (or 

the    Locative    of    names    of 

Towns,  etc.,  409,  3,  a  [594.  3] ); 

of  Respect,  Abl.  of  Respect; 

of  Time,  Abl.  of  Time. 
in  accordance  with,  see  according 

to. 


326 


English-Latin  Vocabulary 


(be)  in  command,  praesum,  -esse, 

-ful,  -futtirus,  irr.   [655],  with 

Dat 
in  front  of,  ante  with  Ace,  pro 

with  Abl. 
in  order  to,  ut  with  SuhJ.;   in 

order  not  to,  ile  with  Subj. 
in  person,  per  me,  te,  or  se. 
in  return  for,  pro  with  Abl. 
in  succession,  deinceps. 
ia  that  case,  turn, 
in  the  eyes  of,  expressed  by  Dat, 

of  the  Person  Judging. 
in  the  first  place,  prlmum. 
in  the  second  place,  deinde. 
in  the  morning,  mane, 
in  this  way,  ita;  sic. 
indeed,  vero;  quidem. 
influence,  gratia,  -ae,  F.  1. 
influential,  potens,  -ens,  -entis. 
inform,  doceo,  docere,  docui,  doc- 

tum,  2;    certiorem  (-es)  facio, 

f acere,  feci,  factum,  3. 
injure,  noceo,  nocere,  nocul,  noci- 

tum,  2,  with  Dat, 
injury,  initiria,  -ae,  F.  1. 
inquire,  quaero,  quaerere,  quae- 

sivi,  quaesltum,  3. 
instruct,  moneo,  monere,  monui, 

monitum,  2  [657]. 
interest,   studium,  -I,  N.  2;  res, 

rei,  F.  5,  395  [625]. 
interpreter,     inter  pres,    -pretis, 

M.  3. 
intervene,     intercedo,     -cedere, 

-cessi,  -cessum,  3. 
into,  in  loith  Ace, 
invite,  invito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
it,  id,  153  [646];  illud  or  istud, 

145  and  a  [645];  hoc,  160  [648]. 
Italy,  Italia,  -ae,  F.  1. 


javelin,  pilum,  -i,  N.  2;  iaculum, 
-I,  N.  2. 

(Gallic)  javelin,  tragula,  -ae, 
F.  1. 

join,  iungo,  iungere,  iunxi,  iunc- 
tum,  3;  adiungo,  -iungere, 
-iunxl,  -iunctum,  3;  join  battle, 
proelium  committo,  -mittere, 
-misi,  -missum,  3. 

judge,  iudex,  iudicis,  M.  3. 

judge,  iudico,  -are,  -avI,  -atum, 
1. 

judgment,  iudicium,  -i,  N.  2;  con- 
silium, -1,  N.  2. 

Julia,  Itilia,  -ae,  F.  1. 

Julius,  lulius,  -I,  M.  2. 

just,  iustus,  -a,  -um. 

just  now,  modo. 

keep,  servo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 

keep  out  {=  stay  away  from), 
absum,  abesse,  afui,  afuturus 
{and  abful,  abfuturus),  irr, 
[655]. 

keep  {some  one  from)  prohibeo, 
-hibere,  -hibui,  -hibitum,  2. 

kill,  caedo,  caedere,  cecidi,  cae- 
sum,  3;  occido,  -cidere,  -cidi, 
-cisum,  3;  interficio,  -ficere, 
-feci,  -fectum,  3. 

kind,  benignus,  -a,  -um. 

kind,  genus,  generis,  N.  3. 

kindness,  beneficium,  -I,  N.  2. 

king,  rex,  regis,  M.  3,  256  [617]. 

kingship,  regnum,  -I,  N.  2. 

kitchen,  cullna,  -ae,  F.  1. 

know,  scio,  scire,  sclvl,  scltum,  4; 
Perfect  tenses  of  nosco,  nos- 
cere,  novl,  notum,  3,  and  cog- 
nosce, -gnoscere,  -gnovl,  -gni- 
tum,  3. 


English-Latin   Vocabulary 


327 


Labienus,  Labienus,  -i,  M.  2. 

large,  magnus,  -a,  -um. 

larger,  maior,  maius,  Compar.  of 
magnus,  630  [635]. 

(at)  last,  denique. 

late  in  the  day,  magna  parte  diel 
consumpta. 

(too)  late,  sero. 

later,  postea;  post. 

lazy,  piger,  -gra,  -grum. 

lead,  duco,  dticere,  duxi,  duc- 
tum,  3. 

lead  off,  deduce,  -ducere,  -duxl, 
-ductum,  3. 

leader,  dux,  ducis,  M.  3. 

learn,  disco,  discere,  didici, , 

3;  nosco,  noscere,  novi,  notum, 
3;  cognosce,  -gnoscere,  -gnovi, 
-gnitum,  3. 

(at)  least,  saltern. 

leaivey  (transitive)  relinquo,  -lin- 
quere,  -liqui,  -lictum,  3;  (in- 
transitive), decedo,  -cedere, 
-cessi,  -cessum,  3;  discedo, 
-cedere,  cessi,  cessum,  3;  ex- 
cedo,  -cedere,  -cessi,  -cessum, 
3. 

left,  reliquus,  -a,  -um. 

legion,  legio,  -onis,  F.  3. 

leisure,  otium,  -i,  N.  2. 

less,  Adj.,  minor,  minus.  Corn- 
par,  of  parvus,  630  [635]. 

less,  Adv.,  minus,  Compar.  of 
parum,  639  [638]. 

less  than,  minus  quam. 

lest,  ne  with  SubJ. 

let  (me  or  us),  generally  ex- 
pressed by  Subj. 

letter  (of  correspondence),  epis- 
tula,  -ae,  F.  1;  litterae,  -arum, 
F.  1,  PI.  of  littera. 


lieutenant,  legatus,  -I,  M.  2. 
life,  vita,  -ae,  F.  1. 
like,  amo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
line  of  battle,  acies,  aciei,  F.  5. 
line     of    march,    agmen,     -inis, 

N.  3. 
listen     (to),      audio,     -ire,    -ivi, 

-Itum,  4. 
little,  parvus,  -a,  -um. 
little.  Adv.,  parum;  Substantive, 

paulum,  -I,  N.  2. 
(by  a)  little,  paulo,  Abl.  of  Meas- 
ure of  Difference,  equivalent 

to  an  Adv. 
(a)  little  while,  (for)  a  little  while, 

paulisper. 
live,  habito,  -are,  -avI,  -atum,  1. 
live    on,  vescor,  vesci,    ,   3, 

with  Abl. 
lofty,  altus,  -a,  -um. 
long,  longus,  -a,  -um. 
long  (  =  for  a  long  time),  diu. 
(no)  longer,  non  iam;  nee  iam. 
(as)  long  as,  quam  diu. 
love,  amo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
lowest,  infimus,  -a,  -um,  Superl. 

of  inferior,  631  [636]. 
Lucius,  Lucius,  -i,  M.  2. 
lung,  latus,  lateris,  N.  3. 

make,  facio,  facere,  feci,  factum, 
3;  {=  bring  about  that)  efficio, 
-ficere,  -feci,  -fectum,  3,  with 
ut  or  ut  non,  and  Subj. 

make  haste,  mature,  -are,  -avi, 
-atum,  1. 

man,  vir,  viri,  M.  2,  111  [616]; 
homo,  hominis,  M.  3;  men  (our 
men,  his  men,  etc.),  nostri,  sui, 
etc. 

(to  a)  man,  ad  unum. 


328 


English- Latin  Vocabulary 


manage,   admin istro,    -are,   -avi, 

-atum,  1;  gero,   gerere,    gessi, 

gestum,  3. 
many,  multi,  -ae,  -a,  PL  of  mul- 

tus. 
(a  good)  many,  complures,  com- 

pluriaor-a,  327[633]. 
(line  of)  march,  agmen,  agminis, 

N.  2. 
Mark,  Marcus,  -I,  M.  2. 
master, {of  a  household)  dominus, 

-1,  M.  2;  {of  a  school)  magister, 

-trl,  M.  2. 
matter,  res,  rel,  F.  5,  395  [625], 
(by)  means  of,  expressed  by  Abl, 

of  Means. 
meanwhile,  interim;  interea. 
meet,    convenio,    -venire,    -veni, 

-ventum,  4. 
memory,  memoria,  -ae,  P.  1. 
men  {our  men,    his  men,  etc.), 

nostrl,  sul,  etc. 
merely,  tantummodo. 
message,  nuntius,  -I,  M.  2. 
messenger,  nuntius,  -I,  M.  2. 
method,  modus,  -i,  M.  2. 
midday,  merldies,  -ei,  M.  5. 
(the)  middle  of,  medius,  -a,  -um. 
mile,  mille  passuum,  PL  milia 

passuum. 
military,  militaris,  -e. 
mind,  animus,  -I,  M.  2. 
mine,  meus,  -a,  -um. 
misfortune,  incommodum,  -i,  N..2. 
missile,  telum,  -i,  N.  2. 
mistress,  domina,  -ae,  F.  1. 
mob,  turba,  -ae,  F.  1. 
mock  {=pretended),  simulatus, 

-a,  -\im,  from  simulo,  -are,  -avI, 

-atum,  1. 
money  p  pecunia,  -ae,  F.  1. 


more,  Substantive,  plus,  Gen.  plti- 
ris;  in  PL,  pltires,  plura,  plu- 
rium,  327  [633],  Compar.  of 
multus,  530  [635]. 

more,  Adv.,  magis;  plus  and  am- 
plius,  Compar.  Adjs.  in  Ace. 
of  Degree,  equivalent  to  Advs. 

(in  the)  morning,  mane. 

(this)  morning,  hodie  mane. 

most.  Adv.,  expressed  by  Super- 
lative form;  also  by  maxime, 
SuperL  of  magnopere  and 
multum,  539  [633]. 

most,  as  Substantive,  maxima 
pars. 

mother,  mater,  -tris,  F.  3. 

mountain,  mons,  montis,  -ium, 
M.  3. 

mouth,  OS,  oris,  N.  3. 

move,  moveo,  movere,  movi,  mo- 
tum,  2. 

much,  AdJ.,mu\tus,  -a,  -um. 

much.  Adv.,  multum.  Ace.  of 
Degree,  equivalent  to  an  Adv. ; 
much  (=  by  much),  multo,  Abl. 
of  Measure  of  Difference,  equi- 
valent to  an  Adv. 

(as)  much  ...  as,  tarn  .  .  .  quam. 

(too)  much,  nimis. 

(very)  much,  plurimum,  Ace.  of 
Degree,  equivalent  to  an  Adv. 
SuperL  of  multum,  539  [638]. 

multitude,  multitudo,  -inis,  F.  3. 

must  be  .  .  ,  {  =  is  to  be  ,  .  ,  ) 
expressed  by  Fut.  Pass.  Partic, 
with  sum. 

my,  meus,  -a,  -um. 

(of)  myself.  Reflexive,  mei  {from 
ego,  214  [654] ). 

(my)self,  Intensive,  ipse,  ipsa, 
ipsum,  139  [644]. 


English-Latin  Vocabulary 


329 


name,  nomen,  -inis,  N.  3. 

name  (=  caZZ),  appello,  -are,  -avi, 

-atum,  1. 
nature,  natura,  -ae,  F.  1. 
near,  propinquus,  -a,  -um,  with 

Dat 
near,  prope  with  Ace, 
nearer,  propius,  Compar.  Adv., 

639  [638];  used  also  as  Prep. 

with  Ace. 
nearest,  proximus,  -a,  -um,  Com- 
par. of  propior,  631  [636]. 
(is  or  are)  necessary,  necesse  est 

or  sunt, 
(it  is)  necessary,  necesse  est. 
need,  opus,  indecL  Noun  with 

Abl 
neglect,  neglego,    -legere,  -lexl, 

-lectum,  3. 
neighboring,  propinquus,  -a,  -um. 
neighborhood,  loca  propinqua. 
neither,  Pronoun^  neuter,  -tra, 

-trum,  129[642]. 
neither  (=^and  not),  ConJ.,  neque 

(nee). 
neither  .  .  .  nor,  neque  .  .  .  neque 

(nee  .  .  .  nee  . .  .  ). 
Nervian,  Nervius,  -I,  M.  2. 
never,  numquam. 
nevertheless,  tamen. 
new,  novus,  -a,  -um. 
news,  aliquid  novl. 
night,  nox,  noctis,  -ium,    F.  3, 

271  [622]. 
(at)  night,  noctu. 
no.  Adj.,  nullus,  -a,  -um,  129  [642]. 
no,  in  Answers,   non,   minime, 

Superl.  of  parum,  639  [638]; 

implied  in  Questions,  num. 
no  longer,  non  lam;  nee  iam. 
no  one,  nemo,  nullius,  290. 


noise,  strepitus,  -us,  M.  4. 
none,  nullus,  -a,  -um,  129  [642]; 

nemo, nullius, 290;  mhi[,indecl. 

Noun. 
nor,  neque  (nec^. 
not,  nefor  Imperative,  Volitive, 

and  Optative  ideas  (except  in 

questions);   non  for  all  other 

ideas  and  all  questions. 
not,  in  questions,  nonne,  inter- 

rog.  Adv.  implying  ''•yes.'' 
not  at  all,  minime,  Superl.  of 

parum,  639  [638]. 
not  even,  ne  .  .  .  quidem. 
not  only  .  .  .  but  also,  non  solum 

or  non  modo  .  .  .  sed  etiam. 
not  yet,  nondum. 
nothing,  nihil,  indecl.  Noun. 
(for)  nothing,  sine  tilla  causa, 
notice,    animadverto,     -vertere, 

-verti,  -versum,  3. 
now,  (=  at  this  time)  nunc;  (=  by 

this  time),  iam. 
(just)  now,  modo. 
number,  numerus,  -i,  M.  2;  multi- 

tudo,  -inis,  F.  3. 
(a)  number  of,  complures,  -pluria 

or-a, -ium,  327  [633]. 

o,  o. 

oak,  robur,  roboris,  N.  3,  267 
[618]. 

observe,  observo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum, 
1. 

of,  of  Possession,  expressed  by 
Gen. ;  of  the  Whole,  expressed 
by  Gen.y  or  de  or  ex  with  Abl.; 
of  Separation ;  by  a  with  Abl., 
or  Abl.  alone ;  of  Cause  or  Rea- 
son by  Abl. 

of  war,  mllitaris,  -e. 


330 


Efiglish-Latin  Vocabulary 


often,  Baepe. 

(very)  often,  saepissime,  Superl. 

of  saepe,  539  [638]. 
oh,  o. 

old ,  vetus,  vetus,  veteris,  286  [629]. 
oldest,  maximus,  -a,  -urn,  Superl. 

o/magnus,  530  [635J. 
old-fashioned,  vetus,  vetus,  vete- 
ris, 286  [629]. 
on,  of  Place,  in  with  Abl;  of 

Time,  Ahl. ;  on  {the  front,  etc.), 

ab  or  ex  tvith  Abl. 
on  account  of,  ob  or  propter  with 

Ace. ;  Abl.  of  Cause  or  Reason. 
on  all  sides,  undique. 
on  every  side,  undique. 
(at)  once,  statim. 
one,  unus,  -a,  -um,  129  [642];  one 

{of  two),  alter,  -a,  -uid,130  [643]; 

one  {who  or  that),  talis  (qui)  or 

is  (qui). 
one  after  another,  deinceps. 
one  at  a  time,  singuli,  -ae,  -a. 
one  in  ten,  decimus  quisque. 
only,    Pronom.  Adj.,  solus,    -a, 

-um,  129  [642]. 
only,  Adv.,  solum;    modo;   tan- 

tummodo. 
(not)  only  .  .  .  but  also,  non  solum 

or  non  modo  .  .  .  sed  etiam. 
opportunity,  facultas,  -atis,  F.  3; 

potestas,  -atis,  P.  3. 
oppose,  obsto,  -stare,  -stiti,  -sta- 

tiirus,  1. 
opposed,  adversus,  -a,  -um,  with 

Dat. 
or,  aut,   vel  {giving  choice)-,  an 

{in  se  -ond  part  of  question). 

Either  ...  or,  aut .  .  .  aut;  vel 

.  .  .  vel;  whether  ...  or,  sive 

.  .  .  sive  (seu  .  .  .  seu). 


order,  impero,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1, 
with  Dat.  and  SiibJ.;  iubeo, 
iubere,  iussi,  iussum,  2,  with 
Ace.  and  Infln. 

(in)  order  to,  ut  with  Subj. ;  (in) 
order  not  to,  ne  loith  Subj. 

(without)  orders,  iniussd,  Adv. 

other,  alius,  alia,  aliud,  130  [643]; 
other  {of  two),  alter,  altera, 
alterum,  130  [643];  some  .  .  . 
others,  alii  .  .  .  alii. 

otherwise,  aliter. 

ought,  translated  by  Future  Pas- 
sive Participle  with  sum,  or  by 
Subj.;  also  by  debeo,  debere, 
debui,  debitum,  2. 

our,  noster,  nostra,  nostrum. 

our  men,  nostri,  -orum,  M.  PI.  2. 

(of,  etc.)  ourselves.  Reflexive, 
nostri,  etc.,  215  [654]. 

out  of,  ex  or  e,  with  Abl. 

out  of  what,  unde. 

pace,  passus,  -us,  M.  4. 

paint,  pingo,  pingere,  pinxi,  pic- 

tum,  3. 
part,    pars,    partis,    -ium,   P.   3; 

regio,  -onis,  P.  3. 
party,  pars,  partis,  or  partes,  par- 

tium,  P.  3. 
pass,  ago,  agere,  egi,  actum,  3. 
past,  praeter  with  Ace. 
pattern,    exemplar,    -aris,   -ium, 

N.  3,  270  [621]. 
peace,  otium,  -i,  P.  2. 
pebble,  lapillus,  -i,  JM.  2. 
people,  populus,  -i,  M.  2. 
perhaps,  forte  or  fortasse  with 

Indie. ;  f orsitan  with  Subj.  of 

Possibility. 
peril,  periculum,  -i,  N.  2. 


English-Latin  Vocabulary 


331 


period,  spatium,  -I,  N.  2. 

(be)  permitted,  licet,  licere,  licuit 

and  licitum  est,  2,  impers. 
persevere,   persevero,  -are,  -avi, 

-atum,  1. 
(in)  person,  per  me,  te,  or  se. 
persuade,    persuadeo,    -suadere, 

-suasi,  -suasum,  2,  with  Dat. 
pertain,  pertineo,  -tinere,  -tinui, 

-tentum,  2. 
pick  up,   excipio,   -cipere,  -cepi, 

ceptum,  3. 
place,   locus,  -i,  M.  2;  PL  loca, 

-orum,  N.  2. 
(in  the  first)  place,  primum. 
place,  pono,  ponere,  posui,  posi- 

tum,    3;    constituo,    -stituere, 

-stitui,   -stitutum,  3;   conloco, 

-are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
plan,  consilium,  -i,  N.  2. 
plan,  cogito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
(be)     pleasing,  =  please     {next 

word). 
please,   placeo,   placere,   placul, 

placitum,  2,  with  Dat. 
pleasing,  gratus,   -a,  -um,  with 

Dat. 
pledge     (one's     word),     (fidem) 

interpono,  -ponere,  -posul,  -posi- 

tum,  3. 
Pompeii,  Pompei,  -orum,  M.  PI.  2. 
popularity,  gratia,  -ae,  F.  1;  (be 

in  great  or  greater)  popularity, 

sum  in  magna  or  maiore  gratia. 
(take)  position,  consisto,  -sistere, 

-stiti, ,  3, 

possess  (=get   possession    of), 

potior,  potlri,  potitus  sum,  4. 
power,  potestas,  -atis,  P.  3. 
(be)  powerful,  valeo,  valere,  valul, 

valiturus,  2. 


practice,  exerceo,  exercere,  exer- 

cul,  exercitum,  2. 
praise,  laudo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
precede,  praecedo,  -cedere,  -cessi, 

-cessum,  3. 
prefer,  malo,  malle,  malui,  , 

irr.,  49»  [665]. 
prepare,  paro,  -are, -avi,  -atum,  1. 
prepared,  paratus,  -a,  -um,  Per/. 

Pass.  Partic.  of  paro. 
presence,  praesentia,  -ae,  F.  1. 
present,  donum,  -i,  N.  2. 
(be)present,  adsum,  adesse,  adf  ui, 

adfuturus,  irr.  [655]. 
preserve,    conserve,    -are,    -avi, 

-atum,  1. 
pretend,  simulo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum, 

1. 
pretense,  simulatio,  -onis,  F.  3. 
prevent,  prohibeo,  -hibere,  -hibul, 

-hibitum,  2;  obsto,  -stare,  -stitI, 

-staturus,  1. 
proceed,  procedo,  -cedere,  -cessi, 

-cessum,  3. 
proclaim,  pronuntio,    -are,   -avi, 

-atum,  1. 
profit    by,    fruor,    frui,    frtictus 

sum,  3,  with  Abl. 
promise,  polliceor,  polliceri,  pol- 

licitus  sum,  2. 
properly,  commode. 
protect,  tego,   tegere,  texi,   tec- 
tum, 3. 
Publius,  Publius,  -i,  M.  2. 
pupil,  discipulus,  -i,  M.  2. 
(for   the)   purpose    of,  causa  or 

gratia,  with  Gen.  of  Gerundive 

or  Gerund;  ad,  with  Gerundive 

or  Gerund;  ut  or  ne,  withSuhj. 
pursue,  insequor,  -sequi,  -secii- 

tus  sum,  3. 


332 


English-Latin  Vocabulary 


put  an  end  to,  finem  facio,  facere, 
feci,  factum,  3. 

queen,  regina,  -ae,  F.  1. 
quickly,  celeriter;  velociter. 

race,   gens,  gentis,   -ium,    F.  3, 

271  [622]. 
raise,  excito,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
ramparts,  vallum,  -I,  N.  2. 
rank,  ordo,  -inis,  M.  3. 
rash,  temerarius,  -a,  -um. 
rashly,  tetnere. 
(at  any)  rate,  certe;  quidem. 
read,  lego,  lege  re,  legi,  lectum,  3. 
read  up,  lego,  legere,  legi,  lec- 
tum, 3. 
ready  {^prepared),  paratus,  -a, 

-um,  from    paro,     -are,    -avi, 

-atum,  1;    promptus,  -a,  -um. 
real,  verus,  -a,  -um. 
really,  vero. 

rear,  tergum,  -I,  N.  2.  « 

reason,  causa,  -ae,  F.  1. 
(for  this)  reason,   ob  eam   cau- 

sam. 
(for  which)  reason,  quare. 
receive,    accipio,   -cipere,   -cepi, 

-ceptum,  3. 
recently,  nuper. 
recognize,  cognosc5,  cognoscere, 

cognovi,  cognitum,  3. 
(take)    refuge    with,    perfugio, 

-fugere,    -fugi,    -fugiturus,    3, 

with  ad. 
(have)  regard  for,  rationem  ha- 

beo,  habere,  habui,  habitum, 

2,  with  Gen. 
region,  regio,  -onis,  F.  3. 
rejoice,  laetor,  -ari,  -atus  sum,  1; 

gaudeo,  gaudere,  gavisuss  um,  2. 


(be)  reluctant,  gravor,  -ari,  -atus 

sum,  1. 
remain,  maneo,  manere,   mansi, 

mansum,  2. 
remaining,     reliquus,     -a,     -um. 

(Those)  remaining,  PL  of  reli- 
quus. 
remedy,  auxilium,  -i,  N.  2. 
remember,    memini,   meminisse, 

defective. 
Remi,  Remi,  -orum,  M.  PI.  2. 
report,     defero,      -ferre,     -tuli, 

-latum,  irr.,  622  [668]. 
reputation,  fama,  -ae,  F.  1. 
resist,    resisto,     -sistere,     -stiti, 

-stiturus,  3. 
resources,  opes,  opum,  F.  3,  PI. 

of  ops,  opis. 
(the)  rest,  reliqui,  -ae,  -a. 
retire,  me  recipio,  -cipere,  -cepi, 

-ceptum,     3;     pedem      refero, 

-ferre,  -tuli,   -latum,  irr.,  522 

[668]. 
retreat,  me  recipio,  -cipere,  -cepi, 

-ceptum,    3;      pedem     refero, 

-ferre,  -tuli,  -latum,  622  [668]. 
return,  reverter,  reverti  (Infln.), 

reverti    {Perf.),    reversum,    3. 

{Not  deponent  in  Perfect.) 
(in)  return  for,  pro  ivith  Abl. 
Rhine,  Rhenus,  -i,  M.  2. 
rise,  orior,  oriri,  ortus  sum,    4 

{in  several  forms,  3). 
river,  flumen,  -inis,  N.  3. 
road,  via,  -ae,  F.  1. 
Roman,  Romanus,   -a,  -um;  as 

Noun,  Romanus,  -i,  M.  2. 
Rome,  Roma,  -ae,  F.  3. 
rule,  lex,  legis,  F.  3. 
run,     curpo,     currere,     cucurri, 

cursum,  3, 


English-Latin  Vocabulary 


333 


run  away,    fugio,   fugere,   ftigi, 

fugiturus,  3. 
run  forward,  procurro,  -currere, 

-curri  and  -cucurri,  -cursum,  3. 
run  to  and  fro,  concurso,  -are, 

-avi,  -atum,  1. 

Sabinus,  Sabinus,  -I,  M.  2. 
safe,  tutus,  -a,  -um. 
safe  conduct,  tutum  iter, 
safety,  salus,  -utis,  F.  3. 
(for  the)  sake  of,  causa  or  gra- 
tia, with  Gen, 
sally,  eruptio,  -onis,  F.  3. 
sally  out,  erumpo,  -rumpere,  -ru- 

pl,  -ruptum,  3. 
salvation,  salus,  -titis,  F.  3. 
same,  idem,  eadem,   idem,  158 

[647]. 
satisfy,  satisfacio,  -facere,  -feci, 

-factum,  3. 
save,  servo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1 

Gonservo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
say,  dico,  dicere,  dixi,  dictum,  3 

he   says,  or  sa3rs   he,  inquit, 

following  one  or  more  words 
say  no,  nego,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1 
scarcity,  inopia,  -ae,  F.  1. 
scheme,  consilium,  -i,  N.  3. 
school,  schola,  -ae,  F.  1. 
schoolboy,  discipulus,  -i,  M.  2. 
schoolmate,    condiscipulus,     -i, 

M.2. 
scout,  explorator,  -oris,  M.  3. 
(in  the)  second  place,  deinde. 
see,  video,  videre,  vidi,  visum,  2. 
seek,  peto,  pete  re,  petivi,  peti- 

tum,  3. 
seem,  videor,  videri,  visus  sum,  2. 
select,   eligo,  -ligere,  -legi,  -lec- 

tum,  3. 


self.  Intensive,  ipse,  ipsa,  ipsum, 
139  [644];  Reflexive  {myself, 
yourself,  himself,  themselves, 
etc.),  mei,  tui,  eui,  215  [654]. 

send,  mitto,  mittere,  misi,  mis- 
sum,  3. 

send  around,  circummitto,  -mit- 
tere, -misi,  -missum,  3. 

send  back,  remitto,  -mittere, 
-misi,  -missum,  3. 

send  out,  emitto,  -mittere,  -misi, 
-missum,  3. 

serious,  gravis,  -e. 

servant,  (man)  servus,  -i,  M.  2; 
{woman)  serva,  -ae,  F.  1. 

served  ( ==  ready)  paratus,  -a,  -um, 
Perf.  Pass.  Partic.  of  paro. 

Servius,  Servius,  -i,  M.  2. 

set  on  fire,  incendo,  -cendere, 
-cendi,  -censum,  3. 

set  out,  proficiscor,  proficisci, 
profectus  sum,  3. 

set  up,  statuo,  statuere,  statui, 
statiitum,  3. 

seventh,  septimus,  -a,  -um. 

several,  aliquot,  indecL;  aliqui, 
-quae, -qua,  207  [653];quidam, 
quaedam,  quaedam,  193  [650]. 

Sextus,  Sextus,  -i,  M.  2. 

sharp,  acer,  acris,  acre,  293  [630]. 

she,  ea,  153  [64.6];  ilia,  145  [645]; 
ista,  14r5a  [645];  haec,  166  [648]. 

shield,  scutum,  -i,  N.  2. 

shout,  shout  out,  clamo,  -are, 
-avi,  -atum,  1;  conclaino,  -are, 
-avi,  -atum,  1. 

show,  doceo,  docere,  docui,  doc- 
tum,  2. 

side,  latus,  lateris,  N.3;  {=parttj) 
pars,  partis,  -ium,  F.3,  orpartes, 
partium,  F.  3,  PI. 


334 


English-Latin  Vocabulary 


side  by  side,  paribus  gradibus. 

(on  every)  side,  undique. 

siege,   oppugnatio,   -onis,    F.  3; 

obsidio,  -onis,  F.  3. 
(get)    sight   of,    conspicor,    -ari, 

-atus  sum,  1. 
simultaneously,  simul. 
since,  cum  with  Suhj.;  quoniam 

or  quando  with  Indie. ;   since 

he,  etc.,  qui,  etc.,  tvith  Subj. 
sister,  soror,  sororis,  F.  3. 
six,  sex,  indecl.  Adj. 
slaughter,  caedes,  -is,  -ium,  F.  3. 
slave,   {man)    servus,    -i,  M.    2, 

107  [615];  (woman)  eerva,  -ae, 

F.  1,86  [614]. 
sling,  funda,  -ae,  F.  1. 
slow,  tardus,  -a,  -um. 
slowly,  tarde. 
small,  parvus,  -a,  -um. 
smaller,  minor,  minus,  Compar. 

o/parvus,  530[635]. 
smallest,      minimus,     -a,     -um, 

Superl.  of  parvus,  630  [635]. 
so,  ita;  sic;  tam. 
(and)  so,  itaque. 
so  great,  tantus,  -a,  -um. 
so  that,  ut  with  Subj. 
soldier,  miles,  mllitis,  M..  3. 
some.    Adj.,   aliqui,   aliqua,    ali- 

quod,  207    [653];    aliquantus, 

-a,  -um. 
some,  nonnulli,  -ae,  -a. 
some  ....  others,  alii  ....  alil. 
some  on6.  Substantive,  aliquis, 

207  [653];  quis,  used  with  si, 

nisi,  ne,  etc.,  397,  a  [653]. 
something,  aliquid,  207  [653]. 
sometimes,  nonnumquam. 
somewhat,  aliquantum,  Ace.  of 

Degree,  equivalent  to  an  Adv. 


son,  fllius,  -I,  M.  2. 

soon,  mox. 

sound,  sonus,  -i,  M.  2. 

space,  spatium,  -I,  N.  2. 

spare,  parco,  parcere,  peperci  or 

pars!,  parstirus,  3,  with  Dat. 
,  speak,     loquor,     loqul,    loctitus 

sum,  3. 
spend,  conficio,  -ficere, -feci, -fee - 

tum,  3. 
spirit,  animus,  -i,  IVT.  2. 
splendid,  splendidus,  -a,  -um. 
sport,  Indus,  -i,  M.  2. 
stand,  sto,  stare,  stetl,  staturus, 

1. 
state,  civitas,  -atis,  F.  3. 
step,  gradus,  -us,  IM.  4. 
stern,  durus,  -a,  -um. 
still,  tamen. 
stone,  saxum,  -i,  N.  2. 
stop,  desisto,  -sistere,  -stiti,  -sti- 

ttirus,  3;  intermitto,  -mittere, 

-misi,  -missum,  3. 
storm,  tempestas,  -atis,  F.  3. 
stratagem,  dolus,  -i,  IVE.  2. 
stream,  rivus,  -I,  IM.  2. 
street,  via,  -ae,  F.  1. 
strength,  vires,  -ium,  F.  3,  PI.  of 

vis,  326  [626]. 
strengthen,     firmo,     -are,    -avi, 

-atum,  1;    confirmo,  -are,  -avi, 

-atum,  1. 
strive,  contendo,  -tendere,  -tendi, 

-tentum,  3. 
strong,  validus,  -a,  -um;  fortis,  -e. 
(be)  strong,  valeo,  valere,  valui, 

valiturus,  2. 
study,  studium,  -i,  N.  2. 
study,  studeo,  studere,    studui, 

-,2. 

(in)  succession,  deinceps. 


English-Latin  Vocabulary 


335 


such,  talis,  -e;  is,  ille,  etc.,  often 
with  Descriptive  qul-Clause, 
in  SubJ. 

sudden,  repentlnus,  -a,  -um. 

suffer,  doleo,  dolere,  dolui,  doli- 
turus,  2. 

sufficiently,  satis. 

suitable,  idoneus,  -a,  -um. 

summer,  aestas,  -atis,  P.  3. 

superior,  superior,  superius, 
Compar.  of  super  us,  531 
[636]. 

supper,  cena,  -ae,  F.  1. 

supply,  copia,  -ae,  F.  1. 

sure,  certus,  -a,  -um. 

(feel)  sure,  pro  certo  habeo,  ha- 
bere, habui,  habitum,  2. 

surround,  circumvenio,  -venire, 
-veni,  -ventum,  4;  circumdo, 
-dare,  -dedl,  -datum,  1. 

swiftly,  celeriter;  velociter. 

sword,  gladius,  -i,  M.  2. 

take,    capio,  capere,   cepi,  cap- 

tum,  3  [659]. 
take  to  flight,  me  in  fugam  do, 

dare,  dedi,  datum,  1. 
take  position,  consisto,  -sistere, 

-stiti, ,  3. 

take  refuge,    perfugio,    -fugere, 

-ftigi,  -fugittirus,  3,  with  ad. 
take  up,  capio,  capere,  cepi,  cap- 

tum,  3  [659]. 
talk,  sermo,  -onis,  M.  3. 
talk,  loquor,  loqui,  locutus  sum, 

3;    conloquor,  -loqui,   -locutus 

sum,  3. 
task,  opus,  operis,  N.  3. 
teach,  doceo,  docere,  docul,  doc- 

tum,  2. 
teacher,  magister,  -tri,  M.  2. 


tear    down,     scindo,     scindere, 

scidi,  scissum,  3. 
tell,  doceo,  docere,  docui,  doctum, 

2;  dico,  dicere,  dixi,  dictum,  3. 
ten,  decem,  indecl.  Adj. 
tent,  tabernaculum,  i,  N.  2. 
terms,  condicio,  -onis,  F.  3. 
terrify,    terreo,    terrere,    terrui, 

territum,  2. 
(thoroughly)    terrify,    perterreo, 

-terrere,  -terrui,  -territum,  2. 
territory,   fines,    finium,    M.    3, 

PZ.o/ finis,  271  [622]. 
terror,  terror,  -oris,  M.  3. 
than,  quam;    also  expressed  by 

Abl.  after  Comparatives. 
that,  Determinative  Pron.,  ille, 

ilia,  ilJud,  145  [645];  is,  ea,  id, 

153  [6461. 
that.  Relative  Pron.,  qui,  quae, 

quod,  184:  [649]. 
that,  ConJ.  after  ideas  of  Will, 

Wish,  Request,  or  Consent^  ut 

with  Subj. ;  that  not,  ne  with 

Subj. 
that    (English    more    generally 

from  .  .  .  ing,  etc.)  after  ideas 

of  Hindrance  or  Prevention, 

ne,  quominus,   or  quin,  with 

Subj.    {Originally    that   not.) 
that  (=  lest),  after  ideas  of  Fear, 

ne  with  Subj.;    that  not,   ut 

with  Subj. 
that,    of   Purpose    {-in   order 

that),  ut  with  Subj.   {with  a 

Comparative,  quo);    that  not, 

ne  with  Subj. 
that,  of  Result  {after  so,  such, 

etc.),  ut  with  Subj.;  that  not, 

ut  non  with  Subj.  {Consecutive 

Clauses  of  Fact). 


336 


English-Latin  Vocabtilary 


that,  in  Substantive  Clauses  of 
Fact  of  Consecutive  origin 
{originally  full  Result),  ut 
with  SubJ.;  that  not,  ut  non 
with  SubJ, 

that,  in  Substantive  Clauses  of 
Fact  not  of  Consecutive  origin, 
quod  with  Indie. ;  that  not, 
quod  non  with  Indie. 

that,  in  Principal  Statements  in 
Indirect  Discourse,  expressed 
by  using  Infin. 

that  of  yours,  iste,  -a,  -ud,  145, 
a[645J. 

their.  Gen.  PI.  of  is,  153  [646], 
ille,  145  [645],  iste,  145,  a  [645], 
or  hie,  166  [648];  their  (own), 
Reflexive,  suus,  -a,  -um. 

(they)  themselves.  Intensive,  PI. 
o/ipse,  -a,  -um,  139  [644]. 

(of,  etc.)  themselves.  Reflexive, 
sui,  etc.,  215  [654]. 

then,  turn;  tunc. 

theory,  ratio,  -onis,  F.  3. 

there.  Expletive,  not  translated. 

there,  o/PZace,  ibi. 

therefore,  itaque. 

thing  or  things,  res,  rei,  F.  5, 
395  [625];  often  translated  by 
Neut.  PI.  of  Adjectives  or  Pro- 
nouns. 

think,  puto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1; 
cogito,  -are,  -avI,  -atum,  1;  ex- 
istimo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1;  sen- 
tio,  sentire,  sensi,  sensum,  4. 

(way  of)  thinking,  sententia,  -ae, 
F.l. 

third,  tertius,  -a,  -um. 

this,  hie,  haee,  hoc,  166  [648];  is, 
ea,  id,  153  [646]. 

this  morning,  hodie  mane. 


this  of  yours,  iste,  ista,  istud, 
145,  a  [645]. 

thither,  eo. 

thoroughly  frighten,  thoroughly 
terrify,  perterreo,  -terrere,  -ter- 
rui,  -territum,  2. 

though,  see  although. 

thoughtless,  temerarius,  -a,  -um. 

three,  tres,  tria,  trium. 

through,  per  with  Ace. 

throw,  iacid,  iacere,  iecl,  iac- 
tum,  3;  mitto,  mittere,  misi, 
missum,  3. 

throw  down,  abicio,  -icere,  -ieci, 
-iectum,  3. 

thus,  sic;  ita. 

time,  tempus,  temporis,  N.  3. 

(at  that)  time,  tum;  tune. 

tire  out,  defatigo,  -are,  -avi, 
-atum,  1. 

Tivoli,  Tibur,  Tiburis,  N.  3. 

to,  generally  expressed  by  Dat. ; 
ofMotion,Sid  with  Ace;  ( =  into) 
in  with  Ace). 

to,  of  Purpose,  translated  by 
Dat ;  qui,  quo,  ut,  or  ne  with 
SubJ.;  Supine  in  -um;  ad  with 
•Gerundive  or  Gerund;  causa 
or  gratia  with  Gen.  of  Gerun- 
dive or  Gerund;  Fut.  Pass. 
Partic.  in  agreement  with  ob- 
ject of  verb. 

to  a  man,  ad  iinum. 

today,  hodie.. 

together,  iina;  inter  se. 

too  (=also),  quoque,  postpos. 

too  (=  too  much),  nimis;  often 
translated  by  Compar. 

too  late,  sero. 
'  too  much,  nimis.* 

toward  j  ad  with  Ace;  in  with  Ace. 


JE nglish-Latin  Vocabulary 


337 


tower,  turris,  -is,  -ium,  F.  3,  278 
[623]. 

town,  oppidum,  -i,  N.  2. 

tranquil,  tranquillus,  -a,  -um. 

Treviri,  Trevirl,  -orum,  M.  PL  2. 

tribune,  tribunus,  -i,  M.  2. 

triumph,  triumphus,  -I,  M.  2. 

trouble,  incommodum,  -i,  N.  2. 

true,  verus,  -a,  -um. 

trust,  fido,  fidere,  fisus  sum,  3, 
and  confldo;  -fidere,  -fisus  sum, 
3,  ivith  AbL  or  Dat.  (of  a  Per- 
son, Dat.  only). 

try,  experior,  -periri,  -pert  us 
sum,  4. 

turn,  verto,  vertere,  verti,  ver- 
sum,  3. 

two,  duo,  duae,  duo,  328  [640]. 

two  hundred,  ducenti,  -ae,  -a. 

unarmed,  inermis,  -e. 

under,  sub,  of  Motion   toward 

tvith  Ace. ;  of  Place  in  which 

icith  Abl. 
under  compulsion,   coactu,  AbL 

of  coactus,  -us,  M.  4. 
undertake,     conor,     -arl,     -atus 

sum,  1. 
undertaking,  conatus,  -us,  M.  4. 
unfriendly,  inimicus,-a,  -u.ui,with 

Dat. 
unhappy,    miser,    misera,    mise- 

rum. 
unless,  nisi, 
until,  dum,   donee,  quoad,  with 

Indie,  of  actual  past  acts,  and 

SubJ.  of  anticipated  acts. 
unworthy,  indignus,  -a,  -um,  with 

Abl. 
upon,  in,  of  Motion  toward  with 

Ace. ;  of  Rest  with  Abl. 


upon  ivith  a  Participial  Noun, 
translated  by  cum  with  SubJ.; 
ubi,  ut,  postquam,  or  simul 
atque,  with  Indie. ;  Abl.  Abso- 
lute; Perf.  Pass.  Partie.  of 
Deponent  Verb. 

urge,  hortor,  -arl,  -atus  sum,  1. 

us,  nos,  Nom.-Acc.  PI.  of  ego, 
214:  [654]. 

use,  utor,  uti,  usus  sum,  3,  icith 
Abl. 

valley,  vallis,  -is,  -ium,  F.  3;  con- 
vallis,  -is,  -ium,  F.  3. 

Vertico,  Vertico,  -onis,  M.  3. 

very.  Adj.,  ipse,  ipsa,  ipsum,  139 
[644]. 

very,  Adv.,  expressed  by  Superl. 
or  maxime. 

very  much,  pltirimum,  Ace.  of 
degree,  equivalent  to  an  Adv. 
Superl.  of  multum,  much,  539 
[638]. 

victory,  victoria,  -ae,  F.  1. 

vigorously,  impigre. 

villa,  villa,  -ae,  F.  1. 

wage  [war],  gero,  gerere,  gessi, 

gestum,  3. 
wait,  exspecto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
wait    for,    exspecto,    -are,    -avi, 

-atum,  1. 
walk,  ambulo,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
wall,  murus,  -i,  M.  2;  vallum,  -i, 

N.  2. 
wander,  vagor,  -arl,  -atus  sum,  1. 
want,  cupio,  cupere,  cupivi,  cupi- 

tum,  3;  volo,  velle,  volui,  * , 

irr.,  493  [665]. 
(not)  want  (be  unwilling),  nolo, 

nolle,    nolui,    ,    irr.,    493 

[665]. 


338 


English-Latin  Vocabulary 


war,  bellum, -i,  N.  2. 
(of)  war,  mllitaris,  -e. 
warn,    moneo,    monere,    raonul, 

monitum,  2  [657]. 
watch,  specto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum, 

1. 
■way  (=road  or  journey),  via,  -ae, 

F.  1;  iter,  itineris,  N.  3. 
way  {—habit),  mos,  moris,  M.  3. 
way  {^manner),  modus,  -i,  M.  2. 
way  of  thinking,  sententia,  -ae, 

F.  1. 
(give)  way,  cedo,   cedere,  cessi, 

cessum,  3. 
(in  this)  way,  sic;  ita. 
we,  nos,  Nom.  PI.  of  ego,  214 

[654]. 
weapons,  arma,  -orum,  N.  PI.  2; 

(missile)    weapon,    telum,    -i, 

N.  2. 
wear {= carry,  bear),geT6,  gerere, 

gessi,  gestum,  3. 
■weary,  defatigo,  -are,  -avI,  -atum, 

1. 
(be)  well,    valeo,    valere,  valui, 

valiturus,  2.  * 
(feel)  well,  valeo,   valere,   valui, 

valiturus,  2. 
■well,  bene, 
what,  Interrog.  Pron.,  quis,  quid, 

and  Interrog.  Adj.,  qui,  quae, 

quod,  184  [649];  what  {=hoiv 

great),  quantus,  -a,  -um. 
whatever,  quicumque,  quaecum- 

que,  quodcumque,  192  [649,  a], 
wheel    about,     signa    converto, 

-vertere,  -verti,  -versum,  3. 
when,  ubi  or    ut,  with  Indie; 

cum     with     Indie,     in     De- 
terminative   Clause,  Subj.  in 

Descriptive;  Abl.  Absolute. 


where,  ubi;  where  {=from. 
which),  unde. 

whether  ....  or,  sive  ....  sive 
(seu  ....  seu). 

which  {of.two),  uter,  -tra,  -trum, 
130  [643]. 

which,  Rel.,  qui,  quae,  quod; 
Interrog.,  quis  (qui),  quae, 
quid  (quod),  184  [649]. 

while,  dum,  with  Present  Indie, 
in  narration. 

(after  a)  while,  post  aliquantum 
temporis. 

(for  a  little)  while,  paulisper. 

who.  Pel.,  qui,  quae,  quod,  Inter- 
rog., quis  (qui),  quae,  quid 
(quod),  184  [649]. 

whole,  totus,  -a,  -um,  130  [643]; 
omnis,  -e. 

why,  cur. 

will,  voluntas,  -atis,  F.  3. 

willingly,  libenter. 

wing,  cornu,  -us,  N.  4,  369  [624], 

winter,  hiems,  hiemis,  F.  3. 

winter,  hiemo,  -are,  -avI,  -atum,  1. 

winter-camp,  winter-quarters, 
hiberna,  -orum,  N.  PI.  2. 

wisdom,  consilium,  -I,  N.  2. 

wish,  cupio,  cupere,  cuplvl,  cupl- 

tum,  3;   volo,  velle,  volul,  , 

irr.,  493  [665]. 

with,  cum  with  Abl.;  by  Abl. 
alone  to  express  Means,  and 
(often)  Manner,  513,  and  Ac- 
companiment, 507,  a ;  ( =at  the 
house  of  or  among)  a  pud  ivith 
Ace. 

withdraw,  decedo,  -cedere,  -cessi, 
-cessum,  3. 

within,  intra  with  Ace, 

without,  sine  with  Abl. 


English-Latin  Vocabulary 


339 


without  orders,  iniussu. 
•witness,  specto,  -are,  -avi,  -atum, 

1. 
woman,  femina,  -ae,  F.  1. 
wood,  woods,  silva,  -ae,  P.  1. 
word,  verbum,    i,  N.  2;  dictum, 

-I,   N.    2;    (=promise,    faith, 

pledge)  fides,  -el,  F.  5. 
work,  opus,  operis,  N.  3;   labor, 

-oris,  M.  3. 
work,  laboro,  -are,  -avi,  -atum,  1. 
worry,  lacesso,  lacessere,  laces- 
si  vl,  lacessitum,  3. 
worst,  pessimus,  -a,  -um,  Superl. 

of  malus,  630  [635]. 
worthy,    dignus,   -a,   -um,   with 

Ahl. 
would  that,  utinam  with  Subj. 
wound,  Yulnus,  vulneris,  N.  3. 
wound,  vulnero,  -are,  -avi,  -atum, 

1. 
write,   scribo,    scribere,    scripsi, 

scrip tum,  3. 


wrong,  iniuria,  -ae,  P.  1. 
wrong-doing,  maleficium,  -i,  N.2. 

year,  annus,  -i,  M.  2. 

yes,  ita,  etiam,  vero,  certe,  etc.; 

or  the  answer  may  be  given 

by  repeating  the  verb. 
yesterday,  heri. 
yet,  tamen. 
not  yet,  nondum. 
yield,  cedo,  cedere,  cessi,  cessum, 

3,  with  Dat. ;  concedo,  -cedere, 

-cessi,  -cessum,  3,  with  Dat. 
you,  tu,  tui;    PI.  vos,  e^c,  214 

[654]. 
your,  yours,  in  speaking  to  one 

person,    tuus,     -a,     -um;      in 

speaking   to   more   than  one, 

vester,  -tra,  -trum. 
yourself,  Reflexive,  tui,  etc.,   Ph 

vestri,  etc.,  215  [654]. 

zeal,  studium,  -i,  N.  2. 


GIRLS  PLAYING  AT  JACKSTONES 

From  a  Painting  found  in  Herculaneum 


THE  ANIO,  AS  IT  FALLS  BELOW  TIVOLI 


INDEX 


The  references  are  in  general  to  sections,  but  occasionally  to  pages,  marked  p.,  or  footnotes, 
marked  ?i.  Numbers  in  brackets  refer  to  the  Summary  of  Constructions  and  Forms,  pp.  240-290,  Roman 
numerals  not  attached  to  others  refer  to  Pronunciation,  pp.  1-li. 


a  and  a6,  choice  between,  p.  24,  n.  1. 

with  ablative  of  agent,  126. 
Ablative,  a  mixed  case,  71. 

general  forces,  72,  1,  2,  3  [591]. 

absolute,  308  and  a. 

of  accompaniment,  507  and  a. 

of  accordance,  455  and  a. 

of  agent,  126;  origin,  p.  44,  n.  2. 

of  cause  "or  reason,  440. 

of  comparison,  457. 

of  description,  390,  2. 

of  manner,  513. 

of  means  or  instrument,  274. 

of  measure  of  difference,  332. 
this  often  like  adverb,  p.  191,  n..  Ir 

of  place  in  which,  78,  a,  407,  3 ;  with 
names  of  towns,  domus,  and  rus, 
409,  3;  preposition  may  be  omitted 
with  certain  words,  410. 

of  place  from  which,  407, 1,  409, 1. 

of  point  of  view  from  which,  411. 

of  respect,  442. 

of  separation,  519. 

of  time  at  or  within  which,  399. 

of  way  or  manner,  513. 

with/rdo,  confidO,  432. 

with  opus  est,  445. 

with  prepositions  [592, 1]. 

with    iitor,    fruor,    fungoi%    potior, 
vescor,  334. 

summary  of  uses  of  ablative  [591]. 
Ablative  singular  third  declension,  in  -e 
or  -I,  293,  a,  319, 1-4,  320, 1-3. 

of  participles,  300,  a. 
Abstract  nouns,  defined,  p.  169,  n.  2. 
-ahus,  dative  and  ablative  in,  113. 
ac,  see  atque. 
Accent,  XI,  1, 2. 

in  genitive  and  vocative  of  nouns  in 
'ius  or  -ium,  112,  2,  a. 
Accompaniment,  with  cuni,  507. 

cum  omitted,  507,  a. 


Accordance,  ablative  of,  455  and  a. 
Accusative,  15. 
of  direct  object,  62. 
of  extent,  duration  or  degree,  434. 
this  often  like  adverb,  p.  191,  n.  1. 
of  place  to  which,  with  ad  or  in,  78, 
a;  with  sub,  467;  with  names  of 
towns,  domv^  and  rus,  409,  2. 
of  predicate  object,  with  verbs    of 

making,  choosing,  etc.,  330. 
becomes  subject  of  passive,  330,  a. 
of    space-relation    (not    separative, 

sociative,  or  locative),  78. 
of  subject  of  infinitive    in  indirect 

discourse,  465 ;  elsewhere,  542. 
"two  accusatives,"  330. 
with  prepositions,  78  [592,  II]. 
summary  of  uses  of  accusative  [589]. 
acer,  declension,  293  [630]. 
Active  voice,  defined,  122. 
ad,  with  accusative,  78  and  h. 
after  words  of  fitness  or  readiness, 

p.  98,  n.  5,  p.  116,  n.. 4. 
of  purpose  with  gerundive  or  gerund, 
p.  123,  n.  4. 
Adjectives,  defined,  12. 
declension:   first   and    second,    117 
[627, 628]  ;  third,  consonant  stems, 
286  [629] ;  t-stems,  293  [630,  631] ; 
pronominal,  129,  130  [642,  643]. 
comparison  of,  511, 530,  531  [634-36]. 
agreement  of,  119. 

through  infinitives,  295,  b. 
as  substantives,  146,  b. 
attributive,  25,  1. 

position  of,  19,  2. 
possessive,  34. 

position  of,  34,  a. 
predicate,  25,  2. 

position  of,  p.  19,  n.  1. 
with  dative,  67. 
Adjective  pronoun,  defined,  147. 


341 


342 


Index 


Adverbs,  defined,  36. 

formation,  p.  ISO,  n.  1,  537. 

comparison,  538,  539  [637,  6;38]. 

position  of,  38. 
Adversative  cwwi-clause,  489. 

g'Mi-clause,  479. 
-ae,  pronominal  ending,  166,  ?>,  184,  b. 
Agent,  ablative  of,  with  a  or  a6,  126, 

281;  dative  of,  281. 
ager^  declension.  111  [616]. 
Agreement,  general  nature  of,  13. 

of  adjectives  with  nouns,  119. 
through  infinitives,  295,  b. 

of  adjectives  with  infins.,  p.  38,  n.  1. 

of  appositive  nouns,  44, 

of  determinative  pronouns,  147. 

of  participles,  226,  a,  247,  b. 

of  predicate  nouns,  26. 

of  relative  pronouns,  189. 

of  verbs,  95,  b. 

summary  and  general  rule  [585]. 
a-i-,  pronunciation  of,  p.  55,  n.  4. 
aliquis  (-qui),  declension,  207  [653]. 
alius,  declension,  130  [643]. 

alius  . .  alius  .  . ,  one  .  .  anoth'jr,  131. 
Alphabet,  I. 

alter,  declension,  130  [643]. 
alter  .  .  alter  .  .  ,  one  .  .  the  other,  131. 
amandus  sum,  conjugation  [663]. 
amans,  declension,  300  [632]. 
amaturus  sum,  conjugation  [663]. 
ambo,  declension,  328  [640]. 
amo,  conjugation  in  full  [656]. 
animal,  declension,  270  [621]. 
Answers  to  questions,  174. 
Antecedent,  defined,  187,  2. 

sometimes      repeated     in     relative 
clause,  p.  158,  n.  1. 
Antepenult,  defined,  XI,  2. 

when  accented,  XI,  2. 
antequam  and  priusquam,  with  indica- 
tive of  actual  past  act  [597,111]. 

with  subjunctive  of  act  anticipated, 
356[596,  B,l]. 
Anticipatory  subjunctive,  defined,  343. 

close  to  fut.  indie,  in  meaning,  343,  c. 

translation  of,  343,  d. 

with  antequam,  priusquam,  356. 

with  dum,  donee,  quoad,  356. 

in  past-future  clauses  in  general,  382. 
see  b\so  past  future,  etc. 


Aoristic  idea,  defined,  221,  2. 
Aoristic  narrative  clause,  with  ubi,  ut, 

postquam,  simul  atque,  506. 
interchangeable  with  cwm-clause  of 

situation,  p.  224,  n.  2. 
Apposition    and    appositive,    defined, 

43,  a. 
agreement  of  appositives,  44. 
Article,  lacking  in  Latin,  6. 
''As  ...  as  possible,"  how  expressed, 

p.  236,  n.  3. 
atque  and  ac,  choice  between,  p.  66,  n.  1. 
Attempted  action,  imperf .  of,  p.  158,  n.  2. 
Attitude,  dative  after  words  of,  67. 
Attraction,  subjunctive  by,  545. 
Attributive  adjective,  25, 1. 
audio,  conjugation  in  full  [660]. 
aut  and  vel  distinguished,  195. 

"Before,"  moods  with  words  meaning, 

356  [597,  III]. 
bonus,  declension,  117  [627]. 

caedes,  declension,  271  [622]. 
capio,  conjugation  in  full  [659]. 
caput,  declension,  256  [617]. 
Cardinal  numbers  [639]. 
Cases,  defined,  15. 

endings  of,  see  endings. 

table  of  meanings,  80- 

summaries  of  uses  [585-94]. 
casus,  declension,  369  [624]. 
causa,  of  purpose,  p.  220,  n.  1. 
Cause,  expressed  by : 

ablative,  440. 

quod,  quia,   quoniam,  quando,  and 
indicative,  517. 

citm-clause,  subjunctive,  486,  c,  489, 

gm-clause,  subjunctive,  479, 
cedo,  original  meaning,  p.  72,  n.  1. 
certior,  declension,  286  [629]. 
Clause,  defined,  148, 1. 

for  kinds,  see  special  names. 

generally  modifying  forward,  p.  228, 
n.  3. 
Collective  noun,  defined,  31,  a. 
Combinations  of  words,  pronunciation 

in,X. 
Command,  imperative  of,  137. 

subjunctive  of,  347. 

in  indirect  discourse,  532,  c,  533. 


Index 


343 


Common  noun,  defined,  31, 
Comparative     adjectives,    declension, 
286,  287, 1  [629]. 
with  ablative,  457. 
Comparative  degree,  defined,  p.  Ill,  n. 

meaning  "  too,"  p.  187,  n.  4,  540, 
Comparison  of  adjectives : 
(first  shown,  p.  130,  n.  2,  p.  187,  n.  1.) 
regular,  in  -tor,  -issimus,  511,  1. 
in  -ior,  -errimus,  511,  2. 
in  -ior,  -illimus,  511,  3. 
with  magis^  maxime,  511,  ■!• 
irregular  or  defective,  530,  531, 
summary  [634-36]. 
Comparison  of  adverbs : 
(firstshown,  p.  130,  n.  2.) 
regular,  538. 

irregular  or  defective,  539. 
summary  [637-38]. 
Complementary  infinitive,  87,  b. 
Completed   action,   see    perfect,  past 

perfect,  future  perfect, 
complures,  declension,  327  [633]. 
Composite  origin  of  constructions,  ex- 
plained, 391, 1,  2. 
Composition,  genitive  of,  387. 
Compound  verbs  with  dative,  527. 
Concern,  dative  of,  260. 
Conclusions,  see  conditions. 
Concrete  noun,  defined,  p.  169,  n.  3. 
Concrete  object  for  which,  430, 
Conditions  and   conclusions,  defined, 
494, 
introduced  by  si,  nisi,  relatives,  or 

conjunctions,  494,  a, 
individual  and  general,  494,  b. 
neutral  (implying  nothing  as  to  fact), 

496, 
more  vivid  future,  498, 1 ;  less  vivid 

future,  498,  2. 
contrary  to  fact,  524. 
general  table,  525, 
confido,  dative  and  ablative  with,  432. 
Conjugation  defined,  92, 
Conjugations  distinguished  by  charac- 
teristic vowels,  9^, 
for  details,  see  first  conjugation,  sec- 
ond conjugation,  third  conjuga- 
tion, etc. 
Conjunctions,  defined,  14. 
frequent  omission  of ,  p  47,  n.  1. 


Consecutive  subjunctive,  defined,  418, 
419  andl,  2,  420. 
with  qui^  cum,  ut,  ut  nan,   quin, 
421,1-3,446. 
Consonant  stems,  see  third  declension. 
Consonantal  i,  V. 
Consonants,  pronunciation,  V. 
Constructiohs,  summaries  of  [585-612]. 
Constructions  of  composite  origin,  391 , 

1,2. 
consuetildine,  ablative  of  accordance, 

455,  a. 
Contraction    in    forms    from    perfect 
stems  in  -avi,  -evT,  -ivl,  p.  224,  n.  4. 
Contrary  to  fact,  see  conditions  and 

conclusions, 
cornu,  declension,  369  [624]. 
corpus,  declension,  265  [620]. 
cum,  conjunction: 
with  indicative,  determinative,  426, 
p.  239,  n.  2,  end. 
generalizing,  494,  h;  p.  226,  n.  1. 
summary  for  indicative,  p.  227,  n.  1. 
with  subjunctive,  descriptive,  487. 
lightest  touch  of,  p.  239,  n.  2. 
interchangeable  with  clause  with 

uhi,  ut,  etc.,   506,  a. 
descriptive  with  additional  causal 

or  adversative  idea,  488. 
(purely)  causal  or  adversative,  489. 
summary  for  subjunctive,  p.  224,  n.  5. 
cum,  preposition  with  ablative,  74. 
enclitic  with  personal,  relative,  and 

interrogative  prons.,  p.  167,  n.  1. 
with    ablative    of    accompaniment, 
507. 
when  omitted,  507,  a, 
when  used  with  ablative  of  way  or 
manner,  513. 
Customary  action,  imperfect  of,  p.  159, 
n.  2. 

Dative,  general  force,  55. 
of  agent,  with  future  passive  parti- 

ciple,  281. 
of  concrete  object,  430, 
of  indirect  object,  65, 
of  person  judging,  295, 
of  possession,  289. 
of  reference  or  concern,  260. 
of  tendency,  purpose,  or  result,  428. 


344 


Index 


Dative,  continued: 

"predicate  dative,"  p.  169,  n.  1. 

"  two  datives,"  p.  169,  n.  1. 

with  adjectives,  67. 

vfithfldo  and  confidd,  432. 

with  impersonal  verbs,  402. 

with  verbs  compounded  with  prepo^ 
sitions,  527. 

with  "  verbs  meaning  believe,  favor, 
help,"  etc.,  see  next  lines. 

with  words  of  quality,  attitude,  or 
relation,  67. 

summary  of  uses  of  dative  [588]. 
de  or  ex   with   ablative,  in   place  of 

genitive  of  the  whole,  202,  b. 
Declension,  defined,  79. 

of  nouns,  see  first  declension^  etc. 

of  adjectives,  see  adjectives. 

of  participles,  see  participles. 

of  pronouns,  see  pronoun  desired. 
Degree,  accusative  of,  434. 
Degree  of  difiference,  see  measure  of 

difference. 
Deliberative   questions,    p.    134,    n.  2, 

p.  139,  n.  9. 
Demonstrative,  see  determinative. 
Deponent  verbs,  defined,  313. 

principal  parts,  314. 

voice  of  participles  of,  315. 
Descriptive  idea,  expressed  by : 

adjective,  12. 

ablative,  390,  2. 

genitive,  390, 1. 

gm-clause,  421, 1,  422,  c. 

cttm-clause,  421,  487. 
with  additional  idea  of  cause  or 
opposition,  488. 
Determinative  idea,  expressed  by  : 

determinative  pron.,  p.  51,  n.  1,  147. 

cwm-clause,  426,  p.  227,  n.  1,  p.  239,  n.  2. 

gwi-clause,  426. 
Determinative  pronoun,  defined,   145 
and  n.  1. 

used  as  adjective,  147. 
as  personal  pronoun,  214. 

for  hie,  is,  iste^  ille^  see  word  desired. 

position  of,  133,  147,  a. 
die,  imperative  of  dico,  p.  204,  n.  1. 
diex,  decl.,  395  [625] ;  gender,  396. 
Diphthongs,  pronunciation,  IV. 

are  long,  VII,  b. 


Direct  discourse,  defined,  463. 
Direct  object,  defined,  61 ;  case  of,  62. 
Direction  in  space,  how  expressed  : 

literal,  78,  b. 

figurative,  55  and  a,  78,  b. 
dis-,  meaning,  p.  150,  n.  3. 
Division  of  syllables,  VI. 
Divisions  of  time,  251. 
do,  short  a  in  conjugation,  p.  59,  n.  1. 
domus,  declension,  406  [626]. 

cases  in  constructions  of  place,  409, 
1,  a,  2,  a,  3,  a. 
donee,  moods  with,  see  dum. 
donum,  declension,  107  [615]. 
Double  connective,  p.  220,  n.  5. 
due,  imperative  of  duco,  p.  204,  n.  1. 
dum,  "while,"  with  present  indicative 
in  narration,  p.  126,  n.  1. 

"until,"  with  indicative  of  actual  past 
act,  p.  218,  n.  2. 
with  subjunctive  of   act  antici- 
pated, 356. 

summary  of  mood-uses,  p.  218,  n.  2. 
duo,  declension,  328  [640]. 
duplex,  declension,  293  [631]. 
Duration,  accusative  of,  434. 

-e  or  -I  in  ablative  singular,  319,  1-4, 

320, 1-3. 
e-i-,  pronunciation  of,  p.  55,  n.  4. 
e  and  ex,  choice  between,  175. 
ego,  declension,  214  [654]. 

when  expressed  as  subject,  140. 
-ei  or  -ei  in  fifth  declension,  395,  b. 
eius,  distinguished  from  suus,  216,  1 

and  2. 
pronunciation,  p.  55,  n.  4. 
Emphatic  order,  see  order. 
Enclitic,  defined,  p.  46,  n.  2. 
enclitic   conjunction   introducing  a 

clause,  position  of,  148, 1,  a. 

Endings,  in  conjugation,  personal,  124. 

in    declension :    first,    86 ;     second, 

107;   third,  256,   257;    fourth, 

369;  fifth,  395. 
English    present   participle,   frequent 

inexactness  of,  p.  225,  n.  1. 
Entreaty,  see  request, 
eo,  conjugation,  503  [667]. 
-es  and  -is  in  third  declension,  319,  i,  2, 

320,2,3. 


Index 


345 


esse,  often  omitted  in  perfect  passive 
infinitive,  almost  always  so  in  fu- 
ture active  infinitive,  p.  180,  n.  1. 

ex  or  e,  choice  between,  175. 

Exactness,  quantity,  and  number,  posi- 
tion of  words  of,  133. 

exemplar^  declension,  270  [621]. 

e^cernpio,  ablative  of  accordance,  455,  a. 

Exhortation,  subjunctive  of,  p.  134,  n.  1. 

Expletive,  defined,  p.  30,  n.  1,  p.  88,  n.  1. 

Extent  of  space,  accusative  of,  434. 

facio,  passive  of  compounds  of,  502,  a. 

imperative, /ac,  522  and  n.  1. 
Fact,  indicative  of,  59  [597]. 

subjunctive  of  (existing  in  consecu- 
tive clauses  only),  421. 

substantive  gwod-clause  of,  444. 
Fear,  clauses  of,  353. 
Feminine  gender   of   nouns :    in  first 
decl.,  105;   second,   106;    third, 
324,  3;  fourth,  370;  fifth,  396. 
fero,  conjugation,  522  [668]. 
/Tdo,  dative  and  ablative  with,  432. 
Fifth  declension,  395  [625]. 

genders  in,  396. 
Figurative  and  literal  direction,  expla- 
nation of  terms,  p.  17,  n.  1. 
filia,  dative  and  ablative  plural,  113. 
fllius,  gen,  and  voc.  sing.,  112, 1,  2. 
finis,  declension,  271  [622]. 
Finite  moods,  defined,  p.  44,  n.  1,  338. 
fid,  conjugation,  502  [666]. 
First  conjugation,  in  full  [656]. 
First  declension,  of  nouns,  86. 

genders  in,  105. 

of  adjectives,  117  [627,  628]. 
Five  ways  of  introducing  main  verb, 

p.  233,  n.  1. 
fore    and  futurum    esse  with   ut  and 

subj.  for  future  infinitive,  466. 
Formal  ut,  p.  136,  ns.  1,  5. 
Forms,  summary  of  [613-68]. 
fortis,  declension,  293  [630]. 
Forward-moving    rel.    clause,    p.   171, 

n.  1. 
Fourth  conjugation,  in  full  [660]. 
Fourth  declension,  369  [624]. 

genders  in,  370. 
fruor,  ablative  with,  334. 
/nng^or,  ablativfe  with,  334. 


Future  conditions  and  conclusions: 

more  vivid,  498, 1 ;  less  vivid,  498,  2. 
Future   imperative,    formation,    448; 

meaning,  449. 
Future  indicative,  formation,  157,  a, 

206,  a;  meaning,  157,  6. 
Future  infinitive,  formation,  460,  3; 
meaning,  462. 
replaced  often   by  fore  or  futurum 
esse  with  subjunctive,  466. 
Future  participle  : 
active,  formation  and  decl.,  233,  1. 
meaning,  233,  2. 

when  given  in  principal  parts,  234. 
passive,  formation  and  decl.,  279. 
generally     expresses     obligation, 

propriety,  or  necessity,  280. 
with  dative  of  agent,  281. 
agreeing  with  object  may  express 

purpose,  p.  216,  n.  3. 
used  impersonally,  p.  187,  n.  2. 
Future  perfect  indicative: 
formation,  active,  243,  passive,  248. 
meaning,  243,  a. 
Future  perfect  subjunctive,  expressed : 
by  perf.  subj.,  497,  6,  p.  234,  n.  2,  or 
past  perf.  subj.,  p.  222,  n.  5.      ' 
Future  point  of  view,  251,  a,  253  and 
254  (headings),  379  and  a,  380. 
Future  subjunctive,  expressed  by  pres. 
subj.,  497,  a  and  6,  p.  234,  n.  2,  or 
imperf .  suIdj.,  379  and  a,  p.  234, n.2. 
futurum  esse  ut,  see  fore  ut. 

Gender,  grammatical,  p.  35,  n.  1;  in 
first  declension,  105 ;  in  second 
declension,  106 ;  in  third  declen- 
sion, 324;  in  fourth  declension, 
370;  in  fifth  declension,  396. 
Generalizing  conditions  and  conclu- 
sions, 494,  b,  p.  226,  n.  1. 
Generalizing     pronoun,     quicumque, 

192 ;  also  qui,  494,  a. 
Genitive,  defined,  53. 
forms,  see  first  declension,  etc. 
descriptive,  390, 1. 
objective,  209. 

of  material  or  composition,  387. 
of  the  whole  ("partitive"),  202. 
possessive,  53. 
summary  of  uses  of  genitive  [587]. 


346 


Index 


gens,  declension,  271  [622]. 
Gerund,  defined,  470,  2. 
for  uses,  see  gerundive  and  gerund 
below. 
Gerundive,  defined,  303,  470, 1. 
for  uses,  see  gerundive  and  gerund 
below. 
Gerundiye  and  gerund,  choice,  474,  a. 
uses  in  general,  473,  474. 
in    genitive   with    causa  or  gratia, 

expressing  purpose,  p.  220,  n.  1. 
with  ad,  expressing  purpose,  p.  123, 
n.  4. 
gratia,   of    purpose,    see    fourth   line 

above. 
Growth  of  language,  two  principles  in, 
391. 

Habitual  action,  imperfect   of,  p.  159, 

n.  2. 
Harmony     of     tenses    ("sequence"), 

475,1. 
Helping  tenses,  p".  222,  n.  2. 
hie,  declension,  166  [648]. 

distinguished  from  is,  iste,  ille,  167, 1. 
Hindering,  substantive  clauses  after 

verbs  of,  352(2). 
Historical  infinitive,  515. 

subject  in  nominative,  515. 
Historical  present,  504  and  a. 
'  Hortatory  "  subjunctive,  fee  volitive 
subjunctive,  and  exhortation. 

i  as  consonant,  V.' 

-I  or  -e  in  ablative  singular,  319,  1-4, 

320, 1-3. 
-I,  pronominal  dative  ending,  129. 
i-stems,  see  third  declension. 
Idem,  declension,  158  [647]. 
iens,  participle  of  eo^  declension,  503 

[667]. 
ignis,  declension,  278  [623]. 
ille,  declension,  145  [645]. 

as  personal  pronoun,  167,  3. 

distinguished  from  hie,  is,  iste,  167, 1. 

with  descriptive  meaning,  422. 
Imperative  mood,  formation  (all  con- 
jugations), 448. 

tenses  of,  449. 

uses  of,  137. 

die,  duc,fac,fer,  p.  204,  n.  1. 


Imperfect  indicative,  formation,  144, 

a,  198,  a,  b. 
tense  sign,  144,  a. 
meaning,  144,  b. 
how  diff(  ring  from  perfect,  compare 

144,  b,  and  221,  2. 
of  attempted  action,  p.  158,  n.  2. 
of  habitual  action,  p.  159,  n.  2. 
Imperfect      subjunctive,      formation, 

377,  a. 
tense  meaning,  379,  382,  p.  234,  n.  2. 
of  action  that  had  been  for  some  time 

going  on,  p.  215,  n.  1. 
impero,  takes  subjunctive,  543,  a. 
Impersonal  verbs,  400  and  a. 
any  verb  may  be  so  used,  401. 
dative  remains  with  passive,  402. 
in  with  ablative,  78,  a. 
with  accusative,  78,  a,  b. 
=  "at,"  with  accusative,  p.  67,  n.  1. 
=^"  for,"  of  effect  to  be  produced,  with 

ace,  p.  110,  n.  1. 
Indefinite  pronouns,  declension  of : 
aliquis  i-qui),  207  IQ^S]. 
quis  (qui),  397,  ct. 

uses  and  position  of  quis,  397. 
quidam,  193. 
Indicative,  formation  and  tenses,  see 

present,  imperfect,  etc. 
mood  of  fact,  declaring,  inquiring, 

or  assuming,  59  [597]. 
in  independent  statements  and  ques- 
tions of  fact,  59  [597, 1]. 
in  dependent  clauses  of  fact: 
aoristic  narrative  clauses  with  ubi, 

ut,  postquam,  simul  atque,  505. 
determinative  clauses:  with  cum, 

426,  with  qui,  426. 
general  conditions  of   fact,   494,  b, 

496. 
more  vivid  future.conditions,  498,  1 ; 

table,  525. 
neutral  conditions,  496;  table,  525. 
of  actual  past  act  with  words  mean- 
ing "before"  or  "until,"  p.  207, 

ns.6,  7,p.  218,  n.2. 
of  cause  or  reason  with  quod,  quia, 

quoniam,  quando,  517- 
quod-clause  of  respect,  444,  a. 
substantive  quod-clause  of  fact,  444. 
summary  of  uses  of  indicative  [597]. 


Index 


347 


Indirect  discourse,  defined,  463,  a. 
general  rule  for,  533. 
table,  534. 

indirect  clauses  of  cause  or  reason 
with  quod,  quia,  quoniam,  quan- 
do,  533  and  c. 
indirect  commands  or  prohibitions, 

533,  534.    See  also  p.  218,  n.  9. 
indirect  questions  of  fact,  533,  534. 
indirect  statements  of  fact,  465,  533, 
534. 
omission  of  subject,  465,  a. 
omission  of  esse,  p.  222,  n.  3. 
tenses  in,  463,  c,  464. 
indirect   subordinate   clauses,    533, 
534. 
Indirect  object,  dative  of,  65. 
Infinitive,  defined,  87. 
origin  of,  p.  181,  n.  1. 
formation,  138,  460, 1-3. 
esse  often   omitted   in   compound 
tenses,  p.  180,  n.l. 
meanings  of  tenses,  462. 
distinguishing  conjugations,  92. 
as  subject,  object,  or  complement,  87 
and  a,  h;  in  freer  relations,  542. 
historical  infinitive,  515. 

subject  in  nominative,  515. 
in  indirect  discourse,  465,  533. 
subject  in  accusative,  465. 
subject  omitted,  465,  o. 
in  rivalry  with  subjunctive,  543,  a. 
Xnsigne,  declension,  270  [621]. 
Instrument,  ablative  of,  274. 
-10,  of  third  and  fourth  conjugations, 

178, 1,  2, 179. 
Interjections,  defined,  46. 
Interrogative  particles,  173,  2-4. 
Interrogative  pronoun,  defined,  186. 
Intransitive  verb,  defined,  63  and  a. 
Introducing  main  verb,  five  ways  of, 

p.  233,  n.  1. 
ipse,  declension  and  meaning,  139  [644]. 

distinguished  from  se,  p.  83,  n.  4. 
Irregular  comparison,  see  comparison, 
is,  declension,  153  [646]. 
as  personal  pronoun,  167,  3. 
distinguished  from  hie,  ille,  iste, 

167,  2. 
general  use,  167,  2,  3.   - 
descriptive,  =  talis,  422,  p.  230,  n.  4. 


-IS  and  -es  in  third  declension,  319, 1,2, 

320,  2,  3. 
Islands,  small^   expressions   of   place 

with  names  of,  409, 1-3. 
iste,  declension,  145,  d  [645]. 

meaning,  167,  1. 
iubed,  takes  infinitive,  543,  a. 
-ius  and  -ium,  genitive  and  vocative 

singular  of  nouns  in,  112, 1,  2. 
-lus,  pronominal  genitive  ending,  129. 

"  Jussive  subjunctive  "  =  volitive. 

Leading  evonts,  tenses  of,  p.  222,  n.  2. 
Less  vivid  future  conditions  and  con- 
clusions, 498,  2 ;  table,  525. 
Locative,  force  of  word,  p.  23,  n.  3. 
Locative  ablative,  72,  3. 
Locative  case,  use  of,  409,  3. 
Long  vowels,  see  vowels. 

maiar,  pronunciation,  cf.  p.  55,  n.  4. 

malo,  conjugation,  493  [665]. 

Manner,  ablative  of,  513. 

Masculine  gender  of  nouns:  in  first 
decl.,  105;  second,  106;  third, 
324,  2;  fourth,  370;  fifth,  396. 

Material  or  composition,  gen.  of,  387. 

Means  or  instrument,  ablative  of,  274. 

Measure  of  difiference,  ablative  of,  332. 
this  often  like  adverb,  p.  191,  n.  1. 

mei,  mihi^  me,  personal  pronoun,  214 
[654] ;  reflexive,  215  [654]. 

Mental  certainty,  expressed  by  sub- 
junctive, 365,  368,  VII. 

meus,  vocative  singular  mi,  112,  b. 
omission  of,  35. 

Middle  verbs,  311. 

miles,  declension,  256  [617]. 

mille,  declension  and  use,  490. 

miror,  conjugation  [662]. 

miser,  declension,  117  [628]. 

Mixed  stems,  see  third  declension. 

Modifier,  defined,  16. 

monens,  declension,  300  [632]. 

moneo,  conjugation  in  full  [657]. 

Monosyllable,  defined,  p.  33,  n.  2. 

Mood,  defined,  59,  a,  368,  c. 
for  details,  see  indicative,  etc. 

More  vivid  future  conditions  and  con- 
clusions, 498, 1 ;  table,  525. 


348 


Index 


mos^  declension,  265  [620 J. 

more,  ablative  of  accordance,  455,  a. 
multitudo,  declension,  264  [619]. 
multum,  in  ace.  of  degree,  p.  191,  n.  1. 
Mute  consonants,  defined,  p.  125,  n.  2. 

Natural    harmony     of    tenses     ("se- 
quence ")  475, 1  [611,  612] ;  477  [610]. 

Natural  likelihood,  expressed  by  sub- 
junctive, 368,  V. 

-ne,  interrogative  enclitic,  173,  2. 

ne,  see  negatives. 

nee,  see  neque. 

necesse,  indeclinable  noun,  374. 
in  predicate  =  "necessary,"  374. 

Negatives : 
ne  for  imperative,  449. 
for  optative,  368,  b. 
for  volitive,  344,  368,  h. 
non  for  other  subjunctives,  368,  b. 
for  all  questions,  349,  b. 
for  indicative,  59,  c. 

nemo,  declension,  290 

wegue  and  nec,choice  between,  p. 66,  n.l. 
corresponding  to  non,  181,  565, 

neuter,  declension,  129  [642]. 

Neuter  gender  in  second  declension, 
106 ;  in  third,  324, 1., 

Neuter  i-stems,  270  [621]. 

Neutral  conditions    and    conclusions, 
496 ;  table,  525. 

neve  (neu),  corresponding  to  ne,  565. 

"No"  in  answers,  174, 1,  2. 

noli  with  infinitive= prohibition,  p.  195, 
n.3. 

nolo,  conjugation,  493  [665]. 

nomen,  declension,  264  [619]. 

Nominative  as  subject,  24. 

non,  see  negatives. 

nonne,  in  questions,  173,  3. 

Normal  order,  see  order. 

noster,  distinguished  from  mens,  216, 1. 

nostri,  reflexive,  declension,  215  [654]. 

nostrum,  -tri,  distinguished,  214,  a. 

"Noun  clauses,"  see  S'Mfes/a?iiiuec/aztses. 

Nouns,  defined,  12. 
declension,  see  iirst  declension,  etc. 
genders,  see  gender. 
common  nouns,  defined,  31. 
collective  nouns,  defined,  31,  a. 
proper  nouns,  defined,  30. 


used  as  appositives,  44. 
as  predicates,  26  and  a. 
as  subjects,  24. 

for  other  uses, see  greni<iue,da<<ve,etc. 
nox,  declension,  271  [622]. 
nullus,  declension,  129  [642]. 
num,  in  questions,  173,  4. 
Number,  defined,  79,  84. 
Numerals,  list  [639]. 

position  of,  p.  46,  n.  1. 

Object  of  verb,  direct,  62 ;  indirect,  65. 
Objective  genitive,  209. 
Obligation  or  propriety,    may  be  ex- 
pressed by  subjunctive,  368,  IV. 
Obligation,    propriety,    or    necessity, 
may  be  expressed  by  future  pas- 
sive participle,  280. 
Obstructed  consonants,  VI,  3,  a. 
Omission : 
of  conjunction,  p.  47,  n.  1. 
of  esse  in  compound  forms  of  the  in- 
finitive, p.  180,  n.  1. 
in  indirect  discourse,  p.  222,  n.  3. 
of   cum,  in  ablative   of   accompani- 
ment, 507,  a. 
in  ablative  of  manner,  513. 
of  in  with  certain  phrases,  410- 
of  personal  pronoun,  35. 
of  possessive  adjective,  35-    • 
in  general,   of  words  easily  under- 
stood, p.  5,  n.  1. 
Opposition,  see  subj.,  adversative. 
Optative  subjunctive,  368,  III. 
in  substantive  clauses,  375,  3. 
oratio  obliqua,  see  indirect  discourse. 
Order,  normal,  19,1. 
normal  position  of: 
adjective,  19,  2. 
adverb,  38. 
dative,  54,  a. 

determinative  pronoun,  133, 147, a. 
genitive,  53,  a. 
indirect  object,  65,  a. 
numeral,  133  and  n.  1. 
possessive  adjective,  34,  a. 
predicate  adj.  or  noun,  p.  19,  n.  1. 
pronominal  adjective,  132. 
vocative,  45,  a. 

words  of  exactness,   quantity,  or 
number,  133. 


Index 


349 


emphatic  order,  19,  3,  49,  50. 
most   emphatic    places   first    and 

last,  50,  p.  222,  n.  7. 
immediate     arrest    of    attention, 

effect  of,  p.  15,  n.  2,  49, 1. 
suspense,  effect  of,  50,  a,  p.  222,  n.  7. 

slight  suspense,  p.  76,  n.  1. 
preposition  emphasized,  p.  27,  n.  1. 
group  order :   adjective,  preposition, 

noun,  p.  64,  n.  1. 
causa  and  gratia  follow  the  words 

that  depend  upon  them,  p.  220, 

n.l. 
most  clauses  modify  forward,  p.  228, 

n.3. 
relative  clause  leading,  p.  228  n.  4. 
Ordinals  [639]. 

Participles,  defined,  226. 
formation  and  declension,  see  parti- 
ciple desired, 
agreement  of,  226,  a,  247,  c. 
express  situation,  p.  226,  n.  6. 
perfect    active    English    participle, 
how  expressed,  p.  225,  n.  1. 
partior^  conjugation  [662]. 
''  Partitive  genitive,"  see   genitive  of 

the  whole. 
Parts  of  speech,  81. 
Passive  voice,  defined,  122. 
Past  future  idea,  only  subjunctive  can 
express,  382. 
expressed  by  imperfect  subj.,  382,  a. 
by  past  perfect  subj.,  p,  222,  n.  5. 
Past    perfect    indicative,    formation, 

238 ;  tense-force,  239. 
Past  perfect  subj.,  formation,  437. 
as  past  future  perfect,  p.  222,  n.  5. 
Past  point  of  view,  379,  380,  382. 
pater ^  declension,  257  [618]. 
Penult,  defined,  XI,  1. 

when  accented,  XI,  1,  2. 
"  Perfect  definite,"  p.  84,  n.  1. 
"  Perfect  indefinite,"  p.  84,  n.  2. 
Perfect  indicative,  formation,  active, 
225 ;  passive,  247. 
two  forces,  present  perfect  and  past 
aorist,  221. 
Perfect  infinitive,   formation,    active, 
460,2;  passive,  460,  2. 
tense  meanings,  462. 


Perfect  passive  participle,  formation 
and  declension,  227,  2. 
meaning,  227, 1, 
agreement,  226,  a. 
Perfect  passive  tenses,  formation,  247, 

248. 
Perfect  stem,  formation,  225  and  a. 
Perfect  subjunctive,  formation,  active 
and  passive,  415. 
used  as  future  perf .,  497, 6,  p.  2.34,  n.  2. 
Perfect  tenses  with  present  meaning 

(novr,  etc.),  309,  310. 
Periphrastic  conjugations,  active,  233, 
2,  6;  passive,  280,  a;  forms  in 
full  [663]. 
restriction  of  uses  [663,  a]. 
Person,  of  pronouns,  213. 

of  verbs,  60  and  a. 
Person  judging,  dative  of,  295. 
Person  or  thing  affected, dative  of ,  after 

compound  verbs,  527. 
Personal  endings  of  verbs,  124. 
Personal  pronouns,  defined,  213. 
declension,  214  [654]. 
four  of  the  third  person,  167,  3. 
when  expressed  as  subjects,  140. 
Phrase,  first  defined,  p.  7,  n.  1 ;  more 

fully  defined,  148,  2. 
Picturesque  tenses,  504,  a  [612,  6]. 
piger,  declension,  117  [628]. 
Place,   general  expression  of,  78,  a, 
407,  1-3;  preposition  in  may  be 
omitted  with  certain  very  com- 
mon words,  410. 
with  names  of  towns,  etc.,  409i  1-3. 
Pluperfect,  see  pasiper/ec^. 
plus,  declension,  327  [633]. 
plus^plurimum,  in  accusative  of  degree 

p.  175,  n.  5,  p.  191,  ns.  1,  2. 
Point  of  view  from  which,  411. 
Point  of  view  in  tenses,  475, 1,  2. 
Position  of  words,  see  order. 
Possessive,  expressed  by  genitive,  53. 
by  accusative  with  habeO  or  dative 
with  sum,  289  and  a. 
Possessive  adjectives,  defined,  34. 
of  first  and  second  persons,  216, 1. 
often  omitted,  35. 
position  of,  34,  a. 
of  third  person,  expressed  by  eius, 
etc.,  216.  1. 


350 


Index 


Possessive  adjectives,  reflexive,  216,  2. 
often  omitted,  35. 
position  of,  34,  a. 
"Possessive  pronouns,"  see  the  three 

lines  above. 
Possibility,  expressed  by  subjunctive, 

368,  VI;  bypossnm,  485. 
possum,  conjugation,  485  [664]. 

with  superlative  and quam,  p.  2^6,  n.3- 
Postpositive,  defined,  p.  53,  n.  1.    ' 
postquam,  narrative  clause  with,  506. 
Potential  subjunctive,  368,  VI,  and  n.  2. 
potior,  ablative  with,  334. 
prae,  why  takes  ablative,  301. 
Predicate,  defined,  22. 
predicate  adjective,  agreement,  25, 2. 
generally   stands    next    to     verb, 
p.  19,  n.  1. 
predicate  noun,  agreement,   26,  a; 
generally   stands     next    to    verb, 
p.  19,  n.  1. 
predicate  accusative,  330. 

becomes  subject  in  passive,  330,  a. 
predicate  nominative,  26- 
"predicate  dative,"  p.  169,  n.  1. 
Prepositions,  defined,  73. 
not  existing  in  oldest  stage  of  lan- 
guage, p.  201,  n.  2. 
originally  adverbs,  p.  154,  n.  1. 
gain  figurative  meanings,  p.  122,  n.  1. 
position  of,  p.  27,  n.  1. 
prepositions  with  ablative,  78. 
prepositions  with  accusative,  78. 
list,  with  cases  [592], 
Present    active    participle,   declined, 

300  [632]. 
Present  perfect,  221, 1. 
Present  imperative,  449. 
Present  participle  in  English,  frequent 

inexactness  of,  p.  225,  n.  1. 
Present  point  of  view,  379,  380. 
Present  subjunctive,  mood  signs, 339, a. 

as  future,  380,  497,  ft,  p.  234,  n.  2. 
Present  tense  of  indicative,  meaning, 

59. 
"Primary  tenses,"  =  tenses  of  the  pres- 
ent or  future,  475-77  [610]. 
Principal  parts  of  verbs,  228. 
"Principal  tenses,"  see  primary  tenses. 
Principles,  two,  in  the  growth  of  lan- 
guage, 391. 


priiLsquam,  mood  with,  see  antequam. 
pro,  why  takes  ablative,  301. 

development  of  meanings,  304,  458, 
556. 
Prohibitions,  subjunctive,  347- 
expressed    by    noli    with    infinitive, 
p.  195,  n.  3. 
Pronominal  adjectives,  129. 

declension,  129, 130. 
Pronominal  endings,  129. 
Pronouns,  defined,  32. 
determinative,   porsonal,    etc.      See 

under  these  words, 
used  as  substantives,  146  and  a. 
Pronunciation,  I-XI. 

general  directions  for,  7. 
Proper  nouns,  defined,  30. 
puer,  declension,  111  [616]. 
pulvis,  declension,  265  [620]. 
Purpose,  expressed  by : 
ad  with  gerundive  or  gerund,  p.  123, 

n.4. 
causa   or   gratia    with    genitive   of 
gerundive  or  gerund,  p.  220,  n.  1. 
dative,  428. 

future   passive  participle  in  agree- 
ment with  object,   p.    216,  n.  3, 
p.  229,  n.  1. 
qui,  quo,  tit,  or  ne,  with  subjunctive, 
351. 
these  distinguished,  351,  p.  139,  n.  7. 
supine,  453, 1. 
never  by  infinitive  in  prose,  p.  139,  n. 

8,  p.  229,  n.  1. 
table  of  summary,  p.  229,  n.  1. 

Quality,  dative  after  words  of,  67. 
"Quality,"  genitive  and  ablative  of,  see 
descriptive  genitive  and  descrip- 
tive ablative, 
quam,  with  comparatives,  457. 

with  superlatives,  p.  236,  n.  3. 
quamquam,  with  indicative,  example, 

268, 1. 
quando,  in  clauses  of  reason,  517. 
Quantity  of  vowels,  VII. 

of  syllables,  IX. 

in  combinations  of  words,  X. 
Quantity,  position  of  words  of,  133< 
-que,  enclitic,  134. 
-que,  indefinite  particle,  p.  71,  n.  1. 


Index 


351 


Questions : 
indicative,  of  fact,  59  [597]. 

indirect  of  fact,  see  suhjunctive, 
subjunctive: 
of  deliberation,  349,  354. 
of  obligation  or  propriety,  368,  IV. 
of  possibility,  368,  VI. 
indirect  of  fact,  534. 
qui,  declension,  184  [649]. 

construction,  rule  for,  189. 
gwt-clauses : 
causal  or  adversative,  479. 
descriptive,  421, 1,  422,  c. 
determinative,  426. 
of  purpose,  351. 
see  also  relative  clause, 
quia,   in  clauses   of  cause  or  reason, 

517. 
gwicwngwe,  declension,  192  [649,  a]. 
quid;  substantive  form  in  compounds, 

see  quod: 
quldam,  declension,  193  [650]. 
quTn,  origin  and  meaning,  p.  1.36,  n.  3. 
in  volitive  clauses,  352. 
iu  consecutive  clauses,  421,  2. 
restriction  of  use,  352,  a. 
quis: 
interrogative,  declension,  184  [649]. 
indefinite,  declension,  397,  a  [653]. 
uses  and  position,  397. 
quispianiy    declension,     200,    c,     565 

[652,  a]. 
quisquam,  declension,  199  [651]. 

when  used,  199.  b. 
gMJsgwe,  declension,  200  [652]. 
quoad,  moods  with,  see  dum. 
quod,  relative  pronoun  or  conjunction 

(danger),  p.  224,  n.  9. 
quod-  and  quid-,  respectively  adjective 
and  substantive  forms  in  all  com- 
pounds of   quis    and   qui,  p.  71, 
n.  2. 
guod -clause: 
of  cause  or  reason,  517. 
of  respect,  444,  a. 
substantive,  of  fact,  444.  . 
quOminus,  in  volitive  clauses,  352  (2). 

origin  and  meaning,  p.  136,  n.  2. 
quoniam,  it.  clauses  of  reason,  517. 
Quoted  reason,    subjunctive    of,    see 
indirect  discourse. 


"Rather,"  expressed  by  comparative, 

.  540. 
Reason,  see  cause. 

Reference  or  concern,  dative  of,  260. 
Reflexive  possessive  adjectives,  216,  2. 
often  omitted,  35. 
I)osition  of,  34,  a. 
Reflexive  pronouns,  defined,  213,  2. 
declined,  215. 

distinguished  from   ipse,   intensive, 
"  compare  215  and  139. 
Reflexive  verbs,  311. 
Relation,  dative  after  words  express- 
ing, 67. 
Relations  of  time,  generally  expressed 

exactly  in  Latin,  161. 
Relative  clause,  defined,  187,  3. 
relative  clause  leading,  p.  228,  n.  4. 
forward-moving  relative  clause  (real- 
ly independent),  p.  171,  n.  1. 
Relative  pronoun,  defined,  187, 1. 
its  antecedent,  187,2, 
gender,  number,  case,  189. 
in  clauses  of  purpose,  cause,  or  oppo- 
sition, see  these  words, 
see  also  qui. 
Relative  tenses : 
of  indicative  and  subjunctive  [608,  1, 

610]. 
all  tenses  of  infinitive  and  particip'e, 
462  [603J. 
Request  or  entreaty,  expressed : 
by  imperative,  137. 
by  subjunctive,  p.  207,  n.  2,  p.  226,  n.  7. 
res,  declension,  395  [625]. 
Respect,  ablative  of,  442. 

ablative  supine  of,  453,  2. 
Result,  expressed  by : 
dative,  428. 

ut,  ut  non,  quin,  with  subjunctive, 
421, 1-3. 
rex,  declension,  256  [617]. 
Rise  of  new  meanings  in  constructions, 

391, 1,  2,  and  n.  1. 
ro-stems  in  nouns,  explained,  111, 
ro-  and  ra-stems  in  adjs.,  Ill,  117,  b. 
robur,  declension,  257  [618]. 
Roman  pronunciation,  I-XI. 
"  Rule,"  meaning  of  word,  p.  8,  n.  1. 
rus,    rure,   ruri,    in   constructions    of 
place,  409, 1,  a,  2,  a,  3,  a. 


352 


Index 


s-stems,  265,  a. 
se,  declension,  215  [654]. 
Second  conjugation,  in  full  [657]. 
Second  declension : 
of  nouns  in  general,  107,  111  [615, 
616] ;   of  nouns  in  -ius  and  -mm, 
112,1,2. 
genders  in,  106. 
of  adjectives,  117  [627,  628]. 
"Secondary    tenses,"  =  tenses   of   the 

past,  475-477  [610]. 
Semi-deponent  verbs,  417. 
Separation,  ablative  wit  h  verbs  of,  519. 
Separative  ablative,  72, 1. 
"Sequence  of  tenses,"  476,  477  [611, 

612]. 
sequor,  conjugation  [662]. 
sernio^  declension,  264  [619]. 
serva,  declension,  86  [614]. 
"Service,"  see  dative  of  tendency, 
senius,  declension,  107  [615]. 
Short  vowels,  see  vowels, 
simul   atque,   narrative   clause    with, 

506. 
Situation  in  past,  expressed  by : 
imperfect  or  past  perfect  indicative, 

144,  6,  247,  b, 
ci*»i-clause,  imperfect  or  past  perfect 

subjunctive,  487,  488. 
participle,  p.  226,  n.  6. 
ablative   absolute,    307,  o,    308,  a, 
p.  233,  n.  1. 
Sociative  ablative,  defined,  72,  2. 
solus,  declension,  129  [642]. 
Sounds,  the  Latin,  III-V,  VII  and  a,  b. 
Space,  accusative  of  extent  of,  434. 
Space  relation  (not  separative,  soci- 
ative, or  locative),  expressed  by 
preposition  with  accusative,  78. 
Specification,  see  respect. 
State  of  affairs,  =  situation,  which  see. 
Stem,  defined,  85,  a. 
sub,   of   motion   with    accusative,    of 

rest  with  ablative,  467. 
Subject,  defined,  22. 
of  finite  verb,  in  nominative,  24. 
of  historical   infinitive,  in  nomina- 
tive, 515. 
of   other   infinitives,  in  accusative, 

465,  533,  542. 
when  omitted,  465,  a. 


Subjunctive,     formation     and    tense 
meanings,  see  tense  desired. , 

used  to  express : 

adversative  idea  (opposition)  with 
qui,  479 ;  with  cum,  488,  489. 

anticipation,  with  words  meaning 
"before" or  "until,"  356. 

in  past  future  clauses  in  general, 
382. 

cause  or  reason,  with  qui,  479 ;  with 
cum,  488,  489. 

close  connection  with  subjunctive  or 
infinitive  clause(attraction),  545. 

commands  or  prohibitions,  347. 

conditions  and  conclusions :  less  vivid 
future,  498,  2;  contrary  to  fact, 
524. 

deliberation,  349,  354,  p.  139,  n.  9. 

description,  in  gitl-clauses,  421,  1, 
422,  c;  in  cifcm-clauses,  487,  488. 

exhortation,  347  and  n.  1. 

fear  or  anxiety,  353. 

indirectness  (clauses  in  indirect  dis- 
course), 533,  534. 

natural  likelihood,  368,  V. 

obligation  or  propriety,  368,  IV. 

possibility,  368,  VI. 

purpose,  with  qui,  quo,  ut,  or  ne,  351, 
p.  139,  ns.  7,  8. 
choice  among  these,  351,  p.  139,  n.  7. 

request  or  entreaty,  p.  207,  n.  2. 

result,  with  ut,  ut  non,  quTn,  421,  2. 

situation,  in  c?<m-clauses,  487,  488. 

substantive  idea,  as  follows  : 
volitive,  after  verbs  of  will  or  en- 
deavor,, with  ut  or  ne,  352  (1) ; 
after  verbs  of  hindrance,  preven- 
tion, or  check,  with  ne,  quominus, 
or  quin,  352  (2). 
optative,    after  verbs  or  wishing, 

with  ut  or  ne,  example,  375,  4. 
consecutive,  after  verbs  of  bringing 
about  or  existence,  with  ut   or 
ut  non,  421,  3. 

will,  343,  368,  I. 

wish,  368,111. 
with  utlnam,  365,  a. 

summary  of  uses  of  subjunctive  [596]. 
Substantives,  defined,  146. 

adjectives  as  substantives,  146,  b. 

pronouns  as  substantives,  146  and  d. 


Index 


353 


Substantive   clauses,    defined,  353,  a, 
443,  6. 
of  fact,  in  consecutive  clauses,  421,  3. 
of  request  or  entreaty,  p.  207,  n.  2, 

p.  231,  n.  4. 
of  result,  see  of  fact. 
gwod-clause  of  fact,  444. 
volitive,  after  verbs : 
of  will  or  endeavor,  352  (1). 
of  hindering,  352  (2) . 
of  fear  or  anxiety,  353. 
optative  (of  wish),  after    verbs    of 
wishing,  example,  p.  146,  n.  3. 
sui,  sibi^  se,  declension,  215  [654 J. 
sum,  conjugation  in  full  [655]. 
Summaries  given  in  various  places  for : 
agreement  [585]. 

conditions  and  conclusions  [598-601]. 
cwm-clauses,  indicative,  possibilities 

of,  p.  227,  n.  1. 
cum-clauses,   subjunctive,   possibili- 
ties of,  p.  224,  n.  5. 
dnm,  donee,  and  quoad,  moods  with, 
552,  2;  also  (applies  to  all  three 
words),  p.  207,  ns.  6,  7. 
expression  of  purpose,  p.  229,  n.  1. 
of   result,    with   ut,    ut   non,    quln, 

421,  2. 
five  ways  of  introducing  main  verb, 

p.  233,  n.  1. 
situation  in  past,  see  situation. 
see  also  tables. 
uses  of  cases  [585-594]. 
of  imperative  [595]. 
of  indicative  [597]. 
of  infinitive  [602]. 
of  subjunctive  [596J. 
of  tenses,  general  [606-612]. 
in  historical  writing,  p.  222,  n.  2. 
Superlative  degree,  defined,  p.  Ill,  n.  1. 
meaning  "  very,"  p.  130,  n.  3,  540. 
with  quam,  "  as  .  .   .as  possible," 
p.  236,  n.  3. 
Supine,  formation,  451 ;  uses,  453. 
Suspense,  effect  of,  50,  a. 
suus,    distinguished    from    eius,    etc., 
compare  216, 1,  2. 
omission  of,  35. 
Syllables,  division  of,  VI. 

quantity  of,  IX. 
Synopsis  of  regular  verbs  [661J. 


Tables  of: 

conditions  and  conclusions,  525. 

indirect  discourse,  534- 

natural  harmony  of  tenses,  477. 

tenses,  classification  [610]. 
tego,  conjugation  in  full  [658]. 
"Temporal  clauses,"  see  cum,  ubi,  etc. 
Tendency,  dative  of,  428. 
Tense,  defined,  59,  b. 

of  indicative,    subjunctive,  impera- 
tive, see  preseji^,  etc.  [C07-12]. 

of  infinitive  462  [606]. 

of  participle  462  [606]. 

picturesque  uses  of   tenses,   504,  a. 
[612,6]. 

point  of  view  in  tenses,  475,  1,  2. 

"sequence  of,"  see  natural  harmony. 

summary  of  tense-uses  [607-12]. 

tables  of  indicative  and  subjunctive 
tenses,  477  [610]. 
Terminations,  see  endings. 
"Than,"  English,  how  expressed,  457. 
Third  conjugation : 

in  -o,  170,  171,  b. 

in  -to,  178,  2. 

conjugation  in  full  [658,  659]. 
Third  declension  adjectives: 

consonant  stems,  286. 

i-stems,  293. 

helps  in  distinguishing,  320,  1,  2. 
Third  declension  nouns : 

genders,  324, 1-3. 

consonant  stems,  256,  264,  265. 
remarks,  258. 

i-stems,  270 ;  notes,  272. 
exceptional  t-stems,  278  [623]. 

helps  in  distinguishing  stems,  321-3. 

mixed  stems,  271  [622] ;  notes,  272. 

points  of  difficulty,  318-23. 
Third  declension  participles,  300,  320 

and  3  [632]. 
Time  at  or  within  which,  ablative  of, 
399 ;      occasional      prepositions 
with,  399,  a,b. 

duration  of  time,  accusative,  434. 
Time,  three  divisions  of,  251  [610]. 
"Too,"    expressed     by    comparative, 

p.  187,  n.  4,  540. 
totus,  declension,  130  [643]. 
Towns,  place  constructions  with  names 
of,  409, 1, 2,  3. 


354 


Index 


Transitive  verb,  defined,  61. 

^res,  declension  (regular) ,  345. 

^u,  personal  pronoun,  decl.,  214  [654]. 

when  expressed  as  subject,  159. 
tul^  tihi^  tCy  reflexive,  decl.,  215  [654]. 
iurris,  declension,  278  [623]. 
tuus^  distinguished  from  vester,  216, 1. 

often  omitted,  35. 
"Two  accusatives,"  330. 
"Two  datives,"  p.  169,  n.  1. 

It,  pronunciation  with  g,  gr,  and  s,  V. 
w6i,  ut,  postquam,  simul  atque,  with  in- 
dicative, 506. 

interchangeable     with    subjunctive 
cwm-clause,  506,  a. 
ullus,  declension,  129  [642]. 

when  used,  199,  b. 
unus,  declension,  129  [642]. 
"Until,"     summary     of     ideas     with 

words  meaning,  p.  218,  n.  2. 
ut,  "as,"  with  indicative,  p.  138,  n.  1. 

in  clauses  of  fear,  353. 

in  clauses  of  purpose,  351. 

in  clauses  of  result,  421,  2. 

in  optative  substantive  clauses,  ex- 
ample, 375,  4. 

in  substantive  clauses  of  fact,  421,3. 

in  volitive  substantive  clauses,  352. 

formal  it^,  p.  136,  ns.  1,  5. 

meaning  "as"  ("just  as"),  with  in- 
dicative, p.  138,  n.  1. 
uter,  declension,  130  [643]. 
uterque,  declension,  316, 
utinam^  wishing  particle,  365,  a. 
iitor,  ablative,  with  334. 


semi-deponent,  defined,  417. 
transitive,  defined,  61. 
verbs  meaning  "believe,  favor,"  etc., 
with  dative,  67. 
vereor^  conjugation  [662], 
vero,  often  merely  emphasizes,  p.  238. 

n.  2. 
"  Very,"  expressed  by  superlative,  540. 
vescor,  ablative  with,  334. 
vestei',  distinguished  from  tuus,  216,  1. 
vestrum,  -tri^  distinguished,  214,  a. 
veto,  takes  infinitive,  543,  a. 
vetus,  declension,  286  [629]. 
victor^  declension,  257  [618]. 
"Villain,"  history  of  meanings,  used 

for  illustration,  p.  154,  n.  1. 
wr,  declension.  111  [616]. 
VIS,  declension,  326  [626]. 
Vocative,  regular  formation,  107,  a. 
of  nouns  in  -ius  or  -mm,  112, 1,  2. 
used  in  address,  45. 
Voice,  defined,  122. 
Volitive  subjunctive,  defined,  343,  a,  h ; 
translation,  343,  d. 
close  to  imperative  in  meaning,  343,  c. 
negative  with,  344,  352. 
for   other    points,    see   subjunctive, 
and  substantive  clauses, 
void,  conjugation,  493  [665]. 
Vowels,  pronunciation,  III. 
quantity,  VII. 
long  before  ns,  nf,  nx,  net,  VIII,  1. 
shoit  before   another  vowel  or  h, 

VIII,  2,  100, 1. 
shortened    before  certain  conson- 
ants, VIII,  3,  100,  2. 


V  sometimes  lost  in  perfect  stems  in 

-avl,  -evT,  -ivi,  561,  4. 
vel,  force  of,  195. 
Verb,  defined,  14. 
agreement,  compare  60,  88,  94. 
conjugation,    see  first   conjugation, 

second  conjugation,  etc. 
deponent,  defined,  313. 
imi)ersonal,  defined,  400,  a,  401. 
intransitive,  defined,  63  and  a. 
irregular,  see  verb  desired, 
periphrastic  future  active,  233,  2,  b 

[663];  passive,  280,  a  [663]. 
principal  parts  of,  see  principal  parts. 


Way  or  manner,  ablative  of,  513. 
Ways,  five,  of  introducing  main  verb, 

p.  233,  n.  1. 
Whole,  expressed  by  genitive,  202. 
by  de  or  ex  with  ablative,  202,  b. 
Wish,  expressed  by  subjunctive,  368, 
III ;  with  utinam,  365,  a. 

x-]-y,  formula  for  growth  of  mean- 
ings in  words  and  constructions, 
391, 1. 

"Yes"  and  "no"  questions,  173, 1-4. 
answers  to,  174, 1,  2. 


THIS  BOOK  IS  DUE  ON  TBV  r  Z'^''^-- 

OVERDUE.  *'°°    ON    THE    sX^     '^°"''TH 

^===___I__^_^  otVENTH     DAY 


^^  21-50^.1-3,' 


YB  00366 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  UBRARY 


